Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Permit 6271 - Homewood Suites - Building E
TYPE OF CONST.: v -1 hr . UBC EDITION (year) 1988 SETBACKS: N - S - — E- UTILITY PERMITS REQUIRED? C) Yes 0 No W- (through Public Works) FIRE PROTECTION: ®Sprinklers [) Detectors 0 N/A ZONING: C - Pacific Sacon Constructors Inc. ADDRESS BAR /LAND USE CONDITIONS? Yes 0 No CONDITIONS (other than those noted on or attached to permit/plans) ZIP 10 - 03 - 91 WA. ST. CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE # PACiFSC101PC ARCHITECT Dimitri Demopolus PHONE 713- 783 -0055 i 7277 Regency Square Boulevard, Suite 100, Houston, TX PROPERTY OWNER Dimension Development Co., Inc. (PHONE 318 - 352 -8238 ADDRESS 200 Front Street, Natchitoches, LA ( PHONE l IZIP 71457 714- 661 -1020 CONTRACTOR Pacific Sacon Constructors Inc. ADDRESS 27442 Calle Arroyo, San Juan Capistrano, CA EXP. DATE ZIP 10 - 03 - 91 WA. ST. CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE # PACiFSC101PC ARCHITECT Dimitri Demopolus PHONE 713- 783 -0055 ADDRESS 7277 Regency Square Boulevard, Suite 100, Houston, TX ZIP 77036 CITY OF TUKWILA Dept. of Community Development - Building Division 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Tukwila WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 BUILDING PERMIT NO. DATE ISSUED: SIT USE SIGNATURE: ({) 11 10- I I -c In 6955 Southcenter B1 BUILDIICG PERMIT (POST WITH INSPECTION CARD AND PLANS IN A CONSPICUOUS LOCATION) C BUILDING PERMIT FEE . 2,054.00 1,335.00 BUILDING SURCHARGE • OTHER• PLAN CHECK FEE•::•.: E# Construct 16 unit guest suite building. TOTAL: 3,393.50:: 0 CO` DATE: 0 l/ --n1 apt+ 6826 3 -20 -90 504,938.00 I PLAN CHECK NO.: 90 -138 1 PROJECT NAME/TENANT Homewood Suites #E 295490-0460-06 ACCOUNT # 295490 - 0460 -06 TYPE OF U New Building U Addition L.J Tenant Improvement (commercial) (J Demolition (building) (__) Grading/Fill WORK: 0 Rack Storage 0 Reroof 0 Remodel (residential) 0 Other: DESCRIBE WORK TO BE DONE: c'Out c'OI'lPi inric'i SQUARE FEET TOTAL OCC. LOAD SQUARE FEET OCC. LOAD SQUARE FEET OCC. LOAD SQUARE OCC. FEET LOAD SQUARE FEET OCC, LOAD TOTAL TOTAL SQUARE FEET OCC. LOAD APPROVED ISSUANCE BY: A' BUILDING OFFICIAL DATE: Q _ I hereby certify that I have read and exa l ed this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of lav and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction or t e performance of work. I am authorized to sign for and obtain this building permit. PRINT NAME: / //��:- COMPANY' jy8)Z},y� p f j(/j' This permit shall become null and void If the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or If the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. CERTIFICATE OF Q DATE ISSUED: OCCUPANCY NO. (a - 0 {o PERMIT NO. - CONTACTED -Torn DATE READY DATE NOTIFIED �j `- ld BY: qQ (init.) --Q�LL PERMIT EXPIRES 2nd NOTIFICATION BY: (init.) AMOUNT OWING �� 3RD NOTIFICATION B : ) PLAN CHECK NUMBER 90 i� INSTRUCTIONS TO STAFF • Contacts with applicants or requests for information should be summarized in writing by staff so that any time the status of the project may be ascertained. • Plan corrections shall be completed and approved prior to sending on to the next department. • Any conditions or requirements for the permit shall be noted on the plans or summarized concisely in the form of a formal letter or memo, which will be attached to the permit. • Please fill out your section of the tracking chart completely. Where information requested is not applicable, so note by using "N /A ". BUILDING SQUARE FOOTAGE/OCCUPANCY INFORMATION (to be filled out by Plan Checker) ........................ SQUARE FEET OCC. LOAD SQUARE FEET OCC. LOAD SQUARE FEET OCC. LOAD SQUARE FEET OCC. LOAD SQUARE FEET OCC. LOAD TOTAL SQUARE FEET TOTAL OCCU- PANCY LOAD DEPARTMENTAL REVIEW "X" in box Indicates which departments need to review the project. 0 OTHER BUILDING - 0 initial review g FIRE 7 - - PLANNING iii u4 PUBLIC WORKS NI.BUILDING - final review /0 70 REVIEW COMPLETED 4 {' BUILDING PERMIT APPLICATION TRACKING PROJECT NAME SITE ADDRESS jROUTED) INIT: ZONING: c - 0.._, 'BAR/LAND USE CONDITIONS? REFERENCE FILE NOS.: &?- (2 -Nz. /8 6 - $M P INIT: Vu.. MINIMUM SETBACKS: N- S- E- W- b a UTILITY PERMITS REQUIRED? Yes fl No INIT: INIT: INIT h OVYQJ DOd u fi SUITE NO. (09 5,5 5ou ate r 13) *E. LTANT: FIRE PROTECTION: ( 1 Spr(nklars [ 4 Detectors 1 1N /A FIRE DEPT. LETTER DATED: ,P I - ` INSPECTOR: 7 ti PUBLIC WORKS LETTER DATED: s O ....................:.... Date Sent - Q3-90 Date Approved DITION (year): 17643 • Yes [) No SITE ADDRESS SUITE # E., c-I errt—i' (9 ? tfthc-P rrver (3 VALUE OF CONSTRUCTION - $ — I 50 % .cam ASSESSOR ACCOUNT # 295490 - 0460 -06 PROJECT NAME/TENANT HOMEWOOD SUITES HOTEL TYPE OF CA New Building Li Addition U Tenant Improvement (commercial) • Demolition (building) WORK: 0 Rack Stora•e 0 Reroof 0 Remodel residenti.I • •ther __ DESCRIBE WORK TO BE DONE: ons ruc ion o a 4 uni 1 - • - • • • • • - of between 1 & 3 stories in height, surface parking, an in- ground pool & whirlpool, sport Court & Pedestrian Pathway BUILDING USE (office, warehouse, etc.) Building D -8 : 16 unit Guest Suite Building NATURE OF BUSINESS: Hotel WILL THERE BE A CHANGE IN USE? CTROT3 Yes IF YES, EXPLAIN: SQUARE FOOTAGE - Building: 9927 S.F. Tenant Space: Area of Construction: WILL THERE BE STORAGE OR USE OF FLAMMABLE, COMBUSTIBLE OR HAZARDOUS MATERIALS IN THE BUILDING? 0 No 0 Yes IF YES, EXPLAIN: PROPERTY OWNER ■ ttac men PHONE ADDRESS ZI P CONTRACTOR To be determined prior to permit issuance PHONE ADDRESS ZIP WA. ST. CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE # EXP. DATE ARCHITECT Dimi tri Demopol us PHONE 713/783 -0055 ADDRESS 7277 REgency Sq. Blvd, Suite iuu Houston TX ZIP 77036 I:: HERESY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ. AND. EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO l3E TRUE AND COARECT, AND 1 AM AUTHORIZED TO >APPLY:FOR. >THIS: PERMIT. BUILDING OWNER OR AUTHORIZEDXX AGENT SIGNATURE DATE PRINT NAME Touma Engineers PHONE 255 -4100 ADDRESS 15668 W. Valley Hwy. Seattle WA CITY /ZIP 98188 CONTACT PERSON Tom Touma PHONE 255 -4100 1, CITY OF TUKWILA Department of Community Development - Building Division 6200 Southcenter Boulevard, Tukwila WA 98188 (206) 433 -1849 APPLICATION MUST BE FILLED OUT COMPLETELY DATE APPLICATION ACCEPTED DATE APPLICATION EXPIRES FEES (for staff use only) D -8 BUILDINt PERMIT APPLICATION DESCRIPTION BUILDING PERMIT FEE PLAN CHECK FEE BUILDING SURCHARGE ENERGY SURCHARGE OTHER: TOTAL:— .: AMOUNT OrA .00 1� 33.5 cc Li %OD RCPT # 3r3G[3.5c. DATE 3 X0-9 o APPLICATION SUBMITTAL In order to ensure that your application is accepted for plan review, please make sure to fill out the application completely and follow the plan submittal checklist on the reverse side of this form. Handouts are available at the Building counter which provide more detailed information on application and plan submittal requirements. Application and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. VALUATION OF CONSTRUCTIO`! Valuation for new construction and additions are calculated by the Department of Community DAvelopment prior to application submittal. Contact the Permit Coordinator at 133 -1851 prior to submitting application. In all cases, a valuation amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Building Division to comply with current fee schedules. BUILDING OWNER / AUTHORIZED AGENT If the applicant is other than the owner, registered architect/engineer, or contractor licensed by the State of Washington, a notarized letter from the property owner authorizing the agent to submit this permit application and obtain the permit will be required as part of this submittal. EXPIRATION OF PLAN REVIEW Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitations. The building official may extend the time for action by the applicant for a period not exceeding 180 days upon written request by the applicant as defined in Section 304(d) of the Uniform Building Code (current edition). No application shall be extended more than once. If you have any questions about our process or plan submittal requirements, please contact the Department of Community Development Building Division at 433 -1849. COMMERCIAL NEW COMMERCIAL BUILDINGSIADDITIONS * * •• Completed building permit ipplicatiOn (one for each stnrcture):•::::: Assessor:Acoount Numbar• .......................... • :•‘• Two sets (2) of the follow •••••• • -:•' •• .•:•• Structu s culations Sten:Pad :" '••• • . • . . . 4ing sa repon . . . X • • .: • .• .,...... • .... • : Legal doscdpton Woddrigiriraveings,:starnpeci include;•:. • ITO structural drawngs :•••••••■•,;<, Mechanical drawings Elevations : • -• :•• . • ••••:::•• •••••••• . . ...... ...Completed ... utility permit application ............................ Six (6)sets'of civil drawings •..: ..:.• .....::::.::::..:.:.:•.... • NOTE: Sea laity pennit application and checkliif for sped', a:utility submittal requirements. ..; RACK STORAGE :•[:1 Building floor plan shoMng . • ••• Entire Space.Where racewilibeleCe • • : 4. Exit doors 1 Dimensions of all • • . . . . . •,.:. •-••••••••• :••••••••:• flOOr . Tenant pace • and!eng, •.•• ! of • :.:•.• NOTE: ways on pian, by a yiast . c(rack storage°•• n ?.. • ) and "it ral alculations over RESIDENTIAL NEW•SINGLE-FAIAILT .•• • : 0 Completed blinding permit apPlicetien (one fe;cachetruCture):: Legal description • : : • .: • : Assessor Account Number Two Set. :(2) of WOrkinP:Fir*INtii whlch Include •:: . , La ••••• . • • • ••• •::•,.::: plan :••• • " Floor Ploo•••• • Building elevations • Building : cross- secdon • Structural frining plans • Wrishington State Energy Coda data fJ — . .. . • .:.... :•,•..: : "'.:. • .. .. .completed utility permit appllcatlon • '.,•••• • • • . : Six (6) Sets:of site plans Showing • . , • .,:..,:, . • NOTE Building site plan and Utility site plan mity uWfty pennh.application and checklist for specific submittal requirements.. . . „. Adcitional topeentphical and soils information may be required .. un, ue ..:,„ ,..,..., she conditions. „ SiJBMITTAL CHECkLIST REROOFS • • : • Cross secilleni:shOWing wafl Construction and m attachment for floor and cofllng •: • •• . . Structural stamped by:a Washington State licensed • engineer may be required if structural work is to be•done (2 NDTE • .::: .• . . : . • 11 any utility work 11 to be done, submit separate udlity permit, • pplicafion and plans. : •: . . . . , E . Completed building Permit application (ono for each structure) Assessor Account Number • • ' • • ••• Narrative.describlrig existing roof, material being removed, and . material being installed. • .. . • • • NOTE: A certification letter is required prior to final inspection and sign- aft of the permit. ":.:•••••••:' • ....• . •• ••:.:::...',•:::••„••• • .- • • • Completed .building permit application: (ono for each structure) Assessor Account NUrhbor . •• . , :.• Two (2) working draw1ngs which include „ •• •:::.” • Site • ." plan • .:: • •::::: • • : • ' • •: • • :.":. : . •::. • Fl( plpn .. : . :.• Rool plan • : : • ••• : • Building vieyis) : :.:::::::: ••••.: •Building crosi-section ••• •• ••••• :..• .Structural framing plans : • :: . ',": NOTE: if any utility work is to be done provide utility permit application . and plans must pa submitted. . Completed building Pernik appliCition (ono for each svucturo) • ' Assessor Account Number : Narrative describing existing roof, material being removed, and • • • : :materiel being installed. . • • : NOTE: A aartiiicat1an loner Is required prior to final Inspacdon and sIgn oft of the permit. . . '1 HOMEWOOD SUITES HOTEL DEVELOPMENT TUKWILA, WA. 40T 2 LOT 3 ATTACHMENT 1 LEGAL DESCRIPTION OF PROPERTY Lots 2 and 3 of Short Plan No. 88 -1 -SS recorded under King County Recording No. 8807210416,which lots are more fully described by metes and bounds description attached. All thot certain real property in the City of Tukwila, King County, State of Washington, end being more particularly described Cis follows: Commencing at Highway Engineer's Station P. 0. T. t2M3 • 127 + •7S.0 on the 2M line shown on the State Highway map of primary State Hiphwoy 01 tSR 4057 Crean River Interchonge, sheet 2 pF 4 Sheets, established by Commission Resolution 01152, February 15, 1962; thence, northeasterly at right angles to naS.ti 2M line North 30" 27' 06" East, a distance of 284.88 feet; thence tangent to the preceding course along the arc of n curve to the left having a rodius of 300.00 feet and a central Angle of DEP 19' 06 ", on ore length of 43.56 feat; thence tonpent to the preceding curve North 22° 08' 00" East, a distance of 303.43 feet; thence North 133 SS' 57" East, o distance of 50.00 feet, to o point on the northeasterly Line or Southcenter Boulevard as conveyed to the City of Tukwila, by Decd recorded October 29, 1574 under Auditor's File 7410290105; thence North 63 35' 49" East, o distoncc of 293.37 and THE TRUE POINT DF BEGINNING of the parcel to be described hprain; • thence North 63° 35' 49" East, a distoncc of '150.17 feet'; thence" South 26° 24' 11" East, a distance of 370.65 fact; thence South 72 08' 52" West, o distance of 159.95 feet; thence North 2E 24' 11' West, o distance of 354.91 Feat and The TRUE POINT OF BEGINNING: All that certain real property in the City of Tukwila. Xing County, State or Washington, and being more particularly described as Follows; Commencing of Highway Engineier's Station P. 0. T. t2M3 127 + 75.0 on the 2M line shown on the State Highwou mop of primary State Hiphwoy 01 [SR 4053 Green River Interchonge, sheet 2 of 4 sheets, established by Commission Resolution W1152, February 19, 1958; thence, northeaster!% of right tingles to said 2M line North 309 27' 06" East, o distances or 2B4.08 feet; thence tonpent to the preceding course along the ore of a curves to the left having a radius of 300.00 feet and a central angle or 08 19' Ol ", on arc length of 43.56 feet; thence tangent to the preceding curve North 22 08' 00" East, o distance of 309.43 feet; thence North 63° 55' 57" East, c distonce.of 60.00 feet, to a point an the northeasterly line or Southcenter Boulevard ns conveyed to the City of Tukwila, by Deed recorded October 29, 1974 under Auditor's File 7410290105; thence North 63 35' '39" East, o distance of 451.54 feet and THE TRUE POINT OF BEGINNING or the parcel to be described herein; thence North 53 3S' 49" Eost, ' a distoncc or 168.53 feet; thence South 36° 57' 02" East, a distance of 38.26 font; thence South 33 08' 34" East, o distance of 99.5E feet; thence South 34 32' 39" Cost, o distance of 106.77 ' feet~; thence South 3S° 10' 59" Bost, o distance of 102.4B feet; thence South 3:3° 5S' 05" East, a distances of 37.32 Foot; thence South S° 14' 06" Eaet, a distance or 24.29 feet; thence South 47° 32' 3D" West, a distance or 113.48 feet; thence South 72 08' 52" West, o distance of 190.55 feet; thence North 26 24' 21" West, o distance of 378.139 feat and THE TRUE POINT OF BEGINNING: Leon C. Misterick LeSourd & Patten P.S. 2400 Columbia Center Seattle, WA 98104 Phone: 206/624 -1040 Fax: 206/624 -3087 Contact: Mark E. Hansen " HOMEWOOD 'SUITES'HOTEL'DEVEL'OPMENT ATTACHMENT _2 TUKWILA, WA Property'OWner(s): J.D. Fiorito and Vera S. Fiorito, husband and wife; E.J. Ferullo, as and forIi'sseparate estate; and Janice Ferullo Picatti, and as for her separate estate. Owners'' Attorney /Contact: Purchaser /Applicant: Horizon Hotels, a Louisiana General Partnership BY Dimension Development Co., Inc., A Louisiana Corporation, General Partner 200 Front Street Natchitoches, LA 71457. Phone: 318/352 -8238 Fax: .318/352 -5093 H i OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION & TESTING 6747 M. L, King Way South • Seattle, WA 98118 (206) 725.4600 • Tacoma (206) 627.4477 City of Tukwila Building Division 6200 Southcenter Blvd. Tukwila, Washington 98188 Project: Homewood Suites 6925 Southcenter Blvd. Ladies /Gentlemen: We herewith certify that we have completed the following types of inspection and testing on this project. To the best of our knowledge, all work inspected is according to approved plans and specifications. 1. Reinforcing steel 2. Concrete (test cylinders only, in most cases) 3. Anchor bolts 4. Field welding Copies of all reports have been submitted to your office._ fax c: Dimensions Development Very truly yours, PERMIT NUMBERS: 6267 6268 6269 62 70 6271 OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Otto M. Rosenau 2]. April 1992 M�D APP, 231992 QQhnson TEL' r 37 -2949 J. CLARK JOHNS N Consulting Engineer 14181121h Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 4547137 Pc- � E 1•1416 c ue czo ; pLY, SH X1141 c To e.00 P. 1%)/.. L kt4... Gbi 1 s ?E S14 fa(tw+A4 EsC paait.cw1 51.100L LAMA. pet. scat U J 1'P sHEk2wklk Te (BLIP5 416 PeA0 9retrr Oct 3t,91 9:16 No .002 P.02 �-4n F w0 o Si SUi'h S C' hog br p - j Dater i1 /21 Y BY* . C'S• Subjects. .per IiZ SE 3 oval pt-1r. • - 1 ►' , r '. ROOF 7ZiiSS w� 2x•¢ ;A.) r .571419 S e. 2.0a A 1 (Mb "7 10 F TIC- asses TO: A'TTN: FAX #: FROM: RE: MESSAGE: SACON CONSTRUCTORS, INC, GENERAL CONTRACTORS/CONSTRUCTION MANAGERS 6920 South Center Blvd. Tukwila, Washington 98188 (206) 241-6489 FAX (206) 241-6782 FAX TKA1 DATE: - q( TOTAL PAGES: /Nee CdoVEP. iimm•■4••■■••■••■=0111raZil!ittgaMMIllr......■•■•■•.+•■■•■■••■••••• VP.4 a OW 1\??R V3C- DE 01ED qj DEC .-8 en CITY a - TuicvvILA PLANNING DEPT. , 3frjr Johnson ) NOTar Pair /h/FgAreHAVON Nor JM2WN ,atee £7& 'r /4" 4 TEL ,C" yvAl./C IyAY a1ca r 44 G 1 6' 1 0 . c . HG7/�t /1r- -/ ..sci/rmx 7'v e W /1.46, Vc/A e' 7 4/L /2 shwa' - � .p',4 Dec . 0:401 . 14!36 No 003 P.02 A. E3, Jef' , -AvErA e Vll41,L .1Cf 1L�Z� ILP� EL:WA' A /L. /NG 2 — /G' 7t7IN.4 /L EA . TeN-5 r 7E) "-ATE' ATE / 2.4,, NI_ Wf /t' • /N/3/ -1 aMAO VVAL.KVVAY / Ei3F. E'P Z WAY_ 5 L/O ei.[tx./MG' .'VI5T P 19- ,I 1 ProJect_ A n m t .-,._AA " � C p ✓ Type of inspection* -- (-) -.�. (/��C Address i D1 Y j 9 9 .� - ) 1 0, Date Called. � � Special Instructions: Date Wanted: O I L -- Z am. .m, Requester: P1V ( ,_ Phone No.: Z`4j. --- 6 ,w. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 COMMENTS: ' Inspector: c., Date: ^ Z2 `i Approved per applicable codes. ❑ Corrections required prior to approval. ❑ $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Cali to schedule reinspection. t Recept No,: Date: 1 Project; ROMet (50 ' It'• Type of Inspection: ru btic ( t ino.� Address; (Oct 55 5outl�c,ent�r ,fit Date Called; L _a1.4 s0 Special Instructions: Sk1G E Date Wanted: am. p.m. Requester: Phone No.: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 ri Approved per applicable codes. (206) 431 -3670 O Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS' ' l'4 n elu tuir I Inspector. , A /1 j/ Date: , /,_ J �''C� 0 � / f' 2� O $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. I Recept No.: Dale: COMMENTS: ' Dew t- C ; ter$ L /N3Thi -L- £Lisa UI on) 74 P el PE A Poltit I vs Mr-'S C 40 to 1J0 Special Instructions: 1 r 4 'I ` ..► r Date Wanted: m id ' @ p. Requester: &i y Phone No.: r (, c(_g ff ProJeci:lyt I \ o D 5/, '' `�� wV ( V Type of Inspections „' n 1) (/ � Vt 1 V T 4 L Addre ` � r ,r� C " ) z � Date Called: 4- - 1'7 Special Instructions: 1 r 4 'I ` ..► r Date Wanted: m id ' @ p. Requester: &i y Phone No.: r (, c(_g NSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 ❑ Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. Inspector: Reoept No.: (206) 431 -3670 Date: ¢ ❑ $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Dale: Project; Project:, k).tmr1 6()'t S ' Type of Inspection; p l A,nni 5 i Yl d.I Address: f ` �� rx �� V` Date Called: _ L �,J 1 Special Instructions: Q aJsi 43 E__ • Date Wanted: am. p.m. Requester: Phone No.: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 I Inspector: pproved per applicable codes, COMMENTS: ' s Date: e r7 (? 2. ❑ $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, tee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. CaII to schedule reinspection. ❑ Corrections required prior to approval. I Reoepl No.: Dale: 1 ProJecf; ► 6'lLeG1 L �` Alto T )/] a I P1( n a (o r ti . l'.�/irt I/ 15) v Date Ca ed: .� /6 ' 9� Special I A J A� -- Ps( e, I J c' ( / JA I I to A ) Date Wanted • , i t1 ' .m 3 Q r 11! ; Requester: / Q)l / Phone No.: ( 1 R (941- Co INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 COMM 1 Inspector: Date :3 -/ 7 _ 9 z-- 1 Approved per applicable codes. ❑ Corrections required prior to approval. ❑ $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. CaII to schedule reinspection. Reoept No.: Dale: 1 44 .6114 -MI o ns ,,,,_ : ae, imemym Sp: al Instruct ons: Date "anted: Requester: I / �R Phone No,: a ingral, COMMENTS: I Aecept No.: INSPECTION RECORD . Retain a copy with permits` CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Date: (iki 1 PERMIT NO. 206) 431 - 3670 [,Approved per applicable codes. ❑ Corrections required prior to approval. Inspctor: ❑ $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. . 6K Pr. e : / ► ..r1L / .. 7j/: 4..4 * r , Type` t Inspect . , Ill ! . . _ I,. 1 „ : , �_ %. .t, - G _, . Date : _ _ — , - . al nstruct ons: Date anted : Mil Requester: �, TT��,,���T�/11�� `"` Plane No.: INSF ECTION RECORD Retain a copy With permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 O Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: O $30.00 REINSPECTION FED REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, tee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. I Receipt No.: Date: ID INSPECTION RECORD , .. ,Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 COMM NTS.\ I Inspector: Dat - -72, App�i ived per applicable codes. (206) 431 -3670 ❑ Corrections`required prior to approval. ❑ $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED, Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: / 1 A 3. e . A Date Called: ov: ^ G�j q � / ( y Special Instructions: 1 ,A „',.. .. , ...� . Date Wanted p � "( L � ��yy ‘n, .m. — Requester: — q4 Phone No. ID INSPECTION RECORD , .. ,Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 COMM NTS.\ I Inspector: Dat - -72, App�i ived per applicable codes. (206) 431 -3670 ❑ Corrections`required prior to approval. ❑ $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED, Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: Project ' n (/5 ��'1/11l ) - Type q eft i , RAI Addre �Z 5 1 C ' ' j to 1V/((l� date ed: .0 r Pi Special Instructions: Date Wanted: 2 y i � – I 7 q am — Requester: = Phone No,; z-4-1-1 0 „r ge3\ CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION • 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 O Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: el.,, pin 140i: � 4 ' ,b —ze - j � 1 ©4" -, titer S an A-1.f /def 474 z-4, 0 w,.." i✓ 2 ire/ o.94-- 4 . 7 Cam, e $ ,_ Inspector: $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.; Suite 100. Cali to schedule reinspection. Recept No.: Dale: 1 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit Date:2 _ (206) 431 -3670 COMMENTS: /'71.'j4 c i ,cF 71.1.-- ._:;/►+p1 ta- /✓,1,...e 6L.Es,t .S • - 511 -c.. e- SI , • 6.. ;4 1-1Rti. or taaC-7 i , 4 , . ) cl I ' 'F ' / rr l.. f pi i- l5;-,--,,,1 , ...).1., t .:2.1:1" - 3771.L - t - ,./h/r: Nc� AM-4 c. S .1 t-., ' 4....5 41,1► S S t F --/--ti i.- .J ,1.""1 • . -1.,%,i 4-11 t .',5 P ' i I t f'L.9" r ere-- �y` �// r , /6 c✓w /v- ) . ' 7J ` A-g-1 AC, ' 4-z INC; t% 1 1.4 : C; y , I - ` L ' A- 1,-.- �r e a•,L ( t 'NI i ' / ' t) 1 6i.. ► t /, A-t. L- ,J, t: ('r,> (, c EAT' .=SFt C4r1 .dial,., .. C --- Requester: , !) PL1.t v►i 63/ n1( /a(_.clr vi•r��'f' c Ni '2 L -A.ST-- . I'4r!' j.Sr+ 7 r..) n•°1 [... -f .r- y 0.-. r;11-P3 ,4 . I L L r L CS <:::`,(1 317 , - ---•-- T-14 k-:' w cr.:T 1 -tilt F. ct - j`!'t [ i L 007- t.4,0172 ,- - r 1 I •15, �: =r..p 7 . /2. C. t ht w i <C. T1 rs i..) {'t / z ti -6.0, ( r c•. • ro ec : j ■ .�l_,ittll ype o nspe ' n' , r A . te ::g al Instctons: 1 Requester: , !) Phone No.: , w ,., (� ID INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 ❑ Approved per applicable codes, Inspector: Recept No.: Date: r PERM I1 NO (206) 431 -3670 r Corrections required prior to approval, $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Cali to schedule reinspection. • . ILA Type of Ins- , : ./....... ".... • A i 11 Ot /„ . • • ti 0 l • 1,: • ,, 7—) 4 ' --- Sp , • a nstructions: Date Wanted: am, All Requester: ir Phone •.: — / 40 40, it 4. ;;4;14 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Approved per applicable codes. 0 Corrections required prior to approval. o $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to relnspection, fee ust paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. (206) 431-3670 COMMENTS: Rea* No.: Dale: COMMENTS: /h low j-14.- 5A -»•+E= (4 ii�Lerrt . S .5 Cc_ e-C/ ST': E",41 I.-/A-t- C of t&OCi : l a fa• L"_ • A b L.- fa , WI AA LS AI t S�� - 7 - tic:" r 1..,1 ,.': " • vew C Vn t SS ? 114E PLA -TE e R_ . / C — - "ZG (Ai It / e 1b.. t`_YLC G .. M A 4.."'" . AA _ i c t t o R- ( (( nMj&— Al2F rr • "' K . 5) PI. A en 6tri'6 61-nr k...6 v.:7 vv►�1,r"C14 N 1-4 1 t*i I. SOT N tlei L a '1 e'"• 41 C; A-4 ,gyp T _St c p trAIVS 6.-_ 31 - .--- -- ' --„../ r:ST" 1 4/1-t F aF Ti4F• yr l__6_ t v/1 S t4T , 1 t.J sP��5r rz..E1145e c., nr,k.l F-. 2 - tx ∎ ;LEr). Protect: J l a Type of Inspection( Act • / ( (( ( Date Called: a ..... 4 _,.... 1 ,-. , Sp ecJal InstrucTions: ri_ U l ( ' Date Wanted: - r --5 Z-am, p.m. Requester: j 1 �Jd 1 - � 0 Phone No.: : / .. !1 l %triV'is 'uN.51V, TI% lr,gc}`tn'r'r " r fs :s-rr INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit 0. . CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 O Approved per applicable codes. (206) 431 -3670 M Corrections required prior to approval. Inspector: j $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to relnspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Date: r Frw' COMMENTS: fS aLQ6. rd•Ar Mt i WP/A 9 . j=- ,►-- TbF' 6-02sS`r- t r1SP rJ 1 ISr•I fi Na vJ : I) ....1-5 1..i Or k L., i al — P1- `1 14 trol9 cg-bi 1 yn ni iir9 A /LC-AS f-{ -Fik s l 1 Old -- r - Ht - r• 5 A t t' , A vxT f.sirr 1 TJTD - r-b,`.. ?'-tF , o #. .J a i5'I' - N MALI PC; t.,.o cA-1 n1S 5 HO ' 0,) N +NA l.4 D►' v�"k A-1 A w R.t.r.)r A tiC; c.iz mss 1)-3C .. '11 p c.A - r z) A a ct4 611- .Fao vr t∎N TS w� ro v sA 0 1--o e . s) 6r A Ptvom6106 P - a -TubtJ H o ,. t 4.0 is r t//Pr& N dT NA-\L9 Q P F . "Th IS 1 NSpZr -1 -0 1J IS Nt3T f" 1NCLtnSt or tors iT tuaa toLis9 W I nA i11 p /,Sc6V orc 1`N� Aivo VE ►Tt iS 1 A il. t 1-45Pccz ko NJ - is "--€0 t eLED . Proj .0 0 � D (4, Type of InspegLo YGt,W t C Er' Addre((ssv io s ` .. , 4 64 . Date Called: /, " / 3 ,...q./ / Special instructions: (J,. Date Wanted j� / 3 / (� ,r am . m � Requester : / .6m ad ll�� Phone No,: 0. ❑ Approved per applicable codes. INSPECTION ,RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206) 43 -3670 Corrections required prior to approval. I Inspector: J j Date: r 2 - - 9 - [:=30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. CaII to schedule reinspection. I Receipt No,: Date: Pro) rrnP/lyl/ _14 7YPe o td „ S G /) ii. 4' ( e,drnet T Date Caaalllled: / , — q / .,/ Ad vd Sp I Instructions; Date Wanted �, - .� — ' am, p,m, Requester �� „ /l Phone No . jr): INSPECTION RECORD w. Retain copy with Reta a c py perm/t CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 ❑ Approved per applicable codes. i g Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: ' i) ay./ 1-7 44 A Wu.., 4 ir 7 /? • 2 // do y 1 h Ci' i' i- d / -& /CO /(ay� f ' '%or (,4r 1/ ., s s", c , S c L44/14-7 / cc i . /t ❑ $30.00 REINSPECTION F E REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Project: I (� ,� V k1 \ r c� Type of Inspectiogr g""t C�;S Address: Date Called: . f", Special Instructions: Date Wanted: , f /,�,� /�� am Requesteft''/ j Phone N . - -4, :.u::::, • ;r =t INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 :Approved per applicable codes. COMMENTS : Inspector: d r c Ju �.��• -,� Crs (206) 431 -3670 ❑ Corrections required prior to approval. Date: b 27 1 ❑ $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Cali to schedule reinspection. Project: / / - ; , (2 1 . i..ve A e" e S; 4, .:.; yp / Address: (. " /7 Date Called: / 9 / Special Insthictions: Date Wanted: //— // r( Requester: Phone No.: • • • INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 El Approved per applicable codes. o k Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: t' (,4/ 2.-/ C ( e fir aor• e aln e a 0- r e / A-4 4.1 ,:4-te7.404 40' A ,- t5 jr7 s e cl, eti• c_ e e ) 5( $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, tee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. fiece0 No.: De : roe : • ypeo ns•: •n: ..�!it tee_ ress: V . : , Sp: • a nstruct ons: Date anted: - 6 -9 • .m, Requester: f , Phone',: coma yy r w4.4. • �.'.'�0'' f ".SP�a t�,tvr +: gi r �t. n.w t. INSPECTION, RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 0 Approved per applicable codes. I Inspector: I Hecept No Date: j /--—'( X $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Date: (206) 431 70 COMMENTS: ' Re wit e e/.r� ' •y , / rz' c r4 / text-, 1 ef <-40 ee '- C._,. 3o.S'�.�.) Corrections required prior to approval. IV ooz v � Type of inspectl7 — re, ,p Ad Lam -- 5. Date Called: t .,....,,/ 4 �� Special Instructions: 7 - f 0�� Date Wanted; // Requester: n a'' {\ INS RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 ❑ Approved per applicable codes. ❑ Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 1(A4- -k za-5. a k ,-t- 4- ,-rjs— I Inspector: Date: r, J2 ❑ $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. I ttNo.: Date: Project: . ++t.' i.11l�t. .. t • 4 1 I / ,.L .. - of Ins • _ . io 1T . t 4 P i / (,i te l Speda stru Date Wanted: --- I Requester: Phone No.: g / --• 7' () it INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Approved per applicable codes. O Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 6 (.M, wet u- A)-to GE--1 1.1 F-i -s t 1JC is 4. /tea t.k.-o 6 6 C- 1 Lt nspector: • O $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. I Recut No.: Dale: Project iSm O.U)nye Jt,U. Type ofTnspedb J ] �oG Add ss� . � t , I V p Y` C� Date Call = a, -nov- ei 1 Special Instruct ons: Date Wanted: /P r AJ D V r fit am. Requester: Phone No. (f (' ( i 9 • CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Approved per applicable codes. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit ❑ Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: ❑ $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Dale: Project: R. 0111.c) ion 061 Su , t...02. Type of Inspection: F rosain a i, (15vi Address: ) , lot-i 55 5ouvet.enter t3i Date Called: l I — 5 4 1) Special Instructions: Date Wanted: 1 i.... (0 _ GI 1 o t...0.k- p t . Requester: G .c2 ro,la Phone No.: r. Inspect : Recepi No.; pt Approved per applicable codes. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit • CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 El Corrections required prior to approval. Date: o 00.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspectlon. Dale: 4 4 :( : : .■ : , •I • • ro 5 ,. iv, ype o nspe «ion: Addrie7:01 5 5 4 C%h,. , 5) vc9 pate Called: 11 — ' 9 Sp al Instructions: f L. a 4, Alt l Date Wanted: 1 4 ct i 7 "". L Requester: d Phone No,: 2 —" & { (D 9 CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 0 Approved per applicable codes. i n INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit (206) 431 -3670 X Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 7) F420 I .-... rw..r. '7,z, r p-cds.s 1 /iv / v S t e / 4 , 71- 7.- � /u // 7 1— s /A 2-- Inspector: D7 /-- 9-v 1 y43 3 (0 0 ; 00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Cali to schedule reinspection. I Rece01 No.: Dade: Pro PT b i t g 4 a _it Type of Inspect on 1 AI, J Addr ss; Q S S, 0,-b/ . 81va. D ate Called: 11 -1--q1 Sp al G ct Instructions: 4 Ain Date Wanted: 11 q I /�'� Requester: G€ ra Id . Phone No.. 7 / -- / `(K / ;r- ar•n�... -e Y,. Jl .r...nl�•itgy�;..p.spvKr, 0 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 ❑ Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: ICJ . 7;:"S) -A i-g, •'S 4,11 - 2417 5) 'To PP? / 7 S ‘ � 4 ,4 ,3 A Ce % s 0 '2.. I Inspector: //s 14f2-1 9--V I $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 00 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. CaII to schedule reinspection. Recepl No.: Date: ro : 00 i! L / j ±+ ype o five Ion: • rasa: G � ,� o a : ' • 1).." 7 �+ ,` • :Mal nstruct ons: Date Wanted _ OAS Requester: / ' Phone No,: M, .=' r , .y- ...w. - +-r �;rerx'^;z'^r.`;....,� ., a. Z :+''�^ ++.n� x�}�e v A- ;'.;3^.r INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Inspector: Recept No.: Dale: ❑ Approved per applicable codes. g Corrections required- ribr'to appr'oval. COMMENTS: 1 -) /c7 - e A 0.■ - , ems 7,:t5s 6/a s Jee,1,,� zi) `ty f 1 e ✓v.' d1/7L5 /.fir_ M.4 e� Date : 1�- -�,��� ❑ $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. ro ect; / fie,iod '' • �i , ype o nspe M • n; ��� , Address: ‘q2 -5- Cc-LX-e- Date Called: 0- / Special Instructions. ,,... / �( r/1 C g Date Wanted: Requester: Phone No.: 0 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 0 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: \S / b, , -,L /7„ J 10 / 7-7 L I v ( � 7 J ex--7 ,Lcs /`- t I. r r 5 Date /O-'Z.- f I 0 $30.00 REINSPECTION'FgE REQUIRED. Prior to relnspectIon, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. (206) 431-3t70 Project: f U ,1 � 4 � tC �,, p -�, �/1 T UlJ Y Type of Inspection: r;y V ` �/I h 1 Address: to 0 5 n W ,V l , ,/ to Called: (0 . z / �_ ,. 1 `'C Special Instructions: 1 � � �" Date Wanted: �� r, Z '�1 am, ?... m. Requester: //' i d e p PhoneNo.: 4 , / , c g c_Q „ •• . 1 1 • 4D ' INSPECTION RECORD' Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILAiUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 ❑ Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. ,COMMENTS: vSS 3� `1) �c s ip ib,,I /... f j . ti Inspector: mC. U f?t Dale: /a ❑ $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Cali to schedule reinspection. PROJECT: - it (.013 - & , PERMIT NO. ,- l DATE CALLED: 1 e 1 i SITE ADDRESS: vela& L11c).' 5C - c TYPE OF INSPECTION: �`�f �,l KJl3 c� DATE WANTED: R‘-61 I c .m. . SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS: l REQUESTER: PHONE NO.: D Li-{ . -- INSPECTION RESULTS /COMMENTS: a,. WI • - Obit ...5 FO tM17 hLS.tt 44 , re . A.r- C.fir a..atsr v.)Q. 4 INSPECTOR: ( c > , S , (.4-2--- DATE: c : ' / 2 ' ? 1 CITY OF TUKWILA Dept. of Community Development - Building Division Phone: (206) 431 -3670 fik INSPECTION RECORD 6300 Southcenter Boulevard — #100 Tukwila Washington 98188 PROJECT011 , „i., `V",, S 41&"_.....00, PERMIT NO. ,, ,. SITE ADDRESS: ice./ MIM , . DATE CALLED: 9 -" ..5' - 9 „,�� TYPE OF INSPECTION: — g ;co i DATE WANTED' 67, el , A / ,!;m; - SPECI L INSTRUCTIONS: ,Q�C • .04 � � f " 4.4 REQUESTER: } Q J PHONE NO.: Z4/ /-- 6 T t INSPECTION RESULTS /COMMENTS: - .e.e c.,... a---i..._ "34 -.. c1 g 04-. - o - f INSPECTea, ( . ( nATC• 4 i ,- c.P_ 4 , ry . rr, CITY OF TUKWILA Dept. of Community Development - Building Division Phone: (206) 431 -3670 I:FaB�l l :fiiPf ",1yV' •liAAs 5 rf t8i'�V;Rv t SN S ' P:.Y: K. "u°3�7tirl�l!�:'a11#?l�ig3a.S li l`7?i$ r} .. t INSPECTION RECORD v 6300 Southcenter Boulevard — #100 Tukwila Washington 98188 PROJECT: � "9,4 -,-e, L i- , , g p,., Q L, � ,c �'") PERMIT NO. 6, 2.--7 SITE ADDRESS: l„2 ' � - , C 64, Cam- DATE CALLED: TYPE OF INSPECTION: DATE WANTED: 30 ..- SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS: REQUESTER: PHONE NO.: INSPECTION RESULTS /COMMENTS: CAA, 772 ! D d r / UQQ F . , � ./ el /� r I , a' Sri • I/ ••+ AA� ,, / 4(4 1 4&'L3 INSPECTOR: � DATE: c-, ,- 9l CITY OF TUKWILA Dept. of Community Development - Building Division Phone: (206) 431 -3670 ilk «` U:1;1',!. Ian,IA TI dr.••` f:: rs; •4.:3aM,ti.',''vP —. i'12?;Y,i INSPECTION RECORD 6300 Southcenter Boulevard — #100 Tukwila Washington 98188 PROJECT: - - plern1 c- 'S PERMIT NO. (' 2-7 / SITE ADDRESS: .5 C - A vP. DATE CALLED: z TYPE OF INSPECTION: - 31`t.rNSG S DATE WANTED: F- ( 3-- �/ / > SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS: REQUESTER: 6 ---72...,g- PHONE NO.: INSPECTION RESULTS /COMMENTS: ..: • .ati r �al► 1 ...,t G� s. MIL i 1 INSPECTOR: - .1 - -- DATE: 5, (3 -9 ( :!'lr.' T inf',} 36�;y"W,+`•�.�`� +4fr"1rt7ii :' � �''�.:P;`�1» ,r V , e n CITY OF TUKWILA Dept. of Community Development - Building Division Phone: (206) 431 -3670 INSPECTION RECORD f 6300 Southcenter Boulevard — #100 Tukwila Washington 98188 Aar .441111-1-44A, z INSPECTIO RECORD CITY OF TUKWILA Dept. of Community Development - Building Division 6300 Southcenter Boulevar — #100 Phone: (206) 431 -3670 Tukwila Washington 98188 31- -e, -) PERMIT NO. (0 o- / PROJECT: ( m)6 )1 SITE ADDRESS: (99(95 S 1 .0 dik. c_p.x.-l').,6 f L . DATE CALLED: 7 - 1 - ( TYPE OF INSPECTION: (1,.(7ta - Q-00 /y) DATE WANTED: '? _ -- ( xm� SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS: REQUESTER: `'- PHON NO.: 2/ -_-_6 �, INSPECTION RESULTS /COMMENTS: ( c -" 1, 44 : ) ( CO r414...A.0. -. arLA ,, . 4..S a_ , - ssr .1- » ,n.c) , - ,,.i. i -k- o.., -.&l. L e Li c..L._ .k.a 0-..../c () Lc.- - INSPECTOR: G" f ) L ..- ,- 4 ....._- DATE: '7. 1 I - 9 ' I Aar .441111-1-44A, z INSPECTIO RECORD CITY OF TUKWILA Dept. of Community Development - Building Division 6300 Southcenter Boulevar — #100 Phone: (206) 431 -3670 Tukwila Washington 98188 PROJECT: t ii I 6 5 PERMIT NO. t0 0 I SITE ADDRESS: 0 q S 5 i Q A41/I/ I - k—a , ` DATE CALLED: '" "DI I /$0 TYPE OF INSPECTION: DATE WANTED: ' ? — ei ' a'm'' SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS: REQUESTER: eLp/VAL:Q. l '` ,D ' V PHONE NO.: 1 '1 — C94 R INSPECTION RESULTS /COMMENTS: J , n _D d "7\-t ,,d— d.e. ,V , 31 ., - mod , INSPECTOR: - cl-- -P--._ DATE: 7- - ' 7 / t C edl1 talkabtiri:" `re1Ps? ttoiq16'(oint'Eotilti};o a n ^tta aw ax xotsort✓o, v rit uotrpbogn.*WS, itte i4*YA INSPECTIORECORD CITY OF TUKWILA Dept. of Community Development - Building Division 6300 Southcenter Boulevard — #100 Phone: (206 431 -3670 Tukwila Washington 98188 City of Tukwila FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East Tukwila, Washington 98188-7661 (206) 575-4404 TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT FINAL APPROVAL FORM Project Name ///,41,• . Address (9,11 ,(/i/7/ Suite # Retain current inspection schedule Needs shift inspection / without correction notice Approved with correction notice issued Sprinklers: 5 Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Halon: Monitor: (- Pre-Fire: AG/ Permits: 1/.. Authorized Signature Gary L. VanDusen, Mayor Control No. Permit No. z' 2, 7/ — /V Date FINALAPP.FRM T.F.D. Form F.P. 85 OTTO R &SENAU & ASSO IATES, INC. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION & TESTING 6747 M. L. King Way South • Seattle, WA 98118 (206) 725.4600 • Tacoma 627.4477 • Fax (206) 723.2221 PROJECT: Homewood Suites cc: Owner 1— Contractor 1— Architect /Eng. 1- Bldg. Dept. Engineer Batch Plant CONCRETE REPORT JOB NUMBER: 91 -183 REPORT NUMBER: 004 PERMIT NUMBER: 6271 DATE: 11 July 1991 INSPECTOR: D. Spicer, D. Newman J. _Moser, train( inspected placement of '40i cubic yards of 3.72 sack, 2000 psi concrete from Stoneway , in the following areas: • perimeter walls, building C5. Mix Number: 3752 Concrete was placed via pump and it was vibrated internally. Slump range 3"-5". Batch weights per cubic yard: 350 # Type VII cement, 1490 # sand, 1950 # 7/8" agg. 65 # fly ash # 3 oz, • WRA per 100# of cement, oz, per 100# of cement. Cast specimens # 4 A —C at 18 cubic yards with a 4i " slump. Del, ticket # 317313 Cast specimens # at cubic yards with a " slump. Del, ticket # Cast specimens # at cubic yards with a " slump, Del, ticket # Weather: Sunny., 75 Concrete Temperature: 69 CYLINDERS ARRIVED IN LAB AND /OR REMARKS: 7 -12 -91 COMPRESSION TEST RESULTS ON 6" x 12" CYLINDERS (AREA: 28,3 SQ, IN.) DATE DATE AGE IN SPECIMEN ULT, STRENGTH STRENGTH CAST BROKEN DAYS NUMBER WEIGHT IN LOS LBS /SO, IN. 7 -11 -91 7 -18 -91 7 4 —A 29#14 oz. 92,500 3272 7 -11 -91 8-8-91 28 4 —B 29 1/8 oz. 135,000 4775 7 -11 -91 8 -8 -91 28 4 —C 291/8 oz. 132,000 4669 AUG 1 1991 t,l ► ;,. i l.t,,uv1LA • , OTTO , OSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC, P)--/' Jerald Earl Sacon Consutructors, Inc. 6925 Southcenter BL Tukwila, WA 98188 RE: Permits for Homewood Suites Extension Dear Jerald: An extension has been granted for 180 days from June 5th to commence construction on your project. This is the only extension that will be granted for your project, if work is not commenced then it will expire and become null and void and new permits will need to be applied for. If you have any questions about the extension or expiration of your permits please do not hesitate to call. Sincerely, b 171 - 642-‘09f Denise Millar Permit Coordinator City of Tukwila cc: Permit Files Building Official CITY OF TUKWILA 6200 SOUTHCBNTBR BOULEVARD, TUKWIIA, WASHINGTON 9818N 78 4: vizirmeWed gfaiit4 .4Rovvi: 'OP e v � 2� nov90 Q6. 6041.1tGrYt44ditudt ctAi 4 "Eauct dAti deerke,“ 61 -ritt 4 - evi/n4 it _4424 Aeiv,t, afarueaue, ..detfdtx- 6 to at4 2dif.44- Gsuean u 1149 -tGr Odd. ud "6444- sl �e �� ecf '�2o % ev � Y/'"t�o+' 4& '`° �ol .A-e/ MONK N 120(;) 433.18M Gary L. VanTnurn, Mayor November 13, 1990 Dimension Development, Inc. 401 Keyser Avenue Natchitoches, LA 71457 Attention: Subject: References: Gentlemen: Mr. John Davies Proposed Homewood Suites Hotel Southcenter Boulevard Tukwila, Washington Earth Consultants Inc. 1. Geotechnical Engineering Study E -4343, dated: June 20, 1989 2. Geotechnical Engineering Study E- 3007 -2, dated: November 2, 1987 Dimitri Demopulos, Inc. Architects Homewood Suites Hotel Project Plans Earth Consultants Inc. Gnotedink'aI Engineers. Geologists & Pnvironrnenta) Scientists We have prepared this letter to present information regarding the methane barrier recommended in the our referen d dated June 20, 1989. It is our understanding that the recommended methane barrier 1 not to b constructed. A raised floor system with crawl space vents will be used in lieu of the barn r all but one of the structures. Building Al will be slab -on -grade and will have no protection from methane. The barrier was originally recommended as a precaution against methane migration from the old landfill located east of the Homewood Suites site, across the Green River. Review of available documentation indicates that concentrations of up to 33 percent methane gas have been detected in borings at the landfill. Our referenced geotechnical engineering study (GES) dated November 2, 1987, which covered a portion of the Homewood Suites site, reported detection of low concentrations of methane gas (40 to 350 parts per million), which was attributed to decaying organic material. Our most recent GES dated June 20, 1989 did not detect methane gas. King County Board of Health Rules and Regulations Number 8, Part VI, Section 3 requires that all enclosed structures to be built within one thousand (1,000) feet of the nearest property line of an active or former landfill site be protected from potential methane gas migration. The regulation further states that the method for insuring protection of a structure from .methane 1805.136th Place N•E., Suite 101, Bellevue, Washington 98005 222 E. 26th Street, Suite 101, Tacoma, Washington 98411.9998 Bellevue (206) 643.3780 Seattle (206) 464.1584 FAX (206) 746.0860 Tacoma (206) 272.6608 Dimension Development, Inc. November 13, 1990 shall be addressed in a report submitted by a licensed civil engineer to the local building department for approval. The structures of the proposed Homewood Suites Hotel are within the one thousand (1,000) foot limit. Given the above information, and the fact that our recommendations for the methane barrier will not be used, the risk, however slight, associated with the effects of potential methane migration must be accepted by the owner of the property. Should you have any questions, or if we can be of further assistance, please call. Very truly yours, EARTH CONSULTANTS, INC. . 4. Kyle R. Campbell, P.E. Project Epgineer Theodore J. epper, P.E. Project Manager KRC/TJS /sar aa4343.2.L12l cc: Mr. Paul Hansen; Sacon Constructors, Inc. Mr. Dave Larson; City of Tukwila Mr. Jim Ford; Dimension Development E- 4343 -2 Page 2 Mahan &DeS(vo pi CONSULTING ENGINEERS October 8, 1990 Duane Griffin City of Tukwila 6200 Southcenter Blvd. Tukwila, Washington 98188 Regarding: 90 -T -07 (Homewood Suites Hotel) Dear Mr. Griffin, We have received information on the proposed project and have reviewed it for compliance with the structural portions of the 1988 Edition of the Uniform Building Code. We have no additional comments. Enclosed are the drawings, calculations, and project manuals for your use. Sincerely, (.o v. /((( 11 Crystal Kolke CLK:5 Dimitri Demopulos Architects 7277 Regency Square Blvd, Suite Houston, Texas 77036 J..Clark Johnson Engineers 1418 112th Avenue NE Bellevue, WA 98004 1411 Fourth Avenue Bldg. Seattle, Washington 98101 (208) 624.8150 CITY OF TUKWILA 6200 SOUTIICENTER BOULEVARD, TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 Plan Check #90 -138: Homewood Suites #E 6955 Southcenter B1 PIIONE # (206) 433.1800 THE FOLLOWING COMMENTS APPLY TO AND BECOME P F THE APPROVED PLANS UNDER TUKWILA BUILDING PERMIT NUMBER lob 1. No changes will be made to the plans unless approved by the Architect and the Tukwila Building Division. 2. Plumbing permit shall be obtained through the King County Health Department and plumbing will be inspected by that agency, including all gas piping (296 - 4732). 3. Electrical permit shall be obtained through the Washington State Division of Labor and Industries and all electrical work will be inspected by that agency (277- 7272). 4. All mechanical work shall be under separate permit through the City of Tukwila. 5. All permits, inspection records, and approved plans shall be posted at the job site prior to the start of any construction. 6. When special inspection is required either the owner, architect or engineer shall notify the Tukwila Building Division of appointment of the inspection agencies prior to the first building inspection. Copies of all special inspection reports shall be submitted to the Building Division in a timely manner. Reports shall contain address, project name and permit number of the project being inspected. 7. All structural welding to be done by W.A.B.O. certified welder and special inspected (Sec. 306, UBC). 8. Engineereed truss drawings and calculations shall be on site and available to the building inspector for inspection purposes. Documents shall bear the seal and signature of a Washington State Professional Engineer. 9. Any exposed insulations backing material to have Flame Spread Rating of 25 or less, and material shall bear identification showing the fire performance rating thereof. Goy L. Vaul)uscn, Mayor Homewood Suites #E Page 2 10. Subgrade preparation including drainage, excavation, compaction, and fill requirements shall conform strictly with recommendations given in the soils report prior to final inspection (see attached procedure). 11. A statement from the roofing contractor verifying fire retardancy of roof will be required prior to final inspection (see attached procedure). 12. All construction to be done in conformance with approved plans and requirements of the Uniform Building Code (1988 Edition), Uniform Mechanical Code (1988 Edition), Washington State Energy Code (1990 Edition), and Washington State Regulations for Barrier Free Facility (1990 Edition). 13. All food preparation establishments must have King County Health Department sign -off prior to opening or doing any food processing. Arrangements for final Health Department inspection should be made by calling King County Health Department, 296 -4787, at least three working days prior to desire inspection date. On work requiring Health Department approval, it is the contractor's responsibility to have a set of plans approved by that agency on the job site. 14. Notify the City of Tukwila Building Division prior to placing any concrete. This procedure is in addition to any requirements for special inspection. 15. All wood to remain in placed concrete shall be treated wood. 16. All structural masonry shall be special inspected per U.B.C. Section 306 (a) 7. 17. A separate health department approval and mechanical permit is required for pool and spa. 18. Prior to placing concrete for foundations with crawl spaces, architect is to submit details of foundation venting for review and approval. 19. Validity of Permit. The issuance of a permit or approval of plans, specifications and computations shall not be construed to be a permit for , or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of this code or of any other ordinance of the jurisdiction. No permit presuming to give authority or violate or cancel the provisions of this code shall be valid. "X" REQUIRED INSPECTIONS PHONE DATE APPROVED INSPECT. INITIALS DATE(S) CORRECTION NOTICE ISSUED X 1 Footings 431 -3670 2 Foundation 431 -3670 3 Slab and/or Slab Insulation 431 -3670 4 Shear Wall Nailing 431 -3670 5 Roof Sheathing Nailing 431 -3670 6 Masonry Chimney 431 -3670 7 Framing 431 -3670 8 insulation 431 -3670 9 Suspended Ceiling 431 -3670 x 10 Wall Board Fastening 431 -3670 I 11 12 13 X 14 FIRE FINAL Insp: 575 -4407 X 15 PLANNING FINAL 431 -3670 X 16 X PUBLIC WORKS FINAL 431 -3670 17 BUILDING FINAL 431 -3670 (INSPECTOR COMMENT SECTION ON REVERSE) TV OF TUKWILA OTHER AGENCIES: BUILDtNG PERMIT INSPECTION RECORD (Post with Building Permit in conspicuous place) Department of Community Development - Building Division 6200 Southcenter Boulevard, Tukwila WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 SITE ADDRESS: 6955 Southcenter B1 SUITE NO.: BUILDING t71 1 PERMIT NO. 1 DATE ISSUED: 10 PROJECT: Homewood Suites CIE CALL FOR INSPECTIONS AT LEAST 24 HOURS IN ADVANCE INSPECTION PROCEDURES AND REQUIREMENTS All approved plans and permits shall be maintained available on the site in the same location. 1. FOOTING - When survey stakes and forms are set and rebar is tied in place. 2. FOUNDATION - When forms and rebar are in place. 3. SLAB - If structural slab or if underslab insulation is required. 4. SHEARWALL NAILING - Prior to cover. 5. ROOF SHEATHING NAILING - Prior to cover. 6. MASONRY CHIMNEY - Approximately midpoint. 7. FRAMING - After rough -in inspections such as mechanical, plumbing, gas piping, electrical and fire stopping is in place. 8. INSULATION - After framing approval, but before installation of wallboard. Baffles must be installed to keep attic ventilation points clear. 9. SUSPENDED CEILING - Fasten diffusers, lights and seismic bracing. 10. WALL BOARD FASTENING - Prior to taping (see UBC Chap. 47 and Table 47G). 11 12. 13. 14. FINAL FIRE INSPECTION - Contact Fire Department for their requirements. 15. FINAL PLANNING INSPECTION - Contact Planning Department for their requirements. 16. FINAL PUBLIC WORKS INSPECTION - Contact Public Works Department for their requirements. 17. FINAL BUILDING INSPECTION - When all work, corrections, reports and other inspections are complete. Plumbing (including gas piping) — King County Health Department — 296 -4732 Electrical — Washington State Department of Labor and Industries — 277 -7272 A preconstruction meeting with the Building Inspector may be scheduled prior to starting the job by contacting the Department of Community Development, Building Division at 431 -3670. Although not required, a meeting of this type can often eliminate problems, delays and misunderstandings as the project progresses. 0ei17,90 X REQUIRED INSPECTIONS U 1 Footings a 2 `, Foundation 3 Stab and/or Slab nl sulation A4 4 Shear Waft Nailing 5 Roof Sheathing Nailing . 9 8 Masonry Chimney 1 Framing 8 Insulation 8 Suspended Ceiling 10 WaU Board Fastening -- 11 J 12 13 '_, 015 14 FIRE FINAL tnsp: PLANNING FINAL 018 'r, PUBLIC WORKS FINAL. 17 BUILDING FINAL ct 0 it • PLAN CHECK NUMBER q0 -'3s • PROJECT: THE FOLLOW:NB COMMENTS APPLY TO AND OECOMI PART OF TH APPPOVED PLANS TUKWII.A BUILDINf1 PERMIT NUM)) 0 0 10 t1 19 2t 1,e4 No changes will be aide to the plans unless approved Py the 1111VV////����� Architect and the Tukwila Building Division. 0 Plumbing permit shall bo obtained through the King County Health Oeparteent an ptusbing 0111 be Inspected by that agency, including alt gas piping 1291- 4732). Electrical permit shall be obtained through the Washington State Division of Labor and Industries and all electrical pork will be inspected by that agency 1872 - 6363). All aechemicat work shall be under separate perait through the City of Tukwila. V.0 — All waits, inspection records, and approved plans shall be posted at the lob site prior to the start of any construction. Shea special Inspection Is required either the owner, architect er engineer shall notify the Tukwila Building Division of appointment of the inspection agencies prior to the first building inspection. Copies of all special inspection reports shall be submitted to the Building Division in a timely manner. Reports shall contain address, project name and perait number of the project being inspected. A11 structural concrete to be special inspected (Sec. 306, UDC,. All structural welding to be done by W.A.$.0. certified welder and special inspected 15.c. 306, 0001. 411 high- strength bolting to be spacial inspected (Sec. 306, 0OC). Any nom ceiling grid and light fixture installation is required to meet lateral bracing requirements for Seisale lone 3. Partition walls attached to ceiling grid oust be laterally braced id over eight (01 feet In length. 12 Readily accessible access to 4o0 counted equipsmt Is required. Engtneersed truss drawings and calculations shall be on site and available to the building Inspector for Inspection purposes. Oocuaents shall bear the seal and signature of a Washington State Professional Engineer. Any exposed Insulations backing material to hove Rams Spread "`��� Rating of 23 or less, and satirist shell bear identification showing the fire performance rating thereof. Ifiiii Subgrade preparation including drainage, ercavation, compaction. and 1111 requirements shall conlore strictly with recommendations given to the soils report prior to dinal Inspection lees attached procedure.). A statement free the roofing contractor verllying fire retardancy 1VVV/"``��� of roob will be required prior to final Inspection toss attached procedure). llll////J All construction to be dons In conforeence with approved plans and ���� requirements O1 the Uniform building Code (1986 Edition), Uniform Mechanical Cods 11908 Edition), Washinnton Stator Energy Code 11989 Edition), and Washington Stae Regulations for Oarrler Free cllity (1989 Edition). All feed preparation establl.haents dust have King County Health Department sign•off prior to opening or doing any food processing. Arrangements for final Wealth Oep•rtsent Inspection should be mode by calling King County Health Oepartcent, 296 -4707, at least three 'porting days prior to desire inspection date. On port requiring Health Ospertaent approval, it is the contractor's responsibility t0 have a set Of plans approved by that agency on the Job sits. Fire retardant treated wood shall have • flame spread of not over 23. A11 eatorials shall bear Identification shoring the fire Performance rating thereof. Such Identification shall be issued by an approved agency having a service for inspection at the factory. ? Notify the City of Tukwila Building Division prior to plating any �/`� concrete. This procedure is In addition to any reoulreeents for special inspection. All spray applied fireprooling as required by U.B.C. Standard No. 43 -3, shall be special inspected. All rood to recsin In placed concrete shall be treated wood. A11 structural masonry shall be special inspected par U.B.C. Section 306 tat 7. Validity of Oerclt. The issuance Of m perait or approval 00 plans, spsctllcstlons and coaputstlons shall not be construed to be • Welt for , or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of this code or of any other ordinance of the Jurisdiction. No perait presuming to give authority or violate or cancel the provisions of this code shall be valid. Fire Department Review Control Number 90 -138 (513) Re: Homewood Suites E - 6955 Southcenter Blvd. Dear Sir: City g Tukwila FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East Tukwila, Washington 98188 -7661 (206) 575 -4404 August 3, 1990 Gary L. VanDusen, Mayor The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by The Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: 1. The total number of fire extinguishers required for your establishment is calculated at one extinguisher for each 3000 sq. ft. of area. The extinguisher(s) should be of the "All Purpose" (2A, 10 B:C) dry chemical type. Travel distance to any fire extinguisher must be 75' or less. (NFPA 10, 3-1.1) (UFC 10 -1 (3 -1) ) Extinguishers shall be installed on the hangers or in the brackets supplied, mounted in cabinets, or set on shelves (NFPA 10, 1 -6.6), and shall be installed so that the top of the extinguisher is not more than 5 feet above the floor. (NFPA 10, 1-6.6) (UFC 10.301) Extinguishers shall be located so as to be in plain view (if at all possible), or if not in plain view, they shall be identified with a sign stating, "Fire Extinguisher," with an arrow pointing to the unit. (NFPA 10, 1 -6.3) (UFC 10.301) 2. Exit hardware and marking must meet the requirements of Uniform Fire Code Sections 12.104 & 10.402(a). Exit doors shall be openable from the inside without the use of a key or any special knowledge or effort. (UFC 12.104b) Exits shall be illuminated at any time the building is occupied. An emergency system shall automatically Ar City 8r Tukwila FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East Tukwila, Washington 98188 -7661 (206) 575 -4404 Page number 2 provide exit illumination upon failure of the main power supply. (UFC 12 .107(a)(b) ) 3. An approved fire alarm system is required per City Ordinance #1327. An approved automatic sprinkler system may be installed in lieu of a fire alarm system. (Plans must be submitted to the Fire Prevention Bureau for approval prior to installation.) Local UL Central Station supervision is required. (City Ordinance #1327) The fire alarm system plans affixed hereto have been reviewed and accepted as meeting or exceeding minimum requirements of the City of Tukwila Fire Department, Bureau of Fire Prevention, with the following notes: Remote alarm and trouble annunciation indication is required if the control panel is not visible from the main entrance. (NFPA 72A, 2-4.4.1) (UFC 10.301) Key box - When access to or within a structure or an area is unduly difficult because of secured openings or where immediate access is necessary for life- saving or fire - fighting purposes, the Chief may require a key box to be installed in an accessible location. The key box shall be a type approved by the Chief and shall contain keys to gain necessary access as required by the Chief. (UFC 10.209) A satisfactory contract covering the maintenance, operation and efficiency of the system shall be provided by the property owner. The contract shall provide for periodic inspection and tests, for proper maintenance service, and for service following operation of the system and shall be acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. (NFPA 72A, 2 -3) (UFC 10.301) H.V.A.C. units rated at 2,000 cfm require Gary L. VanDusen, Mayor City of Tukwila FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East Tukwila, Washington 98188 -7661 (206) 575-4404 Page number 3 Gary L. VanDusen, Mayor auto - shutdown devices. These devices shall be separately zoned in the alarm panel and local U.L. Central Station supervision is required. 4. Your street address must be conspicuously posted on the building and shall be plainly visible and legible from the street. Numbers shall contrast with their background. (UFC 10.208) Fire hydrants are required as detailed in City Ordinance #729. Every building shall be accessible to Fire Department apparatus by way of access roadways with all- weather driving surface of not less than 20' wide and 13'6" vertical clearance. Access roads in excess of 150' shall be provided with an approved turn - around area. Access shall be within 150' of all portions of the building. (UFC 10.207 as amended) The dyke road on the east side of this property is part of the fire access road system for this complex. Provide a road which meets the requirements of U.F.C. 10.207 and City Ordinance. This road shall be 20' wide and an all- weather surface. The access road shall have fog lines and shall be illuminated. All hydrants and all surface access roads shall be installed and made serviceable prior to and during the time of construction (UFC 10.301) All required occupancy separations, area separation walls, and draft -stop partitions shall be maintained and shall be properly repaired, restored or replaced when damaged, altered, breached, penetrated, removed or improperly installed. (UFC 10.401) An approved hose station requires plans review. (Plans must be submitted to the Fire Marshal for approval prior to installation.) (City Ordinance #1528) City ` Tukwila FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East Tukwila, Washington 98188 -7661 (206) 575 -4404 All interior wall covering materials shall be fire- resistive or shall be treated to be fire- resistive, so as to result in a flame - spread rating as required by UFC Appendix VI -C tables 42A and 42B. A certificate of the flame spread rating is required to be delivered to the Tukwila Fire Department. (UBC 4204) (UFC 10.401) 5. A permit is required for cutting or welding. application is enclosed. (UFC 49.101) Gary L. VanDusen, Mayor Yours truly, The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau cc: T.F.D. file ncd qo- 132. 13LO4 1 53 - V34 - 136 (1 11 Plan Review PROJECT 44.. (.. ' trEs ADDRESS 6,96 --. DATE 4 ... 1 c 90 FLOOR AREA OCCUPANT LOAD 1•••■••■••■•••111.0. CHAPTER 51-10, W.A.C. NOTES: PLAN CHECK NUMBER OS OCCUPANCY GROUP TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION — LOCATION ON PROPERTY BUILDING HT. / NO. STORIES 2- EXITING REQUIREMENTS, ()I Ki 4••■••■■■•■••■■■•■,../.1 tJ CITY OF TUKWILA DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT prepared by: , P1 ANNINn ••••■••■••■••••••■■■••■•■•••■■••■•111 ••■•■••111•1111MMOSO••■•■■■•■••111111••111•14•01101.••••••••■■•••■■■••••■•■ DETAILED REQUIREMENTS OCCUPANCY, R TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION .....o.r■i2Sa■Illx■■••■•■■■•■■■••■••■•■■■•••••■•■•••■•■•••■•■••••■■••••••■•••■••• PART V, CHAPTER 23, U.B.C. WadILAAA I-4LO • W.S.E C. ■■■■■■•••■••■■•■•..m.....■■■•■■•■••••■• DATE PROJECT NAME ADDRESS CONTACT PERSON * *REVISION SUBMITTAL ** q -Ia - 610 i-brho Lccod euth, ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER PERMIT NUMBS PLAN CHECK NUMBS TYPE OF REVISIONS SUBMITTED TO: J2I n/ c CITY OF TUKWILA 6300 SOUTHCENTER BOULEVARD TUKWILA, WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 �' r R as ,°,5S PHONE R (If previously issued) R — P 5 -9° aiNe c c o I 5 qa - 0 1 3 8 SHEET NUMBER(S) "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revisions and date revisions. e d. 4L 00 19 TO: PROM: DATA: SUSJ•CT: 1Mahckri l�e��alvo Q\\■ rA9 '.C?5 rnc\rch Flcto \Qm mood 3u - e_I �-� t3v<<dln s) �5 do ru ) r o\ pPr lam. B. C. 1 ° ! % E a t i on . (10 /T2.MEM0) City of Tukwila 6200 Southcenter Boulevard Tukwila Washington 98188 (206) 433-1800 Gary 1. Vanousen, Mayor MEMORANDUM TO: PROM: OATS: SUILJICT: City of Tukwila 6200 Southcenter Boulevard Tukwila Washington 98188 (208) 433 -1800 Gary L. Vanousen, Mayor MEMORANDUM 1/45112_11‘t.e_ 'ThoTch Imo, Ig90 1 33 i t€5 - Cale's oa v oo i o n of Con6tLuctiorl i bogie d on T5kAkd'InJo \k uo k n boz o_,, Apri 1, is 1 . ofie_1 - i" J u p.e. �l- . hr 5prinkLupd Z. (Kox o,% 4 = 50 .S1io Cp *F" c4 X 41 50. "N = 44Q% oo Lt valuDdion 4 ) ( i ) (0 x 4 50.6 valuation W134 Q I) 11Q la 5o. vmum-ion 4 . it ES (10 /T2.MEMO) So .$(n oolion Akio 9, citgt a X 5p . �(o : 6 ° 4 °` 13 % VQI vod ioI 4.p. I LIa9, ooLl 81d5 Ftr m'i t P loan C h.eL Sur C har3Q., Hornwood 3uikte5 F?€ 3 Saco, 5(67 aoEk5 ftrm* Pion Chet, 5k) r U- o y.., 5■43 Per rni* PI o%n C.hec.K Sur chary.. wed & ID I01, 3vu1 PI o4n Check Sur Chotrje. Q i 9 .50 4a1Lcvt 3,319. oo a, ISM , o0 Lt .5o 5, Lics0.50 1 9 3.5 Uo. obioh 3)154.00 a, 'No ,00 LI .5o 19% • 5o Fes c*.czre oo. o le 01 Pp !�idc'D O 00 • S�'�.' 1 00 • hgo (� u0 t oo nro (\ oG•h 00 • Gob o'ebg UO 4Or OS\ Saab }!uuaad 05' 05 • %b5'h QG• h oo•Q0,) 00• Uo of o\ r7 'CARA) )(Ng d p -a-9A in > vr0u -1kAkra cP)G 8€ b %05 $ poornauao N * * REVISION SUBMITTAL * * DATE ,JuLl 199 SHEET NUMBER(S) 44%47 C "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revisions and date revisions. SUBMITTED TO: A01?? CITY OF TUIKWILA 6300 SOUTHCENTER BOULEVARD TUIKWILA, WA 98188 CIT O TUKWILA J U L 1 1981 PE RMITCENTER PROJECT NAME Pam , A SG, 1'C .S ADDRESS AM 5 .a, C6414)1517.- AL CONTACT PERSON .182/41,C) 64_ PHONE igFIO Z — 6 4 /6 9 ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER ) #')CHUG» /%Ji 64['1- l SuG_Ir�.tr� e2 Z7 424 tha to) PERMIT NUMBER to VI) (v 2 4' 9 (If previously issued) PLAN CHECK NUMBER qa - /3I' q!? 430) CP! 3s, 90 •-/ 3 7 TYPE OF REVISION: DELE771 -16. » 4- feliA 415 b.-1 peItt -) 5 Cb-/ &A) tin Cr4 2, ' , G —S, E- r104/ 4> 44/ L. 114 c i d ISiAl L / 44, M AXON 4,1, rl, *LA LA, Lfdf 41 - -- / 1:.. i- l • • COMPUTED ■Y DATED Earth Con nts Inc. IH471YUU1,•1L.L 1 .....61.y%AI.. \11 1.M1.uY.IV.111N. CHECKED BY • CAT ED .' PROJECT O. 4 ' 3 `" ' 2 SHEET _ OF ti • PROJECT tt A aN � -A Su `� r -C SUBJECT ,4 Q41 „z±, P �tt 2 3 3 0 7 , ,1 ,0 20 2t 22 23 24 26 20 27 29 30 32 33 34 96 30 37 36 20 4p 41 42 43 44 •a 2212 G.e. ; S r''v Crw &$'T ,,.. . '1 E. ^RlJt RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA P, D ►M E - M.5 , l iNa QM tttrv•1 - ATTN: r�Q, zip r -vA..d ,III! 1 )by PERMIT CENTER 11." La* PB cG�l.. , PP-0 at-x 4,, j E'c..x Z'v N= L d q, 61 t,J Ttf)rr T" E~ MoS7' D r Ti't'e 40 Or N 1.3 4 J� /� A � N C. Hfr E Fig- M a S L ,- o N 7 6A-06 F c-oo 4- 5.6044 '" I'b Per �S'E0 �..L) 3 /2- S �'e Po . b s ON "D t-ts: C 'JO L110 tJ- D a K.�" E1) J h► CLIP— P ""'Pe itT , 1 T' t s w A.. o tsiwrsi tit -�� h�j- it-AT a-0 b V 1 �. d 1 M.,S Do Nj oT N r-- � 5 ti? N D / N 1' �+�'I N s f 1 J 1 0 0 1 w NPO r s $ L...‘500 h ' A'Y FAY"- &u 1 t- Oc r1/4eva-N A ►1 N 1 mu tin. p P . 44 oRs'T'/rk, C F- kr �.. PT Qhv ) Ana goN a i,v+.s w ∎ 1 4 $ L- Are. • 1 4e 4 /44.4 tika o 4S • NJO"rc P Q,4N h+s p4 z P..�--z'. v. -.rte Pei 0. F F' 00.A,.104S Po v ri1 P,t' -► tit LA.Ng*• My S7-- e,d Oa-Dow D pesert•xS, t]ca•.vNdPo.r-r OR rites A•�.,w IT 4.; S=PAI44 -4' Tt I. t -‘.% ° 74' l lycr*AT4 �- oaLS► CctoJ1.Q 4E 0■411 .ACLA -.0vJ r•ID / 1 ntr4 ' -a Gh' '1�► 0.4.orri wa aht rJ f 0 rtt. Dow N.5 tr 4-teS k.1 Nt,'K s-<1Trgirk. Edward A. E1cRuch Jr, STATE OF W:lalll:II;TON REGISTER :;fitP 2068839294 2-4fto 4'"-- CITY OF TUKWILA APPROVED J 1 cili , fi r BUILD NG DIVISION YI• /9 OTTO ROS & ASSOC AT PROJECT: Homewood Suites ADDRESS: 6925 Southcenter Blvd., Tukwila ARCHITECT: Clark Johnson CONTRACTOR: Sacon Construction B. Bellew 7 -2 -91 G. Moe 7 -8 -91 D. Spicer, D. Newman, & J. Moser, trainee 7 -11 -91 R. Bogle 7 -12 -91 W. Hansen 7 -19 -91 D. Spicer & D. Newman 7 -23 -91 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION & TESTING 6747 M. L. King Way South • Seattle, WA 98118 (206) 725.4600 • Tacoma 627.4477 • Fax (206) 723.2221 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT AUDIO Sintpi AUG 1 TUKVVILA ING _ 668; ";(building 2) .621,1;z(building C5) PERMIT NUMBER: ,:; 62; (building E5) JOB NUMBER: 91 -183 ENGINEER: Clark Johnson INSPECTED AT: Job Site INSPECTOR AND DATE INSPECTOR'S REMARKS B. Johnson Inspected and approved the resteel and forms in building E5 (per S1.10 6 -28 -91 drawing) for all exterior footings and interior footings (except breezeway on West side). Exterior footings per detail 16/S.4 and interior footings per detail 11/S.4 and'17 /S.4. All steel clean and secured in place per City approved drawings. Resteel is grade 60, as specified, from Cascade Mills. Inspected and approved the resteel and forms for continuous footings for building C5. Resteel is grade 60, as specified, from Salmon Bay Steel and Cascade Mills. Inspected and approved the resteel and forms for exterior walls at building E5, inclusive. All reinforcing members were found to conform with approved plan and specifications for size, grade, and spacing of bars, noting correct lap development anc clearances for concrete cover. Forms were tight and free of debris. Resteel is grade 60, as specified, from Salmon Bay Steel and Cascade Mills. Inspected and approved the resteel and forms for perimeter walls, building C5. Resteel placed according to approved plans and specifications. Resteel is grade 40 & 60, as specified, from Salmon Bay Steel and Cascade Mills. Inspected and approved the resteel and forms for footings and grade beams for building 2. Resteel as per approved plans and specifications. Resteel is grade 60, as specified, from Cascade Mills. Inspected and approved the resteel and forms for footings and grade beams for building 8 (City of Tukwila permit number 6269). All resteel was found to be clean and placed per City of Tukwila approved plans and specifications. Resteel is grade 60, as specified, from Cascade Mills. Inspected and approved the resteel and forms for foundation walls for buildings 2 & 8 inclusive. Resteel placed accord to approved plans and specifications (three verticals noted by Tukwila's Inspector re- positioned correctly). This report is the exclusive property of our firm for use in producing a cc: Owner final report to obtain a Certificate of Occupancy. Use of this report by 1-Architect /Eng. any other firm is strictly prohibited without written permission from our. Engineer firm. This report may be a matter of public record at government agencies 1- Contractor etc., but it is public record for viewing only, not for personal or financial 1 -Bldg. Dept. gain. '- 1 , p(--- OTTO R6 ENAU & ASS&IATES, INC. JOB NUMBER: 91 -183 . DATE: 2 July 1991 • I inspected placement of Stoneway Mix Number: 3752 oz. Cast specimens #2 A —C Cast specimens # Cast specimens # Weather: Clear & hot. DATE CAST 7 -2 -91 7 -2 -91 7 -2 -91 cc: Owner 1-Architect /Eng. Engineer CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION & TESTING 6747 M. L. King Way South • Seattle, WA 98118 (206) 725.4600 • Tacoma 627.4477 • Fax (206) 723.2221 PROJECT: Homewood Suites 7 -9 -91 7 -30 -91 7 -30 -91 REPORT NUMBER: 002 30* at 19 at at 7 1- Contractor 1 -Bldg. Dept, Batch Plant CONCRETE REPORT PERMIT NUMBE.IV 2.7.11 bpali INSPECTOR: B. Bellew cubic yards of 3.7 sack, 2000 , in the following areas: , continuous footings at bldg. C5. ** and it was vibrated internally. Slump range 3"-4" Type I /II cement, # 3 M. WRA COMPRESSION TEST RESULTS ON 6" x 12" CYLINDERS (AREA: 28.3 SQ. IN.) DATE AGE IN SPECIMEN ULT. STRENGTH BROKEN DAYS NUMBER WEIGHT IN LBS 2 —A 291/14 oz. 98,000 28 2 —B 29#14 oz. 135,000 28 2 —C 301/0 oz. 138,000 " slump. Del, ticket # 316225 " slump. Del. ticket # " slump. Del, ticket # psi concrete from Concrete was placed via pump Batch weights per cubic yard: 350# 1950 # 7/8" agg. 65 # fly as>,i per 100# of cement. cubic yards with a 3i cubic yards with a cubic yards with a . Concrete Temperature: CYLINDERS ARRIVED IN LAB AND /OR REMARKS: 7 -3 -91 * *exterior footings rodded, grade beams vibrated internally. *Witnessed approximately half of pour; inspection of placement not needed, per contractor's request. 1490 # sand, per 100# of cement. STRENGTH LBS /SQ. IN. 3466 4775 4881 OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. /"* ..o/1‹.!;.0.4r.o,A0 OTTO ROSENAU Homewood Suites & ASSOCIATES, INC. 6747 M. L. KING WAY SOUTH, SEATTLE, WA 98118 725.4600 PROJECT: ADDRESS:. 6925 Sou thcenter. Blvd. , Tukwila INSPECTOR AND DATE CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION INSPECTOR'S REMARKS REPORT 6269 -Bldg. 8 6270 -Bldg. E5 PERMIT NUMBER: 6271 -B1dg. C5 6268 -Bldg. 2 JOB NUMBER: 91 -183 D. Spicer & Anchor bolts placed an angle in cross- sectional walls as per verbal approval D. Newman of Engineer of Record. Written documentation to. be available on site as 7 -23 -91 requested. (Continued) Resteel is grade 60, as apecif ied, from Salmon Bay Steel. and Cascade Mills_. B. ;Johnson :Inspected and approved the resteel and forms- for.building`4 -- all'.footings 7 -26 -91 for all foundation walls and all interior tie beam footings, as per foundation revised drawings S1.8 and City approved 7- 24 -91. All rebar. was secured and placed /corrected to-be in accordance with City approved plans and specifications. Resteel is grade 60, as specified, from Cascade Mills. JOB NUMBER: 91 -183 OTTO R6SENAU & ASSd IATES, INC. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION & TESTING 6747 M. L. King Way South • Seattle, WA 98118 (206) 725.4600 • Tacoma 6274477 • Fax (206) 723.2221 PROJECT: Homewood Suites cc: Owner 1— Contractor 1— Architect /Eng. 1— Bldg. Dept. Engineer Batch Plant CONCRETE REPORT REPORT NUMBER: 001 PERMIT NUMBERt: 162:70; DATE: 4 28 June 1991 INSPECTOR: B. Johnson I inspected placement of 27 cubic yards of 5 sack, 2, 000 psi concrete from Stoneway Sand & Gravel , in the following areas: building E5 for all exterior footings Mix Number: 3752 and interior footings except breezeway on West side. Concrete was placed via pump and it was vibrated internally. Slump range 3 to 4" Batch weights per cubic yard: 350 # Type I /II cement, 1490 #sand, 1950 # 7/8" agg. 65 # Fly Ash # , 3 oz. WRA per 100# of cement. oz. per 100# of cement. Cast specimens # 1 A —C at 15 cubic yards with a 3 " slump. Del. ticket # 315809 Cast specimens # at cubic yards with a " slump. Del. ticket # Cast specimens # at cubic yards with a " slump. Del. ticket # Weather: clear sunny Concrete Temperature: 72 CYLINDERS ARRIVED IN LAB AND /OR REMARKS: 7 -1 -91 At 1:15pm, Ross at Clark Johnson's office gave verbal approval on design mix, written approval to follow. COMPRESSION TEST RESULTS ON 6" x 12" CYLINDERS (AREA: 28.3 SO. IN.) DATE DATE AGE IN SPECIMEN ULT. STRENGTH STRENGTH CAST BROKEN DAYS NUMBER WEIGHT IN LBS LBS /SQ. IN. 6 -28 -91 7 -5 -91 7 1 —A 29 #12 oz. 76,500 2706 6 -28 -91 7 -26 -91 28 1 —B 291114 oz. 111,000 3926 6 -28 -91 7 -26 -91 28 1 —C 29 #12 oz. 109,500 3873 IAIRO l.IRM AUG 0 5 1991 Cal' Or Iv, v LA PLANNING DEPT. OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. 1 pe___ OTTO RC�3ENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. JOB NUMBER: 91 -183 PROJECT: CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION & TESTING 6747 M. L. King Way South • Seattle, WA 98118 (206) 725.4600 • Tacoma 627.4477 • Fax (206) 723.2221 Homewood Suites DATE: 8 July 1991 I inspected placement of Stoneway Mix Number: 3752 CONCRETE REPORT REPORT NUMBER: 003 Concrete was placed via concrete pump Batch weights per cubic yard: 350 # 1950 # 7/8" agg. 65# fly ash # oz, per 100# of cement. Cast specimens H3 A —C at 9 Cast specimens H at Cast specimens H at Weather: Clear, mid to upper 70 ° 's in PM. CYLINDERS ARRIVED IN LAB AND /OR REMARKS: 7 -9 -91 DATE CAST 7 -8 -91 7 -8 -91 7 -8 -91 cc: Owner 1— Architect /Eng. Engineer 7 -15 -91 8 -5 -91 8 -5 -91 INSPECTOR: G. Moe 19 cubic yards of 4.2 sack, 2000 psi concrete from , in the following areas: , exterior walls at building E5, inclusive. 7 28 28 1— Contractor 1— Bldg. Dept. Batch Plant and it was vibrated internally. Slump range 4" ± cubic yards with a cubic yards with a cubic yards with a 3 —A 3 —B 3 —C Type I/ II cement, 1490 #sand, 3 oz, WRA per 100# of cement. Concrete Temperature: COMPRESSION TEST RESULTS ON 6" x 12" CYLINDERS (AREA: 28.3 SO. IN.) DATE AGE IN SPECIMEN ULT. STRENGTH BROKEN DAYS NUMBER WEIGHT IN LBS 29#12 oz. 30 #0 oz. 29//12 oz. PERMIT NUMBER 1". 5" slump. Del, ticket H 316716 " slump. Del. ticket H " slump. Del, ticket H 70 ° F 61,000 103,000 105,500 STRENGTH LBS /S4. IN. 2157 3643 3731 OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIAT , INC. %r JOB NUMBER: 91 -183 PROJECT: Homewood Suites DATE: 23 July . 1991 I inspected placement of Stoneway Mix Number: 3752 Concrete was placed via pump Batch weights per cubic yard: 350 # 1950 # 7/8" agg. 65 # fly ash oz. per 100# of cement. Cast specimens # 7 A —C at Cast specimens # at Cast specimens # at Weather: Sunny, 85 CYLINDERS ARRIVED IN LAB AND /OR REMARKS: 7 -24 -91 DATE CAST OTTO R6SENAU & ASSO c; INC. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION & TESTING 6747 M. L. King Way South • Seattle, WA 98118 (206) 725.4600 • Tacoma 627.4477 • Fax (206) 723.2221 DATE BROKEN 7 -23 -91 7 -30 -91 7 cc: Owner 1— Contractor 1— Architect /Eng. 1— Bldg. Dept. Engineer Batch Plant CONCRETE REPORT REPORT NUMBER: 007 PERMIT NUMBER: INSPECTOR: D. Spicer & D. Newman 63 cubic yards of 3.7 sack, 2000 psi concrete from , in the following areas: foundation walls for buildings 2 & 8 inclusive. and it was vibrated internally. Slump range 311_511. AGE IN SPECIMEN DAYS. NUMBER Type 18 cubic yards with a 4i cubic yards with a cubic yards with a Concrete Temperature: WEIGHT I /II 3 oz. WRA cement, " slump. Del. ticket # " slump. Del. ticket # " slump. Del. ticket # 78 °F COMPRESSION TEST RESULTS ON 6" x 12" CYLINDERS (AREA: 28.3 SQ. IN.) ULT. STRENGTH IN LBS '7 —A 301/0 oz. 67,500 =Bldg. 8 Bldg. 2 1490 # sand, per 100# of cement. 319409 STRENGTH LBS /S4. IN. 2387 OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. OTTO R65ENAU & ASSd IATES, INC. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION & TESTING 6747 M. L. King Way South • Seattle, WA 98118 (206) 725.4600 • Tacoma 627.4477 • Fax (206) 723.2221 JOB NUMBER: 91 -183 PROJECT: Homewood Suites CONCRETE REPORT REPORT NUMBER: 006 DATE: . 19 July 1991 INSPECTOR: W. Hansen I inspected placement of 10 cubic yards of 3.7 sack, 2000 psi concrete from Stoneway , in the following areas: footings and grade beams for bldg. 8. Mix Number: 3752 Concrete was placed via concrete pump and it was vibrated internally. Slump range Batch weights per cubic yard: 350 # Type 1950 # 7/8" agg. 65 # fly ash oz. per 100# of cement. Cast specimens # 6 A —C at 10 ' Cast specimens # at Cast specimens # at Weather: Partly cloudy, 70 °F. CYLINDERS ARRIVED IN LAB AND /OR REMARKS: DATE CAST 7 -19 -91 cc: Owner 1— Architect Engineer • 7 -26 -91 7 1— Contractor Eng. 1— Bldg. Dept. Batch Plant PERMIT NUMBER: I /II cement, 3 oz. WRA cubic yards with a 3 cubic yards with a cubic yards with a Concrete Temperature: 70 ° F 7 -22 -91 COMPRESSION TEST RESULTS ON 6" x 12" CYLINDERS (AREA: 28.3 SQ. IN.) DATE AGE IN SPECIMEN ULT. STRENGTH BROKEN DAYS NUMBER WEIGHT IN LBS 6 —A 301 /0 oz. 89,000 " slump. Del, ticket # " slump. Del. ticket # " slump. Del. ticket # X 26 ldg 8 • 1490# sand, per 100# of cement. 318847 STRENGTH LB S /SO. IN. 3148 OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. DATE: 12 July 1991 I inspected placement of Stoneway Mix Number: 3752 7 -12 -91 OTTO RC . 3ENAU & ASSOQIATES, INC. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION & TESTING 6747 M. L. King Way South • Seattle, WA 98118 (206) 725.4600 • Tacoma 627.4477 • Fax (206) 723.2221 PROJECT: Homewood Suites cc: Owner. 1— Contractor 1— Architect /Eng. 1— Bldg. Dept, Engineer Batch Plant CONCRETE REPORT JOB NUMBER: 91 -183 REPORT NUMBER: 005 PERMIT NUMBER: krz INSPECTOR: R. , Bogle 65 cubic yards of 3.72 sack, 2500 psi concrete from , in the following areas: , footings and grade beams for bldg. 2. Concrete was placed via pump and it was vibrated internally. Slump range 5 " -5 i ". Batch weights per cubic yard: 350 # Type I /II cement, 1420 # sand, 1950 # 7/8" agg. 65 # fly ash. # 3 oz. WRA per 100# of cement. oz. per 100# of cement. Cast specimens # 5 A —C at 9 cubic yards with a 5" slump. Del. ticket # 317571 Cast specimens # at cubic yards with a " slump. Del. ticket # Cast specimens # at cubic yards with a " slump. Del, ticket # Weather: Clear, 79 Concrete Temperature: CYLINDERS ARRIVED IN LAB AND /OR REMARKS: 7 -15 -91 COMPRESSION TEST RESULTS ON 6" x 12" CYLINDERS (AREA: 28.3 SO, IN,) DATE DATE AGE IN SPECIMEN ULT, STRENGTH CAST BROKEN DAYS NUMBER : WEIGHT IN LBS 7 -19 -91 7 5 —A 29 #10 oz. 65,000 STRENGTH LBS /SQ. IN. 2299 OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. TO: ATTN: FAX #: FROM: RE: MESSAGE: SACON CONSTRUCTORS. INC. GENERAL CONTRACTORS /CONSTRUCTION MANAG 6925 South Center Blvd. Tukwila, Washington 98188 (206) 241 -6489 FAX (206) 241 -6782 FAX TRANSMITTAL D A T E : Z , z T O T A L PAGES: , _ - 1 N C t.4 0 ,0 Cove m -- r [ DEC23 1991 CITY OF TUKWILA PLANNING DEPT. December 13, 1991 Jerald Earl Superintendent Sacon Constructors, Inc. Re: Simpson St Strap -Ties at Lodge Building (A - Homewood Suites Tukwila, WA Dear Mr. Earl: At your request, we have reviewed the framing plan (sheet S4.3) of the project mentioned above. The Simpson ST strap -ties were intended to connect the headers to the double top plates. These straps may be eliminated provided that the top plates are spliced per detail 2/S3.3 above the headers. If there are any questions, please give us a call. Sincerely, J. Clark Johnson, P.E. JCJ /pa U r oEc.23 1991 CITY OF TUKWILA PLANNING DEPT. APR 22 '92 09 :21 EARTH CONSULTANTS BAAAAAAAAA /1A " ° , ' f A 4/ ■ lvs; April 21, 1992 Dimension Development 10 West Triangle Road San Jose, California 95131 Attention: Mr. Jim Ford Subject: Reference: Gentlemen: Final Report Construction Monitoring Services Homewood Suites Lots 2 and 3, Southcenter Boulevard Tukwila, Washington Earth Consultants, Inc. 1. Geotechnical Engineering Study E- 3007 -2, dated November 2, 1987 2. Geotechnical Engineering Study E -4343, dated June 20, 1989 3. Summary of December 20, 1991 Meeting E- 4343 -2, dated December 27, 1990 Earth Consultants Inc. f OteetlnitXtl bngineers. Geologists *. F.nvironnx nrdl Sclentlsts P.2 E- 4343 -2 At your request, we provided construction monitoring services at the subject site. We earlier performed the referenced geotechnical engineering studies. Our services included providing on -site observations, performing field density tests, and providing the necessary laboratory tests on fill samples as required for footing excavations, trench backfill, and parking area subgrade. Earth Consultants, Inc. (ECI) representatives made forty-four (44) site visits from October 30, 1990 through January 30, 1992. During this time a total of two hundred eleven (211) field density tests were performed. These tests were performed in accordance with ASTM Test Designation D -2922 (Nuclear Gauge Method). Nine representative soil samples were returned to our laboratory for maximum dry density tests in accordance with ASTM D- 1557-78 (Modified Proctor). Field density test results are intended to represent the compaction of soil at the location of the test only. They are not intended to imply the condition of the fill at any other location or elevation. 4 APR 22 '92 09:22 EARTH CONSULTANTS BAAAAAAAAA P.3 Dimension Development April 22, 1992 ECI representatives made four site visits to observe the footing bearing soils. The footing subgrade consisted of medium dense native soil. The adequacy of the footing subgrade soil was observed by probing with a one -half inch diameter steel rod. Footing excavations observed by representatives of this firm should provide adequate foundation support. We also made several site visits to observe the placement and test compaction of fill placed under walkways and decks. Field density tests indicated adequate compaction of 90 percent or better at the tested locations, except in the northwest and northeast deck areas of Building #4. In these areas, the contractor chose to backfill over areas where density testing indicated relative compaction values at 83 and 86 percent, ECI representatives made periodic site visits to observe the work of the utility contractor and test backfill of utility trenches. Density tests were performed on storm drain, water, sewer and sprinkler lines to verify for adequate compactive effort. Based on our observations and tests, adequate compaction was obtained at the tested locations. ECI representatives also observed the pavement subgrade. The pavement subgrade was proofrolled with a fully loaded dump - truck. Parking and roadway pavement subgrades were observed to be stable should provide adequate support for pavements. Based on our observations and the results of field density testing, in our opinion, the earthwork operations were completed in accordance with our recommendations and the approved plans, with the exception noted above. If you have any questions concerning our observations or test data, please call. Very truly yours, EARTH CONSULTANTS, INC. • Kyle R. Campbell, P. Project Manager SDD /KRC /kml µ343- 2ao.LoJ Earth Consultants, Inc. E- 4343 -2 Page 2 OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION & TESTING 6747 M. L. King Way South • Seattle, WA 98118 (206) 725-4600 • Tacoma. (206) 8274477 City of Tukwila Building Division 6200 Southcenter Blvd. Tukwila, Washington 98188 Project: Homewood Suites 6925 Southcenter Blvd. Ladies /Gentlemen: We herewith certify that we have completed the following types of inspection and testing on this project. To the best of our knowledge, all work inspected is according to approved plans and specifications. 1. Reinforcing steel 2. Concrete (test cylinders only, in most cases 3. Anchor bolts 4. Field welding Copies of all reports have been submitted to your office. fax c: Dimensions Development Very truly yours, OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Otto M. Rosenau 21 April 1992 PERMIT NUMBERS: 6267 6268 6269 6270 6271 ,rieodkve MAR 03 '92 14:46 UNITED SYSTEMS, INC. UE UNITED ENERGY ENGINEERS, INC. 3231 1st Avenue South • Seattle, Washington Phone (206) 447-1516 • Fax (206) 624 -8408 1G' pow �( 'me KO oh 98134 c'CZ. 1 / 4 '. rz. PW7' oN TtAS !3AGk —VI ti Fo . P.1/6 • Energy Engineers • Air Conditioning • Controls • Test, Adjust & Balance -- 3 n or FSL -G . A 'w e ')' t.,1 NC, Sip mo lt , r'c AN iG cA Lewto h/ MAR 03 '92 14:47 UNITED SYSTEMS, INC. ‘1\n Wow. ...., .. c.� ).:-1 . 6-7 -- A #,C Y) A.L.. . ,a.1 W �. 1, . : •. . . ! r 1. . W. ?P, • AL►.. IoW. ��1 .'.... .:..................... _ t..0, ► . . Q 1.; wA.. to3{,,, 115,9 foy.t 22 0 ;'t• o, • 1 2 a o 'SIAM , .. . . • 5 17 1 ..,. .. .P.2/6 .etc .......... .'�. _. U . zo to z/b • / /MAR 93 '92 14 :47 UNITED SYSTEMS, INC. S S S. S S s. S S. S S S S S S S S S S S S s S $ S s S S s S S S S S S S S S S s S S. S S S S S S $ S 1005 2 x d dingle Wood Stud' d MOM Nominal . Matt R -Value R -19 at 6 -inch thickness Installed Batt R- Value: R -18 In 5.5 -.inch cavity 2x6 Single Wood studs d • MOTE: Nominal Batt 8-value; R -22 at 5.5 -mnc1: thickness 1 Installed Batt R «value: •2 ,R -21 in 5.5 4011 cavity 3 4 s 6 7 8 9 '10 22 22 $U?V11 mow CODE ' .19 mit :• ; ... . • Di41Dq . PaPPria1 /lrIltaq Type -value t. pear oard 0 ' 1 3 4 , .. 5 6, 7 a 9 • 20 21 2 2 • A value o • Poem WI 2i high Density $atk. •yplf i.'.''.,: : "` .' . al4 .ag Ksta>;41/1salli4q Tye* Lapped Mood .Ti-=i ITO ' Mr STD. M. 11DV 1,440.4 good Yi.ai sto _ .. moo ......_ asp s arm .062 45 , 0'55' . . k1. ;0,08 .0.08 .035 ..052.., .9606.. ; 4 0555 .054 .05? '..OS0 ' j 0Sd,..QS4.� t 031 .051 .049 .047'' .052. .046 .046 .045 .050 .048'446' .046 .044 .042 .040 .038 .034 .057 .054 .051 , , . .050, .0'.1 6 % 053 ey .054 .0;s0 .048 .045 . 043 .041 . 039 .038 .036 .035 .033 .032 ,.944 .042 .044 .040 .039 .03 .038 7 .035 .036 .035 .035 .034 .033 .033 .046 .045 .043 .043 .039 .038 .036 .035 .046 .044 .044 .042 .042 .040 .040 ,039 .038. ,037 .037 .036 .035 ,035 .034 .033 .051 .06C.:4096:.483'‘.450 ,048 ,o4...,,..., 952 1050 , 047 .045 ,043', ;',049 :.041 :.045 .043 441 '447 7 .045: • .043 .041 .040 .039 .038 .038 .036 .036 .035 .035 .034 .034 .033 .033 .032 .032 .031 .044 .042 .040 .0319 .037 .036 434 .033 .042 .041 .042 .039 .039 ,037 .037 • .036 .036, .035 .035 .033 .033 .032 .032 P.3/6 MAR 03 '92 14 :48 UNITED SYSTEMS, INC. JULY' 1991 •IrsiTtou " 2x4 single Wood node • . VDTS: , Nominal BattlR- value: R -13 at 3.63 inch thickness Installed Bs •R -12.7 at 3. cavity 224 Single Wood Stud: Note: . Nominal Batt 17 -15 at 3.5 -i thickness. • 1'nstelled'Bat • • 15''3ri'3';S�i cavity" . t A -15 Batt , i:.'1. Hatt„ s F✓ L p L7 e .11-Value Lapped food, et Boas ,aoasd siD • f1DV • S iding Matariti /Vraaioq type T1 2003 11 STD ADV 0 .082 .078 .088 .083 S 8 1 .075 .072 .080 .076 $ • 2 .069 .066 .073 .070 S t N- value: 3 .065 .062 .068 .065 S - Inch 4 .060 .058 .063 .061 S S S ..057 .055 .059 ,.057 S 6 .053 .052 .056 .054 S 7. , .051, .049. , .052 .051 S 8 ..048 .047 .050 .048 S S 9. . 046 .' 45 .047 .046 S 10 ii .043 .045 .044 S 11 .0 - .041 .043 .042 S 22 .040 .039 .041 .040 S siding Material /Trauing Type A -Value Lapped Wood Ti•11 of lean Soard STD ADV STD ADV P.4/6 S - value : 0 .076 .071 .081 .075 S ch S .069 .063 .073 .069 S 2 .• . .064 .061 .068 .069 S R- value: 3 .060 .057 .063 .059 S ch 4 .056 .053 .059 .056 5 S 5 .053 .051 .055 .052 s 6 .050 .048 .052 .050 S 7 .047 .046 .049 .047 S 8 .045 .044 .047 .045 S S 9 .043 .042 .044 .043 $ 10 .041 .040 .042 .041 S 11 .039 .038 .041 .039 S 12 .038 .037 .039 .038 S 5 S S S S 8 S S S . S S S S s S s S S S S S S S S S S s S $ S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S 5 S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S O S S s S MAR 03 '92 14:49 UNITED SYSTEMS, INC. LPL9 151+ C� 5 1 1,006 TASLE Mo. Notes 411 U-lactora for doors with no glazing, ex addition to the main exte exterior doors should be type and analysed. Intar are permitted for door th a Values are based on a n glazing. b Outside air conditions: temperature; inside air 70 °F air temperature. c Values for wood storm d glass area . d Values for metal storm e 55 percent panel area. • ASTM C 236 hotbox data no glazing. -, r, . :4e1"(,' -..,', P727'' 1",k!V*kBiD7M 1 1 WATTWINFROY CODE steel Doore . 1 - 3/4 Fiberglass or mine al wool • , core with ;teal ft *tango, no thermal break 0.40 " 1 -3/4 _Paper honeycomb co p without thermal br Of 0:, 1 - 3/4 . Solid urethane f core •= without thermal br ak' .0.40 1 -3/4 Solid fire rated m noral fiberboard core wi hoot / thermal breaks 0.38 • 1 -3/4 Polystyrene core without .. thermal break (2i age • . . - ..:i" ' ;u.: - .:w:' commercial steel) {j ) : s ;," • �Il;.t• 1 -3/4 Polyurethane core i►ithout'. thermal break (18 gage commercial ateel) 0.29 1 -3/4 Polyurethane core without thermal break (24 age .. commercial steel)'[ 0.29 1 - 3/4 Polyurethane core with. thermal break and good perimeter (24 gaup corns mcrcial steel) 1 -3/4 Solid urethane foe core with thermal break • 0.19 • '0.16 I ..,:#2;17 0.20 1 � 1 M I`SA /J' ... • J I JA ..i..�J'.. • r xterior doors in th1s t4b.e !co for opt for the stores doors pbigi are in n or door. Any glasing free.. .n i ncluded with the app opriata glass e lation and sodarate •extrapolation Icknesses other than thaii minal 32 by 80 in. • dovr 's1ze with no 15 mph wind speed, 0 air conditions: natural convection, or are for approximataly percent oor are for any percent gl area. a nominal 3 by 7 It door size with The V- 2'actors in Table No 10'6 are for exterior wood and steel ;loco. The values given for wood doors were calculated, and those for steel doors were taken from not box testa • (Sabine et. el . 1975: Yell *t 1966) or from *anut'actpr.$ test . reports. An outdoor surf ce conductafce • Qt' s. Q ' 9>tp /h 7f •F : . was used and the indoor yrface conductance waa.taken•as 3.4 stu /h•ft' • °F.lor ,vertical, surfaces with. horisont4l heat' flow.. All values given are ;or ..+aXtCr.Qr doors'.withpyt g4asing. .11 an exterior door contains glazing, the glazing should b.' analysed as a. window.. P.5 /6 • ' * MAR 03 '92 14:49 UNITED SYSTEMS, INC. 1007.2 fiiLL e1... L o, Roof docks; Riga root docking with Rooting materials are attached directly on top of the .insulation. Framing members axi.otton Taft exposed on the interior mids • Wood Frame Ceilings Belo plat ceiling R -19 R -30 R -38 R -49 R -60 ventilation rate or dense pack cant Iujly packed . vith ventilation,. scissors Truss R - 30 (4/12 roof pitch) Rr36 (4/12 roof pitcl) R -49 (4/12 roof pitch) R -30 (5/12 roof pitch) R -38 (5/12 roof pitch) R -49 (5/12 roof pitct) Wood Prams Vaulted Csili�}gs Vented R -19 2x.x0 joist R -30 2x12 joist R -38 2x14 joist Unvented R -30 2X10 joist R -38 2x12 joist R -21 t R -22 2x12 jai Wood Prase Roos Deck R -12,5 2" Rigid i R-21.9 . 3.5" Rigid R -37.5 6" Rigid i R -50 .0" Rigid i Uncompressed Insulation R- Value R -6 R -10 R -13 R -19 •tan Instal Inaai Laid Ova and C f.3 &CH.is assumed: In the unvented ,, the ce44ing .cavity is assumed to be insulatiou,.leaving.no space -tor. - Insu2ation 4 .app;ied to. the top. of ne_space lett tor.Venti.letion, NAIL• $0. 10 -7 (•sotioi.1007 . =FAULT 0- VALUXI FOR MUMS st Vented Attics Baffled 0.049 0.036 0.0iU 0.027 0,025 ., 0.043 0.040 0.038 0.039 0,035 0.032 . 0.034. 0.029 0.026 Pre - Engineered Wetal 1ui into SOTS; Based on 5 foot purrl.ns spacing 0.po 0.12 0.14 0.09 0412 0,08 0009 0.07 imams SOX CODI •tandard Praise Advanced Prase 14" O.C. . 0.049 .. .... 0.034 0.027 .0.047 .. , ... 0.032 0.026 �.. . 0.020 0.017 0.020 e 0.03.? 0.026 0.020 34•x. 0.0. 0.048: 0.033 9.0 27• 0.033 0.027 ..0,025 as 11• 040; 411" O,C, m utation .. 0.064 • insulation .. 0.040 .. . mu tation : , 0.025:: ".: ' • s ulat1on . .0.019 rd Insulation Laid Out Parsllel lion - to and Rotvosa podiae and ion Mot Coaproesad, Ribs R- turlins Thermal Block •epauting pressed Perlin, lsoa Roo! Deck P. 6/6 cay I.B.L Co. CONSULTING ENGINEERS January 3, 1992 Edward A. McHugh, Architects 2661 Bel -Red Road Suite 202 Bellevue, Wa 98008 Juan C. Inchauste, P. E. Project: Rosewood Suites Subject: Penetrations of Fire Resistive Ceiling Membrane by recessed flourescent light fixtures Dear Mr. E. McHugh: As requested by you we have visited the site of the above mentioned project on December 27, 1991 in order to evaluate the installation of the Halo H274 recessed fluorescent light fixture. The light fixtures are to be installed in one hour roof and floor ceiling assemblies. We have investigated Section 4303(b)6 of the 1988 U.B.C. and Section 4505(b) of the 1991 U.H.C., as well as, the floor and roof ceiling assemblies of the U.L. 1988 (Underwriters Laboratories) Fire Resistance Directory. 1.- Section 4303(b)6 of the 1988 U.B.C. states that ceilings of fire resistive roof and floor ceiling assemblies shall form a continuous membrane. Openings are permitted for copper, sheet steel or ferrous plumbing pipes, as well as, openings for ducts and electrical outlet boxes. However, such openings shall not aggregate to more than 100 Sq. In. for every 100 Sq. Ft. of ceiling area. The individual electrical outlet boxes shall be of steel and not greater that 16 Sq. In. in area. According attached Lights ". Lights" 4302(b). openings from the details). P.O. BOX 3194 BELLEVUE, WA 98009 to an interpretation we received from I.C.B.O. (See copy) the 16 Sq. In. limitation applies to "Can Therefore, the Code would generally require the "Can to be qualified by a test in accordance with Section We are providing details for fire protection of the around the "Can Lights" in order to secure approval Building Official under section 105. (See attached TEL. /FAX (206)643 -9941 2.- We have also researched the requirements of Section 4305(b) of the 1991 U.B.C. "Ceiling Membrane Protection" and they are more restrictive than the requirements of Section 4303(b) 6 of the 1988 U.B.C. edition. Where the code previously permitted openings for copper, sheet steel or ferrous plumbing pipes and electrical outlet boxes, it now only accepts "noncombustible sprinkler pipe" and steel electrical outlet boxes. The 16 Sq. In. limitation is the same as in the 1988 edition. Therefore, we concluded that the ceiling fire protection around the "Can Lights" may be approved by the Building Official under section 105. (See attached details). 3.- We have researched the Underwriters Laboratories Fire Resistance Directory for floor and roof ceiling assemblies of wood joist and we were not able to find a tested assembly with recessed fluorescent light fixtures that will give us the indication that the openings around the "Can Lights" do not require protection. Therefore, we have concluded that protection around the "Can Light" openings should be as shown on the attached details. 4.- In order to secure approval for the installation under section 105 of the U.B.C. for the of the recessed fluorescent light fixtures we are providing details of construction to protect the ceiling assembly openings around the "Can Lights" with 5/8" Type "X" G.W.B. The details show the location of the 5/8" Type "X" G.W.B. and blocking with reference to the light fixture. We spoke with Mr. James L. Gale from Cooper Lighting in order to obtain information about the required clearances from the sides and top of the fixture housing to the 5/8" Type "X" G.W.B. Our details show a minimum of 3 -7/16" from the sides and 1 -3/4" from the top and they appear to be well within the requirements for an adequate performance of the light fixture. (See attached letter from Cooper Lighting dated January 3, 1992) Should you have any questions regarding this report, please contact us at your convenience. You should provide a copy of this report and details to the Building Official for its approval prior to retrofiting the already installed fixtures and also for the installation at other new locations. Sincerely; uan •. nchauste, P. cc /rmi Enclosures C -10 -1991 16:28 FROM HALO ENGINEERING Cooper Industries Cooper Llphting DM ten 400 Busse Road Elk Grove village, minds 60007.2 708 956.8400 December 10, 1991 Mr. Gerald Earl Dimension Development 6925 Southcenter Blvd. Tukwila, WA 98188 Subject: UL Approval of Recessed Fluorescent Fixture, Catalog Number H -274 Dear Gerald: This is to inform you that our recessed fluorescent fixture, catalog number H•274 is Listed under our File E80574. Products contained in this File are constructed in compliance with UL 1570, The Standard For Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures. File E80574 appears in the Electrical Construction Materials Directory (The Green Book) which is published by UL and provides additional information concerning'the Listing. Recessed fixtures contained in our File are provided with individual Reports and Test Records which are used by UL during in -house inspections. These Reports are not available. Should you have any questions or comments concerning the above, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely, Reviewed By: Lier:1-9■& •,..-4-.1---" C:::1 Richard D. Bakes Associate Product Standards Specialist RDB /wl/237 TO 12062416782 P.02 COOPER Cooper Lighting James L. Gale Supervisor, Product Standards and Evaluation .6,3! 3 • •00 ACI•orilallectAter •1427441275 law Cloubte Twin • • Tube Compact ron Flumacent irPEEF•2 1 6 / Virar•;;;= ....W L. • VeVotti141 .//■•• • /Yr. 1 - 117 -/6.•11 /./0/ 3r4-'71.4rtelent Ordering Information' Features t 7W •r Type: H7T•70AL.B.P 60W A19 told" -� ._ — 13' H77.71AL.B,P 61:1 .' A 19 Standard in the industry for quality and reliability In both commercial and residential applications. Lens trims provide dlttuse ambient lighting. Mechanical:]•' " ne•:'•'q rrvr; 4 tidy :n . : :CO • 1' EA., ••tl: ...cake Vi` as alt. .•:, unitntrr arras 4 Irc n1 ;sing QOIu.'.ts in paste! hay^ /• m)dAle dilte•..•l ca' •' ' !'"C let "Pr = H7T- 72C,G.B 60W A19 ' - 'I H7T- 73AL,B,P o0A A19 r Electrical: Porceiam socKe!•mediuni p a:4a scrc.. s .c" i I?. 3A anged :pope s:rchc! ■eaa wire'. 1•ro. I :t•1P. Snlntyo warn Inlnrirl ,�... n'a U' d.cu ✓Jas diJ 96ng1 o 4n466n.i Ul r...' , iifi'lb'1 4Lrir • Labels :•: s: +••t.' n .lb. Recessed Incandescent Downlight 60W A19 Lens Trims HB•3 HB•77 OT-400P OT-403P TRM•6P H7T -75 60W A19 Accessories: H.277 : •3 -: ' fain Mar I H8-2.24 ?1•' ^P.uirl'ra^ r•..... TRM•6M8 .•., . 1•.w H7T -406P 60V.'Ai4 D. H7T -416P 500+ M. Housing Die-stamped 20 pa co d i,,x voIIeO steel with baked wn::e erarne B. Socket Plate Aowsts and . ocKs without tads for various lamp sire positions C. Housing Mounting Frame r ousing aofi.s :s in plaster frame 141` to accommodate different ceding thickness Trims Housing accommodates Lens lams shown Housing accommodates additional trims shown on otrer sheets. E. Junction Boa U.L listed for through branch wiring Positioned to allow Suwon: cono:Jitruns Five .:'aria two 're Kno :Y: j:s a'°. p?ov ced Ground wire included F. Bar Hangers Unit is supplied with slide apart captive bar hangers that can be repositioned 90' Suitable for 24" lost spacing G. Socket Porcelain socket with nickel plated brass screwsheli H. Integral Thermal Protector. Notes Ordering Information: T Theimary p' : :e: :odto.ic nq P Wilk- AL Satin:,6unun rir B Sally! fi!arr. C Snriri:ii' F.torlOi G Gore i SI r.••: Nat :rrta• B J 'spec itu•b ilnd :• ,' ' :^':J1! " Vol l 3A 51 es wwAI aft Section 4303 (a? 6 SUBJECT: ` Application of Section 4303 (a) 6 1998 Uniform Building Code This is in answer to the questions in your March 12, 1991 letter: (1. Does the referenced section allow Can Lights" in a fire - resistive ceiling? A. Section 4303 (b) 6, second paragraph allows plumbing pipes, ducts and electrical outlet boxes in ceilings that are used as protective membranes for structural members. Although it may not have been intended to apply to lighting outlets, the . terminology of electrical outlet boxes could be construed to allow recessed lights, however, the size of the light fixture is limited to 16 square inches in area by the last paragraph of Section 4303 ta) 6. Therefore, in order to allow "Can Lights" in a fire - resistive ceiling, they would generally need to be qualified by a test in accordance with Section 4302 (b). The answer in the code interpretation manual to which you refer is in response to a question about duct penetration.. Its application should not be expanded to include openings other than ducts: The answer, however, is not valid for that 1991 edition of the code and has been corrected for the 1991 redition of the Application Interpretation Manual. , JAM -03 -1992 14:29 FROM HALO ENGINEERING Cooper Industries Cooper Lighting Division 400 Busse Road Elk Grove Village. Illinois 60007 -2195 708 956 -8400 January 3, 1992 Mr. Juan C. Inchauste, P.E. P.O. Box 3194 Bellevue, WA 98009 Subject: UL Temperature Testing of Non -Type IC Recessed Fluorescent Fixtures Dear Juan: This letter is in reply to your request for information concerning the minimum allowable spacings between Non -Type IC recessed fluorescent fixtures and the adjacent building members. Non -Type IC recessed fluorescent fixtures which have been Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc,, are subjected to a temperature test which is conducted in accordance with UL 1570, The Standard For Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures. According to UL 1570, the fixture is to be mounted in a test box built of 1/2 in. thick fir plywood, A -D grade. Each wall of the test box is to be 1/2 in. from the nearest point on the recessed housing (lamp compartment) and junction box. The test is to be conducted for each trim intended for use with the fixture housing and, if a height adjustable lampholder is provided, in the highest and lowest positions possible for each fixture -trim combination. The fixture is connected to a supply circuit of 60 Hz and operated at rated ballast voltage. Temperatures are monitored throughout the test on the fixture and on points in contact with combustible materials, such as surfaces of the wood box directly above the lamp compartment and points of fixture support. Listed fixtures shall not attain a temperature at any point sufficiently high to present the risk of fire, to damage any materials employed in the fixtures, or to exhibit greater rises in temperature at specific points allowed by UL. It is our understanding that your project, Homewood Suites, located at 6915 South Center Blvd., is required to have a complete enclosure surrounding the recessed fluorescent fixture. Provided that the spacings around the fixture are no less than 1/2 in. from the nearest point on the recessed housing and junction box and the fixture is operated as intended, there should be no risk of fire, electric shock or personal injury. Should you have any questions or comments concerning the above, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely 2 RDB /w1/245 Richard D. Bakas Associate Product Standards Specialist TO 12064500316 P.02 COOPER Cooper Lighting Reviewed By: ames L, Gale Supervisor, Product Standards and Evaluation TOTAL P.02 RECESSED FLUORESCENT FDCTURE HALO H274 U.L. APPROVED W4' GYP CREATE 3/4 T &G PLYV000 2xi@'S a 16' or, FLOOR JOISTS 5/B' TYPE 'X' Gv,H. FIRE PROTECTION OF FLOOR /CEILING ASSEMBLY WITH 5/8 TYPE "X" G.W.B. AT FOUR SIDES AND UNDER 3/4" T&G PLYWOOD SHEATHING. 2x18 H.DCKING RECESSED FL SLEW FD U E HALO H274 !l. t..:. APPROVED S -CTION A -A 3/4 GYP CREATE 3/4 TSG PLYWOOD 2x19'S o 16 cc. FLOOR JOISTS 5/8' TYPE X GWf RECESSED FLW ESCEW FD(T RE HALO H274 U.L. APPROVED 21 7/16 111 11/4' DD SECTION A -A a• OF 92. C6IL. NIEMBRANE •9 LT F►XT. 3/4' GYP CREATE 3/4 TEG FLYVODD CITY OF TUKWILA APPROVED JANE`' Ina 131 2x1OS 0 16 ac. FLOOR ;AISTS 5/8' TYPE X G VB. DI ` DIVISION • PERIVaiT NO. THIS SET OF APPROVED PLANS MUST BE ON THE JOB AT ALL TIMES DURING CONSTRUCTION. THIS BUILDING IS NOT TO BE OCCUPIED UNTIL AFTER FINAL INSPECTION APPROVAL BY THE TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION I J. DE PARTMENT OF COMMUNITY DEVELOPMEN - - _._..9 Howetecov SoiTEs RIECESSED FLUORESCENT FIXTURE HALO H2 ?4 U.L. APPROVED 3/4 GYP CREATE 3/4 T &O PLYWOOD 2x10'S a 16 n� FLOOR JOISTS 5/8' TYPE X G.V.B. FIRE PROTECTION OF FLOOR/CEILING ASSEPBLY WITH 5/8 TYPE - X - G : W . B AT FOUR SIDES AND UNDER 3/4- T &G PLYWOOD SHEATHING_ CITY OF TUKWILA APPROVED JA ; BUILDING DIVISION JOB NUMBER: 91 -183 REPORT NUMBER: 003 PROJECT: Homewood Suites , DATE: , 8 July 1991 INSPECTOR: G. Moe I inspected placement of Stoneway Mix Number: 3752 OTTO R6.3ENAU & ASSC ... IATES, INC. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION & TESTING 6747 M. L. King Way South • Seattle, WA 98118 (206) 725.4600 • Tacoma 627.4477 • Fax (206) 723.2221 cc: Owner 1— Contractor 1— Architect /Eng. 1— Bldg. Dept. Engineer Batch Plant CONCRETE REPORT PERMIT NUMBER 19 cubic yards of 4.2 sack, 2000 psi concrete from , in the following areas: exterior walls at building E5, inclusive. Concrete was placed via concrete pump and it was vibrated internally. Slump range 4" ± 1". Batch weights per cubic yard: 350 # Type I /il cement, 1490 # sand, 1950 # 7/8" agg. 65# fly ash # 3 oz. WRA per 100# of cement. oz. per 100# of cement. Cast specimens # 3 A —C at 9 cubic yards with a 5" slump. Del. ticket # 316716 Cast specimens # at cubic yards with a " slump. Del, ticket # Cast specimens # at cubic yards with a !' slump. Del. ticket # Weather: Clear, mid to upper 70 r s in PM. Concrete Temperature: 70 ° F CYLINDERS ARRIVED IN LAB AND /OR REMARKS: 7 -9 -91 COMPRESSION TEST RESULTS ON 6" x 12" CYLINDERS (AREA: 28.3 SQ. IN:) DATE DATE AGE IN SPECIMEN ULT. STRENGTH STRENGTH CAST BROKEN DAYS NUMBER WEIGHT IN LBS LBS /SO. IN. 7 -8 -91 7 -15 -91 7 3 —A 29#12 oz. 61,000 2157 OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATJS, INC, CONCRETE REPORT JOB NUMBER: 91 -183 REPORT NUMBER: 002 PROJECT: Homewood Suites DATE: ,2 July 1991 I inspected placement of Stoneway Mix Number: 3752 OTTO & ASSCJIATES, INC. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION & TESTING 6747 M. L. King Way South • Seattle, WA 98118 (206) 725.4600 • Tacoma 627.4477 • Fax (206) 723.2221 cc: Owner 1- Contractor 1-Architect/Eng. 1 -Bldg. Dept. Engineer Batch Plant PERMIT NUMBE INSPECTOR: B. Bellew, . 30* cubic yards of 3, 7 sack, 2000 psi concrete from , in the following areas: , continuous footings at bldg. C5. ** i�_ n Concrete was placed via p and it was vibrated internally. Slump range 3 Batch weights per cubic yard: 350 # Type I /II cement, 1490## sand, 1950 # 7/8" agg. 65 # fly ash # 3 oz, WRA per 100# of cement. oz. per 100# of cement. Cast specimens #2 A -C at 19 cubic yards with a 3i " slump. Del. ticket # 316225 Cast specimens # at cubic yards with a " slump. Del, ticket # Cast specimens # at cubic yards with a " slump. Del. ticket # Weather: Clear & hot. Concrete Temperature: CYLINDERS ARRIVED IN LAB AND /OR REMARKS: 7 -3 -91 * *exterior footings rodded, grade beams vibrated internally. *Witnessed approximately half of pour; inspection of placement not needed, per contractor's request. COMPRESSION TEST RESULTS ON 6" x 12" CYLINDERS (AREA: 28.3 SQ. IN.) DATE DATE AGE IN SPECIMEN ULT. STRENGTH STRENGTH CAST BROKEN DAYS NUMBER WEIGHT IN LBS LBS/SO. IN. 7 - - 91 7 - - 91 7 2 -A 294/14 oz. 98,000 3466 OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. AS 6 PROJECT: Homewood Suites ADDRESS: 6925 Southcenter Blvd., Tukwila ARCHITECT: Clark Johnson CONTRACTOR: Sacon Construction INSPECTOR AND DATE B. Johnson 6 -28 -91 B. Bellew 7 -2 -91 G. Moe 7 -8 -91 D. Spicer, D. Newman, & J. Moser, trainee 7 -11 -91 R. Bogle 7 -12 -91 cc: Owner 1- Architect /Eng. Engineer 1- Contractor 1 -Bldg. Dept. OTTO ROS & ASSOCIATES INC. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION & TESTING 6747 M. L. King Way South • Seattle, WA 98118 (206) 725.4600 • Tacoma 627.4477 • Fax (206) 723.2221 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT PERMIT NUMBER: JOB NUMBER: 91 -183 ENGINEER: Clark Johnson INSPECTED AT: Job Site INSPECTOR'S REMARKS Inspected and approved the resteel and forms in building E5 (per S1.10 drawing) for all exterior footings and interior footings (except breezeway on West side). Exterior footings per detail 16/S.4 and interior footings per detail 11 /S.4 and 17/S.4. All steel clean and secured in place per City approved drawings. Resteel is grade 60, as specified, from Cascade Mills. Inspected and approved the resteel and forms for continuous footings for building C5. Resteel is grade 60, as specified, from Salmon Bay Steel and Cascade Mills. Inspected and approved the resteel and forms for exterior walls at building E5, inclusive. All reinforcing members were found to conform with approved plan and specifications for size, grade, and spacing of bars, noting correct lap development anc clearances for concrete cover. Forms were tight and free of debris. Resteel is grade 60, as specified, from Salmon Bay Steel and Cascade Mills. Inspected and approved the resteel and forms for perimeter walls, building C5. Resteel placed according to approved plans and specifications. Resteel is grade 40 & 60, as specified, from Salmon Bay Steel and Cascade Mills. Inspected and approved the resteel and forms for footings and grade beams for building 2. Resteel as per approved plans and specifications. Resteel is grade 60, as specified, from Cascade Mills. ____,_....... - `•• -•--- �" I�'��� � •��;,�t,�iltifl��yl j1 \JuL22 en Or tUi'. ,!iLA PLANNMG_DE 6268k(building 2) (building C5) (building E5) This report is the exclusive property of our firm for use in producing a final report to obtain a Certificate of Occupancy. Use of this report by any other firm is strictly prohibited without written permission from our firm. This report may be a matter of public record at government agencies etc., but it is public record for viewing only, not for personal or financial pain. July 19, 1991 Dimension Developments, Inc. 401 Keyser Avenue Natchitoches, Louisiana 71457 Attention: Mr. Jim Ford Subject: Dear Mr. Ford: As requested by the site superintendent for Sacon Constructors, Inc., we have reviewed the present subgrade soil conditions for the proposed drive and parking areas of the site, excluding the perimeter fire road. At this time, moisture - sensitive soils are clry on the surface and exhibit little or no deflective movement under heavy live loads. When cuts are made to achieve final grade, we would expect minor definitive areas will require overexcavation or moisture conditioning, . The exposed subgrade should be observed by a representative of ECI. Recommendations for overxcavation can then be made based on the conditions encountered. The present on -site soils are satisfactory for use as the overexcavation backfill, if necessary, provided moisture contents remain near optimum. Based on the conditions described above, it is our opinion that the one -foot subgrade overexcavation and replacement using granular fill, as shown on the plans (Civil Drawings, Sheet C9 of 9), is not required. We understand you plan to use Asphalt Treated Base (ATB) for your subsection material in lieu of the four -inch 5/8 -inch crushed rock section. When the final subgrade preparation is complete, we urge you to place the ATB as quickly as possible in order to not extend the risk of poor weather conditions causing further delays. If you have any further questions, please call, Sincerely, EARTH CONSULTANTS, INC. Paul J. Campbell Construction Services Manager PROPOSED HOMEWOOD SUITE HOTEL SOUTHCENTER BOULEVARD TUKWILA, WASHINGTON \ , . Earth Consultants Inc. Geolechnical Engineers, Geologists M Environmental Scientists 1805 136th Place N,E., Suite 101, Bellevue, Washington 98005 222 E. 26th Street, Suite 101, Tacoma, Washington 98411.9998 Bellevue (206) 643.3780 Seattle (206) 464.1584 FAX (206) 746.0860 Tacoma (206) 272.6608 E- 4343 -2 PJC /kml JOB NUMBER: 91 -183 DATE CAST 6 -28 -91 OTTO RC. ;.3ENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION & TESTING 6747 M. L. King Way South • Seattle, WA 98118 (206) 725.4600 • Tacoma 627.4477 • Fax (206) 723.2221 PROJECT: Homewood Suites DATE: 28 June 1991 I inspected placement of — 27 Stoneway Sand & Gravel Mix Number: 3752 7 - 5 - 91 7 cc: Owner 1— Contractor 1- Architect /Eng. 1— Bldg, Dept. Engineer Batch Plant CONCRETE REPORT REPORT NUMBER: 001 PERMIT NUMBED INSPECTOR: B. Johnson cubic yards of 5 sack, 2,000 psi concrete from , in the following areas: building E5 for all exterior footings and interior footings except breezeway on West side. Concrete was placed via pump and it was vibrated internally. Slump range 3 to 4" Batch weights per cubic yard: 350 # Type I /II cement, 1490 #sand, 1950 # 7/8" agg. 65 # Fly Ash # 3 oz. WRA per 100# of cement. oz. per 100# of cement. Cast specimens # 1 A —C at 15 cubic yards with a 3 " slump. Del. ticket # 315809 Cast specimens # at cubic yards with a " slump. Del. ticket # Cast specimens N at cubic yards with a " slump. Del. ticket # Weather: clear sunny Concrete Temperature: 72 CYLINDERS ARRIVED IN LAB AND /OR REMARKS: 7 -1 -91 At 1:15pm, Ross at Clark Johnson's office gave verbal approval on design mix, written approval to follow. COMPRESSION TEST RESULTS ON 6" x 12" CYLINDERS (AREA: 28.3 SO. IN.) DATE AGE IN SPECIMEN ULT. STRENGTH BROKEN DAYS NUMBER WEIGHT IN LBS 1 —A 29 #12 oz. 76,500 STRENGTH LBS /SO.IN.• • 2706 OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. • /U i�� % � �' ter.+ - -- ,) g -2 OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION & TESTING 6747 M. L. King Way South • Seattle, WA 98118 (206) 725.4600 • Tacoma 627.4477 • Fax (206) 723.2221 PROJECT Homewood Suites ADDRESS: 6925 Southcenter. Blvd., Tukwila ARCHITECT: Clark Johnson CONTRACTOR: Sacon Construction INSPECTOR AND DATE B. Johnson 6 -28 -91 B. Bellew 7 -2 -91 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT PERMIT NUMBER: JOB NUMBER: 91 -183 ENGINEER: Clark Johnson INSPECTED AT: Job Site building C5). (building E5) INSPECTOR'S REMARKS Inspected and approved the resteel and forms in building E5 (per S1.10 drawing) for all exterior footings and interior footings (except breezeway on West side). Exterior footings per detail 16/S.4 and interior footings per detail 11 /S.4 and 17/S.4. All steel clean and secured in place. per City approved drawings. Resteel is grade 60; as specified, from Cascade Mills. Inspected 'and approved the resteel and forms for continuous footings for~ building C5. Resteel is grade 60, as specified, from Salmon Bay Steel and Cascade Mills. This report is the exclusive property of our firm for use in producing a -cc: Owner final'report to obtain a Certificate of Occupancy, Use of this report by ' 1- Architect /Cng, any other firm is Strictly prohibited without written, permission from our Encgtneer. firm. This report may. be'.a matter of public record at government agencies 1- Contractor etc., but' it is public record for viewing only, not >for personal or financial 1- fBida. Dent. .,., t ., JOB NUMBER: 91 -183 OTTO •R JSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION & TESTING 6747 M. L. King Way South • Seattle, WA 98118 (206) 725.4600 • Tacoma 627.4477 • Fax (206) 723.2221 PROJECT: Homewood Suites DATE: 11 July 1991' I inspected placement of 40i Stoneway Mix Number: 3752 oz. Cast specimens # 4 A —C at 18 Cast specimens # at Cast specimens # at Weather: Sunny, 75 ° F. CYLINDERS ARRIVED IN LAB AND /OR REMARKS: DATE CAST 7 -11 -91 7 -18 -91 7 cc: Owner 1 —. Contractor 1— Architect /Eng. 1— Bldg. Dept. Engineer Batch Plant CONCRETE REPORT REPORT NUMBER: 004 PERMIT NUMBER800 INSPECTOR: D. Spicer, D. Newman, J. Moser, traine cubic yards of 3.72 sack, 2000 psi concrete from , in the following areas: perimeter walls, building C5. Concrete was placed via pump and it was vibrated internally. Slump range Batch weights per cubic yard: 350 # Type I /II 1950 # 7/8" agg. 65 # fly ash # 3 oz. WRA per 100# of cement. cubic yards with a 4i cubic yards with a cubic yards with a Concrete Temperature: 7 -12 -91 " slump. Del. ticket # 317313 " slump. Del, ticket # " slump. Del. ticket # 69 ° F COMPRESSION TEST RESULTS ON 6" x 12" CYLINDERS (AREA: 28.3 SO. IN.) DATE AGE IN SPECIMEN ULT. STRENGTH BROKEN DAYS NUMBER WEIGHT IN LBS 4 -A 29 #14 oz. 3 " -5" cement, 1490 #sand, per 100# of cement. STRENGTH LBS /S4. IN. 92,500 3272 OTTO OSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. CALCULATIONS FOR PLAN 'SUBMITTAL E SUITES ruKwau, wa. WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE MARCH 15► - 1990 Assembly U(1) Area(1) U x A U x A x DT 1 a 6969 37ov 4E 55 )33 • Windows fa %2G� . j � R . 3 6 6 - -- -- ..,,., r.......- Doors 6VVCD2 • C>, .32- z 3 i2o E 4 & .�,.., /.3S . 7/7 / , 4i.AS.5 " c, 6 3 /i ,O noo( Coiling • O, 0$5 ,, Skylights —. ..-- Fioor -- ""- ,PROPOSLD TOTAL (2) 2330 Floor As sembly horn Table Arca U x A V u A x OT U ' VA1UO (Sq. Fl.) v/oll Q .5 447.36 ,//6 l 9.6 CaiUnc� %Boot p, 4 G 4 QJ ? Z , /.3 b 5 Po imoter insulatipn� R J 'From Tablet 4-2, 4-3, 4-4, Washington Slate Energy Codo L SIab Porirnoter Insulation (3) UIUA CALCULATION, FOR PLAN SUBMITTAL • /7'ME. Wc'ot, SI./;TE: s r.Ci 'W /LA A.5w /NC; Tr'/ i Address: , U /L. b /A/ THERMAL PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Meat Typo: ;ialoctric fosistamo Climatic zone :• 1 Other u PROPOSED DESIGN (1) Calculated (2) Proposed total must bo oqunl to or toss than the critori:, total (3) Must be equal to or greater than criteria l; – Value C(lITERIA TOTAL Material T hickness incites R /In Thickness ••-- .. R Value Solid R value • . Cavity ?.1/7' /o6. F/41•1 -- 2 7 d2. /7 2. /7 tO, /7 Pt 4..s'ilIR 4, 14. A SAr : /7 Airco .srvo .- ..r�.•� M E .--- --- 3g me... bATT" /A/ /U`.4 i �e) / .4 ...... ,3, 25 ..•.r.•+..ww..�.. /a 0 ..r.. ...._ iNS /lab /-1/L/tv ..... T C; zee -- - -- €2 6g — — ..... _ s._ • S ummation R Values /4 7, qq, U = 1/R a 06 a, le • • 1 1 • Framing Ratio (If .applicable) O, Mon of Efnment =a , 700,.1 / U/UA CALCULATION FOR PLAN l UNMITVAL 11omont: J'Y4 LL. SKETCH C. r CLEMENT Nolo: Motto coplos of ti :,rrn for ovory building ofoment. Area of Elornont it net Wren after openings such as door., windows and skylights have b6bn subtracted. • U Value for Moment (Avg.) " d, �;�� - j(G; L?,� .f. e2, 1/t,�r',tll/.�/�' = p, D� c / , - BT!/ • Material Thickness Inches R /fn Thickness ft Value Golid 1, velut . Cavity .Wa zE 4 zAS S w/ . _._.._._........ — - - - - - -- - _,....- ..._. ...._..._.m.... , ._.._. ..�..._ _...,_. -._.._ ... - �. ..._._.... • - ........ _._.._ --- .r.,. Summation R Value: /, 20 uz,/n 933 • • E;Iomontc l A/OO W__.�.___�_. Framing Antio ( If applicable) U Woo for el omont (Avcj,) =0, 3 Areo of Element* * 72 S4 f'7' U /UA CALCULATR N4:Oit PLAN SUBMITTAL K1.TC1-1 OF ELCMFNT Nolo; Maio coplos of this form for overy building clement. x Area of Clement is not eroe after openings such M doors, windows end skAights have boon suhtractod. Material Thickness _ hes Ruin Thickness R Value Solid R vntuh . . Cavity - : S 'oo s_i 411.7 1,1/41- 4 %ri a 40 PL YA/_00 .AP:; e c , •, a, 77 a, 77 n? err 77 J $I s .— 4 sg op. Ay Fayf /4/.s 3ca �— VEJI7774 T,a A.777c. -- 2, 6 c Yp', BOARD ez.6, • 6- 7A" !' 66 0,6g //(43711)E a1-1 re 1' #0, 7 Summation R Values j' .2, p 2 9 U =11R a 0.3 A /U ' , r ' • 1 t •, • r ....— :...�. .•...._.. -...— ...-................te+ — ..+ ++... +++ . ...... .....r..+....�....-- ..•— .•. -+.. ,.. U /UA CALCULATION fOl PLAN sUHMflrAL I;Iomonts , !40 0 / SKETCH OF ELCMF.NT Nolo; Mateo Copies of this form for ovary building olomont. Framing Ratio ( if appiic:iblc) _ a 07 Aroa of t:tomont _ 4 9c0, •-•..•r, vL_v., 1I•Il. ro U Voluo for Eiomont Vvv = 93 x a, 0.9 , 07 .*ID, j4 " a 4 * Ana of Clement• is not won atter openings such as doors, windows and skylights have been subtracted, In 9773002 • P.03 Material Thirknos5 Inclie, Rlln 7filckness R V tun Solid I7 value Cavity 8 00.0 Dn.o.,,(' 6cL /b C. '_ 1 % / __ _ -_— • ■w.er......■.+..wrw .w...arenr — - W M I .••••■••••r •■•••••••• r..•∎•∎• .w ■■■■•••• . ■ ..w.r ^ - '–'- __"_-_ w.m■ ....., ••■••■•••••••••■ _ r -- -•-- .......W. _ . .r,,..........—....wv.Y... — ....r-- 1 Asti' • wlw�+w..r. r.�I ••••..+.rw..... •••••..r.....w• . wwM.'. w.Y...•�� w+r..r�r.r Summation n watio . ...M�..^..�rr�.y 3. /25' — _ U. 1 /n 4 32 Framing Antis ( applicable) U VAiva for (:lomont (MO Noe of EIomant` _. . .ww..... ..wr.- +.■■■•••.—••. U/UA CAI,CULArIQN ° rOfz (PLAN f;Ut9M1rrAL Flt ►mnnt: ommv.w.ftra _.,M SKETCH OF ELEMENT Nolo; Moho copins of Ihlo form for ovory building olomont. " Noa of tiletnont is not Aron After openings such As doors, windows and skylights have boon subtracted. ,• • I ......_.... As ;ombly - • .. - •_ • ••. v. r U(1) Aroa(1) ----- UxA UxAxOT Wall 1 €P69 lag /i•20 36 `- — Windows t% g✓ 2 /to 17 93 -_ , f%y -�_ Doors (loot Coiling ' OD 2 /3; Skylights ^"" ""' '^ • Floor • ....�. ____ .•-..• ••• • ,PROPOSED TOTAL (2) /2:a9 Wall Floor slab Perimeter Insulation" 'f=rom Tables 4-2, 4.3, 4.4, U /UA CAI-CULATIQN FOR PLAN SUBMITTAL /oM•r- coo Sui s 7 /A � 1 A5N /A/C 7L'A/ Addr03 .131//G D /A/ w■•t•• I •••_rw••w•VM•.• •404* •• •W..••.••'. ••• / Co1109/Re0( THERMAL PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Holt Typo: Eloctric Rosirtanco Other _F•4 ••aw•_•• ••S•■•••• Y..•••- +.+••.5 's •••••• ♦• • _ _••_•M \• •N•_ ^ ___ Y — Area UxA L UxAxOT (S , PL) a 25 740 .337o 2/ .1 Assomby From Tablo U Valuo" rl Waohington Stn10 Energy Oodo PFtorosLD DESIGN [Ib Inon (a (a) R.. ____ ...4-.4.0. » • _ • (1) Calculated (2) Proposod total must bo oqu& to or loss than the critoria total (3) Must be equal to or grouter than Ctitoila R — Vrluo 1..1101 vvvv Climatic Zono: II • CIAITERIA TOTAL � 2 2 �j�t' Mmcrial Thickness Inches R /In Thickness rt Value Solid ft value • , Cavity 01/74 70C: :_!'. /-I — 0. /7 !', /7 P14.sir7R 4/41‘. .t ss,.rfoil .2 2. /7 2; /7 kkv' .s roz) 2 ....... -- ' MIT /Nsutf) i /o// 4" 3.26 /3. 2 INSIDE , /L M •-•- -.. ......• p, G ..v i- a 66 .. +- _..+w.�+r._ _�_... r-� +.d. _... , ••••• � ••• - .._. .r .r.•••••_ a , - -- ...r.... w✓wrw....o Summelion n VOW: A56 7, q6 u = 1/rt 0, alp 4 /2 • • Framing Ratio ( if applicable) , a / U /UA CALCULATION 1 OR PLAN SU»MITI Element; &!4 LL SKETCH OF ELEMENT Note; MCAko copies of Ihle form for every building element. W Aroa of lslornont is not 0o4 after opaninros such at doors, window: and skylights have boon subtractod, • U Value for Clo'rimont (Avg,) a Agb"' )(a �?�,) . D /1.i)(0,,42 J = c 069 /- Non of Elomont`r / s � � me , , Material Thicknoss Inches R /In Thickness R out) Solid R value , . cavity S✓NCZE a•c•45.5 l ✓/ froable CizAzdN� J /.2.0 NIyhA.......■....m- ...- - •.......... .V.1•.M•..- ' - ■ - - — .......∎.r ..I.4 .T._ ._..Mom ■••■■■•....N - _ - ........re ....v..._+■_.■••■•■•••.. w..-....+.u - _� _ . . _ • �•.•�•-- +.�•..w..�r.a.�._.w�r /, 20 .+...+�.�.. .__ .......rum.. -. summation R WINO u 1/R 4 63 LIAR -1Q- 1990 03:03 FROM DIMITRI DEMOPULOS INC TO 9778002 P. 1 6-' Elomont: - is/ A/Dc?W Framing Ratio (if applir. bic) U /UA CALCULATION'FOR PLAN t UfMIT7Al. SKETCH OF ELEMENT Nolo: Moho coplos of ihls form for (Ivory building olenient. U Value for Elomont (Avg.) =A �'i..J V Area of Iilomont 2. 4teR f /''. Aroa of Eiornont i9 not Noe after 000ninns Such As door:. Windows and sIM ahl. havo Material Thicknoss Inches Mn Thicknoss ii VA* Solid ft value .. Cnviy OffiLs /D4. / ii-M 4 /7 /7 'Oaf HAWZjE'/4/ - a 44 a 41 3 .VRA Y FAM /N$ /MTie' __..._.. 30 — VEm7 .4 Tr=/> 4 rT /c. — -~ .2. 6' _._.r. 4'Yf',. ar:34 1) C'L-6; ._...._ ._ ......._..�._... file a 66 h• __ -- 0,6g 0,1,E -- //t/S / Summation R values e, N2 9,7e) U = yin • f/ 03 a it") • • • MAR-14-1990 02:27 FROM D 1 M 1 TR 1 DEMOP )LUS INC I U VrYb00d HAT( r U /UA CALCULAT1( ftFOfl PLAN t;UnMITVAL Elomont: C? © /� - SKETCH OF ELCMF.NT t4oto: Make copies of this form for ovory building alomont. Froming Ratio ( if Applicable) Z 07 • U Voluo for Elomont (AvO,) � . l 93 A'Oi as) (v,°7 xO. /D) = G; 0:35 Area of Elomnnt" G 3 84 fry area of Element Is net Non alter oponings such as dogrs, windows and skylights havo be on subiractod, • Assembly U(1) Area(1) U x A U x A x DT Weil G' Oi9 695 9 82 2 ir+'90 Windows P, _ /// 6 .€725 .'r6 o Doors 0.:- 32,...,..,.. 35' 6 /08 64.5' _ Roof Ceiling' O, 035 62 20 • 2 2•o / 3 1 9. Skylights .�•_• • --' __.. Floor �--- t ,PROPOSED TOTAL (2) /740 Floor Slab Perimeter Insulation" Slab Perimeter Insulation (3) t;r 'VW t.vuu U /UA CALCULATION, FOR PLAN $UDMITTAL / /0,41: b✓c)OO 511/7e..5 , 72/K / /GA � W A. H/A/ei 7C'A/ Addr000: BOG Din/ C- ' C - Assembly Vlell a 25 0,035 . THERMAL PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Ileat Typo: Electric Resistance Climatic Zone: I a Other 13 II From Tabios, 4-2, 4-3, 441, Washington State Enorgy Codo From Table Area I. U x A U x A x OT U Value" (Sq. Ft.) PROPOSED DESIGN R— J (1) Calculated (2) Proposed total must be equal to or loss than the criteria total (3) Must be equal to or greater than criteria R — Value 699Q I /75 /o 500 62 So 220 82 CT TFilIA TOTAL , //820 M�iteri��i Thickness Inches A /In Thickness • ^ fl Value Solid li vr+Iue • Cnvify 0/./7.570/2 F/1/1 -- A/7 I)i // 1 4/A41 /(ss1ll y 2' 2. /7 /7 h/ c'o Srua 2':r4 ;/ -- 4, - MTT /NS!/L.4 l /oA/ 4 3.29 /3.0 .. _ INS 0r /z/z. N/ — ._ ( 13 0,6g Summation fl Values /1.58 7, (/ , U 74 1/11 n,o6 4/2 Framing Antio (If applicable) . p U /UA CALCULATION FOR PLAN sunMIrrAL I:Iomont: 14 L L. C - 5 SKETCH OF ELEMENT Nolo: MAIto coplos of this form for ovory building olomonl. U Value for element (Avg.) :_ �j,gb Xa 00 left 45'x 06 • Bra Area of Element% = 6 ( No Aro:a of Elomnnt i$ not iron after oponings such AS door;, windows and skylights have • . boon subtracted. Framing Ratio (if applicable) U Vatuo for Elomont (Avg.) O. $3 Arou of EInment" _ / //5 U /UA CALCULATION' FOR PLAN mUt3Mi1TAL t~lomont: id / A/Dt7 i C - S SKUCH OF ELEMENT Nolu; Mnico coplos of this form for ovory building olomont. x Noa of Elomont is not atoll after oponings such ,+s door., windows: and skylights havo boon suhtractod, Material Thicknass Inches R /ln Thickness 11 Volvo Solid fl value , Cavity ol/BLc CiLAZ /NC 0. /.20 • • Summation R Values 1, 20 U 4 133 Framing Ratio (if applicable) U Vatuo for Elomont (Avg.) O. $3 Arou of EInment" _ / //5 U /UA CALCULATION' FOR PLAN mUt3Mi1TAL t~lomont: id / A/Dt7 i C - S SKUCH OF ELEMENT Nolu; Mnico coplos of this form for ovory building olomont. x Noa of Elomont is not atoll after oponings such ,+s door., windows: and skylights havo boon suhtractod, Malaria) Thicl:noss Inches Ruin Thickness I1 Valua Solid fl value . Cavity NO01} DCJo 55 CAL/P 419(4.." ' / 626 • . Summation n v,7luos ‘3, /26— u - tin ' 3Z .. Klement: Framing Rnlit) ( if applir 1 In) U /UA CALCULATION FOR PLAN aunmiTTAL JKETCH OF ELEMENT Nolo; Mako copies of this form for ovory building olomont. U Value for fclomont (AvO.) 0, 3 2 Arou of Ghmont 3 3 6 " Aroa of Iilornont is not mots after openings such As doors, windows and'skylights have be subtracted. Material Thickness Inches R /In • Thickness n Value Solid ti value . Cavity i2L /75/DL: /- /L/1 4/7 12, /7 of MAfl /AL -sNi 11. F �' �� 1, 41 4 4 PLY 1,10e1) Peck - 5 4 // 477 -' i? . 4. 3g n cop T 15:ce 5 Sp' AY F04 /-1 m/s/i 411 30 -- VEN7X 4 r? v 4.r-pc- - 2..7 OP, IVAh'D etc; 01/ 4 68 CJ. 6g /NS /:DE fall t2,7 0,74 Summation R Values ,j2, 02 170 U = 1/n (, 03 CO, /U • Framing RAtio (if Appiic iblr,) 0, 07 U /UA CALCULATION FOFi PLAN SUI3MITrAL Elomont: Rno_ C - SKETCH OF CLEMENT Noto: Moko cotlos of this form for ovory building olomont. U Value for . Element (Avg.) c k, 93 xao9 4. (0,07 a'D, /c) = L7 0•95 Area of Element'' d G'? 2'0 x Aroa of aliment is net area after oponinos such rs doors, windows And skylights havo peon subtracted, Assembly U(1) Area(1) U x A U x A x DT Well a 069 432 0 • 294 / 7?° __ - .......... Windows t2, g3 5 2 Q 4 3 2 . 2s � Doors / 6 8 SI 322 ,� _. Roof Coifing a0, 035 2s $ o 70 51/ Skylights �. Floor "-- ,PROPOSED TOTAL (2) .5293 Addrooa: U /UA CALCULATION. FOR PLAN SUBMITTAL /OMI. J-I O01, SU/7 6 , T.U4'14/ /64 , W A6r/ /A/C:, t:1A1 I3 /J /GD /n /( £ -6 THERMAL PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Heat Typo: 'Electric Rosistanco Climatic Zone: XI Other IJ II F As o rnbty From Table �• Area I U x A U x A x DT 1 V/nll C, 25 4320 1 logo 6480 1 Coiling/Roof c2035 26 20 S O -� 9 1 Floor .-- a 7020 1 Stab Porimotor Insulation" LR - From Tablos 4-2, 4-3,4-4, Washington Stoto Enorgy Codo Slab Perimeter Insulation (3) PROPOSED DESIGN . V.. .1_1_ (1) Calculated (2) Proposed total must be oqual to or less than the criteria total (3) Must be equal to or greater than clitoria R - Value CRITERIA TOTAL Enorgy Codo Material Thicknoss Inches R /In Thickness ti Volvo Solid n vr+Iue • . Cavity OUTS/DE F/L Al — •— .0. /J A / i PL. 4.5'W/P 11411. A sizovoy , 2 24 /7 g: /7 M' ivego srvo 2 ' X 4" �- -- -36' IMArr /Ns1./i1). i /oN 4" 3, 26 /3, c7 •-- INSOE ,za. N/ `- _ 0, 4E3 n, 4s . Summation R Valuos A58 Z '/ u = iin (Z 06 4 /2 U/UA CALCULATION FOR PLAN SUHMITrAL Elomont: AIA IL c - 5 SKETCH OF ELEMENT Noto; Mako copies of this form for ovory building olomont. Framing Ratio ( applicable) r. / U Valuo for Elomont (Avg.) a 5.5" X O , e : 7 / f' D 411x,/0,.2 = t O 6 ? m r 7l r Area of Element" n 432 -/ Aroa of Elomont is not area after openings such as doors, windows . and skylights have boon subtracted, • Material Thickness Inches R /In Thickness ii Value Solid it value • . Cavity SA/GCE €G.455 ii7 A '4/13LE Cj4.4 Z /Nti 0 // 1.. 20 Summation n values I. ,gyp u n y/n 4 h3 Framing Ratio (if applicable) U Value for Element (Avg.) a Area of Etomont't 5'20 U /UA CALCULATION FOR PLAN SUi3Mirf°AL Elomont: !�/ /N E 61_ SKETCH OF ELEMFNT Nolo; Moko copies of this form for ovory building olomont. " Aroa of Elornont is not root after oponings such r+s doors, windows and skylights havo been subtracted. • Materiel Thicknoss Inchon R /In . ThIcknoss 11 V.7Iuo Solid n 1 • . Cavity NOG'U I00O r�OL /z� c // a . 5ummntlon A Vnluos 3 /Z�j" U = 1 /lt p 3g • Framing •Rntio ( if 4pplicabin) U Votuo for faornont (Avg.) tx 0. 3 2. Moo of I:Immont* r /4 2 U/UA CALCULATION Fors PLAN SUI3MI1TAL F lomont: pc2 E'S' SKETCH OF CLEMENT Nolo: Maio coplos of 11115 form for ovory building olomonl, " Aroa of Clornont Is AM Aron alter oponings such as doors, windows and sbylights have boon subtractod. Material Thickness Inches R /in Thickness R Value Solid n value . Cavity Oar /DE / a, / 7 /, /7 Roof HAl72 /AI - sH / ,fi t n ' la, PLY h/coz) PZ: cx- 1/4 a ! J7 ""' 4 77 4. 3g t cof 7 $$E 5 SP /4t Y FOAM mif 4/7 30 -- VEA/7 X4 Try 4.77' /G. _ 2, 5 OP, 4817 cLG; 516 o, 46 0,63 /No /DE Hai 0, 71 4, 77 9. 70 � . t;ummation R Values 32, S2 u : vn r, 03 n.10 U /UA CALCULATION FOR PLAN SUnMIrrAL 1 • Elomont: Rao_ E - SKETCH OF ELEMENT Nolo: Mono coplos of tlil;1 form for ovory building olem oat. Framing Ratio (If applicable) 0, 07 Aroa of Elomont is not won after oponinrjs such as door., windows and skylights havo been subtracted, U Valuo for Element (Avg.) k, 93 x p, v3) -/. (a, o7 Xv, /v) = U, 036 Aroo of Moment" = 2 S g O • • ,d 02:32 FROM DIN! TR 1 DEMOPULOS INC TO ►wIIVI y, V VMV Slab Perimeter insualaridn" Stab Perimeter Insulation (3) UIUA CALCULATION, FOR PLAN SUBMITTAL TAL //aMIJ400b $1.1/7C.,5 rUA'IV /Gtr / W ASN/NC TPA( Acldroon &l1 /L D /n/'C D THERMAL PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Heat Typo; IC Electric Resistance Climatic Zoo: I U Other II Assembly From Table ' Area U x A U x A ;c pT U Value" 1 (Sq. Ft.) _�_�. -.r... Wall ----1 2 5 T jp ; ,/'40 l4ese i Cailincg /Roof /� g O.Oa� �:�r3 . �. Floor .-- 'From Trablos 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, Wci hIngton Stlltu Enorgy Cod° PROPOSED DESIGN • (1) Calculated (2) Proposed total must be squat to or less than the criteria total (3) Muut be equal to or greater than critarta R - Value CRITERIA TOTAL (3,,7g 9778002 P.17 Assembly U(1) Ares(1) UxA UxAxDT Wall i € 7, 9 7 J •3/6i Windows F; BI3 9). p 757 JYSO Doors . Root Ceiling M••rY.l. w..M.I-M. � _._._- 4230' 1 / ( L7 M Y Y! ,f3 • rh• Skylights ._w.. .._.... -r.•..•..•w "-'• ^ ••• ""... I.. r. .n...m.... . ... _ - Floor *.._ -- dMNI.r.17.• --- .— . PROPOSCI) TOTAL (2) 847 i • • ,d 02:32 FROM DIN! TR 1 DEMOPULOS INC TO ►wIIVI y, V VMV Slab Perimeter insualaridn" Stab Perimeter Insulation (3) UIUA CALCULATION, FOR PLAN SUBMITTAL TAL //aMIJ400b $1.1/7C.,5 rUA'IV /Gtr / W ASN/NC TPA( Acldroon &l1 /L D /n/'C D THERMAL PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Heat Typo; IC Electric Resistance Climatic Zoo: I U Other II Assembly From Table ' Area U x A U x A ;c pT U Value" 1 (Sq. Ft.) _�_�. -.r... Wall ----1 2 5 T jp ; ,/'40 l4ese i Cailincg /Roof /� g O.Oa� �:�r3 . �. Floor .-- 'From Trablos 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, Wci hIngton Stlltu Enorgy Cod° PROPOSED DESIGN • (1) Calculated (2) Proposed total must be squat to or less than the criteria total (3) Muut be equal to or greater than critarta R - Value CRITERIA TOTAL (3,,7g 9778002 P.17 Material Thickness Inches R /In Thickness R Wive Solid fi value .. Cavity az/is /De roc /y ..... .•■•••.• A/7 t, /7, PP4.s: ?/? 11A .IL A ss,y61 `' ..e. • /7 2.'; /7 Need 474/D 2''x4 ..-- --- 4,3g BAT /n/sU /. ')iron/ -' 3. 25 • /. INS WI , NJ --- .._... C Z43 % e ....,T•••••. ....r....•.••••■•••■•* - __.••••••• .....,..,•• - .. ___. ..._.. ,.._.., __ ...r. - -- ,....,....._ .. _ Summation II Value: /4w.8 7 q6 U g yin 0,06 a,a 6. • Flomont: JAM IL Pruning Anilo ( if .,,pp$ c:il,le) p Aroa of Giomontx s ?% , U /UA CALCULATION fOrt PLAN CU13MIrrAL 9K1 TCH OF ELCMFNT ...r.._•_.■•••• Nola: Mako copies ofthlo form for ovofy building olomunl. Noa of Clomont is not woo alter oponings suoh as doors, windows And skylights havo boon .uhtraclod. U Volvo for Element (Avg,) s7 AP5' Xl.; �)�� f g� ; /6 1:�,,/.G / 44 c O C Br Material .... Inches Inches R /In Thicknoss 11 Voluo Solid 11 quo • . Cavity .1 /7 /ve;6E crt+i S A ' _� ....,...._.._..._.. ........... . . _..,.4_I__■■••...•.„ . $ . _.._.._ . .....,._..r__ surmmm;on it viouos ., 20 u = 1/13 40,63 .. . 1 • • f lomont: le//Ndcakv Framing Ratio (If applic. bir•) U Voluo for Elomont (Avg.) r Q, �'i„.5 Aroo of ElomontW = 9 .Se r U /UA CALCULA71ON r01i I'LAN tubmiTrAL OKrTCH OF ELtMENT NJoto; Matto copios of this form for ovory building oiomont. koa of Clement is not nroa after openings such M doors, window And skylights have boon subtracted. Material Thickness Inches R /In Thickness it Valve - Solid ii value • • Cavity OI /n /,mac: i-w./ 4 /7 a, /7 cry ., 0001 M,d r t' / -41 - s���ALL: l� 4i � �. !, / / PLY ivcoo Pe:eft 54 t / 17 7x SE ..r. 4. :V YEA/ Ml..4 72W .4777 6 ROAM) C"L.G; /MS /.1.1E 741y 6/6'' ...... t 6 '> £ 5' 0,6g e?. & 0 , Summation 1i Values 32, G;2 9.70 u . VII 0 03 n, /O rfomont: /4 Framing Ratio (if appiicnble) - o, 6,7 SKETCH OF ELEMENT U /UA CALCULATION•FQf PLAN SUfM17'fAL Nolo: Marco coplos of this form for ovory building otornent. U Veluo for fstomont (Avg.) � 93 0, of) - (a 07 Xo, /0) o, a_35 Moe of ClomontW v: 4.2,3o &�./T Aroa of Elomont is not /woo after oponings such AS doors, windows tad sklAights have bone subtrntod. Assembly l Wal U(1) N&(1) t1xA • UxAxDT - o 049 /p20 7'.33 ' 3 ?_ f; 83 T T7 c o /1 1 ' 9 ..L Windows DborS .--- •---- ---- - . Root Coifing 4035 52a'D • 11 . ' • - • .-w�. • M...M Skylights w..v - "" "—" --- .. - Floor W IVMM.n .�+W + PROPOSED TOTAL (2) .- / 4t S Wall Coiling /Root Floor U /UA CAI- CULATION FOR PLAN 8U13MITTAL i /oi- b✓Uot> 5///7 , 72// � /../A6W /A/47CA/ Ad tiros e: As Slab Porimntor ienulatir)n" L51m Insulation (3) J R_ THERMAL PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Heat Typo: 4Eloctric Ftosistanco Climatic Zone: N1 Other II From Tables 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, Washington State Energy Code From Tabte ' ...- Area x A — 1 - 11 x A x DT" U Value* � (Sq. Ft. ) 17 25 I /2¢2G /e / 6 el 035 - 6 50 /i3 / /pG.r 5 73.3 PROPOSED DESIGN (1) Calculated (2) Proposed total must be oquat to or less than the critorie total (3) Mu.t be equal to or greater then criteria R - Value CRITERIA TOTAL • M�iterinl 1'hicknoss Inches R /In Thickness R V.Mlue Solid ri value' .. Cavity ;:tirsioe. /-'74 /V — ---- 0. /7 4. /7 PL4f?Z P IJ,4LL 4ss, 81 ._._.,...__ ,2 2. /7 .._ ; /7 _._.. w _ Newo srrro _._._... _ 2'x4 " .-- ,.r 45B 13A77 /A/si/lA i /on/ 4 # 3, 2.6 /.3. ..._. NS / PE ././ Z. M ~' '—' a Gg ez 6 - ______ _. I. - - . ..-... .. - - -.-- - -- ■ - _- _ _ . _ ....tore.......... •■••• ry.p� - - - - - - .rw-•wl 5timmetion R Values AC78 V'. 7 y Ur /R l2' c 0, /2 #4 • r -..`. - -- ----- 0.-m ---- -. U /UA CALCULATION FOR PLAN sU»MIrrAL I~Iornont; I44A L L Framing Ratio ( if applicable) n p / Aro° of Element" /t' ��1` ". SKETCH 05 ELEMENT Note; Molco coplos of form for ovory building olornont. U Vella for Moment (Avg.) v, 1 6, 05 )(( 4707 ✓6"k0,,' J 1 2 o6 7 Br'U i - //= Aroa of Glomont i9 not nroa after oponings such As doors, windows bad skylights have boon subtracted. Total Area =11.25 Acres 0000 to Determining River Flows; 12[«K) cfs Elevation = 21.90 9000 cfs Elevation = 18.80 Vertical Difference = 3.60 feet =o3.72 cfs (1 ) Q =4.74 cfs ( ) 0 = 6.24 cfs ( ) STORM DRAINAGE REPORT FOR HOME]W]OD SUITES SITE In discussing the stCrage requirements for the proposed property, it was acertained that the storage can be accommodated bv increasing the River cross-section adjacent to the subject Site. This method was discussed with Mr. Phil Fraser, City of Tukwila, Department of Public Works and previous discussion with Andy LeVeque of King CCunty Surface Water Management. The widening of the River was performed above the Mean High Water Elevation of 18.30 (NEVD Datum) which represents a flow. of 9000 CFS. The bench width is dependent on the present bank slopes, and the location of the City's property which was set aside for construction of the River Trail. Average bench width = 15.00 feet Average River Velccity = 5.00 fps ( Determine of KC SWM ) Increase in River's Flow = 15.0 x 3.6 x 5.0 = 270 [FS Anticipated flows froethe Site for 10, 25 and 100 yearS are as follows; We note that the highest anticipated flows from the Site is far less than the increased floWcapacity of the River. Determining the capacity of the existing storm system in • Southcenter Blvd and the its cut fall northerly to the River. Site Area = 3.12 Acres Scmthcemter Blvd = 0.63 Acres State Farm = 0 (flow from this Site is directed to • the River and not the existing cutfall) Fort Dent I = 1.73 Acres Fort Dent II - 5.52 Acres RECMVED CITIOFTUKWILA MAR 2 0 1990 PERMIT CENTER The . fcallc.4ng calc_ulaticcs analYze the pipe capacity of the existing cut fall pipe from the cul- de-sac at the end of Spt..tthcenter Blvd to the River cut fal 1. The capacity calculations •are analyzed for the 10, 25 and 100 year storm. Tc A C CA I R PIPE CAP STOFd'1 12.83 5.73 . .80 4.584 1.42. 6.51 24" 18.18 10 12.83 '! .80 " 1.78 8.16 24" 18.18 25 12.83 " .82.0 11 2.36 10.82 24" 18.18 100 13.73 .11.25 80 n 7 3"1 ' 11 1.r.7v .. . 8C - •13.73 : 80 14.00 11.25 .9) 14.00 " .B0 14.00 " .80 9.032 1 1.36 12.28 27" 24.88 10 1.7.E 15.54 27" 24.88 25 2.28 20.59 27" 24.88 1(X) 9.0032 1.34 12.10 30" 35.82 10 " 1.70 15.35 30" 35.82 2.26 20.41 30" 35.82 100 • Please refer to Pipe Sizing table for Pipe's slopes and roughness 'coefficient. It. appears that the developed flows tributary ti: the cut fall storm System will pass through the existing pipes' system •without prcblem. ■■■■■■■■ ■■MisMSSSE.O.■■MM■M.M■MS.EMM■.■ ■ M EOME■■ OM■.■■ O ■ ME■■ MS■■■■ ■MM■EMMMEMMM■M■MS.M ■■.■.uM■i ■M■ ■■.■ /■MEMO■■ ■O■■ ■ ■E. ■ ■EME■■EMEMM■■ rI\ C PR /■i �ME■ PI g M■ ■.■■. ■.EM■■■■OREMMMMS ■ssisM■ ■M■ ■■■■ ■■ ■E ■■ ■t ■M /ME■■■ ■■■■■■■ ■■ ■■ ■■■r r. riAAS l�sa- 1' 1r/ 4►- 4.. E..M M.■■ ■EMEMMS■ ■E■■ ■■MSM ■E.■EEE■■. ■■M■ ■O■■ ■■■ ■.M ■ME■■... ■■s....■....E.■.i i■ i 1■ m hmM■■■ E■i■ i■■ i■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■ ■■■■■■■■■■■.■■.■EM■E■iiiE.ME ■■■■.■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■EEMMMM■M■M■EMMM/MM■■MS■OM■■M■ ■■■.■ M■ MMM MM O. M. M■■.MM■■MMMEMMM■MMM.MSimmi.■MM■ g -i■■■■■■■■■/■■■ M ■■■■.ME■■■.E.EM.■■■ ■. ■MMM■OMMIU ■ ERME■ MES.■sM■ M■. M■ ■t■■EMM.■EE■MM■■E.E■M■■■MOMMOO■ ■ MOMM■ M■■ M■E■.■ MME■s M■ Mtt M.M M.■ ■.■MM ■■ EE ■■E■■MEMM■i■■.■iM■ ■O ■■ MOO■ aOi ■ ■EE■ ■ ■MME■■■EMO.M ■OMMEMM■iES■■ IMEMO ■ ■■■■■11M■■ ■M■MMM ■ ■ ■■ // MME■■ / ■ ■■■E■ MM■■■■■■■■■■.■ EtM■.sM. M■ M. M■ M■ ■ ■s■ ■M ■M ■M ■M■EMOMMOMMi.M■.MM■MM ■W■■■.■■■■■■■■M■■■M■.MM.MEMMOI �. M. ■.. MMM MM ■■MMORMO■M.M.M.■M...■■■M■.■M■■■ ■ ■E ■M■■E■/M■■11n■■■M■Ot■M■ ■nMM■■E■isM.■MSMMOSMMiMMO A -.n7 , -- 7i/017n'Yr7 rillc.ns :r7:71JYT.imum 77n1r7: 777■. . ■.■...■■ ■f.N ■E■.■. ■■■ii■ ■ ■ ssE.■ M■■M■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■M... c.. s ■t ■.M ■ i. ■.M.si. ■MiMiM ■Mic ■OMM.■ ■MUMMER ■MME. ■.M■■■si ■M■■ ■. ■...■ MM■.0..■EMM■■■MM.M.■.■ ■.M.■ ■M■■ MME■■.■■t ■■O■ ■■■■ ■■■■■■M■ ■■■ ■M■■ ■M■■■MOM ■ .i ■. ■.s. ■... ■.■... ■■■ ■■ t■■■■■■■■■ ME■■ M■t■■■■■ ■■■ ■ ■■■■ ■■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■.. ■.■.O.....i m i.... ■ ■........ ■ ■. MR/■ M■■■■■■M■■ M. O■E O■ M■M■■ M■M■E■ MME M.E■■M MM■ M. M■■ M■■ M■■■M■ M■i■ tMM■ M■ ■■■isM ■t■ME.MSS■M■■ ■E■■■■EEMEE■ M � .■ /■■....■.....■■t.■■ .■.s..■■ss......■■■■■■■■■■■■■.■■ M■...■■■ .■■.■s■ ■■i... ■ ■■■ ■i.Oi ■.■ii.iis ■.iii IL MOMM. E■■■■■■■■ M■■M■■■■■■■■ M■■■■■■■i■ O■■■ OE■■■■■■■.■..■■■EM■■..■■..■ ■UE■..MMS..MMMa■ilauMMMM■.EM.M■ ■■ M■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ tM■■■■ E■ E.■■E■■.■■■■. M■■■■■ M■.E■■t...■ ■M.MS.iMEMMEM■MSMEM ■MS■EMMMSii■ ■■■■■.■.■ M■.■■■■■■.Et■■.■M.■ s■■■■. ■■■■■■■■■ E■■ M■■ M■■■■.■■ M■■■■■ M■■■■■ ■■■■■■O■■■■■■■■■■■t■E■ES.MEMME■ ■,, MMOMMI IMM■■...■■ E. E.■.■■■■■■■■ M■. O■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■.■■■■s M.■. E..E■ ■.MO.MMMEMM■M■M■■iiM■■sisM■.i■■ ■•.■E■t.■■■■E■■M■E.. .MEMO ■ES■M ■MM.s ■t■Mi■■■MMMMM■■ MME■■■■■ s■■■i■■■.. ■.MM■MME■M■ ■M■■ ■ ■■■M■■■s■■M ■sM■ MTMMMMS.■■ M■.. sis.■sS■■ E . MME Mt.■.. EM ....■E.■■.. E■.■ M■■.■ M.. E. E■■M■ E■■.■.■M■MMMEMOM■■■■MM■■■M.. ■.■ ■OM ■ ■sMO ■E. ■E■ ■M■ ■EM■ MME■■■■ M■M■■ MM/■ MM■■s■ii■i■■■■ M.M■■ MM.M.. sM■■ MM■ ■■■M ■iMM■M■■■ ■MM ■ E ■M ■■MSiM.MSS■ ■. MMM■■■■■■ M■ M■■■■ E■■■■■■■■s.■■... s....■..t■..s■t■.s.■.s■/. 1■.■.■■ t■■ ■E ■■ ■ ■ ■ ■■ ■ ■ ■tM ■■M.■■■■■■■.■■■■■ ■...■...s.■t....■....tt..■.■.■M■ M■■■■■M■■■ MM■■M OM MMO■■■■■■■■ E ■MM■.■M.M.■ ■M■ ■t■M.ME■MMMEMSM■ ■ iE■■E M■■ MM■■■ MU■■■■■■ E■■■■■E/■i■M■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■.. ummu ■..EOM..■■ ■s■■ ■■MOM ■MO■■■E ■M ■■M■ ■■■M■■■i ■ i ■■■■■■■ EM.... MMM E. ■.M..M.M. .MMM.MMMM■MMS■■MMMEM■. MME. MMMMM M..■■.M.■ ■MEM■■MM■■■■■■.■M.EMEEMM.■■EME■ ■ 1:. M■ MM M. MMMM■■ ME■ MEME.■■■.■ EE M■■ M■■Ei■■ M■■■■ M■■ M■M■■i■E■.■■■ M■ ■ ■MMM ■ ■OSOM ■M.t■M■M ■MM■ ■.M..sM■ MGM ■ ■ ■■ ■s ■MME■■.■ ■ME■■ MME■■■■■■■■■■■.■.■.■..s. MM■ MM ■■ssmOmmSMMMS ■ ■MMus.i■■i..t ■i ■MOM. ■MOM■MMOMMMMM■ . i■■ M■■M MM■.i. M. MMMM■ MMM■ MM.■■ ■■■■■■■.■■.■.t...■■■.■.■.■■M■E■ M■ M■■■■. ■■■■M■E■■■■■■■■.■MEEE.MMEE■M■E■ ■■■■■ s■ s■ MSE■ M. MM.s M.■.. ...■ M. E■■■■E■. M..■■■■ E■■■M■ M■ ME■ M■ M■■. sMM■■■■ ■■MMS.M■ ■s.■■■ ■ ■ii■■ ■M■i ■■. ■■is ■..i■■ME ME■■ M■ M■ M■ MMMMM M■ MM.■■ M■■ sMM■ Mt■ M■s■■E■E M■■■ MM■■■■■ M■ M■ M■■■ ■MOM■■.MMMO■■MMMM■■■■MS■s■■MMS■ ■■■ ■M■■■..■M■M■■.■■ ■ ■■E■ME■ ■E■ ■■ ■■■ ■E■■■■ M■■■■ E■■■ M■■ MM■■■t■■■■■■■■■ ■■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■■iM■OE ■ ■ ■MMMM.MM ■ ■i.■ ■ t= .■ ■■■■■■■■■■ M■■■.i■ M.. O. M.■= M■■■■■■■■■■■■■ E■■■■■■ M■■.■■■■■t■■ M.■ O■ ■.tM.M■MM■■.■■t■s■■MM■s■sM■ M■ ■i ■■ ■■■■■.■■■.■■■■■■■■■E MM■ EM.■■■./■.E.■. M.■■■ M■E M.M■.■ M■ MMMM..■■.tE.■ ■■O.MMMMMMME ■O■.MMM.■ ■MM■.MMOE■ ■■ EE. M■..t■■ MM■ MM..i■ EMO.s M.■■ MM■ ME■. M■■■ M./■■■■■■■.i■■ M■■■■■■■■t■■■ ■■■ ■■E■.■■E■■E■■M■■■M■s■■■.■ ■E■ ■ s■■■■■■■■■■■ M■■■ M EM■■■■■■■■ E■■E■■■■ M■■■■■■■■■.■■ M■ sM■■■ MM■■ M■■■■ MS■ ■.i■■ ■■■.ES■ ■s■■■■■■ss■■M■■■■■■ ■..MIEN■■ MOMMO E.■■ MMM. MMMUMM■ M. M..■..i■i■..■. MMEM■ M■. M.■ M.■■s..M■ ■EM... ■ME..■.■M.M.. ■MS. ■M ■■ ■M■■ ■OMMEW O..t■....■..... M■■■■■■■■ M■t■■■t■■.■■■ Mt■■■ M■ M■.■■■■■■■■ t■ M■■■■ t■u■■■■....■t.t.EMEMME■■a■■E■E■ ■■■■■■A M■■■■■ M■■■■■M■■■■■E S■■■i■■■■.■ M■■ iO■ MMM■■■■ MM■ EM■ M■ M■■■■ E■■■■■ ■M■MMMMMMM ■■MM■MMMMMM■■■sM■MES■ Vii■■ M■■.i■t. u .s■ MM■.■■■■ M..■.■■ M■t M.■■■■■. M. M.■■.■■■■. ■M ■M..■MM■■■.M.MM. ■MS■s ■.M■.■MM ■■■■■MOM■ ■REMMOMOMMO MM.s..■. ■■■.■.■■■■■■■.■ M■■■■■■/■■■■■■■■■■..■ M■ M.■■.■■■.s.■ ■...■..M ■M■E■■M.■M■■■EM■sM.■s■■ i■■ ■M.\E\■ ■ ■■MMM■ ■I:- m ►i %ir,,mlu nrr777nv i■■■.■ M. E■ .■. M■..■■.. M..■■ E ■.M.■.■M■s■■s■.M.■.■M■M ■■MMM■M■ ■■ ■■■ .►�■►M■.II..M..►i.ii..■i■sr...■ tai.■ s.■■■. dM■■■■..■■ M■i■■ M■■i■■■.■■■■i ■■ /■■■/■■i■i■i.■M■■■E ■■■■■E ■■E■ iM■Mi, MNROOWOMM■r,■■ ■■M__3 ■ 777 TA MMMM.■■■■■■■■..■■■■..■ M■■ t....■ O■■ MM■MEMME.M■E.MM■M■■.■■■■s.■.■M■ M■■ ■M► ikemaMI1 ■E■ ■'/ ■ ■■■r!■..rmmi ■■■ M.■■■■■■■ sE■■ MM■■■ M■■■■■■E■■ MMO.■■ M ■■■.M.Ot.MM■.M■.E ■E.■■OEO..■Mh ■■■ M M ■,�O�M��MMOMEMMOM�M..■E = =a 7U■M■■■■■ MEM■■■■■■■■i■■■■■■■ M■ ■M■■■OMMOMM■■ ■■■OMOMMO■■.MMt■M■ E■■■ M■ M �E►■ ��i11■■.■■■t► A.■■■' j. M■t■ Mb> ��E ■■■ M■■■■ M■■i■..■■■ M■. M.. M. MMMM.■ MSMM ■.MMMSis. ■MMMMMMMMMMM■MMMMM■M■ ■,i■■■.■.mEm■►,mm■O■■tuum ummr__m► % Mnrr. ram.■ EE■. MM■t■■■■■ M■■.■■■■.■ ■■■■U E■ ■■■■■■■■ ■11■■■i■■■i11■11■M■ ■■■■■ �M■► MM In• AE..■ a■.■..■■■■ ut■■ ai■ md■■■■■.■E■■■■■■■. O■■■/■.■.■■■■■ ■■■■■■■■Mi■M■■O■M ■s■■■■■■■■■MMM ■■.M■LMMAIMAMMEMIAMOMti■ ■M ■n. ■MOMMI AW 7» 2■ M■■■■■■■ s■s■■■MM■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■■s■ ■ ■sM■.■ ■■moss■ ■sisM■■■ ■M..M■►`■..balMnMOMMail ■■ / s■■ mm■ M■■' IME E■■ GMM.■■ M■ M■...■E MMM■■■■■ M■.■.s ■■..■.■■E.MO.■.MESMMi■MMS.M■EEM ■■■■■MMORM■UMH MINNEM■■UMM■■UMME ►,■ M■ NIMMO■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■.■■ tt■■.■.. to ■.■MM...■..■■.M■M■ME■MMS■E■M■ ■■OMMOMMOOMMftNIWW . WWMO■. N.■.■. A■... ■■.s■■t■..■ME..s.■.■t.■...MINIM E■MS■ ■.■.t.M.s.s.sOOMMOS.E■■M ■t. ■ ■M.IMOMO��DO i. I A■MES /. t ■■►■■■ M.■./■.■■s■■■■ M■.■■ H ■■ ■■ M■■■■■■■ ■■■■ ■E ■.r..MM..EtME. ■■■■■MMM.M■ ■■■■■■■ommeMom■w! ►n■isoommu ■■■ M■ ME■■■■■■■■■■■.■■.■.■■■■ M■.■...■..■■ ■..M■M.■.■.■.M.sM.■.■.■■M.■M.M■ ■■■■■mmawma MIME ■iltM musi '\M■ M► 1E■■■ M■■■■ MMM■■. M. M■ O.■s■....■..■ ■ME. ■.MM...s■.s.■E..M.EEMMMME■■ ■MME■ ■■...■■.. s ilil: �E. t■ ��EM:: orii.:∎ I■.■■■■..■■.■■■■■..■■■■■■■■■..■■■■■■■■■ ■■..■.■■..t.M■■..■..■■..s.■ ■.■■ ■■■■■■■■■Mi OMOWNM■■ \Bras ! RIWZ I MMIE■■■ M■/ MM.■■■■■.■■ U■.. M......■. M..M..■..M. .. .■.■MSt■■■.■M■M.M■ ■.■ ■■. ■MMOM .:!MM■= •■■Es, ∎MMW mmia. - -•■ m ■ ■. M■■■ ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■.■ ■■■■■M ■■Mti■■■M■■■■■MS■.■ ■■11■E■ ■■..s...EE..�i11■.z.. ■sg∎ranaliz _ i■i : lrMi- nsiM■■■ MMM. M.■.... MMMS■ MMM MM ■MM■iM. ■■■MMM ■s■s.■.■■■.■■ ■ ■■ ■■■..■■■■■.■■ i1IE■■■ �' ���. :���A�: ■SS■ ��■si. ■�:-- � ■� ■�� ■ M■■ MM ■ ■ ■M ■ ■ ■ ■MM ■ ■ ■ ■ ■MM.M..MM ■ ■M ■ ■ ■■ ■MOM.■ ■ ■ .E..■■.■ ■ 1 11■■■ ■.■ -= ! ■MiM ■ ■. =cos ■:= :! =G iIs. : ■■■ ■■■ as IIu■. ■ ■ ■■0:::27.17:2!!!!.!!!! ■U.U ■ ■■■■ 11■■■■■ M7111 1■ ■■■ ■M■.. ■.S•�C■MM ■:�= ■iifi� ,.'-- ■■■ ■�_:•■■Gi.i� / .- ••�■ ■■ M■ ■■■■■■■■■■■■■i MEMO.■■■.s. ■.EtM■ ■: ■■■■■t■■si■■ EHMM■M ■..■�.� .iG�iiM.■.._ = =_= -- ■M■■■■ t■ MM■■■■■■■■■t■■.. ■ ■■ ■ ■E ■■ ■1111■/ 111■■■■■■■ ■■■.■■ ■M.sE ■■■ ■ ■■M■EM■11r<MME■■ - :...■.■■■ ■ ■ ■.. . ....� ■■MOM■ MME ■ ■EWHE.MMOM■M.MMMMO ■■M ■OMMOM ■■■■■■■■/■ M■■■■ M■■ ■.■.NM ■Mii ■ ■ ■■■■M ■■■■■■mm:. °° ■■■■■■■■■■■■ m O■■■■.■■ M■■ M■■.■.■■■M■ M■■■.... M■■■. E. E.■■ 11..■■ E■■■ ■ES.■E.■■■■ ■.M.=■ ■M■■E ■■iussE ■■ .M. MOMS.■ E■■■ IOO.■■.■.■■ M / ■■■MM■■■ ■A /E■ ■SsA ■A WOMM ■\ ■ ■ ■■t■■■ MOM■■ MOM■ ■ ■■M■■■ ■■ ■t.M ■EM■ ■MEMO■MEEE ■EM■ ■ ■■ M M■M.E. ■ ■WOMM.■■ ■.Et. ■.M ■.s■ ■M/ :r�% :! F &WAI 6..7 i11■ MS■■■ M■■ES. M■■■■ ■■ ■■ ■s■ ■s■sUMMEMEii■.■ ■.is ■ ■s■. 0 /0 ' 20 _ 30 40 50 CO TO 80 90 /00 'STREET �,,� ;74.. ;74.. ! ' +�` ` , ' 4 TIME 00141-1 00141-1 I !� t om 4 � ,� : t ` ct +ms �T " t Q�� .tee''• � Q i -tQ' a t f 33 e, - 4' - S' k omen FLOW �e • to ` * .e ! s Rr v + ~ + u � / O►. FROM Tlr wEYARK>I I Ilw 44 9 4 C-S . .4S •$D :Bap •36a 642 1 AI J .1v% 1.64 1q D 12 1.9'b 2.41, . T (. 4 s. ti° /= ,, � 7 = s za� Yb T, Zou��•l�:Go )' T,z �'�1ce?V�?� 7 _ trr13 -YSti-0 . - _ w f 40 _ 647- : 6.x •t . - . l aG •( •Y) X04- 71" (•82. (.5--) (•o•tv Z't3 , iz- 2 -4-t *Io 5,4ft D,�3 • C 444 -664 t �6 - t I r4 t .29 !•a 160 ! t -i3 24L. G�IFct! T�# Z iS.52 • 416 I . I ( 119 , I -10.-f \; ("1. 'b , 1(4 1.11 4,5 �T f;;�'1 ti -� 1•b4 1il �•:i e� 1Z1• (.,D7. ?.GL . ''t L -? ,io . 24 G BS .512 1'6 o 1 1, 1 1 75 15‘` 3.5D 7 T5 . # 6 14 .4 . •35 •t _1.32: •2 2Q14 IDs •2-I 1,58 3.r _ t O 4-b 13 Sop 3.21 • 4 3 2.4 1D -91, '13 164 $•1' 1.D1 14b IV 5•by - •32I 11 3 41 7, •b 3 13o , • 21 2,01 A9 'N 1. 314 , 1.0 .1 17" $.(,,i? 3.7.) 4-1L 11 1 •63 .yo •oz's _ , 11 11403 Ilq 31s \.v , 1$ 5'6B - 3•2,1 1 C-..t;Q. • .4 I 1419 3.15 fro , 31.S 1( S• 3.2-I 1 r re rM4 •b4 .93 •576 3•bgi`1 , IlM •� 1)y( W•u5 ( 41 it" X1.16 ttI b . 4 - 4 1 1 r 'I,2$ .P 5 iv1 c6 •°I1� tz . C -1 -I 14,4 ,17.4 ,- - i , 3o 24�� 1� •n - , ,t •9' x.03= T fol -qo ).41 , 6 5 (1 24 � M•b5 16.17 T 1 5.1.1 -4 .z.1.. I. 3L •�< 41- V'?" RETURN FREQUENCY I.Q. Ir. CURVE fa • . )TORN ` � (EWER FOR Q CIO COMPUTATION �,/ SU // (.►, g A ENGINEERS I ,5w wee vinry 149 • 5• . w»n s�'r p'Oir 1206) 2554100 rim (2061 MOMS DES'S sil / 7 4/. - S ENS " INSET ! G7 c 77L�. i05 �. a LOTS 2 AND 3 OF TUKWILA SHORT PLAT NO. 88-1-SS, RECORDED UNDER KING COUNTY RECORDING NO 8807210416; SITUATE IN THE COUNTY OF KING, STATE OF WASHINGTON • • . . , , • . . . . . . • , ■ • ` • , . , . , • • . . , •. .... . ■ ' • • , . • . . , • . . . . 1 , • . , • , CALCULATION'S PLAN SUBMITTAL f. ARCH lS 199 WIREW/110 :. OCT 9 1990 CITY OF . "I ur, PLANNING DEPT. Floor Wall Window . Stylights Floor • •�__.... ••••••••••• n .er�by . - From Table Area U x A L U t A is OT U Value" (Sq. Ft.) T Slab Perimeter Inr.tAtionw R J From TRblos 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, WnahIngton Sttlto Energy Codo PI1OPOSCD DESIGN Assyrnbly U(1) Area(1) ,. Doors hiC C t ire -ASS Boot Ceiling • 12 Iab Perimeter Insulation (3) UIUA CM CULATION. FOR PLAN SUBMITTAL HoHar'✓oOr Su/Te .s , 72/ a/GA / G IAs11/vt inAJ Address: BU /4 0/A/ .._.., THISRMAL PERFORMANCE CRITERIA P OA9 -3700 Nett Typo: Electric nesistanC© Climatic Zone: #1 Other U 0 11— • 72C' _ 72 (1) Calculated (2) Proposed total must be equal to or loss than the criteria totd (3) Must bo equal to or greater than criteria R - value CflITERIA TOTAL 5w,3 noW ,P11OPOSEC TOTAL (2) 7.3 3Q le i 0 �oF WA y � � �/• • • ir • • ; 7.1 1 • 1 V) NA�. 4ly,o4r..a'+e. M,ytcrial ThiC }:Hess inches R /In Thicknoss II Value) Solid II value , . Cavity e" a F/41 -- d'. /7 cO, /7 P[./� s'iTf i ✓A.11. .4f smY62 - 2 .Z /7 ' /7 Aft S TU4 .?//.,(- 4 /r ,....,- ••_• .11, gg bATT /,v YL.4 i /oAl 4 3.25 / .3.0 /N5 /Df= d /-=/4 /V — •-- C>, 4£.3 0, __,._ _,.... r Summation R Valuos /4. J8 Z y, U . lift !2, ae, 4 /2 U /UA CALCULATION .I"On PLAN f;U)3MITCAL Elamont: .144 L L. r . Framing Ratio ( if Applicahlo) ri D /6" SKETCH C F ELEMENT Nolo: Moho coplos. of thl`; m for ovory building ofomont. U Vatuo for CIomonl (Avg.) m 6 B5. 0, 0 »t 7 , 41 ) - X J = 42 06 r f /sT // Aron of Elnmont" = 2 700.54 "• Fr Aroa of Element if: nnl nrer► after openings such as doors, windows and skylights have bnbn subtractod, MalErial Thickness Inches R /Jn Thickness R Value Solid R. value • . Cavity SN(iGe 4 Ss /Jr Aou631 f'G^ 4. /2.0 _. . _. .. ., Summhtion R Values // 20 u 1/f1 60, 133 y II j 1 1V :16 L'I4 r, Flomont: Id/ A/ory / _,„__ r „ Framing Antic (if applicable) SKETCH OF CLCMFNT Noto: Maio copies of this form for every building olomont. U Value for E:lornent. (Avg,) =0, 4 3 Area of Clement' u iru 1I‘ I.'I.w r'J 72e U /UA CALCULAT(oN•FOrt PLAN SUE3MIrrAL • Area of Clement is not won After oponin9s such Is% doors, windows, and skylights have boon subtracted. ..' I 1 US: Material Midmost: Midmost: R /In Thickness I Value, Solid n value . , C a v i t y O /✓? VDC: ,-lGly t ' % /7 17,17 001 M %2,<'/4 / ` S N/ A 4 4i O, 44? i? ccf 7,r4/5.56.5 ._ .4. gg spa AY /co/VI mi.s i/1)7 3'O — ..— VLNTJ47/ A /G ...... �, 5 e i ' Yt', &',4ez> c•i-c; 5 /6 ' ' . 6 0,6g // alA ' /411 t , - ' , 0i 74 5ummntion f1 Valuos 32, 2 9.74 u = lin 0, 43 eve) { :1;6 tie ; FROM D I M I TR 1 DENOPULOS I NC TO t:tomont: R G'p Framing Ratio ( if applicable) (2, 07 U /UA CALCULATION 1 011 PLAN t;UfMIT'fAL . • • SKETCH OP ELCMaNT Note; Marco coplos of thl, form for ovory building olontenl. U Value for Element (Avp.) _ 93 x (' 0.9 7o, 07 a-0, / � - a t 9 N of Clamant" = 6 4°'64FT 'r Noa of Ilomonl is not aroa after oponincgs such f►s doors, windows and ,kylights have boon subtracted. 9778002 P.03 J�Sa1ef {.11 Thicknoss Inches R /tn ThIckne;s R V SnIId 11 vHiue , Cavity ROOD ,DOV c3OL /.to C. '/1 625 • __ - ..........., .yam r....• ....... -- ^r.• 5ummntion n \wow.; 3, 126 u = 1 /n 432 "I'Irif[" "1H ^l:fJ r-j LIP," .. G I I`I l i r 1 . UCI'IUf-LR LI I IVY,. , iu Flamont: Fr�mtr 9 Antic) ( it AppGcal)I(.) . U Votuo' tor .faomont (Avg.) .- Arou of Elornnnt 72 842 fir, U /UA CALCULATtON•rOfl PLAN cUIoMtrrAL 9KCTCH OF ELEMENT Nolo: Mako coplos of this form for ovory bulldinj olormnt, Aroa of Clement i; not woo a1tv oponin js su ctt aS door, Wif,iiQWS and slyli j)tts have boon subtracted, • Assembly U(1) Mea(1) U x A UxAxOT Wall A L769 7 2 J i . 2 � w_536 c/7 Windows e% e3 w ,e /4a /793 /x,757 • _._ • Do ers .........- •.•. .-- h......- . -+.... w+-r_ .. Roof Ceiling 0, 035 3OD 22 / 1323 Skylights .—•- •--- -- Floor T "— -"•" . ,PROPOSED TOTAL (2) /ZD '97 l`il-+i ;-.04 -1:17U . . U • . C rnU i i Li l l'fl I i< I Utl'lurULU•o . t ILL I u . '1((bLUUd' r . . U` L.1101 vvvv ---. Ceiling /Kopf Floor U /UA CALCULATION FOR PLAN SUBMITTAL • /GME kiaoa s,ui7 s , 7/.'4 /GA � QA5i -/ /PVC 2vA1 At$drosR: Bolt D/A/ 6, )54- As somby [nbP6rfrn8thr Insulation (3) THERMAL PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Hoot Typo: Eloctric Rosistance Climatic Zono: t Other II �• 4�• From Table Area U Ube' G. 25 O, (23;> Slab Porimntor Insulation" From Tables 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, WnehInglon Stale Energy Code PFtO'OSI D DESIGN • T (1) Calculated (2) Proposod total must bo equal to or loss than the critoria total (3) Must be equal to or garter thtin Criteria R - Vr)ve I (Sq. rt.) UxA UxAxOT CRITERIA TOTAL • { -3 2 y,•zo G�3 oo 72.o /32' Material Thickness Inches R /In Thickness R Value Solid R value . Cavity O 7...S /L E F /G l'1 --- .-- O /7 ,i)... /7 Pt/if /I•.W ith zY 4 8L .2 4 . /7 ' /7 J(k o 47-4/6 2i/X II -- -- 4,5A M77 " /Ns1/L•.e1 i /c J 4 3.25 /3, a INSIDE f'/Z. M ._.. I •_-_ a ‘ ez 6g Summation fi um: /4,54; 4 % U = im 0,O(. e), /2. UFUA CALCULATION FOR PLAN SUf3MIVfAL Elomont: ./&JA L L. SKETCH OF CLEMENT Note: Mao coplks of this form for ovary bulidtng element. Framing RAtio ( if applicable) %I a /5 U Volvo for I.iornont (Avg,) AB % ) � U ' , /5 t 7, 40 O. 067 rr 7-11 r - � , No of Clomont's a /e/ /Pt nV. f % Aroa of Clcrno►tt i, not Area altar openinros such Al door,; windovVs and skylights havo been subtracted. MAR -14 -1990 03:03 FROM DIMITR1 DEMOFLILOS INC TO Elomont: Ai /A/DOW Framing Rn;io ( lf applik:iblr•.) U V &&uo for Clornont (Avg.) 70, A..3 • U/UA CALCULAT 6N•10n PLAN 8uriMtrrAL 9KCTCH of r_LCMI;NT Nolo; Maio coplos of IhIS form for ovory building olemon!, Aron of ClomontV . 2. � / 6 O .d4 / Aroa of Clornont Is not Aron alter openings such As doors, YtindosiM and slrytights have been suhbncted. ir 9778n02 f . t /Y Material Thickness . Inches Ruh Thickness . n \Nun • Solid R value. .. Cavity s /t/aZe 'LASS !..//7 AcW131 E C' G/I Z /N 4 • /4 11 x.10 4444.4. - o 4 +1 Summntlon R vmuc9 4.20 . U. im. ,,133 • MAR -14 -1990 03:03 FROM DIMITR1 DEMOFLILOS INC TO Elomont: Ai /A/DOW Framing Rn;io ( lf applik:iblr•.) U V &&uo for Clornont (Avg.) 70, A..3 • U/UA CALCULAT 6N•10n PLAN 8uriMtrrAL 9KCTCH of r_LCMI;NT Nolo; Maio coplos of IhIS form for ovory building olemon!, Aron of ClomontV . 2. � / 6 O .d4 / Aroa of Clornont Is not Aron alter openings such As doors, YtindosiM and slrytights have been suhbncted. ir 9778n02 f . t /Y Material Thickness Inches 11/1n Thickness R Vilue Solid n vnit;e • . csuAty _..r.. ---- -- l� /7 .. 0/1/7s /DG:. f2-7L-Al e: /7 °eV: MAih<' /4/ -- smi = S Pz. V. /_e v 6-,,t. /�,,� it l� 4i 4' /7 ! 44 4 77 3g _ Sp/QA Y F0.4%! pit/. Uw (Tien/ 30 ..._. VE//77C a T A 77/ a - 2 6 ' ''Y',. 130,481.) C Gr 5 / 6 l / 0 , 66 0 , 6 ( 5 kt/,5/.l /4C 1 t . 0/ 7 .. Summation Ft values d .2, G 2 7.7d U = 1/11 0, 03 0, /0 MAR -14 -1990 02;27 FROM U1MITR1 DEMOPULUS INC IU U /UA CALCULATION PLAN t~Uri MITT AL Etomont; /-?DO,= SKETCH OF ELCMENT Moto: Make copies of this form for every building olemon!, Framing Ratio (if Applicable) a a, 07 U Value for Ctom (two.) (6:2, 9✓ x. Q, 0.9 (0,07 x'O. /O)'° a 0-'9 Nl o of wlornnnt`' _ 1 j1� �G� / Aroa of Elumont is not nron after oponin9s such os door., windows end skylights have+ bean subtractod. Assembly U(1) Area(1) U x A UxAx(T . "tall !, �A9 /c'�.2a .... X 3 4 78 Window F '3 /sac) /.f • 0. 96 . M Doors ..— — -- ,,._... Roof Coiling l >, C�.�S , 250 — / `�' //0 ' Skylights — �--- Floor '-- • PROPOSED TOTAL. (2) / 4t 5 Wall !lab Perimeter Inculntion" U 1 1'I I I I: l UL'I'IUI"ULUL+ i lL I U U!UA CALCULATION FOR PLAN $UBMITTAL • /` /DMCy✓OC�b SLJ 7= s , 72/k W /CA , I AIN /A/r 2DAJ Acfdross: &'J /4l> /A/C-:7 2 THE.RMAL PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Heal Type: electric f osistance Climatic Zone: Ni Other It _.._maw, .. ,.- A..Pml From Table� " U Value' I (Sq. Ft.) U x A tJ x ,1 x pT a 25 /2420 1 � I c ( /. 6.3c:!G t:eilin9/Raof D,d3.> ✓6 a0 /$q //OZ.. Floor CRITERIA TOTAL / /e 733 R- From Tables 4.2, 4.3, 4-4, Washington Stftto Energy Dodo PfOPOSED DESIGN • E f olab Perimeter Insulation (3) JR_ _ 1 (1) Calculated (2) Proposed total must be oc;vr+l to or less than the criteria total (3) Must be equal to or greater tht+n criteria R - Vaiue • i ,LIt Material Thicknoss Inches R /In ThIcknes's R V;i ue Solid R vniue •. Cavity 0/17S/06 Fig. /V •._ 0./7 0, /7 IN.A.MIR _iA.1 G 4 S.S, 81 2 * 2- /7 Z; / Afrwo ..c 7vo 2 , , ,,. x 1/ --- -- 3g M7l /N.WL4 i /on/ #1 /3, 42 /Nsoc.- /c74 M -- � C; 6 c9, 6 S - ■••......,.._.•••■•••*. Summation n valuo, /4,f.78 7 q6 U : 1/R . - 0 06 0,M ter.. Framing Ratio f if applicable) benn subtraclod. U /UA CALCULATION FOR PLAN svriMlrrAL Element: wA L L , SKETCH OF ELEMENT Note; Moko coplos of this form for ovory building olomonl. ■ Nov of Elomont'` R /G", 2e Q9-, w Aroa of Clumont i, AM hron altar openings such M doors, windows rod skylights havo U vAluo for riomont (Avg,) n C" F5 00 9- - /6 / /;, / lf7 eX 7 r'U Malcral Thickness Inches . R /In Thickness 11 Value solid fi value • • Cavity N4lG 4"L.4. 5 W odel.E 4'I-./ Z /NC . «4 / 2.0 -,__ _ L... -- ..... -. , ----. _ . Summation R Valves /, 20 U = 1 /(1 40, 133 MAR -14 -1990 02:29 FROM DIMITR1 DEMOPULOS INC. TO 9778002 F.10 • Elomonti AnNDC2W Framing Ratio (if applicable) n U Value for Element (Avg.) O. U /UA CALCULAT(oN FOR PLAN s(ffMirrAL Kf1"CH OF ELEMENT Nofo: Mcsico Ooplus of fibs form for ovary building olomoni. /lroe of Element'' _ R470�.4?A1 Material Thickness Inchon R /In Thickness 11 V,,Iue Solid (1 value . Cavity OL /ins /Z FVG/y G: /7 p 1 7 '00f= H#1 /2-X/4 Z �' s i, t 4 if ' Pt Yk/c ex.) mac.: c iC ��r , i/ a t7 . -. f. 77 43g A' cc?f ?X usse :s opf 1 Y f /Ns-Vi/vie *5o -- YE /774472_V A77 / c- -- 2. �'Y�', .644/I'D c. G, 5 7 6 ii O, 4.6 O, 4 //vorDE /4/v r_, v, .7 . f3ummation fZ Valuos .5.2, S2 9.79 U 1/R r, 03 Of /U U /UA CALCULATION•FOfi PLAN SUnnM1Vt Ai. Elomont: A' Framing Rntio ( if appticabte) 7, 1 07 SKETCH OF ELEMENT • Note: Mako coplus of this form for ovary building atom rt. U Vafuo for Elomont (Avg.) a (i), 93 xQ o) 4 (a, 07 XO. /0) 0.:35 Nos 01 ClomontN = 6:250 st2 Aroa of E)emont )s not Area after oponin01 Such as door,, windowa and skylights have boon .ubtractod. Assembly U(1) Area(1) U x A UxAxDT Wall A • 0:1990 482 2 it 9U Windows F g3 /// 5` V2 S c:5V Doors 0. 32 .336 108 6 Roo( Ceiling' 0,025 62 a'0 �220 /3 /9 Skylights --- • .t.� Floor -- • ,PROPOSED TOTAL (2) _ /O4/Q4 Assemby mall Ceiling /Roo( Floor $lab Parimntor Insulation" U /UA CALCULATION FOR PLAN SUBMITTAL TUX X /✓ /t A /,I , /' /mV r; % Addroaa: 130/ Z. D /n /C C - 5 THERMAL PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Heat Typo: gEloctric flosistanco Climatic Zono: I Other TJ • From Table Area U x A tJ x A x oT U Value" (Sq. Ft.) "From Tables 4 -2, 4.3, 4.4, Wttshington Stttto Energy Codo p leb Perimeter Insulation (3) (i) Calculated (2) Proposed total must be equal to or lass than the criteria total (3) Must be equal to or greater than ctitnria 11 Value a 25 6.990 /75 /o5 i 0,1035 6280 220 /3 PROPOSED DESIGN • CRITERIA TOTAL R^ Mntcri�l Thicknass Inches Ft /In Thlcknuss II Valun Solid f1 vrtlur Cavity PL4$.z? 1✓,�►LI Ass 1 y 2 • 2. /7 Z /7 liATT /NS1/1.4 i 'OA/ „p" 3, 25 /3, a INSIDE /=/G NJ 0,c . 0, G Aron of Ginmanl" = U /UA CALCULATION FOR PLAN t;UI3MITCAL Elomont: x,14 L L — SKFTCH OF ELI!MF.NT Not (); Moko coplus of this form for ovory building olomonl. Craming Antio (if applicabin) p Summnlion R Vnluos 1/fl U Vnliin for Elomont (Avg.) : r ' FJ X a 00 9- 3l 42. f 6 qo x No,a of Clornont is not Aron alter opanings such As (100i window^ Arid s bean suhtractod. 458 Z (I6 Framing Ratio ( If applicable) � ov I3L c ql- Z / SKETCH OF ELEMENT Nato; M ko coplos of this form for ovary building olomont: Thickness Inches Summation f1 VMuos ?' AroA of Clornont is not nron : after oponin s . such ns door's' skylights have boon subtractod; /, 2o 13.3 Flleintont: c Framing f1ntlo ( if applicable) M ate ri al 001-100o,g •orL/D ct) ■■•••••• 0.1101. U/UA CALCULATION FOR PLAN suntwiTAL . 9K17.TCH OF ELEMENT„ Nolo: KIM copies of This form for ovory building olorimni. •••••••••••• U Veiue for Elomont (Avg.) n 0.. 3 2 Arou of Clement* = 6 Thickness Inches t . •■•■•■■••••••■■■■■■■••4 ..••••■■•■■••• ....Summation - 11 %litres 11/In Thickness per.M. ......•■•■••■■■•• iro■•••• fl Volvo gad • 4••■•••• a /25 e? Aroa of Elornont not Aroli after opoolngs such M doors, wIndowo And skylights haYo bean subtractod. ..11.velue • Cavity • Material Thicknoss Inches R /In - Thickness 11 .Volvo Solid fi valor: Cavity OL/,75 /DE: F/G /V 1, /7 ‘7, /7 OC)/ Mm a= m C - = ‘2, 41. t 44 . PLY PEc.K 5 / 4 // . a' /7 77 4. 3 g j?COf 7 'L5SE3 ASP • AY F-04/1 ,NR/1/V2 ' 30 -- VEN771 1 T/ D A 777 c. - . , 6 Ye, BOA AV) cLc.; � e , C. && 0, 6g /,V /L\E f /LM t 7� 017 Summation Ft Values S ?, 0`` 9 70 u = 1/n 0 03 n, /U U /UA CALCULATION FOR PLAN >;UnMlrrAL Flomont: A"196" F C ' S SKETCH OF CLEMENT Note: Mnko copios of thIS form for ovory building alometit. Framing Ratio ( applicable) . ,, 07 U Value for E Iornont (Avg.) rz 1, 93 x p, 0--9 Area of Moment" . _ (; 2 2 (0,07 07 xd, /c?, G; 67- 35 x Aroa of CI'>mont is not . nrott after oponin9s such .r►s dears, windowc And skylights hayo been subtracted. Enorgy Codo v/&I Ceiling /Root . Floor [Slab Porimntor Insulation" 'From Tables 4 -2, 4 -3, 4 -4, Wnshington St£tto Energy Codo Wall Windows; Doors Roof Coiling Skylights Floor F Ilab Perimeter Insulation (3) U /UA CALCULATION FOR PLAN SUBMITTAL /GM/! =4✓c10b SLJ /J`L`.'.; TL/�C�G✓ /C.A / ✓A�,' / /NC-.; 717AA/ � Aitdrooa: 13/J /L /i1 / Assembly U Value' (Sq. Ft.)From Table Area U x A U x A x OT � 0,25 432o /o13e, 6480 1 4',O35 2S80 go _.._ 590 --1 Assernbly THERMAL PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Moat Typo; 'Electric Rosistanco Climatic Zono: Other PFiOPOSCD DESIGN U(1) 4 06 9 F; B3 a 035 18- (1) Calculated (2) Proposed totaJ must be equal to or lass than the criteria total (3) Must be equal to or greater than criteria R - Value CRITERIA TOTAL 7020 Area(1) URA UXAxOT 4 2 r2 294 / 770 52C) 43z 2Selo /6 8 322 25O go 5' ill ,PROPOSED TOTAL (2) ..243 Material Thickness Inches R /In Thickness fZ Value Solid fi value. Cavity UL/ ?S /DE F/ 11 _ . _ • O. /7 ' 4, /7 PL4.s'iE/P 1 J4LL A z/lov 1 ' 2 2. /7 2. /7 wive s Te,D 2ix�Ja it r_ ._ 43 _ M L TT /NS[/4 T/ e)n/ 3, 26 /3,0 INSIDE f/L /'/ ---- 6 4E3 0,6g Summation R Values /4.58 7, q6 u = l/n n,ol•, 4 /2 Flomont: JAI L L Framing Ratio (if applicable) . a /5 U Value tor. Element (Avg.) Neu of Element" = 43 2 0 U /UA CALCULATION FOR PLAN SUIlMIrrAL SKETCH OF ELEMENT Nato: Wilco copies of this form for ovory building olomdnl, (6,F 5 X0,00 -4, /5,1(0,4 -- D, 067 r/f Area of 'Element is not area after openincgs such ps doors, window grid syiyhts have, been subtracted. '1 "U i:i OrtCu'Yu+ Elomont: Ai/ NDr)4./ Framinj Ratio (if applicable) Material U /UA CALCULATION FOFi PLAN SUfMIT'rAL SKETCH OF ELEMENT Note: Moho copies of this form for ovory building oloment. Thickness Inches f1J (IJJIJYJlt� ”LJEL GG. 1 `Jb:1 . Summation 11 Values U. 1/n E- R /In ii Value Thickness Solid /. 20 /.. 20 h3 • U Valuo for Elomont (Avg.) a n, g3 Area of Element". = 5 Aroa of Elornont is not nron after oponings such as doors, _windows and ss•,yliyhts havo been Subtracted, 11 value Cavity G • J1JI "1'1 I_ . UJ Fr aming Antio ( it opplic:►bin) Material oraL) . D? 601.40 Cf( �11 �/ (2o/ Aron of Glomant " r /4 2 URA CALCULATION FOft PLAN SUMMIT'fAL SKrrcH OF ELt MF:NT Nolo: Moist) copios of this form for ovory building olomcmt. • U.V*4, for Elomortt (Avg.) 0. 3 2 Thicknoss Inches if 1 /f1 Win Thicknoss Uummotion 11 valuos ii Volvo Solid 3, /25 1; 3Z Afoa of Ciornont t ^. not ArOA after oponings such. AS. door windows And skylights havo b >n subtractod, fl vi luc Cavity Material ThicE:noss Inches R /In Thickness R Value Solid R vrtlun Cavity . 0077s /DE: / /G, 1 l: /7 a /7 'nnf HA 72 I sn77% th. 4`f t', 44 PGYA/c(Ao 2Ee/z• 5/� a 77 77 4. 3g ?c-cf �i/.sses LPRA Y F041 /Ns'//i 4Tic 30 -~ YEA/77t 4 Iry A 7r /c — 2, 'Y', BOARD etc.; " !a "65 0,6g /N5/L1E ,c /GM 4 4 & Summation R Values 32, 4;2 9.74 U :: l /n. a 03 , e?, /U. U /UA CALCULATION FOR PLAN SUI3MITrAL RIumont: R(7.6)F 9KRTCH OF ELCMENT Nolo: Mako copies of thit1 form for ovory building olonlcinI. Framing Nolo ( If applicable) O 07 U Value for Elomont (Avg.) /P7, 9,3 x a Off) (007 )rD, /02 =7 t 4'3. Noe of t:Immnnt* 2 S 20 Aroa of flornont it not nron after oponings such AS doors, windows And skylights _havo been subtractod. Assembly U(1) Area(1) UxA UxAxDT Wall ,-. P76 e.9 7 3) . 3/59 Windows t; g?.} g4 Q rid? -97/ o Doors Root Ceiling 0 07.35 4230' /40 - eafr. Skylights _ "`^• Floor — --- TOTAL (2 (2) ,P110POSED _ 130 Assembly from7ablo Area UxA UxAxOT U Value` (Sq. FL) � �_ a 25 �`i'S ~ C,Q �>' / �'fi ..�.. w.w . . .�- ��.-.•� AIM H v' /aII Coiling /Roof Floor 02:32 FROM DIMITRI DEMOPULOS INC TO Atldross: Slab Perimeter lnc:alntion" UIUA CALCULATION. FOn PLAN SUBMITTAL /aoME:14 0a $Q/7Z rl/KiV /G,r1 / W ASN "A' 7r Al & J D /n/ ,a 3 THERMAL PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Ho :it Typo; Eloctric nosistance Climatic Zone: U Other II 'From Tables 4-2, 4.3, 4.4, Wrt9hlr gton State Energy Codo L SIab Perimeter Insulation (3) R .. PFlOPOSCD DESIGN • - -J (1) Calculated (2) Proposed total must bo oqu& to or Inns than the criteria total (3) tAust be equal to or greater than Cliteri,l R - Value CRITERIA TOTAL 9778002 P.17 1..., Iv, U! .. .. ..v /,G.I 77‘-' Matcrijl Thickness Inches R /In Thickness t Value Solid R value . Cavity Obi S7,04- F/4 N _ — 0. /7 •<0, !Z. P4 4.s' ;T/c' A/414 i1 ssofez 2 2. /7 : /7 k/eoa TUD E. //_e, 4 /, r-- -- di, 3 &1 T /A/se/L-47 4' 3, 26 /3.0 .-- JNSii7r" , AI _. — C Z.E3 0,6a _ M M.._ - - ..._. ♦ •••■ 4.6.60.~.4* ♦ h Ire ti. - ♦raw♦ * tir...wr ••r� Summation l Values /4.58 7� 9 u v tin (, ye, A, /2 Elomont: 144 LL Framing Ratio ( if applivibla) n p 45 /voa of Elomont" 74, 3ca , fr U/UA CALCULATR NF0IZ PLAN sw3MITFAL 8KCTCH OF CLEMENT Not(); Mako copies of This form for ovory building olomenl, U Vntur for Elomont (Avg.) a g✓ X C; O ) -/- 7, /6(o/ � / : t2 e? ? 8 �• r • " Area of f.lomont iS not rvOA • after openings . such es doors, windows and s1,yli9iits have • boon subtractod♦ Framing Ratio (If Applic:+ble) U Value tar Element (Avg.) ut O, 63 Area of. (:Iom(MK ciee. 1.) 1 IIIC TO 9770002 P.19 UIUA CALCULATION rOii PLAN 13UE3Mr rrAL rlomont; ,14./ /N004./ OKr1'CH OF ELCMC:NT Noto: Malto coplos of this form for ovory building olomont. 9 d 4 ?f Aroa of Clnmant is not nron after oponincgs such as doors,. windows and skylights have been :uhtracted. Material Inches Inches R uin Thickness fi Voluo solid ft value • . Cavity N6;CE r '[..d5S AJ7 cvezE 6-'LA.z /Ne5 1 l /.20 - *I. , - 5 ummntion r Values �, 2o u = ,II1 ; h3 Framing Ratio (If Applic:+ble) U Value tar Element (Avg.) ut O, 63 Area of. (:Iom(MK ciee. 1.) 1 IIIC TO 9770002 P.19 UIUA CALCULATION rOii PLAN 13UE3Mr rrAL rlomont; ,14./ /N004./ OKr1'CH OF ELCMC:NT Noto: Malto coplos of this form for ovory building olomont. 9 d 4 ?f Aroa of Clnmant is not nron after oponincgs such as doors,. windows and skylights have been :uhtracted. Material Thicknoss Inches R /In Thickness rt Volvo Solid fl value .. Cavity '/1 ! '1 4 ar MCI /A — 5i i(/ P/ Y.4/00v 1a oft szs a 4 77 — r, 77 4. :3x t? COf AC/ 5E 4Pf,4 r f24t1 /A/sal /Vie D YEA/771,47 /.77'/x. -- 2, 0 WAND ez-6; 5/6" 1, 66 0,6g /M.51)E F/LJI r, 7� 0, 7 . Summation fl Values 32, � 9.70 U a 1/n 0 D3 C. /O • f;fomont: U/UA CALCULAT1nN•FOl PLAN sunmiTTAL 9KETCH OF ELEMENT Nolo: Moko copies of this form for ovory butiding olomont. Framing natio ( if .applicable) 7. 0 , 0 7 U VDU) for Clomont (Avg.) (6 93 ;C a 03) •L (a 07 x'U. /o) Aroo of (Elomont" 72 42.30 6-�, Aroa of Elomont is not ruoo titer openings such as doors, windowt. nnnd sl ilghts.havo boon subtracted, • a o'35 , TnTai a -3m Assembly U(i) Area(1) tJxA UxAkDT Wall a o49 /6• (,x0 7J5 Windows E; e3 /fi 00 / 91 0. ! 61 D oors . ........ ...� ••■• Roo( Ceiling ' • a, 035 525 e) / / /0.. • Skylights -- "—' Floor '-- ---- • ,PROPOSED TOTAL (2) /1,466 ••,. • Geilin9 /Roof Sla la (3) t.i /UA CAt CULATIQN FOR PLAN 6UDMITrAL Addross: B / /// D /A/� g THERMAL PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Boat Typo: b Perimeter Insulation" •J "From Tables 4.2, 4 -3, 4 -4, Washington Stato Energy Codo Pt1OPOSEb DESIGN (1) Calculated (2) Proposod toly must bo equal to or loss than the criteria tote. (3) Must be equal to or greater then criteria 11 — value CRITERIA TOTAL /n�rc l - ✓c��v uin TL/K!-✓ /L -A � 4 ./A 7t/ /4/ rr.rk/ ;Itf electric Rosistanco Climatic Zono: MI Other II From Table Area 1 nsremby U Value` (Sq. Ft,) I U x A ��� i TT1 U x A x OT � Wall 0, 25 /2-1.20 1.3/()5• !— AS 6•3a61 0,035 5",2 5'C, /i3 9 //oz.. Floor J9A 73.E MaiNrinl Thickness Inches. R /In Thickness R V;+lue Solid R value • • Cavity OUTS /pei F- /4- /1 -- — A. /7 c, /7 pi 4.�iZ/t' I✓A•LL A Ss,i 6'l v .4 # 2, /7 X: /7 Nero 74/D 2 4 x .. // _ ._. -I4 78 bArr /Ns//G4 i /oA/ .-fl 3, 26 /3, V . _. /N$ /tar- ,c -- .— C, ze 0, 6 A — U /Un CALCULATION FOn PLAN sWEIMIrrAL Rlomont: 1 L L Framing Ratio (if .applicable) • 9KF TCH OF ELCMENT Note: Moko coplJs of this form for ovory building olomont. :iummation R Values U 1/R X. 68 ?: <l�> n, 06 O, /? U Wild() for rlomont (Avg,) n P X!'. 007 / xo, / o 06 q • Bra AroD.of ClomonV /C, 2O • q iz, x . -Aroa of Clumortt. io nr,t Mort aflor openings such. i+s door bean subtracted. hrsatcri,�l Thict• :noss Inches Run Thickness l Valun Solid n vpluP • . Cavity .VA/4L8- a'4.45,5 A./T 0ll8l c 4'i.A Z_ /N45 V /l / Zc — ---- ...,,.w._...._. SurmmAtio» 11 Valuo, % U_1m 0, i3- MAR - 14 -1990 02:29 FROM DIMITRI DEMOPULOS INC TO Frnming Antio (if npplic:+blc) U Voluo for filomont (AYE,) Q, 63 Aron of (Ilomnnt "' / 4 GaoJe flT: U /UA CALCULATi6N FOR PLAN SUroMIT'('AL EIomon t: jc/% 1.r1"CH OF ELCMT NT Not(); Moho copies of III, form for ovory building o)omtiltt. • 9778002 P.10 fvla teriaf ThiOness Inches: R /In Thickness fl Value Solid fi vt+lue .. Cavity a �-�GM MA G, J7 /7 "Oaf: MA <' /A L �- S.V/ 0.175 PLY I/000 .i)c =ems 5 /w," a ?? .._.. 1, 77 4;,3g fi c C , 2 f r / e / 5 S ,57,8A Y F w—i //yre h /T/A/ 3© I/EA/M AT /V.) /177/ C- -.. 2. Y', anelfiD C/-6; ,�/6 // e* 48 D,. /NS /1. /!_'V -! e", J� �i 7 ti • Summation n voivo. 432, 2 e u ... VII 0 n3 0, /O ., i Elomont: SKIETCH OF CLCMP:NT Noto: Malco coplos of 11)15 form for avoty olomont, Framing Rntio (if Applicable) U /UA C/1f..CULATiON FOtz PLAN SUfimirrAl. U Value for Clement (Avg.) a (47, 93 x a OS) Area of Elemont'i 6;250 ,S pr, • Area of Element is not Area after opening:: such M door:, Mrindoily Md st)1 ghts h boon .ubtractod, (407 a A rENIVIgp 26 1990 MAHAN & DESALVO, INC. Earth Consultants Inc. Ge otechnical Engineers, Geologists & Environmental Scientists 2 O° REPARED FOR HORIZON: HOTELS • • Charles I.. Vi t'6 Ph.D., P.E. Director of Environmental Services, and Director of Risk, Reliability, and Optimization Services GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING STUDY AND METHANE STUDY LOTS 2 AND 3 SOUTHCENTER BOULEVARD TUKWILA, WASHINGTON E-4343 June 20, 1989 Earth Consultants, lac. 1005 - 136th Place Northeast Suite 101 Bellevue, Washington 90006 (206) 643 -3710 222 E. 26th Sired, Suite 103 Tacoma, Washington 904114991 (206) 2724601 ge w ` June 20, 1989 Horizon Hotels P. O. Box 795 Natchitouches, Louisiana 71457 Attention: Mr. Sam J. Friedman Dear Mr, Friedman: Foundation Engineering Earth Consultants Inc. GenWchnIcal Engineers, Gerokoglsts & t s,%•IronnK•ntal Scientists 1805. 136th Place N.E., Suite 101, Bellevue, Washington 98005 222 E. 26th Sheet, Suite 101, Tacoma, Washington 98411.9998 Bellevue (206) 643.3780 Seattle (206) 464.1584 FAX (206) 7460860 Tacoma (206) 272.6608 E-4343 We are pleased to submit herewith our report titled "Geotechnical Engineering Study and Methane Study, Lots 2 and 3, Southcenter Boulevard, Tukwila, Washington." This report presents the results of our field exploration, selected laboratory tests, and engineering analyses. The purpose and scope of our study was outlined in our February 14, 1989 proposal. Subsurface conditions revealed during our field exploration indicate that the site surface is underlain by eighteen (18) feet of soft and loose compressible soil. This soil will be moisture- sensitive during construction and can settle under loading. Our analysis of potential settlements indicates that building settlement would be approximately four inches without excessive settlement control. There are two options for foundation support which include adequate excessive settlement control. These are: Option 1.) Conventional footings following a successful surcharge program; or Option 2.) Pile foundations. The attached report presents our recommendations for Option 1, conventional footings and surcharge program along with other geotechnically related aspects of the project. We will be glad to develop recommendations for a pile foundation, Option 2, if you wish. • Horizon Hotels June 20, 1989 Methane Barrier. Collection and Venting System Due to the reported presence of an old landfill across the river from the site, there is some concern that methane gas may migrate to ,the site. Therefore, a methane soil gas investigation was performed. Results of the methane investigation did not indicate the . presence of methane below the site within the soil depth studied for methane. However, we have developed a methane gas barrier collection and venting system (MBCVS) to provide greater assurance that any potential methane gas is controlled. The recommended MBCVS is described in the attached report. We appreciate this opportunity to have been of service to Horizon Hotels during this initial phase of project development, and we look forward to working with Horizon Hotels in the future phases as the project comes to fruition. If there are any questions about the content of the attached report, or if we can be of further assistance, please call. Very truly yours, EARTH CONSULTANTS, INC. Sheldon T. Lynne Project Geotechnical Engineer STL /CLV /k* v Charles L. Vita, Ph.D., P. E. Registered Civil and Geotechnical Engineer, Director of Environmental Services E -4343 Page 2 INTRODUCTION pISCUSSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS Plate 1 Plate 2 Plate 3 Plates 4 through 7 Plate 8 Plate 9 Plate 10 Plate 11 Plate 12 TABLE OF CONTENTS E -4343 Project Description Scope of Services SITE CONDITIONS Surface 2 Subsurface 3 Groundwater 3 General 4 Site Preparation and General Earthwork 5 Surcharge Program 6 Foundations 7 Swimming Pool Design 8 Slab -on -Grade Floors 9 Excavations and Slopes , 10 Site Drainage 10 Erosion Control 11 Pavement Areas 11 Methane Sections 13 STANDARD LIMITATIONS Additional Services 15 Appendix A - Field Exploration and Laboratory Testing Appendix B - Methane Field Exploration ILLUSTRATIONS E-4343 Vicinity Map Boring Location Plan Legend Boring Logs Grain Size Analyses Typical Monitoring Plate Detail Retaining Wall Drainage and Backfill Typical Footing Subdrain Detail Methane Barrier /Crushed Rock Mat Earth Consultants, Inc, • Wall loads • Column loads • Slab loads Scope of Services GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING STUDY LOTS 2 AND 3, SOUTHCENTER BOULEVARD TUKWILA, WASHINGTON E-4343 JNTRODUCTION Project Description The subject site is Iocated southeast of the cul -de -sac at the end of Southcenter Boulevard. The approximate site location is shown on the Vicinity Map, Plate 1. The purposes of this study were: (1) to develop geotechnical recommendations for the proposed site development, and (2) investigate the possibility of methane existing in the soil below the site and give recommendations for methane control. At the time our study was performed, the site, proposed building locations, and our exploratory locations were approximately as shown on the Boring Location Plan, Plate 2. The proposed development will include two- and three -story wood -frame structures with the first floor being a slab -on- grade, a swimming pool, activity court, and paved parking. According to the architect, David Banduchi, maximum total dead plus live loads are expected to be as follows: - 3.8 kips per lineal foot - 80 to 90 kips - 150 pounds per square foot (psf) If any of the above assumptions or design criteria change or are in error, we should be consulted to review the recommendations contained in this report. In any case, we recommend that Earth Consultants, Inc. (ECI) be retained to perform a general review of the final design. We performed this study in general accordance with the scope of services outlined in our proposal dated February 14, 1989. On this basis, our report addresses: • subsurface soil and groundwater conditions; • suitability of existing on -site materials for use as fill, and recommendations for imported fill materials; • site preparation, grading and earthwork procedures, including details of fill placement and compaction; Earth Consultants, Inc. Horizon Hotels June 20, 1989 Earth Consultants, Inc. Surface • short -term and long -term drainage and erosion control measures; • foundation design criteria, including bearing capacity and resistance of lateral loads for conventional foundations; • estimates of potential total and differential settlement magnitudes and their rates; to parking area and access roadway design pavement sections; • methane barrier (control) design. The work documented in this report has been conducted for specific application to this project in a manner consistent with that level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by other members of the profession currently practicing under similar conditions in this area. No warranty, expressed or implied, is made. This report is for the exclusive use of Horizon Hotels and their representatives. We recommend that this report, in its entirety, be included in the project contract documents for the information of the contractor. SITE CONDITIONS E-4343 Page 2 The subject site is located southeast of the cul -de -sac at the end of Southcenter Boulevard in Tukwila, Washington (see Plate 1, Vicinity Map). The property comprises about three acres and is bordered on the south and east sides by the Green River and to the north and west by undeveloped land. The site is nearly level with a general slope to the west. A fill berm approximately four and one -half feet high exists in the eastern portion of the site. This berm covers an area of about twenty -nine hundred (2900) square feet. A fill pile exists in the northwest corner of the property. This fill pile consists of topsoil and construction debris and is about ten to fifteen feet high. The surface is covered with tall grasses and alder trees. The alder trees are about twelve inches in diameter in the southeast portion of the site. In other areas of the site, the alder trees are smaller. A thick cover of blackberry vines exist along the crest of the river bank. Horizon Hotels June 20, 1989 Subsurface • • • Groundwater Layer 3: Gray medium dense SILTY SAND. in our borings, is about fourteen feet thick. Layer 4: Gray dense fine to medium SAND. at a depth of forty-four (44) feet. Earth Consultants, Inc. E-4343 Page 3 The site was explored by drilling two borings at the approximate locations shown on Plate 2. Please refer to the Boring Logs, Plates 4 and 5, for a detailed description of the conditions encountered at each location explored. A copy of Boring 1 from a GeoEngineers, Inc. report dated February 21, 1985 is included as Plates 6 and 7. The previously mentioned report was supplied to Earth Consultants Inc by Commonwealth Pacific. A description of the field exploration methods and laboratory testing program is included in the appendix of this report. The following is a generalized description of the subsurface conditions encountered. Our exploratory borings generally encountered four layers of soil below the site surface. • Layer 1: Gray and brown, soft, compressible CLAYEY SILT. This layer, about ten and one -half feet thick, is moisture - sensitive. Its impact to construction scheduling and methods should be considered. Layer 2: Brown very loose to medium dense SILT. This layer underlies layer 1 and is about seven feet thick. Layer 3, encountered below layer 2 Our borings terminated in this layer During drilling, the groundwater was encountered approximately sixteen and one -half feet below the surface (approximately elevation 84; arbitrary datum, elevation 100.0, is the curb around the cul -de -sac). The groundwater level is influenced by the level of the water in the Green River. Approximately two years ago the Green River was observed overflowing its banks approximately one and one -half river miles downstream from the site. Based on this information, it is likely that the groundwater level may rise to or above the top of the river bank (approximately elevation 100) in conjunction with the rise of the river level to flood stage. • General Horizon Hotels June 20, 1989 The groundwater elevation level will fluctuate depending on the amount of rainfall, surface water runoff, and adjacent river levels. Generally, the water level is higher during and after the rainy season. The groundwater may rise following heavy rains within the Green River drainage basin. Dewatering of the pool excavation will be needed if the pool is constructed during times of high water. The pool should be designed and constructed to resist the buoyancy forces imposed by high groundwater levels if the pool is empty for any reason during times of high water. Drainage of high groundwater should be provided in the pool design. DISCUSSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS Earth Consultants, Inc. E-4343 Page 4 Our subsurface exploration revealed the presence of about ten and one -half feet of moisture- sensitive, soft compressible soil (Layer 1) near the site surface. Settlements in this layer are estimated to be approximately four inches. To mitigate the potential settlement problem, the buildings may be supported on piles or the building and footing areas may be surcharged prior to construction. This report presents our recommendations for surcharging the building areas to induce settlement in Layer 1 prior to construction. We will develop recommendations for pile foundations if you would like to place the structures on a pile foundation. Following the surcharging of all building and footing areas, the structures may be supported on conventional spread and continuous footings bearing on a crushed rock fill mat at least two feet thick. The two- foot -thick crushed rock mat, placed below all buildings, will help reduce post - construction differential settlement. The mat should also be integrated with the methane control system (MBCVS). A schematic diagram showing the crushed rock mat and structural fill below the building is shown on Plate 12. Aside from the potential settlement of the buildings, the swimming pool should be designed to resist any buoyancy forces that may act on it. Effects of the moisture - sensitive near - surface soils on construction operations should be considered. In particular, trafficability and grading will be more difficult during or after wet weather. Dry weather (summer) earthwork operation is strongly recommended. Contingency planning is recommended. Horizon Hotels June 20, 1989 E-4343 Page 5 Site Preparation and General Earthwork Proposed site grades are not available at this time For our analyses and recommendations, we have assumed that in the areas outside of the fill berm (described in the surface section of this report) the site elevations will be raised approximately two feet. In the area of the fill berm, the grade will be lowered approximately three to four feet. All fill material used to achieve design site elevations should meet the requirements for structural fill. We recommend that a two foot thick crushed rock mat /methane barrier be constructed below the buildings to help (a) mitigate the potential different settlement and (b) control potential migration of methane up into the buildings. Plate 12 shows the crushed rock mat /methane barrier relative to the structural fill below the building and the building foundations. Stripping In all building and paving areas and where structural fill or crushed rock will be placed, the site surface should be stripped and cleared of all vegetation, topsoil, and any other deleterious materials existing on the site. proofrolling and Overexcavation Following stripping and excavation, the soil surface where structural fill or pavements are to be placed should be proofrolled to a reasonbly stablecondition. The natural bearing surfaces should be suitably probed to help determine the presence and approximate extent of any unstable areas. Any such areas should be stabilized by compaction, with or without addition of crushed rock. If these will not stabilize, they should be overexcavated to firm material and replaced with compacted structural fill. An ECI representative should do the probing and be present during all proofrolling. It is cautioned that excessive construction traffic can disturb and make the moisture - sensitive near - surface soils unstable or unworkable. Dry weather (summer) earthwork operation is strongly recommended. Horizon Hotels June 20, 1989 Structural Fill All structural fill should be organic -free, well - graded sands or gravels. Fines (percent finer than No. 200 sieve) should be non - plastic. The following minimum gradation requirement is recommended: 100 - percent finer than three inches 0 -25 - percent finer than No. 40 sieve (fine sand) 0 - 10 - percent finer than No. 200 sieve (fines) Earth Consultants, Inc. E-4343 Page 6 Furthermore, the crushed rock used for the mat should meet the requirements of Washington Department of Transportation (WDOT) 1988 specification 9- 03.9(c), "crushed surfacing." Structural fill under or around all floor slabs, footings, and paved areas should be placed in horizontal, uniform lifts. Lifts should not exceed eight inches in loose thickness for heavy compactors or four inches for hand -held compactors. Each lift should be compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum dry density. Maximum dry density for all fill material should be based on ASTM Test Designation D- 1557 -78 (Modified Proctor). All fill material should be placed near its optimum moisture content. Surcharge Program To reduce the post - construction settlements within the building areas, we recommend at least four feet of surcharge material be placed over the compacted structural fill required to raise the building area grade. Based on the subsurface information presently available to us, we estimate this settlement should take about four to six weeks to complete. Following a successful surcharge program some secondary settlements can still be expected to occur over time. These secondary settlements are estimated to be about one inch total, with differential settlements being three - quarters of an inch. Surcharge material should have an in -place weight of no less than one hundred twenty (120) pcf. If the surcharge material is to be used as structural fill elsewhere on the site, it should meet our recommendations for structural fill. We recommend the surcharge extend at least five feet beyond the perimeters of the buildings. From this point, the fill should be sloped at a gradient of 1:1 (Horizontal :Vertical), or flatter. Horizon Hotels June 20, 1989 E-4343 Page 7 Because this surcharge fill is to induce settlement in the soft soil below the site prior to construction, it is necessary to monitor both the magnitude and rate of such settlement. To accomplish this, we recommend you install a series of at least one settlement marker per two thousand square feet of surcharge area. These settlement monitors should be placed on the existing site subgrade before any fill is placed. A typical settlement monitor is pictorially depicted on Plate 9, attached. Once installed, and while the fill is being placed and compacted, the movements caused by the filling operation should be recorded. Baseline readings should be obtained as soon as the markers are installed, then readings should be acquired periodically throughout the filling and on through the subsequent weeks until either settlements cease, or the geotechnical engineer is satisfied the that the post - construction settlements will be one inch or less. The readings obtained during the early filling operation are typically critical and should be taken at hourly to daily intervals, depending on the progress of the filling operation. The later readings can be obtained on a weekly or even semi - weekly basis. For continuity, we recommend you retain ECI to perform the settlement monitoring services. However, if you elect to use some other entity, we strongly recommend you provide the data to ECI for review as quickly after its acquisition as possible. This will tend to help reduce the potential for misunderstanding or misinterpretation of the data. Surcharging must be complete before methane barrier construction. Otherwise, settlement could damage the barrier. Prior to construction of the methane barrier, the crushed rock mat should be proofrolled. Foundations It is our opinion that the building may be supported on conventional footings following the implementation of a successful surcharge program that mitigates the potential for excessive post - construction settlements. All footings and slabs -on -grade should bear on at least two feet of compacted crushed rock mat extending out from the bottom edge of the footing a minimum distance equal to the fill thickness. Once the surcharge program is successfully completed, the conventional footings can be designed on the basis of the following criteria: • Allowable bearing pressure = 2000 psf including all dead and live loads. • Minimum depth of perimeter footing; below adjacent final exterior grade. Earth Consultants, Inc, = 18 inches Horizon Hotels June 20, 1989 • Estimated maximum post - surcharge, = 1 inch post - construction settlement Estimated maximum post - surcharge, = 3/4 inch post - construction differential settlement; Lateral loads can be resisted by friction between the foundation and the supporting compacted fill subgrade or by passive earth pressure acting on the buried portions of the foundations. For the latter, the foundations must be poured "neat" against the existing soil or backfilled with a compacted fill meeting the requirements of structural fill: Passive pressure = . 300 pcf equivalent fluid weight Minimum depth of interior footings; below top of floor slab. Minimum width of wall footings Minimum lateral dimension of column footings Coefficient of friction = 0.16 The unusually low friction value reflects the low friction of the geomembrane in the methane gas barrier, venting and collection systems. We also recommend drains be placed around all perimeter footings. More specific details of perimeter foundation drains are provided in the Site Drainage section of this report. Swimming Pool Design Pool design and construction should follow manufacturer's recommendations or standard pool construction practice, as appropriate. In addition, the recommendations in this section are considered prudent. Earth Consultants, Inc. 12 inches = 18 inches = 24 inches E-4343 Page 8 Horizon Hotels June 20, 1989 E-4343 Page 9 The pool should be designed to withstand the buoyancy forces that may occur if the pool is empty during a period of high groundwater. The pool walls should be designed as retaining walls to resist the lateral earth pressures imposed on them by the surrounding soil. We recommend the walls of the pool be designed to resist lateral load imposed by an equivalent fluid with a unit weight of seventy (70) pcf. These values assume that no vehicular, floor or other surcharge loads will act on the wall. If such surcharges are to apply, they should be added to the above design lateral pressures. We recommend that a bottom granular collection drain be included as part of the pool design. The granular drain should connect to the (bottom) pool drain outlet piping and be provided with a sensor and switch to automatically drain if hydrostatic pressure exceeds a critical value. As a precautionary measure, a standpipe for access with a pump can also be included as backup. This is to allow for water that may collect around and below the pool to be drained or pumped from around the pool to reduce hydrostatic forces on the pool. Stabilization of the pool subgrade will be needed if the subgrade is soft during construction. Stabilization of the subgrade will help prevent the fine - grained site soils from mixing with the granular collection drain. To stabilize the subgrade, if needed, we recommend tamping two to four -inch quarry rock into the subgrade and placing a filter fabric equivalent to Mirafi 140N over the subgrade to maintain a spearation of the good granular drain rock and the existing fine - grained soil. Slab -on -Grade Floors We recommend that the slab -on -grade floors be separate ( "free- floating ") from the foundations. This is to help minimize the stresses on the slab due to the potential post - construction settlements. Any fill below the slab disturbed by construction activity should be recompacted. Proper water - proofing and moisture - proofing should be used. This should include a capillary break and suitable moisture barrier. The recommended MBCVS (methane barrier, collection, and venting system) is expected to provide adequate moisture protection. Be aware that a drain pipe is placed along the low area on top of the geomembrane and within the structural fill below the slab area. This drain should have a gradient of at least 0.1% toward suitable, permanent discharge facilities. Earth Consultants, inc. Horizon Hotels June 20, 1989 Excavations and Slopes E-4343 Page 10 Excavations about thirteen (13) feet deep are planned for construction of the pool. In no case should excavation_ slopes be greater than the limits specified in local, state and Federal government safety regulations. Temporary cuts greater than four feet in height should be sloped at an inclination no steeper than 1H:1V. If slopes of this inclination or flatter cannot be constructed for excavations greater than four feet in depth, temporary shoring will be necessary. This shoring will help protect against slope or excavation collapse. If temporary shoring is required, we will be available to provide geotechnical shoring design criteria, if requested. Major groundwater seepage is not expected above thirteen (13) feet of depth below existing grade, since the groundwater level during drilling was sixteen and one -half .(16 -1/2) feet below the existing ground surface. Standard sump and pumping techniques should be adequate for any required excavation dewatering. However, if the excavation for the pool is performed during a period of time when the groundwater level is high, a more sophisticated dewatering program will be needed. Site Drainage Groundwater was encountered in our borings approximately sixteen and one -half feet below the existing surface. We do not expect the site groundwater levels to present major construction related problems during the drier times of the year. However, if the construction of the pool is performed during times when the Green River is near its flood stage, the pool excavation will need to be dewatered. Grading and drainage should aim to prevent water from entering below buildings, slabs, or pavements. Final site grades should allow for drainage away from the building foundations. The ground should be sloped at a minimum gradient of two percent for a distance of at least ten feet away from the buildings, except in paved areas. Footing drains should be installed around the building perimeters. Four -inch minimum diameter perforated or slotted smooth, rigid drain pipe should be laid just below the footing bottom, and with a gradient sufficient to initiate flow. The drain line should be bedded and surrounded with a free - draining washed rock, pea gravel, or other free - draining granular material. The ground surface should limit infiltration either by being (a) paved or (b) capped with six to twelve (12) inches of compacted relatively impermeable soil. If a relatively impermeable soil cap is used, it should be separated from the underlying fill by a layer of geotextile. The ground surface should be sloped to drain away from the building and backfill. A typical footing drain detail is provided on Plate 11. Earth Consultants, Inc. Horizon Hotels June 20, 1989 Frosion Control Pavement Areas Earth Consultants, Inc. E-4343 Page 11 . The footing drain system must be independently and separately tightlined to discharge. Roof downspout drainage lines should be separate from the footing drain system. Install sufficient cleanouts at strategic locations to allow for as- needed maintenance of the footing drain and downspout tightline systems. Standard erosion- control measures should be provided as needed. This includes site drainage and grading to control runoff. Exposed surfaces should be permanently stabilized using vigorous vegetation. During construction, special attention should be given to protecting the Green River. We recommend installing and maintaining a silt fence along the edges of the property adjacent to the Green River. Other standard erosion control measures should be tailored to the site and construction schedule as appropriate. Near - surface soils are compressible and moisture - sensitive. If saturated, e.g., due to wet weather, they will have very poor trafficability. Construction scheduling and methods should anticipate this condition. Dry weather (summer) earthwork operation is strongly recommended. Because pavement performance depends greatly on the subgrade and underlying foundation soils, the natural soil subgrade should be proofrolled and compacted to a reasonbly non - yielding condition. Soft areas which cannot be compacted should be overexcavated and backilled with structural fill. All fill should be of the quality, placement, and compaction as recommended in the Site Preparation and General Earthwork section. Pavement cross - sections consist of three layers: (1) sub -base, (2) base, and (3) surface. All pavements will require a minimum sub -base of one foot of compacted structural fill. In addition, we suggest the sub -base section be separated from the prepared subgrade by a Mirafi 500X geotechnical fabric, or equivalent. Base and surface courses can be as follows. A light -duty pavement for automobile- trafficked areas would be as follows: • Two inches of Asphalt Concrete (AC) over four inches of Crushed Rock Base (CRB) material. Higher- capacity, longer -life pavements, also appropriate for truck - trafficked areas, would be as follows: Three inches of AC over six inches of CRB, or Three inches of AC over four inches of ATB. CRB should meet WDOT Specification 9- 03.9(c), "crushed rock base," and be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent maximum dry density by ASTM D- 1557 -78. Some limited pavement settlement should be anticipated, because of the compressible near- surface soils. Because of the settlement, the ATB- pavement alternative may be particularly appropriate. That is, the ATB could serve as the pavement surface until settlements diminished; then, the final AC surface course could be applied. Final grading and drainage control should anticipate potential pavement settlement to provide adequate site drainage. Methane Study Due to the reported presence of an abandoned .landfill across the river from the site, we monitored the upper portion of the vadose zone for methane gas. Eleven methane monitoring points (MMPs) were evaluated with the equipment and techniques outlined in Appendix B. The approximate locations of the MMPs are shown on Plate 2. The results are presented in Table A, Methane and Hydrogen Sulphide Concentrations. Horizon Hotels June 20, 1989 TABLE A E -4343 METHANE AND HYDROGEN SULPHIDE: MEASURED CONCENTRATIONS % LEL PPM MMP -1 0 0 0 MMP -2 0 0 0 MMP -3 0 0 0 MMP -4 0 0 0 MMP -5 . 0 0 0 MMP -6 0 0 0 MMP -7 0 0 0 MMP -8 0 0 0 MMP -9 0 0 0 MMP -10 0 0 0 MMP -11 0 0 0 Note: Samples taken on April 25, 1989 between the hours of 0930 and 1500 hrs. No methane gas or hydrogen sulphide gas was detected at the 11 MMPs at the subject site. At each sampling location the probe hole remained open after removal of the probe. The open probe hole was double checked with the Gastector instrument prior to leaving the MMP station. No detectable traces of combustible gases were detected at the completion of our work at each MMP. Methane Barrier Collection and Venting System (MBCVS? No methane was detected in the field survey. However, it is possible that methane may occur in areas of the site in the future. As a backup contingency measure, to control any actual methane occurrences from collecting in buildings, a methane gas barrier, collection and venting system (MBCVS) can be constructed. We have designed a proposed controlsystem. Earth Consultants, Inc. H E-4343 Page 13 Horizon Hotels June 20, 1989 E-4343 Page 14 Details of the methane barrier collection and venting system are provided on Plate 12, Methane Barrier /Crushed Rock. The general configuration is as follows. The barrier should consist of a minimum two- foot -thick layer of crushed rock encapsulated in minimum 90 mil thick geofabric. The crushed rock should meet WDOT Specification 9- 03.9(c), "crushed rock base ". A minimum 20 -mil thick geomembrane should be placed on top of the geofabric over the crushed rock. The geomembrane should have an upward slope of at least one percent (1 %) from near the center of the building along the long axis toward the perimeter of the buildings. Minimum two -inch diameter mushroom vents should be installed at the building corners and every one hundred (100) feet between. The six-inch diameter drain pipe surrounded by filter fabric should be placed along the low point on top of the geomembrane. At least two inches of sand (100% minus No. 10) should be placed over the geomembrane to help protect it from puncture. The building footing maybe placed on this sand if desired. Structural fill will need to be placed over the sand and below the slab to bring the building area up to grade. All grades and dimensions on Plate 12 are after surcharging. All puncutures in the geomembrane must be properly repaired. The geomembrane must not be punctured after construction. The MBCVS must be carefully coordinated with surcharge construction and operation. No element should be damaged by surcharge placement or removal. The MBCVS /Surcharge construction sequence should be carefully considered; we recommend the proposed construction sequence be submitted to us for review and comment. STANDARD LIMITATIONS Our recommendations and conclusions are based on the site materials observed, selective laboratory testing and engineering analyses, the design information provided us by your architect, and our experience and engineering judgement. The conclusions and recommendations are professional opinions derived in a manner consistent with that level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by other members of the profession currently practicing under similar conditions in this area. No warranty is expressed or implied. The recommendations submitted in this report are based upon the data obtained from the available borings. Soil and groundwater conditions between borings may vary from those encountered. The nature and extent of variations between our exploratory locations may not become evident until construction. If variations then appear, ECI should be requested to reevaluate the recommendations of this report and to modify or verify them in writing prior to proceeding with the construction, Earth Consultants, Inc. Gonsultants _ In Additional Services We recommend that ECI be retained to perform a general review of the final design and specifications to verify that the recommendations in this report have been properly . interpreted and implemented in the design and in the construction specifications. We also recommend that ECI be retained to provide geotechnical services during construction. This is to observe compliance with the design concepts, specifications or recommendations and to allow design changes in the event subsurface conditions differ from those anticipated prior to the start of construction. • t a Cr Pro). No. 4343 Drwn. GLS Date May 89 Reference : King County / Map 41 By Thomas Brothers Mops Doted 1988 Earth Consultants Inc. Gorierhnicra Mown. Oroilaitous I linvIronarnial Scirnelm•• Vicinity Mop Lots 2 8 3 / Southcenter Blvd. Tukwila, Washington Checked SL Date 5/ 3 /89 Plate 1 No. i 4343 Earth Con Earth Consultants Inc. aruncivt a, w,,nw,..Wui .. t;maarnmw a nrr. Prof No. '4343. ; l iii. GIS I D.. May 139 Approzimale Scale 30 60 LEGEND Proposed Building Reference : Site Plan Received Fiom Client Undated 120 ff. chookod B I Approximate Location of ECI Boring, Proj. No. E - 4343, Apr. 1989 B Approximate Location of GeoEngineers Boring, 1/29/85 • Mlvp Approximate Location of ECI Methane Monitoring Point, Proj. No. E Apr: 1989 > ; Approximate Area of Existing Fill Berm Boring Location . Plan Lots 2 a 3 : 1, Soirttioenter Blvd. Tukwila; iMaStiiiiiaton MAJOR DIVISIONS GRAPH SYMBOL LETTER SYMBOL TYPICAL DESCRIPTION . Coarse Grained Soils More Then 50% Material Larger Than No. 200 Sieve Size Gravelly Soils More Than 50% Coarse Fraction Retained On No. 4 Sieve Clean Gravels (little or no fines) • Gravel • ••, • ! •, ,,••,•. •, .. • • •_ _ •• • • GW gW Well-Graded Gravels, Gravel -Sand Mixtures, Little Or No Fines ' ' • • : :•: . • • . • • •i GP gp Poorly Graded Gravels, Gravel- Sand Mixtures, Little Or No Fines Gravels With Fines( appreciable amount of fines) S r i i, 1 l la S r i I I i •I I I GM gm Silty Gravels, Gravel- Sand - Sitt Mixtures • v I I — Clayey Gravels, Gravel- Sand - Clay Mixtures Sand And Sandy Soils More Than 50%. Coarse Fraction Passing No. 4 Sieve Clean Sand ( little or no fines) a � �•• • a. • • • • •• a • e • • SW SW Yell- Graded Sands, Gravelly Sands, Little Or No Fines -::: . : . .::::.-:. ..."..'.:".•:.: ••: :: $P S�'i Poorly- Graded Sands. Gravelly Sands, Little Or No Fines Sands With Fines (appreciable amount of lines) I I 1 I I I I � I 1) $M sm Silty Sands, Sand - Silt Mixtures , - ) � SC SC Clayey Sands, Sand - Clay Mixtures Fine Grained Soils More Than 50% Material Smaller Than No. 200 Sieve Size Silts Liquid Limit And Less Than 50 Clays IPI Inorganic Silts 6 Very Clayey Fine Sands, Rock Flour,Silty Clayey Fr ne Sands; Silts wt Slight Plasticity 11100031 / • CL C I Inorganic Clays OI Low To Medium Plasticity, Gravelly Clays, Sandy Clays, Silly Clays, Lean OL ) Organic Silts And Organic Sitty Clays OI Low Plasticity • Silts Liquid Limit And Clays Greater Than 50 l J I I I I MH mh Inorganic Silts, Micaceous Or Diatomaceous Fine Sand Or Silty Soils CH CI) Inorganic Clays 01 High Plasticity, Fat Clays / / / / / / / ..---'4 OH ' On Organic Clays OI Medium To High Plasticity, Organic Silts Highly Organic Soils ;�=_:: — :: = ^•' .: - , +, , PT pt Peat, Humus, Swamp Soils With High Organic Contents Topsoil • 4 ;, : , ,., ,V .M Humus And Duff Layer Fill .i�ii�ii � � ����� Highly Variable Constituents • ■ ■ The Discussion In The Text Of This Report Is Necessary For A Proper Understanding Of The Nature 01 The Material Presented In The Attached Logs Notes : Dual symbols are used to indicate borderline soil classification. Upper case letter symbols designate sample classifications based upon lab- oratory testing; lower case letter symbols designate classifications not verified by laboratory testing. I 2 "0,D. SPLIT SPOON SAMPLER Tr 2.4" I.D. RING SAMPLER OR IL SHELBY TUBE SAMPLER P SAMPLER PUSHED SAMPLE NOT RECOVERED 2 WATER LEVEL (DATE) i WATER OBSERVATION WELL G l Engineering and Geology Earth Consultants Inc. C TORVANE READING, tsf qu PENETROMETER READING, tsf W MOISTURE, percent of dry weight pct DRY DENSITY, pounds per cubic ft. LL LIQUID LIMIT, percent PI PLASTIC INDEX LEGEND Proj. No, 4343 Date May' 89 Plate 3 • BORING NO Logged By STL ELEV. 190. Date 4 -21 -89 , Graph CS Soil Description l Sample (N) Blows Ft. 1 W ► ► +•ANV ► • • • ► ►• •... ■•.•.•••••. K ,• • ••••• .::� ;�: ❖.•. ❖•••❖ : 1 /ml ml Grey and Brown clayey SILT, moist, . soft (Possible fill) — Brown SILT, moist, medium dense to very loose. • -Very loose at 121 feet -94% No. 200 sieve "' . —20 —25 —30 —35 -40 L1 LA L! LA LJ u u u u Li I 9 2 5 13 2 24 23 26 35 33 42 24 26 27 34 40 33 28 24 25 25 LL =34 PL =24 PI =10 . /sm - --• sp ,Passing .Dark gray and brown silty fine SAND, , wet, medium dense. - Dark gray below 22.5 feet - clayey silty pocket (1 ") at 23.5 feet -- — Dark gray fine to coarse SAND, wet, dense ' • '•'sp ��'•'• �'�•� iwp; • • s.... ::;.; Boring terminated at 44 feet below existing grade. Groundwater . encountered at 17.0 feet during drilling. Boring backfilled with bentonite plug. Subsurius conditions depicted moment our observations at the Urns and location of this aaporatory hots, naOlfiM by MryMaaYq WO• libliSic and hg.ement. They are not necessarily nprsssntatns of Ow tines and emotions. We canna accept reeponsWwy tar ter era or traarprat.Ysri W cam a into►matbn prowled on this top. 41)(c- *Cusutltants Inc t ► o..e.ska sal t...rr.s sa o••l•sr BORING LOG LOTS 2 6 3 / SOUTHCENTER BLVD. TUKWILA, WASHINGTON Pro'. No. 4343 Ii May' 89 ,Ply 4 • • • • BORING NO. _2_ Logged By _STL_ 4 ELEV. 100 Date -21 -89 Graph �S Soil Description i Sample (N) BI Ft W (x) •••••�• •• :�::':�:;'•• '�t::;� •:•;•:•;• ••••••••• •••••••• •••••.•�•• ••••• •b.:• ••*•• *- ;:. :.::,; �` • ;= I %::: •., '•• ;:: '•��:; :••:: cl/ml ml - . sm/ sp ;: sp Gray and brown clayey SILT, moist . to Y Y Y r wet, soft (possible fill) - gray below 5 feet Brown SILT, moist, loose to very loose -92% passing the No. 200 sieve Dark gray silty fine SAND, wet, medium dense Dark gray fine to medium SAND, wet, dense - — 20 - — 25 —30 - 35 --40 L! LJ Li L1 L! Li Li Li LJ u L_ 4 2 10 10 3 20 20 21 48 27 31 24 30 36 32 30 24 LL =28 PL =21 PI =7 Boring terminated at 44 feet below existing grade. Groundwater encountered at 16.5 feet during drilling. Boring backfilled with bentonite plug. Subsurlaa conditions depiced represent ow observations at the time and location d this motorway Ada, modified by engineering feels, maple, and Judgement. They we not necessarily repr,NrNauve of other times and locations. We canna •napt msporelbilihy ion IN Use Or Mrnpdauon by otlrm at tntorrr lion presented on this tog. Earth Consultants Inc. Gaapdsaloal vfylaaetrlaa sari aawagy BORING LOG LOTS 2 & 3 / SOUTHCENTER BLVD. TUKWILA, WASHINGTON Proj. No. 4343 I Date May l 89 1Pia 5 • 5 — 10" 15 20- 30- 35- 40- *TEST DATA LUG 26 12.1% 101 II 19 14.2% 119 II 15 17.2% 112 II 14 36.3% 84 U 25 9.1% 98 II 3 34.6% 84 U 9 28.8% 93 U 49 24.7% 101 U BORING NO. 1 APPROXIMATE ELEVATION: 25 FEET *GRAPHIC GM SM SP SM SP SP 49 26.1% GeoEngineers Inc. DESCRIPTION BROWN SILTY SANDY GRAVEL (MEDIUM DENSE, MOIST) (FILL) GRAYISH -BROWN SILTY SAND WITH OCCASIONAL GRAVEL (MEDIUM DENSE, DAMP) (FILL) DARK GRAYISH -BROWN SANDY SILT WITH ORGANIC MATTER (STIFF, DAMP TO WET)(FILL ?) BROWN FINE SAND (MEDIUM DENSE, MOIST) BROWN SLIGHTLY SILTY TO SILTY FINE SAND (LOOSE, WET) DARK GRAY FINE. TO MEDIUM SAND (DENSE, WET) GRADES WITH COARSE SAND *SEE KEY FOR EXPLANATION OF SYNRn1.S IMO Or EXPLORATION - DEPTH nT.1TE 6 *GRAPHIC *TEST. DATA : i,or DESCRIPTTON BORING COMPLETED AT 49 FEET ON 1/22/85 PIEZOMETER INSTALLED TO 47 FEET GROUND WATER LEVEL MEASURED AT 24 FEET ON 2/7/85 *SEE KEY FOR EXPLANATION AF. SYNROI.S - i i i - -- I M . • • rn New I a • L ow to 1 0 Z o r • o H to w C z T�Q' • H w ▪ b\ e tn • 31C • tnH •< =x H 0 ao z tu • C)z H (-3 O th to m` r 6 au KEY 0 Boring or Test Pit No. B -1 DEPTH (ft.) 1 27.5 SIEVE ANALYSIS HYDROMETER ANALYSIS 100 90 80 m m 70 Z -i "11 60 2 m 50 177 40 m C) = 3o 20 1 0 N IL 1 1 1 1 i L I11 1 L 0 a N 0 SIZE OF OPENING IN INCHES I NUMBER OF MESH PER INCH, U.S. STANDARD N! V CO O to !h N O O o tD Q M N _ to- N ° tff m m S O 0 0 5 o o O o to m Q !7 N r <D tD N N O O o p O GRAIN SIZE IN MILLIMETERS GRAIN SIZE IN MM §0 I COBBLES COARSE I FINE GRAVEL I COARSE I MEDIUM J SAND FINE FINES i 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 so 100 USCS SP -SM DESCRIPTION Poorly graded SAND with silt Moisture Content (%) 24 LL PL ■ NOTES: • Base consists of 3/ - inch thick, 2 foot by 2 foot plywood with center drilled 5 /8 - inch diameter hole, • Bedding material, if required, should consist of Traction Sand. • Marker rod is 1/2- inch diameter steel rod threaded at both ends. • Marker rod is attached to base by nut and washer on each side of base. • Protective sleeve surrounding marker rod should consist of 2- inch diameter plastic tubing. Sleeve is not attached to rod or base. • Additional sections of steel rod can be connected with threaded couplings. • Additional sections of plastic sleeve can be connected with press - fit plastic couplings. • Steel marker rod should extend at least 6 inches above top of plastic sleeve. • Marker should extend at least 2 feet above top of fill surface. Earth Consultants Inc. Compelling Lwglw.sr., Oss,sal.t. tt Lwvlrsn..ss$.l Salentltt. Proj. No. 4343 Drwn. GLS Date SCHEMATIC ONLY - NOT TO SCALE NOT A CONSTRUCTION DRAWING TYPICAL SETTLEMENT MARKER DETAIL LOTS 2 & 3 /SOUTHCENTER BLVD. TUKWILA, WASHINGTON Checked Dated May' 89 I Plate 9 LEGEND 0 NOTES: • For free standing walls, weepholes may be used. Surround weep - holes with no less than 18 inches of 1 inch minus rock. lu 4 1ft. min. SCHEMATIC ONLY - NOT TO SCALE NOT A CONSTRUCTION DRAWING 1ft. min. Compacted Subgrade Proj. No. 4343 Drwn, GLS Date Surface seal; native soil or other low permeability material. Free draining, organic free granular material with a maximum size of 3 inches, containing no more than 5 percent fines (silt and clay size particles passing the No. 200 mesh sieve). Impermeable visqueen barrier or other impermeable material approved by geotechnical engineer. Weephole and drainage pocket as described below. Drain pipe; perforated or slotted rigid PVC pipe laid with perforations or slots facing down; tight jointed; with a positive gradient. Do not use flexible corrugated plastic pipe. Drain line should be bedded on. and surrounded with free draining 1 inch minus rock or pea gravel, as desired. The drainrock may be encapsulated with a geo- technical drainage fabric at the engineers discretion. Earth Consultants Inc. CeUrlt:.►/ iwglsmre, Wt•$.{Iete t► i..■rrewt•ewt.l Mlestbte RETAINING WALL DRAINAGE AND BACKFILL LOTS 2 & 3 /SOUTHCENTER BLVD. TUKWILA, WASHINGTON Checked Dated MAY '89 Plate 10 r 6 Inch min. 4 inch min• diameter t 2 inch min.} 4 inch max. 12 Inch 2 inch min. min. LEGEND • 0 Proj. No. 4343 4 SCHEMATIC ONLY — NOT TO SCALE NOT A CONSTRUCTION DRAWING SLOPE TO DRAIN • • 1 C 1 • • • • • •••:3011 • o • • o • • • O • •0 o• 0 • • O e 0 • • ap • • 00 ...•.�.• •...•; •,�.• • - . - ° i� • • 0 • • • • � •• ' •••j•: !:_. ••, • ••.' '• •• i 0 • • • O •••• .1 •. •, te • .• . • • • .rY • . , •. ;! • • . • • .•• �• L•, •• . .I • •1'/ • • O • •••. •: rout .. • • i•.. �. • • O • •• ../,••••• •• • • � � : .: •%•:.; • .••.� •. • ° ' .. •• •. • . • ' •.. • : • •.;•:••• , , .. • O O • .. •" o e 0 0 e • 0 •• • • • • . O • .• O 0 0 • p •• ••° • 0 • 0 0 0 0 o • 0 • 0•• • O o 00 • 0 t o• ° • • p ° • • e • • Surface seal; native soil or other low permeability material. Gravel backfill for walls; WDOT Standard Specifications, Section 9-03.12121, or Fine Aggregate for Porti nd Cement Concrete ; Section 9- 03.1121. Drain pipe; perforated or slotted rigid PVC pipe laid with perforations or slots facing down; tight jointed ; with a positive gradient. Do not use flexible corrugated plastic pipe. Do not tie building downspout drains Into footing lines. IMMO Impermeable visgeen barrier or other impermeable material approved by Geotechnical Engineer. Earth Consultants Inc. Communises Lailiso•n• Geologists Irvin•ttleNt•I MIINtl.ts Drwn. GLS ] Date 18 inch min. TYPICAL FOOTING SUBDRAIN DETAIL LOTS 2 & 3 /SOUTHCENTER BLVD. TUKWILA, WASHINGTON Checked • I Dated May ° 89 ' Plate 11 • APPENDIX B E -4343 METHANE FIELD EXPLORATION Methane gas exploration was done on April 25, 1989. A small diameter portable well point sampling system was used in obtaining soil gas samples for analysis. The field sampling equipment used in this study centered upon a shallow well point sampler which is constructed of three quarter (0.75) inch diameter stainless steel tubing. The following additional equipment was used in the field investigation: - Stainless steel tube sections - Bolt steel slotted well point - Electric percussion hammer - Oil -less rotary vane vacuum pump - Receiver flask - Model 1238 Gastector combustible gas indicator - Drager multi gas detector (H The sampling technique consisted of advancing the well point with an electric percussion hammer to a sampling depth of six feet below grade at 11 Methane Monitoring Points (MMP) at the site. Soil gas samples were obtained after reaching a "steady state" condition through purging the system with an electric oil -less rotary vane vacuum pump. This effort is intended to assure that samples will be representative of ambient conditions. Collected soil gas samples were then analyzed by two methods to measure concentrations of methane and hydrogen sulphide gas. (1) The gas sample was tested with a portable model 1238 Gastechtor combustible gas indicator. The Gastechtor operates under the principle whereby a sample of collected gas is drawn continuously by means of a built -in pump and analyzed for combustible gas on a heated catalytic platinum element. A solid -state amplifier is used to amplify indications of the catalytic element to give adequate meter deflection even on trace gas concentrations. Two readouts are available, total gas concentration in parts per million (ppm), or in a percentage of the Lower Explosive Limit (LEL). The LEL is defined where 100% LEL represents the minimum concentration of a gas that can be ignited with propagation of a flame. The primary application is in determining concentration of various organic vapors. The instrument is calibrated specifically for toluene. Calibration curves are supplied by the manufacturer. The instrument which is calibrated for these standard gases of known concentrations can be used for observing the concentration of a different gas. In the case of methane, the equivalent response in % LEL (or ppm) for methane is secured by multiplying the observed % LEL (or ppm) reading by the relative response conversion factor as supplied by the manufacturer. Earth Consultants, Inc. • Appendix B Methane Field Exploration Page 2. (2) After testing of the soil gas sample with the Gastector, a sample was withdrawn from the receiver flask with a Drager multi -gas detector apparatus. To measure possible concentrations of hydrogen sulphide (H2S) gas in the sample, hydrogen sulphide 1/c tubes were used in accordance with the manufactures application guidelines. The sensitivity of the hydrogen sulphide detector tubes is on the order of one ppm at atmospheric pressure and temperatures (20 C, 1013 mbars). Following completion of all sampling at a given location, the well point sampler was subjected to a three -phase cleaning before reassembly to avoid possible contamination between locations in accordance with ASTM Method D18.14 (proposed, February 1989). All components of the sampler were washed with alconox soap and water. This was followed by a rinse with reagent grade nitric acid (10% solution) and finally washed thoroughly with triple distilled deionized water. The sampler was then reassembled for the next run. FOOTING DRAIN 2 MIN. STRUCTURAL FILL MINUS NO. 10 SAND mmavierhyAvAirOr ••`x∎∎ ∎0040a•0peffeigte•Iwvv, • 0 o • • .• •• ° . • • ) ••0• •.•• • • • • ' ° •• • • : w O Oo DETAIL 2 MIN. 111=11= 7Tf�" 1i1 o 0 • • 0 0 42 • • • • O • •0426.• •• • • • • . 0.0 _• MINIMUM 2" DIA. MUSHROOM reZ --- VENTS ; LOCATED AT BUILDING CORNERS AND EVERY 100 FEET BETWEEN • 2" MIN, GEOMEMBRANE ( PVC, CSPE, EPDM OR HOPE ), 20 MIL MIN. NEEDLE ' PUNCHED NON WOVEN GEOTEXTILE (90 ML MW.) CRUSHED ROCK MAT (WDOT CRUSHED SURFACING A 9 D2.9(3) WDOT 1988 STD. SPEC.) GEOMEMBRANE 6" PERF. PIPE DETAIL B 111 DETAIL B STRUCTURAL FILL DETAIL C . • ° ° o • 0 ; • • • O • 4 • 4 • • • 4 • • o • • 0 . • • O „, u • • • • • • O O • • •• • • • • • 4:• • • o• • . • • • • - o • c • • ° 11 =1111 1 111SLlll= = 111 ^— 1 `NATIVE CLAYEY SILT NEEDLE NON WOVEN GEOTEXTILE (90 ML MIN.) CRUSHED ROCK MAT 2" SAND LAYER DETAIL A CRUSHED ROCK MAT GEOFABRIC 6" DIA. RIGID PERFORATED PIPE AT Z 0.1% GRADE TO POSITIVE DRAINAGE 'NUS NO, 10 SAN 7 11'ilff +f III 11111 1,. }. • '1 ,0 0 •• 0 0 0 ° . 0 • • , O 0 .0 • °. A • • DETAIL C 2' MIN. := III=Iit�pl FOOTING DR/ DETAIL 0 O. 0 • O ° • 0 ° ° • • ° GEOMEME 0 • , EPDM OR NEEDLE PUN GEOTEXT ILE CRUSHED ROCK MAT Earth Const C•1•1r1.Wtil fingin rn. Un►p/•., Proj No. 4343 r' • GLS C iIUM 2" DIA. MUSHROOM rs ; LOCATED AT BUILDING ■IERS AND EVERY 100 ▪ BETWEEN ••. • • • • 0 = ▪ o•. • 0 •• • . • • • • TIN. N 3 EC. ) DETAIL B DETAIL B GEOMEMBRANE 6" PERF. STRUCTURAL FILL PIPE DETAIL C NEEDLE NON WOVEN GEOTEXTILE (90 ML MIN.) CRUSHED ROCK MAT .. .• V 0 . I o •° o 0 •• o • • • • • •° °• . O •• • • • • .. • 0. • • 5 • ` 0 0 • • • • • • . 0 •° • • • ' • • • • • O • • • • • • • • • • • O. °0 0 • O • •• 0 . 0 • • • . 0 "Qt, �• 111 1 -Illy - I 11LS'.tll= P III `NATIVE CLAYEY SILT 2" SAND LAYER DETAIL A CRUSHED ROCK MAT > 2% GEOFABRIC 6" DIA. RIGID PERFORATED PIPE AT20.I% GRADE TO POSITIVE f2' MN. =III (4I I.— FOOTING DRAIN ufihrncoir r7L!A i- DRAINAGE but , IN US NO. 10 SAN ll!! II ° , • • 0 0 0 0 0 0 • •• 0 0 0 • • 0 0 ., • O • • 0 • , 0 .0 • 0 V • A .•• 0 O 0 • • o 0 0 • • • O 0 DETAIL C CRUSHED ROCK MAT DETAIL D MIRAFI 140N OR EQUIVA 111 11 1 1 1�1111!i 1 , • • 0 • • 00 0, 0 GEOMEMBRANE EPDM OR HOPE Prod No. 4343 Drwn. GLS 0 0 b . • . (PVC, CSPE, ), 20 MIL MIN. NEEDLE PUNCHED NON - WOVEN GEOTEXTILE (90 ML MIN.) Earth Consultants Inc. C•laolN*d Ciroajt.& •i. Date May '89 2" MIN. NOTES I) SURCHARGE PROGRAM AND BARRIER CONSTRUCTION SHOULD BE CAREFULLY COORDINATED. THE PROPOSED OONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE SHOULD BE SUBMITTED TO THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER FOR REVIEW. 2) ALL GRADES ARE AFTER SURCHARGING. 3) GEOMEMBRANE SHOULD HAVE NO PENETF'ATIONS''AND BE FREE OF HOLES, TEARS, RIPS, PUNCTURES OR THE LIKE. ( *EXCEPT VENTS) 4) SEAMS SHOULD PROVIDE NO OPPORTUNITY FOR LEAKAGE DUE TO INADEQUATE SEAMING. 5) SEAMING METHODS TO BE APPROVED BY GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER. 6) GEOMEMBRANE LOW POINT TO BE PLACED NEAR BUILDING CENTER AS NEEDED TO AVOID FOOTINGS AND UTILITIES. 7) GEOMEMBRANE TO BE SLOPED AT A MINIMUM ONE (I) PERCENT GRADE FROM LOW POINT TO BOTTOM OF VENTS. 8) MINIMUM ONE (I) FOOT OVERLAPS ON ALL GEOTEXTILE SEAMS, DETAIL D GEOMEMBRANE . WRAPPED 2" TO 6" OVER EDGE OF MAT Methane Barrier / Crushed Rock Mat Lots 2 a 3 / Southcenter B. Tukwib, Washington Chocked SL, CLV Dahl 5/25/89 Plat. 12 Horizon Hotels June 20, 1989 DISTRIBUTION E -4343 Commonwealth Pacific 1011 Western Avenue Seattle, Washington 98104 Attention: Mr. David O'Leary Horizon. Hotels P. O. Box 79S Natchitouches, Louisiana 81457 Attention: Mr. Sam J. Friedman E -4343 Page 18 44 J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 Th ae Atet-O-v-0-- a - 4 1. T CL^re_ /11t23t-Ze INS 9210 J• b _WM tuo•D S144'775 S • Date: By: Subject. PI q - //-- 9 0 SEP 1 4 1990 U NfLT1111 DESAI VO, ci — 1 0 1 /41.4L-b-r- 14-1-*-4-) ti-iv • /v8 12- .."-it-) g - 0 v`i 1- Attu 1)-4-Qii-,—,L_e 4-2-e /v•-&--t / 2 ' A 1.. eh.. S 3 • / 3, , / b $ / .S Y ery 4-4A-CA S • / -Att. 2 dk c. /25 PSF rAs1 x7+to Nag,t4. cr-v■ et4;t-ti O 4 4.4.4 4-k-L-e1t' A/,/, 7-kg. )244tv- tei at tr p-g-c" A:Lep 1 2 • A-Le 4-oil-i A4 f 0■■^-oft. 53,1 0N--t--te /4 • dervat.... J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 464.7137 lob: Oates By: Subject : AAA ,o. & Q-' s g a-ri-J 9 s4./ . A g' B F o '�- ., ems -� .47.-.-.vi , ; A10•1 a-,".ct A I 0 • 2 F o1 1. Z4.4 2 S Fay 10 , Fads 4--4 -R /1-- 4/ A 9 .2 S 2 9 010-4-d 3 F e-. . •�2 -Q-Q 4.- 46..¢.T�.. A / 0 I a.,. -4 A / 0 .7 , o • ciereu ,d..¢.2 A- sQLeta_. A l O s / 4M-di • F ,Q, ■ - atr'""` 2 3 '2- c f . co m pr 174- - 7:4•& S p t/ 1 if SO , 12 of A44-c . /.)-01/‘ et .7N-0-0i A-et ae-y AJZAAJ/1 3/4 H • i.rr4 4- ,4404‘.&A 4 o-,\ ca-e airrk ad' S P s P GU4a - Qo-s.d • J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 Mb: Oats: Sy: Subject: 13 ' F 0 2 4 . 0 , Q - Q - e a, S i 3 S /, 4, S ¢ .1 F � ..� • -w " " ,o_ OA ,o -Qa.t - s 3 ' Q' s ¢ , / p.41 A: .L- • h_e_k .Q.G �. S 3 I c7tki IS I F e‘ Ar .1-1_ - ,c�. ' G 2 G ) • /C 3 o d tA .4tot•tCt A ay. A .LLJA A 41 I V-..kA - 0. 2 0 - - 1 Co , re rrA.Q ia -s�+✓ a 4 Awe "2444 ¢ / g 0/ Ge ro'\ 0 , 1 e8 (r '3 1 q pw Q P v+n )2 SSL .S G w i Ti-/ n✓ A uc .A Gus ?3tt s se L GA tG s (74'.c. i9 Z I FAD I I' copaw, 8,035 s- S c. c s 2 0 , 4 - 2 - e a - 1 . . 4 - w i l ,4 13 , / , r A-4 4 A-L-eAA /&r c a v,.� aLd - ,d.n.e �.a.• 1 ,, 'Z- v1 , 2 1 eaze_ J1 Q -v-�s- .- s f A 1 , / //s 3. 3 /v^ 4.10_4(A . A 22 . A a e de.12--raj .- t l S1 • cl acv. J/ /S 3¢, o►.�c.. .Q.l� -e ,Q. ✓1 - �r�..t,,� ,t.�o.Q $ 3, 2 . r A AA.e.ti 23, ,Qsi.r2 I4,/s3 O. 17/s 3 . 4 ; , 21, , r -I1- Clufa t AiLat S 3 , 4- ate^ sc.,/ . ob\-a , C SH EL. i s A 3, 5, , b A 1.2 F ce, F o�- .2- a- � dt.v.e0 S 3, 2 ) -4 -a -.aP b) S c_A � c5 C 41; c: i C A.Ti a.) S • t P %QV w.y,Tv -- von IASeO roe S 1 4 C M KTAT1 ovV f / 3Z o/ a C/4tc.a c) L cA.Lc.'s prl.coiPen • P" 33 3¢ d.) cA t c/s pe r fri o - 1:) . J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.F. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 4547137 lobs Oates .yt Subjects pA' c s 33 - rff LA 4 1-3 S4•/ a -v..4A 53,4 e ) Z. At N /S�� ADO; inc oat.. 'DtTP 1. S pie v/66,15 J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 2,co. ctiorIhlvE D h� si5m rooF pLf--N es14e.T s 1 3 . 29 . cxt> any A 2 - 5 c - 4.4 4. FAA Ptl-2;t4— 1-4* - nick 44 \J -0.0)) O-1\-Q.43 423\3 -a-. 5 Z .3 '/s3.4 , ok) A4,.•%Q.dc cr „. s1 ► 3 . G� .a.r�.Q , 3 I , a, A e) Lta n e-v-t- .a-cl .a,.itai" A . 2 1i b: Oates Sy: Srbject: 2 Z X1 a m m L co p 'f 71,Tl otiJ $ P - ° L"z 9) .314 eer 3 ` TN • TN) C' CA lx_LI (fl r&rN. me 1) U )1,111..V12 citA,Aieki fIR J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 99084 (BOB) N 454.7137 1c01,1v0 o45 614 Areie t : 11 I ° I Z z• - /is --vt. 22- 440 - 4-1 • le b: ires 'TAG- ovir•40" Waviz• 0,4 Date: Sy: Subject: krcf 19e6 A • •re . skAquii qF . • ' J. CLARK JOHNSON • Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 : 19 I 1.. E*) 1 /1 7 /1 4 i/0114 61" tvAtim 17Q-1-7- 2 Fv Ik lo' Jib: 1+ & 140 Date: 0 11) B Subject: tukt6 ot) et-6 4 vrTt. k2 )(X 4-6A ' f r_.cokt fin 4,6++ l vo °r" (9 I R-v.111 .2, / VI /1 07 et" 05 1L-- 1,,p5 1 1,401. < ' (e-- t 143 1 1 41 ;4t11 - =--t-cp ‹7.9 ,L, 0)(14 ettdb 1110-4(1 .** Welt? - 41011Arril f'7I/t21 ATIX ¶o •1,1;o1 #4, ev t_r--kpot7 ivAtv `goire W I t1) ce c x i o' /4 it <Zo fr d.bv< x. 17 / (2 6 ei' <it < CA Ifitk`►.rf' divr -atcP S° w J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bdkvue, WA 98004 (206) 4644137 2 '/ma,? vik,, 1 6 X �� ‘17+41115 iVitt '` x&27 411 L7 X 16 � ' :t 4,0 t i I f 1) 11 I 426 'i► ' o ' `- n' . 0," t1- o-11 (1 1 .9 1•b: Date: Subject: 0, 18- Ago k e7t. iii Br: ITT\ l i- Z� C I,OG 1 qag) WIIP o 1.1 IplOescili II [iohJ IT 1. it" ■1..) rsr 1/1- sw 7.g le " )/, 177 )( - Ver) yt. °t .k .\4 5t)/62,—: (p U I TS J. CLARK JOHNSON ConnBing Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454-7137 b, t)ikilsvit po kvN,t_ tits fAr- voi wALL TFovi diorvpoKi 1rte1- rrtm witl ia. w l ) / A 1 + 6.) God va motet g V � � ± IP - -4 - 10 t LINI � i AlCeA tt I : tig' o 1,0c11.41 1� r Le1- IV, UJ IT 4 177 =-() fAN li v my. , v (M/ V 5, _ 01 41 , Q' z c #< I # .� • rg Oete: �r i By frbJect: wT tilVx 4 - 1)- loV sl Ct ( • 1 47 1)1A ri K 1 .16' oictt77 .‹ I6o1 try ''fir , iser x/01 r. � � 2 1,401-k plra.1/1711 0 velK-Vr-pi , f°i -.x� v � � f r , ? 1 11,‹ 5 �. 5.; 8 +1 2 3 Its if la— Z,� N d H ° P° - �+ ( i - ..N r t7? I - t ) v Ago 0 1 1 7– l)17,1 1.&4• I 14.^(7 . idtf-rr e 61-P q wtit-f:K (A) 1� L c ' co rtA h0F. 1 - 0 P 1 t • 1 J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454 -7137 - fiu PI Al co Oct uz. , use M fiv.p401-I G Job : - t Date: Vekop �'. S k Subject: 4e NPO I D 1'&o urU1 YA_ 15 <3 r�o al[ 7 �. \/ ( /OK I � 141I)i y' = 57g.(14 =J6b V C I r ? 3 ‘ i i ( ? L I OZ `' IL '14 A� A `/� k ' I v FAR_ lk ' f I" o E © 0 x 1 . -� 44-, t . iAJ.e). k Q.o 1 x 6 4, T k + o,ol6 7 IZ 2 ,t 1 ti,2s +,1- 59 f q ,r,, C - J ' o < I 1 k--- 0�- ' k oit ts! fi 1 c(0.01x cy 1-=P1-1-1 44 VtUrr le ( 7/4_ 61 C L 11uU0 1.-1 (1). IR W`7( 1.400 !(.1,/k • ,#T.:1019,. J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 1-1 vtvecr a FL al 22 1y 9,6, to =9fotI Irl 11.0 — y —�—� 7 1 7� 7 x� � rj �" Jr II� �'C 7716 f • .6K � / 14 xi-a III � �- - -v� � < x t < .I a oK .1 0V1 4 KTVir--14-11-11 v _ 1► AIL 'A' Ulo , 746 x 1 • 4 2 y Urx bo° 4 iFir I tT a Nb 24 i +a f oLppok .14 7 k-- � Hi 1' y �,n X9 L fi 4)1AI$ I 3 714 J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 bb1P4r ' i R f 4 I 7 c 7.9 j Y /,ci yJ s 2 °9 41-10•) � I y7,53� 10,7 v,. )0,9 ,4 I .f ,,01,2 Sr i i v. 4.4 tiP/ fl y VOW I 4Ki.tv x 0,8/_ stvi 453 itA : 1 C c C. v )c v r v V 1J! ■ ti3do As r (0,k J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112d Ave. N,E, Bellevue, WA 96004 (206) 4547137 1 r"' %v w lefr a f-67 4 IS q4 tais. ItT6 t ,,, l t z2 1x6c►` pI4 `x15 =1t1 r M I.° 01 114 C h14L1 r I /I /41 1 ° 1'IM435 1:> c o )#1 .iptier4 16 i °/ rli ,j, Co, �`-'. J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 464.7137 luffIcko lsb� Date= Subjects l'Ut, I 14#ekitvII _A•k e 1-}4e04 441(; e )c -' 4 11#7 t5 , 4 -ikt •stlek ) w 02) t-A cier-7 )t.-f tkAtt = 0 4 ---- 41/07/</c(N IVY : ( = 22,6 - t xtv u> Sys ) rl / U Wel7 / ffie4)."016 , "Ai 1° 7 6 t ) 1" 1(71 kLe ( P0c Tiktly Giou - ► 1 s ) <140-;1;?ii u 0 , ue7 ,%2,rw, o. :S.., gd e�� , � `/4 i1 \J 2 4 11 +9C I d Ab e!` -6019 amiwcile SubJett: -� - o 'l1AJ r 1)17' :w- lilr�t� • t.{ IT ' �, 11 Pc 14 trre/14-e0 iWAM" 1 • 1*,1 ti "TAW TY0 ; t\t" e Fv# �4 -- rAV 11) 111/ IJp I (4) A° 15 '�' X7 4'/ ekc ` -1 bA q1� �L• 1 1 MO I) at'fX r coo wt_ 4- )P1'*1- 1 ( 4101 r="--" x + ' x1 V ; I L125 113 . • =AO -V.59 '4=-1.1 I E., coici4eL V '7i4 X0,69 yl /",6 214 �o - 74c 1 e I a\ tut e. 4 -'o PI/4IL J. CLARK JOHNSON Canenhing Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.B. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 4547137 l DW XL- vileCINI-1 e--ois t )2,D rvi :-eA-1;1%itp, vrkt.‘\/.= 1.47 • (r. 2 =,._1.42)(11 v xa,n1a'r.q —m-r - t -9.14 Ir7 H aI4 Do ff. L6 t - 4 t)(t ,v lab: Date: $wbject: k i f , 11 (i i 2 urL r . 1 ,< 6 — I i t 2 •/, , 2.� M o is 0 ii a (Aim5 Lsi 9:), J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (208) 454.7137 LL3' k 5 E 1 •G 1 12.3144. p () ()) ft.' v4 , lit .; 4 , � se r: (Y. ja i 19 ' 1.6/ift.1.4q.91 1ehi Date: Subject; S A06 wevotiv-) %1 21 x5 75 6 j 1 11 � ; f 44, I VVIc 7 • it E ; 1'oo t5o I$ 27 /b VP' 2 -IA ln 04' I 0.0 xa � wiuvrUu rr fg- • J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (208) 454.7137 Job: pate: Subjects Iyt 1 ' I ' 4 .mot. 1 77.-It r 9 r � ,� ' 2 ' � p vz_ I,(0 x ti z, t 1---- o7 itN1I J. CLARK JOHNSON Consnhing Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 4647137 l .b1 0A---17l194 ) sH i •c) c)",e_ �N D UI I� 41 M( .- Uµ11'' te' te ' eT4- 6v4) AND >� � , 6 8 ),7 yz��r rf p = � x 12 X4- G pvt VA =Iri r A/1 ati/A lA 7 76 o r &h 1461TO I V ± kr5k 4,10rei pyrriho 1� J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Be llevue, WA 98004 . (206) 454.7137 1ro14 k 111,�p1 I) I l 4 s{> � v /Auel (0°,1)t-'51- s . 1vror 5r x 11-41S.0 k V7-11i- ' (/ ' 145C H1 't/t troK kokti <0_3(1.0- J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (208) 4547197 4 svei y�G I •o 4 ; <Y -- 2 '� � � �1 lb ' rAF--kkkb6itk_47.. (ow/ tleK it v, /0. A (.0 . 4 z , 6d, 1•e: Data: &object: d 111- X:1 49/, tvji t 6.-1 e_ Cs II 14 v e >c I O tF -; J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N,E, Bellevue, WA 98004 (208) 4541137 t/Act1512 t_ie-71\41c tig.we--' *.ei : cy.6 rrf; >I_ IJ Pp 88 0,\ 4c i n k " ar 1\1 btleirc °� 4J v Aei -0_? 1 c e \2- olx),,x/7xf-0 16 -g_ketAktii ')(-76 .>C (N)4i. Vwil\r7 l rr e 1.4 x »1 k 4-.5 ` e0.5'` 6J11.117 Co M I J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 4547137 N�wr 23,r2 Wh= s _ w blfte C1 u lob: Oates Soblee -,�-- v� l,l. y - :28 .. 1. - -6, lV1-/f C- $f e -� /674/ 4 7! C. 1710,0 off, '/j < '/Jti ei9/ 4 ivr k iv irr poo 2 ,� Ve7= 44 4 Ott .K 27 o ri e ) ; • 4.-/e2 3 GNoKro 'a W-NA- • \ v- 2- %r ve Ct M HT ' I u &titcle_ cit174.mrt t7risc-fAist oer, e .& e .8 7 1 11 1 L 'OM (1.) : 41- 01 y G 7c 11 /"/ �,' b l ei A -' ) 344tXI,171i I.6 (CO s I A-'74 0 Q4).<- 1:Z6 ( 1.,45 k� o .�-- ' , vAL.uh - aviet DIA rti<d_. -6% J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 90009 (206) 4544137 Date: 1 I tray: Subject: f eKc - e-r -51ivAr-todt9 -1-49 e 4 °V ( &- �7i• Gil tz- -14 - 1 -441 1 1)4xtu `,4 0 5 y. - 42 I - , 5 v a ir , 5F ‘,„ 1 T I T � w ► p .t' - Ll °T- G� vhce-t- l - • y/2 I/ ; ok act 'x )(4.7x ►, � � c) s < G,2 0 In }1,o <4).9 O w1J ns Ox -t «-- st ' -'M 1:/citcutto N pfo MK Q. mar urAu- s, roK-cN Qw =2.4. r l /`i , t 4 Z , - - `` ow/ w ,4 r v( Ppt-itive747 citTen T -He 5 N u c w/4U4p. Wit" Koie E, U-ertt. ; p I_J t)141210.. 54K -2; V . e„„ 0, (o ksk— (rs c 5 I M ri e G Z 24 t Pit 'r ex J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave, N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 4547137 �,) s -b Ir4-` v ,•r, 14 tk 97 S y Dates I- 1'0•10 • K.x Subject: (coT y -� k ut- :\A 24 r�pl �.2f.I1 zo _ *� t oz -. �-- 4 v Vfre,- 0 11,4 y e 4T, z..1-A 1 1/ 1 1 L ?v,g - t) 712°1/43 D1TK it<n V9. 1e1c. V s 1IZ = P.1/4/I 1,07 i) 1 ,44 +I r 01l4 oI Tie pr-ice %-sk 6 ALQI-tok.Lo-le Frx 0,101/-ttt 01r7 1-"F(2i.° U s, to. f itrM5 ' r t.' .( 9 S►IM7e7 Gt G l 2 , 2v J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N,E. Bellevue, WA 99004 (206) 454.7137 [4k 1� 141 I-4 1 i J A 7 Ca t1 - 3C-o ,`); V/ 9( I b o 4- I e 20 1 2 3( 4 7 1 2 uti" 1 o 10 + I'0 VIA(t /OA 4-0(64 1 k 6 ,” v01 'I L 10 1 I X0 o (• -/► ,� 10, 1161 ► :•� 9,pK lbt -x , -417 � t7 5 IW X3 1' --� 9 /43 t 1 A‘S @___a 0 . 5 1 51011 v 5 2 x 1 c0 i < 100 1 9--v9 ' C) 14 ' 7 11 1 k <Zoo T Ve V '7 I. b: Data: Iv bl. c t: tP ►.i RPM rtimLh Jr (IV 1 , 5 1' 14.t5 •r! 0)) Pp 4741 let) s-t Z vP Krr Mk 01- tie - Ciolv1W, vikl-eA3, 4141 , cibMuhtN (‹_tr.01-A10) 4 -i 2:1 40 4 ,1 4 . 5 paµ ra.s I L AI-10144 : ��.. I 2� C.ao- lebi Date: + • 'fay: Subject: • IA/ inrr �. IM 1 o, IrLit:61f e , e ..1D -ii. e tt'J r . .14 e l ac lla4v 1oI�' . 4AldDK►,, e y w , I lx Z .� �" � v ... 0,0o )(S,V 43 1 g= V , c I V--. i ts, x I lair .o fi.tvf ( 010---- 5x i -11 x-1401 : w 44404. , - % i - i,'6 x1111 8 \ '217.1t_ Ve4leA i-I et---(relf dok- tii/ r Pew; • lobs Date. Subject: 5,‹ , ,./F)41 7fr 09,q) 15 `) r 1 Oo Neky- k Vik-b , Ilk11-11*....: wa z6if x I ,-t b :r 6,G x. - 76 r 1 t ,(4 By (i s� aN N 9 r o � 44, 81 ?,,6 ef 1 )4_4 ‘IF ti7 6 n .1 6t ( -G Z -y w 8 (61(14- Coi4 well 1 0 KO t'Sr .grur g. 1).0 1 1/,0012,4 0 4 . • 8 ,t L52 -Lott 0 42.7 H 14/ 1/.'otk6 Me0- MI DIL rir Sibject: Co imive J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 c NrGts- tk 5"U25 e I ` v► L � rL r - ffIInn ,. -rrA liko: 19 ; crovwki4rito 17(...4Wv1 1 I e tt 1 ,,✓ • €, 'i1'' q1z 1 0h1 c47,9 , 1Z xi' � w��o , 1 , -I - A 4j ►v U 14)07 8t . lob: Date: 1O1p Sibieet: 4/4 gZ i _1, Zy1- % �y7 �) 2 7.a J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98001 (208) 4547137 1,402 CAOkAf>11-1 A kokHo - - - - . 16,e-r,c1,1 1 1=-04 g I ILA tit? /. _..(9 I rye cok, 1,0 ,r, 9 r- '— 5 �- 1( l �j t A eittor u -7-, K. 4 e. tl� t// Otivt t)1, kL -f - 1 0 uJ 4- W (+i O t_- 1., )cil x1, Co ►�17 I � � {' X x I, i t, 6 17 J p Io x I, (- 2 951 1 �io 1�1►r Date: Subject: Dyr v 111,2' 0,0 ii _497g7:: y , O G 1,4j- • • , , , . • . • • J • CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 4544137 I : _00114) KAi tt_-4 0. f".4-0))c- ior7,7271..e. Li? (A) 14 I) AViy4-11,12 0- 1 e 0 • c '‘ x+ 1-114,& labs Date: Sib/acts 1 13 o1L-Dmi 61- 1.471' e41-- Lv041:)s - Pw = 80 frtf14 , [3C I B Co. a) C C Cr i psp � C ct = /7,7p6 F 4.y. = 1?, 7peF Z -+ 15 (10 = 35, 4- (ot s)l dx2 7.6 15 /ca' ' t 65. t 1 1 4 E . Y7L)(05') = Zq`;e Fa Fw ` xor) z 1717psr - t/ (3 29,v "` .•. Coo vt N6 /iv $D?"H D RC -C.7/ •4S Ft-41,4 MA tt-J F ' • t • FLAW CNECX REPLY • d. CLARK JOHNSON Carolling Engineer 1418112th Ave. N,E. Bellevue, WA 19004 (306) 4547137 PLAN.' C NEGK 'R : BuILTrlNCm l Ccf,NT) S N£ ? bJ/44.L S I h.! T4G %(-Y Die-17 c* c'a 35,44 5/4e404141-4.9 a f-4411.4 Firo2 05,4"(45_ µ"() � 1 7..'1' Ir,b' +13,6 18't 2,6' 30o .) f L y 4 els'#2 x 3 8 1, 5 2I J4L L !M TI# X -) 6r.racmc = ,z NL e4 /4LI. - L° 1.14+6./ FI.Ocolt v V,,g " C 1:12": � 42.2)1X VX, , Ve ,- 2.0'94 (7l I WI iv 1 4- 4 409 . 2DM C ( 6)/(5 7 ' 9,e+ irs 31 c) J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 c-H Eck- oUl_"YZ'Tu 2Nl xz (i= (q' ) Imo. l °I 5 - 717 tic s 7.77 ,Io 77.7 ( ev sr-x- zo j f Io F x , 9 Sj d ,)i 8�sF �c. � e. X I �i A ) 4 C Z 2 �, 3I le- M1 M,7 lobs Date: By: Subjects 14v 0. b4.04 f a Ya u sue. CI) 1-I p -I o 2 eL 3� J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.B. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 4547137 CH F-Ger OV r rL.L , r (12') P - ( 34 or �3•�`` L�' r 3.6 14. )4 to s 36114 M —Ma T- of let): Date: Subject: • ,o v c I ,} 1-f (0 Ar r o z2 EA • l =-I - * (L . A0 rA-Ge.w.? wall , PL � 2 1 1 '. (o P c(s +lo + sc. 1 2 B1,� .( ,t / 21 � ` X � s . 2 1 � � J J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 gum, 1 6. Pf. ig a z. g- 5 z TA � , Q.cH t 514svoeriot.) c, ` R ovn O a, 6.j (So 'N\ % 8.33 l,� 61 • 45V-- r!v — ' I P R- -z'3 ► K LAS cox. (Q '' G, to D.F 6W . H c s A sc. L= 12 5 Si•pLL spAt.) t . Og x, 3 1s` ,r .66 /02. 10 /. 3 I.1s 2• N5 " 1�as� Wit. HO s a .urk....7a.w.r/..�+�.'�— �:.. — _d k'iwiaa ■dS�+atiii " - "{ ' ° a.. ''�a.�:c+f+�:w➢i:f' J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 goc P- raii S. Jobs Oates Sableets tri l'S y -co x 1,0 ,c. / 3/ i3p Sy: 6 1-1)4 ) *► . - t�T L Lavic 1 C PoecA''..� (o)( 12 t e r • 1,J1 Apt :63. In12 34 ek--D G, . is J. CLARK JOHNSON Connilting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454-7137 ctL. 6" C pa� - 7 ^.' L 1, 5 sc l. w = (fib + 2! ) x M Mho . z S• 18 Ile- 512: ti\v% .� 23s . G i ► � 3 2.g- Ve .5 i.s C. `4 -dJ wi i I s Pcof OS x. ,0 ec. z . z r e t ) labs Dates Sys Salt/eat. su.061 4t. • •S Sfit t' T- s h. 3$ la 37- 13105 s(44 pS1 ,t - Tarp, J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 S(/ s (.12 / W ( ops-, Z � s , °S 0 •c-, svwf LE 3pAc )4. sk_ 4.1.61L =S.S I lob: Date: Iy: Subject: AL. ai * I G1 l_ . S x to / 749-N spp- a 9 �, i� I N3 A-9n- < Gs. 61 IN " $M G clr• t3E (A/M,3 R i e w i A'ecs- c. ElFAT crinn a 3 •C 6.S S 4k. 3,RS k) 83.28 I P 3 • I/1 5z, e.'( Sy xc ° mz, 3S • 12. ic. N�.zo reeCk( c.,L Si J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 '` ( 4 i i x /- Z4. i (+0957)4 1k Jobs Date: Subject: Sy: iacO4 ► G 9, l 9 P.pt s 404.13 11:) is w 1� .r.� ✓..�..v.r +. tat . . (A.A./ .a 45 0 s 2 1 t� A (A/ ( 6 5 *4 J. CLARK JOHNSON rt-0 Erns s1 * 1 L= 11,04 5JktA 57 L L- Zs t f c} x 1522. 4.--. R 9 Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.1:. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 4544137 � ToTcrloom lab: .r. Dates LAO Subject: � LAO • c 74F_ 'L. =f-.s I e 11,7r ft.)? ••• S.ig >1/4_ 7 -gt F.' V re : .......,.. :« ......+.. n ;..r:..iWO.w...�rww. + a'.�w..:: asp' w� •.ui.l+err+ �O:++.++.wwwvLr+N•► Yid. isr+ b�iohiit db• F F+ rI yN'► 1Y r+ xiir+„ il's 24.. r. � Yar � :: i wrii lrW ( 0 J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 4544137 2, Ft 2 61k5 )L' 6 y'` Is & I F —✓ sPQ. es 34-S. f-f. PO; Ape al Iz,. s 9 /,.;) TANA, SeTid - sh-ii€ 5 aPFi Arai' it 2 sr r Mho . L. '"V S _ I/ec t (.6 ; lk/ A . -' oc f,4 ?v...2,llt/ s •383 1 6 loss Date: ay: Subject: 26G .`L3 3 � 3 8 � �rL �¢ Ncs rus Tam (xstt, c IZ Zkr''V� eF' 44 n J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 1.2 FL Q Q12- &itik s �y x z Q f3PLc-61-10'r . 41-, S , x l (• i vf. 0 " ( *Ave * HA, s 14- r s 4- t•\ I. 5. (4,s 33.3 (64.4N J a b : --14 Date:. By: Subject: S if\i C 0 tic .ot( ca)L,S 16 i2.r vi,r3Aezi J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N,E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 145 y ep s is . Cle/77c,a: -t r 11 • I.5 ( 1 ,a1 I it) ..e- 135•A) - Job: Dates Sys Subjects *4- gins • J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 1- ,cME —, Woor. sucTi?s Date :SE.P 121Mg0 Sy: 1'r•S 1C •7' Subjects, FRiAMIMG 9-LO y #0 J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 4544137 Loo F 13 f\N∎ L= FL-036 ( 7 S -{- I `0 D.) \ 3S Fr—i 2 its( � R_ �W(L�_d) - 36.5 9 ; , 165 ksi 545 3 < Spot pr .5 C)1 2.3' 'f Job: Date: Subject: 5t?coNo Ft, rreQMfNG- <. APR DiC •y: G‘ 3 s X 15 (24C-I'.7) SPA 11 -.32 'in AP+R 4 4-6.gs ,` J. CLARK JOHNSON Conailting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (208) 454.7137 Data: Sy: Subject:, f Ff oo R IrCkMS Ft.DoR W- �� I.•t- -F 15 p.L 1 c14- 2,3K /1 M _ _ se ,1-S �T`K .512a 1 ►/1 ,._ . K 143. '7 5 )4 G Selz 0k ,.- *2,441 AR: "w(LA -�4 78.4 0. l k I• I, o x.1, .14" scoVO non* R ANiNG A PR Ok G.L 5 15"(2.0 SPR = 187. 4 8 . iv) 3 A P R ' a J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave, N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 kAoME WooD S ATZ S Date: Sep 17..) Iv pl K.5 / <.—r Swbject: GRrWM NG 1=LOOR S'0 Wl c O o2 ►c% Foot VVti c1.7.5 (111,1,/,) R R- o . G44 I. 14 T"WIRD ' - o ( F 14AN WG 7.91 < 0.14 1 K/! M (. vk (3,9it) (O./43k/i) (7.01 Sam - 32 . 4,'? < 5 i ' .0 V' %.5\2.111 (0, l4 ') C,9_3 1 2) J o,00Js.ovsI SpR `- - A I.o1 X 1473 0,613 = 4, S4 '"T N 265 2— -zx D.F. a Z PA 21.391X 42.7 A PR . 13 . 975x Z =2 %7: 9.1s -.7_ )16. , A a okr J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 R. 16' Roof= w= +7.5 -0 t9 _ 2 Kai THIRD FIA0OR AM WO- 11 4 4' I I 1 Roo I. & D.L f 74L. L, \ U')4)) 7- °( K L R 2 G--L 5% x IZ" (z4F- V 3) Split 123.00 io A PR = 6 tn` R% o.,k Rti = 1,6K ( I ) `ra`� 6,4 Fr - ti M ._- ---- -- 3 2, 0 1,n z< SOR c 2 ,4451 R,.- wx] r'�1, 6 K _ (.2k /�� C� =`�,1 1•�L -c 1•� 12 1 12./3 1104 . App e lt - o•1bsPw o• 16S ksi 5 = M 6. rrsr 4• X 1,02 x Q. 624 -. 0.1'4 1�_ G � 12" 849 J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 4544137 lob: Date: $vbjeot: l k.5 / b/ 05. * 4) or cj L. M • a coe 1 or2. 1= t.00 k k�� Wig (‘'2— b.0 (t,- o.� r -Look V 4 1 . 7 . -t 5 La , t). (_) (a-) 0. 9S IN vc - 1��. L w c g3Kli 0.5 Kb X 1 = (0.0 1 2 Sa _ k 3.26 ° sO i r 6 b . 54 0,93 . TN�RD Fi.Do2 FRAMING 7. 11,64 r. 7- W-. L 10,4. 1.935 . z .1 G Soar Qom' r. v. . Q : h ko. a K o.sd - 5,g 9 uG � I.; [5,g- 0.�1K � - ,,,) 46,6 , < 1\90 0 0.■6sKit 0.165Ks M u-+ , b - --�— -, 2 . 32 es/ It m 24f -v3 6 S% A 11 640 -vT) Gt. 6'x6 4 0d( -` 5PR= 91.13i/lJ APB = 60,75V/ = 32 = k 1.01. x 7.12. `L- 0.8 J O G' 1 9'6 l� use ' x iti �2¢F- 'r) oR 8 s /�iX 5 �24f-i� • .4-.•••••• ••■ le A J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 9547137 rN o c u VAT° . p (FocriA) 5 64.44 s r GA Se) L = tzs {- I a) . '2)/ )C (2) Fib s I • 11- row.) D AkT s dW 1 a � d o T c (G3 w �L �T� Hem n Sk4:64 Date: Sy: Sobiset: 'L C l * !=u G e t1t �_JAt.fL �auJAi�...�rt " .:wMi1 4.wi.JY Ed 7' p sF• 2..0•0 p si= t.,c ow-A-rite a to J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (208) 454.7137 Jobs Date: Subject: C�IZCK Cow,KN LP GviLn)NC, -N1 G5 € = 625 U. fi 40 D,L ) (2_ I.h t 1 (10 3,3k 2. A(Coat) ING Tu A i 5 C pAcd 3- 34 •y: rc'S /C•7 3" No MINi4L Dill 5 PiPd Fy = 1r51 wi--N AN .FFar- rwi LgNGTH PP B / N As AN AI c.owelcm_ CoNCe/v c. L Ar) of 34 k > 3 Ok Cµe.cK Fo°T(NC1 -- OR Gu LD(NCp. Mo C 5 e STP fl 5/ ¶ 3.3 k 56it_ PRessvrt = P 3.3°C $2S PSF < 2000. Psf Q+ssvM:D A 2% x2, 2 - 0`' X '1 o" x 12." TotciC w/ 3 - -714 4 t A. wtq Y 15 6000 FoR 7.4 >3.3 0;oMl J. CLARK JOHNSON Coniullin( Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (208) 454.7137 I•bl Date! SebJ•c 22 �1>U t C1100 . 1 23.E S al . 113k- A v VV1 kiAt ∎ v4 - IU X 1 -4 1- ,ew = 'Lf 1 6 � 1 4----- , '�ps1' Wli/1/ • \l = d,28 }I oob � �� �r ,1,44 y 28. 1st tN •:Z c, e c 10,0 1 4 l/ < , 2 I 2 •1 I u Riti7rAtAie �o ctmoviT 'At � IZ. otL, Y 7G Off , o� �' �ct e ) itls atC1C. 4.O ar tAlk ; bet; e 8 8c1 t f vetz.! _G)(7 L a (44)4 ' 4-42 , ()3� Xlt��j I,dr�k— • (10e) 5IM C 14' ( " ), 7 (1 749 4 )0 (11 I' (0 b 0 41 11 e oQ b4 � I IF `7 pTO�' �OK97 '�'O �i��'n�AM' �• ' ` . Qb Ye71•t / I I � M Me14 J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engine.r 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 4544137 lobs Oats= I Su b tt _ Ilyt -tdiw-rivp : ¶ OC i s110r. todtc, e o V Mrs- 1,i- 4 1wAtU Digx- 1 -0 I - 51,myy5r t Ti - 2 t b � 1 = 1 ---� 11 41 ' tR 14 1-- exoti fit Onfue4.-- - yi7 - : CA. Ac r 2a' x 7 ) ( 4 ?)( l,l � c , t I cl.e q `y, c.) '6 GiZi Z. N v +ko '' ,D.D 0 wt.) A wxT ' M pico U i 1 " MK q.. ^of uf — s, W Q. rOf—C � { y,, =Z 42-g: P e r t,. 'C", r /cv es `t' v off. _ ,vt =7.1- 6 , 4 -X/TI-e., 146 e t - 1,44 + ' , e l -qr 1` to RA, • , c t ki7e G06.1 V) * Ta. THe Kvek ''j'r,1/ 1 1 1 7 - 54%K. u1 ' - w/ +U4 'z cir cam ► Tie Kav, $ to-cit .= lip 1-," • b 0.,. 5AtAl2 ; U =4,5yloo = "( e• kr vet- ; --- -r a. o i,s ► : o,a 6 ( m e_ iv EN\ rhai J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 4547137 ►- : Wecp labs oe t a t 'r.._,,.!? • 3 12. •ri Object' - gA) 2 u t ►J D 1=1,5.0- ) \ J, 61 - ,14Y Q .- 40 1 ° emu , o ' ' yW a s t oy, , v0/0 w- 11°1 1 .11)` fi �-- pAit„ : v _ 011 -/ k 1 -271"4"3 8 0 e. -1 r V v. \r z (,7'/ :/.07 .K pA NK /14 11 t,'RWau. •u s v - - tos k il )‘,7 1 12re lie r r4(ce %514. AL°M I ° r /tr = I (13 9,t gl IvWF -- .1(747s 1.0 --P 1; a. .5 - ,,107 S-1 I = 2 ,S s . W • 1 Irr M S rc t . e t . 14. CRT, RT, ¶z4t J. CLARK JOHNSON Carinthia( 1th1( Beyl.nr 1419 112th Ave. N.B. Bellevue, WA 99004 (206) 461.7137 6 L 1 41/4.1 C-1-iscA4 IBC --PL - ( - S OMEwODD SUITES 1 - 1 OTEL Tu I�LJic.4 , wry m11 TiQC: 14{pt+4c$400fj' St.�1T13� Data: ■/rl. /Ies 1y Mobil Iet FS. •.• " L.• • . J. CLARK JOHNSON CammiltIng 1418 1121h Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98001 . (206) 454.7137 rrm-t-1 6EE R.c-Nr5E-0 &1J241- STRoc-rorat4i- cfN4 wev-r 63 • I I Tt-t--1 Z. 66 E Re 6 er ) ' 5172 uerVreAl- tilo7 2J oi1/4t 614-av-T 53.1 • 6EE Rev/ 6EC Ft c."Ni r> -G L s 6HC 53,1 1 '‘ht eso r,.c-7411_,6 /5 4 14 / S rZE-vi5c-c, 4rear-41TEC-7urz4L 672i.)c., * to 5C-C REVIbar) 611ZucTurF.AL r)12,4w/A4c Mb, Oster Sob/sets PI_Art.4 0.44E 7ZPLy Sys tQL J. CLARK JOHNSON carelllog tael.eer 1418112th Ave. N.B. Brkvee, WA 98001 (206)1a11137 TOM "7 LOi9•6 'girl " 20 M.PF{-, scR,soteG B C '� = CO, C6 Of C17psp 600-) = !7i7pb 1� 1`14;frr) = r7 7, ( ° "-► )5) (looa 55"; + 14- S a. F = ('' . ;sp)(ichas)(7.A. ) t Cisb't x)6/3)( )1 2 ;a G LC' 1 =w „ _ 1 7/ - 4 , 0 C' tiS�JC79,'5 29, e o „) .'. 14 /A4o Gov .NS i/Q 8a? - D //2C- CT/oivs PL4N1 X" MA-I14 Ft -tape 'lobs• Oatlt� subject: 17L4►. C NECK FeC- PL.`t' J. CLARK JOHNSON 1418 1121h Ave. N.B. Beane, WA 90004 (201) 454 -7137 PLAN 941Is° Pat. 11 frhf.et : 614EGIC IZEPL. !Teti * 7 CcoNr.• F 3 UI LTJINI C a t '` ( Cco u ) H'E I4/4LL S 1 NJ "T1 DIRE—GTipN �v v .- 3 ✓ 514- CAfzw; ILLS a 1-44-1,4 F1.. 4 14/ T 44x3' ,v a s, J �Yf z-Y i1,5 124 2,51. `3004 WJ 35''4 fop; 4't915t2G ' f9� 438 � 5 t4a412 1.1,4LL ✓ I/.4 ?Ns— )C-)C DI 2eGZ' /ofi.,F 2..oF 34•,2" 1ee49-4/4LL - FLC ZA. 914 ( s, s' ) IV* 1144 29,V 4 (i 3 -- - i d '`!, 9,5' + vs' 4 31 ' D$til tyl Subjects I TC-'M 21- 6C-'S REVi6e0 2ooF PRAMtn-/G1 PLA•i ITEM Dar41L 17/A 13; I � TGM 4. Jo P 0++mag re EnLY Sas 4 /5 J . FR.4 IN9C3t.. Tel- .$N4 •17_ -7 `! ors LEGAL DESCRIPTION HOMEWOOD,SUITES Tukwila, Washington LOTS. 2 AND 3 OF TUKWILA SHORT PLAT NO. `88 -1 -SS, RECORDED UNDER KING COUNTY RECORDING NO 8807210416: SITUATE IN THE COUNTY OF KING, STATE OF WASHINGTON RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA, PERMIT CENTER tt 0000 • STCFI I DRAINAGE REPORT tf tU ' I . FOE: i HQ'EWOOD SUITES SITE • In discussing the storage requirements for the proposed property, it was ascertained that the storage can be accOmi :dated by increasing the River cross - see :ticn adjacent to the subject Site. This method was discussed with Mr. Ftii l Fraser, City of Tukwila, Department of Public LI_rks and previous discussion with Andy .LeVeque of King County Surface Water Management. The widening of the River was performed above the Mean High Water Elevation of 18.30 (NGVD Datum) which represents a flow of 9000 CPS. The bench width is dependent cn the present bank slopes, and the location of the City's property which was set aside for construction of the River Trail. Determining River Flaws; 120)) cfs Elevation = 21.90 9Cx :x :) cfs Elevation = 18.30 Vertical Difference = 3.60 feet Average bench width = 15.00 feet Average River Velocity = .5.00 fps ( Determine of KC SWM ) Increase in River's Flow = 15.0 x 3.6 x 5.0 = 270 :0 CC'S Anticipated flows from the Site for 10, 25 and 100 years are as f al l oars; 0 = 3.72 cfs f, 10--year 0 = 4.74 cfs ( 'te -year ) 0 = 5.24 cfs ( 100 -year ) We note that the highest anticipated flows from the Site is far less than the increased flow capacity of the River. Determining Scuthcenter Site Area = Scuthcenter Blvd = State Farm Fort Dent I Fort Dent II the capacity of the existing storm system in Blvd and the its cutfall northerly to the River. Total Area = 11.25 Acres 3.12 Acres C).89 Acres 0 (flow from this Site is directed to the River and not the existing cutfall) 1.72 Acres 5.52 Acres RECEIVED i .. V A) Cl k b. TUY,V�IILA 'MAR 2 0 1990 PERMIT CENTER The following calculations analyze the pipe capacity of the existing cutfall pipe from the cul- de-sac at the end of Sc4..ithcenter blvd to the River cutfall. The capacity calculations are analyzed for the 10, 25 and 100 year storm. Tc A .0 CA I 0 PIPE CAP STOF11 12.83 5.73 .80 4.584 1.42 6.51 24" 18.18 10 12.83 " .80 ' ` 1.78 .8.1E 24" 18.185 12.83 " .80 " . 2.3E 10.82 24 ", 18.18 1(X) 13.73 11..Z .80 13.73 .80 13.73. .80 14.00 11.25 .80 14.00 .80 14.00 " .90 1.3E 12.28 27" 24.88 10 1.72 15.54 27" 24.88 -ow 2.28 20.59 27" 24.88 1(x) 9.032 1.34 12.10 30" 35.82 10 1.70 15.25 . 30" 35.82 25 2.26 20.41 3(.0 35.82 1(K ) 9.032 11 11 II Please refer to Pipe Sizing table for Pipe's slciDes and roughness ccefficient. It appears that the developed' flows:tributary to the cut.fall storm system will pass through the existing pipes' system wi tFicut ' prr_bl em. ■■■■■O■Mt■■■■■MM■■■■■■■■M MME■ M■ ■■ ■M■■EMMEMMOtMMtrM5L!4IO:'(')i ;;• WtM■ ■ttOMMMtttOMEU ■ ■U1MEtMMEMMMMt■ ■■ M■■■■■■ 1■■■■■■.■■■■■■ t■ ■■■■ a■■■■■■■■■■ 1■■■■■■■■■■ t■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■■■t■■■■ ■■■■■■■HIMM■■■■■■■■■■ . . II ..... uU.aE E ■■ ■■.■■■■ n■■t■ 1111■ ■■EM 1111■■■■ 11■■■■ 11■■■ ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■tn�U■■ ■t■11■■■tt■ - __ -- _ - _.. ■ ■■■ ■11A���11■ 11011■ 11■ ■t■■t■■■■■■■111111■■Uln■■■■■ttt11■■ - ..........o a....:�.......s �..■ ■I/U■ ■■MU ■■■ ■■4110■ ■Mt■■U11■■ ■■ ■M ■■ 411■ U.....■ 1111 ■MM■ 4 ...111_ --- - -- - M �•. ■UMMII11m'C. MMi -21■ ■ ■11 ■■11■tMM ■O11tMOUI�tsMEMMUMO11 ■■ ■■■■■ ■M■M ■ ■E■ ■■ ■tt 11■■■ ���_ - -■M■MMM ■■...ill- .� � � ....�. --�� ._- " i l. ■ hi.. ..m. -!ats ■t � i n!■ tO■ - ! a - ■I.O■ ■MME ■■UMHAMM ■MMEMOMME■ ..--- akiiI MMUmm �..s ■ ■4� 68 111s� "I ■■ i= !Jits= !4,■■OMEMUMMM ■MO■ ■t ■tt■ ■■■■■■■ t■ E■■■ M■■ EMEMMM■■■■ t■■ s■■■■■■ MMEMOMMairrn... ?! 1 41111Es.0 4 54U�m.-! MMUttC!\ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■UMMEMO ■■ ■tt ■ ■■ ■■■■■■M MOM■■■■ MM■ ■■tUMM■U■■t■ ■MM ■ ■■t■ ■■■11tttmumu ■t ■ ■ts.gn14 mm . 510 'rz!411r1::mi■ ■ \� \tUI�MOOM■tOt■ mo ■1111 ■O■ ■M■ ■■■ ■M■O■■ 1111■■■■■■■■ t ■■■■MM11■1111t■ ■■■MO■■■s ■ ■ ■ ■■■11�t■ ■sue moms \m\l'�4■tMaz \tsm'��ummi ■■ ■ ■0E■ ■■■■■11■■■■ ■■11tt■■11■■■11■■11■■■11■■■■■■t■O■■■ ■■41111 mmum■s■■O■ 11111■■ t■ 4. C! 1w ms1= 1mmammOMig! ■Ulow■st11■O■ ■M■ ■ MEMM OO■M■■■ MM■■■■ O■ M■■ MO■■E MMMOMMU■■■M■ ■MO■■O ■■tt■ ■ ■ ■ ■11O ■■ MOM■OMMEMMIIO\ ■WOMMPOIMMEM IMERA ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■MU ■ ■■■114■ ■t■ ■ ■■ ■t■■ ■t■■■■ ■O■■ ■■111■ 1111 ■M■ 111111■■ 1111 ■t■■ ■O ■11■ 111 ■■ 1140■ O■■ O■■■ Ia ■11■M%!u■\rA■ \mO ■OUizmwm ■MEOM■■ ■H■ ■MO■■■ ■■11 ■■O■tt ■ ■t■ ■O■ 1111■■■ ■ ■■■■■■■■MO■MOO■ ■ ■ ■ ■■■O■ ■■■E■■■ 111■■■ r a ■ ■■mmaommomgmmumbo■ ■.`■11O ■ ■s■ ■MOMMEM■MMUOMUMUM■ ■■ MOM■ ■ ■MEMO■ MOM■■ ■ ■OMMESE■ MUMOM Mt ■ ■ ■ ■ ■MMMOMM ■ ■MUMME ■IAMMEMMOAM MU UMMOxMMOO ■MEMM ■■■■ n■■■■■ 11■ MM EMM E■■■■■ Ct■■■ 11■ O■■■■■■■■M■■ n■■ M■■■■■ ■■■■■■■■■■11■■rs■■■■It■■■ %MOINIA WWIII■■rOMOMMOM■ ■■411■■ 1111■■■ ■■ ■■OO■■sUO■11 ■t■OO■■■■111111tttg■■ 1111■■■■■■■■■■ O■ O■■■ O■ 11t M11'/ Ot■■/ a11 ■sMli■tt ■►.n11 ■.`mm■ ■ ■►'■■ ■ ■u. ME ■■■■■■■ Ut ■UUMEMEMOMMMOUM■■EMMUMMEMMO■ ■ ■OEMU ■ ■EUtt ■ ■M■M■■9■■MEMMEMtM■■■rat ■EWMOVIWIIINEMMOMMMMU■ ■■■ 11■■ M■■■■ Mt■ U ■■■O ■■M■■■■M■■M■■■t■■MU■■■■ ■M■■ MUM■ M■■ MECLLLJ■=!_= IM ME MUMMOMUMMINIUMMOWIWIo \M■ \1■ ■O■■ ■ ■t■ ■M■011■OMis■ ■1111 ■ ■ ■■ ■■■ ■ ■■■ ■ ■■■ ■ ■■■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■■ 111111■■ ■t■■■■ 11111■ s■ 11p /ttM■M■r.■ ■ ■■r.UMt■r mor&gmc\l \■1117■■■■ ■■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■ ■MEMMO ■M■■MOMMUO■411th■ ■ ■■ ■EIM MOO ■■■t■E ■ ■ ■ ■ ■:L�1u C== J■ ■ ■■U■■OMWOM ■ ■P/■1AMWO\O ■ ■ ■■■■'r mm■ ■■ ■■O■■ ■011■ttt■O11■■■ ■Mt ■11 ■■■■M■ 111■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ 11■■■ OM■■ 0 ■ ■ ■ ■I�t ■ ■■I.■t ■■rmmumuhom 7Ott ■ ■■ ■■■■■■■11■■ MOM■ ■MME MOM■■■ 11■■■ MMO MMO■ t■■ M■ MOMMEM■■■M■■ O ■tMMEMMOMEL�LJP79C== I ■t■■AMEMO OMSMWIMOMOMMEMt■ u■■t■■ ■ ■t ■■ ■tt■11■ 411■■ ■ ■■ ■■■t■■OO■■ 11111■■■■■ O■■■■■■ t■ t■■■ M■■ t■■■■■■■■■ / ■ ■■■ttl/sO ■ ■n■ ■t■mwmalalmm■ ■■MOMMOM■■■■■■ ■■EM EMUM■■■■ OO MMEM t■■ ■■■MEMMOM■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■MMEN LUArq:=LIss■■■A■■■MMFAIOMMI EMME I 1111■■■ ■1111■ ■■M■■■■■■■■■■ ■t ■O■■■■■■■■ ■O ■1111■■■ ■M■11■O ■■M■ ■M■■■■ / ■■O■■ 911■■■ ■■■ ■7■OO ■ ■OIMMEMMOMOMMAM\ ■■■■■■ ■OMM ■■ ■ ■ ■■MEMOMM ■■M ■OMMEMI■■■ 1111■■■■■■■■ O■■ OM■■■■■■■ MMEM EM■ A= C4111:A IM M:: GL'NC =MAMOM■EMEMME\S\ ■ ■ ■t■ ■MOOMMUUMOEEM 411■■■■■■■■ O■ t■■■■■■ t■■■ ■■ ■U■MMOMMMM■■■MEMOMOMMOMME■■■■ 114 ■■■■ ■t■Mt■■ ■M■ ■t■OOMMEMOMOM000■ ■■ Mt■■■ MMMM■■ tMM■■ O■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ t■■■■■■■■■■■ tM■■■■■■ t■■ M■■ ■■■■■MU ■ ■tt ■OMMEMEOMOt ■OMMORSIS ■■ t■ tU■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■M■■■■ M■■■■ ■M■■■■■■■■OMth ■■■■■■■■■Mt■ 11th ■ ■ ■MEM ■ ■MMEMME ■ ■EMMttttttWOMIM■ ■MOMMUM■■■ ■M■■ MME■■■ O■■■■■■ O■ tt■■ O■ 11■■ O■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ t■ M■■■■■ O■ ■EMMOM ■O■ ■OM■ ■t ■M ■ ■EMMOMMEMEM UMMEN ■■■■■■■■■ M■■■■■■ Ut■ MM■ M■ MM■■■■ O■■■■■■■ M■■■ OM MEMM t■■ O■■■ ■M■OO ■O■t■M11U■MM ■MEMMEMME■ ■M■■■ /tit ■EMMUmM ■■■ ■ MEMMEOU■ MUMMEMOMMEMOMMEME ■ ■ ■ ■ ■■M■■■MM■■ MEMO■■■ UMMEMMEM t■ M■■■ UUUUU■■■ ■■■MM■■OOMOMMM■UUOMOMMERMM■■■M■ ■ ■■MMEM ■ OM MOMMOM ■EOMMOMMMO1■■■■■ ■O■■■MtO■■■ MOM■■■■■■■ EMEMM■ O■■ OU■ O■ ■■ ■EMMOMM11t■000EMMEMME■MM11■ ■11■■ ■■MM■■■■EEU■■■ MUM■■■ M■■ MU■ MttMMUMt■ MMUM■ tOMM UM■■■■■■■■ tM■■ t■■ E■ MMO■ M■ ■tO■ ■MME■MEM■ ■U ■MM■ ■t ■U■MMEMOM■ ■ M■ MM■ MMMO MOMM■■■ M■ ■ ■M■ ■MEMMEM■MOM■11t ■O■ ■ ■O■st■ ■■11 MOMME■ ■M■■ ■t ■M ■O■■ ■ ■00■■■■■■ ■OMMEMMORMMOM ■EMMOO■ ■■■ t■■■■■ 11■■■■ OS■■■■■■ O■■■■ 11EMOM ME■■■■ ■■ ■■OMMEMM■ ■ ■■MEMMEMt ■ ■ ■■■■t■ ■■ ■■s ■■11 ■ss ■ ■ ■t■ /t■ ■ ■ ■ ■s ■11■■■ ■11■ ■■■■EM■■MO■■ 1111■■■ t■ OMMMOM■■■■■ M■■ OMMU■ EM■E■OttM114 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■MEM ■ ■M■■■ ■O■■■ ■■■114411 ■MUM ■E ■ME■■■UEEEMOMM■■ motto■■ 411 ■■t■ ■E■ ■t■■ ■t ■MM■ ■M■ ■ ■M■Ut■ ■Ott■ ■■■ MtEO■■ ■■ tMOME■■■■ tt■■■■■ ■Ot■■UUMMEU■tM■MOMMME■MM■ ■M■ ■E■ ■■■ ■■ ■■■■■■ Ut■■■■■ E ■■■ ■■■M■■t11■■■ ■ ■t ■■11■■m ■t■■■■■■ ■muss■ ■■11■ ■ ■ ■■ 1111■■ ■Mot■■ ■■■ ■ommum ■ ■■■■OtMMOMw ■ ■■ MME■■ tE■■■■■■■ M■■■■■■ OMMEMO NME■■ UM■■ OMMEMEM■ 11■■■■■■■ OM■■■■■■ EMMUU■ ■MM■UMMMMO■■■■■OMM■■MMUMMMEMM∎■ ■■■■■ MU■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ U■ E■■■ OU■■■■ tU■■■ UMMOMMM■■■■■ Ot■■ O■■ t■■■ ■■MEMMUMMEMMEMt ■t■■EMEM ■E■■■■ ■■ A ■■■ M■■■■■■■ M■■■■■M■■ U■■■■■■ M■■■■■ sM■ MMUMMEM OMMEMM■■ MME M■■■ MEMOMM EMMMO M■ ■■■■MMEMMOMMt■■■OMUMOMU ■M■t:U ■■■■■■M■ E■■■■■■ t■■ t■■■■■■ M■ t■ O■■ t■■ t■■ 11■■■■■■ ■■■■■■■■t■OO■OM■■■■■■t■■■■ ■O■OO ■11.00 ■ ■11 ■■■■11■ ■t ■■■MOM`■ ■ M■ M■ 411■ EO■■■■■■■■ MMOM■ U■■ 11■ O■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ MM■■■■■■■■t■ M■■■ MEMEME■■ ■t■■■■■■Ot■ ■M■■MOMMEM■■■■■ ■WO ■■■■■ MMU■■ t■■■ OO■■■■■■■■■■ M■ MUMMOMMO OMMEMEM■ tt■■■ t■ MEM EMO■■ E■■t t■■■■ t ■■ ■OE■■MOOM■■■MMEMMEMEMM ■t■ ■b:■ ■■■ ■MOO ■MMOMM ■ ■tO ■M ■O■■■■■■ 1111■■■ st■■■■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■O■11 ■■tt ■ ■OM■t■■■■■■EMMEMM■ Ott■■ ■MMOMMO ■Ott■ ■ ■tM ■MMEMEMO ;■ ■■■■ Ott■■■■■ MOMMM■ EMM ■■■■M■■■■MM■■■■■■t■MOM■■MEU■t■■ MMEMO MM■ 11Mtt Utt t■ ■UUOMMOMMEMOMMEMMO ■EM■U ■ ■OMMt∎■ ■■ tM ■■MEOMMEMMM■■MMMM■MMEMEMEOOMMEM ■ M E M ■■■tM■O■MME■■■ MMEMMMOMM■■ MO■■ MMOE ■■EEMMEEOOEMOMEEMMEMMM■OM\■ ■■■■■■■■ s■■■ O■ MEMOMM■■ t■ t■■■M MO MMOOW■ tsEM MUMM■ ttt■M■t■O■■■■■■■t■■■■■■■■■■Ottt ■■■■4114 ■M■■MMEMME ■M■ WO ■■■■■■■■■■■ M■■ U■■■■■■ t■ ts■■■ t■■■■■■■■ M■ O■■■■■ Mt■■ t■■■■■■■■ E■■■■■■■■■■ ■ ■E■■Mt11■■ ■M■■■ ■OO■■■■OEMEMMO■■ ■■ M■■ M■■ MM■ ■ ■■ ■MO■■ ■OE■■UO ■U■U ■ ■ ■EMMEMEsM■ MUM■ M■ tt■■■■ MMOMM■ OOUMM M■■■ ■ ■MOUMM■MEMMUMEEMMMOMUMMM■■ ■MO■ ■■■■ MMM■■ MOMMO ME■■ M■ MU■ MMMOMMEM ME 114■■■ ■■ ■MUIMM■EO■■MEMM ■OMOMM■MERM ■■■ ■■■■■■■114■ ■O■■■MEMt■■M■MM■ ■11∎1 ■■■■■■ ■■s11■■■■■■M■Ot■■■U11■■tt■OtsO ■ ■■ 11111■■■■ ■■111 ■ ■ ■■t■■O■■t■114 ■OSt■■ ■s ■■■■■■■111■■■■ ■■t■ ■s0■mmum t_sr ■■ ttttttt ■ ■ ■■■■■t■■O ■■AMMO ■OOM■EMEMEMM ■M■■■ ■t ■t ■ME■ ttttttt■■ tMt■■ M■ sO O■tMOOMt ■■M■UMMUOOMMUMM ■EMEMMNU ■INIMEM sttt■ 41111■■ U■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ t■■ MEMMEMOOtt ■11■■ ■O ■t■OM ■ ■ ■REMMEM■M MMERI ■11■ ■MO■MEMOMM ■ ■ ■ ■t!' ■ ■■ ■■■■MOM■■■■ME MME■ ■t■■■ ■■t ■OS■■EMMEMEt■■■ss■■ 1111■■ ■ ■O ■■■■■tt ■■ ■ ■ ■ ■t■■■■■■■■tEM s OMMEMO■■OO ■Ott ■MEMMIL ■ ■ OM■■■ M■■ OMEMM ■MOM ■IMMEMO■EMMOIMMMM1rMEMMMEO■ Ott■■ ■ME MOM■ EMEMMUMMEM■ MMM ■■ ■MMMMEMMMEttttEMMOMMEMMOMSUM ■MEM■ERMEM■■HMM■OMUO■EMM■ ■ E[LUAddL'LC�EEZEL1dC.L11aLKII MIraL, LC.L411CU : U:J. %MMUMMEMMO ■M ■ ■EMM■MME■ ■ELI■ ■ ■OMMEME ■ ■■MOMMOM ■■■ ■■ ■■■ ■I 1111■■■■■■■■■■■ OO■■■■ MEMM EM■■■■■■ ONEMME■ EMOMMO ■■■■ ■■ ■t■ ■t ■O■■MMMOMEts\■ ■■■ t■■ ■ ■O■■ ■M ■MM■■■ ■O ■ ■■111111■■■■mmumm■ 1111■■■■■■ tO■ s■■■■■ t■■■■■ O■■■■ M■■ ■■t■■■■■■111111■t■■■1111■■■111111■■t■va 1111 ■M■■■ MUM■■ UU■■ tOMM■ M■■ M■■ t■ ■■■■OMEMO■■ ■M■■MUO■ ■■MM■■MMMEMO MME ■■■■t■■■EMMO■ ■t■■ ■M■ ■t■ ■MOM ■MEMMEMMO ■ ■U■■■■ ■ ■O■■■■ ■■11■ ■ ■■ ■ ■ ■t0 ■■ 111111■ 1111■■■■ sM■■ O■■■■ 11t�■■ M ■ ■O■■1111111111 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■■Utt■ ■O■ ■11■ ■■1111■■ ■t■ ■t ■11■zi 1111 ■■■ 411 ■ ■ ■■■■■ ■■ ■■■■s ■■s■MM■ss■■■■ ■sots■■■ ■ ■■■■ ■■ ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■1111■■■■ ■■■11■tt0■OO ■■■■■ ■■mss m ■EMMO ■■■■O MMMM■■ MM■ M■■■■ MMOMOM■ UMMEMM ■MUMOUMM11M ■OM■MUMMMOE�11■t■ ■■■■ ■■MMUMMOt■EMMERMEMM■■MEMEME■ ■O■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■■■■■ ■t■■O ■U ■M■ MME ■■MMEOtt ■ ■■ ■1111 ■M■■Et :t t ♦OCUI..• r; : 'I_ . • ■MOM■OMMOM ■O ■O■■■■■■M■■M■■■■ ■■1111■■ ■I M■■■OMO■■■■■■ 111■■ t■■■■ OMMO MM■■■ ■■■■■■■I /ii.i.i■ ■■ .\r■NYi ii.l A ■■■ ■O■■ ■O■■■ ■t■■■■ ■OMMEMO■OMMEMMEM 11 MUUMM■■MMMM■M■■■MM■■ MME■ MUMMOM ■MOMMEROMt■MEMMEMMOMMEMOMME■ ■■ MMtMEEEEMMM ■MMMMEE ■MM■■MMMMMMEMMMUM■ 00/ 06 09 Ol 09 OS OP' Or Oa 0/ 0 Z9 = :2 10L1 «s 0 173Nt 6 6 1/Z/ J11ra Stirs, t90ti ,•, oo to= w 'ON 110f 14:16 ss. • a•6,4 &I 0.161 999sI. N,NN3 11.011130 At St 133/419N3 wininc l Ej LY „172 g9' 9.5 1 172 21 ceL) .12)1 w� buns vnant /oh' 101 NOILVLfl0103 V3*3I IIY01t - 2i7 59. ZL1 cvt 0• � IQ' ® h(,'£ 7 • tir 1 Ell SS' ob h(• (7(7 11 'U 11 1.1 _• a 'J7 ®I1 MI S's 94'4l 16(7'1 OV Z LZQ' � Z• }7Z 1I y• 1ba9• • '711bs I i•a•1 S 4s ;ti • Z� S ao Sb• 0/ 15 113 2 sit L f*V VAN . 3-w L N3110311i 1111111111 4 � b1:l I# AI 6 F I OL { r•O11. 1"A set i J. ,CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418112th Ave. NE. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 4547137 PERMIT CENTER 1LC' ,l��'101�✓ k 2 v1Hvt u I�✓ -VU1vt?112 labs Dates •ys Subjeets MARCH 16, (cfati RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 2 0 1990 19PPIaes to 14 PAGQb OF CALC J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 L..- 19 'fr i/0114 T 61 VAIL. 4. l kfkitA : /-TroKY VI/P1 v-10' ' % 4 11 .e 11 ow 10f/I VT- )(.1 10 te, 1012-4-ire211--14-1247 A I 4'1' tie Ira %oft,71 6 (Itol000m 4.c.ps) M t- 1-4/,11(' - - ;o,7 et, (Iv upii) 1.5 x t4 tIA ig.2 r k.: <15r: IV 511r( -1, i - ,)Q 14) ,.(090.171., • gc,,i,c20, 1,r 1L, 11 Et.: 14, /110 I - -1 :410114 tit/PI t Z_ - _ - CAL - em:7 - Adloo. )0 G-0 0.490 ivaAv %Ape 4X 1"o Woi J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 0, 1 )( t-l'e t1 w i P R D � s — 1 — U Iroq 6 1 rr L �t- L '. 4 ce ce c ,/ ST � ) 0,7 x I.'�' y- 1'7 x /, �0 ' l6 / J It �Gro J Z d•�� � �`� X 17 A 1, 0 l6 2i< 1 <40 e r.. I 1/1IC NI/w. NI/w. 0, 14 - W 1 et5e irf-; x 10 4-0 N +t kt h - fie, • t t w -e„, Yie6K 4I7 ova 17 '2' 'lI oM, •'' 12-1 2 -0 1 ' q8 o i 6 O,11 - 3, 4- g.9 °°. 9 eeyt> o , I) 7 _ ".el ls�r.. _Ci_1_ZC 2- 1.� 1 ' , / /// ji: ( 0 , /' 4.)11.112, "F-,,----- 'ti'N' ' 1 v - e‘ , IT/ r..01 K “ V on ,_ I to )t- 0\ )( l - *.2 r= IO,I. ka I I N okL 1)1 v N �\ 4., qt, � � 111 �� t OW. W(97 : x IN (I) JAK6 16— I � 4 1.7/ ( i) Gail Ur _ °► — 5 Z uktylw tv Sot Q 7 �o� C., J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454-7137 Subject: Ve I2/A ' * 11 (: 2/ ) 1 T7 < mot-- 1 t*f de 1 \407 . por LAS u4 - rte. 0 H II k "" ix-r Aka ---F-, -471 Y II � u� ‘C 4 7 I 0 �� 1, (0) 6042A9)12 vgt4 t 44,--re Y.= II' I I l 1 41/1 Vs V64 , i I f r vett: Yt"Mi Ver 4,Ouc W/ C dee J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 96061 (206) 4647137 Job: Date: Subject: s ki dbl ; V /u 0-dot2`� sk , K r flop_ 147 0 14 740 o 7 11 K , l o,r 4611 4 • 4A) 1-171 1ifeltrAt: 10114b: rl fo ri e J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418112th Ave. N.E. BeUevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 lob: Date: S bisct : IS 2 x�� IPI4 x15= tiZ���� ob7L 11 d " ) x 14 e-) G 1 1(1 J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454-7137 lob: Date: Sub Oct: 1.74k k9sk 01 11-111%'114.00/-.014. ,1DV1K1-1 }W#1tX. le)c rK9 tAll 4; 4 4 2v , k4, ,eko 4 11 — QI) 1 \Li 1 ( 411' i - klW 2e/.4 1 / 1 U1VPIA die_7 4-17' Vt./ 4 ' 4 =' 11 1-- v 11 W 1L- V-4e /1 "; Tiktiet ott =4.0 tr./re pvw172 t)A t ' 14)ffue9 6A 041 9 A"c+,c id Ave_ 4a trt eF-iu t.)-r) J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112111 Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (208) 454.7137 •64 - trikk(veAs-r 1)tizcl o\ITIkt a- otc* Mii 11-#641 s\( , r jjVf 7 () kkiNsr-A-c-eev W ---2PP-tigtve.f74, t, P4f tA-1607 • ‘9,1 tv , 4(0 -10,4__ ? . etv v...colv -(4/111A Sublectt /1/el c:itcf 5/ k-c? es , /,„titi,, J. CLARK JOHNSON Connilting Engineer 1418112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 Jobs ■' Dates Subject: 15D , '7 z7 I . oo 1 et ? 1 MUD- M 1 7'1 f IA+tfRAL, )0114 r=.1(ore-T vec, Av64- +..mev 'boo � IZ�,c✓� �� co,(7 1 x15 1zv),(5 1 -4 or-r .�, Ilo;f4� 150 To L 1 19 w-- J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 4547137 l•b: !late: i)(ier o �I Subject: im ■ - roli-Lied , i , a l izii,o_ 1. 2)/rm, - 44,' C-4 90 ko--1.14) sH cL ak ex-i; kolteo 4 r, - ' tklato CO w (Z) t *t ' i l k - ) i- '1 - 1711 ,= ►Qi4i - Z 1, c ii 10 / 1 fi v ..: 44( 4 1 v� ° 1:0 15412: k) e,:-: [ --= I I,C 1 1A( 1 1 ' 9 '1(:)7. 1\1••= V. 7/17)( 11/.t 1 VIL Q $)1/14°4) C rrl/ t \/ , - . 11. 1L 7 4 ÷ - 1+ ex-N-Att,t,e, ve,v4 — 31, v„ . v7/1 4 /, <4; y c.'t g / / Kr' I Od e 4' /:G x I e Ver NAK:w it' . 1" )( 1 4 ' t 0, 16 Z 11 M u - :�M "11 30P ' 14T 7 4t)liZ t ,Q,w '60 ) Y c I t ''_ vs .0 4 /tie, 16'4 4 1•19 /, *coop 1401 ee.ci la et J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 �I k Irk lie-41-tsVeW .1:71Wc11 ; 2)\ipAve_- X , mo w h ' v, ryki )wQ/J-7 0)W i) 17),1/4/9 v ' . 51.1 Vs = I &t o�1 = 17�- I �I 2-\" ftrAP, Ap., 406 vt- ite x:, & 5 MJI ,col c v e+y..1.8t J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (209) 4b47137 1.,: ._.� Oate: $u beet: 1v ir= ----I-0 i too= 12-7 r5t CP *Fri f/ e cote vt -re) 10 --,tvu AH- Ix ( it) H v 4,v v 1 et 1201 14 J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 w eto " 511k, \( 5'04- Ve-1,"L k � l 6 b: Date: Swblect: v = eA4Cw) v ipc 1 ' /011 • B "V-7I\4IL f 6-6 7(86 . 17610.4° 'Pore -6 wgtLs P 88 )( 01 / 1 7 , 1 Ar) la& f 4-Ai o5k 5'. IW1017: r ce C ' 0,7x I i7)( 0 r 01442,074,0 bsfysr �blp� � �,,141p � G >,t. I � 1 x ��' 18 2 1 )ik =-7 S*5 (WIPP GI oV•1 I�4 i -I' fi � x fax . -4-11 -4 Z7 - c1-1°'7 \ k1 (Alf- 6 «d$ I 1 7v kirk WAN/ 13 � 2(0 /r < "fe 1- '16o C l 17 P kme; 5/ o e— tiecx 'cf. V Fvke (a' J. CLARK JOHNSON Consulting Engineer 1418 112th Ave. N.B. Bellevue, WA 98004 (206) 454.7137 ( lf' 1 42 4 1. ' 14 tAl Ci: >.kl Its 1444- )1( ).4 171 x "`? Ac It) : 11' '4-- I n - 1 11 w 27 Co t) \ at) 4, b l " U 13 j ISO of a 2;, '9 K „p wik4D; voil-K i,”Vti-rofq „LiAzi,z`L <lie(' Yt)" Ise) @_____rd 01v, V vtittl-1 HOMEWOOD SUITES TUKWILA, WASHINGTON HOMEWOOD SUITES HOTEL FRANCHISED BY HOLIDAY CORPORATION REGISTERED ARCHITECT Edward A. McHugh J u STAIL OF WASHINGTON HORIZON .HOTELS — OWNER DIMENSION DEVELOPMENT CO., INC. - DEVELOPER P.O. BOX 795 — 200 FRONT STREET NATCHITOCHES, LA 71457 AH N . = .S' A V RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWIIA MAR 2 0 1990 Di rnitri PERMIT CENTER Demopulas Inc. ARCHITECTS 2212 DIMITRI DEMOPULOS President ROBERT NESBETT Vice . President 7277 Regency Square Blvd. Suite 100 Houston, Texas 77036 713.783 0055 Fax No. 783 0018 Dimitri Demopulos Inc. ARCHITECTS HOMEWOOD SUITES TUKWILA, WASHINGTON HOMEWOOD SUITES HOTEL FRANCHISED BY HOLIDAY CORPORATION HORIZON .HOTELS - OWNER DIMENSION DEVELOPMENT CO.. INC. - DEVELOPER • P.O. BOX 795 - 200 FRONT STREET NATCHITOCHES, LA 71457 DIMITRI DEMOPULOS President ROBERT NESBETT Vice President 7277 Regency Square Blvd. Suite 100 Houston, Texas 77036 713483 0055 Fax No. 783 0018 SECTION 00000 PROJECT DIRECTORY HOME MOD SUITES TUKWILA WASHINGTON PROJECT #101 PROTECT MANUAL DATE: DECEMBER 15 1989 OWNER: Horizon Hotels Dom. Dimension Development Co , Inc. P 0 Box 795 - 200 Front Street Natchitoches, LA 71457 (318) 352- 8238 A ZHITECT: Dimitri Demopulos Architecdts, Inc 7277 Regency Square Blvd., Suite 100 Houston, TX 77036 (713) 783 0055 FAX (713) 783 0018 CONSULTANTS: Civil Engineers: Touma Engineers 15688 West Valley Highway Seattle, WA 98818 FAX (206) 255 0945 Structural Engineers: Maverick Engineering Co 9738 Town Park, Suite 111 Houston, TX 77036 (713) 271 -1941 FAX (713) 271 1946 Mechanical Electrical Plumbing Engineers: A. R Beck & Associates ' 7277 Regency Square Blvd., Suite 101 Houston, TX 77036 (713) 977 7100 FAX (713) 977 8002 Landscape Architect: C P. & Associates Landscape Architects, ASLA 2503 Richton, Studio B Houston, TX 77098 PROJECT DIRECTORY 00000 SECTION 00850 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS TUKWILA, WASHINGPLQJ PROJECT #101 CIVIL Cl GRADING AND UTILITIES PLAN C2 ENTRANCE ROAD AND UTILITY PLAN C3 SECTION LOCATIONS C4 SHORELINE CROSS SECTIONS LANDSCAPE L1 LANDSCAPE PLAN, PLANT SCHEDULES AND DETAILS ARCHITECTURAL Al 1 SITE PLAN A1.2 SITE DETAILS A2 1 BUILDING NO. 1 FIRST FLOOR PLAN A2.2 BUILDING NO. 1 SECOND FLOOR PLAN A2 4 BUILDING NO. 4 FLOOR PLANS A2.5 BUILDING NO. 3 FLOOR PLANS A2 6 BUILDING NO. 5 FLOOR PLANS A2.7 BUILDING NO. 8 FLOOR PLANS A2 9 BUILDING NO 2 FLOOR PLANS A3.1 BUILDING NO. 1 ELEVATIONS A3 2 BUILDING NO 3 ELEVATIONS A3.3 BUILDING NO. 2 & 4 ELEVATIONS A3 5 BUILDING NO 5 ELEVATIONS A3.6 BUILDING NO. 8 ELEVATIONS A4 1 UNIT FLOOR PLAN A4.2 BUILDING NO. 3 ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN BREEZEWAY PLAN BUILDINGS NO 2 & 4 NO 5 & 8 A5.1 UNIT FINISH SCHEDULES A6 1 UNIT DOOR SCHEDULES AND DETAILS A7.1 UNIT WINDOW ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A8 1 UNIT BUILDING SECTIONS A8.2 UNIT BUILDING SECTIONS A9 1 UNIT WALL SECTIONS A10 1 UNIT WALL SECTIONS, STAIR DETAILS All 1 UNIT INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Al2.1 BUILDING DETAILS A13 1 FRAMING & ROOF DETAILS A14.1 BUILDING NO. 1 FINISH SCHEDULE A15 1 BUILDING NO 1 DOOR SCHEDULE AND DETAILS A15.2 BUILDING NO. 1 DOOR SCHEDULE AND DETAILS A16 1 BUILDING NO. 1 BUILDING SECTIONS SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS 00850 1 A17.1 BUILDING NO. 1 WALL SECTIONS FIREPLACE DETAILS A17.2 BUILDING NO. 1 MILLWORK DETAILS AND FIRE PLACE DETAILS A18.1 BUILDING NO. 1 MILLWORK DETAILS A18.2 BUILDING NO. 1 MILLWORK DETAILS STRUCTURAL S1.1 BUILDING NO. 1 FOUNDATION PLANS 81.2 BUILDINGS NO. 5 & 8 FOUNDATION PLANS S1.3 BUILDINGS NO. 4 & 3 FOUNDATION PLANS S1.4 BUILDING NO. 2 FOUNDATION PLANS S1.5 BUILDINGS NO. 2 & 6 FOUNDATION PLANS S1.6 FOUNDATION DETAILS S2.1 BUILDING NO. 1 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S2.2 BUILDING NO. 2 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S2.3 BUILDING NO. 3 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S2.4 BUILDING NO. 4 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S2.5 BUILDING NO. 4 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S2.6 BUILDING NO. 8 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S2.7 BUILDING NO. 6 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S2.8 BUILDING NO. 5 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S2.9 UNIT FLOOR FRAMING PLAN MECHANICAL ME -1 M - 2 M - 3 M -4 M -5 M -6 M - 7 M - 8 M - 9 M -10 M M - 12 ELECTRICAI, 00850 - 2 SITE PLAN BUILDING 1, BUILDING 1, BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3, BUILDING 3, BUILDING 4 BUILDING 5 BUILDING 8 LODGE - 1ST FLOOR HVAC PLAN LODGE - 2ND FLOOR HVAC PLAN - HVAC PLAN 1ST FLOOR - HVAC PLAN 1ST, 2ND & 3RD FLOOR - HVAC PLAN - HVAC PLAN - HVAC PLAN - HVAC PLAN GUEST SUITES - HVAC PLAN HVAC SCHEDULES AND DETAILS HVAC SCHEDULES AND DETAILS E -2 LODGE, 1ST FLOOR - POWER PLAN E -3 LODGE, 2ND FLOOR - POWER PLAN E -4 LODGE, 1ST FLOOR - LIGHTING PLAN E-5 LODGE 2ND FLOOR - LIGHTING PLAN E -6 BUILDING 2 - POWER PLAN E -7 BUILDING 2 - LIGHTING PLAN E -8 BUILDING 3/ 1ST FLOOR - POWER PLAN E-9 BUILDING 3, 1ST FLOOR - LIGHTING PLAN BUILDING 3, 2ND & 3RD - POWER AND LIGHTING PLAN E -10 BUILDING 4 - POWER AND LIGHTING PLAN SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS E-11 BUILDING 5 - POWER AND LIGHTING PLAN E-12 BUILDING 9 POWER AND LIGHTING PLAN E-13 GUEST SUITES - POWER AND LIGHTING PLAN E-14 ELECTRICAL ONE -LINE DIAGRAM E-15 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES AND DETAILS E -16 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES AND DETAILS PLUMBING P -1 PLUMBING SITE PLAN. P -2 BUILDING 1, LODGE - 1ST FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN ,P -3 BUILDING 1, LODGE - 2ND FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN P -4 BUILDING 2 - PLUMBING PLAN P -5 BUILDING 3, 1ST FLOOR - PLUMBING PLAN P -6 BUILDING 3, 1ST 2ND & 3RD FLOOR PLUMBING P -7 BUILDING 4 - PLUMBING PLAN P -8 BUILDING G 5 - PLUMBING PLAN P-9 BUILDING 8 - PLUMBING PLAN P -10 GUEST SUITES - PLUMBING PLAN P -11 PLUMBING RISERS P-12 PLUMBING SCHEDULES AND DETAIL SCHEHEDUL E OF . DRAWINGS ..: "0850 - END OF SECTION PLAN DDI-HS GENERAL See provisions of Division 1. WORK INCLUDED The Contractor shall furnish all 1abor materials, tools, transportation, equipment, services, facilities required for the complete and substantial installation of all HEATING, VENTILATING or AIR CONDITIONING work shown on the Plans or outlined in these Specifications. The work shall include all materials, accessories, and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the Plans, but which are necessary to make a complete working installation of all systems shown on the Plans or described herein. Work consists of but is not limited to: DX split system A/C systems with electric heat Ductwork systems Exhaust fans Gril%es diffusers, louvers Related work described elsewhere: Painting unless otherwise noted HVAC control conduit Flashing of roof opening Electrical connections to HVAC equipment HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING Section 15/100 PAGE 1 CODES, REGULATIONS, STANDARDS, PERMITS, AND FEES Work shall comply with pertinent local ordinances or regulations. Materials and equipment shall meet standards of and be approved by nationally recognized standards and testing authorities where such materials and equipment are available. Installation shall be by competent mechanics, thoroughly ex- perienced in this type of work and performing this work in a neat and workmanlike manner. Contractor shall comply with safety and occupational health requirements of OSHA and of local authorities. Responsibility for compliance rests solely on the Contractor and cannot be abrogated by virtue of these Plans and Specifications or actions of the 0mner Architect, or Engineer. DDI -HS HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING Section 15/100 PAGE 2 Contractor shall secure all permits required for work under this Section and pay all fees required. Cost of any additional work over and above that included in the Drawings and Specifications necessary to comply with applicable codes and ordinances shall be done at Contractor's expense, this amount being included in original bid. CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES Any Contractor bidding on these Specifications and Drawings shall be a specialist in this field and have the personal skill and or- ganization to provide a practical working system. Any practical criticism or exception given with the proposal will be considered at that time. If no criticism or exception is given with the proposal, it shall be assumed that the Contractor agrees that the system, as outlined in the Drawings and Specifications, can be made into a completely working system. Use of the term "Contractor ", "HVAC Contractor ", "Plumbing Contractor ", "Electrical Contractor" or similar terminology in these Specifications is intended as an aid to the bidder only and to mean the organization engaged to execute the work included whether it be the General Contractor, his subcontractor, or others, and is not intended to indicate any jurisdictional as- signments or other assignments of work, that being the respon- sibility of the General Contractor. The Specifications and accompanying Drawings are intended to en- compass a system that will not interfere with the structural, mechanical, or architectural design of the building, and which will fit into the several available spaces. As it is not within the scope of the Drawings to show all necessary offsets, obstructions, or structural conditions, it shall be the respon- sibility of the Contractor to install his work in such a manner that it will conform to the structure, avoid obstructions, and interferences with other trades, and keep passageways clear. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Reference to Architect or Engineer from this point forward in these specifications shall be interpreted to mean the person designated by the Owner to interface with the Contractor. The Drawings show diagrammatically the sizes and location of the various outlets and equipment items and the sizes of the major interconnecting ducts, etc., without showing exact details as to elevations, offsets, control lines, and installation details. DDI -HS HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING Section 15/100 PAGE 3 The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions and to avoid obstructions. Exact locations of outlets, apparatus, and connections thereto shall be determined by reference to the general plans, to all detail Drawings, roughing -in Drawings, etc., by measurement at the building and in cooperation with other Contractors and in all cases shall be subject to the ap- proval of the Architect. Contractor shall insure that construction plans are identical in content to plans approved during permitting and plan checking procedure, and shall insure that plans used in construction in- clude latest revisions. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to visit the actual site and compare same with the Drawings and Specifications, as- certain and check locations of any existing obstructions, under- ground or otherwise, which may affect the work. Failure to determine conditions will not be considered cause for granting additional compensation. Submittal of bid shall constitute con- structive agreement that the site has been visited and that no circumstances will adversely affect the work other than those shown on the Plans. In case of conflict between Plans and Specifications, or dis- crepancies within Plans and /or Specifications, the Contractor shall request clarification from the Architect. For purposes of bidding, the more expensive materials or method shall be bid. After clarifications, if the less expensive method or material is indicated, due credit will be issued. All ductwork and piping except in various equipment rooms, un- finished spaces, or where specifically designated herein or on the Plans shall be concealed in furrings or chases. Where condi- tions exist which would cause any of these items to be exposed in finished spaces, or to interfere with architectural features or work of other divisions, the Contractor shall immediately call the situation to the attention of the Architect and shall stop work in those areas until the Architect directs resumption of work. The Architect shall have the right to clarify location of grilles, louvers, and diffusers, and to direct minor relocation of such items prior to rough -in at no additional cost to Owner. Do not scale Drawings. If location of grilles, diffusers, con- trol devices, or equipment is not dimensioned on Drawing and is not obvious or fixed by architectural features, verify location. DDI -HS HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING Section 15/100 PAGE 4 Wall mounted equipment, devices, etc., shall be grouped neatly in a logical arrangement, in as aesthetically pleasing a manner as possible, and at the same height, unless otherwise indicated. Contractor shall refer to Architectural sheets in the set of Drawings and shall notify the Architect of any difference from items shown on Drawings related to this section. COORDINATION WITH OTHER SECTIONS Coordinate work with work of other trades in putting the instal- lation in place at the time when the space required by this in- stallation is accessible. Cutting and patching necessitated by any failure on the part of the Contractor to do this shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. Verify openings, supports, and space availability shown on plans for use of this Contractor or for installation of his equipment. If such items are not suitable, notify the Architect immediately. Provide roof ,jacks, vents, sleeves, etc., as required for HVAC equipment installation. Install there prior to final roof in- stallation and coordinate with Roofing Contractor for flashing. Each trade shall coordinate with other trades to assure that plans properly reflect the correct equipment connection require- ments for equipment furnished by that trade or connected by that trade. WARRANTY In addition to all legally inherent warranties, the Contractor shall provide a written guarantee that: All material and equipment shall be new, free from defect, and of the quality and rating shown or specified. Any defect due to missing or improper material or faulty workman- ship existing or developing during the resulting warranty period shall be corrected and the resulting damage repaired without ad- ditional cost to the Owner. Equipment replaced under warranty shall carry an additional one year warranty on equipment and labor. Period of warranty shall be as legally stipulated, but shall be a minimum of one year from the date of acceptance by the Architect unless specifically extended by these Specifications for certain equipment. DDI -HS HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING Section 15/100 PAGE 5 Above warranty shall be concurrent with manufacturer's warranties on equipment. Manufacturer's written warranties shall be sub- mitted to the Owner as specified elsewhere. An inspection of the facilities and equipment shall be made during the final 30 days of the warranty period. The contractor is invited to accompany the inspection. An inspection report shall be submitted to the contractor listing items which must be corrected under the warranty. These items shall be addressed regardless of expiration of warranty period. MATERIALS Properly store all material and equipment at the job site, protecting same from the elements when in open storage and from damage by work of other trades when in place. Material im- properly handled or damaged from rough usage or improper storage shall be taken out and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner with new units at the direction of the Architect. Whenever a definite manufacturer's product is specified, it is the intent of these Specifications and Drawings to set a standard of performance and quality and to define features of the product. Unless "no substitutions" are indicated, products by other reli- able manufacturers will be accepted, provided they have equal capacity, construction, features, performance, maintenance requirements, and other qualities deemed significant. Final approval, however, shall rest with the Architect at the time of submittal of Shop Drawings and brochures. It must be understood that the Contractor shall be responsible for all consequences of any substitution, e.g., required changes in space requirements, access, layout, and clearances; impact on building codes; impact on work and interface of other trades, etc. Contractor shall verify that materials used in all phases of this work comply fully with local code requirements and are approved for use by the authority having Jurisdiction. Submittal of bid by Contractor is assumed to be for the specified or scheduled material unless specifically noted at the time of submission of bid. Where performance criteria or specific features are listed for items of material or equipment, this requirement shall take precedence over manufacturer's designation or model number indicated. DDI -HS HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING Section 15/100 PAGE 6 SUBMITTALS Required submittals consist of three categories: Shop Drawings, Maintenance and Operations Literature, and Record Drawings. Con- tract shall not be considered complete until satisfactory com- pliance with all categories. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with General Provisions. Contractor shall utilize SShop Drawings to assure coordination with and absence of interference with work of other trades, and compatibility with physical fea- tures of the the project. Shop Drawings consist of brochures, catalog cut sheets, Drawings, specification sheets which completely describe all items and shall be sub- mitted in seven (7) copies, five of which will be returned to the Contractor after review and appropriate comments. Purpose of review shall be to assure compliance with intent of design and shall not relieve Contractor of any respon- sibilities under the Contract. Material or items submitted will be held to comply exactly with characteristics of scheduled items or with specifications unless deviations are specifically noted on the submittal. See related require- ments under Materials. Submit Shop Drawings on the following items and on any other items requested by the Architect: Ductwork systems Grilles, diffusers, louvers Compressor /condensing units Refrigerant Pipe Insulation Exhaust systems Control components Controls Air handling units Shop Drawings shall be submitted as early as practical providing ample time for review and resubmittal if required. Failure of the Contractor to receive returned submittal shall not relieve him of any obligation or responsibilities under the Contract. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in logical groupings including as few groups as possible. All submittals shall be signed by the submitting Subcontractor indicating his review and agreement with the submittals. Failure to sign shall be cause for rejection. Submittals shall be explicitly keyed to identifying numbers or symbols in the Drawings and Specifications. DDI -HS HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING Section 15/100 PAGE 7 Maintenance and Operations Literature: Submit at conclusion of project, three (3) copies of permanent three ring binders containing, for all installed items, manufacturer's Maintenance and Operation instructions, spare parts lists, installation instructions, etc. Specifically included shall be recommended periodic maintenance information for all items requiring periodic maintenance. Include also copies of all manufacturer's warranties. This com- pilation of information shall be properly identified on cover and back. Record Drawings: Submit, at conclusion of project, one (1) set of prints, marked in red, to indicate as built conditions includ- ing any deviations or changes whether covered by change order or not. Contractor shall secure from the Architect one (1) set of prints for this purpose and this purpose exclusively. Prints submitted shall be marked "Record Prints ", bear the name of the General Contractor and Subcontractor, and be signed by an officer of the submitting Subcontractor. INSPECTION, TESTS, CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT Periodic inspections will be made during construction by Ar- chitect and /or Owner. Contractor will have an experienced, knowledgeable representative accompany inspector, open enclosures, provide requested tests, etc. Contractor will provide a knowledgeable representative to demonstrate all systems to Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. This demonstration shall be set a minimum three (3) days in advance and shall be at a time specified by the Owner. Contractor shall test and balance system to meet original airflow quantities set forth on the Plans. The results of air balance tests are to be included in Maintenance and Operation Literature submittal. Results of tests are to be signed by the performing technician and by an officer of the sub contractor. After installation is completed, all work shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, dust, oil, grease, etc.; air filters shall be clean at the acceptance of the project. Refer to "Filters" as specified hereinafter in this Section. Bearings shall be properly lubricated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. DDI -HS HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING Sectiot'f' 15/100 PAGE 8 After systems have been cleaned and tested to satisfaction of Architect, they shall be operated for a minimum period of one week and all necessary adjustments made to assure that systems are properly operating then turned over to the Owner. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS All equipment and materials shall be installed in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions unless in conflict with these Drawings and Specifications. Conform to specific requirements shown on the Drawings or described elsewhere in these Specifications. All equipment fur - nished and installed shall be properly secured in place. Follow manufacturer's recommendations unless otherwise indicated; use vibration isolators where applicable. (See NOISE AND VIBRATION). All piping, raceways, and equipment suspended from structure shall be supported with hangers designed for the purpose. Makeshift supports of wire are not acceptable. Hangers of per- forated strap are not acceptable. Wall mounted equipment, devices, etc., shall be grouped neatly in a functionally logical arrangement, and in as aesthetically pleasing a manner as possible. Penetrations through walls, ceilings, or floors shall be ac- complished neatly. Where visible, penetrations shall be provided with appropriate trim. Penetrations through exterior walls shall be made weatherproof and insectproof. Penetrations shall not im- pair the integrity of the wall, floor, or ceiling; e.g., dust tight walls, soundproof walls, fire rated walls, etc. Penetra- tions through roofs shall be made weatherproof. All ferrous metal of equipment or structures installed outdoors shell be galvanized, or galvanized then painted, unless other treatment is specified or scheduled. All ferrous metal on equip- ment or structures installed indoors shall be painted, galvanized, or otherwise protected from rusting. Care shall be taken to protect integrity of finishes during handling, installation, field cutting, etc. Touch up all scratches, cuts, etc., with matching finish in a manner acceptable to Architect. Unless otherwise noted, motor starters for HVAC equipment shall be furnished by Contractor furnishing such equipment, and shall be installed by Electrical' Contractor. DDI -HS NOISE AND VIBRATION HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING Section 15/100 PAGE 9 Each of the various pieces of equipment shall operate without ob- jectionable vibration or noise. All rotating equipment shall be in static and dynamic balance and shall be mounted, supported and fastened so that no equipment vibration is transmitted to build- ing structure, piping, ductwork, or other equipment. Vibration isolation, if not otherwise specified, shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. If, in opinion of the Architect, objectionable vibrations, or transmission thereof to the building occurs, the Contractor shall undertake such remedial measures as may be necessary to eliminate the objectionable condition at no additional cost to the Owner. NAMEPLATE, IDENTIFICATIONS, AND MARKINGS The following shall be identified with engraved nameplates as described hereinafter: Compressor /condenser units Air handling units Unless otherwise indicated, nameplates shall be black phenolic with chamfered edges engraved with minimum 3/16" letters to white core. Attachment will be made by plated screws. Adhesive at- tachments will not be accepted. Nameplates on materials and equipment furnished will be main- tained in original condition. Whenever possible, equipment shall be installed so that nameplates are readily visible. Damaged or unreadable nameplates shall be replaced. Where equipment is modified, nameplates shall be appropriately corrected. DESIGN CONDITIONS The design of the Air Conditioning and Heating Systems are based on the data as shown on the Drawings including design tempera- tures and outside air requirements. Above parameters are with system tolerances, capabilities, and design limitations. Equipment used must be able to produce the design conditions. DUCTWORK, RIGID HVAC.MS HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 15/100 PAGE 10 Furnish and install ductwork complying with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA) Fibrous Glass Dust Construction Standards, latest addition, complete with necessary appurtenances. Prepare and submit Shop Drawings of ductwork systems indicating coordination of ductwork with structure. Utilize Shop Drawings to plan offsets, etc. Where specifically indicated on the drawings, sheet metal ductwork shall be installed. Sheet metal ductwork shall comply with latest SMACNA Standards. Turning vanes shall be installed in non- radius turns greater than 30 degrees. Splitters where indicated shall be constructed of 16 gauge gal - vanized steel secured to a square operating rod of adequate cross section to prevent distortion. Splitter shall be minimum of 1- 1/2 times width of narrow split. Provide sheet metal sleeves where splitters occur in acoustic lined ductwork. Where branch take -offs are indicated, furnish and install Tuttle and Bailey "Vectrol ", Titus AG -45 with *3 controller, or equal. Where ductwork is concealed, splitters and branch take -offs shall be equipped with No. 315 Young Regulator Operator, or equal, with chrome plated cover set flush with ceiling and located so as to avoid conflict with light fixtures. Where ductwork is exposed or above accessible ceiling they shall be equipped with locking type quadrants. Furnish and install manual volume dampers where shown on Drawings. Damper blades shall be constructed of minimum 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal securely fastened to square operating rod. DUCTWORK, FLEXIBLE Flexible duct shall be installed in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations as a minimum. Flexible duct where shown shall consist of zinc coated spring steel helix, per- manently bonded to a full interior liner, forming the duct core. Factory applied insulation shall be fiberglass, minimum thermal resistance R =4.0, sheathed in a seamless exterior vapor barrier jacket with vapor cuff, both ends. Flex duct used in return air plenum shall have fire spread /smoke developed rating of 25/50. Duct shall be taped with spin in fittings of proper type for duct material, incorporating volume damper and extractor unless other- wise indicated. Flexible duct shall be supported at points not exceeding 6 feet apart. Hangers shall be from supporting rings integral'to the HVAC.MS HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 15/100 PAGE 11 duct or shall be by saddles, minimum 1 -1/2 in. width. Flexible duct shall be installed with no bends exceeding 90 degrees; bending radius shall not be less than 1 -1/2 times nominal duct diameter. Flexible duct shall be connected to take -offs, diffusers, etc. with stainless steel Worm Gem type straps, or plastic straps made for that purpose. Maximum length of flexible duct runs shall be 10 feet unless specifically noted on the Drawings. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS Furnish and install flexible connections on suction and discharge side of units. Flexible connections to be made of "Ventglass" fire resistant glass fabric as manufactured by Ventfabrics, Inc., or equal, with suitable collar at each end. Material shall weigh approximately 30 ounces per square yard, securely and firmly at- tached so that a minimum of 2" clearance is provided between ends of the metal members. Connections shall be stitched and not stapled and shall be airtight. Connections exposed to the weather shall be equipped with a raintight and sun proof shield. DUCT INSULATION All supply and return air ducts will be insulated unless other- wise noted or specified. All sheetmetal ducts shall be externally insulated with duct wrap. Insulation shall be firmly butted at all joints with maxi- mum allowable compression of 25%. All seams shall overlap a min- imum of 2" and be finished with appropriate pressure sensitive tape with acrylic adhesive approved by SMACNA. For rectangular ducts over 18" wide, duct wrap shall be addi- tionally secured to the bottom of the ductwork with mechanical fasteners on 18" centers to reduce sagging. Washers shall be ap- plied without compressing the insulation. All seams, joints, penetrations, and damage to the facing shall be sealed with vapor barrier mastic. HVAC.MS HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 15/100 PAGE 12 Unless otherwise specified, duct wrap material shall be a thermal and acoustical laminated glass fiber insulation meeting require- ments of NFPA 90, with a minimum fire rating of less than 25 flame spread, 50 fuel contributed, and 50 for smoke developed. Duct wrapping material shall have minimum density of 0.75 pounds per cubic foot with FSI<. Facing shall have a maximum vapor transmission rate of 0.02 perms. Integrity of vapor barrier must be maintained. Installed thickness shall be as follows: PIPE INSULATION Supply In Return Air Plenum - Not in Return Air Plenum - Return In Return Air Plenum - Not in Return Air Plenum - 1 -1/2" 2 -1/4" 1 -1/2" 1 -1/2" Unless otherwise specified lining material shall be as manufac- tured by Certain -Teed, F<nauf, Owens-Corning, Manville, or ap- proved equal. Insulate all refrigerant suction lines; all interior condensate lines not in mechanical rooms equipped with floor drains, and all water piping installed by this contractor as exposed to outside temperatures, as follows: Refrigerant suction lines in return air plenums and elsewhere where called for: Insulate with Armstrong Armaflex 2000, 1/2" wall thickness. Condensate lines in return air plenums as described above: Insulate with Armstrong Armaflex 2000, 1/2" wall thickness. Refrigerant suction lines not in return air plenum: Insulate with Armstrong Armaflex AP, 3/4" wall thickness. Condensate lines not in return air plenum and as described above: Insulate with Armstrong Armaflex 2000, 1/2" wall thickness. Water piping exposed to outside temperatures: Insulate with Armstrong Armaflex AP, 3/4" wall thickness. Equivalent insulations by other manufacturers, meeting these HVAC. MS HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 15/100 PAGE 13 specifications will be considered. Insulations shall be unicel- lular foamed elastomeric rubber meeting ASTM C534 and ASTM D- 1056- SBE -41. Insulate for use in return air plenums shall, in addition, have flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less as tested by ASTM E- 84 -75. Insulation shall be installed per manufacturer's published proce- dures including the use of the recommended adhesive. Exposed insulation, both inside and outside shall be finished with two coats of vinyl lacquer per manufacturer's published procedures. Insulated piping shall be supported with appropriate hangers as elsewhere specified. GRILLES, REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS, LOUVERS Furnish and install grilles, diffusers, registers as scheduled on the Drawings. Substitution of manufacturer of these items is permissible only if of equal type and quality. The Architect shall be sole judge of equality. Rid shall be based on scheduled items. Grilles, diffusers, registers (air devices) shall be painted offwhite unless otherwise indicated. For those air devices indi- cated to be job painted provide prime coat and coordinate paint- ing with Painting Contractor. Interior of air devices and con- necting duct shall not be noticeably visible. Paint interior with flat black paint if required. Verify compatibility of grilles, diffusers, registers, louvers to type of walls or ceilings called for on Architectural Plans. In- stall recessed devices so no gap is left between device and surface. Install device square with room walls unless otherwise noted. Louvers installed in exterior walls shall be made weathertight; properly flash device to walls with flashing compatible with wall material and construction. HVAC.MS HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 15/100 PAGE 14 FIRE DAMPERS Furnish and install at locations shown on plans, indicated on schedules, or required by Code, fire dampers constructed, tested, and labeled in accordance with UL Standard 555. Fire dampers shall have a 1 -1/2 hour UL classification where installed in walls, partitions, or floors having a fire resistance rating of more than two hours but less than three hours as indicated on Ar- chitectural Plans. Fire dampers in walls, partitions, and floors rated three hours or more shall have a three hour UL classification. All fire dampers shall have a 212 degF fusible link unless otherwise noted. Fire dampers used for protection of ceiling openings shall be specifically classified as a ceiling fire damper. Fire dampers shall be equipped for vertical or horizontal instal- lation as required by the location shown. Fire dampers shall be installed using steel sleeves, angles, and other materials and practices required to comply with NFPA, SMACNA, and manufacturer's installation requirements, and to provide an in- stallation substantially equal to conditions under which damper was tested at UL. Fire dampers shall be accessible for resetting and replacement of fusible link through an access door. Exposed access doors shall be architecturally compatible with wall or partition in which it is mounted. Fire dampers in the open position shall not significantly impede air flow and, generally, shall not exceed 0.05 inches w.c. pres- sure drop at air flows indicated on plans. Submittal literature shall include performance data in accordance with AMCA Standard 500. FILTERS Provide filters in air handling units and elsewhere where called for. Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, the air filters shall be commercial grade disposable panel type fiberglass filters having minimum arrestances as follows: 1" thick - 65 - 707. All filters shall be 1" thick unless otherwise noted. Filters shall be American Air Filter Amer -Glas or approved equal. HVAC . MS HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 15/100 PAGE 15 Filters shall be installed in system prior to initial operation of air moving equipment. Operation without filters installed shall mandate cleaning of coils and duct prior to acceptance. Install clean set of filters at time of final acceptance. Leave one complete set of filters, labeled to indicate location of use, on the job site for future installation by Owner. EXHAUST FANS Furnish and install exhaust fans as scheduled. Fans (other than restroom exhaust fans) shall be rated in accordance with stand- ards of Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. (AMCA). Sound rating shall be available for all units in accordance with AMCA Standard 301. Belt drive fans shall utilize totally enclosed, fan cooled, ball bearing motors unless otherwise specified. Provide high quality, steel core belts. Roof mounted fans shall be equipped with prefabricated curbs. Fan housing shall have cylindrical venturi throat, enclosed wind bands with wing type, counter - balanced damper. Fan wheels shall have die formed blades, mounted on welded steel hubs, entire as- sembly balanced for vibration free operation. Exhaust fans utilized for kitchen hood exhaust over cooking sur- faces shall conform to requirements and be listed for UL class- ification YZHW. Fans shall be installed to comply with NFPA 96. SPLIT HVAC SYSTEMS Furnish and install split system HVAC systems as and of the ratings indicated on the Drawings. Split system shall consist of compressor /condenser unit, air han- dling unit with evaporative coil, interconnecting refrigerant piping, accessory items, and controls. Compressor /condenser unit and air handling unit with evaporator coil shall all be of same manufacture. Combined system shall have an EER rating of 8.50 or greater per ARI Standard 210 and an SEER rating of 10.5 or greater per DOE test conditions. Compressor /condenser unit shall consist of compressor, condenser coil, condenser fan, controls, piping, and casing. Casing shall be of galvanized steel, properly treated, with a finish coat of outdoor baked enamel. Access panels shall allow for ready acces- sibility of all components. Base shall allow for draining of moisture. Openings shall be provided for refrigerant and electrical Lines. Compressor shall be hermetically sealed, resiliently mounted, suction cooled, overload protected, internal. HVAC.MS HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 15/100 PAGE 16 pressure relief protected, have internal protection from exces- sive temperature and pressure, and have crankcase heater. Com- pressor shall have four year warranty, in addition to and beyond warranty specified elsewhere. Condenser coil shall be copper tube, aluminum fin and shall be protected by steel guards. Con- denser fan shall have inherent overload protection. Air handling unit shall consist of evaporator coil, expansion valve assembly, blower, filters, and cabinet. Cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel, properly treated, with baked on enamel finish. Cabinet shall be insulated with minimum one inch thick fiberglass insulation; removable panels shall provide ready access to all components. Cabinet shall include condensate drain pan with condensate outlets on both sides. Evaporative coil shall be copper tube, aluminum fin. Blower shall be centrifugal type, statically and dynamically balanced, forward curved, double inlet blower wheel, permanently lubricated bearings, adjustable belt drives. Motors shall be NEMA standard frame types. Filters shall be as hereinafter specified. Interconnecting refrigerant piping shall be sized per manufacturer's recommendations. Provide suction line strainer, filter dryer, sight glass, and service valves. Insulate suction line with minimum 1" wall thickness insulation. Where refrigerant lines are over fifty feet in length, or verti- cal rise or drop exceeds fifteen feet, obtain from the manufac- turer a letter confirming validity of the warranty for the specific installation; submit letter in MO binder heretofore specified. Refrigerant system controls shall include high and low pressure switches. Provide low ambient kit. Provide timed off control to require minimum five minute "off" period. Provide thermostat as described elsewhere. Furnish and install auxiliary drain pans under noted. Drain pans shall be constructed of 20 sheet steel large enough to catch any overflow Pans shall have 2" vertical sides, hemmed top joints soldered. A.C. units where gauge galvanized from unit served. edge, with all Provide for installation under Division 16 requirements, all motor starters required. Motor starters, unless otherwise noted, shall be NEMA 1, magnetic, line voltage type. Provide melting alloy type overload relays in each ungrounded conductor if blower motors are not integrally protected. CONTROLS HVAC°MS Provide for each A/C sgstem a low voltage thermostat as described on the drawings. All HVAC control wiring to be in conduit. Electrical Contractor to furnish outlet box and conduit between air handling unit and compressor/condenser unit. Conduit to contain pull wire. HVAC Contractor to install and connect all low voltage wiring. Control sequence to be as described on the Drawings. EXHAUST FANS, SUPPLY FANS Furnish and install exhaust fans and supply fans as scheduled. Fans (other than restroom exhaust fans) shall be rated in accord- ance with standards of Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc" (AMCA). Sound rating shall be available for all unit in ac- cordance with AMCA Standard 301. Fans shall be as scheduled, or approved equal. Fans have been specifically selected for performance characteristics construc- tion features, and other details; proposed substitutions shall incorporate all characteristics; architect shall be sole judge of equality. Manufacturer of fans shall certify that fans will meet perfor- mance criteria given; submittals for fans shall be Signed by a responsible authority of the manufacturer as verification of this certification. HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 15/100 PAGE 17 DDI-HS PLUMBING Section 15/200 Page 1 GENERAL See provisions of Division 1. WORK INCLUDED The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials tools, transportation, equipment, services, facilities required for the complete and substantial installation of all PLUMBING work shown on the Plans or outlined in these Specifications. The work shall include all materials, accessories, and apparatus not specifi- cally mentioned herein or noted on the Plans, but which are necessary to make a complete working installation of all systems shown on the Plans or described herein. Work consists of, but is not limited to: Sanitary sewer system Storm sewer system Potable water system, hot and cold Plumbing fixtures per schedule Gas piping Connection of HVAC equipment Connection of kitchen equipment Related work described elsewhere: Painting unless otherwise noted Electrical connections to plumbing equipment CODES, REGULATIONS, STANDARDS, PERMITS, AND FEES Work shall comply with pertinent local ordinances or regulations. Materials and equipment shall meet standards of and be approved by nationally recognized standards and testing authorities where such materials and equipment are available. Installation shall be by competent mechanics, thoroughly ex- perienced in this type of work and performing this work in a neat and workmanlike manner. Contractor shall comply with safety and occupational health requirements of OSHA and of local authorities. Responsibility for compliance rests solely on the Contractor and cannot be abrogated by virtue of these Plans and Specifications or actions of the Owner, Architect, or Engineer. DDI-HS PLUMBING Section 15/200 Page 2 Contractor shall secure all permits required for work under this Section and pay all fees required. Cost of any additional work over and above that included in the Drawings and Specifications necessary to comply with applicable codes and ordinances shall be done at Contractor's expense, this amount being included in original bid. CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES Any Contractor bidding on these Specifications and Drawings shall be a specialist in this field and have the personal skill and or- ganization to provide a practical working system. Any practical criticism or exception given with the proposal will be considered at that time. If no criticism or exception is given with the proposal, it shall be assumed that the Contractor agrees that the system, as outlined in the Drawings and Specifications, can be made into a completely working system. Use of the term "Contractor" "HVAC Contractor" "Plumbing Contractor" "Electrical Contractor" or similar terminology in these Specifications iis intended as an aid to the bidder only and to mean the organization engaged to execute the work included whether it be the General Contractor, his subcontractor, or others, and is not intended to indicate any jurisdictional as- signments or other assignments of work, that being the respon- sibility of the General Contractor. The Specifications and accompanying Drawings are intended to en- compass a system that will not interfere with the structural, mechanical or architectural design of the building and which will fit into the several available spaces. As it is not within the scope of the Drawings to show all necessary offs«ets obstructions, or structural conditions, it shall be the respon- sibility of the Contractor to install his work in such a manner that it will conform to the structure avoid obstructions, and interferences with other trades, and keep passageways clear. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Reference to Architect or Engineer from this point forward in these Specifications shall be interpreted to mean the person designated by the Owner to interface with the Contractor. The Drawings show diagrammatically the sizes and location of the various outlets and equipment items and the sizes of the major interconnecting ducts, etc., without showing exact details as to elevations, offsets, control lines, and installation details. . DDI -HS PLUMBING Section 15/200 Page 3 The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions and to avoid obstructions. Exact locations of outlets, apparatus, and connections thereto shall be determined by reference to the general Plans, to all detail Drawings, roughing -in Drawings, etc., by measurement at the building and in cooperation with other Contractors and in all cases shall be subject to the ap- proval of the Architect. Contractor shall insure that construction Plans are identical in content to Plans approved during permitting and plan checking procedure, and shall insure that Plans used in construction in- clude latest revisions. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to visit the actual site and compare same with the Drawings and Specifications, as- certain and check locations of any existing obstructions, under- ground or otherwise, which may affect the work. Failure to determine conditions will not be considered cause for granting additional compensation. Submittal of bid shall constitute con- structive agreement that the site has been visited and that no circumstances will adversely affect the work other than those shown on the Plans. In case of conflict between Plans and Specifications, or dis- crepancies within Plans and /or Specifications, the Contractor shall request clarification from the Architect. For purposes of bidding, the more expensive materials or method shall be bid. After clarifications, if the less expensive method or material is indicated, due credit will be issued. All piping except in various equipment rooms, unfinished spaces, or where specifically designated herein or on the Plans shall be concealed in furrings or chases. Where conditions exist which would cause any of these items to be exposed in finished spaces, or to interfere with architectural features or work of other divisions, the Contractor shall immediately call the situation to the attention of the Architect and shall stop work in those areas until the Architect directs resumption of work. The Architect shall have the right to clarify location of fix- tures and equipment, and to direct minor relocation of such items prior to rough -in at no additional cost to Owner. Do not scale Drawings. If location of fixtures, trim or equip- ment is not dimensioned on Drawing and is not obvious or fixed by ceiling grid or other architectural features, verify location prior to installation. DDI-HS PLUMBING Section 15/200 Page 4 Contractor shall refer to Architectural sheets in the set of Drawings and shall notify the Architect of any difference from items shown on Drawings related to this section. COORDINATION WITH OTHER SECTIONS Coordinate work with work of other trades in putting the instal- lation in place at the time when the space required by this in- stallation is accessible. Cutting and patching necessitated by any failure on the part of the Contractor to do this shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. Verify openings, supports, and space availability shown on plans for use of this Contractor or for installation of his equipment. If such items are not suitable notify the Architect immediately. Provide roof Jacks vents, sleeves etc., as required for plumb- ing equipment installation. Install there prior to final roof installation and coordinate with Roofing Contractor for flashing. Each trade shall coordinate with other trades to assure that plans properly reflect the correct equipment connection require- ments for equipment furnished by that trade or connected by the trade. WARRANTY The Contractor shall provide a written guarantee that: All material and equipment shall be new free from defect and of the quality and rating shown or specified. Any defect due to missing or improper material or faulty workman- ship existing or developing during the resulting warranty period shall be corrected and the resulting damage repaired without ad- ditional cost to the Owner. Period of warranty shall be as legally stipulated, but shall be a minimum of one year from the date of acceptance by the Architect unless specifically extended by these Specifications for certain equipment. Above warranty shall be concurrent with manufacturer's warranties on equipment. Manufacturer's written warranties shall be sub- mitted to the Owner as specified elsewhere. DDI-HS PLUMBING Section 15/200 Page 5 An inspection of the facilities and equipment shall be made during the final 30 days of the warranty period. The contractor is invited to accompany the inspection. An inspection report shall be submitted to the contractor listing items which must be corrected under the warranty. These items shall be addressed regardless of expiration of warranty period. MATERIALS Properly store all material and equipment at the job site, protecting same from the elements when in open storage and from damage by work of other trades when in place. Material im- properly handled or damaged from rough usage or improper storage shall be taken out and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner with new units at the direction of the Architect. Whenever a definite manufacturer's product is specified, it is the intent of these Specifications and Drawings to set a standard of performance and quality. Products by other reliable manufac- turers will be accepted, provided they have equal capacity, construction, features, performance and other qualities deemed significant. Final approvalv however, shall rest with the Ar- chitect at the time of submittal of Shop Drawings and Brochures. It must be understood that the Contractor shall be responsible for all consequences of any substitution e.g. required changes in space requirements access, layoot and clearances; impact on building codes; impact on work and interface of other trades, |etc. Submittal of bid by Contractor is assumed to be for the specified material unless specifically noted at the time of submission of bid. Where performance criteria or specific features are listed for items of material or equipment, this requirement shall take precedence over manufacturer's designation or model number indicated. SUBMITTALS Required submittals consist of three categories: Shop Drawings, Maintenance and Operations Literature and Record Drawings. Con- tract shall not be considered complete until satisfactory com- pliance with all categories. DDI-HS PLUMBING Section 15/200 Page 6 Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with General Provisions. Shop Drawings consist of brochures, catalog cut sheets, Drawings, specification sheets which completely describe all items and shall be submitted in seven (7) copies, five of which will be returned to the Con- tractor after review and appropriate comments. Purpose of review shall be to assure compliance with intent of design and shall not relieve Contractor of any responsibilities un- der the Contract. Materials or items submitted will be held to comply exactly with characteristics of scheduled items or with specifications unless deviations are specifically noted on the Submittal. See related requirements under Materials. Submit Shop Drawings on the following items or any other items requested by the Architect: Plumbing fixtures and trim Water heaters Hose bibbs and hydrants Floor drains and cleanouts Pipe insulation Shop Drawings shall be submitted as early as practical providing ample time for review and resubmittal if required. Failure of the Contractor to receive returned submittal shall not relieve him of any obligation or responsibilities under the Contract. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in logical groupings in- cluding as few groups as possible. All submittals shall be signed by the submitting Subcontractor indicating his review and agreement with the submittals. Failure to sign shall be cause for rejection. Submittals shall be explicitly keyed to identifying numbers or symbols in the Drawings and Specifications. Maintenance and Operations Literature: Submit at conclusion of project, three (3) copies of permanent three ring binders containing, for all installed items, manufacturer's Main- tenance and Operation instructions, spare parts lists in- stallation instructions etc. Specifically included shall be recommended periodic maintenance information for all items requiring periodic maintenance. Include also copies of all manufacturer's warranties. This compilation of in- formation shall be properly identified on cover and back. DDI -HS PLUMBING Section 15/200 Page 7 Record Prints: Submit, at conclusion of project, one (1) set of prints, marked in red, to indicate any deviations or changes whether covered by change order or not. Contractor shall secure from the Architect one (1) set of prints for this purpose and this purpose exclusively. Prints submitted shall be marked "Record Prints ", bear the name of the General Contractor and Subcontractor, and be signed by an officer of the submitting Subcontractor. INSPECTION, CLEANING, AND TESTS Periodic inspections will be made during construction by Ar- chitect and /or Owner. Contractor will have an experienced, knowledgeable representative accompany inspector, open enclosures, provide requested tests, etc. Contractor will provide a knowledgeable representative to demonstrate all systems to Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. This demonstration shall be set a minimum three (3) days in advance and shall be at a time specified by the Owner. All piping shall be thoroughly tested for leaks in accordance with regulations of local authorities, however, the following minimum tests shall be made and observed by the Owner if he so requests: Soil, waste vent lines - test by filling water to top of vent so that all parts of system are subject to this pressure. Acceptable result is No Leaks. Water Lines - test by subjecting system to static pres- sure of 150 PSGI and holding for 24 hours. Acceptable result is no appreciable loss to pressure. Gas Lines - test by subjecting system to static pres- sure of 100 PSI and holding for 24 hours. Acceptable result is no appreciable loss to pressure. After all gas lines are tested and leak free, make -up connection to meter. Domestic hot and cold water line shall be thoroughly cleaned and chlorinated according to approved methods of the Texas Department of Health and local authorities. After installation is completed, all work shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, dust, oil, grease, etc., remove all protective covers and polish all chrome, brass, etc. DDI -HS PLUMBING Section 15/200 Page 8 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS All equipment and materials shall be installed in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions unless in conflict with these Drawings and Specifications. Conform to specific requirements shown on the Drawings or described elsewhere in these Specifications. All equipment fur- nished and installed shall be properly secured in place. Follow manufacturer's recommendations unless otherwise indicated; use vibration isolators where applicable. All piping, raceways, and equipment suspended from structure shall be supported with hangers designed for the purpose. Makeshift supports of wire are not acceptable. Hangers of per- forated strap are not acceptable. Pipe support spacing shall be per manufacturer's recommendations or as scheduled on the Drawings. Wall mounted equipment, devices, etc., shall be grouped neatly in a functionally logical arrangement, and in as aesthetically pleasing a manner as possible. Penetrations through walls, ceilings, or floors shall be ac- complished neatly. Where visible, penetrations shall be provided with appropriate trim. Penetrations through exterior walls shall be made weatherproof and insectproof. Penetrations shall not im- pair the integrity of the wall, floor, or ceiling; e.g., dust tight walls, soundproof walls, fire -rated walls, etc. Penetra- tions through roofs shall be made weatherproof. All installed materials shall be suitable for the environment to which it is subjected. All ferrous metal on equipment or struc- tures installed outdoors shall be galvanized, or galvanized then painted, unless other treatment is specified or scheduled. All ferrous metal on equipment or structures installed indoors shall be painted, galvanized, or otherwise protected from rusting. Care shall be taken to protect integrity of finishes during handling, installation, field cutting, etc. Touch up all scratches, cuts, etc., with matching finish in a manner accept- able to Architect. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, hot water, where in- cluded in the project, shall have temperature set for 120 degrees F. maximum. Contractor shall verify temperature setting with thermometer. DDI-HS PLUMBING Section 15/200 Page 9 Unless otherwise noted, motor starters for Plumbing equipment shall be furnished by Contractor furnishing such equipment, and shall be installed by Electrical Contractor. NAMEPLATES, IDENTIFICATIONS, AND MARKINGS Nameplates on materials and equipment furnished will be main- tained in original condition. Whenever possible, equipment shall be installed so that nameplates are readily visible. Damaged or unreadable nameplates shall be replaced. Where equipment is modified, nameplates shall be appropriately corrected. Location of underground piping shall be marked by the use of un- derground warning tape, colored with printed message. Tape to be buried directly over pipe, 6" below finished grade. Tape to be polyethylene, 6" wide. Tape for metallic pipe to be .004" thick; tape for non-metallic pipe to consist of two layers of polyethylene with a metallic film ribbon between. Underground warning tapes to be as follows: Gas Piping - Yellow, Legend "Gas line buried below". Seton No" 210 GAS, for metallic pipe; Seton No. 2 GAS, for non-metallic pipe. Sewer Piping - Green, legend "Sewer line buried below". Seton No. 210 SEW, for metallic pipe; Seton No. 2 SEW, for non-metallic pipe. Water Piping - Blue, legend "Water line buried below". Seton No. 210 WAT, for metallic pipe; Seton No. 2 WAT, for non-metallic pipe. Similar material by Brady is acceptable. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING Perform all excavation trenching and backfilling necessary to install the work as specified and/pr shown on the Drawings. Determine, prior to excavation on trenching the location of other underground services, pipes or obstructions and avoid damage to same. Contractor is responsible for damage incurred as a result of performance of his work. Lay piping on solid bed giving continuous support. Lay sand bed if necessary to accomplish this. DD1-HS UTILITY CONNECTIONS AND SERVICES PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM PIPE AND FITTINGS PLUMBING Section 15/200 Page 10 When backfilling, lay no rocks or debris on buried pipe; backfill in shallow layers, tamping as filled. Resultant backfill must be equal to 95% density of original soil condition in unfinished areas; in finished areas backfill and finish to match surrounding area. Trenching and backfilling shall be covered by warranty heretofore specified. Noticeable settling shall be repaired at Contractor's expense during warranty period. Mark location of underground pipe as described elsewhere. Sanitary sewer connections shall be made by this Contractor as indicated on the Drawings. Pay all applicable fees. Potable water system connections shall be made by this Contractor as indicated on the Drawings in accordance with local requirements. Pay all applicable fees. Gas piping shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings. Coordinate with gas company and pay all costs. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures, as shown in schedule and elsewhere on Drawings, complete in every detail and with all necessary appurtenances to provide a complete functioning unit. Fixtures must be delivered to job site properly crated and in perfect condition. Fixtures shall be set true and level, at mounting heights as specified. Due care shall be given to firmly secure all fixtures, trim, flush valves, stops, escutcheons, etc. Where fixtures meet floors, wall, etc., caulk with RTV rubber caulking, white coved for easy cleaning. Alll exposed connections and fittings shall be chrome plated brass. Verify acceptability of materials listed hereinafter by local authorities, notify Architect. Bid acceptable materials with proper bid qualifications. DDI-HS PLUMBING Section 15/200 Page 11 Sanitary sewer piping within building except where otherwise in- dicated shall be Schedule 40 PVC. Vent piping 3" and larger shall be same as specified above for sanitary sewer. Water piping in the building shall be copper, Type L. Water piping underground outside shall be Schedule 80 PVC suitable for portable water. Gas piping underground and outside building (if installed by Contractor), shall be Schedule 40 black steel doped and wrapped to prevent corrosion. Dope and wrap joints. If gas piping is installed by utility company, utility standard materials and method may be used. Nipples shall be same quality and finish as pipe with which used. Furnish and install minimum 18 gauge sheet metal sleeves or thimbles sized to allow pipe and covering to pass through floors, or roofs. Pipe through floors and outside walls, partitions, etc., a sleeve or steel pipe shall be provided to pass the pipe and covering unbroken. Use schedule pipe curb where roof penetration is shown. Provide cast bronze escutcheqns chrome plated for all exposed pipe penetrations through walls, cesilingm* floors. All pipes passing through roofs shall extend a minimum of six inches and shall be flashed with sheet lead minimum four pounds per square foot built eight inches into waterproofing, running up pipe and completely turned down into pipe 2". Coordinate with roofing contractor. Locate penetrations as shown on architec- tural Plans and maintain code distance between vents and air intakes. Provide dielectric unions at all places where copper pipe joins steel pipe. EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION Provide for the expansion and contraction of piping using swing joints and install anchors where necessary to prevent the move- ment of pipe to certain points, such as base elbows, or other points where piping turns up through rigid building construction. Anchors shall be designed of heavy fabricated steel to prevent the movement of pipe under the stresses encountered. . . • AIR CHAMBERS INSULATION DDI-HS PLUMBING Section 15/200 Page 12 Air chambers for control of water hammer shall be provided. Air chambers shall be of the same diameter and material as the supply piping, shall be 18" long minimum, and shall be concealed in par- titions or chases. Air chambers shall be located so that they may be drained. At Contractor's option, water hammer arrestors certified by and installed in accordance with Plumbing and Drainage Institute standard PDI-WH201, may be used in lieu of air chambers. Air chambers or water hammer arrestors shell be located on both hot and cold water lines where indicated on the Drawings and at all flush valves, quick closing valves and solenoid valves, iso- lated plumbing fixtures, supply headers at plumbing fixtures groups. Water hammer arrestors shall be located in accessible locations or behind access panels located as approved by Architect. Insulate all hot water piping and all cold water piping exposed to outside temperatures, as follows: Hot water and hot water return in return air plenums or elsewhere where called for: Insulate with Armstrong Armafloow 2000, 1/2" wall thickness. Hot water or hot water return not in return air plenum: Insulate with Armstrong Armaflex 2000, 1/2" wall thickness. Cold water exposed to outside temperatures or elsewhere where called for: Insulate with Armstrong Armaflex AP, 1" wall thickness. Equivalent insulations by other manufacturers not scheduled, meeting these specifications will be considered. Insulations shall be unicellular foamed elastomeric rubber meeting ASTM C534 and ASTM D-1056-SBE-41. Insulation for use in return air plenums shall in addition, have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less as tested by ASTM E-84-75. DDI -HS Insulation shall be installed per manufacturer's published proce- dures including the use of the recommended adhesive. Exposed insulation, both inside and outside shall be finished with two coats of vinyl lacquer per manufacturer's published procedures. Insulate roof drain system, including roof drain sumps, within the building with rigid fiber glass pipe insulation, Manville Micro -Lok 650 with AP -T closure system, all installed per manufacturer's published procedures. Insulate all sanitary waste piping, horizontal runs, discharge from air conditioning unit condensate lines, discharge from refrigeration unit defrost drains, or discharge from electric drinking fountains. Insulate wall thickness insulation similar to hot and cold water Insulate traps under sinks and lays designated as handicap. VALVES Valves shall be supplied on all systems, where shown on the Drawings, where required by code, and in addition, at all branches and sub -mains to provide simplicity of maintenance and repair. Supply of both hot and cold water to each fixture shall be equipped with stop valves, nickel plated or chrome plated. Valves shall be as follows: Hot and 2" and 2 -1/2" equal. PLUMBING Section 15/200 Page 13 receiving receiving receiving with 1/2" above. Cold Water Below - Ball Valve, Jenkins 900T, or approved equal and Above - Gate Valve, Jenkins Fig. 47, or approved Provide stem extensions where necessary to accommodate pipe insulation. Position valves so that they may be conveniently operated and maintained. EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS Provide sanitary sewer, water, and gas piping to equipment fur— nished by others where indicated on the Drawings. Verify all. connections to kitchen equipment by reference to kit— chen equipment Drawings, equipment installation brochures, and actual equipment. Complete connections to all kitchen equipment. DDI -HS GENERAL See provisions Of Division 1. SCOPE Work consists of, but is not limited to: Electrical service Switchgear, Panels Power distribution system Lighting fixtures and lamps Miscellaneous outlets and devices Empty conduit systems for telephone, MATV, etc. Exterior lighting system Connection of HVAC and plumbing equipment Temporary construction power Connection of equipment furnished by others Installation of fire alarm system Related work described elsewhere: Concrete work Painting, unless otherwise noted HVAC controls CODES, REGULATIONS, STANDARDS, PERMITS, AND FEES ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 1 The Contractor shall furnish all labor materials, tools, transportation, equipment, services, facilities required for the complete and substantial installation of all ELECTRICAL work shown on the Drawings or outlined in these Specifications. The work shall include all materials, acoessories and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the Drawings but which are necessary to make a complete working installation of all sys- tems shown on the Plans or described herein. Work shall comply with pertinent local ordinances or regulations. Materials and equipment shall meet standards of and be approved by nationally recognized standards and testing authorities where such materials and equipment are available. Installation shall be by competent mechanics, thoroughly ex- perienced in this type of work and performing this work in a neat and workmanlike manner. DDI -HS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 2 Contractor shall comply with safety and occupational health requirements of OSHA and of local authorities. Responsibility for compliance rests solely on the Contractor and cannot be abrogated by virtue of these Plans and Specifications or actions of the Owner, Architect or Engineer. Contractor shall comply with clearance requirements regarding un- derground and overhead utility lines, etc. Contractor shall secure all permits required for work under this Section and pay all fees required. Cost of any additional work over and above that included in the Drawings and Specifications necessary to comply with applicable codes and ordinances shall be done at Contractor's expense, this amount being included in original bid. CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES Any Contractor bidding on these Specifications and Drawings shall be a specialist in this field and have the personal skill and or- ganization to provide a practical working system. Any practical criticism or exception given with the proposal will be considered at that time. If no criticism or exception is given with the proposal, it shall be assumed that the Contractor agrees that the system, as outlined in the Drawings and Specifications, can be made into a completely working system. Use of the term ' "Contractor ", "HVAC Contractor ", "Plumbing Contractor ", "Electrical Contractor" or similar terminology in these Specifications is intended as an aid to the bidder only and to mean the organization engaged to execute the work included whether it be the General Contractor, his subcontractor, or others, and is not intended to indicate any jurisdictional as- signments or other assignments of work, that being the respon- sibility of the General Contractor. The Specifications and accompanying Drawings are intended to en- compass a system that will not interfere with the structural, mechanical, or architectural design of the building, and which will fit into the several available spaces. As it is not within the scope of the Drawings to show all necessary offsets, obstructions, or structural conditions, it shall be the respon- sibility of the Contractor to install his work in such a manner that it will conform to the structure, avoid obstructions, and interferences with other trades, and keep passageways clear. T• DDI -HS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 3 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Reference to the Architect or Engineer from this point forward in these Specifications shall be interpreted to mean the person designated by the Owner to interface with the Contractor. The Drawings show diagrammatically the sizes and location of the various outlets and equipment items and the sizes of the major interconnecting conduits, etc., without showing exact details as to elevations, offsets, control lines, and installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions and to avoid obstructions. Exact locations of outlets, apparatus, and connections thereto shall be determined by reference to the general Plans, to all detail Drawings, roughing -in Drawings, etc., by measurement at the building and in cooperation with other Contractors and in all cases shall be subject to the ap- proval of the Architect. Contractor shall insure that construction Plans are identical in content to Plans approved during permitting and plan checking procedure, and shall insure that Plans used in construction in- clude latest revisions. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to visit the actual site and compare same with the Drawings and Specifications, as- certain and check locations of any existing obstructions, under- ground or otherwise, which may affect the work. Failure to determine conditions will not be considered cause for granting additional compensation. Submittal of bid shall constitute con- structive agreement that the site has been visited and that no circumstances will adversely affect the work other than those shown on the Plans. In case of conflict between Plans and Specifications, or dis- crepancies within Plans and /or Specifications, the Contractor shall request clarification from the Architect. For purposes of bidding the more expensive materials or method shall be bid. After clarifications, if the less expensive method or material is indicated, due credit will be issued. The method of circuiting used on the Plans does not show true runs of conduit, but is intended to show control of outlets. The home run groupings are shown for convenience of the Contractor and, unless specifically detailed to be as shown, may be modified by the Contractor, but shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code, latest revision adopted by authority having jurisdiction. DDI -HS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 4 All electrical raceways, except in various equipment rooms, un- finished spaces, or where specifically designated herein or on the Plans shall be concealed in furrings or chases. Where .condi- tions exist which would cause any of these items to be exposed in finished spaces, or to interfere with architectural features or work of other divisions, the Contractor shall immediately call the situation to the attention of the Architect and shall stop work in those areas until the Architect directs resumption of work. The Architect shall have the right to clarify location of devices, panels, equipment items, etc., and to direct minor relocation of such items prior to rough -in at no additional cost to Owner. Do not scale Drawings. If location of fixtures, devices or equipment, inside or outside building, is not dimensioned on Drawings and is not obvious or fixed by architectural features, verify location prior to installation. Wall mounted equipment, devices, etc., shall be grouped neatly in a logical arrangement, in as aesthetically pleasing a manner as possible, and at the same height, unless otherwise indicated. See also Wiring Devices. Contractor shall refer to Architectural sheets in the set of Drawings and shall notify the Architect of any differences from items shown on Drawings related to this section. COORDINATION WITH OTHER SECTIONS Coordinate work with work of other trades in putting the instal- lation in place at the time when the space required by this in- stallation is accessible. Cutting and patching necessitated by any failure on the part of the Contractor to do this shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. Verify connection requirements for all equipment furnished by others and notify the Contractor of any discrepancies with the Plans. Verify openings, supports, and space availability shown on Plans for use of this Contractor or for installation of his equipment. If such items are not suitable, notify the Architect immediately. Provide roof jacks as required for electrical installation. In- stall prior to final roof installation and coordinate with Roof- ing Contractor for flashing. DDI -HS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 5 Each trade shall coordinate with other trades to assure that plans properly reflect the correct equipment connection require- ments for equipment furnished by that trade or connected by that trade. WARRANTY The Contractor shall provide a written guarantee that: All material and equipment shall be new, free from defect and of the quality and rating shown or specified. Any defect due to missing or improper material or faulty workman- ship existing or developing during the resulting warranty period shall be corrected and the resulting damage repaired wiuithout ad- ditional cost to the Owner. Equipment replaced under warranty shall carry an additional one year's warranty on equipment and labor. Period of warranty shall be as legally stipulated, but shall be a minimum of one year from the date of substantial completion un- less specifically extended by these Specifications for certain equipment. Lamps and fuses are exempt from this warranty except as follows: Lamps shown to be defective or burned out during the first 100 hours of operation following final acceptance shall be replaced with new lamps by the Contractor. Fuses blown as a result of defects covered by this warranty shall be replaced by the Contractor. Above warranty shall be concurrent with manufacturer's warranties on equipment. Manufacturer's written warranties shall be sub- mitted to the Owner as specified elsewhere. An inspection of the facilities and equipment shall be made during the final 30 days of the warranty period. The contractor is invited to accompany the inspection. An inspection report shall be submitted to the contractor listing items which must be corrected under the warranty. These items shall be addressed regardless of expiration of warranty period. DDI-HS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 6 MATERIALS Properly store all material and equipment at the job site, protecting same from the elements when in open storage and from damage by work of other trades when in place. Material im- properly handled or damaged from rough usage or improper storage shall be taken out and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner with new units at the direction of the Architect. Whenever a definite manufacturer's product is specified, it is the intention of these Specifications and Drawings to set a standard of performance and quality. Unless "no substitutions" are indicated products by other reliable manufacturers will be accepted, provided they have equal capacitgv construction, features, performance, maintenance requirements, and other qualities deemed significant. Final approval, however, shall rest with the Architect at the time of submittal of Shop Drawings and Brochures. It must be understood that the Contractor shall be responsible for all consequences of any substitution, e.g; required changes in space requirements, access, layout, and clearances; impact on building codes; impact on work and inter- face of other trades etc. Submittal of bid by Contractor is assumed to be for the specified material unless specifically noted at the time of submission of bid. Contractor shall verify that materials used in all phases of this work comply fully with local code requirements and are approved for use by the authority having jurisdiction. Where performance criteria or specific features are listed for items of material or equipment, this requirement shall take precedence over manufacturer's designation or model number indicated. SUBMITTALS Required submittals consist of three categories: Shop Qrawingsss Maintenance and Operations Literature, and Record Drawings. Con- tract shall not be considered complete until satisfactory com- pliance with all categories. DDI -HS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 7 Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with General Provisions. Shop Drawings consist of brochures, catalog cut sheets, Drawings, specification sheets which completely describe all items and shall be submitted in seven (7) copies, five of which will be returned to the Con- tractor after review and appropriate comments. Purpose of review shall be to assure compliance with intent of design and shall not relieve Contractor of any responsibilities un- der the Contract. Material or items submitted will be held to comply exactly with characteristics of scheduled items or with specifications unless deviations are specifically noted on the submittal. See related requirements under Materials. Submit Shop Drawings on the following items and on any other items requested by the Architect: Switchboards and panelboards Transformers Motor Control equipment & devices Wiring devices Lighting fixtures and poles Disconnect switches Time switches and time clocks Shop Drawings shall be submitted as early as practical providing ample time for review and resubmittal if required. Failure of the Contractor to receive returned submittal shall not relieve him of any obligation or responsibilities under the Contract. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in logical groupings in- cluding as few groups as possible. All submittals shall be signed by the submitting Subcontractor indicating his review and agreement with the submittals. Failure to sign shall be cause for rejection. Submittals shall be explicitly keyed to identifying numbers or symbols in the Drawings and Specifications. Maintenance and Operations Literature: Submit at conclusion of project, three (3) copies of permanent three ring binders containing, for all installed items, manufacturer's Main- tenance and Operation instructions, spare parts lists, in- stallation instructions, etc. Specifically included shall be recommended periodic maintenance information for all items requiring periodic maintenance. Include also copies of manufacturer's warranties. This compilation of informa- tion shall be properly identified on cover and back. DDI -HS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page Record Drawings: Submit, at conclusion of project, one (1) set of prints, marked in red, to indicate any deviations or changes whether covered by change order or not. Contractor shall secure from the Architect one (1) set of prints for this purpose and thhis purpose exclusively. Prints submitted shall be marked "Record Prints ", bear the name of the General Contractor and Subcontractor, and be signed by an officer of the submitting Subcontractor. INSPECTION, CLEANING, AND TESTS Periodic inspections will be made during construction by Ar- chitect and /or Owner. Contractor will have an experienced, knowledgeable representative accompany inspector, open enclosures, provide requested tests, etc. Contractor will provide a knowledgeable representative to demonstrate all systems to Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. This demonstration shall be set a minimum three (3) days in advance and shall be at a time specified by the Owner. Wiring systems shall test free of shorts and grounds and shall be tested, if required by the Architect, with an insulation resis- tance tester, 500 volt, DC. Results shall comply with minimum recommendation of latest edition of IPCEA Manual. Feeders and motor circuits shall be checked for both current and voltage under as close to full load conditions as possible. Record of tests shall be submitted to Architect, if requested. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS- SUPPORTS, FINISHES, ETC. All equipment and materials shall be installed in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions unless in conflict with these Drawings and Specifications. Conform to specific requirements shown on the Drawings or described elsewhere in these Specifications. All equipment fur- nished and installed shall be properly secured in place. Follow manufacturer's recommendations unless otherwise indicated. All piping, raceways, and equipment suspended from structure shall be supported with hangers designed for the purpose. Makeshift supports of wire are not acceptable. Hangers or per- forated strap are not acceptable. Wall mounted equipment, devices, etc., shall be grouped neatly in a functionally logical arrangement, and in as aesthetically pleasing a manner as possible. DDT -HS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 9 Penetrations through walls, ceilings, or floors shall be ac- complished neatly. Where visible, penetrations shall be provided with appropriate trim. Penetrations through exterior walls shall be made weatherproof and insectproof. Penetrations shall not im- pair the integrity of the wall, floor, or ceiling; e.g., dust tight walls, soundproof walls, fire -rated walls, etc. Penetra- tions through roofs shall be made weatherproof. A11 installed materials shall be suitable for the environment to which it is subjected. All ferrous metal on equipment or struc- tures installed outdoors shall be galvanized, or galvanized then painted, unless other treatment is specified or scheduled. All ferrous metal on equipment or structures installed indoors shall be painted, galvanized, or otherwise protected from rusting. Care shall be taken to protect integrity of finishes during handling, installation, field cutting, etc. Touch up all scratches, cuts, etc., with matching finish in a manner accept- able to Architect. Unless otherwise noted, motor starters for Plumbing and HVAC equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor furnishing such equipment, and shall be installed by the Electrical Contractor. NAMEPLATES, IDENTIFICATIONS, AND MARE <INGS The following shall be identified with engraved nameplates as described hereinafter: Switchboards and panelboards Transformers Disconnect Switches Motor control devices Special switches where called for Nameplates on materials and equipment furnished will be main- tained in original condition. Whenever possible, equipment shall be installed so that nameplates are readily visible. Damaged or unreadable nameplates shall be replaced. Where equipment is modified, nameplates shall be appropriately corrected. Unless otherwise indicated, nameplates shall be black phenolic with chamfered edges engraved with minimum 3/16" letters to white core. Attachments will be made by plated screws. Adhesive at- tachment will not be acceptable. Location of underground conduit shall be marked by the use of un- derground warning tape, colored with printed messaage. Tape to be buried directly over pipe, 6" below finished grade. Tape to be polyethylene, .004" thick, 6" wide. Underground warning tapes to be as follows: ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 10 Electrical Conduit - Red, legend "Electric Line Buried Below" Seton No. 210 ELE Telephone Conduit - Orange, legend "Telephone Line Buried Below" Seton No. 210 TEL MATV Conduit - Orange, legend "CATV Line Buried Below" Seton 210 TCL Similar material by Brady is acceptable. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING Perform all excavation trenching, and backfilling necessary to install the work as specified and /or shown on the Drawings. Comply with all applicable safety regulations. Determine, prior to excavation on trenching, the location of other underground services, pipes or obstructions and avoid damage to same. Contractor is responsible for damage to existing buried installations occurring during the performance of his work. Lay piping or direct burial cable on solid bed giving continuous support. Lay sand bed if necessary to accomplish this. Trenching and backfilling shall be covered by warranty heretofore specified. Noticeable settling shall be repaired at Contractor's expense during warranty period. Mark location of underground conduit and cable as described elsewhere.• UTILITY CONNECTIONS AND SERVICES Facility is furnished power with characteristics indicated on the Drawings. Coordinate with power company to meet its requirements. Immediately upon consummation of Construction Contract, obtain from the power company, in writing, specific ap- proval of service location, voltage, and configuration. Notify Architect immediately, if at variance from the Drawings. Obtain also, Power Company's Statement of Available Fault Current at Point of Service; compare with Drawings and assure compliance with NEC 110 -9. Information from Power Company shall be for- warded within submittal procedure as a Shop Drawing, and, in addition, shall be included in M &O Manual, heretofore discussed. Telephone service shall be furnished as indicated. Coordinate with telephone company. Provide conduit, with pull wire, as shown on Drawings. ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 11 Cable TV service shall be furnished as indicated. Coordinate Cable TV Service. Provide conduit, with pull wire, as shown on Drawings. SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS Panelboards shall be installed as shown on the panel schedules on the Drawings. Circuiting of panelboards shall follow that shown on the schedule unless changes are required to balance the panels after installation, in which case the approval of the Architect shall be obtained and "Record Prints" and panelboard directories shall be revised to show all such changes. Unless otherwise specifically indicated, molded case breakers shall be bolt -on type, one -inch module. Two (2) and three (3) pole breakers shall be common trip type. Single pole breakers with handle ties shall not be acceptable. Breakers shall be quick -make, thermal magnetic, with clear trip indication. Panelboard buses shall be copper. Provide ground bar on all panels. Acceptable makes are Square D, General Electric, and Challanger. All panelboards shall have doors with latches and all doors shall be equipped with locks and two (2) keys. Panelboards fronts and trims shall be without dents or scratches. Every panelboard shall have a directory on the inside of each door, neatly typewritten and protected by transparent plastic in a metal holder. Breakers or switch units shall be plainly and clearly numbered to correspond with the directory. In addition, panels shall be identified using an etched micarta nameplate secured by two cadmium plated screws. All panelboards, circuit breakers, and fuses shall be listed by the bear label of Underwriter's Laboratories. Architect has the right to reject make of equipment not listed above, even if equipment meets Specifications, if he has reason to believe manufacturer is not adequately represented in the area to provide degree of service required. ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 12 DISCONNECT SWITCHES All disconnect and safety switches shall be quick- make, quick - break, heavy duty with visible break when the switch door cannot be opened unless the switch is in the "OFF" position; it shall not be possible to close the switch unless the door is closed. A "Defeater" mechanism shall provide means of bypassing such inter- locks by a knowledgeable person. Disconnect switches for outdoor installation shall be NEMA type 3R or 4; approved makes are Square D, General Electric, and ITE Gould. Disconnect switches installed outdoors shall be field painted after installation. Paint shall conform to paint specified else- where in these Specifications. Paint color shall be as directed; painting shall be done in a neat, workmanlike manner. Where switches are fusible, they shall be equipped with a com- plete set of fuses of the rating shown on the Drawings. If no rating is shown, they shall be the maximum current rating which the switch will accept. All fuses shall be dual element, current limiting, Sussman, or equal. CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTIONS All wiring shall utilize soft -drawn annealed copper with a con- ductivity of not less than 98% of that of pure copper IACS. Minimum size of wire for power and lighting circuits shall be 12 gauge; minimum wire size for motor control circuits shall be 14 gauge. Wire 10 gauge and smaller shall be solid with Type TW'in- sulation or better. Wire 8 gauge and larger shall be stranded with Type THW or better insulation. Type THNN shall be accept- able as a substitute for either type in dry locations. All conductors shall have a color -coded insulation for sizes 6 gauge or smaller and in larger sizes where available. In larger sizes, color codings shall be by means of permanent stripes of bands at intervals of not more than 24" whenever the conductor is visible and at all terminations. Color shall be as follows: Ground Conductors Green Neutral Conductors White Phase A Black Phase B Red Phase C Blue ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 13 Green and white shall be used only as specified above. On con- trol wiring, wiring shall be distinctly color-coded, and where run in the same circuit as power wiring, shall be of different colors from the power conductors. Splices in wires shall be eliminated where possible. No splice will be permitted in any conductor less than 50' long. All splices shall be made in readily accessible boxes or fittings. Connections and splices shall be made leaving not less than 4" of wire in each outlet, switch, or junction box beyond that actually required for making the splice. All connections for wire 8 gauge and larger to smitches panelboards, etc., shall be made with ap- proved lugs. Splices in wire 10 gauge and smaller shall be made by pretwisting and use of approved wire nut type connectors. All splices shall be insulated to full insulation level of conductor. All tape used for taping splices shall be Scotch No. 33 or equal. Underground and lighting pole base connections of conductors #10 AWG and smaller shall be made by pretwisting wires, applying ap- proved wire nut connectors, then filling with 3M scotchkote. Retain the "CUP" position until dry. Equal systems may be util- ized if approved by the Architect. CONDUITS, WIREWAYS, SUPPORTS All conduits wireways shall bear label of Underwriter's Laboratories, or if not obtainable be constructed to conform to requirements of National Electrical Code and NEMA. Interior conduit shall be rigid galvanized conduit where exposed and subject to physical damage. Where concealed in malls ceiling, furred spaces or otherwise protected, conduit systems may be electrical metallic tubing. Flexible conduit shall be used only for connections to lighting fixtures transformer motors. Where flexible conduit is used with approved connectors all flexible conduit shall contain grounding conductor properly terminated. Underfloor conduit shall be rigid galvanized or PVC. Where PVC is used, provide grounding connector. PVC conduit shall extend maximum 6" above finished floor where concealed. Where PVC rise out of floor will be ewposed use instead rigid galvanized ells. ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 14 Underground conduit shall be rigid galvanized as indicated on the Drawings. Approved PVC conduit may be used in lieu of rigid un- less specifically noted. Conduits shall be supported in conformance with NEC and standard of good workmanship. Where multiple conduit runs are required support conduits on trapeze type hangers or wall mounted supports made of galvanized formed channel utilizing clamps manufactured to fit such channel. Above T -bar grid ceiling conduits must be supported independent of ceiling system except for single conduits, 1" or smaller, which may be supported from ceiling hanger wires, with concurrence of ceiling Contractor, utilizing hanger devices made for this purpose. Conduit shall not be installed in a manner obstructing access openings on equipment, obstructing accessibility to valves or operating devices, or obstructing passageways. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4" except for single switch legs which may be 1/2 ". GROUNDING Grounding shall comply with all applicable provisions of National Electrical Code plus additional requirements as indicated on Drawings. Ground rods where indicated shall be UL listed copper clad ground rods. Connections to ground rods buried below grade shall be Cadwell or equivalent process, applied per manufacturer's recommendations. Grounding connections to water pipes, building steel, etc., shall be made with connectors specifically approved for the purpose and shall be in accessible locations. All transformers shall be grounded per NEC 250 -26. OUTLETS, JUNCTION BOXES, PULL BOXES Provide outlet boxes, junction boxes where indicated or whatever NEC or good workmanship requires. All boxes shall be galvanized steel, code gauge, except as hereinafter noted, and shall be standard catalogued items unless such items are not obtainable as indicated. Unless otherwise' indicated, outlet boxes for wiring devices shall be minimum of 4" square:with appropriate frames. TRANSFORMERS, DRY TYPE Single Phase 60 HZ 240 x 480V. Pri. 120/240V. Sec. Three Phase 60 HZ 480V. Pri. 208Y/120V. Sec. ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 15 Where empty outlet boxes are called for, provide blank plates to match plates on devices in same or similar area. Finished walls, except mechanical room shall contain only flush boxes, used for outlets indicated unless otherwise noted. Junction boxes and pull boxes outside shall be fiberglass NEMA 4X. Underground conduit sgstems shall utilize manholes and pull boxes as indicated on the Drawings. Furnish and install dry type transformers of voltage and KVA ratings indicated on the Drawings. Transformers shall be designed and manufactured in full accord- ance with latest revisions of ANSI C89"2 NEMA ST-20, UL-506, and applicable IEEE Standards. Transformers shall bear UL label. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or in these Specifications transformers shall comply with the following: Trans. Temp. Ins. TAPS Desc. Rise degC System FCAN FCBN Above 40 degC AMB degC Below 25 KVA • 115 185 2-5% Two Four • 25 NVA and 150 220 2-1/2% 2-1/2% Above Below 15 KVA 115 ' � 185 • -�_^- 2-5% . � ` • � Two Four • 15 KVA and 150 . 220 2-`1/2% • 2-1/2% ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 16 Above Sound levels of transformers shall be less than the following when measured in accordance with ANSI C89^2, latest revision. 9 KVA or less 10 to 50 KVA 51 to 150 KVA 151 to 300 KVA 300 to 500 KVA 40 dB 45 dB 50 dB 55 d8 60 dB Core and coil shall be completely isolated from enclosure by means of vibration absorbing mounts. Core shall be visibly grounded to the frame of the enclosure by means of flexible grounding strap. Transformer enclosure shall be self-bracing type and shall be drip proof and rodent proof. For floor mounted transformers, top of transformer shall be substantial enough to support weight of man without permanent distortion. Cases shall be treated, primed, and painted with mar-resistant baked on enamel. Outdoor transformers shall be catalogued for outdoor use. Transformers shown to be wall mounted shall be provided with manufacturer-furnished mounting bracket. Dry type transformers and their secondary systems shall be grounded in strict conformance with applicable provisions of NEC, in particular Paragraph 250-26. LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS Furnish and install lighting fixtures and lamps as called for on the Drawings. Fixtures in the fixture schedule have been selected for specific features, characteristics, and styles. Substitution may be made only upon specific approval of the Ar- chitect at the time of submittal of Shop Drawings. Submittal of bid shall be presumed to be on basis on specified fixtures. Lamps shall be General Electric, Sylvania or Phillips. Indicate lamps to be used on submittals. All fixtures shall bear label of Underwriter's Laboratories; all fluorescent ballasts shall be CBM approved, high 9ower-factoro E- rated to meet final requirements of Public Law 100-357 June 28, 1988. Contractor's guarantee includes ballasts, fixtures and lamps as described under warranty. ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 17 All fixtures shall be clean at time of final acceptance. Verify compatibility of fixture with type of ceiling or wall ac- tually used; provide necessary adapters, frames, supports. Verify compatibility of fixtures and lamps specified; verify voltage. Fluorescent fixtures of the three or four lamp types shall be factory wired with one ballast operating outside lamps and one ballast operating inside lampts). Where lay -in fixtures are shown, fixtures may be supported from main ceiling tees. Where on sub -tees extra supports will be required and shall be furnished by ceiling Contractor. Coor- dinate with ceiling Contractor. Install lay -in fixtures so that they may be relocated one tile space in any direction without disconnecting or extending wiring. Architect has prerogative to request relocation of initial fix- ture location prior to conduit installation, at no additional cost to the Owner. Fixtures recessed into ceiling shall be carefully installed so that trims fit flush to ceiling and no light leakage is notice- able around trim. Fixtures shall not be supported by lay -in ceiling tile; provide independent support from T -bar or from structure. Fixtures shall be listed in accordance with requirements of UL 1571 and NEC with respect to ceiling type and insulation, whether or not indicated in fixture schedule. Where substitution is requested in outdoor area lighting fixtures, the Architect may request point -to -point footcandle layout of area in question to ascertain quality of result com- pared to the originally designed system. Pole bases for outdoor pole - mounted fixtures shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. Concrete work by General Contractor; Electrical Contractor shall coordinate and furnish anchor bolts and templates; carefully observe orientation. Poles shall be as scheduled and shall be installed as indicated on pole base detail. ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 18 Poles shall be designed to support fixtures indicated, shall con- form to applicable building codes, and shall be designed for wind loading using calculation methods stipulated in ANSI A58.1- 1982, with the following minimum criteria: * Velocity pressure exposure coefficient and gust response factor shall be based on Exposure Category C. * Importance factor shall be based on jobsite miles from hur- ricane oceanline and based on Classification Category I. * Basic wind speed for calculation purposes shall be as listed on the Drawings. Pole manufacturer shall furnish calculations if requested by Architect. Pole shaft shall telescope into pole base and be circumferen- tially welded top and bottom. Design and integrity of fabrica- tion procedure shall have been confirmed by actual tests on prototypes. Data developed in such tests shall be furnished prior to approval of submittal if requested. Pole shall have hand hole with cover and grounding lug. Pole, covers and brack- ets shall be prime painted with red oxide zinc chromate primer inside and out (unless pole is to be galvanized or aluminum) and shall be finished painted to match fixture unless otherwise specified. In prepainted poles, minimum one pint per pole. An- chor bolts shall be furnished by pole manufacturer and shall have threaded end galvanized per ASTM -A -153 for a minimum of 8 ". Fur - nish galvanized hex nuts and leveling nuts, each with templates; furnish bolt movers or base covers. Touch -up paint prior to acceptance. Integrity of paint is included in warranty heretofore described. Pole manufacturer shall show evidence of product liability in- surance coverage which shall hold harmless the Owner, Architect, and Engineer in case of failure of poles. WIRING DEVICES Furnish and install wiring devices as shown on the Drawings. Color selection where color of devices and plates is not indi- cated shall be made by Architect at time of submittal. Equivalent devices by manufacturers other than those listed will be considered for substitution by the Architect. ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 19 Switches and receptacles shall be mounted at heights specified on the Drawings or indicated in the legend. Receptacles shall be mounted vertically with U-ground down. Switches indicated adjacent to strike side of doors shall be mounted within four inches of door frame. Unless otherwise noted, switches shown adjacent to one another shall be installed in gang boxes covered by gang plates. Sec- tional plates are not acceptable.%f the adjacent devices or out- lets are not gangable, (e.g., different systems) it is the responsibility of the Contractor to locate outlets in an aes- thetically pleasing manner. When in doubt, the Architect shall be consulted prior to installation. Switches shall not be'grouped so that voltages over 300 volts, Phase-to-Phase, are present in the same box. Where surge suppression, or Transient Voltage Surge Suppresser (TVSS) receptacles are specified, they shall comply with UL 1449, July, 1987 Revision for both Category "A" and "8», and shall comply with ANSI/IEEE C62.41 latest revision. Devices shall suppress transients in three modes: Linsx-to-neutral line-to- ground, and neutral-to-ground. Devices shall contain an LED in- dicator to indicate failure of protective circuitry and not an audible signal. TIME SWITCHES AND TIME CLOCKS Furnish and install time switches and time clocks as indicated on the Drawings. Time switches shall be spring-wound Manual Timers designed for mounting in recessed switch box. Switches shall be single polev rated 20 amps @125V AC, 10 amps @277V AC. Time shall be as indi- cated on the Drawings, time mechanism shall be without hold un- less otherwise indicated; contacts to time open (closed during timing) unless otherwise indicated. Time switches shall be as manufactured by Mark-Time, Intermatic or Paragon. Time clocks shall be as indicated on the Drawings or, if not otherwise indicated shall be single pole, single throw, 40 amp contracts 120 volts clock motor NEMA 1 case 24 hour dial, reserve power feature. Time clocks shall be as manufactured by Intermatic, Paragon, or Tork. ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 20 DIMMERS AND DIMMING EQUIPMENT Furnish and install dimmers and dimming equipment where shown on Drawings. Wall box type dimmers shall be UL listed, specification grade. Wall box dimmers in Guest Suites shall be slide type with posi- tive on -off switching contacts, upper end bypass of dimming circuitry, and built -in radio -RV interferance filter. Dimmer shall utilize standard plate used for other wiring devices on the project. Acceptable make /model is listed on the wiring device schedule. Wall box dimmers in Lodge Building shall be Architec- tural type, specification grade of rating indicated. Dimmer cabinet is Lodge Building shall consist of a assembly of wall box dimmers in a common cabinet as scheduled on the drawings. Assembly shall be furnished by the dimmer manufacturer and shall be UL listed as an assembly. EMPTY CONDUIT SYSTEM Provide empty conduit system for telephone, etc., as indicated on the Drawings. EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS Provide connections to plumbing equipment as indicated. Verify requirements. Provide connections to HVAC equipment as indicated. Verify requirements. Provide conduit and pull wire for thermostat con- nections and provide outlet box as required for thermostat. Provide complete connections to all food service and refrigera- tion equipment. Verify connection requirements by reference to Drawings, equipment installation brochures, and actual equipment as delivered to job site. Notify Architect of any variation in electrical requirements from that shown on the Drawings. Provide connections to telephone central equipment, to fire alarm systems, to administractive computer equipment, to master TV an- tenna system, etc. Verify connection requirements prior to installation. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION POWER Provide temporary construction power as' required complying strictly with National. Electric Code and local requirements. ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 21 TELEPHONE CONDUIT SYSTEM Furnish and install a complete telephone raceway system consist- ing of service entrance conduit, telephone equipment mounting board, outlet boxes, conduit, and pull wires. Coordinate with Telephone System Installer and verify that conduit and boxes shown satisfy requirements of telephone system. Coordinate with telephone company and assure that telephone serv- ice provisions shown meet needs of telephone company. Notify Ar- chitect of any discrepancies between requirement and system shown. Provide telephone board where noted. Telephone board to be 3/4" plywood, 4'x8'(or as indicted), type C -D, sanded and painted one side prior to installation of telephone equipment. Telephone wall outlets shall consist of outlet box at 12" AFF with 3/4" conduit back to telephone board. Conduits may be com- bined only after coordination with and approval of telephone installer. Provide substantial pull string. MASTER TV CABLE SYSTEM A master TX Cable System shall be installed by others. It shall be the responsibility of the Electricl Contractor to contact the TV Cable Installation Contractor to verify with him that the con- duit system shown is compatible with his needs, to contact the Architect if other than minor changes need be made, and to in- stall conduite for the cable system as indicated on the drawings or as directed by the cable installer. Provide pull string in all conduits. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Furnish and install a fully integrated solid state fire alarm system as described and /or required by these contract documents. The system shall consist of an addressable, electrically supervised, annunciated, centrally wired system which shall util- ize addressable circuits for alarms, supervisory alarms, troubles, and relay control, and shall further include all manual pull stations, smoke detectors, heat detectors, audio and visual signalling devices, and other devices and connections necessary for a complete and working system as defined by the Local Authority having Jurisdiction. ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 22 The system and its components shall be microprocessor controlled and of modular design utilizing plug-in boards to al- low exact tailoring to the building's requirements. Field programmable addressable or conventional detection, initiating and signaling circuits shall allow simplified adaptation and re- configuration to suit on site changes. Fire Alarm Contractor (FAC) shall submit shop drawings which shall, at a minimum, consist of to scale floor plans (reductions to a minimum size of 11" X 17" indicating the exact location of all devices including those associated with the fire alarm system i.e. HVAC interlock points, sprinkler flow and valve locations elevator controls, pre-action valve solenoid locations, etc. They shall also contain control panel wiring schematics and interconnections. The shop drawings shall also indicate conduits between devices properly sized for wiring required, and shall indicate wiring required in each segment of conduit. They shall also contain a conduit riser diagram indicating sizes of conduits and wire fills. The shop drawings shall include: Complete bill of materials for reference. Detailed system description and operation describing system functions. They shall include factory data sheets on each piece of equipment associated with the fire alarm system and so marked as to dimensions, size voltage, and configuration. Shop -drawings and brochures shall be submitted by the contractor to and be approved by the local fire department by the Owner's Insurance carrier, and by State Agencies, if required. Design and installation shall: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction and installation of fire alarm systems and components. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 72 Series stand- ards and NFPA 101, "Life Safety Codeo pertaining to fire alarm systems and facilities. ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 23 Comply with applicable requirements of ULL 864, and 1481 pertaining to fire alarm installation. Provide fire alarm systems which are U.L. listed and labeled and authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with the applicale provisions of the local building code interpretations and meet all requirements of the Local Authority having jurisdiction. It is the contractors responsibility to interpret and apply any adjustments to the configuration, operation, and overall design necessary to comply with the Local Authority having jurisdiction. Any material not specifically mentioned in this specification or not shown on drawings but required for proper performance and operation shall be furnished and installed. The Fire Alarms Systems Installer shall be the authorized repre- sentative of the Fire Alarm Manufacturer to sell, install, and service, the manufacturers equipment and shall be licensed by the State as a fire alarm contractor. The installing contractor shall- have been actively engaged in the business of selling, installing, and servicing fire alarm systems for at least five years, and sha•11-actively stock and service the system proposed. Acceptable Manufacturers subject to compliance with the specification performance and operation criteria are: 1. Edwards (5900) 2. Notifier (AM -2020) 3. Gamewell (INS) To establish type and quality of system desired, the equipment specified is that of the Edwards Company. Equipment of the other acceptable manufacturers will be considered if completely identified and marked catalog sheets of all proposed equipment is provided for review 7 days prior to date of bid to the Ar- chitect for evaluation. The prequalification submission should also contain a point -by -point comparison of the proposed sub- stitution to the specified system written in the specification format and detailed contractor qualfications and references. SYSTEM COMPONENTS Standards 827, facilities and and components approved by the The automatic fire detection and alarm system shall consist of, but not be limited to - - Main control unit with integral printer, LCD and LED displays. - Addressable and conventional ionization and photoelectric smoke detectors. - Combination Smoke /Heat /Signalling Room Devices ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 24 - Addressable manual stations, materflom switches, heat detectors, duct detectors and control relays. - Alarm signals, magnetic door holders, annunciators line isolators and strobe warning lights. - Standby battery back-up. The system shall be capable of operating with analog sensors, ad- dressable and non-addressable ionization, and photoelectric detecting devices, manual stations, materflom switches, heat detectors and other contact devices. Analog and addressable devices shall be field addressed and the system shall be capable of being expanded and field reprogrammed at any time without the requirement to return the devices or the operating system to the factory for program changes. Addressable devices shall receive power and communication protocol signals over a single pair of wires per channel. Exter- nal circuit supervision shall not require additional wires other than the pair used for detection or alarm. These two wires shall provide both supervision and alarm signals. Line device field wiring may be 4-wire or 2-wire. When required on addressable device circuits. An unlimited number of wiring branches ("T"-TAPS) shall be possible with no loss of supervision. The system shall be capable of having all addres- sable devices in alarm simultaneously. The control panel shall provide power,annunciation, supervision and control for the fire detection and alarm system. The control panel shall be microprocessor controlled, modular in construction, and contain an BO character alpha-numeric display, 22 column English language printer, LED display of channel number and address LCD display of alarm, condition, location and time and date and a built-in, 40 key tactile pad for on-site programming. All user data shall be field-programmable through the built-in key pad. Dynamic supervision of internal system electronics, field wiring, line detection device and system software shall be provided by the control panel. Failure of system hardware or wiring shall be indicated by type and location on the alpha-numeric display. Software and processor operation shall be monitored by internal diagnostic circuits which will indicate any failure of a system component. The system shall provide fail-safe operation, i.e" incoming alarms shall automatically override all other modes of operation, and the panel shall immediately and automatically return to the normal operating mode from any operator initiated mode. ' All detection, signaling and output circuits shall be monitored ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 25 against open/short circuits and ground faults. Should a malfunc- tion occur in any circuit, a trouble condition shall be indicated while all other circuits continue operating normally. Control equipment shall include panel mounted system reset, alarm/trouble silence and lamp test switches with their as- sociated transfer lights. In addition, the panel console shall include separate LED indications for ALARM, AC POWER ON, GROUND FAULT, TROUBLE AND MUNICIPAL DISCONNECT. Programmable AREA in- dicators (total 8) as well as PRE-ALARM, COMPUTER INOPERATIVE, DEVICE ISOLATED and ALARM-DEGRADED mode functions shall each be annunciated on the control panel console. The panel shall be keylock and password protected and shall be capable of supporting up to 7 channels of analog or addressable devices, 16 signal circuits and 16 panel connected hard wired auxiliary circuits. Lamp test capability shall be provided to test all visual panel indicators including 80 character display and associated software. Provisions shall be made for remote annunciation, remote trouble and alarm silencing switches. The system ALARM LED shall illuminate upon receipt of any alarm condition. Acknowledgement of the alarm by operation of the si- lence switch shall silence the panel mounted audible alarm. Receipt of subsequent alarms shall cause the audible signal to resound. The control shall report and identify the failure of a line device, a device removed from an addressable initiating circuit or a transmitting device component failure while all other line devices on the channel shall continue to function. The control shall report failures by specific channel and address number and permanently record the event including time and date on the panel mounted printer. Upon occurrence of any trouble condition, the system trouble lamp shall illuminate and an integral trouble signal shall sound. Ac- knowledgement of the trouble condition by operation of the si- lence switch shall silence the audible alarm and cause the TROUBLE LED to light. Receipt of subsequent troubles shall cause the trouble buzzer to resound. Alarm shall override any trouble condition. ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 26 The operating power for all line devices shall be supplied through the loop controller module. All line device circuits shall function independently in order to maintain full autonomous operation. Each addressable loop controller module shall have its own microprocessor, working independently from the central processor and shall function independently in case of trouble in any of the other modules. Loop controller modules shall be capable of operation in any unused panel location. The control panel shall operate from 120V AC and 24V back -up battery. All power connections whether AC or DC shall be separately fused within the control. Light emitting diodes (LEDs) shall be included to indicate (green) system power, (yellow) trouble, and (red) alarm; trouble and alarm shall also be annunciated on an alpha- numeric display which will indicate device number, location, alarm type and type of trouble. Momentary switches shall provide for reset, trouble silence, alarm silence, lamp test and scroll functions. Arming and disarming of individual detection, signal or output line devices shall be possible from the control panel while in the service or maintenance mode. Status of line devices may be displayed upon command from the control panel. The panel shall be capable of receiving and processing alarms while in the service /maintenance mode. The control shall allow changes to the status of configured circuits. If a change in status degrades the system operation, a trouble condition shall be reported and remain until system operation is restored. The control shall have the ability to perform multiple operations at the same time. These operations shall include but not be limited to timed functions and multiple configured alarm and trouble sequences. The control shall be capable of powering up to the full capacity of the system and shall allow expansion and field reconfiguration without system inter- wiring. All expansion modules shall inter- connect using card edge connectors requiring no intermodule rewiring. Alarms, troubles and subsequent system activities shall be dis- tinctively displayed on both the visual LCD and the printer and differentiated from previous alarms and troubles. The system shall automatically indicate the total quantity of alarms and of troubles which have occurred prior to reset at the control unit. ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 27 The system shall be capable of counting and displaying the number of addressable line devices which are in alarm and differentiat- ing among types of devices such as manual station, photo detector, heat detector, ion detector water-flow switch etc. It shall be possible to assign priorities to types of detectors, areas or groups of line devices. The control panel shall include a panel mounted printer used for permanent records of system status, sensor chamber voltages, am- bient level of each addressable initiating device and panel ac- tivities up to the last 100 events including time and date. Upon command from the console an operator may: 1. Silence the trouble signal or the alarm signals. 2. Reset the control panel. 3. Disconnect the city-tie, remote annunciators and (or all) communication channels and any individual address or addresses. 4. Correlate inputs outputs and define continuous or pulsing, duration of operation, time before and time limit cutout durations. 5. Enter bell test or one man verification mode and change time or date. 6. Survey each channel to record the number of connected addressable deuices the type and ambient level of each device and define all outputs as programmed for alarm signals, addressable control relays programmed for alarm signals, addressable control re%ags programmed auxiliary circuits and area LEDS. 7. Monitor and survey each addressable device on every connected channel to simulate and record an alarm condition. 8. Printout report of communications log (with time and date) of faulty data communications including address identification. 9. Program area LEDS, owner defined location messages and up to 256 software defined zones. 10. Printout report of installed addresses correlated to programmed zone assignments, installed addresses correlated to type of device and all auxiliary relay and alarm signal configurations. 11. Perform continuity test to identify and pinpoint loca tion of open and shorted wiring conditions in systems using four (4) wire communication channels and line fault isolators. • ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 28 Control relays connected to the system shall be continuously monitored for proper state and position of contacts. Incorrect positions shall be automatically corrected by command from the control panel. If control relay fails to respond to a corrective command, the trouble signal shall sound and the panel shall iden- tify and permanently record the location of the fault. The control panel shall also monitor addressable control relays for proper state (position) after the system has commanded the relay to operate. Failure of the control relay to operate (change state) shall cause the panel to generate a trouble signal, identify and permanently record the location of the fault. Line device transponders supplied with auxiliary relays shall be monitored for proper state and shall be automatically corrected whenever improperly activated relays are detected. If an auxiliary relay in a line device transponder fails to respond to control panel commands, a trouble signal shall sound at the con- trol panel and the identity and location of the faulty auxiliary relay shall be pinpointed and permanently recorded on the system printer. Line device circuits shall maintain complete reporting of device status while in trouble and the control shall report, by specific device number, any device removed from an addressable initiating circuit and all other devices shall continue to function. The control shall report the failure of a device's transmitting component(s) failure, open or shorted, on an addressable initiat- ing circuit. The device shall be recognized and identified by location within the circuit to the specific device and all other devices on the circuit shall continue to function properly. The control panel shall be capable of supporting non-addressable as well as addressable detection devices on two or four wire com- munication channels. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall provide for one of the follow- ing as required by the Local Authority: - Transmission of alarm and trouble signal to remote station. (Catalog Number 5721B-031) - Transmission of an alarm signal to a remote station that operates on polarity reversal. (Catalog Number 5721B-032) - Transmission of an alarm signal to a shunt type or local energy master box. (Catalog Number 5721B'-033) The Fire Alarm Control Panel including all panel options shall be ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 29 enclosed in a beige steel cabinet. The cabinet shall have a hinged front door with key lock which provides access to panel operating controls. Matching trim shall be supplied for flush mounted installation of the one cabinet. (Catalog Number 6538A- 172 for 72" High.) The system shall be connected to a standby 24VDC power supply lo- cated in the same cabinet or mounted separately as required. Upon loss of main power, the power supply unit shall automati- cally revert to battery power, and the system shall remain fully operational. The unit shall contain suitable over voltage protection to prevent any malfunction or damage which might occur from line power surges. The standby power supply shall include an integral battery charger and monitoring circuits for battery lead supervision, battery lead reversal protection, low battery disconnect and automatic recharging. Sealed batteries shall be provided capable of operating the entire system for a period of (24) hours in the supervisory mode and then be capable of operating the alarm devices for a minimum of (10) minutes, or additionally as required by the Local Authority having jurisdiction. Upon loss of main power to the control unit, a visible and audible signal shall be generated to indicate that the control unit is operating under emergency power. The fault indicator on the control unit shall remain illuminated until main power has been restored. Upon restoration of pomer the control unit shall automatically revert to normal operation without requiring any manual restarting procedures. All connections to the standby battery shall be automatically switched off when the voltage drops below 19V to protect battery cells from damage by deep discharge. The entire system power supply including fuses, in- terconnecting wires and charging circuits shall be supervised. Any malfunction, or blown or missing fuses shall result in a fault indication on the control unit. The system shall be able to respond to inputs from both initiat- ing devices with integrated addressable transponders and conven- tional initiating devices commonly used with non-addressable systems. When conventional devices are used they shall be con- verted to addressable compatible devices by having them report into the system through a self contained transponder. Self- contained transponders shall be available as standalone units or combination initiating device/transponders in a single assembly. Conventional devices connected to an addressable transponder 'shall utilize conventional 2-wire class B alarm initiating ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 30 All initiating devices connected to the same transponder shall have the same location address. If all the devices are of a similar type, the transponder shall be capable of being type coded to identify them as smoke or heat detectors, manual sta- tions or waterflow switches. Both integrated and self- contained transponders shall be provided with easily accessible switches for field setting of address (location) codes. Integrated and self contained transponders dedicated to a single type of initiating device shall have its type code factory preset. Those that can be used with more than one type of initiating device shall permit setting and, if ever necessary, resetting of thhe type code in the field without the use of special tools. In addition to having an alarm signal reported by a transponder displayed on the control panel alpha- numeric display and printer, all transponders in alarm shall be identifiable locally by an energized LED. To permit on -site determination of the point of origin of an alarm, the first transponder reporting an alarm on a loop (communication channel) shall have its LED on steady, all subsequent transponders reporting an alarm shall have a pulsing LED. A control relay /transponder shall be available where building services (e.g. elevator capture, fan shutdown, door release, etc.) are to be automatically controlled by the fire alarm system during a fire emergency. The control relay shall be of a type that only consumes power momentarily while transferring from the deenergized to the energized state or back again. The command to change state shall come from the control panel in accordance with the system program. The control relay shall be condition (deenergized or energized) supervised and its condition shall be confirmed and corrected, if necessary, during each polling cycle. The control relay /transponder shall be capable of operating on the same communication channel with initiating devices /transponders so that it can be located within 3 feet of the building service device it is controlling as required by NFPA 101 -Life Safety Code while its integrity is being monitored from the control panel. The address code of the control relay transponder shall be field selectable and changeable in the same manner as for other transponders. The control relay /transponder type code shall be factory preset and not be field changeable. Audible /Visual Alarm Indicating Appliances shall be Edwards low current, electronic type: 892 -1B HORN STROBE SERIES. EL-EC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 31 Audio/Visual units shall provide a common enclosure for the fire alarm audible and visual alarm devices. The housing shall be designed without visible screws and for mounting in standard 4" square box. The unit shall be complete with a tamper resistant, lexan front plate and lens with "Fire" lettering visible from a 180 degree field of view. The Integral Xenon strobe shall provide 70,000 peak candle power and shall provide 4 wire connec- tions to insure properly supervised in/out system wiring. Unit shall be complete with all mounting hardware and shall be UL- listed "compatible" for its intended purpose. Visual Strobes shall be Edwards low current, electronic type: 894B SERIES. (In handicapped rooms) The strobe assembly shall be designed without visible screws and for mounting in standard one gang electrical box. The unit shall be complete with a tamper resistant lexan lens with "Fire" let- tering visible from 180 degree field of view. The integral Xenon strobe shall provide 70,000 peak candle power and shall provide 4 wire connections to insure properly supervised in/out system wiring. Unit shall be UL listed "compatible" for its intended purpose" Door Holders shall be Edwards low proftle electro-magnetic type: 1500 SERIES. Units shall comply with applicable requirements of UL228 and shall be fail-safe with no moving parts completely silent operation 25 lbs. (minimum) holding force and adjustable swivel contact plate. The smoke detectors shall be model 445CT and shall operate on the photoelectronic light scattering principle. The detectors shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. The smoke detectors shall contain an infared LED light source and a light sensing photodiode. These components shall be positioned such that when smoke particles enter the sensing area, light form the LED reflectp onto the photodiode. When the amount of light reflected onto the photodiode reaches the sensitivity setting, the smoke sampling rate shall increase to twice normal. The alarms signal shall be verified by requiring three succesive smoke sensings above the sensitivity setting. ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 32 Detector alarm shall occur only after verification and will cause the normally flashing power indicator LED to light continuously and the alarm relay to operate. The detectors shall be configured for non - latching operation The detectors shall be non -polar and shall provide for field sensitivity measurement and easily operated full functional field test. The detectors shall be equipped with an integral 135 degree F heat sensor. The detector shall also be equipped with an internal S5Db horn unit which emits a steady tone when the detector alarms and apulsed 1/4 second on 1/4 second off tone when activated by the Fire Alarm System. Provide end of line supervision devices and reverse polarity actuation modules for proper operation. The detector shall include an insect screen and be a single part with a hinged cover and concealed tamper proof latch. All wiring terminations shall be clamp on screw type terminals protected by a terminal block cover. The combination unit shall mount on a standard 4" octagonal electrical box. In automatic system operation: The activation of any manual or automatic initiating device will sound signals at the Central Control Unit. Upon receipt of any alarm condition, the following events will occur without delay: The zone in alarm shall annunciate at the Central Con- trol Unit and on all system annunciators. See "System Zoning" for zone arrangement and identification. Provisions for flashing the Exit lights should be provided if required by the Local Authority. An alarm signal will be relayed to an approved Central Station. This contractor is responsible for wiring up to the digital dialer including termination within the dialer in conjuction with the Alarm Monitoring Contrac- tor selected by the owner. Provide AC power for the Digital Dialer and coordinate iinstallation. Floor HVAC systems shall be deactivated. Smoke removal /exhaust system shall be activated as per sequence of operation given in Division 15. Fire Con- trol of HVAC systems shall take precedence over conven- tional limit controls, such as freeze -stats and timers, and shall cause the emergency sequences to occur regardless of the status of non- emergency limit devices. ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 33 Zoning The audible and visual signalling devices will activate in the building of incidence and all contiguous build- ings or as required by the Local Authority. Unlock all stair /exit doors and release all door hold open devices. Recall elevators as required by the Local Authority. Note: (100 percent of alarms must be reported and there shall be no limit, other than maximum system capacity, as to the number of addressable devices which may be in alarm simultaneously. All alarm conditions shall be permanently recorded including time and date on the panel printer. Alarm printouts shall be in red to be easily distinguishable from other panel functions i.e. alarm silence, panel reset, trouble silence etc.) In manual system operation: All alarm signals will continue to sound and all annun- ciators will remain activated until the alarm condition has been silenced, at which time the alarm signal will stop and all visual indicators will remain activated until the system is cleared and reset. Silencing of any signal will not interfere with subsequent alarms from other zones. Provide Fireman's Mechanical Override Controls at the Fire Alarm Control Panel for priority on /off override at designated air handling units and dampers as required by the smoke removal sequence at operation (Division 15) and as required by local codes. Adequate zoning will be provided to accomplish the functions of the specification and the Local Authority. Separate su- pervised circuits shall be provided for signalling each building. Seperate supervised circuits and addresses shall be provided for each and every device within a building zone /floor as shown on the plans and herein described (with the only exception being corridor smoke detectors). All devices will be addressable or function via addressable modules as follows: Manual Pull Stations, Unit Smoke Detectors, Waterflow Switches, Tamper Switches (supervisory), Duct Detectors, and other devices as required. The system wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Codes, local codes, and Article 760 A and C of NFPA 1 i i l l i i f r r ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 34 Power Limited Fire Protective Signalling Cables. All wire sizes shall conform to the manufacturer's recommenda- tions and will be installed free of opens, shorts, and ground faults. All wiring will be color coded and tagged at each junc- tion box location. Minimum wire size and type shall be solid copper conductors as follows: #16AWG Auxiliary Control & Power Circuits #14AWG Twisted for Signalling Circuits #18AWG Twisted Shielded for Addressable Loops All wiring shall be listed for limited energy (300V) and fire alarm applications and shall be installed in EMT conduit or by other methods approved by tthe local authority and by the Consult- ing Engineer. The Teflon insulated conductors will have fire- resistant and low smoke producing characteristics and shall be U.L. listed for use in hollow ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums other than those described in Section 300 -22 of the National Electrical Code (NEC). Plenum cables are not to be used unless written authorization is received from the engineer. Control and other panels shall be mounted with sufficient clearance for service, maintenance and testing. All fire alarm junction boxes must be clearly marked for easy identification. Flexible connectors shall be used for all devices mounted in suspended lay -in ceiling panels. All conduit, mounting boxes, junction boxes and panels shall be securely hung and fastened with appropriate fittings to insure positive grounding throughout the entire system. No wiring other than that directly associated with fire alarm detection, alarm or auxiliary fire protection functions shall be permitted in fire alarm conduits. Wiring splices are to be avoided to the 'extent possible, and if needed they must be made only in junction boxes and shall be crimp connected. Transposing or changing color coding of wires shall not be permitted. It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate all requirements surrounding the installation of the Fire Alarm System with all trades, including but not exclusive of: the elevator contractor, the electrical contractor, the mechanical contractor, the sprinkler contractor and the HVAC con- trols contractor: Adequate coordination shall be provided to insure proper installation and interface to all peripheral items ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 35 required to interact with the Fire Alarm and Communications System. The completed fire alarm system shall be fully tested in accord- ance with NFPA-72H by the contractor in the presence of the owner's representative, the system supplier and the local fire authorities having jurisdiction. Upon completion of a success- ful test, the contractor shall so certify in writing to the Owner and General Contractor. All test and report costs shall be in the Contract price. A checkout report shall be prepared by the installation technicians. The report shall include, but not be limited to: 1. A complete list of equipment installed and wired. 2. Indication that all equipment is properly installed and functions and conforms with the contract specifications. 3. Tests of individual devices as applicable. 4. Address location by zone and model number for each in- stalled initiating device. 5. Voltage (sensitivity) settings for each ionization and photoelectric detector as measured in place. 6. Printed survey of each channel showing the number of addres- sable devices connected, the types of devices connected programmed outputs for signals connected, programmed auxiliary relays and programmed remote addressable control relays connected and assigned programmed area LEDS. 7. Printout report showing each addressable device installed has responded to a simulated alarm condition. 8. Printout report showing owner defined location message for each addressable initiating device installed. Before final acceptance of work, the contractor shall deliver five copies of a comprehensive operating and maintenance manual including step-by-step programming instructions. Each manual shall contain, but not be limited to: A statement of guarantee including date of termination: name address and phone number of the person to be called in the event of a service requirement; individual customer drawings containing all technical information on each piece of equipment installed; as built drawings which shall be the responsibility of the contractor to compile and in- clude with each manual. Upon completion of the testing phase the manufacturers repre- sentative shall conduct a minimum of two three hour training ses- sions at times stipulated by the owner. ELEC.MS ELECTRICAL Section 16/100 Page 36 Before final acceptance of work, the contractor shall deliver five copies of a comprehensive operating and maintenance manual including step-by-step programming instructions. Each manual shall contain, but not be limited to: * A statement of guarantee including date of termination * Name, address and phone number of the person to be called in the event of a service requirement * Individual customer drawings containing all technical information on each piece of equipment installed * As built drawings adjusted for field moficiations (which shall be the responsibility of the contractor to compile and include with each manual). * System service testing and alarm documentation logs for use by the owner. All equipment shall be free from defects in workmanship and materials, under normal use and service, for a period of one year from complete owner acceptance. Any equipment shown to be defec- tive shall be replaced repaired or adjusted free of charge. Provide a one year testing and maintenance agreement which shall consist of: 1. Regular and systematic examination of all annunciators signals, detectors manual stations, panels, relays and ac- cessories connected to the system. 2. Regular and systematic adjustment and cleaning of all electrical and mechanical components of the installed system. 3. Tests and Written reports to certify that all initiating devices have been tested and to indicate the result of the inspection test as required by the authority having jurisdiction. The system supplier shall offer a test and maintenance agreement providing service to commence after expiration of the warranty included in this contract. Service performed under the terms of warranty and under the terms of a test and maintenance agreement shall be in compliance with the guidelines in NFPA-72H. The manufacturers representative shall have. a24' hour service , F ELEC. MS ELECTRICAL Section 16 /100 Page 37 staff. Names and phone numbers shall be presented to the owner during the owners training session(s). The response time for warranty work is within 24 hours from the . time the service is requested by the owner. co 2 1 1 V 1 (i) 0 a. s 1 1 1 1 1 0 c -Fr U 0 a N E 0 MAR26190, fALV r 2212 REGIST ARC NECT 3 11 Edward A. McHugh Jr. STATE OF WASHINGTON fitiC EI VCD CITY OF "i I IMILA MAR 2 0 1990 PERMIT CENTER Dimitri Demopulos Inc. ARCHITECTS HOMEWO GD SUITES TUKWILA, WASHINGTON HOMEWOOD SUITES HOTEL FRANCHISED BY HOLIDAY CORPORATION HORIZON HOTELS — OWNER DIMENSION DEVELOPMENT CO., INC. DEVELOPER P.O, BOX 795 - 200 FRONT STREET NATCHITOCHES, LA 71457 DIMITRI DEMOPULOS President ROBERT NESBETT Vice President 7277 Regency Square Blvd. Suite 100 Houston, Texas 77036 713-783 0055 Fax. No. 783 0018 r r f r ' r 1. O TUKWILA, WASHINGTON sea T �> C () HOMEWOOD SUITES HOTEL V FRANCHISED BY HOLIDAY CORPORATION I„ CI) 0 DIMENSION DEVELOPMENT CO., INC. - DEVELOPER a P.O. BOX 795 - 200 FRONT STREET NATCHITOCHES, LA 71457 L c • Dimitri Demopulos Inc. ARCHITECTS HOMEWOOD SUITES HORIZON HOTELS - OWNER DIMITRI DEMOPULOS President ROBERT NESBETT Vice President 7277 Regency Square Blvd. Suite 100 Houston, Texas 77036 713-783 0055 Fax. No, 783 0018 PIDJE T MANUAL VOLUME I TABLE OF CONTENTS B3ME.WOGD SUITS DIVISION 00 BIDDING & CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 00000 Project Directory 00100 Instructions to Bidders 00220 Geotechnical Data 00300 Bid Form 00301 Unit Price Schedule (Appendix A) 00302 Cost Breakdown (Appendix B) 00320 Bid Bond (A310) 00500 Owner /Contractor Agreement Form (A101 - 1987) 00600 Performance Bond & Payment (A312) 00700 General Conditions of the contract (A201 - 1987) 00800 Supplementary Conditions 00850 Schedule of Drawing DMSION 1 GENERAL RD((XIIRENE NTS 01010 Summary of Work 01020 Allowances 01025 Measurement & Payment 01035 Modification Procedures 01036 Request for Information Form 01040 Coordination 01050 Field Engineering 01090 Reference Standards 01200 Project Meetings 01300 Submittals 01405 Testing Laboratory Services 01500 Construction Facilities 01620 Product Delivery, Storage & Handling 01630 Product Options & Substitutions 01631 Substitution Request Form 01700 Contract Closeout Page 1 DIVISION 2 SFIEWORK 02060 Building Demolition 02100 Site Preparation 02200 Earthwork 02201 Building Earthwork 02210 Unclassified Excavation & Grading 02270 T Erosion Control 02281 Termite Control 02400 Surface Storm Drainage 02510 Concrete Paving 02513 Asphaltic Concrete Paving 02700 Site Utilities 02810 Irrigation System 02900 Landscaping DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete 03510 Gypsum Concrete DIVISION 4 MASONRY 04200 Unit Masonry DIVISION 5 METAIS 05500 05510 DIVISION 6 VOCD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06190 Wood Trusses 06200 Finish Carpentry 06400 Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 7 07100 07150 Metal Fabrications Metal Stairs and Railings IliERtaL AND MOIS'DIE Pius rPICIii Waterproofing Dampproofing Page 2 TABLELOF CONTENTS,- HOMEWQOD SUITES i Y 07200 Thermal Insulation 07240 Exterior Plaster Wall System 07310 Asphalt Shingles II 07320 Clay Tile Roof 07610 Metal Roofing 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07631 Gutters and Downspouts C 07920 Caulking and Sealants t °` DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08200 Wood Doors and Frames 08305 Access Doors 08520 Aluminum Windows 08700 Finishing Hardware 08800 Glazing ii DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09250 Gypsum Board 09300 Tile 09560 Wood Strip Flooring 09650 Resilient Flooring 09680 Carpet IL 09900 Painting 09950 Wallcovering 11 ,; DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES TABLE OF CONTENTS - HOMEWOOD SUITES Page 3 IL 10100 Tackboards 10165 Plastic Laminate Toilet Compartments 10230 Metal Vents and Louvers 10305 Prefabricated Fireplaces I 10350 Flagpoles 10505 Metal Lockers 10522 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories 10900 Wardrobe and Closet Specialties DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT li 11132 Projection Screens 11480 Athletic Equipment 1 r DIVISION 12 DIVISION 13 In 13160 F 1141ISHING6 12390 Kitchen and Bath Cabinets SPECIAL OCr1STRDCTION Pools r� DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14240 Hydraulic Passenger Elevators END OF TABLE OF'CONTENTS FOR VOLUME I c L L VOLUME.II — CONSISTS OF DIVISION 15 AND 16 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS 7.0 BIDDER, 1.0 DEFINITIONS 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders the bid form, and other sample bidding and contract forms. The proposed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor, Conditions of the Contract (General Supplementary and other Conditions) Drawings, Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to and all Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201. 1987 Edition, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic Instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. 1.4 Project Manual is the volume or volumes that includes Bidding Requirements Sample Forms. Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. 1.5 A Bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the Work or designated portion thereof for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. 1.5 A Bid is complete and properly signed proposal to do the Work or designated portion thereof for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. 1.6 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which work may be added or from which work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternative Bids. 1.7 An Alternate Bid is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents is accepted. 1.8 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services as described in the Bidding Documents or in the proposed Contract Documents. 1.9 . A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid. 1.10 A Sub - bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid to a Bidder for materials or labor for a portion of the Work. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 •- 1 2.0 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that: 2.1.1 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents and the Bid made in accordance therewith. 2.1.2 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents or contract documents, to the extent that such documentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, for other portions of the Project if any, being bid concurrently or presently under construction. 2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and has correlated the Bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents. 2.1.4 The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception. 2.1.5 The failure or omission of any Bidder to receive or examine any form, instrument, or document or to visit the site and acquaint himself with existing cnditions shall in no way relieve the Bidder from any obligation with respect to his Bid. 3.0 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.1 HOW TO OBTAIN DOCUMENTS 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain one (1) complete set of sepias of the bidding drawings and one (1) copy of the bound project manual for the deposit sum of $360.00 from the issuing office of Dimiti Dempoulos Architects, Inc., 7277 Regency Square Blvd., Suite 100, Houston, TX 77036 713/783 -0055. The deposit will be refunded to Bidders by Dimension Development Co., Inc., who submit a bona fide Bid and return Bidding Documents in bood conditions within 2 weeks after receipt of Bids. The cost of Replacement of any missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the deposit. The deposit of the successful Bidder will not be refunded. 3.1.2 Bidders may obtain additional sets of Bidding Documents directly from the issuing office by paying printing and handling costs. Subbidders may also obtain Bidding Documents directly from printer. 3.1.3 The Architect will not issue Bidding Documents in partial sets. Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor the Architect assume any responsibility for errors or misin- terpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 3.1.4 In making copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms, the Owner and the Architect do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license or grant permission for any other use of the Bidding Documents. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 - 2 3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistancies or ambiguities discovered. 3.2.2 Bidders and Sub - Bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least 7 days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. 3.2.3 Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations, corrections or changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them. 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 3.3.1 Each Bidder represents that his Bid is based upon the materials and equipment specified in the Contract Documents. 3.3.2 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 ADDENDA 3.4.1 Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. 3.4.3 No Addenda will be issued later than 4 days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. 3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting his Bid that he has received all Addendajussied and he shall acknowledge their receipt in his Bid. 4.11 BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.1 FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted in duplicate on forms identical to the forms included with the Bidding Documents. 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid forms shall be filled in by typewriter or manually in ink. 4.1.3 Where so indicated by the make up of the Bid Forms, sums shall be expressed in both words and figures and in case of discrepancy between the two, the amount written in words shall govern. 4.1.4 Interlineations, alterations or erassures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. 4,1,5 All requested Alternates shall be bid, If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter "No Change ". 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested the Bidder may without forfeiture of the bid security state the Bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder. The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner. 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall include the legal name of the Bidder and a statement that the Bidder is sole proprietor, partnership, corporation or other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed, A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent s authority to bind the Bidder. 4.2 BID SECURITY 4.2.1 Bid security in the form of a Bid Bond AIA Doc A310 in an amount equal to 5% of the Bid shall accompany each Bid and the attorney in- fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of his power of attorney. 4.2.2 Should the Bidder refuse to enter into Contract or fail to furnish required bonds the amount of the bid security shall be forefeited to the Owner as liquidated damages not as a penalty. 4 2 3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until either (a) the Contract has been executed and bonds, if required have been furnished or (b) the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn, or (c) all Bids have been rejected 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid, the bid security and other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope The envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to: Dimension Development Co , Inc. P. 0 Box 795 200 Front St Natchitoches LA 71357 Attn: Mr • John Davies 318/352 8238 Bids shall be identified with the Project name the Bidder s name and address and if applicable, the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof. 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. 4.3.4 Oral, telephonic or telegraphic Bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 -- 4 4.3.5 Bidders shall be licensed Contractors in the State of Project as required by law. 4.3.6 Bids will be received only from bona fide Bidders on the file with the issuing office and who are known to have received a set of Bidding Documents. 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAW.L OF BID 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period followng the time and data designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. 4.4.2 Prior to the time and data designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice of the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder or by telegram; if by telegram, written confirmatin over the signature of the Bidder shall be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. 4.4.3 No Bidder may withdraw his Bid for a period of thirty (30) days after the date of receipt of Bids without written consent of the Owner. 5.0 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 5.1 OPENING OF BIDS 5.1.1 Unless stated otherwise in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, the property identified Bids received on time will be opened privately. An abstract of the Bids will be made available to Bidders at the discretion of the Owner, within a reasonable time. 5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS 5.2.1 The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids and to reject a Bid not accompanied by any required bid security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents, or to reject a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular. 5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest responsible Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive information in the Bids received and to accept the Bid or Bids which, in his judgement, is in his own best interests. °5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept alternates in any order or combination and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and the Alternates accepted. 6.0 POST -AID INFORMATION 6.1 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 - 5 6.1.1 Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect, upon request, a properly executed AIA Document A305, Contractor's Qualification Statement, unless such a Statement has been previously required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bidding Documents. 6.2 SUBMITTALS 6.2.1 The Bidder shall, as soon as practicable after notification of selection for the award of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing: .1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces; .2 names of the manufacturers, products and the suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and equipment proposed for the Work; and .3 names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions the Work; and .4 construction schedule and scheduleof submittals within 15 work days of date of Bid acceptance. .5 schedule of values within 10 working days of the date of bid acceptance. 6.2.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents. 6.2.3 Prior to the award of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity, the Bidder may, at the Bidder's option, (1) withdraw the Bid, or (2) submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. 6.2.4 Persons amd entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and Architect. 7.0 PERFORMANCE MID AND PAYMENT BWD 7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS 7.1.2 Prior to the execution of the Contract, the successful Bidder shall furnish a Performance Bond and Payment Bond in the amount of 100% of the Contract Sum. 7.1.3 The bonds shall be executed on standard AIA forms. Refer to sample forms included in the Project Manual. No other type of bond forms will be accepted. 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 - 6 7.2.1 The successful Bidder shall deliver to the Owner the required bonds and policies of insurance or insurance certificates as required by the Contract Documents not later than 3 days following the date of execution of the Contract. All bonds and policies or certificates of insurance shall be as approved by the Owner before the successful Bidder may proceed with the Work. 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum. 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney -in -fact who executes the required bonds onbehalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. 8.0 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN CANER AND C ITt'RACTOR 8.1 FORM TO BE USED 8.1.1 The successful Bidder shall be required to execute AIA Document A101 "Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor" as the form of Agreement. 8.1.2 The Bidder to whom the Contract is awarded by the Owner shall, within ten (10) days after notice of award and receipt of Agreement forms, sign and deliver to the Owner all required copies of the Agreement. 9.0 TIME OF CaiSTROCTICN 9.1 CONTRACT TIME AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 9.1.1 The Agreement will include a stipulation that the Work be Substantially Complete 210 calendar days from the and including the date of the Notice to Proceed. Add an allowance for normal delays anticipated due to local weather conditions. The completion date will be established in the Notice to Proceed. 9.1.2 The Agreement will include a stipulation that liquidated damages will be established in the amount of $3,000 for each and every calendar day the Work is not Substantially Complete. END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 - 7 SECTIQOI 00220 GEO'IEC(3NIZAL MTh 1.1 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT A. A soils investigation report has been prepared for the site of this work by. Soil and Material Engineers, hereinafter referred to as the Soils Engineer. 1.2 AVAILABILITY OF GEOTECHNICAL DATA A. The soils investigation report will be made available to prime bidders through the Architect upon request. B. Bidders, by receipt of the soils investigation report, acknowledge that they understand that the soils report is not a part of the Contract Documents and further waive any and all rights of claim against the Owner and Architect or their agents and employees due to any errors or inconsistencies that may be contained in the soils report. 1.3 USE OF DATA A. The report was prepared primarily for use by the Architect's consultant in designing the foundations for this Project and is not a part of the Contract Documents. The report is available for Bidder s information but is not a warranty of subsurface conditions. . The report by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist on the site. Should subsurface conditions be found to vary substantially from the report, modifications in the design and construction of foundations will be made, with resulting adjustments to the Contract Sum in accordance with the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION SECTION 00300 BID FORM PROJECT: Homewood Suites T0: (See Section 00100 Par. 4.3 Submission of Bids) FROM: Pursuant to and in compliance with the requirements of all Bidding Documents relating to the construction of this Project including Addenda (insert number and date, if any) as prepared by Thorn Howe Stratton & Strong, Inc. Addendum No. , Dated Addendum No. , Dated Addendum No. , Dated The undersigned agrees to perform this Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the sum of: BASE BID: CONTRACT TIME (Name of Bidder) REJECTION OF BID Dollars ($ ). If awarded this Contract, the undersigned agrees to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work 2t0 calendar days from and including the date of the Notice to Proceed. Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing and submitting this Bid, the Bidder agrees that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. The undersigned understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject this Bid, but that this Bid shall remain open and shall not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) days from the date fixed for its opening. BID FORM 00300 - � 1 BID ACCEPTANCE If written notice of acceptance of this Bid is mailed or delivered to the undersigned within thirty (30) days after the date set for the opening of this Bid, or at any other time thereafter before it is withdrawn, the undersigned will, within seven (7) days, execute and deliver the signed Agreement to the Owner and will also furnish and deliver to the Owner the Performance Bond and Payment Bond and proof of insurance coverage, within three (3) days after execution of the Agreement. UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE Attach to this Bid Form, the UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE, APPENDIX A. The Unit Price Schedule will be the basis for determining unit costs for additional work when authorized by the Owner in accordance with the Contract Documents. COST BREAKDOWN Attach to this Bid Form, the COST BEREAKDOWN, APPENDIX B. NAME OF BIDDER By: (Signature) (Title) State and License No.: Address: Date: Individual ( ) Partnership ( ) Corporation ( ) If Bidder is a Corporation complete the following: Signature of Corporate Secretary END OF SECTION 00300 ._ 2 BID FORM SECTION 00301 UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE (APPENDIX A) PROJECT: Homewood Suites TO: (See Section 00100 Par. 4.3 Submission of Bids) NAME OF BIDDERS: DATE: Work in the following categories will be performed at the unit prices listed including overhead and profit if such additional work is authorized by the Owner in writing in accordance with the Contract Documents. Fill -in all spaces by typewriter or manually in ink. WORE DESCRIPTION COST PER UNIT Machine excavation $ /CY Hand excavation. $ /CY Earth backfill compacted as specified. $ /CY 3,000 psi Class Concrete footing without form- work and reinforcing. $ /CY Reinforcing in place. $ /LB Sprinkler head including connection to system. $ /EA 110 V duplex receptacle wired to nearest panel. $ /EA Telephone outlet. $ /EA Installation of VWC. $ /SQ YD END OF SECTION UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE COST BREAKDOWN (APPEd+ DIX B) PROJECT: The following is a Cost Breakdown referenced in the Bid submitted by: NAME OF BIDDERS: i SECTION 00302 DATE: ITEM OF WORK COST (excluding overhead & profit) Paving and Walks $ Site Utilities $ Landscaping $ Concrete $ Masonry $ Rough Carpentry $ Finish Carpentry $ Roofing and Sheetmetal $ Doors and Hardware $ Windows, Glass and Glazing $ Gypsum Board and Acoustical Treatment $ Resilient Flooring Tile Painting and Wallcovering $ COST BREAKDOWN 00302 1 00302 Specialties Pool and Spa Elevator Plumbing Fire Protection Heating, Ventilating, & Air Conditioning Electrical Subtotal General Conditions and Overhead Fee (included in Base Bid) (Base Bid) r t L SECTION : 00320 BID BQIID 1.1 The Bid Bond Form for this Contract is as published by the American Institute of Architects, Standard Document, #A310 "BID BOND" dated February 1970. This document is hereby specifically made part of these. Contract Documents as though set forth in full. 1.2 Copies are on file in the Architect's office for your review. Copies of AIA documents may be purchased from the American Institute of Architect. r r c sacrum 00500 cw R/cornRAf r AGREEMENT FORM A101 1.1 The Owner /Contract Agreement Form A101 for this Contract is as published by the American Institute of Architects, Standard Document, #A101 "STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER & CONTRACTOR" dated April 1987. This document is hereby specifically made part of these Contract Documents as though set forth in full. 1.2 Copies are on file in the Architect's office for your review. Copies of AIA documents may be purchased from the American Institute of Architect • r. r i SECTION 00600 PERFORMANCE BOND & PAYMENT BOND 1.1 The Performance Bond and Payment Bond for this Contract is as published by the. American Institute of Architects, Standard Document, #A312 "PER - FORMANCE BOND" and "PAYMENT BOND ", both dated December 1984. This document is hereby specifically made part of these Contract Documents as though set forth in full. 1.2 Copies are on file in the Architect's office for your review. Copies of AIA documents may be purchased from the American Institute of Architect. PERFORMANCE. BOND & PAYMENT BOND : 00600 SFX,TION 00700 (.1ERAL (Jf 3DITI I S 1.1 The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction for this Contract is as published by the American Institute of Architects, Standard Document, #A201 "GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ", dated April 1987. This document is hereby specifically made part of these Contract Documents as though set forth in full. 1.2 Copies are on file in the Architect's office for your review. Copies Of AIA documents may be purchased from the American Institute of Architect. SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITICNS The following supplements modify the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," AIA Document A201, Fourteenth Edition, 1987. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1 — ORAL PROVISIONS 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS 1.3.1 Add to 1.3.1 the following Clause 1.3.1.1: 1.3.1.1 The Architect shall have ownership of documents, drawings, designs, or concepts prepared or originated by Dimitri Demopulis Co., Inc. Architects. ARTICLE 2 — OWNER 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.2.1 Delete the words printed in italics. 2.2.5 Delete this Subparagraph in its entirety and substitute the following: The Contractor will be furnished free of charge 15 copies of Drawings and Project Manuals. Additional sets will be furnished at the cost of reproduction, postage and handling. 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 2.3.1 In line 3, delete the word "persistently ". 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY CUT THE WORK 2.4.1 Delete the next to last sentence beginning with the words "Such action by . ., ." ARTICLE 3 — CONTRACTOR 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR Add to 3.2 the following Subparagraph 3.2.2: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 1 3.2.2 Drawings and Project Manuals shall not be issued in part. Should ommisions occur as a result of issuance of partial sets, the Contractor shall be responsible for such omissions. 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES Add to 3.3.1 the following clause 3.3.1.1: 3.3.1.1 Where the Specifications require that installation be in accordance with manufacturer's directions, reference standards, or other association references or recommendations, the Contractor shall not be relieved of the responsibility for means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS Add to 3.4 the following Subparagraph 3.4.3: 3.4.3 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for the substitition of products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in the General Requirements (Division 1 of the Specifications). 3.5 WARRANTY Add to 3.5.1 the following Clause 3.5.1.1: 3.5.1.1. The reference standards referred to in the Specifications shall be the edition in effect at the time of request for bids or proposals except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents or as requred by applicable codes. 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 3.10.1 Add to this Subparagraph the following: Revisions in the constructionschedules shall require Owner's prior approval. 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 3.18.1 In the ninth line, delete the words in parathensis "(other than the Work itself) ". ARTICLE 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 ARCHITECT 4.1.3 Delete the words "against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objection and ". 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.3.3 In line 3, delete the words "the claimant first recognizes" and substitute the words "an officer of the claimant is informed of ". SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 2 4.3.6 In line 18, delete the word "and" substitute the word "or ". 4.4.2 After the word "Architect ", insert the words "or HSD ". 4.5 ARBITRATION 4.5.1 In line 3 after the words "shall be settled by arbitration ", insert the words "when all parties to the dispute mutually agree to use arbitration and ". 4.5.1, 4.5.4, 4.3.4.2, and 4.5.6 Delete the word "demand" and substitute the word "request ". It is agreed that arbitration shall be used only if all parties to the dispute agree to use arbitration. ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGES DIRECTIVES Add to 7.3 the following Subparagraph 7.3.10: 7.3.10 In Subparagraph 7.3.6, the allowance for the combined overhead and profit included in the total cost to the Owner shall be based on the following schedule: .1 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, 10 percent of the cost. .2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor's Subcontractor, 7.5 percent of the amount due the Subcontractor. .3 For each Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor involved, for Work performed by that Subcontractor's or Sub - subcontractor's own forces, 10 percent of the cost. .4 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by the Subcontractor's Sub- contractors, 7.5 percent of the amount due the Sub - subcontractor. .5 Cost which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with Subparagraph 7.3.6. .6 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except for those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. Labor and mater- ials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. ARTICLE 8 - TIME 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION Add to 8.2 the following Subparagraphs 8.2.4, 8.2.5 and 8.2.6: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 3 8.2.4 The contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the Work 210 calendar days from and including the date of the Notice to Proceed. 8.2.5 The Contractor and the Contractor's surety shall be liable for and shall pay the Owner as liquidated damages the sums of $3,000 for each calendar day of delay until the Work is substantially complete. The parties agree that the amount of damages resulting from delay would be uncertain and difficult to prove, and further agree that such liquidated damages set forth herein are a reasonable estimate of those damages which could result from delay. ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION Add the following: Approvals of certificates or other decisions required by the Architect under this Article shall also require the approval of the Owner which shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT Add to 9.3.1 the following Clause 9.3.1.3: 9.3.1.3 Until Substantial Completion, the Owner shall pay 90 percent (10% retainage throughout Contract time) of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments. The retainage shall be paid within 30 days after final completion of the Work. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT Add to 9.10.11 the following Clauses 9.10.1.1 and 9.10.1.2: 9.10.1.1 Inspections required by the Architect due to the Contractor's failure to complete or correct a portion of the Work shall be considered additional services and shall be billed to the Owner at the Architect's standard rate. The Owner shall reduce the Contract Sum by Change Order in the amount of the Architect's invoice for additional services. 9.10.1.2 If the Contractor fails to complete or correct a portion of the Work within 30 days after date of Substantial Completion, the balance due for such incomplete or uncorrected work shall be deducted from the Contract Sum. 9.10.2 In line 21, delete the word "may" and substitute the word "shall ". ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1.4 Delete this Subparagraph in its entirety. ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND ems 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE Add to 11.1.1 the following Clauses 11.1.1.8 and and 11.1.1.9: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 4 11.1.1.8 Liability Insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive basis including: . 1 Premises Operations including X, C and U as applicable. .2 Independent Contractors' Protective. .3 Products and Completed Operations. . 4 Personal Injury Liability with Employment Exclusion deleted. .5 Contractual, including specified provision for Contractor's obligation under Paragraph 3.18. .6 Owned, non -owned and hired motor vehicles. .7 Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations. . 8 Umbrella Liability. 11.1.1.9 If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Commercial General Libility Policy on a claims -made basis, the policy date or Retroactive Date shall predate the Contract; the termination date of the policy or applicable extended reporting period shall be no earlier than the termination date of coverages required to be maintained after final payment, certified in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.2. Add to 11.1.2 the following Clause 11.1 .2.1: 11.1.2.1 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the following, or greater if required by law: .1 Comprehensive General Liability: a. $5,000,000 Bodily Injury, Each Occurance. b. $5,000,000 Property Damage, Annual Aggregate. .2 Comprehensive Automobile Liability: a. $5,000,000 Each Occurance. .3 Umbrella Form: a. $5,000,000 Limit of Liability.. . 4 Workmen's Compensation: a. State: Staatutory. b. Applicable Federal: Statutory. c. Employer's Liability: $500,000. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS .00800 - 5 11.1.3 Add the following sentence: If this insurance is writetn on the Comprehensive General Liability policy form, the Certificates shall be AIA Document G705, Certificate of Insurance. If this insurance is written on a Commercial General Liability policy form, ACORD form 25 -S will be acceptable. 11.1.3 In the second sentence following the word "cancelled," insert the words "or materially changed." Add to 11.1.3 the following Clause, 11.1.3.1: 11.1.3.1 The Contractor shall furnish one copy of each of Certificates of Insurance herein required specifically set forth evidence of all coverage required by Subparatraphs 11.1.1, 11.1.2 and 11.1.3. The Contractor shall deliver the required Certificates of Insurance to the Owner not later than 3 days following the date the Agreement is entered into, or if the Work is to be commenced pripr thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Contractor shall, prior to the commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner. 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE Delete Subparagraph 11.2.1 and substitute the following: 11.2.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain protective liability insurance with the Owner and Architect as named insured with minimum limits of: .1 Property damage, bodily injury, including death with minimum limits of $5,000,000, Combined Single Limit. .2 Personal Injury, with employment exclusion deleted with minimum limits of $5,000,000 aggregate. 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.3.1 In line 6, delete the word "without" and 11.3.1 In line 11, delete the remainder of this the words "or until no. . . ". 11.3.1.1 Beginning in line 7, delete the words compensation for Architect's services and expenses insured loss ". 11.3.1.2 At the end of the last sentence, add negligence ". 11.3.1.3 At the end of the last sentence, add, negligence ". 11.3.2 Delete the remainder of this Subparagraph word "Owner ". 11.3.4 Delete this Subparagraph in its entirety. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS substitute the word "with ". Subparagraph beginning with "and shall cover reasonable required as a result of such "for losses due to Owner's "for losses due to Owner's beginning on line 5 after the 00800 - 6 11.3.6 Delete this Subparagraph in its entirety. 11.3.7 Delete this Subparagraph in its entirety. 11.3.8 Delete the first sentence and substitute the following: "A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner ". 11.3.9 Delete this Subparagraph in its entirety. 11.3.10 Delete the first sentence and substitute the following: "The Owner shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers ". 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND Delete Subparagraph 11.4.1 and substitute the following: 11.4.1 The Contractor shall furnish and maintain a Performance Bond and Payment Bond covering faithful performance of the Contract and Payment of obligations arising thereunder, each in the amount of 100% of thet Contract Sum. The attorney -in -fact who executes the bonds on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of his power of attorney. 11.4.1.1 The Contractor shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than 3 days following the date the Agreement is entered into, or if the Work is to be commenced prior thereto response to a letter of intent, the Contractor shall, prior to the commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished. ARTICLE 12 - UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.2 In the second sentence, delete the words "the actual performance of the Work," and substitute "the date of final completion as established by the Architect." ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT Add the following Paragraph 14.4 to Article 14 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall: .1 Cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 Take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 7 Except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date.of termination stated in the notice, terminate,all existing Subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further Subcontracts and purchase orders. 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment from the Owner on the same basis provided in Subparagraphs 14.1.2. END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SDCPION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK Including Owner /Contractor Cost Identification 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work by Owner. B. Owner- Furnished Products C. Contractor use of site and premises. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Compare all documents and verify OSOI and OSCI items; notify Owner of any discrepancies. Do not proceed until all discrepancies have been resolved. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. NIC: Not in Contract. B. OSCI: Owner Supplied Contract Installed. C. OSOI: Owner Supplied Owner Installed. D. Furnish: (Synonymous with Supplied) Purchased and shippped for job site unless specifically stated otherwise in these Specifications. E. Provide: Furnish and install. 1.4 WORK BY OWNER (OSOI) A. The Owner will award a contract for Fixtures and Furniture. Work under this contract includes: 1. Wall hung furniture. 2. Furniture and accessories. 3. Draperies and drapery hardware. 4. Exercise equipment. B. The Owner will furnish and install: 1. Pool furniture. 2. Interior signate/Exterior Signage (Contractor to provide foundations and power supply). 3. TV system (incoming signal and processor). 4. Telephone system. (Equipment Call Accounting and Hand sets only). 5. Flag. 6. Reservation Antenna (Contractor to provide foundation and empty conduit system). 1.5 OWNER SUPPLIED PRODUCTS (OSCI) A. Products furnished to the site and paid for by Owner: 1. Communications cabinets (meeting rooms). 2. Reception desk modueles. SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1 3. All appliances. 4. All kitchen cabinets, cabinet lighting and bathroom vanity cabinets including tops and backsplashes. 5. Carpet, vinyl composition tile and sheet vinyl (Contractor to verify quantities). 6. Vinyl wallcovering. 7. Suite entry door numbers. 8. Building ID numbers. 9. Central laundry washers and dryers including folding tables. 10. Permanent Site sign. 11. Barbeque grills. 12. Handicapped parking signs. 13. Stop signs. B. Other Owner /Contractor Cost Identifications: 1. Independent testing laboratory service costs shall be paid by Owner. (Ref. Sect. 01405 Testing Laboratory Services) 2 Contractor to provide electrical and plumbing requirements for an irrigation system. Owner to provide irrigation system. 3. Owner to provide Landscaping. Contractor to fine grade to receive seed and /or sod and planting. C Owner Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings product data and samples to Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for Product delivery to site, 3. On delivery. inspect Products jointly with Contractor. 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective or deficient items. 5. Arrange for manufacturers warranties, inspections and service. D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings producta data and samples. 2. Receive and unload Products at site; uncrate and inspect for completeness or damage, jointly with Owner. 3. Handle . store . protect, insdtall and finish products. 4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt. 1 6 CONTDRACTORD USE OF SITE & PREMISES A. Limit use of site and preimises to allow: 1. Owner occupancy of indicated areas. 2 Work by other contractors and Owner. 3. Public usage for Owner occupied areas. B. Access to Site: Coordinate with Owner. C Emergency Building Ingress/Egress During Construction: Coordinate with Fire marshal and Building Officials. END OF SECTION 01010 - 2 :SUMMARY OF WORK sacrici 01020 ALILMANCFS 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for including cash allowances in the Contract Sum for the purchase of products selected by Architect and Owner. B. Include installation costs in allowance only when specifically indicated by Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. B. C. D. E. 1.3 A. B. General Conditions Section 01035 - Modification Procedures Section 01300 - Submittals Section 01630 - Product Options & Substitutions Applicable Sections of these Specifications SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES Section 04200 - Unit masonry: Include the unit sum of $225 for the purchase and deliver of face brick. Section 09300 - Tile: Include the following unit sums for the delivery of ceramic tile not specified. 1. Fireplace Hearth Tile: $5.00 per square foot. 2. Main House: a. Decorative Wall Tile: $4.00 per square foot. b. Logo Tile: $20.00 each. c. Floor Tile - Ceramic & Quarry: $3.50 per square foot. d. Wall Tile- Ceramic: $3.50 per square foot. 1.4 COSTS INCLUDED IN ALLOWANCES A. Net cost of products to Contractor or subcontractor. B. Delivery to site. C. Labor required under allowance only when installation is specified to be included. D. Applicable taxes. 1.5 CONTRACTOR COSTS INCLUDED IN CONTRACT SUM A. Product handling at site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage. B. Protection of products from damage. ALLOWANCES per thousand purchase and 01020 - 1 r r r r t r c L i i i I: C. Labor for installation and finishing, except when installation is specified as part of allowance. D. Necessary adjustments and final cleaning. E. Other incidental expenses required to complete installation. F. Contractor's overhead and profit. G. Warranty to same extent as required by General Conditions for all products and workmanship. 1.6 ADJUSTMENTS TO THE CONTRACT SUM A. An appropriate adjustment to Contract Sum will be made by Change Order to compensate for variations in cash allowances an actual costs. B. Refer to General Conditions, Article 7, and Section 01035, Modification Procedures. 1.7 PRODUCT SELECTION A. Architect will select products, obtain Owner's approval and submit product information to Contractor. 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Promptly notify Architect of reasonable objections against supplier or installer. B. Execute purchase agreement with designated supplier and installer. C. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples in accordance with Section 01300. D. Arrange for and coordinate delivery. Inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage and defects. Submit claims for transportation damage. 01020 - 2 ALIAWANCES SECTION 01025 MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for submitting Applications for Payment to Architect in accordance with schedule established by Conditions of the Contract and Agreement between Owner and Contractor. 1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Owner /Contractor Agreement: Lump Sum and Unit Prices. B. Conditions of the Contract: 1. Progress Payments, Retainages, and Final Payment. 2. Schedule of Values. C. Section 01035 - Modification Procedures D. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout 1.3 FORMAT & DATA REQUIRED A. Submit itemized applications typed on AIA Document G702, Application and Certificate for Payment, and continuation sheets G703, latest editions. B. Schedule of Values on Applications shall be listed in same order as Table of contesnts in the Project Manual insofar as is practicable. C. Each value listed in the Schedule of Values column shall include a directly proportionate amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. D. Complete all columns as applicable. E. Round payments and retainages to nearest dollar amount. F. Submit substantiating data when specifically requested by Architect. G. Submit copies of invoices on materials approved as being suitable stored. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE A. Submit Applications for Payment to Architect at times designated in Agreement between Owner and Contractor. B. Submit 3 copies of each Application for Payment. C. After review of the properly completed and corrected Application for Payment, Architect will issue a Certificate for Payment to Owner with a copy to Contractor. END OF SECTION MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT 01025 - 1 SECTION 01035 P4DrFICATICN PROCEDURES 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for processing Change Orders, issuing Construction Change Authorizations, and Architect's Supplemental Instructions. B. Procedures for Contractor requesting information. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions: Governing requirements for changes in the Work, in Contract Cost, and Contract Time. B. Supplementary Conditions: Percentage allowances for Contractor's overhead and profit. C. Bid Form: Unit prices. D. Section 01025 - Measurement & Payment: Progress payments. E. Section 01300 - Submittals: Progress schedule and schedule of values. F. Section 01630 - Product Options & Substitutions. G. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project record documents, recording modifications. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit name of person(s) authorized to accept changes, and to be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ of changes in the Work. B. Modification Forms (latest editions): 1. Change Order: AIA Doc. G701. 2. Proposal Request: AIA Doc. G709. 3. Construction Change Authorization: AIA Doc. G713. 4. Architect's Supplemental Instructions: AIA Doc. G710. 5. Contractor's Request for Information: 01036 included in Project Manual. 1.4 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT SUM & CONTRACT TIME A. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time and materials basis. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of changes in the Work. MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035 - 1 B. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of quotation. C. On request, provide additional data to support computations: 1. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. 2. Taxes, insurance and bonds. 3. Overhead and profit. 4. Justification for change in Contract Time, if any. 5. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. D. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time and material basis, with additional information. 1. Origin and date of claim. 2. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. 3. Time records and wage rates paid. 4. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment and subcontracts, similarly documented. 1.5 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES A. Architect may submit a Proposal Request (AIA Doc. G709) which includes: Detailed description of change with supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications, projected time for executing change, and period of time during which requested price will be considered valid. B. Contractor may initiate a change by submittal of a request to Architect describing proposed change with a statement of reason for the change, and effect on Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation. Document requested substitutions, if any, in accordance with Section 01630. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION A. Architect may issue a directive (AIA Doc. G713), signed by Owner, instructing Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. B. Directive will describe changes in the Work and will designate method of determining change in Contract Sum or Contract Time, if any. C. Promptly execute the change in Work. 1.7 LUMP SUM CHANGE ORDER A. Will be based on proposal Request and Contractor's lump sum quotation or Contractor's request for Change Order as approved by Architect. 1.8 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER A. For predetermined unit prices and quantities, Change Order will be executed on a fixed price basis. 01035 - 2 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES B. For unit costs or quantitites of units of work which are not predetermined, execute Work under a construction change authorization. Changes in Contract Sum or Contract Time will be computed as specified for time and material Change Order. 1.9 TIME & MATERIAL CHANGE ORDER A. Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits in Conditions of the Contract. B. Architect will determine change allowable in Contract Sum and Contract Time as provided in Conditions of the Contract. 1.10 EXECUTION OF CHANGE ORDERS A. Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provide in Conditions of the Contract. 1.11 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum as shown on Change Order. B. Promptly revise Progress Schedules to reflect change in Contract Time, revise subschedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. C. Promptly enter changes in project Record Documents. 1.12 ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS A. Architect may submit supplemental instructions (ALB, Doc. G710) which includes drawings, specifications, or other information consistent with Contract Documents. B. Prior to proceeding with the instructions, indicate acceptance of the instructions for minor change to the Work as consistent with the Contract Documents but which does not change the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 1.13 CONTRACTOR'S REQUEST FOR INFORMATION A. Contractor shall initiate requests for information on form 01036 (included in Project Manual) . Architect will promptly reply on same form or by other means as appropriate. END OF SECTION MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035 - 3 I SECTII4 01040 I COOR'DINVIMI N 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project coordination. B. Mechanical and electrical coordination. I C. Coordination drawings. D. Cutting and patching. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Work by Owner or by separte contractors. B. Section 01050 - Field Engineering. C. Section 01200 - Project Meetings: Pre - installation meetings. 1.3 COORDINATION, GENERAL (" A. Coordinate scheduling, � submittals and Work of the various sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. B. Where installation of one part of the Work is dependent on installation of IL other components,- either before or after its own installation, schedule construction activities in the sequence required to obtain the best results. IL C. Verify that utlilty requirement characteristics of operating equipment are combatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing connecting to, and IL placing in service, such equipment. Coordinate utility service connec- tions with appropriate local utility company. IL D. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owners occupancy schedule as required in Section 01010. E. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in acceptance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner activities. F. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. l G. Where necessary prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved outlining special procedures reauired for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings; prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors where coordination of their work is required. COORDINATION 01040• 1 i SECTION 01036 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION FORMS REQUEST FOR INFORMATION TO: Dimitri Demopulos Architects, Inc. 7277 Regency Square Blvd., Suite 100 Houston, TX 77036 (713) 783 -0055 FAX (713) 783 -0018 PROTECT NO: PROJECT NAME: LOCATION: SUBJECT: SPEC. SECTION: DRAWING NO. REQUEST: PREPARED BY: REVIEWED BY: RFI No. DATE: DATE RESPONSE READ. (The following respnse does not authorize a change in the Contract Sum nor the Contract Time) RESPONSE: BY: DATE: REQUEST FOR INFORMATION FORM 01036 - 1 1.4 MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL COORDINATION A. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts and conduit• as closely as practicable; replace runs parallel with line of building. B. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair. C. In finished areas, except where otherwise indicated, conceal pipes• ducts and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Prepare and submit coordination drawings where close and careful coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated off -site by separate entities. and where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components. 1. Show interrelationship of components shown on separate shop drawings. 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Comply with requirements contained in Section 01300. 4. Provide additional coordination drawings if required in Mechanical and Electrical Divisions of these Specifications. 1.6 CUTTING & PATCHING A. Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather - exposed and moisture - resistant elements, and sight - exposed surfaces. B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects; 1. Structural itegrity of elements. 2. Integrity of weather - exposed or moisture- resistant element. 3. Efficiency maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight - exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other work. 2. Uncover work to install ill -timed work for testing. 3. Remove and replace non - conforming work. 4. Remove samples of installed work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work. D. Execute Work by methods which will avoid damage to other Work, and provide propersurfaces to receive patching and finishing. 01040 - 2 COORDINATION E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. F. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduits, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. At penetrations of fire - related wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with UL fire rated material, full thick ness of construction element or as required to restore rating integrity. I. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit. END OF SECTION COORDINATION SECTICti 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Setting, maintaining, and establishing finish elevations and lines. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Conditions of the Contract B. Section 01010 - Summary of Work C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: project Record Documents, recording deviations from the Contract Documents. D. Section 02200 - Earthwork: Excavating, grading. and filling. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work of the Section shall be provided by a licensed profesional engineer. 1.4 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS A. Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points are as shown on Drawings or as established by Owner. B. Locate and protect control points prior to beginning layout and site work. Preserve permanent referencepoints during construction. 1.5 PROTECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A. Establish lines and levesls, locate, and layout by appropriate instrumentation: 1. Site improvements, grade stakes, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Batterboards for structure. 3. Building foundation, column loctions and floor levels. 4. Controlling lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical trades. 1.6 RECORDS A. Promptly record variations and departures from Contract Documents which have been approved by Architect. B. Submit data verifying that finish grades are in conformace with Contract Documents when specifically requested by Architect. END OF SECTION FIELD ENGINEERING 01050 - 1 SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conformance to applicable reference standards. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Throughout the Contract Documents, reference is made to standards which establish material quality and types and workmanship, and which establish methods for resting and reporting on pertinent characteristics. B. Where these Contract Documents specifically name a standard, provide materials and workmanship which meet or exceed the specifically named standard except where more stringent requirements are specified in the Contract Documents. C. Verify detailed requirements of the specifically named standard and verify that materials used and workmanship performed meets or exceed the specified requirements. D. When required by the Contract Documents are specifically requested by the Architect, furnish to Architect required proof that materials and workmanship meet or exceed requirements of the specifically named standard. Such proof shall be in the form requested by Archtiect, and generally will be copies of certified reports of tests conducted by a testing agency approved for that purpose by Architect. E. Where the edition of standards conflict with edition referenced by applicable codes, edition referenced by applicable code shall govern. If an edition is not designated in the Specifications or referenced by code, edition of standard in effect on date Documents are let for bids or proposals governs. 1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Specific naming of standards occurring on Drawings and in other Sections of these Specifications. B. General Conditions: Paragraph 12.3, "Acceptance of nonconforming work ". 1.4 SCHEDULE OF STANDARDS AA Aluminum Association AABC Associated Air Balance REFERENCE STANDARDS 010090 -i1 AAMA American Architectural Manufacturer's Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportaion Officials ACI American Concrete Institute ADC Air Diffusion Council AGC Associated Concrete Institute AMA American Hardboard Association AI Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects A.I.A American Insurance Association AITC American Institute of Timber Construction AISI American Institute of Steel Construction AMCA Air Movement and Control Association ANSI American National Standards Institute APA American Plywood Association ART Air - Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturer's Association ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air - Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASPA American Sod Producers Association ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWWA American Water Works Association AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood Preservers Association AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute AWS American Welding Society 01090 - 2 REFERENCE STANDARDS BIA Brick Institute of America CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers Institute CDA Copper Development Association CLFMI Chain link Fence Manufacturers Institute CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute DOC United States Department of Commerce National Bureau of Standards EIA Electronics Industry Association EIMA Exterior Insulation Manufacturers Association EJCDC Engineers' Joint Contract Documents Committee American Consulting Engineers Council EJMA Electrical Joint Manufacturers Association ETL Electrical Testing Laboratorie Inc. FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association FM Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation FS Federal Specification General Services Administration Specifications and Consumer Information Distribution Section (WFSIS) GA Gypsum Association HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association ILEA Insulated Cable Engineer's Association IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IES Illuminating Engineering Society IMIAWC International Masonry Industry All- Weather Council Interna- tional Masonry Institute ML /SFA Metal Lath /Steel Framing Association NAANA4 National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 3 l NBS National Bureau of Standards (U.S. Department of Commerce) NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NFoPA National Forest Products Association NCRA National Roofing Contractors Association NSF National Sanitation Foundation NSWMA National Solid Wastes Management Association OSHA Occupational Safety Health Administration (U. S. Department of Labor) PCA Portland Cement Association PCT Prestressed Concrete Institure PS Product Standard U.S. Department of Commerce SDI Steel Door Institute SFPA Southern Forest Products Institute SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditions Contractors' National Associa -. tion SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council TCA Tile Council of America Inc. TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. UL Underwriter's Laboratories. Inc. WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau END OF SECTION 01090 - 4 REFERENCE STANDARDS r r r f i t I L i I SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Contractor participation and attendance of preconstruction meeting with representatives of subcontractors and suppliers. B. Contractor administration of progress meetings and preinstallation meetings. Representatives of Contractor. Subcntractors and Suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. C. Architect and Owner will attend the Pre - construction Meeting and may attend pre - installation meetings and progress meetings as they deem necessary. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions: Article 12, Uncovering and Correction of Work. B. Section 01300 - Submittals C. Section 01700 - Project Clouseout: Record Documents 1.3 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Prior to beginning the Work the Architect or Owner will arrange and administer a pre - construction meeting. B. Time and Location: Within 15 days after signing of Contract and at a convenient location designated by owner. C. Purpose: To discuss various responsibilities, progress schedules and job conditions. D. Required to Attend: 1. Owner's representative(s) 2. Architect 3. Contractor and /or superintendent 4/ Major subcontractors 1.4 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer progress meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals, called meetings, and pre - installation conferences. PRDJECT MEETINGS 01200 - 1 B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for par - ticipant, preside at meetings, record minutes and distribute copies within 48 hours to Architect, participants, and those affected by decisions made at meetings. C. Location: Contractor;s project field office D. Purpose: To review progress, field observations problems, conflicts, scheduling, coordination and other necessary project related business. E. Required to attend: 1. Architect and his consultants as needed. 2. Contractor's representative. 3. Subcontractors as appropriate. 4. Suppliers as appropriate. 1.5 PRE - INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification Section, schedule a pre- installation meeting prior to beginning the work of the Section. B. Entities directly affecting or affected by work of the Section shall attend. C. Purpose: Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordination with related work. D. Proceeding without a properly scheduled pre - installation meeting may require uncovering work and replacing at Contractor's expense. • END OF SECTION SECTION 01300 SUBMITTMIS 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for submitting: 1. Shop drawings, brochures, product data, and samples required by the Contract Documents. 2. Construction Progress Schedules. 3. Schedule of Values. B. Submittals required shall be approved by. Architect before ordering, fabrication, assembly or erection of each specified work. C. Provide submittals when reuired by governing authorities. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions of the Contract: Responsibilities of Owner, Architect, and Contractor. B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Record Documents. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepare shop drawings drawn to a scale sufficiently large to graphically illustrate items and methods applicable to the Work. B. Title each drawing with project name and number; identify details by reference to sheet and detail, schedule, or room numbers shown on Contract Documents. C. Sheet size: Multiple of 8 -1/2" x 11 ". 1.4 PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: 1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products. 2. Indicate performance characteristics and capacitities. 3. Indicate dimensions and clearances required. 4. Provide wiring or piping diagrams and controls. B. Manufacturer's Standard Schematic Drawings and Diagrams: 1. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information which is not applicable. SUBMITTALS 01300 - 1 r 2. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. ' C. Brochures 1. Where product data describing products of multiple Sections are submitted such as in Divisions 15 and 16, prepare in brochure form. 2. Prepare brochures in durable binders of approximately 8 -1/2" x 11" size. 3. Provide general identification of brochure on front cover. 4. Provide inside cover sheet with complet project identification and table of contents. List applicable section number and titles same as Project Manual. List applicable section numbers and titles same as Project Manual. 1.5 SAMPLES A. Office samples shall be of sufficient size to clearly illustrate functional characteristics with integrally related parts and attachment devices, full 1 . range of color, texture and pattern. B. Field Samples and Mock -ups: 1 1. Erect at project site in a location acceptable to Architect. 2. Fabricate each sample and mock -up complete and finished. 3. Remove mock -ups at conclustion of Work or when aceptable to Architect. 1.6 COLORS A. Whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in a specified product, submit accurate color and pattern charts to Architect for selection unless IL precise color or patern is specified in the Contract Documents. B. After receipt of submittals requiring color selection, Architect will promptly select colors. Upon approval by Owner of colors selected, a color schedule will be prepared and submitted to Contractor. 1.7 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. When shop drawings are required by governing authorities, submit directly to such authorities and obtain approval prior to submitting to Architect. I B. Review shop drawings, product data and samples prior to submission and note non - conforming items. C. Determine and verify field measurements, construction criteria, catalogue numbers, and similar data and conformance with Specifications. D. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the Work and Contract I Documents. E. Notify Architect in writing, at time of submission, of deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents. 01300 - 2 01300 - 2 r f I. Submit 4 copies of product data and manufacturer's instructions. Two copies will be retained by Architect and one by Owner. i L i I. I i i i i F. Make submittals promptly in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Project or in the work of any other contractor. G. Submit 4 copies of opaque reproductions of shop drawings. Two (2) copies will be retained by Architect and one by Owner. Contractor shall be responsible for transferring Architect's comments to additional copies as needed. H. Contractor Option: Submit one reproducible transparency of shop drawings. J. Include date and complete project identification. K. Note critical field dimensions. L. Indicate applicable standards such as ASTM, etc. M. Provide Contractor's stamp, initialized or signed, certifying review and approval of submittal, veritfication of products, critical field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of information within submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract Documents. 1.8 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make corrections or changes required by Architect and resubmit until approved. B. Indicate submittal is a submission with appropriate revision date. 1.9 DEVIATIONS A. Submittals shall not deviate from Contract Documents unless such deviation has been specifically approved in writing prior to time of submission. B. Submittals stamped "Approved" or "Approved as Noted" by Architect does not indicate approval of deviations from the Contract Documents. 1.10 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Submit schedule within 15 working days after award of Contract. B. Submit two copies, 17 "x11 ", of progress schedule in the form of a horizontal bar for each trade or operation. C. Indicate estimated dates progress of the Project will be complete enough to allow Owner to begin work under various separate contracts, if any. Also, indicate estimated dates Owner furnished items and equipment may be properly received. D. If progress of the project is substantially advanced or delayed, promptly submit revised progress schedule with all information required above. SUBMITTALS 01300 - 3 f. f f f. C i' i 1.11 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit schedule typed on 8 -1/2" x 11" white bond paper; Contractor's standard form or computer printout will be considered on request. Unless otherwise stipulated, submit within 10 days after award of Contract but prior to first Application for Payment. B. Format: Use Table of Contents of this Project Manual to maximum extent practicable. Identify each line item with the number and title of Specification section. ▪ Include in each applicable line item amount of cash allowance specified. • Include in each line item a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. END OF SECTION r I t i i 1 i i i i I I SOCTICN 01405 STING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing and inspection procedures performed by an Independent Testing Laboratory (ITL). B. Cost of services performed by the ITL shall be paid by Owner under separate contract. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Inspections and testing required by law, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders or approvals of public authorities: Conditions of the Contract. B. Testing of Mechanical and Electrical: Division 15 & 16. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C31 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. B. ASTB C39 - Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. C. ASTM C143 - Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete. D. ASTM C172 - Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. E. ASTM C173 - Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. F. ASTM C192 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. G. ASTM D423 - Liquid Limits of Soil. H. ASTM D424 - Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils. I. ASTM D698 - Moisture - Density Relations of Soils and Soil- Aggregate Mixtures, using 5.5 -1b. Rammer and 12 -in. Drop (Standard Protector). J. ASTM D1556 - Density of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method. K. ASTM D2487 - Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes. L. ASTM D2922 - •Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in Place by Nuclear. Method (Shallow Depth). M. ASTM D2950 - Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nuclear Method. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01405 - 1 r r r l i i I I i N. ASTM D3740 - Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in the Testing and /or Inspection of Soil and Rocks as used in Engineering Design and Construction. 0. ASTM D4253 - Minimum Index Density of Soils using a Vibratory Table. P. ASTM D4254 - Minimum Index Density of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density. Q. ASTM E329 - Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as used in Construction. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifi- cation", published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. B. Comply with requirements of ANSI /ASTM E329 and ANSI /ASTM D3740. C. Laboratory shall maintain a full -time registered engineer on staff to review services. D. Laboratory authorized to operate in state in which project is located. E. Calibrate testing equipment at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. 1.5 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES A. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. B. Determine exact locations of field testing based on these specifications and visual appearnce. Randomly select representative areas for testing. Contractor shall not determine location of tests. C. Provide qualified personnel at site after due notice; cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. D. Perform specified inspection, sampling and testing of products in accordance with requirements of contract Documents. E. Verify compliance of materials and mixed with requirements of Contract Documents. F. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non - conformance of Work or products. G. Attend preconstruction conferences and progress meetings.' 1.6 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A. Laboratory may not deviate from requirements of Contract Documents. B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 01405 - 2 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor. D. Laboratory has no authority to stop Work. 1.7 SCHEDULING AND COORDINATION A. Testing laboratory shall have access to the Work at all times. Contractor shall provide a construction progress schedule to testing laboratory and coordinate tests required. B. Notify testing laboratory 24 hours in advance to determine time required for labortaratory to perform its tests. C. Test specimens shall be taken by testing laboratory. Do not proceed with portions of the Work requiring tests until specimens have been taken or tests made as specified. 1.8 TEST RESULTS A. Provide 5 copies of each test results within 48 hours after making test. Send copies to Architect or recipients designated by Architect. 1.9 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Areas failing to meet requirements of these specifications shall be retested at Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to Owner. B. Cost of additional tests required by Owner but not required by the Contract Documents will be paid by Owner. 1.10 SCHEDULE OF TESTS A. Section 02200 - Earthwork (Soil Compaction) 1. Soil Analysis: ASTM D2487. 2. Moisture Density Curve: ASTM D698. 3. Density Tests: One test for each 5,000 sq. ft. of each lift but not less than two per lift: ASTM D698 or D4253 and D4254. a. Utility Trenching: One density test for each 100 lineal feet of each lift but not less than two per lift in locations under building and paving: ASTM D698 or D698 or D4253 and D4254. B. Section 02513 - Asphalt Paving: 1. Determine in place density using a nuclear gage in accordance with ASTM D2950. Provide reading for each 1000 square yards of each course. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01405 - 3 r c r r r C. Sections 02510 - Concrete Paving, and 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: 1. One test consisting of four 6 "x12" cylinders shall be taken for each 1/2 day's pour and for each 100 cubic yards for each class of concrete. 2 . Make test specimens in conformance with ASTM C172 and tests as follows: a. Slump: ASTM C143, each test. . Laboratory Cured: ASTM C31, four cylinders each test. c. Air Entrainment: ASTM C173, each test. d. Compressive Strength: ASTN1 C39, all cylinders, each test. END OF SECTION si c rics 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utilities, usage and fuel costs. B. Maintaining clean construction site. C. Field office and sheds. D. Temporary project sign. E. Sanitary facilities. F. Tree and plant protection. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Conditions of B. Section 01010 C. Section 15400 D. Section 15500 E. Section 16050 1,3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain a minimum of 55 deg. F. during installation of finish materials and tehreafter until substantial completion. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate location of project sign, field office, sheds and sanitary facilities with Owner. 1,5 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Materials used for temporary utilities may be new or used, but shall be adequate in capacity for required purpose and in compliance with applicable codes. B. C. Temporary utilities shall include: telephone, electricity, water and gas. Arrange for and make utility connections as directed by local utilty company having jurisdiction. Maintain temporary facilities as long as needed for safe and proper completion of the Work. D. Provide adequate lighting of all areas during construction. 1.6 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION the Contract - Summary of Work - Plumbing - heating, Ventilating & Air Conditioning - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01500 - 1 r r r r f r r i i i A. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; provide sufficient numer of dumpster containers and periodically dispose of off -site. B. Burying, burning, or other disposal of waste materials on site is not permitted. C. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations. 1.7 FIELD OFFICE AND SHEDS A. Size shall be sufficient to accommodate Contractor, Architect, and those participating in project meetings with adequate provisions for Contract Documents, shop drawings, product date., samples, etc.; well - lighted and comfortably heated and cooled. B. Provide storage sheds for tools, materials, and equipment, weather - tight, with heat and ventilation for products requiring controlled conditions and of sufficient size to organize storage with adequate access and lighting for inspection of stored materials. 1.8 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN A. Structure and framing shall be wood or metal, in sound condition, structurally adequate, and suitble for required finishes. B. Sign surfaces shall be exterior grade plywood in standard large sizes to minimize joints. Thickness shall be as required by APA to span framing members, and to provide even, smooth surfaces without waves or buckles but not less than 5/8 ". C. Fasteners, nails and rough hardware shall be hot - dipped galvanized. D. Paint sign with two coats of exterior type alkyd enamel. Graphics shall include project title, name of Owner, Architect, Contractor and such other information as Owner may require. E. Size: 8'x12', or as allowed by local sign ordinance; Architect will provide a project sign drawing. F. Do not allow other signs to be placed on job site other than those required by law. 1.9 SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide sanitary facilities as specifically required by the local health department for workmen. 1.10 TREE AND PANT BARRICADES A. 4 x 4 treated wood posts, 2 x 4 treated wood horizontal members, and bright orange treated paper or flagging. 01500 - 2 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES . Prior to beginning site preparation, construct barricades around trees designated to remain. Locate barricades a minimum of 5 ft. from trunk. • Set posts at approximately 8' -10' o.c. and secure two 2 x 4 horizontal rails, one at 48" height and one at 30" height. Attach flagging to top rails. D. Protect areas within barricades from traffic, storage, or dumping. E. Remove branches and roots which interfere with construction. Conform to Section 02900 Landscaping. 1.11 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. At or immediately prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, remove temporary construction facilities, materials and equipment. B. When need ceases, immediately remove construction facilities; do not allow unused or unneeded construction facilities to remain on site. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES r r r r f. r i 1 i t SECTION 01620 PJ[ICT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.1 SECTION INCUDES A. Packaging, transportation, delivery and receiving of products. B. Product handling, storage and protection. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01020 - Allowances: Products under allowances. B. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities: Protection of installed pro- ducts. C. Various Sections of These Specifications: Special requirements for specific products. 1.3 PACKAGING, TRANSPORTATION A. Require supplier to package products in boxes or crates for protection during shipment, handling and storage. Protect sensitive products against exposure to elements and moisture. B. Protect sensitive equipment and finishes against impact, abrasion and other damage. 1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction schedules. Allow time for inspection prior to installation. B. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at site; work of other contractors; or Owner; limitations on storage space; availability of personnel and handling equipment; and Owner's use of premises. C. Deliver products in undamaged, dry condition, in original unopened containers or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. D. Clearly mark prtial deliveries of component parts of equipment to identify equipment and contents to permit easy accumultion of parts and to facilitate assembly. E. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipment to assure: PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 01620 - 1 r r r r r r i i i i i 1. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents and reviewed submittals. 2. Quantities are correct. 3. Accessories, and installation hardware are correct. 4. Containers and packages are intact and labels legible. 5. Products are protected and undamaged. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products, including those provided by Owner, by methods to prevent soiling and damage. B. Provide additional protection during handling to prevent marring and otherwise damaging products, packaging, and surrounding surfaces. C. Handle products by methods to avoid bending or overstressing. Lift large and heavy components only at designated lift points. 1.6 STORAGE, GENERAL A. Store products immediately on delivery, and protect until incorporated into the Work. Store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. B. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. 1.7 ENCLOSED STORAGE A. Store products subject to damage by the elements in substantial weathertight enclosures. B. Maintain temperatures within ranges required by manufacturer's instruc- tions. C. Provide humidity control for sensitive manufacturer's instructions. D. Store unpacked products on shelves, in bins or in neat piles, for inspection. 1.8 EXTERIOR STORAGE A. Provide substantial platforms, blocking or skids to products above ground to prevent soiling or staining. B. Cover products, subject to discoloration or deterioration the elements, with impervious sheet coverings. Provide lation to avoid condensation. C. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces such as provide plywood or sheet materials to prevent mixing with products, as required by support accessible fabricated from exposure to adequate venti- paved areas, or foreign matter. 01620 - 2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1. Provide surface drainage to prevent flow or ponding of rain water. 2. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids. 1.9 EQUIPMENT STORAGE A. Store small equipment in manufacturer's cartons and sensitive equipment in enclosed areas. B. Store large equipment, designed for exterior exposure, outside in manufacturer's crates, or skids, or as specifically recommended by manufacturer. C. Immediately remove installation instructions and maintenance data,assimi- late for closeout submittals. D. Keep areas around equipment clean, free of debris and other miscellaneous stored items. 1.10 MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE A. Periodically inspect stored products on a scheduled basis. B. Verify that storage facilities comply with manufacturer's product storage requirements. C. .Verify that manufacturer required environmental conditions are maintained continually. D. Verify that surfaces of products exposed to the elements are not adversely affected; that any weathering of finishes is acceptable under requiements of the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION PRODUCT DELIVERY, SZORAGE,AND HANDLING . SECTION 01630 PRODUCT OPTI(RS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedure for product options, and substitutions after award of Contract. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Procedures for recording product substitutions on record documents. 1.3 CONTRACTORS OPTIONS A. For products specified only by reference standard, select product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers select any one of products and manufacturers named which complies with specifications. C. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers named which complies with specifications. D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer generally thereis no option and no substitution will be allowed except where allowed in Contract Documents or for circumstances beyond the Contractor's control. E. When Contractor selects products other than the specifically named manufacturer, Contractor agrees to coordinate installatin making such modifications as may be required for the specific installation to be complete in all respects. 1.4 LIMITATIONS ON SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Instructions to Bidders for substitution procedures during bidding period. B. Requests for substitution of products will be considered only within 30 days after date of Owner- Contractor Agreement. Subsequent requests will be considered only in case of product unavailability or other conditions beyond Contractor's Control (failure to place orders in a timely manner is not acceptable). C. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a separate formal request, when requested directly by subcontractor, or supplier or when acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. D. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of Architect and Owner. PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 01630.- 1 r r r I r I I t i 0 i r 1.5 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS A. Submit separate request for each substitution. Support each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents. B. Attach product data for specified item and proposed substitution. C. Provide itemised comparison of specified item and proposed substitituion, listing variations, and reference to specifications section and article numbers. D. Provide cost data comparing proposed substutition with specified products, an amount of net change to Contract sum. 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION A. In making formal request for substitution, Contractor represents that he has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. B. Contractor will provide same warranties or bonds for substitutions as for product specified. C. Contractor will coordinate installation of accepted substitution intot he Project, including code compliance and will make such changes as may be required for the Project to be complete in all respects. D. Contractor waives claims for additional costs caused by substitution which may subsequently become apparent. E. Contractor certifies that data is complete and incudes related costs under this Contract. but not costs under separate contracts or Architect's costs for redesign or revision of Contract Documents. F. Contractor certifies that use of proposed substitution wil not affect Contract Time unless specifically indicated. 1.7 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit two copies of each substitution request on form 01631 in Project Manual with complete data. B. Architect and Owner will review Contractor's requests with reasonable promptness. C. Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitution. D. Provide submittals on accepted substituted products in accordance with Section 01300. END OF SECTION identical to Form for substitutions 01630 - 2 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS SECTION 01631 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST POR4 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM PROJECT: Homewood Suites PROJECT NO. OWNER: (See Section 00100 Par. 4.3 Submission of Bids) ARCHITECT: Dimitri Demopulos Architects, Inc. CONTRACTOR: 7277 Regency Sq. Blvd., Suite 100 Houston, TX 77036 (713) 783 -0055 FAX (713) 783 -0018 CONTRACTOR'S REQUEST WITH SUPPORTING DATA: 1. Section of the specifications to which this request applies: Product data for specified item and proposed substitution is attached (description of product, reference standards, performance and test data). Sample is attached Sample will be sent if requested by Architect 2. Itemized comparison of propsosed substitution with product specified. ORIGINAL PRODUCT SUBSTITITION Name, brand Catalogue No. Manufacturer Significant Variations: 3. Proposed change in Contract Sum: Credit to Owner: $ Additional Cost to Owner: $ 4. Effect of the proposed substitution on the Work: Contract Time: Other Contracts, if any: SUBSTITITION REQUEST FORM 01631;- 1 CONTRACTORS STATEMENT OF CONFORMANCE OF PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION TO CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS I /we have investigated the proposed substitution. I /we: 1. Believe that it is equal or superior'in all respects to originally specificed product, except as stated as in #2 of Substitution Request Form. 2. Will provide same warranty as requred in Contract Documents. 3. Have included all cost data and cost implications of proposed substitution; including, if required, costs to other contractors, and redesign and special inspection costs caused by use of this product. 4. Will coordinate incorporation of proposed substitution in the Work. 5. Will modify other parts of the Work as may be needed, to make all parts of the Work complete and functioning. 6. Have varified that use of this substitition conforms to all applicable codes. 7. Waive future claims for added cost to Owner caused by proposed substitution. ARCHITECT'S REVIEW AND ACTION Accepted. Not Accepted. Provide more information in the following categories and resubmit Sign Contractor's Statement of Conformance and resubmit. Proposed substitition is accepted, with following conditions: The following changes will be made by Change Order: (Add to) (Deduct from) Contract Sum: $ (Add to) (Deduct from) Contract Time: Days Architect: (Signature) Date Owner: (Signature) Date 01631 - 2 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST.FORMS SECTION 01700 OONRRACT CLOSEOUT 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures and requirements for closing out the Work. B. Warranty and bond requirements. C. Preparation of operating and maintenance manuals. D. Final cleaning. E. Preparation of record documents. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions of the Contract: Submittals required prior to final payment. B. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities: Clening during construction. C. Various Sections of Speifications: Closeout Submittals Required of Trades. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Documents B. Certificate of Occupancy C. Warranties and Bonds: This section and applicable sections of these specifications. D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: As required by this section and applicable sections of these specifications. E. Keys and Keying Schedule: As specified in Section 08700. F. Extra Material: As required by applicable sections of these specifi- cations. G. Contractors Affidavit: AIA Doc. G706. H. Consent of Surety to Final Payment: ALA Doc. G707. I. Waivers of Lien from Subcontractors: Form as provided in this Project Manual or as approved by Owner. J. Approved drawings of various regulating agencies• when required of such agencies; copies of Contract Drawings will be furnished by Owner. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 1 i r r r i i 1 L i i i i 1.4 FINAL CLEANING A. Remove grease, mastic, adhesive, dirt, marks, stains, finger prints, labels, and other foreign materials from sight - exposed interior and exterior surfaces. B. Rake yard areas free of trash. C. Broom clean walks and pavements. D. Polish finish hardware. E. Polish glossy metal surfaces to a clear shine. F. Wash glass and mirrors shining clean. G. Wash ceramic surfaces with water and mild detergent, shining clean. H. Heating /Cooling System: 1. Thoroughly clean permanent type filters. 2. Replace throw -away type filters. 3. Clean ducts, blowers, coils, fins, grilles, and registers. I. Remove debris from inside mechanical and electrical boxes, panels and equipment. J. Clean all prefinished surfaces. K. Remove all debris from roof during construction. Do not allow screws and other sharp objects to become embedded in roofing. 1.5 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain at job site one record copy of: 1. Contract Drawings, Mylar Reproducibles 2. Project Manual 3. Addenda 4. Approved Shop Drawings 5. Change Orders 6. Field Test Records B. Store documents in temporary field office, apart from documents used for construction. Provide separte files and /or compartment for storage of documents. C. File documents in numerical sequence and in order as related to Table. of Contents of Project Manual. D. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible documents for construction purposes. E. Make documents available at all times for Owner. 01700 -- 2 condition. Do not use record inspection by Architect and CONTRACT CLOSEOUT F. Marking Devices: Use red felt marking pen for marking prints and product data. Use P2 weight plastic lead for marking reproducible mylars. G. Label each document "PRODUCT RECORD" in 1" high printed letters. H. Keep record documents current. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded. I. Contract Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction: 1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to first floor level. 2. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced to visible and accessible parts of structure. 4. Field changes of dimensions and details. 5. Changes made by Change Order. 6. Details not on origional Contract Documents. J. Specifications and Addenda: Legibly mark -up each section to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made by Change Order. 3. Other changes or deviations not originally specified. K. Shop Drawings: Maintain as record documents and legibly annotate the following drawings to record changes made after review: 1. Section 01690 - Wood Trusses 2. Section 13160 - Pools 3. Section 14240 - Hydraulic Passenger Elevator 4. Section 15300 - Fire Protection 5. Section 15400 - Plumbing 6. Section 11550 -•HVAC 7. Section 15880 - Air Distribution 8. Section 15950 — Controls 9. Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials & Methods CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 3 10. Section 16400 - Service & Distribution 11. Section 16721 - Fire Alarm System L. Submittal of Record Documents: 1. At completion of project, deliver record documents to Owner. 2. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter, with copy to Architect, indicating: a. Date b. Project Title c. Contractor's Name and Address d. Title and Number of Each Record Document 3. Submit one mylar reproducible copy of Contract Drawings and one blueline copy. Provide one copy of other record documents. 1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF PROJECT A. When Contractor considers that the Project is substantially complete as defined in Conditions of the Contract, he shall make a list (punch list) of items to be completed or corrected and notify Architect in writing. Upon establishing a mutually acceptable time, Architect will make a list (punch list) of items to be completed. B. Failure to include itesms on the punch list does not alter the responsibility of Contractor to complete all work in accordance with Contract Documents. C. Prior to Architect's issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion, Contractor shall provide a certificate of Use and Occupancy and evidence of approval from applicable governing authorities. 1.7 FINAL INSPECTION OF PROJECT A. Upon receipt of written notice that the Project is ready for final inspection, and upon receipt of a final application for payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection to determine if the Project is in compliance with the intent of the Contract Documents. B. Providd Architect with written status report of each punch list item prior to final inspection. 1.8 FINAL PAYMENT A: Final payment will be made to Contractor by Owner within thirty (30) days after: 1. Completion of the Project. 2. Approval by Owner and Architect of all work performed under the Contract. 01700 - 4 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 3. Receipt of Project record documents. 4. Acceptance of the project by Owner. 5. Preparation by Contractor and approval of Owner of final statement of cost of the completed Project. Final statement shall indicate: a. Original Contract Sum b. Previous Change Orders c. Deductions for Liquidated Damages d. Other applicable adjustments to Contract Sum e. Total Contract Sum as adjusted.. f. Previous Payments g. Final payment remaining due. 6. Upon completion by Contractor of all work covered by Contract Documents, and prior to final payment to Contractor for the work performed, Contractor shall deliver to Owner releases of allliens and of rights to claim any liens, in a form satisfactory to Owner, from all material suppliers and subconstractors furnishing labor and materials for the project and an affidavit, indicating that all labor and material used on or for execution of the project has been paid. 1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. On or about the date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site instruction to Owner or his representative in the proper use and operation of: 1. Section 13160 - Pools 2. Section 14240 - Hydraulic Passenger Elevators 3. Section 15300 - Fire Protection System 4. Section 15400 - Plumbing Systems 5. Section 15500 - HVAC 6. Section 15950 - Controls 7. Section 16721 - Fire Alarm System 1.10 OPERATION AND MZINTENANCE DATA A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. B. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8 -1/2" x 11" three -ring binders with hardback, cleanable, plastic covers; 2" maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate date into related consistent groupings. D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND t. INTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; list title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 5 � E. Arrange content by systems, under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. F. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. G. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 -1b. paper. H. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. I. Contents, Each Volume: 1 1. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume. 2. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of ' supplies and replacement parts. 3. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation; delete inapplicable information. ' 4. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of com- ponent parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. 5. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating ' manufacturer's instructions. 6. Warranties and Bonds: Bind in copy of each. 1.11 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Provide duplicate notarized copies of warranties and bonds required by Contract Documents. Assemble all executed documents by subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. Provide table of contents and assemble in binder with durable plastic cover appropriately titled. B. Warranties are in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. C. Duration of warranties required by individual sections shall indicate minimum and shall not relieve Contractor of obligations reuired under applicable statutes or other conditions of the contract. 1. Warranty period begins on date of substantial completion. 1 01700 - 6 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT .. Warranties are non- prorated unless stated otherwise , in these:. specifications. D. Submit warranties and bonds to Architect for verification and submittal to Owner with Contractor's final Application for Payment. Resubmit warranties or bonds that do not comply with Contract Documents. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Demolish designated structures. B. Remove materials from site. C. Remove foundations. D. Remove underground piping. E. Disconnect, cap, and identify utilities. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project record documents. C. Section 02200 - Earthwork: Clearing and Grubbing and Fill and Compaction. �» 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit demolition and removal procedures and schedule under provisions of Section 01 300. B. Submit record documents under provisions of Section 01700. 1.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. B. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private i _ thoroughfares. Maintain egress and access at all times. C. Do not close or obstruct roadways without permits. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Disconnect, remove, and cap all utlity lines within demolition areas. B. Mark location of disconnected utilities. Identify utilities and indicate capping locations on Project Record Documents. �'. BUILDING DEMOLITION 02060 - 1 {t SBCTION 02060 BUILDING IIE MOLITICN 3.2 EXECUTION Demolish indicated structurs and appurtenances in an orderly and careful manner. B. Except where noted otherwise, immediately remove demolished material from site. C. Relics, antiques, and similar objects remain the property of the Owner. Notify Architect/Engineer prior to removal and obtain acceptance regarding method of removal. D. Remove and promptly disposeof contaminated, vermin infested, or dangerous materials encountered. E. Do not burn or bury materials, on site. F. Remove foundation walls and footings completely. G. Remove concrete slabs on grade. H. Keep work sprinkled to mainimize dust. Provide hoses and watermain or hydrant connections for this purpose. I. Backfill areas excavted as a result of demolition. Use materials specified in Section 02200. J. Rough grade and compact areas affected by demolition to maintain site grades and contours. K. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. Leave site in clean condition. END OF SECTION SECTIQJ 01200 SITE PREPARATIQOI PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK UNDER THIS SECTION A. Work under this section shall be as follows: 1. Clearing and grubbing 2. Disposition of spoil material 3. Protection of trees and shrubs to remain 4. Removal of trees and shrubs indicated to be removed. B. Quality shall mean the meticulous attention to the detail of workmanship necesasry for site preparation as specified herin. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SPOIL A. Burnable spoil shall not be burned on the property. B. All spoil not suitable for fill shall be disposed of off the property. 3.02 UNCERTAIN REMOVAL A. Should the removal of certain items be in doubt, the work in that area shall cease and the Engineer shall be notified in writing for his rendering of a decision. Any extra work required will be compensated for as outlined in the general conditions and supplements thereto. Also remove trees and shrubs indicated to be removed. B. No trees or ornamental shrub of any size and description shall be cut, removed, or damaged until designated by the Engineer. Prior to the Engineer's review, the Contractor shall lay out all of the major construction work that will affect the trees and ornamental shrubs. SITE PREPARTION 02100 - 1 3.04 PROTECTION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS TO REMAIN A. Contractors are herby reminded and cautioned that care shall be exercised to protect trees and shrubs which are to remain during the progress of the Project. Suitable barriers shall be provided around all trees and shrubs that are to remain and which are in the construction area and material handling area. All damage to such trees and shrubs shall be repaired; broken limbs properly and neatly pruned and painted with pruning paint. Any trees and shrubs which are excessively damaged shall be replaced in like kind, size, and species by the Contractor at no additional cost. All repair work shall be by a recognized and approved nursery. B. All grading around remaining trees and shrubs shall be such that the root system shall not be disturbed. Earth shall not be temporarily piled around trees and shrubs, nor shall earth be graded to the trees and shrubs above the natural root depth for that particular species. C. Established trees and shrubs which are in the way of new and /or renovation construction and which are in the naterial handling areas shall be removed and stored for future replanting. The services of a recognized an approved nursery shall be employed to remove the trees and shrubs and prepare them for storage. Remove trees and shrubs shall be properly watered and cared for in accordance with the instructions from the nursery. After the construction work is completed, the stored trees and shrubs shall be replanted and those trees and shrubs not replanted shall be disposed of as directed by the Owner. 3.05 UTILITIES A. All utilities which are encountered shall not be disturbed, except as required by the Contract Documents or until after review by the Engineer. 3.06 FINAL CLEANUP A. All trenches, ditches, and holes resulting from the work of this Section shall be filled with clean earth and compacted to the level of the sorrounding elevations. Upon completion, the site shall be left clean with all unusable material removed. END OF SECTION 02100 = 2 SITE PREPARATION c C i i i i i i SECTION 02200 EARTHWARK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Site Preparation B. Excavation, Filling, and Compaction C. Utility Trenching D. Rough and Finish Site Grading E. Erosion and Sediment Control F. Protection of Trees G. Barricades, Bracing and Shoring 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Bid Form: Unit Price Schedule for measurement and payment for additional work. B. Section 01050 - Field Engineering: Establishing and maintaining lines and levels for the Work. C. Section 01405 - Testing Laboratory: Sampling and testing soil compaction. D. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities: Barricades and tree protection. E. Section 15400 - Plumbing: Buried pipes. F. Section 15500 - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning: Buried pipes. G. Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials & Methods: Buried conduit and conductors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. On -Site Fill Material: Soil or soil -rock mixture free from organic matter and other deleterious substance; it shall contain no rocks or lumps over 3" in diameter. Plasticity index and liquid limit shall not be less than 25. B. Fill Material: Comply with requirements of paragraph "A" above. C. Plasticity Index: Less than 25. EARTHWORK 02200 - 1 f D. Cohesionless Material (Fill Sand): Free from organic substance and other deleterious matter, subject to approval of Architect, and in particle size grading within the following limits: SIEVE SIZE PERCENT PASSING I� #4 100% #200 3% �N. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 . 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to beginning earthwork, become thoroughly familiar with site conditions and work specified in this Section, B. Do not allow work performed or installed in this Section to conceal work specified in other Sections prior to required inspections, tests and approvals. C. Where work is enclosed or covered prior to acceptance uncover for inspection at no additional cost to Owner. 3.2 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Locate existing underground utilities in areas of excavation work. Where utilities are indicated to remain in place, provide adequate means of 1 . support and protection during earthwork operations. B. When uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities are encountered during excavation, consult Owner immediately for directions. I._ Cooperate with Owner and utility company in keepng respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities comparable to at least existing condition. C. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others during occupied hours, except when permitted by Owner. Provide temporary utilities when required. D. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility company for shutoff or services where lines are active. 3.3 CLEARING & GRUBBING 1 _ A. Remove trees, stumps, branches and roots within 10 ft, of building and grading lines. Remove roots to a minimum depth of 24" or more where required to accommodate installation by other trades B. Remove existing building foundations septic fields; concrete and asphalt paving. Existing gravel paving may be worked into new paving sub -base. C. Remove surface items within limits of construction unless shown to remain. 1 . 02200 - 2 EARTHWORK D. Remove debris to approved off -site disposal area. E. Keep work sprinkled to prevent dust. F. Burning or burying of materials on site is not permitted. 3.4 EXCAVATIONS A. Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated plus sufficient space to permit erection of forms and shoring; installation of drain tile, waterproofing and masonry, and inspection of foundations. Excavation for foundations and trenches may be cut to accurate sizes and side forms omitted if concrete can be placed without cave -ins. If earth is unstable for forming purposes, the Contractor shall construct side forms for foundations which shall be braced and shored to maintain them secure, and the forms shall be removed before backfilling. The bottom of excavations shall be protected fromfrost and kept free from water at all times. B. Where removal of surface and sub - surface obstructions have created depressions, open depressions to equipment working width and remove debris and unsuitable material. Backfill and compact as specified. C. Do not place structural foundations or slabs on loose material. Replace over - excavated areas as follows: 1. 2,000 psi concrete, minimum, under footings and foundations. 2. Compact fill as specified for areas under slabs and other areas. D. Provide berms or channels to prevent flooding of subgrade; promptly remove water collecting in depressions and excavations. E. Remove soil that has been softened by flooding or placement during unfavorable weather and recompact as specified. F. Upon completion of the stripping operations, the exposed subgrade in areas to receive fill except for that in the lower area (vicinity of borings HA -1 and HA -2) shall be proofrolled with a loaded dump truck or similar pneumatic tired vehicle (minimum loaded weight of 20 tons) under the observation of a geotechnical engineer or a senior soils technician. After excavation of the site has been completed, the exposed subgrade in cut areas shall also be proof rolled. The proofrolling procedures shall consist of four complete passes of the exposed areas, with two of the passes being in a direction perpendicular to the preceding ones. Any areas which deflect, rut or pump excessively during proofrolling or fail to "tighten up" after successive passes shall be undercut to suitable soils and replaced with compacted fill. EARTHWORK 02200 - 3 1. Some undercutting of the soft surface soils in the lower portions of the site as well as the areas where plastic materials are present within the final 3' of subgrade shall be required. The extent of the undercut required should be determined in the field by an experienced engineer while monitoring construction activity. 2. After the proof rolling operation has been completed and approved, final site grading shall proceed immediately. If construction progresses during wet weather, the proof rolling operation shall be repeated with at least one pass in each direction immediately prior to placing concrete in slab -on -grade areas and prior to placing base course in the parking areas. If unstable conditions are exposed during this operation, then undercutting shall be performed. G. Groundwater levels were measured at depths varying between 0.0 and 2.8 feet in Borings B -1, HA -1, and Ha-2 performed in the lower portion of the site, west of the existing pond. Soft near surface conditions were also encountered in that area. Therefore, construction difficulties shall be anticipated in that area during the site grading. The water level in the lake shall be lowered 2' -3' below existing level as soon as possible. Once water level in the lake is lowered, temporary ditches shall be cut in the shaded area shown on the Boring Location Plan to drain the soft near surface soils. Once the lower area (west of the pond) is stripped of all topsoil, the area shall be evaluated and observed for any spring action. If an active spring is present a permanent underdrain system, such as french drains, may be warranted. 3.5 FILL AND COMPACTION A. For fill placed under footings, floor slabs -on- grade, driveways and parking areas and fill placed in excavated areas outside building lines but within 45 degrees downward angle, complete as follows: 1. Strip organic matter from surfaces or verify that such work has been properly completed. 2. Disk undisturbed natural soil to a depth of 12" and recompact as specified in this Section. 3. Place fill material in layers not exceeding 8" in uncompacted thickness. Water or aerate fill materials as necessary and thoroughly mix to obtain optimum moisture content. 4. Compact cohesive backfill material to not less than 95% Standard Proctor in accordance with ASTM D698. 5. Densify cohesionless (fill sand) backfill material to a minimum relative density of 70% in accordance with ASTM D4253 and D4254. 6. For fill required in areas not accessible to compaction equipment, place in layers not exceeding 4" in uncompacted thickness and compact with mechanical hand operated tampers to densities specified. 02200 - 4 EARTHWORK r B. All fill used for site grading operations shall consist of a clean (free of organics and debris), low plastic soil (Plasticity Index less than 25). The proposed fill shall have a maximum dry density of at least 90 pounds per cubic foot as determined by a Standard Proctor compaction test, ASTM D 698 -78. All fill shall be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 8" in thickness and compacted to a minimum of 95% of its Standard Proctor maximum dry density. In floor slab and pavement areas, the upper foot of fill shall be compacted to at least 100% of Standard Proctor to provide additional support for these systems. Field density tests, including one - point Proctor verification tests, shall be performed on the fill as it is being placed at a frequency determined by an experienced geotechnical engineer to verify the compaction criteria. �± 1. All high plasticity soils shall be undercut from the subgrade in proposed building areas and where they appear within 4' of proposed subgrade in parking areas. Plastic clays and existing fill soils can be used in landscaped areas or shall be removed off site. The plastic silty clay materials encountered in the upper 2' -3' will be removed during site grading from proposed building areas. 2. Immediately prior to constructing the floor slabs, the areas shall be proofrolled to detect any softened, loosened or disturbed areas that may have been exposed to wet weather or construction traffic. Any areas that are found to be disturbed or indicate any type of pumping action during the proof rolling shall be undercut and replaced with adequately compacted structural fill. This proofrolling shall be observed by a geotechnical engineer or a soils technician under his direction. 3.6 UTILITY TRENCHING A. Excavate trenches to minimum required width and depth to accommodate the 1 specific installation. B. Adequately brace, shore and barricade open trenches to protect adjacent work and assure safety of personnel and public. C. Place fill material in layers not exceeding 4" in uncompacted thickness. Moisten or aerate fill materials as necessary and thoroughly mix to obtain optimum moisture content. D. Compact cohesive backfill material not less than 95% Standard Proctor in accordance with ASTM D698. E. Density cohesionless (fill sand) backfill material to minimum relative density of 70% in accordance with ASTM D4253 and D4254. I _ 3.7 SITE GRADING A. Provide rough and finish grading to achieve elevations shown on Drawings. I . . EARTHWORK :02200 - 5 c B. Grade evenly and uniformly between points for which finish grades are shown or between such points and existing established grades. C. Regrade as necessry to provide true and even grades; redistribute top soil and leave suitable for landscaping. D. Slope grades evenly to provide drainage away from buildngs in all directions at approximately 1/4" per foot unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 1 .. 3 8 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL A. Burn -off ground cover will not be permitted. B. Earthwork brought to finish grade shall g sh gra a shal immediately be finished as shown and specified. Protect slopes immediately upon completion of rough grading. Plan and execute earthwork in such manner as to minimize duration of exposure of unprotected soils. C Temporary Protection of Erodible Soils: Use methods as may be necessary to effectively prevent erosion and control sedmimentation including but not limited to the following: 1. Mechanical Retardation and Control of Runoff: Mechanically retard and control rate of runoff from construction site. This includes construction of diversion ditches and berms to retard and divert runoff to protected drainage courses. 2. Sediment Basins: Trap sediment in temporary or permanent sediment basins. Size basins to accommodate runoff of local 10 year storm; pump dry and remove accumulated sediment after each storm. Overflow shall be by paved weir or by vertical overflow pipe draining from surface. Collected sediment for example shall: (1) be returned to source of erosion, (2) be used for fill on construction site or (3) be used for fill at other sites. Provide effluent quality monitoring programs as required by state and local environmental agencies. 3. Borrow: Borrow will not be permitted in areas where suitable environmental controls are not possible - 4. Vegetation and Mulch: Provide temporary protection on slopes as soon as rough grading is completed or sufficient soil is exposed to require protection to prevent erosion. Such protection shall be by accel- erated growth of permanent vegetation temporary vegetation mulching or neeting. For slopes too steep for stablilization by other means, stabilize by hydroseeding, mulching anchored in place, covering by anchored netting, sodding, or such combination of these and other methods as may be necessary for effective erosion control. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Test compacted fill as specified in Section 01405. 02200 - 6 EARTHWORK • +iu ..Provide for visual inspection of bearing surfaces and cavities formed by removed rock in accordance with Section 01405. C. Test soil compaction of trenching and backfill under footings slabs-on- grade, and paving as specified in Section 01405. . The subgrade soils shall be observed by a geotechnical engineer or a soils technician under his direction prior to foundation installation. This is to assess their suitability for foundation support and confirm their consistency with the conditions stated in the soils report. 3 10 CLEANING A. Upon completion of work of this Section, immediately remove debris and excess soil materials from Site. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Protect materials from damage before during and after installation and protect existing buildings, landscaping and objects not designated to be removed. B. When damage occurs, immediately make repairs and replacements necessary to restore materials to conditions existing before damage occurred at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION EARTHWORK SECTION 02201 BUILDING EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Perform all work required to complete the Earth excavating, filling, backfilling, compaction and grading under the building, indicated by the Contract Documents and other related items necessary for the proper excavation and completion of the Project, 1402 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM D 698: Test methods for Moisture - Density Relations of Soils and Soil- Aggregate Mixtures, using 5.5 lb. (2.49 kg) Rammer and 12 in. (304.8 mm) Drop. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Select Fill: 1. Material: Clean, free of organics and debris 2. Plasticity Index: Less than 25 3. Density: Maximum dry density of atleast 90 lbs. per cu. ft. (ASTM D 698 standard proctor compaction test), PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Utilities 1. Remove abandoned, inactive utilities to a point not less than 3 feet outside building lines. 2. Suitably plug or cap remaining ends. 3. Report encounter of active utilities not indicated by the Contract Documents to the Owner. BUILDING EARTHWORK 02201 4. Disposition shall be as directed, with adjustment in Contract amount. 5. Extra payment will not be authorized for work that could have been foreseen by a careful examination of site. 6. Notify respective utilities companies of any damage caused to active utilities. 7. Protect active utlities, pending instruction for disposition. B. Protection of Adjacent Areas or Surfaces: 1. Protect all reference dislocation. 2. Replace or repair, dislocated. points, bench marks and monuments from damage or immediately, any points damaged, destroyed or 3. Sprinkle and dampen all dusty material, from the beginning of work to its completion. 4. Protect and maintain all conduits, drains inlets, sewers, pipes and wires that are to remain on the property. 5. Remove temporary wood from concrete, masonry or fill. 6. Cover holes and trenches when work is not in progress. 7. Fence or barricade changes of plane more than 45 degrees with horizontal and more than 3 feet in height. 8. Keep trenches and excavated areas free from water by pumping or draining. 9. Grade to drain surface water to designated points. 10. Pump or drain water to designated points. 11. Distribute discharge to prevent excessive erosion. 3,02 EARTH EXCAVATING A. Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated plus sufficient space to permit erection of forms and shoring; installation drain tile_ waterproofing, and masonry, and inspection of foundations. Excavation for foundations and trenches may be cut to accurate sizes and side forms omitted if concrete can be placed without cave -ins. If earth is unstable for forming for foundations which shall be braced and shored to maintain them secure, and the forms shall be removed before backfilling, the bottom of excavations shall be protected from frost and kept free from water at all times. 02201 - 2 BUILDING EARTHWORK B. Should excavation be taken below the elevations indicated, these low areas shall be filled with 2,000 psi minimum concrete under fottings; under slabs may be filled with well tamped crushed stone or with compacted earth. C. The area within existing building walls shall be excavated to a depth as determined by a geotechnical or structural engineer. D. Remove obstructions within building lines to a depth of 3 feet below the depth of excavation indicated on the Drawings. 3.03 BUILDING FOOTPRINT PREPARATION AND FILLING A. Preparation: 1. Strip construction area of all ground cover top soil, debris, organic materials, existing fill, and other soft or unsuitable material to a minimum of 10 feet outside building ines. 2. Remove any existing foundations or subgrade structurs encountered. 3. Backfill any resulting excavations with specified fill material. 4. Proof rolling: a. Proof roll the exposed subgrade, in areas to receive fill, with a loaded dump truck or similar pneumatic -tired vehicle with a minimum loaded weight of 20 tons, upon completion of the stripping. b. Similarly proof roll the exposed subgrades in cut areas, after excavation. c. Perform proof rolling operations under the observation of the Geotechnical Engineer or his authorized representative. d. Perform the proof rolling in four (4) complete passes of the exposed areas, with two (2) of the passes being in a direction perpendicular to the preceding ones. e. Undercut to suitable soils, and backfill with compacted fill any areas which deflect, rut, or pump during the proofrolling,a nd which fail to be remedied with successive passes. 3.04 GENERAL FILLING A. Before filling, clear area of vegetation, large rocks, fibrous matter and loose material. B. Obtain approval for area to be filled, before filling is started. C. Scarify surface of ground prior to placing fill. BUILDING EARTHWORK 02201 - 3 D. Do not place fill on subgrade which is muddy, frozen or which contains frost. E. Fill in even layers, not more than 8" in depth, and compact before next layer is placed. F. Moisten fill, if necessary, or allow to dry to correct moisture content before compaction. G. Maintain moisture content of loosened material such that first layer of fill will readily bond to surface. H. Compact to a minimum of 100 percent of the maximum density as defined by ASTM D 698 under all buildings. I. Scarify, aerate or moisten all soft areas that develop under construction operations as required. and compact to the full depth required to obtain the specified density for each layer. J. Compact those portions of fill which are too near adjacent walls, pavements or other fixed objects to permit the use of heavy rolling equipment by tamping in 3" layers with mechanical tampers. 3.05 BACKFIRING A. Preparation: 1. Do not start backfilling until surfaces to be covered have been approved. 2. Backfill against foundation walls only after the slab has been poured to support the top of the wall and approval of the Engineer has been obtained. 3. Remove all debris subject to termite attack. rot or corrosion and all other deleterious materials from areas to be backfilled. 4. Do not place leave or permit stones larger than 4" thick maximum dimension in the upper 6" fill. B. Placement: 1. Do not damage waterproofing when placing backfill. 2. Place backfill material in successive horizontal layers for the full width of the cross section. 3. Deposit backfill in layers no more than 8" thick, free from roots, plaster, bats and unsuitable material. 4. Thoroughly compact each layer by rolling or pneumatic tamping after a light sprinkling with water. 02201 - 4 BUILDING EARTHWORK 5. Compact to 100 percent of standard proctor density. 6. Do not flood excavated areas with water before or during backfilling. 7. Bring finished subgrade to elevations indicated and sloped to drain water away from the building walls. 8. Fill any areas where settlement occurs to required elevations. 3.06 GRADING A. Slope rough graded surfaces to drain surface water away from buildings;. minimum slope 1/4 inch in 12 inches. B. Grade uniformly with rounded surfaces at tops and bottoms of abrupt changes of plane. C. Hand -grade steep slopes and areas that are inaccessible for machine work. D. Protect graded areas from undue erosion, or repair and regrade. E. Refill and compact wher noticeable settlement occurs. F. Grade areas to elevations and slopes indicated without depressions causing pocketing of surface water or humps producing localized runoff and gullying. G. Allow for thickness of paving, sidewalks. sodding etc., as indicated. 3.07 CRANING A. OMITTED B. Keep excavated areas free from debris and stored materials that could damage surfaces or interfere with progress of Work. C. Remove excess materials from the Site promptly to prevent large accumulation. Store reusable material neatly in designated locatins. D. Upon the completion of the Work of this Section, dispose of, away from the Site all debris, trash containers, residue, remnants and scraps which result from the Work of this Section. END OF SECTION BUILDING EARTHWORK 02201 5 SECTION 02210 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION AND GRADING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This portion of the project includes the grading and earthwork required as shown on the plans and all other associated miscellaneous items of construction, as shown on the plans. The work covered by these Specifications consists of the furnishingof all materials labor, equipment and incidental items necessary to complete this portion of the work as detailed on the plans and as called for in these Specifications. B. All specifications and nationally recognized and accepted standards and specifications shal be the latest edition unless specified otherwise and shall be used as they are applicable for quality control sampling and testing as incorporated in this Section only. C. The Contractor shall review the use, details and method of installation of products as indicated and shall disclose to the Engineer any and all deviations from his recommended use and method of installation and shall also disclose to the Engineer his recommendations for the use and method of installation of his product to achieve the intended purpose and stipulated for submission of shop drawings. 1.02 WORK UNDER THIS SECTION A. Work under this Section shall be fill and excavation for building area and general site area to the lines and grades indicated and shall include but not be limited to, the following: 1. Disposal of unsuitable fill material 2. Stripping and stockpiling of topsoil. 3. Site rough grading filling, and compaction. 4. Excavation for new foundations trenches and walls. 5. Backfilling and compaction of foundations. trenches and walls. 6. Spreading of topsoil. 7. Fine and finish grading outside building as required to bring final finish grades to those indicated. 8. Removal of earth within the building walls. UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION & GRADINGS 02210 - 1 9. Backfilling and compaction of removed foundations basements and utilities as required. 10. Additional fill as specified herein to bring the existing grades to new grades shown. 11. Additional fill as specified herein to fill the area within the building walls. 12. Additional fill as specified herein to fill the excavation of foundations, basements and utilities as required. 13. Grading and compaction for sewage stabilization pond. 14. Notify and schedule the testing laboratory for the times and dates the testing laboratory will be required. 15. Grading for roadway subgrade preparation. 16. Removal of caisson excavation. 1 03 WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Work under other sections shall include but not be limited to, the following: 1. Excavating, backfilling and compaction of earth for new utilities. 2. All demolition. 3. Removal of existing paving for the installation of new utilities. 4. Clearing and grubbing. 5. Disposition of spoil material. 6. Drainage for springs. 7. Temporary erosion control. 8. Grassing of disturbed areas. 9. Termite control. 10. Site rough grading due to demolition work. 1 04 PRODUCT LITERATURE A. The Contractor shall furnish product literature. for engineer's review, on all products he proposes to use under this Section in sufficient detail to substantiate its conformance to the specification. 1.05 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS 02210 2 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION & GRADING A. All standards and specifications mentioned in this Section shall be considered as a part of the specification to the extent referenced, B. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR RESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) PUBICATIONS: Shall be as follows: 1. C 33 -36 Concrete Aggregates 2. C 136 -84a Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates 3. D 522 -63 Particle Size Analysis of soils 4. D 698 -78 Moisture - Density Relations of Soils and Soil- Aggregate Mixtures using 5.5 -1b. (2.49 kg) Rammer and 12 -in. (305 mm) Drop 5. D 1140 -82 Amount of Material in /soils Finer (R 1971) than the No. 200 (75 micrometer) Sieve 6. D 1556 -82 Density of Soil in Place by the (R 1974) Sand Cone Method. 7. D 1557 -78 Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil- Aggregate Mixtures using 10 -1b. (4.54 kg) Rammer and 18 -in. (457 mm) Drop. 8. D 1682 -64 Breaking Load and Elongation of (R 1975) Textile Fabrics. 9. D 2419 -74 Test for Sand Equivalent Value of OR 17 =975) Soils and Fine Aggregates 10. D 2487 -85 Classification of Soils for (R 1975) Engineering Purposes. 11. D 2922 -81 Density of Soils and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) 12. D 2937 -83 Density of Soil in Place by the Drive - cylinder Method 13. D 3017 -78 Moisture Content of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) 14. D 4318 -84 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils C. All applicable local state highways and transportation specifications. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. OMITTED B. OMITTED C. MANUFACTURER'S DATA: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, de- tailed specifications, available performance test data, instructions and recommendations for installation of filter cloth. UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION & GRADING 02210 - 3 1.07 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Existing Utilities such as water, sewer, storm drainage, telephone, electric, gas, etc., are located on the drawings from information provided by the Owner or utilty company. This information cannot be guaranteed as being complete, precise, or to scale. The Contractor is resonsible for field verification of all existing underground utilities prior to beginning any earthwork. It shall be theContractor's responsibilty to work around and protect all existing utilities during the course of this Contract. 1.08 QUALITY A. Quality shall mean the meticulous attention to the detail of installation and workmanship necessary for earthwork as specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Materials and methods specified are for established design, performance and quality required. Materials and methods that produce equal design, performace and quality will be considered provided the request for substitution is submitted in writing to the Engineer for his review. 2.02 EARTH A. Earth shall be defined as any combination of soil and work. 2.03 SOIL A. Soil shall be defined as any material other than rock. In general, shall be free of debris, roots, wood, scrap material, vegetable matter, refuse, soft unsound particles, deleterious frozen soil, and other objectionable matter. B. For work outside the structure where granular fill is indicated and other areas designated on drawings, shall conform to the general requirements for soil above and shall be: 1. Sand in accordance with ASTM C33. 2. Gravel conforming to Grading Size No. 57 or No. 67 as specified and in accordance with ASTM C33. C. Backfill and fill shall conform to the general requirements for soil materials above and shall be classified as GW, GP, GM, GC, SW, SP, SM, SC, ML, CL by ASTM D2487 and shall be capable of being compacted to the specified degree of comapction when the moisture content is within 3 percentage points of the optimum percent moisture. 02210 - 4 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION `& GRADING D. Unsuitable Soil shall be any soil materials determined by the independent geotechnical laboratory as not conforming to the requirements described above for Backfill and Fill. A moisture content which is more than 3 percentage points from opimum shall NOT be considered unsuitable if such materials would otherwise be suitable if the moisture content were adjusted. Adjustments to the soil moisture content by drying, mixing, adding water, or other means shall be responsibility of the Contractor. E. Topsoil shall be material free of subsoil, stumps, rocks larger than 1" diameter, brush, weeds, toxic substances, andother material or substance detrimental to plant growth. Topsoil shall be a natural, friable soil representative of productive soils in the vicinity. The pH range shall be from 6 to 8. Topsoil that does not meet this pH range shall be amended by the addition of pH adjusters. 2.04 ROCK A. General Site Excavation: This paragraph shall not be construed as a geological definition of any material or substance but as a definition of a material or substance for removal purposes. Rock is defined as sound and solid masses, layers or ledges of hard material in EXCESS of 1 cubic yard in size which CANNOT be effecitvely loosened or broken down by ripping in a single pass with a late model tractor - mounted hydraulic ripper, equipped with 1 digging point of standard manufacturer's design, adequately sized for use with and propelled by a crawler -type tractor rated between 210 and 240 net flywheel horsepower, operating in low gear, EXCEPT AFTER FIRST being broken up by the use of hand tool wedging or rock drills. Should the material or substance be 1 cubic yard or less in size or should it be removable by the ripper as described above WITHOUT FIRST the use of hand tool wedging or rock drills, then for the removal purposes of this Project, this material or substance shall be defined as soil and not rock. B. Trench Excavation: This paragraph shall not be construed as a geological definition of any material or substance but as a definition of a material or substance for removal purposes. Rock is defined as a material 1 cubic yard or larger in size which CANNOT be removed by a late model 1 cubic yard diesel hydraulic backhoe WITHOUT FIRST the use of hand tool wedging or rock drills. Should the material or substance be 1 cubic yard or less in size or should it be removable by the 1 cubic yard capacity backhce as described above WITHOUT FIRST the use of hand tool wedging or rock drills then for the removal purposes of this Project this material or substance shall be defined as soil and not rock. For rock ezcavation a trench shall be defined as a linear excavation that is 5' or less in width and 2' or greater in depth. All other rock excavation shall be considered general site excavation. 2.05 BORROW AND WASTE MATERIALS UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION & GRADING 02210 - 5 A. Borrow: 1. In the event borrow material is required, the borrow material shall be checked for suitability for compaction and approved by the soils testing laboratory. The Contractor shall notify the laboratory at least three (3) days in advance of beginning borrow operations. 2. The Contractor, at his expense, shall perform clearing, grubbing, and stripping required to furnish suitable borrow material for laboratory testing. The Contractor, at his expense, shall also remove and stock pile the top 12" of soil in the area in which he is to obtain the borrow. After the borrow material has been removed, trim the borrow pit neatly, grade to drain properly, and replace the stockpiled soil and level over the borrow area. B. Waste: 1. Excavated materials not suited for backfill and excavated material in excess of that needed to complete the work shall be wasted on the project site where directed by the Owner or hauled off the Owner's property at the Contractor's expense. Waste areas shall be smoothly graded, sloped to allow natural drainage of surrounding area topsoiled and seeded. 2.06 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION A. A copy of the total report of the subsurface investigation performed by the soil consultant and as made available to the Engineer, is either found in the Project Manual for the Contractor's information, or may be obtained directly from the Soil Consultant. B. Information indicated relative to soil moisture content and water table elevations represent conditions which existed at the time of testing only and are subject to daily and /or seasonal variations. The Contractor shall not use this information as a fixed basis for bidding as the Contractor is expected to anticipate adjustments in his procedures to accommodate such. C. The Contractor may make any additional investigation at his expense. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSURFACE REPORT A. In the event a subsurface investigation report has been prepared for this project, all excavation, filling and grading shall be performed in accordance with the Construction Considerations section of the subsurface report unless otherwise noted. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION STAKEOUT A. Construction stakeout will be by a licensed survey firm provided by the Contractor. Exact locations and grade points are to be staked or fixed by the surveying firm before construction. 02210 - 6 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION & GRADING B. The Contractor shall not disturb any bench marks, reference stakes or property line monuments. In the event it becomes necessary to remove any bench mark, reference stake or property line monument in the performance of the work, the Contractor shall reference such points in preparation for replacement. If any such points are disturbed or damaged, they shall be replaced by a local registered land surveyor at the expense of the Contractor. 3.03 PROTECTION OF FACILITIES A. Existing utility lines (either overhead or underground), sidewalks, fencing, pavement or other structures shown on the drawings; shown to the Contractor or mentioned in the plans and specifications shall be kept free of damage by the Contractor's operations. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify the existence and location of all underground utilities within the project site. The omission from or the inclusion of utility loctions on the plans is not to be considered as the non - existence of or a definite location of existing underground utilities. Any existing construction damaged by the Contractor shall be restored to an equal condition as that existing at the time prior to damage, at the Contractor's expense. If any utility is not known of in time to prevent damage and it is inadvertnely damaged during construction, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the Owner of said damaged utility at once so that emergency repairs may be made at the Contractor's expense and to the satisfaction of the party having jurisdiction of the utility. 3.04 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION A. Strip existing topsoil to a depth of 4" stockpile separately from other excavated materials, and re -use for finished surface grading. Topsoil shall be free of stones, debris of every kind. Locate piles of topsoil so that the topsoil can be used readily for finished surface grading; protect topsoil and maintain until needed. The top 4" thickness of all newly graded earth surfaced shall consist of topsoil. B. Upon completion of the stripping operations, and after all excavation of the site has been completed to the lines and grades shown on the drawings, the exposed subgrade in cut areas should be proof rolled as specified in paragraph 3.07.A for areas to receive fill. Any areas which deflect, rut or pump excessively during the proof rolling or fail to "tighten up" after successive passes should be undercut to suitable soils and replaced with compacted fill. C. All site excavation shall be unclassified regardless of the nature of the materials encountered. All excavation materials which are not required for fils shall be considered as waste and shall be disposed of off the Owner's property unless directed otherwise by the Owner in writing. D. Rock in the bottom of roadway cuts shall be excavated to a depth of 1 foot below the roadbed and ditches. Rock in building pad areas shall be excavated to a depth of 3 feet below finished grade as indicated on the grading plans. Rock in pipe trenches shall be excavated to a depth of 0.5 feet below trench depth. UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION & GRADING 02210 - 7. E. The Contractor shall provide all sheeting, shoring, underpinning and bracing required to hold the sides of the excavation and for the protection of all adjacent structures. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage to any part of the work by failure of excavated sides or bottoms. 3.05 BLASTING A. Any and all blasting operations shall be conducted only if approved by the Engineer and in strict accordance with existing ordinances and regulations relative to storage and use of explosives. Blasting shall be done only by experienced men and extreme caution and care shall be exercised to prevent injury to persons or damage to any pipe, mains, wires, drains, buildings railroad tracks or other property above or below the surface of the ground. The Contractor shall use safety nets or other equivalent measures as approved by the Engineer to reduce the possibility of flying rock as a result of blasting operations. The Contractor shall be held strictly responsible for any injury to persons or damage to public or private property. B. The Contractor shall submit blasting plans to the local controlling agency for review and shall not proceed with blasting operations until approval has been granted. As directed by the Engineer, blasting operations shall be monitored to insure that vibration levels produced by blasting are within tolerable limits. 3.06 DEWATERING A. The Contractor shall control the grading in all areas so that the surface of the ground will be properly sloped, diked or ditched to prevent water from entering into excavated areas. The Contractor shall maintain sufficient personnel and equipment to promptly and continuously remove all water, from any source, entering or accumulating in the excavation or other parts of the work. All water pumped or drained from these areas shall be disposed of in a suitable manner without damaging adjacent property or other work under construction. 3.07 EMBANKMENTS, FILLS AND BACKFILLS A. Upon completion of the stripping operations, the exposed subgrade in areas to receive fill should be proof rolled with a loaded dumptruck or similar pneumatic -tired vehicle with a minimum loaded weight of 20 tons, under the superrvision of a geotechnical engineer. The proof rolling procedure should consist of four complete passes of the exposed areas with two of the passes being in a direction perpendicular to the preceding ones. Any areas which deflect, rut or pump excessively during the proof rolling or fail to "tighten up" after successive passes should be undercut to suitable soils and replaced with compacted fill. 02210 - 8 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION & GRADING' B. Embankments and fills shall be constructed at the locations and to the lines and graedes indicated on the drawings. Material shall be placed in horizontal layers not to exceed 6" in compacted depth, prior to placing each following layer. All fill material shall be free from roots or other organic material, trash, and from all stones having any one dimension greater than 6 inches. Stones larger than 4 inches, maximum dimension, shall not be permitted in the upper 6 inches of fill or embankment. Fill areas shall be kept level with graders or other approved vehicles. C. All fill used for site grading operations should consist of a clean (free of organics and debris) low plastic soil (plasticity index less than 30). D. Embankment and fill compaction shall be accomplished by thoroughly compacting each layer with sheep foot rollers, pneumatic rollers, and mechanical tampers in places inaccessible to rollers, or other equipment. When material has too much moisture, grading operations shall be limited to drying soil by spreading and turning for drying by the sun and aeration. When material is dry, moisture shall be added by sprinkling by approved means. E. All embankments and fills shall be compacted to the following percentages of the maximum dry density as determined by the Standard Proctor Density Test, ASTM D -698, Method C. F. The following table shall be used unless otherwise specified. TABLE OF COMPACTION Type Fill or Minimum Embankment Zone Density % Structure All Depths 100 Roadway and Top 12 inches 100 Parking Remainder 95 G. Embankment types are defined as follows: 1. Structure - beneath concrete slbs of buildings floors, foundations etc. 2. Roadway and Parking - beneath all roads, streets, truck operations and automobile parking lots. H. Where backfilling is required after the completion of ldrainage or utility structures, all forms, trash and construction debris shall be removed from excavation before backfilling begins. Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers of 6 inches in compacted depth. Compaction shall conform to requirements in above table. Heavy rollers, crawler equipment, trucks or other heavy equipment shall not be used for compacting backfill within 5 feet of structure walls or other facilities which may be damaged by their weight of operation. No backfilling shall begin until concrete and masonry walls are properly cured. UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION & GRADING 02210 - 9 . I. The Contractor shall carry the top of embankments, fills, or backfills to the surrounding grade so that upon compaction and subsequent settlement, the grade will be at proper elevation. Should settlement occur during the guarantee period of the contract, the Contractor shall provide sufficient fill to bring area up to finished grade and shall re-seed as required. 3.08 PROOF ROLLING SCHEDULE A. Proof rolling under the observation of the Soils Engineer will be performed using a rubber -tired vehicle having a minimum loaded weight of 20 tons as specified hereinabove and as follows: 1. Immediately following stripping, all areas to receive fill shall be proofrolled as specified in paragraph 3.07.A above. 2. Immediately following the completion of excavation to proposed grades in cut areas, proof rolling shall be performed as specified in paragraph 3.04.E above. 3. Immediately prior to stone base course placement in pavement areas and following final floor slab preparation, all subgrade areas will be proofrolled. Any local areas which deflect, rut or pump under the roller shall be undercut and replaced with compacted fill material as specified herein. 3.09 SOIL INSPECTION AND TESTS A. All excavated and fill material shall be removed, selected, placed and compacted under supervision of a representative of a commercial soils testing laboratory which will be selected by the Engineer or the Owner. A commercial soils testing laboratory shall be any firm properly equipped to perform such compaction tests and who has in their employment a Professional Engineer experienced in testing and soil mechanics. The laboratory representative shall have the authority to approve or disapprove the condition of the subgfade on which fill is to be placed, filled material, placement methods, compaction methods, and shall make compaction density tests as necessary to determine that the specified density is obtained. Contractor shall notify laboratory at least three (3) days prior to starting fill operations in order that suitability of material for compaction may be checked and no material shall be used that has not been previously checked and approved by the laboratory. The laboratory shall be notified before any cut is made or fill is placed in order that the laboratory representative may be present during all grading operations. The Contractor shall remove, replace, re- compace and re -test all fills failing to meet the density requirements at his own expense. B. A soils testing laboratory shall be retained by the Owner at no expense to the Contractor to supervise fill placement and compaction. However, extra time and trips caused by excessive delay, failure of the Contractor to properly coordinate with the laboratory, or failure of the Contractor to properly compact fill material shal be back- charged to the Contractor. 02210 - 10 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION & GRADING C. Field density tests shall be performed by the Owner's testing agency for each one foot of fill material placed at the following frenquency: 1. A minimum of one field density test shall be made for each 5,000 square feet of fill placement in building areas. 2. A mimi.mum of one field density test shall be made for each 10,000 square feet of fill placed in all other areas where pavement is to be placed. 3. For dam construction a mimimum of one field density test shall be made for each 1000 cy, each lift or each day whichever is more frequent. D. Prior to final acceptance, the Soils Engineer and Surveyor shall submit certification specifying that the project compaction criteria and subgrading elevations have been satisfactorily obtained. The Contractor is responsible for the certification statement from the Surveyor. This certification should be in the form of a letter accompanied by a stamped as -built drawing showing spot elevations. 3.10 BORROW AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Borrow: 1. In the event borrow material is required, the borrow material shall be checked for suitability for compaction and approved by the soils testing laboratory. The Contractor shall notify the laboratory at least three (3) days in advance of beginning borrow operations. 2. The Contractor, at his expense, shall perform any clearing, grubbing and stripping required to furnish access to suitable borrow material. The Contractor, at his expense, shall also remove and stockpile the top 12" of soil in the area n which he is to obtain the borrow. After the borrow material has been removed, trim the borrow pit neatly, grade to drain properly, and replace the stockpiled soil and level over the borrow area. B. Waste: 1. Excavated materials not suited for backfill and excavated material in excess of that needed to co mplete the work shall be wasted on the project site where directed by the Owner or hauled off the Owner's property at the Contractor's expense. Waste areas shall be left in a graded and sloped condition to allow natural drainage of surrounding area. C. Seeding: 1. All borrow and waste areas shall be seeded as specified in these specifications. UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION & GRADING 02210 - 11 3.11 RESIDUAL SOIL AREAS A. If proof rolling indicates that on -site virgin soils supporting any roadway, parking, building or other structural areas are not adequate as determined by the Soils Engineer, then these unsuitable areas shall be repaired by the Contractor. The necessary repair procedure shall be determined by the Soils Engineer and may include scarifying, drying and re- compaction procedures or undercutting and replacement procedures. 3.12 FINAL GRADING A. On completion of all grading; all graded areas (except building pads and pavement areas in rough grading contracts and al cut slopes steeper than a 3 :1 slope) shall be provided with 4 inches of topsoil and brought to the finished grades shown on the drawings. Areas disturbed by operations of the Contractor shall be properly returned to their original condition with a topsoil covering of 4 inches. B. After entire graded area has been brought to the finished grades shown on drawings, all areas shall be left smooth and free from erosion, ridges, ditches and evidence of ponding. Final grades shall be free from all roots, debris, rock and soil lumps and left in readiness for seeding. C. Prior to acceptance of the entire project, the Contractor shall correct all embankments and graded areas of all damages due to washes, settlement, erosion, equipment ruts or any other cause at his expense. D. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall provide certification as specified in paragraph 3.09.D that all grades are within +.1 foot of the finished grades shown on project drawings. 3.13 CLEAN - UP A. Upon completion or termination of the work, and before final payment is made, the Contractor shall remove from site all equipment, waste materials and rubbish resulting from his operations. In the event of his failure to do so, the same may be done by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor. END OF SECTION 02210 - 12 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION & GRADING SECTION 02270 TEMPORARY ELISION CONTROL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Soil erosion and sedimentation control shall be provided by the Contractor for all areas of the site that are denuded or otherwise disturbed. All control measures such as erection of silt fences, check dams or other structures shall be installed prior to grubbing operations. Additional measures shall be constructed as required during the construction. All facilities installed shall be continuously and acceptably maintained until the disturbed areas are stabilized. B. Contractor shall provide permanent or temporary ground cover within 30 working days after completion of the construction phase of any specific area. Contractor shall have full responsibility for construction maintenance and compliance of all control facilities in accordance with State and Local soil erosion and sedimentation control laws. 1.02 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS A. All referenced manufacturer's requirements and specifications and nationally recognized and accepted standards and specifications shall be the latest addition unless specified otherwise and shall be used as they are applicable for products and craftsmanship incorporated in the Contract Drawings and this Section only. The references to these standards and specifications do not imply acceptance of any and all products described in the standards and specifications. B. The manufacturer shall review the use, details, and method of installation of his product as indicted and shall disclose to the Engineer any and all deviations from his recommended use and method of installation and shall also disclose to the Engineer his recommendations for the use and method of installation of his product to achieve the intended purpose and result Such disclosures shall bemade within the time stipulated for submission of shop drawings. 1 03 PRODUCT SAMPLES A. The Contractor shall furnish samples for Engineer's review as follows: 1. Filter cloth 2. Soil stabilization fabric 1 04 WORK UNDER THIS SECTION TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL 02270 - 1 A. This work shall be within the Project area and general site area as indicated. Shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following: 1. Surface prepartion 2. Sediment basins 3. Temporary swales and ditches 4. Silt fences 5. Gravel filters 6. Straw bale filters 7. Temporary grassing 1.05 PRODUCT DATA A. The Contract shall furnish for Engineer's review all product literature and data on products proposed for use. incuding that specified, in sufficient detail to prove the products conformance with the requirements of this Section. 1.06 QUALITY A Quality shall mean the meticulous attention to the detail of installation and workmanship necessary to the assemblage of products in the highest grade of excellence by skilled craftsmen of the trade. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Products are for establishing the type, design and quality required. Products of equal type, design, and quality produced by other manufacturers will be considered provided the request for substitution is submitted within the time stipulated for submission of shop drawings. 2.02 FILTER CLOTH Filter cloth shall be a synthetic, permeable barrier sheet that is resistant to soil chemicals and mildew, stble under freeze -thaw cycles, will not shrink or expand under wet conditions and will not unravel or become clogged during use. The filter cloth shall have a minimum tensile strength of 120 pounds. Allowable open area shall not exceed 36 percent and shall not be less than 4 percent. Percent open area is defined as the summation of the open areas divided by the total area of the filter cloth. Equivalent opening size (EOS) shall not be finer than the U.S. Standard Sieve No. 70. EOS is defined as the number of the U.S. Standard sieve having openings closest in size to the filter cloth openings. 1. Filter cloth shall contain stabilizers and /or inhibitors added to the base material to make it resistant to deterioration due to ultraviolet light and heat exposure. 02270 - 2 TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL 2.03 SOIL STABILIZATION FABRIC A. Soil stabilization fabric shall be a yarn or jute fabric in a knitted or woven construction with a mesh opening of 1/4" minimum and 1 -1/2" maximum. The fabric shall be biodegradable and shall not be harmful to the environment. The fabric shall not begin its deterioration for a period of at least 60 days after its installation to insure that the seeding and /or planting has established a firm root system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SHIPPING A. All products shall be properly perpared for and shipped in such a manner so as to prevent damage and contamination Shall items such as pegs and stakes shall be bagged, boxed, or tied in bundles. 3 02 STORAGE A. Products shall be stored in a weatherproof building or enclosure. On -site yard storage on pallets under a canvas or plastic sheet or the like is not a substitute for a weatherproof building or enclosure. Sacks of grass seed, fertilizer and lime shall not be allowed to become wet or caked and shall not be allowed to come in contact with wet surfaces. Store on pallets or the like off of floors. Sacked products showing water damage shall not be accepted or used. 3.03 SOIL STABILIZATION FABRIC A. Fabric shall be pegged in place over the top of the seeded and /or planted areas after seeding is complete and before planting is complete. Stakes or pegs shall be placed on a grid pattern, not greater than 5' square, to hold the fabric in place. Edges of adjacent fabric shall overlap each other at least 6" side -to -side and at least 12" end -to -end. Top edge of fabric shall be buried in a 6" deep trench to prevent fabric displacement. 3.04 SEDIMENT BASIN A. Clear and grade the area required for construction. Either a hole shall be excavated to trap soil sediment or a dike /dam shall be constructed to retain soil sediment as indicated. B. Pipe and overflow drainage structures and their appurtenances shall be provided as indicated as a measure for storm water outflow while retaining the soil sediment trapped in the basin. 3 05 TEMPORARY SWALES AND DITCHES A. Temporary swales and ditches shall be graded to the profiles and sections indicated and in the locations indicated. Slope all swales and ditches to drain to the basins and /or filters as indicated. TEMPORARY CONTROL 02270 - 3 3.06 SILT FENCES A. Provide posts and metal fence fabric and cover with filter cloth as indicated to furnish an effective filtering medium to separate soil sediment from the storm water run -off. The filter cloth shall be permanently attached to the fence to prevent displacement, and the bottom of the filter cloth shall be buried to prevent underwashing in heavy rainstorms. 3.07 FILTERS A. GRAVEL filters as indicated, consisting of piles of coarse stone sized from 1" diameter to 3" diameter, shall be placed in swales, in line with silt fences, and around permanent and temporary drainage structures to allow storm water to flow into natural drainage channels while separating soil sediment from the storm water run -off. B STRAW BALE filters as indicated shall be installed in rows and staked in place to prevent dislodging, in swales and at the edge of drainage structures while separating soil sediment from the storm water run -off. 3.08 TEMPORARY GRASISNG A. Over all disturbed area, prepare the seed bed by plowing, discing and raking the area to loosen the soil for proper root penetration. B. SOW KENTUCKY 31 fescue grass seed at the rate of 200 pounds each acre. C. Spread 10-20-20 commercial grade fertilizer over the seed bed area at the rate of 500 pounds each acre. Lime shall be required for permanent grassing only. D. Apply straw mulch into the soil with a cultipacking device to prevent displacement of the mulch either by wind or by rain. 3.09 MAINTENANCE OF TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL MEASURES A. The work of this Section shall be responsible for periodic reviews of the conditions of the erosion control measures and shall remove all soil sediment and debris as it accumulates in and around the sediment collection structures. B. The work of this Section shal make all necessary repairs to the erosion control measures to insure their proper operation and function throughout the duration of the Project. 3 10 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL MEASURES A. Just prior to final acceptance of the Project the Contractor shall review the growth of new grass on the graded areas of the site and should appropriate growth be in evidence, the temporary eroson control measures shall be removed and disposed of off the site and /or property. All grassed areas disturbed as a result of this removal shall be properly regrassed END OF SECTION 02270 - 4 TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL SOCTION 02281 TERMITE c NrIUL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 STANDARDS A All referenced nationally recognized and accepted standards and specifi- ctaions shall be the latest edition unless specified otherwise and shall be used as they are acceptable for products and craftsmanship incorporated in this Section only. 1.02 MANUFACTURER'S REVIEW A. The manufacturer shall review the use and method of installation of his product as indicated and shall disclose to the Engineer any and all deviations from his recommended use and method of installation and shall disclose to the Engineer his recommendations for the use and method of installation of his product to achieve the intended purpose and result. Such disclosures shall be made within the time stipulated for submission of shop drawings. 1.03 MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, through the /engineer a list of chemicals which he will use on the Project. 1.04 PROTECTION CONTRACTS A. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner, through the Engineer, a Protection Contract issued by the applicator of the chemicals and insured by an insurance company licensed to do business in the state of the Project's location for damage caused by subterranean termites and other soil dwelling organisms. The Protection Contract shall list the owner's name and address, property address, if different, description of property, applicator's representative, beginning effective date, and a 1 -year expiration date. Protection shall also include at least 1 annual inspection, additional treatments as necessary for continued protection during the contract year $100 000 a year property damage liability and the renewal fee for the Contract for each of the next 5 years. Protection Contract shall be signed by an officer of the applicator. The Protection Contract, in the name of the Owner, shall have a beginning effective date the same as the date the Owner accepts the building. The Contractor shall pay all costs of the Protection Contract during construction. TERMITE CONTROL 02281 - 1 I I f f I I. l 1 l 1 I 1 1.05 WORK REQUIRED A. The work required shall be the necessary soil treatment with toxic chemicals and all related preparatory work for the entire area within all exterior walls. 1.06 APPLICATOR A. The applicator shall be a company which is regularly engaged in the application of the required chemicals for the required protection. The applicator company shall be registered with the state and local authorities where required by law and the applicator individual shall be certified where required by law. Evidence of required registration and certifi- cation shall be furnished to the Engineer 30 days in advance of the application work. In addition, the applicator company shall furnish to the Engineer, along with the evidence of registration and certification, a list of construction projects upon which he has performed the same services, as required by this Section, over the past 5 years. 1.07 QUALITY A. Quality shall mean the meticulous attention to the workmanship necessary for the proper and thorough soil treatment required. PART 2 - PRODUCT'S 2.01 CHEMICALS A. Chemicals shall be those registered with the Federal Environmental Protection Agency for use as termite toxicant for which prolonged effectiveness may be anticipated. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. The rules, regulations,definitions, and requirements of the State in which this application is being applied shall be compiled with for the work of this Section. 3.02 WORK REQUIRED A. Provide soil treatment for treatment for protection from termites and other soil dwelling organisms harmful to cellulose and natural fibers. Soil treatment shall be by a licensed and recognized firm whose sole business is soil treatment for protection from termites and other soil dwelling organisms. 3.03 FIRE HAZARDS A. The Contractor shall conform to all standard fire preventive regulations and shall exercise every precaution in the use and storage of inflammable materials. 02281. - 2 TERMITE CONTROL 3.04 INTERIOR SOIL TREATMENT A. All soil shall be treated with toxic chemicals after final subgfades have been established and prior to the installation of stone fill. The coverage shall be 1 gallon of chemical each 8 square feet of soil surface. In addition, a 12" wide strip ofsoil aroundthe inside perimeter of the exterior foundation walls, interior foundation walls, piers, and pipes shall be treated at the rate of 2 gallons each 5 lineal feet each foot of depth from top of soil to bottom of footing. Apply chemical at the rate of 1 gallon each 5 lineal feet to the voids in foundation walls, piers and pilasters. Apply chemical at the rate of 1 quart each square foot around crigical penetrations of the slab - on-grade. In no case shall trench extend below of footing. As soil is replaced, it shall be treated with the chemical in 12" lefts. Proprietary products shall be applied at not less than minimum rate stated when registered. 3.05 EXTERIOR SOIL TREATMENT A. The soil shall be treated with 1 of the chemicals at not less than the rate given in paragraph for interior soil treatment. The trench to receive the . chemical shall be not less than 6" wide for entire depth of foundation wall. In no case shall trench extend below be treated with the chemical in 12" lifts. END OF SECTION TERMITE CONTROL :02281 SECTION 02400 SURFACE STORM DRAINAGE SYSrM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work covered by this Specifiction consists of performance of operations in connection with the construction and installation of pipe culverts and storm drainage structures along with headwalls, flared -end sections, swales, ditches and all related incidentals outside the building five (5) foot line. Also covered by this Specification is the furnishing of all equipment, tools, labor and materials necessary to complete the work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 1 02 STANDARDS A. All referenced manufacturer's requirements and specificatons and national- ly recognized an accepted standards and specifications shall be the latest edition unless specified otherwise and shall be used as they are applicable for products and craftsmanship incorporated in the Contract Drawings and this Section only. The references to these standards and specifications do not imply acceptance of any and all products described in the standards and specifications. 1.03 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS A. The manufacturer shall review the use, details and method of installation of his product as indicated and shall disclose to the Engineer and all deviations from his recommended use and method of installation and shall also disclose to the Engineer his recommendations for the use and method of installation of his product to achieve the intended purpose and result. Such disclosures shall be made within the time stipulated for submission of shop drawings. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop drawings shall be furnished for the Engineer's review for the following: 1. Precast manholes 2. Pipe materials, fittings and couplings 3. Grated and covers 4. Manhole steps 5. Headwalls SURFACE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 02400 - 1 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S OPTION A. Upon the Engineer's approval the Contractor shall have the option of constructing curb inlets, catch basins, junction boxes and manholes using masonry units, cast - in-place concrete, or precast concrete sections in lieu of the construction method indicated. Should the Contractor select a construction method different from the method indicated, the Engineer shall be notified and the Contractor shall submit detailed drawings showing sizes, materials of construction, and types and sizes of metal covers. The proposed method of construction shall be equal in all respects to the method of construction indicated. 1.06 QUALITY A. Quality shall mean the meticulous attention to the detail of installation and workmanship necessary to the assemblage of products in the highest grade of excellence by skilled craftsmen of the trade. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SPECIFIED PRODUCTS A. Products specified are for establishing the type, design and quality required. Products of equal type, design and quality produced by other manufacturerss will be considered provided the request for substitution is submitted within the time allotted for shop drawings. 2.02 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall be 3,000 psi normal weight concrete. Design mix shall be submitted for Engineer's review. 2.03 REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcing steel shall be Grade 60 steel in accordance with ASTM, A615, A82 and A185. Sizes shall be as indicated. 2.04 BRICK A. Brick shall be manhole brick, Grade "MS" in accordance with ASTM C32. 2.05 SAND A. Sand shall be clean, sharp and free from all organic matter in accordance with ASTM C144. 2.06 MORTAR A. Masonry mortar shall be Type "M" in accordance with ASTM C270. 2.07 GRATES AND COVERS 02400 - 2 SURFACE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM A. Grates and voers shall be as indicated and required. Manhole covers on storm drains shall be marked with standard "SW" markings or the words "STORM DRAIN" cast in the cover. Metal work in paved areas shall be TRAFFIC DUTY. All cast iron metal shall be Class 30 in accordance with ASTM A48. All metal work shall be fully bituminous seal coated, unless specified otherwise. 2.08 TRRENCH DRAINS AND GRATES A. OMITTED 2.09 CURB INLETS A. Curb inlets shall be supplied as indicated. Where metal curb boxes are indicated, curb box shall match dimensions of curb face. 2.10 STONE RIPRAP A. Class I riprap shall consist of field stone or rough unhewn quarry stone. The stone shall be sound, tough, dense, resistant to the action of air and water and suitable in all other respects for the purpose intended. Stone shall vary in weight from 5 to 200 pounds. At least 30 percent of the total weight of the riprap shall be in individual pieces weighing a minimum of 60 pounds each. Not more than 10 percent of the total weight of the riprap may be in individual pieces weighing less than 15 pounds each. B. Class II riprap shall consist of field stone or rough unhewn quarry stone. The stone shall be sound, tough, dense, resistant to the action of air and water, and suitable in all other respects for the purpose intended. Stone shall vary in weight from 25 to 250 pounds. At least 60 percent of the total weight of the riprap shall be in individual pieces weighing a minimum of 100 pounds each. Not more than 5 percent of the total weight of the riprap may be in individual pieces weighing less than 50 pounds each. 2.11 PIPE A. All piping shall be new and of good quality. Pipe and fittings are specified to meet the published standards of recognized agencies concerning products, fabrication methods, and dimensions. Pipe shall be of the size and type indicated. Should a different type of drainage piping be used in lieu of that indicated, this different type of drainage piping shall have the identical or greater flow and strength charcteristics as the piping indicated. Where it is necessary to increase the pipe size to obtain identical or greater flow capacity as the piping indicated. calculations for the adjusted size and revised profiles showing depthof cover, inverts, and other utility crossings shall be submitted to the Engineer with request for change in piping. SURFACE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 02400 - 3 B. REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE shall be in accordance with ASTM C76, and shall be Class III where the depth of cover is more than 2 feet but less than 13 feet, and Class V in other location unless indicated otherwise. C. OMITTED D. OMITTED E. OMITTED F. OMITTED G. OMITTED 2.12 FLARED END SECTIONS A. OMITTED 2.13 JOINT PROJECTS A. Joint products shall be new and of good quality and are specified to meet the published standards of recognized agencies concerning products and dimensions. All joint products used shall be compatible with the type pipe supplied and shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Rubber -type gaskets for concrete nonpressure pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C443. C. OMITTED D. Joint sealing compound used in filling joints of bell and spigot sewer pipe shall conform to the requirements of Federal Specification SS -S -169. E. MASTIC SEALANT may be used for joints in concrete pipe where watertight joints are not required. Mastic sealants shall consist of bitumen and inert mineral fillers and shall be of the size recommended by the pipe manufacturer for the type of pipe supplied. Mastic material shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M198, Type 8. G. OMITTED 1. OMITTED 2. OMITTED 2.14 PIPE MARKINGS A. All pipe shall be clearly marked with the class of the pipe, date of manufacture or match number, and other information as required by the above referenced standards. When 2 or more classes of pipe of the same type are to be supplied, the higher strength pipe shall be marked on opposite sides of the pipe exterior with a clear marking unique to the pipe class to . enable identification of the pipe class after pipe installation but prior to backfilling. 02400 - 4 SURFACE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 2.15 PRECAST MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES A. Bases, risers and appurtenances shall conform to ASTM C478. Internal diameter of the structure shall be a minimum of 4 -0 ", or the outlet pipe size plus 2' -0 ", whichever is larger. On structures larger than 4' -0" provided that adequate head room is provided to allow inspection of all pipes entering the structure. All joints between precast sections shall be made with rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM C443. Manhole steps shall be provided on all structures having a depth greater than 3' -6 ". 2.16 MANHOLE STEPS A. All steps in manholes, inlets and catch basins shall be constructed of polypropylene plastic, reinforced with encapsulated 3/8" steel reinforcing rod. Steps shall be embedded in the concrete and so designed to prvent pull -out and shall support a minimum load of 300 pounds. Steps shall be placed as indicated and uniformly spaced at 16" on center. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION OF PIPE TRENCHES A. No more trench shall be opened in advance of the pipe laying than is necessary to expedite the work. Ground conditions and /or location requirements shall govern the amount of trench open at any 1 time. B. Trench width for pipe 33" and smaller in inside diameter shall be equal to the outside diameter as measured at the bells of the pipe plus 16 ". Trench width for pipe larger than 33" in inside diameter shall be equal to the outside diameter, as measured at the bells of the pipe plus 24 ". Trench width shall be measured between faces of cut at an elevation 12" above the top of the pipe bell. If the Contractor varies from this requirement without prior approval of the Engineer, he shall,at his own expense, provide additional deeper bedding and compacted granular backfill. C. The execution shall be made to the elevations, grades and lines indicated. The trench bottom shall be excavated slightly above grade and cut down to pipe grade by hand in the fine grading operation. The trench bottom shall be true and even with bell holes at each joint to furnish the barrel of the pipe with soil and /or granular bedding support for its full length. This should prevent point loading at the bells. If the trench bottom is inadvertently cut below grade, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, fill it to grade with approved material thoroughly tamped. D. All excavations shall be properly protected by the necessary bracing timber to prevent any cave -ins or injury to adjacent improvements. The sides of the trenches shall be securely held by bracing or sheathing. This bracing or sheathing shall not be removed until the level of the backfill has reached the point where such removal can be safely carried out. The thickness of the sheathing and the dimensions of the cross - braces, shoes, etc., to be used by the Contractor shall be satisfactory to properly protect the sides of the trench, and to prevent injurious cave -ins or erosions. SURFACE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 02400 - 5 E. When underground lines cross, the trench of the lower pipe shall be backfilled with sharp sand, well tamped to provide a bed for higher pipe. Lines which run parallel and at different levels shall be adequately separated to furnish a firm bedding for the lines. F. Under no circumstances lay pipe or install appurtenances in water. Keep trenches free from water until pipe joint material has hardened. The presence of roundwater in the earth or the necessity of sheathing or bracing trenches shall not constitute a condition for which any increase may be made in the Contract Sum. 3.02 TRENCH BACKFILLING A. Trenches and all excavations shall not be backfilled until all required piping pressure tests have been performed and until all the piping conforms to the location requirements specified or indicated. B. The excavation shall be backfilled as rapidly as possible upon completion of the test and acceptance. Where damage may result from withdrawing sheathing, the sheathing shall be left in. The backfilling shall be made in 6" layers rammed and air tamped. Only specified materials shall be used for backfill. All backfill shall be tamped to the degree of compaction specified. In case of settlement, Contractor shall provide additional fill to cover depression with guarantee period. Where excavation occurs under buildings, fottings, etc., Contractor shall provide backfill so as not to endanger structure. All backfill shall be subject to FIELD TESTING AND VERIFICATION. 3.03 PIPE BEDDING A. Pipe bedding shall be Class C. shaped subgrade, in accordance with concrete pipe handbook unless indicated otherwise. 3.04 LAYING AND INSTALLING PIPE A. The Contractor will inspect all pipe before it is laid, and any section found damaged by handling or which is defective to a degree which will materially affect the function and service of the pipe, shall be removed from the site and shall be replaced with new and undamaged products. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into the excavation such that neither the pipe nor the excavation will be damaged or disturbed. Under no circumstances shall pipe be laid in water or on frozen ground, and no pipe shall be laid when trench conditions or weather are unsuitable for such work. Diversion of drainage or dewatering of trenches during construction shall be provided as necessary. Pipe shall be laid true to the grades indicated and shall rest upon the pipe bed for the full length of each section. Where bell and spigot pipe is used, spaces for the pipe bells shall be dug in the pipe subgrade to accommodate the bells. These spaces shall be deep enough to insure that the bells do not bear the load of the pipe and they shall not be excessively wide in relation to the logitudinal direction of the trench. When the pipes are laid, the barrel of each section of pipe shall be in contact with the quadrant- shaped bedding throughout its full length, exclusive of the bell, to support the entire load of the pipe. Provide batterboards spaced not more than 26 feet 02400 - 6 SURFACE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM apart along the trench for checking installation of pipe to insure proper slope and elevation. Laser beam method may be used for insuring proper slope and elevation. Runs of pipe shall be laid with outside laps or grooved ends upgrade beginning at the lower end of the pipe line. Pipe having its grade or joint disturbed after laying shall be taken up, cleaned, and re -laid. When pipes are protected by head walls or connected with drainage structures, the exposed ends of the pipe shall be placed or cut flush with the face of the structure. After the pipe is cut, the rough edges shall be smoothed up in an approved manner. All pipe shall be laid so that markings are on top and the inner surfaces abut neatly, tightly, and smoothly. At the end of each day's work the upgrade end of pipe lines not terminating in a structure shall be plugged or capped. All pipe shall be inspected by the Contractor as herein specified prior to placement of backfill. B. Concrete pipe shall be handled and installed in accordance with the recommendations of the American Concrete Pipe Association. "Concrete Pipe Handbook ", 1981, or latest edition. C. OMITTED 3.05 WA'IERIGHT JOINT REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, joints in drainage piping shall be waterright where piping extends under existing or indicated proposed or future structures, roads, parking lots, other paved surfaces, dams, or other similar facilities. Non- watertight joints hereinabove specified may be used in other locations. 3.06 OMITTED A. OMITTED 3.07 OMITTED A. OMITTED B. OMITTED C. OMITTED 3.08 CONCRETE OR CLAY PIPE JOINTS A. Concrete or clay pipe joints shall be made using 1 of the following methods. In selecting the pipe joint method. the Contractor shall take into consideration the specified requirements for watertightness and shall only use those methods which will provide the degree of watertightness specified. All pipe joints shall be sufficiently tight to prevent the migration of earth backfill through the pipe joint. SURFACE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 02400 - 7 B. Rubber and composition gasket pipe joints shall be installed in accordance with the printed recommendations of the manufacturer of the joint material. Surface to receive lubricants, cements, or adhesives shall be clean and dry. Gaskets and jointing materials shall be affixed to the pipe not more than 24 hours prior to the installation of the pipe, and shall be protected from the sun, blowing dust, and other deleterious agents at all times. Gaskets and jointing materials shall be inspected before installation of the pipe, and any loose or improperly affixed gaskets and jointing materials shall be removed and replaced. The pipe shall be aligned with the previously installed pipe, and the joint pulled together. If, while making the joint, the gasket or jointing material becomes loose and can be seen through the exterior joint recess when the joint is pulled up to within 1" of closure, the pipe shall be removed and the joint remade. C. Joint - Sealing Compound, hot -pour, mineral -fill, may be used in filling joints of bell and spigot sewer pipe. The bell and spigot pipe shall be installed and centered so that the annular space is uniform. This annular space shall be caulked with oakum joint packing and then shall be sealed with a joint compound conforming to the requirements of Federal Specification SS -S -169. The oakum shall be packed into the joint so as to leave a space, measured from the end of the bell, for pouring compound. The space shall be at least 1" for pipes 15" or less in diameter. shall be at least 1 -1/2" for pipes 18" to 24" in diameter, and shall be at least 2" for pipes larger than 24" in diameter. When jointing pipe in its final position, a suitable joint runner previously coated to facilitate removal shall be placed around the pipe, leaving an openingat the top of the runner. The joint shall be poured until completely filled with the compound; the pouring shall be poured until completely filled with the compound; the pouring shall be made as rapidly as possible without entrapping air. After the compound has cooled and set, the runner may be removed. The joint shall be inspected for unfilled sapces or unsatis- factory jointing. Alternate joints may be poured before the pipe is lowered into the trench. In this case, the joint shall be poured with the pipe in a vertical position without the use of the runner. The compound shall be thoroughly set before the pipe is moved. When previously jointed, the pipe shall be handled carefully so as not to move or deform the jointing. D. Mastic sealant shall be installed in accordance with the printed recommendations of the manufacturer of the joint material. The tongue or spigot end of the pipe shall be cleaned of all dirt and shall be dry. The Mastic material shall be wrapped around the tongue or spigot overlapping at the ends. Mastic shall be pressed onto the pipe to avoid slippage of the mastic material during pie handling. As the tongue or spigot end is inserted into the bell or groove, care shall be taken to ensure proper seating of the sealant to produce a tight seal and to fill all voids. A sufficient amount of sealant shall be used to fill the annular joint space with some squeeze out around the entire joint. 02400 - 8 SURFACE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 3.09 CONNECTIONS A. Where connections to existing or proposed structures are indicated, these connections shall be watertight and made so that a smooth uniform flow line will be obtained throughout the drainage system. All interior surfaces of the structure shall be grouted smooth. 3.10 ROOF DRAINS A. The interior roof drain piping shall be provided to a point 5' -0" outside the building. Drains shall be connected to the storm drainage system. 3.11 PRECAST HANHOLES A. Precast manholes shall be laid straight and plumb. Precast manholes shall be provided with a 12" layer of gravel bedding under the concrete bases of the manholes. Gaskets between manhole sections shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Where inlet grates are installed, they shall be installed at the elevation indicated. Manhole covers shall be installed flush with all paved areas and sidewalks and 1" above finished grade in unpaved areas. Following installation of manhole and covers, the brickwork shall be grouted smooth and watertight. 3.12 BRICKWORK A. Joints in walls other than circular shall be laid in stretcher courses with every 5th course shall be a header course with full close joints. Cement mortar shall be mixed in the proportion of 1 part Portland cement and 2 parts of mortar sand. The quantity of water in the mixture shall be sufficient to produce a stiff workable mix. Water shall be potable and free from harmful acids, alkalize and organic impurities. The mortar shall be used within 30 minutes after the ingredients are mixed with water. Lay the brick in full mortar beds with shoved joints. Horizontal joints shall not exceed 1/2" and vertical joints shall not exceed 1/4" on the interior face. All joints on the interior shall be struck flush with the masonry. The brickwork shall be corbeled as reuired. 3.13 INSTALLATION OF RIPRAP A. The area to receive riptrap shall be rough graded to indicated contours to provide a smooth uniform bed. The maximum slope between any 2 points on the bank shall not exceed 45 percent. The stone shall be placed on a slope as indicated. The stone shall be graded so that the smaller stones are uniformly distributed throughout the mass. The Contractor may place the stone by mechanical methods, augmented by hand placing where necesary, provided that when the riprap is completed it forms a properly graded, dense, neat layer of stone. The completed riprap shall be at least the thickness indicated. Toe walls and other construction details shall be as indicated. SURFACE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 02400 - 9 B. Grout for grouted riprap shall consist of 1 part Portland cement and 3 parts sand, thoroughly mixed with water to produce grout having a thick, creamy consistency. The stones shall be of the same sizes and placed in the manner as specified above for riprap, care being taken during placing to keep earth or sand from filling the spaces between the stones. After the stones are in place, the spaces between them shall be completely filled with grout from bottom to top, and the surface swept with a stiff broom. No riprap shall be grouted in freezing weather and in hot, dry weather, the work shall be protected from the sun and kept moist for at least 3 days after grouting the use by the use of water saturated burlap. 3.14 OMITTED A. OMITTED 3.15 REMOVAL AND PATCHING OF EXISTING PAVING FOR NEW LINES A. Where new drainage lines are run under the existing paving which is to remain, the paving shall be cut out, and removed along with its base course. The removal shall be neatly done with smooth straight lines and only in such widths as required for the size and depth of the drainage lines. Lines shall be installed and backfilled as hereinbefore specified. The paving work shall be replaced using new products and to a thickness to match the existing. 3.16 TEST PROCEDURES A. A light held in a manhole shall show a practically full circle of light through the pipe when viewed from the adjoining end of the line. Where watertight joints are specified, lines shall be tested for infiltration by means of a suitable weir or other device as directed. When determination of infiltration is not practicable because of dry trench conditions, an exfiltration test shall be applied by filling with water so that the hydraylic head will be at least 4' above the crown of the upper end of the section being tested. The amount of leakage, infiltration or exfil- tration, shall not exceed 500 gallons per inch of diameter per day per mile of pipe. Water for testing shall be furnished by the Contractor. Should the amount of leakage or pipe deflection exceed the specified amount, repairs shall be made using a method aproved by the engineer and the pipe retested until the pipe is determined to meet Contract Specifications. All repairs and retesting shall be made at no additional cost. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at leas 48 hours prior to conducting such tests. The Contractor shall furnish the engineer with written certification that all specified tests have been conducted and that the results thereof conform to the requirements of the specifications. END OF SECTION 02400 - 10 SURFACE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM F 1. SECTION 02510 CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION ENCODES 1 A. Portland Cement concrete paving (flatwork) for dumpster and equipment pads, and subbase preparation. B. Concrete walks and curbs. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01405 - Testing Laboratory Services: Sampling and testing concrete. B. Section 02200 - Earthwork: Preparation of site for paving. C. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Concrete mix. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. i + C. ASTM A185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete I L Reinforcement. E. ASTM C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete. IL F. ASTM C260 - Air - Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. G. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. H. ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (non - extruding and resilent bituminous types). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit two copies of laboratories trial mix designs proposed in accordance with ACI 301 Method 1, or one copy each of 30 consecutive test results and the mix design used from a record of past performances in accordance with ACI 301, Method 2. 1 _. CONCRETE PAVING 02510 - 1 i r C. Submit a sample ready -mixed concrete delivery ticket in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C94. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to ACI 301 and ACI 308. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIERMENTS A. Maintain temperature of concrete during placing and curing at not less than 50 degrees F. nor more than 90 degrees F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Herbicide: Hyvar X at 20 lbs. /acre or Krovar II at 25 lbs. /acre as manufactured by DuPont Chemical Co. B. Formwork: Any commercial softwood species, utility grade or better, surfaced four sides or smooth; rigid metal or wood for straight sections and flexible metal or plywood for curved sections. C. Reinforcement: 1. Bars: ASTM A615, grade 60. 2. Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, 6" x 6" - 10/10. D. Dowels: Plain steel rods, 1/2" x 14" long. E. Expansion Joints: ASTM D1751, fiber expansion joint filler, 1/2" x3 -1/2" with provisions for joint sealer. F. Concrete Mix: Ready- mixed, 4,000 psi class in accordance with Section 03300 and ASTM C94 and; 1. Air - Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C260, 4 to 6 percent by volume. 2. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, natural, crushed limestone, graded to size No. 67 in accordance with ASTM C33. G. Curing Membrane: ASTM C309 with not less than 30% solids. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine work of other trades and verify that work is complete to the point that this installation may properly begin. 02510- 2 CONCRETE PAVING I r r r i 1 t i B. Verify that site trenching has been completed and properly compacted. 3.2 SUBBASE PREPARATION A. After subgrade has been completed as specified in Section 02200, fine grade and roll areas to receive paving to an even uniform texture free of lumps pockets, and soft spots. 3.3 INSTALLING REINFORCING A. Place one layer of 6" x 6" - 10/10 fabric in top third of 4" thick paving on properly installed chairs. B. Place one layer of 6" x 6" - 6/6 or two layers of 6 x 6 - 10/10 fabric in top third of 7" thick paving on properly installed chairs. C. Place dowels in expansion joints at 12" o.c. with one end set in slip pocket or coated with bond- breaker. 3.4 PLACING CONCRETE, GENERAL A. Place concrete in accordance with referenced codes and standards. Conform to ACI 301 and 318 unless modified by these qualifications. B. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods that will prevent contamination, separation, excessive drying and loss of materials. C. Place concrete consistently and continuously until each panel or section is complete. Do not pour greater area at one time than can be properly finished. Place concrete in square sections when practicable. D. Do not use retempered concrete. E. Remove items used to facilitate placing concrete unless such items are designated or specified to remain. F. Do not add water to ready -mixed concrete at job site. G. Paving surface shall not pond water. H. Finish grade elevations shall deviate no more than 1/4" plus or minus from grades shown on drawings except that in no case shall paving pond water. I. Where paving terminates and no curb is shown on Drawings thicken edge and align top of paving with adjacent grade. 3.5 INSTALLING JOINTS A. Control Joints: Install where indicated on Drawings but not more than 15 ft. o.c. each way. Form with tool or saw cut to 25% of slab depth. Saw cut within 24 hours of placing concrete. CONCRETE PAVING 02510 - 3 B . C . Construction Joints: Install where concrete where concreting is interrupted for length of concrete, and wher indicated on Drawings. Expansion Joints: Install where indicated on ft. o.c. each way. Leave joints clean and receive sealant. 3.6 PLACING CONCRETE WALKS A. Where walks are bounded on each side by lawns or planting, provide slight crown to allow drainage to each side. B. Where walks are bounded on one side by curb, provide 1% slope toward curb. C. Provide tooled joints at approximately 5 ft. o.c. unless otherwise shown on Drawings. D. Provide expansion joints at approximately 20 ft. o.c. unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 3.7 FINISHING A. Apply light broom finish to curbs and to paving subject to pedestrian traffic unless otherwise shown on Drawings. B. Apply very light broom finish to basketball court. 3.8 CURING A. Immediately upon finishing concrete, apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. B. There shall be no visual evidence of curing materials left on finished work. C. Seal joints with rubberized asphalt, pouring consistency to a depth of approximately 1 @ ". 3.9 FIELD TESTING A. Provide testing in accordance with Section 01405. END OF SECTION placing stops at end of day, time to allow initial set of Drawings but not more than 50 free of debris, suitable to 02510 - 4 CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 02513 ASPHALTIC CIE PAVING 1.4 DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCUDES A. Asphaltic concrete paving and minor preparation. B. Herbicide treatment of subbase. C. Traffic striping and markings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02200 - Earthwork: Preparation of site for paving. B. Section 02510 - Concrete Paving: Curbs, walks and exterior flatwork. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM D242 - Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures B. ASTM D692 - Coarse Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures C. ASTM D977 - Emulsified Asphalt D. ASTM D1073 - Fine Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures E. ASTM D2027 - Cutback Asphalt (Medium - Curing Type) F. ASTM D2028 - Cutback Asphalt (Rapid - Curing Type) G. ASTM D2590 - Test Method for Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nuclear Method H. ASTM D3381 - Viscosity - Graded Asphalt Cement for use in Pavement C Construction I. Current Road and Structures Standards and Specifications of governing State agency. A. Heavy Duty: (Driveways and areas subject to truck traffic). 1. Base Course: 6" (Aggregate) 2. Binder Course: 2" (Hot Mix) 3. Surface (Wearing) Course: 1" (Hot Mix) ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 02513 - '1 . r r I r r r I r A. Transport asphalt concrete mixtures from mixing site in trucks having tight, clean compartments. i i i l i i B. Standard Duty: (Parking Areas) 1. Base Course: 5" (Aggregate). 2.. Surface (Wearing) Course: 2" (Hot Mix). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data and laboratory tested physical properties of asphalt mix proosed to be used in accordance with General Provisions. B. Submit data verifying compliance with governing State Highway Department. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with latest requirements for asphaltic concrete paving of current state Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Provide copy at project site for Architect's reference. 1.7 DELIVERY AND HANDLING B. Coat hauling compartments with lime -water mixture to prevent asphalt concrete mixture from sticking. C. Elevate and drain compartment of excess solution before loading mix. D. Provide covers over asphalt concrete mixture when transporting to protect from weather and to prevent loss of heat. E. During periods of cold weather or for long- distance deliveries, provide insulation around entire truck bed surfaces. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not place asphaltic concrete when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F. or during wet weather conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 02513 - 2 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING A. Herbicide: Use one of the following: Chemical Trade Name Application Rate 80% Bromacil Dupont Hyvar X 20 -lbs /Acre 40% Bromacil Dupont Krovar I 25 lbs /Acre & 40% Diuron 53% Bromacil Dupong Krovar II 25 -lbs /Acre & 27% Diuron 80% Diuron Karamex 20 lbs /Acre B Coarse Aggregates: Natural crushed limestone conforming to ASTM D692. C. Fine Aggregates: Aggregate passing #4 sieve and conforming to ASTM D1073 D Prime Coat: Cut back asphalt conforming to ASTM D2027 Type MC -30; or ASTM D2028 Type RC--30 or RC -70. E. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt; ASTM D977, Type SS -1 diluted with one part water to one part emulsified asphalt. F Asphalt Cement: Viscocity grade AC -20 conforming to ASTM D3381. G Mineral Filler: Rocker or slag dust. hydraulic cement or other inert material complying with ASTM D242. 2.2 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MIX A. Provide asphaltic concrete consisting of mixture of coarse and fine aggregate and asphalt cement mixed thoroughly in proper proportions. Mixture shall have the following physical properties: 1. Stability: a. Heavy Duty: 1500 lbs. minimum. b. Standard Duty: 750 lbs minimum 2 Flow, 0.25mm (o.01 "): a Heavy Duty: Minimum 8 maximum 16 b. Standard Duty: Minimum 8. maximum 18. 3 Percent Air Voids: Not less than 3 nor more than 5 4. Percent Voids Filled with Asphalt: Not less than 74 nor more than 85. 5 Density: Not less than 98% of laboratory mix produced by listed blows of hammer using Marshall Method: Base Course: 1. Materials shall conform to requirements of Section 903.05, Aggregate Grading "B". ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 02513 2 Coarse Aggregate: Crushed limestone graded as follows: Sieve Size % Passing E Mixing Plant: 2" 100 1 1/2" 95 -100 3/4" 65 -95 #4 35-55 #16 15 -45 #100 4 -15 C. Binder and Surface Course: 1 Materials shall conform to requirements of Section 411, Gradation 2 Fine Aggregate: Crushed stone or natural sand graded as follows: Sieve Size % Passing 3/4" 100 1/2" 95 -100 #4 65 -90 #40 20-45 #100 5 -15 2.3 TRAFFIC MARKING PLANT " E " D Asphalt Cement Content: 4.5 to 6.5% as determined by approved job mix formula. 1. Provide with suitable means for heating and drying mineral aggregate. 2 Provide thoroughly dry aggregate. Hot aggregate shall then be passed through suitable screen into storage bin. Proportion aggregates from storage bin into weighing box resting upon scales, and after weighing pass into "Twin Pug" mixer. Heat asphalt cement to temperature of approximately 275 Deg F. weigh and add to material in mixer. 3. Mix materials until every particle of mineral aggregate is completely coated with asphalt cement, and a thoroughly homogeneous mixture provided. Provide mixing period of at least one minute 4. Mixture shall have a temperature of from 250 Deg F to 350 Deg. F upon reaching pavement areas. Loads failing to meet specified temperature range are subject to rejection. A. Alkyd base flat color selected by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 02513 - 4' ASPHALTIC' CONCRETE PAVING 3 1 SUBBASE PREPARATION A. After subgrade has been completed as specified, fine grade and roll surface to even uniform texture free of lumps pockets soft spots and songy areas B. Proof roll prepared subbase to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additonal compaction Notify Architect of unsatisfactory conditions Do not begin paving until deficient subbase areas have been corrected C Apply herbicide over entire area to be paved applying in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. 3 2 PRIM COAT. A Apply to contact surfaces of previously placed asphaltic concrete and surfaces abutting or projecting into asphalting concrete pavement Apply at rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. per sq. yd 3 3 TACK COAT A Apply to contact surfaces of previously placed asphaltic concrete and surfaces abutting or projecting into asphalting concrete pavement Apply at rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. per sq. yd 3 4 BASE COURSE A. Deposit and uniformly spread aggregate base course material Add sufficient water to moisten all particles but not in such quantity to cause segregation of sizes or softening of subgfade B. After aggregate and water have been thoroughly mixed spread base material while at optimum moisture content and compace to uniform thickness. C. Dry density shall be not less than 95% of theoretical density in accordance with AASHTO T99. 3.5 PAVING A Place asphalt concrete mixture on prepared surface spread and strike -off using paving machine B Spread mixture at minimum temperature of 250 Deg. F, plus or minus 10 Deg. F C. Inaccessible and small areas may be placed by hand. D. Place each course at thickness so that when compacted it will conform to indicated grade, cross - section, finish thickness and density specified. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 02513 5 I Sequence of Placing: F 1. Begin placing along centerline of areas to be paved on crowned section, and at high side of sections on one way slope, and in direction of traffic flow. 1 2. After'first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips 3. Complete binder courses for each section before placing surface courses. 4. Place mixture in continuous operation as practicable. F. Hand-Placing: 9 1. Spread, tamp and finish mixture using hand tools in areas where machine spreading is not possible 2. Place mixture at rate that will assure handling and compaction before mixture becomes cooler than acceptable working temperature. L . G. Joints: 1. Carefully make j oints between old and new pavements, or between Y joints P successive days' work to assure continuous bond between adjoining work. 2. Construct joints to have same texture, density and smoothness as adjacent sections of asphalt concrete course 3. Clean contact surfaces free of sand, dirt, or other objectionable material and apply tack coat I. 4. Offset transverse joints in succeeding courses not less than 24 ". IL 5 Cut back edge of previously placed course to expose an even vertical surface to full course thickness. I_ 6. Offset longitudinal joints are irregular honeycombed or inadequately compacted, cut back unsatisfactory sections to expose an even. vertical surface for full course thickness 1 3.6 COMPACTING ASPHALTIC CONCRETE A Provide sufficient rollers to obtain required pavement density. Use self- 1. propelled steel wheeled 10 ton rollers that can reverse direction without backlash. B. Begin rolling operations as soon after placing when mixture will bear weight of roller without excessive displacement 02513 - 6 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING C. Do not permit heavy equipment, including rollers to stand on finished surface before it has thoroughly cooled or set. D. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating place compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. E. Start rolling longitudinally at extreme lower side of sections and proceed toward center of pavement. Roll to slightly different lengths on alternate roller runs. F Do not roll centers of sections first under any circumstances. G. Breakdown Rolling: 1. Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling or transverse and longitudinal joints and outside edge. 2. Operate rollers as close as possible to paver without causing pavement displacement. 3. Check crown, grade and smoothness after breakdown rolling. 4. Repair displaced areas by loosening at once with lutes or rakes and filling, if required with hot loose material before continuing rolling. H. Second Rolling: 1. Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible while mixture is hot and in condition for compaction. 2. Continue second rolling until mixture has been thoroughly compacted. I. Finsih Rolling: 1. Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks. 2. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained specific density. J. Patching: 1. Remove and replace defective areas. 2 Cut out and fill with fresh hot asphalt concrete. 3. Compact by rolling to specified surface density and smoothness. 4. Remove deficient areas for full depth of course. 5. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel to direction of traffic with edges vertical. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING ' 02513 . 7 6. Apply tack coat to exposed surfaces before placing new asphalt concrete mixture. 7. "Skin Patching" shall not be permitted. 3.7 TOLERANCES A Base Course: After compaction finished surface of base course shall vary not more than 1/2" when tested with a 10 foot straight edge. Compacted thickness shall not vary more than 1/2" from specified thickness B. Surface and Binder Course: Finished surface of binder and surface course shall vary not more than 1/4" when tested with a 10 ft straight edge. Compacted thickness shall not vary more than 1/4" from specified thickness. C. Average of all thickness tests for each course shall not be less than indicated thickness 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: After completion of paving operations, clean surfaces of excess or spilled asphalt materials B. Protection: 1. After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on asphalt concrete pavement until it has cooled and hardened and in no case sooner than 6 hours. 2. Provide barricades and warning devices as required to protect pavement and general public. 3. Cover openings of structures in area of paving until permanent coverings are placed. 3.9 TRAFFIC MARKING APPLICATION A. Clean surfaces to receive striping. B. Apply traffic striping and markings as shown on Drawings For parking stripes provide 4" wide stripes applied with a commercial type striping machine. For directional markings, utilize templates with sharp uniform edges. 3 10 TESTING A. Provide testing as specified in Section 01405 END OF SECTION 02513 - 8 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING tib ION 02700 SITE UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES Underground site utilities piped from local utility company services to within approximately 5 ft. of building. B. Paying fees and other costs related to connecting to local utilities except refundable deposits required by Owner for permanent services. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02200 - Earthwork: Utility trenching. B. Section 15400 - Plumbing: Grade cleanouts. C. Section 15500 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: Gas piping. D. Section 16400 - Service and Distribution 1.3 REFERENCES ASTM Al20 Pipe. Steel. Black and Hot - Dipped Zinc - Coated. (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless for Ordinary Uses B. ASTM C76 - Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer C. ASTM C443 - Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe using rubber gaskets D. ASTM D1785 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Schedules 40 80 and 120 E. ASTM D3033 - Type PSP PCV Sewer Pipe and Fittings F. ASTM D2855 Making Solvent Cement Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings G. AWS D1 1 Structural Welding Code H. NFPA 13 - Standards for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems I. FS SS -C- 153C - Cement Bituminous plastic SITE UTILITIES I Y 1.4 SUBMITTALS r r i i i t t 1 1: 1 A. Submit shop drawings. manufacturer's product data and installation methods proposed in accordance with Section 01300. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not allow trenching during excessively wet conditions which will not provide optimum moisture content of compacted backfill. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE SERVICE AND MATERIAL A. Natural Gas: ASTM Al20, Schedule 40 black steel with factory applied protective coating. B. Domestic Water: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40 with NSF Seal. C. Sanitary Sewer: ASTM C76, Class III reinforced concrete pipe. D. Electric: PVC UL and FM approved. E. Fire Protection: AMA C900, PVC pressure pipe, Class 150 and as approved by NFPA 13. 2 2 PIPE JOINTS AND COUPLINGS A. Natural Gas: 2" and Under, threaded; 2" and larger, welded. B. Domestic Water: PVC, solvent weld; over 4 ", PVC bell and spigot with flexible elastomeric rings, pressure rated. C. Sanitary Sewer: PVC bell and spigot with flexible elastomeric rings non - pressure rated. D. Storm Sewer: Bell and Spigot with rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM C443 or asphaltic joint compound conforming to FS SS C -153C. Use only rubber gaskets under paving. E. Electric: PVC solvent weld. F. Fire Protection: PVC Bell and Spigot with ASTM D1969 flexible elastomeric rings pressure rated. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Valve Boxes: Cast -in -place or precast concrete with cast iron top indicating service. Service weight shall be appropriate for location. B. Fire Hydrants: Standard type in accordance with city standards and NFPA 13. 02700 - 2 SITE UTILITIES C. Inlet Grates: Cast iron and as manufactured by Memphis Machine Works or Neenah Foundry. Service weight appripriate for location. Design shall be bicycle safe. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 02200 for excavating and backfilling of trenches. B. Install piping with even uniform bearing, Provide sand bed or excavate for bell of piping. C. Slope storm sewers not less than 0.5% unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Make joints with rubber seals or fill completely with asphalt mastic leaving no voids or depressions. D. Slope sanitary sewers not less than 1.0% unless othersie shown on Drawings E. Set meter and valve boxes square and even on firm soil with tops flush with adjacent grade. F. Maintain 6 ft. horizontal and 2 ft. vertical separation of domestic water and sanitary sewers. In all cases run water above sewers. G. Provide concrete shock blocks at tees, bends and terminatins of fire protection lines. H. Coat steel pipe with asphaltum paint at joints and where factory coating has been damaged. I. Make solvent weld joints in PVC piping in accordance with ASTM D2855. 3 2 CLEANING AND TESTING A. Test and clean fire protection system in accordance with local and NFPA 13 requirements. B. Test all utilities and piping in accordance with applicable local requirements prior to closing trenches. END OF SECTION 02700 - 3 SITE UTILITIES SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Underground irrigation system, controls valves accessories, and sprink- ler heads. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project Record Documents B. Section 02200 - Earthwork: Site grading and utility trenching. C. Section 02900 - Landscaping: Planting types. D. Section 15400 - Plumbing 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM D1785 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Schedules 40, 80, and 120. B. ASTM D2466 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings Schedule 40. C ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. D. ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent- Cement Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 1.4 SYSTEM DESIGN A. Location of Heads: Design location is approximate. Make minor adjust- ments as necessary to avoid plantings and other obstructions. B. Minimum Water Coverage: 1. Turf aeras 95% 2. Other planting areas 85 % 3. Layout may be modified, if necessary to obtain coverage, to suit manufacturer's standard heads Do not decrease number of heads indicated unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 - 1 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for underground sprinkler system. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for landscape irrigation system including plan layout and details illustrating location and type of heads, valves piping circuits controls and accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products of one of the following: 1. Muellermist Irrigation Co. 2. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp 3. The TORO Co.. Irrigation Div. 4. Weather -Matic Div /Telsco Industries 2.2 MATERIALS A. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D1785. Schedule 40. B. Pipe Fittings: ASTM D2466 socket fittings with ASTM A2564 solvent cement C. Valves: Manufactured by Nibco Crane or Jenkins of type and size indicated and as follows: 1. Provide plastic bodies unless otherwise indicated. 2. Manual Circuit Valves: Globe valves 3. Key - Operated Valves: Manual valves fitted for key operation. 4. Furnish 2 valve keys, 36" long with tee handles and key end to fit valves. 5. Automatic Circuit Valves: Glove valves operated by low -power sole- noid. normally closed. manual flow adjustment. 6. Automatic Drain Valves: Designed to open for drainage when line pressure drops below 3 psi, D. Backflow Preventer: Manufacturer's standard, to suit sprinkler system. 02810 - 2 IRRIGATION SYSTEM E. Sprinkler Heads: Manufacturer's standard unit designed to provide uniform coverage over entire area of spray shown on Drawings at available water pressure, as follows: 1. Bubbler: Fixed pattern, with screw -type flow adjustment. 2. Pop -Up Spray: Fixed pattern, with screw -type flow adjustment and stainless steel retraction spring. F. Valve Box: Precast concrete 1. Valve Cover and Frame: Cast iron with provision for locking. 2. Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3" maximum to 3/4" minimum. 2.3 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM A. General: Furnish low voltage system manufactured expressly for control of automatic circuit valves of underground sprinkler systems. Provide unit of capacity to suit number of circuits as indicated. B. Interior Control Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard with locking cover complying with NFPA 70. C. Transformer: To convert building service voltage to control voltage of 24 volts. D. Circuit Control: Each circuit variable from approximately 5 to 60 minutes. Include switch for manual or automatic operation of each circuit. E. Timing Device: Adjustable, 24 -hour and 7 or 14 day clocks to operate any time to day in a 7 or 14 day period. F. Automatic Moisture Sensing Control: 1. Providde (1) pair of sensors connected to each controller 2. Install sensors at root depth. 3. sensors are to be installed at dryest portion of area to be controlled. 4. Install system in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 1 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A. Excavate trenches straight and true with bottom uniformly sloped to low points. IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 - 3 B. Trench Depth: Excavate trenches to a depth of 3" below invert of pipe unless otherwise indicated. C. Minimum Cover: Provide the following minimum cover over top of installed piping: 1. Supply lines to remote control valves and quick coupling valves 18 ". 2. Control wiring from controller to valves 18 ". 3. Lateral lines to sprinkler heads, 12 "; to rotor pop -up heads 18 ". 4. Control wiring and irrigation piping under concrete or asphalt paving 24 ". D. Backfill with clean material from excavation. Remove organic material as well as rocks and debris larger than 1" diameter. Place acceptable backfill material in 6" lifts. compacting each lift. Compact backfill under paving and walks to 95% Standard Proctor in accordance with ASTM D698. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Backflow Preventer: Provide union on downstream side. Install minimum 6" above highest ground level sprinkler head. B. Circuit Valves: Install in valve box, arrange for easy adjustment and removal. 1. Provide union on downstream side. 2. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate of rated operating pressure required for each sprinkler circuit. 3. Locate valves at least 12" from walks, buildings, walls and other boundaries. C. Piping: Lay pipe on solid subbase uniformly sloped without humps or depressions. 1. For circuit piping, slope to drain valve at least 1/4" to 10 ft. of run. 2. Install PVC pipe in dry weather when temperature is above 40 deg. F. in strict accordance with manufacturer's instruction. 3. Make joints in accordance with ASTM D2855, Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperatures above 40 Deg. F. before resting unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. D. Sprinkler Heads: Flush circuit lines with full head of water and install heads after hydrostatic test is completed. 02810 - 4 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 1. Install lawn heads at manufacturer's recommended heights. 2. Locate part - circle eeads to maintain a minimum distance of 4" from walls and 2" from other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated. E. Automatic Controllers and Wiring: 1. Locate controller in location shown. 2. Connect control lines to controller in sequential arrangement according to assigned identification number of plans. Control lines shall be labeled at controller with permanent non - fading labels indicating identification number of valve controlled. 3. Run wiring along supply line piping wherever practical. Tie wires in bundles at 10 ft. intervals. Place on bottom side of pipe. 4. Locate all splices in junction boxes and indicate on record drawings. 5. Make connections and splices by crimping bare wires with brass connectors and sealing with epoxy resin sealer packs. 6. Provide 24" minimum wiring loop at each control valve and splice location. Coil loops neatly in boxes. 3.3 TESTING A. Hydrostatic Test: Test water piping and valves before backfilling trenches to a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 100 psi or as required by applicable codes. Piping may be tested in sections to expedite work. Remove and repair piping, connections and valves which do not pass hydrostatic testing. B. Operational Testing: Perform operational testing after hydrostatic testing is completed, backfill is in place, and sprinkler heads adjusted to final position. C. After completion of grading, seeding or sodding and rolling of grass areas, carefully adjust lawn sprinkler heads so they will be flush with or not more than 1/2" above finish grade. END OF SECTION IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 - 5 L i i I SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparation of landscaped areas. B. Seeding, sodding and fertilizing. C. Planting and mulching, D. Protection and maintenance. E. Distribution. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02200 - Earthwork: Utility trenching finish grading of site, and stockpiling of top soil. 1 .... 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit complete planting schedule and list of materials. C. Submit rate of application for seeding and fertilizing. 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Plants shall comply with requirements of the "American Standards for Nursery Stock" as published by the American Association of Nurserymen. 1.5 TIME OF LANTING A. Limit planting to season or seasons which are normal for such work as determined by weather conditions and by accepted practice in locality and . at such time as approved by Architect. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Guarantee plants and planting for one full growing season but not less than one year from date of acceptance of work specified in this Section. B. Replace damaged, defective or deat plants at no additional cost to Owner. C. Guarantee replacement plants in accordance with paragraph "A" from date of planting. 1.7 MAINTENANCE LANDSCAPING 02900 - 1.. A. Maintain all work from time of planting until final acceptance. Water for maintenance will be provided by Owner. B. Trees or shrubs will not be accepted unles they show healthy growth and satisfactory condition of foilage. C. Maintenance includes watering of trees and shrubs, cultivation, weeding, spraying, pruning, cleaning up and other normal care as appropriate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Bermuda Seed: Commonbermuda, hulled, germination 90% plus, purity 98 %. Application rate, 4 lbs./1,000 sq. ft. B. Rye Seed: Annual rye, germination 90 %, purity 95 %. (Use only when weather conditions will not allow Bermuda seeding.) C. Bermuda Sod: 80% minimum bermuda grass, strongly rooted, free of pernicious weeds, mowed to uniform height of 3" before lifting and of uniform thickness with not less than one inch of topsoil. D. Fertilizer: Commercial grade, 10 -10 -10 formula conforming to U.S. Department of Agricultural standards delivered in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's guaranteed analysis and mixture. Application rate, 40 lbs../1,000 sq. ft. E. Lime: Ground limestone consisting of not less than 85% total carbonates ground to a fineless that will allow 50% to pass 100 mesh sieve and 90% to pass 20 mesh sieve. F. Peat Moss: Brown granulated sphagnum moss conisisting of at least 78% partially decomposed stems and leaves, free of sticks, stone or foreign matter. G. Topsoil: Natural friable, loamy and free from heavy clay, coarse sand, stones, lumps, roots, sticks and other foreign materials. H. Sand: Clean, dry, sharp, pit sand and free of refuse. (Use to level small areas as necessary.) I. Mulch: Clean dry commercially prepared pine bark nuggets. Free of stones roots, fibers and other objectionable matter. Use oat or wheat straw only on lawns. J. Tree Stakes: Sound wood of uniform size and free of knots and holes, not less than nominal 2" x 2" square or less than two feet in length and shall be pointed at one end. 02900 - 2 LANDSCAPING K. Guy Wires: 12 gauge annealed galvanized steel with two -ply fibre bearing garden hose, 3/4" diameter, for protection. L. Tree Tape: First quality. 4" wide rolls of bituminous impregnated tape specifically manufactured for tree wrapping. 2.2 WATER A. Water for installation of this work shall be provided under Section 01500. Provide hose and hose connections from location where water will be furnished. 2.3 PLANTS A. Plants General: 1. Nursery grown. 2. Grown under climatic conditions similar to those in locality of project. 3. Freshly dug. No heeled -in or cold storage plants will be accepted. 4. Typical of their species or variety and shall have normal growth habit. 5. Sound, healthy and vigorous, well- branches and densely foliated when in leaf and have healthy, well - developed root system. 6. Free of disease, insect eggs, pests and larvae. B. Trees shall have straight trunks unless otherwise noted on Drawings or plant material list and old abrasions and cuts shall be completely callused over. C. Measure trees and shrubs with branches in normal position. Height and spread dimension specified refer to main body of plant and not from branch tip to tip. Measure caliper of trees 12" above ground level. No trees shall have their leaders cut or so damaged that cutting is necessary. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LAWN PREPARATION A. Fine grade soil evenly and parallel to finish grade. B. Disk or scarify subgrade approximately 3" deep and evenly distribute topsoil. C. Remove sticks, stones, roots, debris and rubbish. D. Apply fertilizer evenly at specified rate. LANDSCAPING 02900 - 3 ' 3.2 SEEDING A. Sow seed evenly at specified rate and lighly rake into topsoil. B. Mulch with oat or wheat straw, thoroughly water and maintain until growth until established. 3.3 SODDING A. Lay sod as soon as possible after delivery to prevent deterioration. B. Solid Sodding: Place sod evenly and uniformly with snug joints providing full coverage. Do not overlap pieces. D. 3.4 A. C. Roll sodded areas and saturate sod and upper Do not place sod on mud DIGGING AND HANDLING Dig balled and burlapped (BB) plants with firm natural ball of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to include all fibrous and feeding roots. Plants with broken or cracked balls will not be accepted. B. Balled and burlapped plants which cannot be planted immediately upon delivery shall be set on ground and well - protected with soil, wet moss, straw or other acceptable material. 3.5 PLANT PIT PREPARATION or soft spots. A. Excavate plant pits with vertical sides in accordance with following outline of sizes: 1. Trees: At least 2 ft. greater in diameter than diameter of ball or spread of roots and at least 2 -1/2 ft. below finish grade. 2. Shrubs: Excavate pits one foot greater diameter than ball and 18" below finish grade at such depths as is necessary to properly set plant at finish grade. B. Adjust depth of pits as necessary to permit minimum of 6" of prepared soil under balls of plants. C. Plants shall be circular in outline. Remove excavated material containing extraneous matter from site. 3.6 SHRUB AND GROUND COVER BED PREPARATION thoroughly water. Water in sufficient amount to 3" of soil. A. Set massed shrubs and ground cover in common beds. 02900 - 4 LANDSCAPING 1 f is i I I . t. t i i 1 B. Prepare beds of planting by cleanly removing all sod from within limits of bed. C. Dig beds to minimum depth of 10" but in no case less than 6" below ball of I . plants. D. Incorporate one bale of peat moss, 6 cu. ft., with soil and 1/4 cubic yad of sand to each 75 sq. ft. of bed area. 3.7 PLANTING A. Soil for backfill in planting areas shall have peat moss thoroughly mixed I. in proportion of one to one. 1M. B. Set plants in center of pit, plumb, straight and at such position that after settlement, crown of plant will be at finish grade. C. After trees are set, tamp soil around roots or ball to fill voids and air pockets. D. Immediately after backfilling, form shallow basin slightly larger than pit with ridge of soil to facilitate watering. E. Stake trees immediately after planting. Plants shall stand plumb after �. staking. F. Wrap trunk of newly planted trees of 2" caliper and over from ground up to first lower branches. 3.8 PRUNING A. Prune each tree and shrub in accordance with standard horticulture practice to preserve natural character of plant as appropriate to its use in landscape design. B. Remove dead wood, suckers, broken, or badly damaged branches. Remove approximately 1/3 of good wood by thinning and shortening branches. C. Paint cuts over 3/4" diameter with tree paint; cover exposed cambium as well as other exposed living tissue. Paint shall be waterproof, adhesive and elastic, antiseptic, free of kerosene, cresote, or other harmful material. 3.9 MULCHING A. Immediately after planting operations are completed, neatly cover pits with 2" layer of pine bark nuggets. Limit of mulch for trees shall be diameter of tree pit, for individual shrubs, 2 ft. diameter; for shrubs massed beds, entire bed shall be coverd. B. Cover seeded areas uniformly with straw. 'LANDSCAPING 02900 - 5 3.10 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Clean debris caused by work of this Section. Wash walks and paved surfaces clean. B. Remove weeds and grass from planting beds. C. Cut grass in newly sodded areas to approximately .3" height. D. Protect work in accordance with Section 01620. END OF SECTION r t PART 1 - GENERAL I. i is i i i SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CQi'TE 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete formwork. B. Concrete Reinforcement and accessories. C. Cast -in -place Concrete, curing and finishing. D. Granular fill and vapor retarder. E. Installation of expansion and control joint accessories and other embedded items. F. Grouting 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01405 - Testing Laboratory Services: Requirement for field testing. B. Section 02200 - Earthwork: Preparation of subbase. C. Section 02510 - Concrete Paving: Exterior paving (flatwork). D. Divisions 15 & 16: Mechanical and Electrical; Concrete pads for equipment. 1.3 TESTING A. Provide inspection, sampling and testing of cast -in -place concrete in accordance with Section 01405. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 315 - Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures. C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. D. ACI 347 - Recommended Practices for Concrete Formwork. E. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. F. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE' 03300 - 1 G. ASTM C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete. H. C150 - Portland Cement I. C171 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. J. ASTM C260 - Air - Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. K. ASTM C330 - Lightweight Agregates for Structural Concrete. L. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. M. ASTM C618 - Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. N. ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (non- extruding and resilient bituminous types). O. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. P. CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice. Q. ASTM D4397 - Polyethylene Sheet for construction Industrial and Agricultural Applications. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit two copies of laboratories trial mix designs proposed in accordance with ACI 301 Method 1. or one copy each of 30 consecutive test results and mix design used from record of past performances in accordance with ACI 301, Method 2. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to applicable requirements 347. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 03300 - 2 of ACI Publications 301, 315, 318, and B. Provide copy of each publication at job site for Architect's reference during progress of this work. A. Maintain temperature of cast -in- oplace concrete at notless than 50 deg. F. nor more than 90 deg. F. for a time period sufficient to assure proper hydration and curing. B. Refer to Part 3 for hot and cold- weather concreting requirements. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK A. Plywood: B -B plyform, Class I or II bearing APA label. B. Lumber: Any commercial softwood species, #2 or better grade, surfaced four sides. C. Steel: rigid construction with smooth surfaces free of irregularities and dents. D. Special Shapes: Steel or glass fiber type specifically designed and engineered for purpose used. Forms incorporated into concrete shall be biodegradable. E. Round Columns: Spirally wound laminated fiber with factory applied release agent on contact surfaces. F. Form Sealers: Non - staining, non- absorbant colorless, and manufactured specifically for use as release agent; sealers shall not affect bond of specified finishes. G. Ties and Spreaders: Standard metal snap ties with 1 -1/2" break -back. 2.2 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT A. Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60. B. Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. C. Accessories: 1. As recommended in ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" or the CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice" unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 2. Use noncorrosive accessories in concrete work exposed to weather and areas receiving paint or left exposed. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1; use one brand only. B. Aggregates: For lightweight concrete. use ASTM C330; for normal weight. use ASTM C33 as modified below: 1. Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not exceed 1/5 narrowest dimension between forms: 1/3 thickness of unreinforced slabs; or 3/4" minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars. 2. Maximum absorption of course aggregate five percent. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3 ' 3. Unless noted otherwise, all aggregate for all concrete exposed to weather shall be limestone. 2.4 CONCRETE ADDITIVES A. Provide admixtures manufactured, serviced and warranted by an established admixture company with conformed past record of servicing types of concrete obtained with materials proposed for this project. B. Select admixture proportions by past field experience or by laboratory mixes and conform to the following specifications: 1. Air- entraining Admixtures: ASTM C260. 2. Fly Ash Pozzolans: ASTM C618. 3. Water- Reducing and Set - Controlling Admixtures: ASTM C494. C. Add admixtures only at mix plant or at job site by mix plant personnel. 2 5 EXPANSION AND CONTROL JOINT MATERIALS A. Control Joints: 1. Tooled or saw cut (dummy) joints 25% of slab depth. 2. Where joints will be covred by flooring material plastic strips with removable cap may be used. Depth same as tooled or cut joints. B. Construction Joints: Metal or wood keyway form with provisions for extending reinforcing through joints, C. Expansion Joint Filler: 1. Interior: Granulated cork conforming to ASTM D1752, Type II with provisions for 1/2" sealant. 2. Exterior: Asphalt impregnated cellular fiberboard conforming to ASTM D1751 with provisions for backer rod and sealant. 2.6 VAPOR RETARDER A. ASTM D4397, clear 6 mil. polyethylene film below grade type. 2.7 CURING MATERIALS A. Use one of the following: 1. Liquid Compound: "Masterseal" as manufactured by Master Builders or "Super -Rez -Seal" manufactured by Euclid. 2. Sheet Material: ASTM C171. 2:8 GRANULAR FILL A. Washed fill sand free from organic and deleterious matter, graded 100% passing #4 sieve and 3% maximum *300 sieve. 03300 - 4 CAST -.IN -PLACE CONCRETE 2.9 GROUT A. Provide 3,000 psi class Portland Cement grout of pouring consistency at: 1. Bond Beams 2. Concrete Block Lintel Beams 3. Concrete Masonry Units Below Grade 4. Other locations shown. B. Non- Shrunk Grout: CRD-C 621, factory pre -mixed following: (Non - Metallic) 1. "Masterflow 2. "Sonogrout" 3. "EUCO -NS" - 4. "Crystex" - 5. "Horngrout" 6. "Supreme" - 2.10 CONCRETE MIXED AND PROPORTIONING A. Site -cast concrete, unless otherwise specifically permitted by Architect, shall be ready mixed in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Concrete exposed to weather shall contain 4 to 6 percent air - entrained by volume. C. Concrete shall conform to class, proportion and slump requirements as listed in Tables 1 and 2 following: Location 713" - Master Builders - Sonneborn- Contech Euclid Chemical Co. L &M Const. Chemical Co. - A.C. Horn Gifford -Hill Reinforced Foundation Walls (Not Exposed) Footings, & Pilings Reinforced Slabs, Beams & Walls Columns & Bond Beams Exterior Walks, Curbs, Paving, & Exposed Walls Slabs on Ground Balconies (Struct. Lightweight) All Other Locations CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 1 3,000 3,000 4 selected from one of the Slump (Inches) Class *Maximum Minimum (PSI) 3,000 4 2 5 5 4 2 3 2 3,000 4 2 3,000 3 2 3,000 5 3 *Maximum slump of concrete (flowable) obtained with use of water - reducing and set - controlling admixtures may be increased to 7 ". 03300 - • A. 3.2 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. 03300 - 6 Maximum permissible water /cement ratio, by weight. Provide 4 ozs. of water- reducing agent per 100 lbs. of cement in all mixes. Specified Compressive Strength at 28 Days 3,000 psi 0.56 4,000 psi 0.57 2.11 ALLOWABLE STRENGTH TOLERANCES A. Strength level of concrete will be acceptable provided: 1. No individual test results and average strength test results equal or exceed 2. 90% of test results and average of strength test results equal or exceed PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION CONSTRUCTION OF FORMS TABLE 2 Non -Air Air Entrained Entrained 0.50 5.25 0.48 6.25 of all sets of three specified strength. al sets of three specified strength. Min. 94 lb. Bags /Cu. Yd. consecutive consecutive Examine installed work of other trades and verify that embedded items are in place. Conform to ACI 301 and 347 unless modified by this Section. Forms shall conform to shapes, lines and dimensions as shown on Drawings and shall be mortar tight. Properly brace, shore and secure forms together to maintain position shape and to assure safety to personnel. Use plywood or steel exclusively to form exposed concrete unless otherwise shown or approved by Architect. Construct forms straight, true and even with tolerances as specified. Bulging or "piliowing" of surfaces shall not be allowed. Apply release agent according to manufacturer's printed instructions. Apply prior to setting reinforcements and embedded items. Side forms for footings may be omitted provided concrete is placed against firm evenly cut earth without cave -ins. CAST- IN-PLACE CONCRETE H. Set steel frames, angles and sleeves, bolts, inserts, reglets and anchors accurately and secured into position before concrete is placed. I. Form slab0 -on -grade construction joints with metal keyways with provisions to allow reinforcing to extend through joints. J. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and locations of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. K. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt orother debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms and bracing after concrete placement as required to eliminate mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations. M. Chamfer exposed corners and edges- using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. 3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. Place reinforcing steel in accordance with referenced standards and Drawings, adequately secured in position by proper accessories and ties. B. Clean reinforcing; remove shipping tags and items not specified to be embedded in concrete. C. Do not deviate from spacing or alignments; add reinforcing to compensate for adjustment required by openings and embedded items. 3.4 PLACING GRANULAR FILL A. Place fill evenly, uniformly and tamp firmly in place. 3.5 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. B. Lap and seal joints and openings to prevent moisture penetration and water loss during placing concrete. 3.6 PLACING EXPANSION ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Install where shown but not more than 15 ft. o.c. each way. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 .- 7 B. Construction Joints: Install where concrete placing stops at end of day, where concreting is interrupted for length of time to allow initial set of concrete, and where shown. C. Expansion Joints: Install where shown but not more than 50 ft. o.c. each way. Leave clean and free of debris suitable to receive sealant. 3.7 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with referenced codes and standards. Conform to ACT 301 and 318 unless modified by these Specifications. B. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods that will prevent contamination, separation, excessive drying and loss of materials. C. Place concrete consistently and continuously until panel or section is complete. Do not pour greater area at one time than can be properly finished. D. Do not place concrete on frost, ice and frozen surfaces. E. Do not use retempered concrete. F. Remove items used to facilitate placing concrete unless designed or specified to remain. G. Do not add water to ready -mixed concrete at job site. 3.8 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING A. Conform to requirements of ACI 306 unless modified by this Section. Cold Weather Concreting procedures are applicable when concrete is subject to damage by cold weather. B. Temperature of concrete when placed shall not be less than 65 deg. F. Maintain concrete temperatures at not less than 50 deg. F by the following method(s): 1. Insulated forms. 2. Heated mix materials. 3. Admixtures as specified. 4. Heated enclosures. 5. Other methods standard to the industry. C. Do not heat mix water above 165 deg. F. D. Replace cncrete damaged by cold weather. 3.9 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING A. Conform to requirements of ACI 305 unless modified by this Section. Hot Weather Concreting procedures are applicable when concrete is subject to damage by hot weather. 03300 - 8 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE B. Place and maintain concrete at temperature not to exceed 90 deg. F by the following method(s): 1. Lower temperatures of mix materials. 2. Moisten subgrade and form surfaces; leave no standing water. 3. Plan for quicker- than -nrmal placing. 4. Admixtures as specified. 5. Shorten delivery time. 6. Other methods standard to the industry. 3.10 ALLOWABLE FINISH TEOLERANCES A. Slabs: Class B; 1/4" in 10 ft. using 10 ft. straightedge in any direction. B. Other Formed Surfaces: Comply with tolerance limits listed in ACI 301. C. Measure tolerances from common line parallel to respective surface. Tolerances are non - accumulative. 3.11 MISCLELANEOUS CONCRETE A. Provide concrete pads for mechanical and electrical equipment on grade and in other locations shown on Drawings. B. Provide 12" square by 9" deep concrete pads at plumbing grade cleanouts. 3.12 FINISHES A. Trowel interior slabs to smooth, hard finish. Do not begin troweling until bleed -water sheen has evaporated and concrete will sustain foot pressure with only a slight indention. B. Apply rubbed finish to interior and exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise shown on Drawings. C. Apply broom finish to exterior slabs unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 1. Draw broom from center of panel or section to edge in one continuous stroke with adjacent strokes slightly overlapping. 2. Execute brooming operation so that corrugations produced in surface will be uniform in appearance and not more than 1/16" in depth. 3. Complete brooming before concrete is in such condition that surface will be torn or unduly roughened. CAST -IN -PLACE 03300 - 9 E 3.13 CURING A. Immediately upon finishing concrete, apply one of specified curing materials listed under Part 2 in manner to assure proper hydration. B. If liquid curing material is used, apply in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. If wet curing option is chosen, moisten surface of slabs by fogging prior to covering with plastic sheets, waterproofing paper or wet sand. Maintain curing for not less than 7 days. D. Leave no visual evidence of curing materials on finished work. 3.14 GROUTING A. Fill bond beams, lintel blocks, concrete masonry units below grade, and where shown with portland cement grout. B. Use non-shrink grout for setting steel column base plates, metal fabrications in sleeves, and where shown. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide inspection, sampling and testing of cast -in- place concrete in accordance with Section 01405. l SECTICO 03510 GYPSUM CTE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Gypsum concrete floor underlayment. B. Minor substrate preparation. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Plywood substrate 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals under provisionsof Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's product data, mix design and installation instruc- tions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer's authorized applicator. 2. At least 5 years experience and shall have completed 5 projects of comparable size and complexity to this project. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's unopened containers. Store contain- erized materials in enclosed areas protected from contamination. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Before, during and after instalation, maintain building interior at or above 50 deg. F. B. Provide adequate ventilation until underlayment is dry. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULEING A. Install gypsum concrete underlayment only after gypsum board has been installed, taped and finished (mudded). PART 2 - PRODUCTS GYPSUM CONCRETE 03510 - 1 r r f. r i r L 1 I i 1 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Gyp -Crete Corp.; Hamel, MN. B. Substitutions will be considered only under provisions of Section 01630. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Gypsum Cement: Gyp -Crete 2000 Floor Underlayment compound. B. Sand: Comply with manufacturer's Specification 101. C. Water: Potable, free from impurities. D. Primer: Gyp -Crete Floor Primer. 2.3 MIXES A. 1.8 cubic feet of sand per 80 -1b bag. Minimum compressive strength, 1,550 psi. B. Primer: 1 part primer to 8 parts water. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate prior is sound and properly secured. Beginning installation indicates acceptance of substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Broom clean substrate prior to installing gypsum concrete. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install gypsum concrete in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Apply to minimum thickness of 3/4 ". C. Do not interrupt placement of gypsum concrete until entire section or area is completed. Place material in one layer. D. Immediately after placement, screed and level to required thickness and trowel to smooth, even plane. Use care to prevent spattering of surrounding structure and walls. 3.4 PRIMER A. Apply primer only to areas scheduled to receive adhered finishes; apply at the rate of 200 square feet per gallon. ='' 03510 - 2 GYPSUM CONCRETE i 3.5 PROTECTION A. Where additional adjacent work is required, provide wood boards for pathways and in areas of work. END OF SECTION SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Portland Cement -Lime mortar. B. Load bearing and non -load bearing concrete unit masonry. C. Face brick. D. Joint reinforcing, ties and anchores. E. Built -in masonry. F. Wall and sill flashing. G. Installation of products furnished under other Sections. 1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Loose angles, bearing plates and anchor bolts furnished under 05500. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications B. Section 10305 - Prefabricated Fireplaces 1.4 ALLOWANCE A. Provide an allowance for face brick under provisions of Section 01020. 1.5 REFERENCES A. ASTM A153 - Zinc - Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware B. ASTM C5 - Quicklime for Structural Purposes C. ASTM C62 - Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units made From Clay or Shale) D. ASTM C64 - Refractories for Incinerators and Boilers E. ASTM C90 - Hollow Load- Bearing Concrete Masonry Units F. ASTM C91 - Masonry Cement G. ASTM C105 - Ground Fire Clay as a Refactory Mortar for Laying -Up Fireclay Brick H. ASTM C129 - Non -Load- Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. I ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. J. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. K. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. L. ASTM C216 - Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale) M ASTM C315 - Clay Flue Linings. N. BIA - Brick Institute of America's "Technical Notes ". 0. NCMA - National Concrete Manufacturer 's Association's "A Manual of Facts on Concrete Masonry ". P. UL 618 - Concrete Masonry Units. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 1 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's certification of compliance with reference standards and specifications. C. Submit 2 copies of color chart on mortar colors. D. Samples: Submit samples of masonry units if specifically requested by the Architect. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Brick masonry shall conform to recommendations of BIA. B. Concrete unit masonry shall conform to recommendations of NCMA. 1.8 MOCK -UP A. Erect 48" square sample panel on site in location as directed by Architect. panel shall indicate texture of masonry units, color range mortar color, bond and joint tooling. B. Approved panel shall represent standards of workmanship for work specified in this Section and shall remain intact until masonry has been completed and approved. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not erect masonry when ambient temperature is below 35 deg. F. unless otherwise specifically approved by Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Masonry Cement: 1. Above Grade: 2. Below Grade: ASTM C91, Type N. ASTM C91, Type M. ASTM C150, Type 1. B. Portland Cement: C. Lime: 1. Quicklime: ASTM C5 2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207 Type N. D. Sand: ASTM C144. E. Water: Potable from local utility supply. 04200 - 2 UNIT MASONRY F. Mortar Coloring: Inorganic, natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Color selected by Architect. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Solomon Grind -Chem Services, Inc. "SGS Mortar Colors" b. Davis Colors "True Tone Mortar Colors." 2.2 MORTAR MIXES A. One of the following mixes by volume, may be used: 2. 1 part masonry cement 2 -2 -1/2 to 3 parts sand B. Manufacturer: For pre -mixed masonry cement, use a single brand of a single manufacturer throughout project. 2.3 BRICK 1. 1 part Portland Cement, non - staining 1 part lime putty 4 -1/2 to 6 parts sand A. Face Brick: ASTM C62, Grade SW. Type FBS modular size (7 -5/8" long by 2- 1/4" high by 3 -5/8" thick). 1. Texture and Color: As selected by the Owner. B. Common Brick: ASTM C62, Grade SW. (For use only where not exposed to view) . 2.4 STANDARD CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Quality: 1. Load Bearing: Lightweight, ASTM C90, Grade N, Type 1 (moisture - controlled units). 2. Non -Load Bearing: Lightweight, ASTM C129, Type 1 (moisture- controlled units) . 3. Fire - Rated: Lightweight, ASTM C90, Grade N, Type 1 (moisture - controlled units). Comply with UL 618. B. Cure units by autoclave process at minimum temperature of 350 deg. F. and minimum pressure of 125 psig. Linear drying shrinkage not to exceed 0.025 %. C. Size: Nominal 16" long by 18" high by thickness shown. D. Color & Texture: Grey or neutral with uniform texture. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 3 2.5 CMU JOINT REINFORCING A. Manufacturer: Dur - O-Wal, Inc. 1. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a. AA Wire Products Co. b. Heckman Building Products, Inc. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. B. Type: Truss type; prefabricated tees and corners. C. Grade: Standard duty, 9 gauge side and cross rods. D. Finish: 1. Walls exposed to Exterior: Hot -dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. 2. Interior Walls: Brite. E. Size: Approximately 2" less than nominal width. 2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Manufacturer: Dur - O-Wal, Inc. 1. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a. AA Wire Products Co. b. Heckman Building Products, Inc. c. Hohman & Barnard, Inc. B. At Concrete Walls and Columns: D/A #100 dovetail slots and #101 corrugated anchors; hot -dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. C. At Steel Columns: D/A #709 -711, 1/4" anchors and 3/16" triangular shaped ties; hot -dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. D. Masonry Back Up: D/A #515. adjustable rectangular type, eye and pintle sections, 3/16" diameter, hot -dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. Lengths appropriate for wall conditions. E. Wood Studs: D/A CWT, 7/8" x 7" x 22 gauge, corrugated hot -dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A513. Secure with 8d hot -dip galvanized nails. F. Metal Studs: D/A #207 triangular shaped 3/16" diameter, hot -dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153 and with adjustable slotted bracket secured to wall with cadmium plated screws. 04200 - 4 UNIT MASONRY f 1 r L i I i 2.7 FIREPLACE MATERIALS A. Fire Brick: ASTM C64. B. Fire Clay: ASTM C105. C. Flue Liner: ASTM C315. D. Damper: Cast iron with poker control, size appropriate for fireplace. 2.8 MEMBRANE FLASHING A. Wall, spandrel, and Sill Flashing: Nervastral 20 mil. H -D elastomeric type as manufactured by Rubber and Plastics Compound Co.. Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MIXING AND PLACING MORTAR A. Measure each batch of materials before placing in mixer in accordance with BIA recommendations. Do not use the "shovel" method for measuring sand. B. Machine mix dry materials for approximately 2 minutes. Add optimum amount of water gradually and mix for an additional 3 minutes. Total mixing time, 5 minutes minimum. C. For brickwork, add mortar coloring with dry materials and thorrroughly blend before adding water. D. Place mortars in final position within 2 -1/2 hours after mixing. Mortar may be retempered within 2 hours after mixing. E. Mortar Grout: Mix with required amount of water to achieve pouring consistency. Continuously stir to prevent segregation of materials. F. Pointing Mortar: Mix as dry a consistency as sufficiently plastic to be worked into joints. G. Hand mixing of mortar may be permitted for work with Architect's approval. H. Do not use admixtures, antifreeze compounds or acc 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Lay out horizontal jointing to minimize cutting. with motor - driven saw. B. Place units in mortar with full bed and head joint C. Lay units within one minute after spreading mortar UNIT MASONRY will produce a mortar requiring small batches elerators. Cut masonry units only s. 04200 - 5 i D. Keep cavities clean and free of mortar droppings. E. Do not use chipped, cracked or broken units. Immediately remove rejected units. 3.3 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY A. Lay concrete block walls with 3/8" tooled concave joints in running bond, plumb, level and true to lines and dimensions shown. B. Align vertical cells to maintain clean, unobstructed system of flues. C. Install reinforcing as specified at 16" o.c. vertically and as recommended by manufacturer. Lap joints minimum of 6 ". Install prefabricated tees and corners. D. Partitions and walls shall extend to and be finished tight against structure above unless otherwise shown. Provide for passage of ducts, pipes and conduit with neat pointing. 3.4 BRICK MASONRY A. Lay face brick in running bond, plumb, level and true to lines and dimensions shown. B. Tool exposed face brickwork with concave joints unless shown otherwise. C. Bond brickwork to backup with ties as specified or as shown. Three bricks and three joints shall equal 8 ". D. Provide weep holes directly above flashing. Space weeps at 24" o.c. unless shown otherwise. E. Install flashing in accordance with Section 07600. 3.5 WALL, SPANDREL AND SILL FLASHING A. Install thrwall flashing at lintels and sills in exterior walls and as shown on Drawings. B. Lap end joints a minimum of 4" and seal. C. Provide end dams at flashing terminations at sills and headers. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF WEEPS A. Provide weeps directly above flashing. Space weeps at 24" o.c. unless otherwise shown. B. Form weep holes by pressing short lengths of 5/16" diameter sash cord into joints as brickwork is laid up; when mortar has sufficiently set, pull sash cord. 1. Option: Weeps may be achieved by omitting mortar in head joints at 24" o.c. 04200 - 6 UNIT MASONRY 3.7 INSTALLATION OF TIES AND ANCHORS A. Install dovetail slots full height where ends of partitions and walls abut concrete; install ties at 16" o.c. vertically. B. Where masonry is installed parallel to concrete walls, install dovetail slots vertically at 24" o.c. and install ties at 16" o.c. C. Where masonry abuts steel columns, weld anchors to columns at 16" o.c. to allow ties to be spaces at center of masonry joints and facilitate horizontal and vertical movement. D. Place brick ties at 24" o.c. horizontally and 16" o.c. vertically. 3.8 FIREPLACE A. Construct fireplace as shown and in accordance with recommendations of BIA Tech Notes 19A through 19E and Donley Brothers Company's "Book of Successful Fireplaces ". 3.9 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation: 1. From masonry unit to adjacent units, 1/8 ". 2. From vertical and horizontal building lines. 1/4 ". 3. From cross sectional thickness of walls, plus or minus 1/4 ". B. Maintain head joint alignment to plus or minus 1/4" from plumb line. 3.10 POINTING AND CLEANING A. Upon completionm of work, point up exposed masonry work, fill joints, remove loose mortar. cut out defective joints and repaint where necessary. B. Thoroughly wet panel or section immediately prior to beginning cleaning operations. C. Thoroughly clean exposed brickwork using bucket and brush method as specifically recommended by BIA Tech. Note #20 for specific brick type used. Properly protect adjacent work during cleaning process. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Protect newly laid masonry work from freezing until mortar has completely set. Heating methods, where used, shall be as recommended by NCMA and BIA and approved by Architect. B. Cover masonry at end of each days work to prevent water entering cvities. END OF SECTION UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 7 SECTION 05500 P ThL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items. B. Loose angles, plates and anchor bolts. 1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTIN A. Furnish sleeves, anchor bolts and embedded items to Section 03300. B. Furnish loose angle lintels to Section 04200. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast - in-Place Concrete: Handrail post sleeves B. Section 04200 - Unit masonry C. Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing as scheduled. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM A36 - B. ASTM A47 - C. ASTM A307 D. ASTM A325 E. ASTM A501 F. AWS D1.1 - 1.5 SUBMITTALS Structural Steel Malleable Iron Castings - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners - High - Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints - Hot - Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing Structural Welding Code A. Submit shop drawings indicating materials, methods of fabrication and installation details in accordance with Section 01300. B. Approval of shop drawings does not constitute Owner's acceptance of responsibility for design adequacy of connections designed by fabricator as part of hs preparation of shop drawings. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store miscellaneous fabricated steel items above ground on wood skids or pallets. Protect from moisture, dirt and damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS METAL FABRICATIONS ' 05500 - 1 r r r r r r i D Insofar as practicable shop fabricate all itesms complete and ready for installation. i L i 1 0 r i r 2 1 MATERIALS A. Steel Pipe and Tubing: ASTNI A501. 36 ksi minimum yield. Use seamless type where exposed to view B. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A36 C Nuts and Bolts: ASTM A325 D Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307. E. Handrail Wall Brackets: ASTM A47 malleable iron and as manufactured by Julius Blum Co or J G. Braun Co F Welding Electrodes: As recommended by AWS. G Primer: rust inhibitive type compatible to finish coat schedule in Section 09900. 2 2 FABRICATION A. Verify dimensions on site prior to fabrication. B. Fabricate miscellaneous metal items in strict accordance with Contract Drawings and reference standards. C. Arc -weld all connections unless shown otherwise. Remove burrs. sharp edges and weld spatter by grinding. E. Punch or drill holes required for connections. Burned holes are not permitted. F Immediately after fabrication and preparation, apply one coat of primer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION/PREPARATION A Prior to beginning work specified in this section take necessry field measurements B. Verify that work of other trades is complete enough to allow this installation to properly begin C Supply items to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates and erection drawings to appropriate trades 05500 2 METAL FABRICATIONS 3 2 PAINTING 3.3 INSTALLATION GENERAL A After erection prime welds, abrasions and surfaces damaged during handling and erection Use primer compatible with shop coat use zinc - rich type primer on galvanized surfaces. Where exposed. leave surfaces clean and suitable for finish as scheduled in Section 09900 Fastening to In Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrictions to in -place construction; including, threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts. toggle bolts through bolts lag bolts wood screws and other appropriate connectors. B. Cut drill and fit adjoining work for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications Set work accurately in location alignment and elevation plumb level. true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels C Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction. Fit exposed connections to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. E Grind exposed joints smooth and touch up shop paint coat. Do not weld cut or abrade surfaces of exterior units which have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and intended for bolted or screwed field connections. F. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual sheided metal arc welding appearance and quality of welds made and methods used in correcting welding work. G Setting Loose Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond reducing materials and roughen to improve bond, to surfaces Clean bottom surface of bearing plates. END OF SECTION SECTION 05510 METAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal pan stairs and landings. B. Handrails, guardrails and support brackets. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. B.. C. D. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Wood cap rail. Section 09900 - Painting 1.3 REFERENCES A. B. C. D. E. F. G. 1.4 A B. 1.5 A. ASTM A36 - ASTM A3207 ASTM A325 - AS'IM A501 ASTM A570 • ASTM A611 - AWSD1.1- Structural Steel - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners High - Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints - Hot- Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing • Hot - Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality Steel, Cold - Rolled Sheet, Carbon, Structural Structural Welding Code SUBMITTALS Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01300. Submit complete detailed shop drawings; show sizes, method of assembly, ,anchorage and connections to other work. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricate and erect stairs and railings in accordance with applicable recommendations of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturer's (NAME) "Metal Stairs Manual ", latest edition. B. Design, fabricate and install guards and railings as follows: 1. Guards: Capable of withstanding a concentrated load of 300 lbs. applied in any direction at any point and a uniform load of 100 lbs. /ft. applied in any direction at required guardrail height METAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS 05510 - 1 r r I r PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36. B. Treads and Risers: 14 gauge hot - rolled sheets ASTM 570 1. Option: P;:ecast wear treads of 5,000 psi concret may be used. 1 i 1 i f 2, Handrails: Capable of withstanding a concentrated load of 200 lbs. applied in any direction at any point and a uniform load of 50 lbs /ft. applied in any direction. 3. Infill of Guardrail System: Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of 200 lbs. applied on a one sq. ft. area at any point in system. 4. Concentrated and uniform loads are not considered as acting simultaneously. C. Comply with applicable local codes where more stringent Submit certification of compliance with design criteria with submittal package 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver stair components to job site properly braced and supported to avoid damage caused by racking and twisting B. Store stair components above ground on wood skids or pallets Protect from moisture dirt and damage. C. Landings: 20 gauge, Type B steel deck ASTM A611. D. Rails and Guards: ASTM A501. E. Wall Brackets: ASTM A47, malleable iron; design to match Julius Blum #305 (for square tube) F. Fasteners: 1. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A325. 2. Welding Electrodes: As recommended by AWS G. Primer: Rust- inhibitive type compatible with finish coat scheduled in Section 09900 th. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate metal stairs in accordance with Contract Drawings and reference standards 05510 - 2 METAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS B. Fabricate verticals and laterals of at least 14 gauge steel except where solids are shown. C. Arc -weld all connections unless indicated otherwise. Remove burrs. sharp edges and weld spatter by grinding D. Shop fabricate stairs to maximum extent practicable, complete and ready for installation. E. Punch or drill holes requred for connections. Burned holes are not permitted. F. Thoroughly clean all metal items and apply one coat primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that built-in blocking has been properly installed. B. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for variations where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay the work. C. Provide necessary anchorages drawings . diagrams, templates and instruc- tions for installation of built -in embedded items, 3.2 ERECTION OF STAIRS A. Set stair components in place plumb, level, square and rigidly secured. B. Grind field welds and sharp edges smooth. C. After erection, prime welds abrasions and surfaces damaged during delivery and erection. Leave clean and suitable to receive finish as scheduled in Section 09900. 3 3 INSTALLATION OF GUARDRAILS AND HANDRAILS A. Install handrails and guardrails of uniform height above treads and landings. B. Install handrail and guardrail systems to achieve loading conditions required under quality assurance. END OF SECTION METAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS 05510 - 3 1 1 :. 1 I. i i I . A. Conform to recommendations of national Forest Products Association (NFPA) L SHCTICN 06100 ICOGH air PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCUDES A. Structural floor, wall, roof framing. B. Subfloor, underlayments, wall and roof sheathing. C. Blocking, curbing, grounds and built -in anchorage. D. Equipment backboards. E. Treatment of wood materials for fire and moisture. F. Rough hardware, fasteners and anchorage devices. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork B. Section 06190 - Wood Trusses C. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry 1.3 PRODUCTS A. ANSI b18.2.1 - Square and Hex Bolts and Screws. B ANSI B18.6.1 - Wood Screws, C. AWPB LP2 - Standard for Softwood Lumber, Timber and Plywood Pressure Treated with Waterborne Preservatives for Above Ground Use, D. AWPB LP22 - Standard for Softwood Lumber, Timber and Plywood Pressure Treated with Waterborne Preservatives for Ground Contact. E. Fed. Spec. FF- B -588C - Bolts, Toggle: And Expansion Sleeves, Screw. F. Fed. Spec. FF- N -105B - Nails, Brads, Staples and Spikes, Wire, Cut and Wrought. G. Fed. Spec. FF- P -395B - Pin, Drive, Guided; and Pin, Drive Powder Actuated H. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. I. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standards, 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE "House Framing Manual ". B. Comply with American Plywood Association (APA) installatin recommen- dations. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1 C. Test fire retardant treated materials in accordance with ASTM E84, UL723 or NFPA 255 as required. 1.5 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inside Storage: Place wood materials on appropriately spaced wood skids protected from damage and weather, B. Outside Storage 1. Cover ground of storage area completely with 4 mil. polyethylene sheets. 2. Place wood materials on appropriately spaced wood skids and cover with waterproof sheeting. Do not completely enclose with polyethylene. Allow dfor ventilation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAMING A. Provide framing lumber of any structural grade commercial softwood species except where specifically shown otherwise. 1. Actual Dimensions: conform to PS 20. 2. Surfacing: Surface 4 sides (S4S). 3. Maximum moisture content 19 %. B. Plates: No. 2 or better. C. Studs: Stud grade or better. D. Joints: No. 2 or better, E. Rafters: No. 2 or better. F. Blocking: Utility grade or better. 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS A. GYPSUM SHEATHING 06100 - 2 1. STANDARD: ASTM C 79 2. SIZE: 1/2 inch thick by 24" wide; lengths of 8 or 9 3. CONSTRUCTION: Water - resistant gypsum core with weatherproof asphalt. paper both sides or USG "Triple Sealed", 4. FASTENERS: Space 6" o.c. at edges; 12" o.c. intermediate 5. APPLICATION: Horizontal direction 6. SHEATHING FILM: 4 mil. black plastic; joints lapped 4 "; permanently secured thru tin discs, ROUGH CARPENTRY B. Plywood: 1. Sheathing: APA Structural I or II rated sheathing, Exposure 1. Group 1. 2. Subflooring: APA Rated Sturd -I -Floor Exposure 2, Group 1. 3. Roof Decking: APA Rated Sheathing, Exposure 1, Group 1, 5/8" thick. 4. Telephon/Equipment Backboards: APA, A -D, Group 1, Exposure 1, 3/4" thick. 2.3 ROUGH HARDWARE AND ADHESIVES A. Fasteners: 1. Nails: Cement coated and conforming to Fed. Spec. FF -N -105, 2. Toggle and Expansion Bolts: Comply with Fed. Spec. FF -B -588. 3. Powder Drive (Actuated): Comply with Fed. Spec. FF -P -395. 4. Lag Screws and Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1. 5. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1. B. Adhesive: SFA -66 multipurpose construction adhesive, manufactured by Miracle Adhesives Corp. C. Supports and Connectors: Galvanized steel, as manufactured by Simpson Strong -Tie Co. Inc. Size and type as specifically recommended by manufacturer. 2.4 GRADE STAMPS A. Framing Lumber: Identify framing lumber by grade stamp of Southern Pine Inspection Bureau or Western Wood Products Association. B. Plywood: Identify plywood as to species, grade and glue typeby APA stamp. 2.5 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT (PT) A. Where preservative treated lumber or plywood is specified, treat in accordance with AWPB Standards as follows: 1. AWPB LP -2, above ground application. 2. AWPB LP -22 ground contact application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION OF FRAMING A. Use preservative treated (PT) lumber as follows: 1 Plates and nailers in contact with concrete. 2. Lumber in contact with exterior masonry walls. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - r B. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates for load bearing partitions; single bottom and top plates for non -load bearing partitions. C. Erect framing plumb, square and properly aligned. Studs shall have full and even bearing top and bottom. D. Set plates to concrete slab with powder- driven anchors at 3 ft. c.c. Provide minimum of 2 anchores per piece. use maximum lengths practicable. E. Place crown up on horizontal and sloped members and in same direction of walls. F. Secure members together using nailing schedule as recommended by NFPA and applicable codes. G. Provide temporary bracing until permanent bracing can be applied. H. Blocking: 1. In wood framing, install blocking and bridging at not more than 8 ft. o.c. and as shown. 2. Install blocking for wall door stops, wall rails and toilet accessories. Do not rely on wall finish for support. I. Install fire stopping to conform to applicable codes. J. Fastening Wood to: 1. Wood: Lag bolts, screws, or cement coated wire nails of sizes recommended by NFPA "House Framing Manual" and applicable building code. 2. Concrete: Powder- driven anchors except where bolts or other methods are shown. 3. Jollow Masonry: Toggle bolts appropriately sized. 4. Solid Masonry: Expansion shield and bolt appropriately sized. 3.2 PLYWOOD SUBFLOOR AND DECK INSTALLATION A. Edge nail with 8d nails at 6" o.c.; intermediate 10" o.c. B. Place sheets with face grain perpendicular to supports. C. Install each sheet or panel over two or more spans, single spans are not acceptable. I 06100 - 4 ROUGH CARPENTRY Stagger end joints and locate over supports only. ▪ Provide 1/16" space t end joints and 1/8" at edge joints. F. Apply adhesive to supports immediately prior to placing plywood subflooring. Use waterproof type where creamic tile is scheduled. • Install layer of No 15 felt between multiple layers of subflooring. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY y 06100 SECTION 06190 WOOD TRUSSES 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pre - engineered wood roof trusse. B. Pre - engineered wood and metal floor trusse. C. Steel connectors and gussets. D. Lateral support of trusse. 1.2 .RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: .Wood blocking, curbing, bracing and miscellaneous framing. 1.3 REFERENCES A. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. B, PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. C. NFPA - National Forest Products Association "National Design Specification for Stress Grade Lumber and Its Fastening ", D. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. E. ASTM A90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc - coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawingsin accordance with Section 01300. B. Indicate truss framing plans, species and grades of lumber used; design loading and allowable stress increase; force analysis of each member; pitch span and spacing of trusses; gauge thickness, nominal sizes and locations of connectors at joints; bearing and anchorage details; framed openings; permanent bracing and bridging. C. Prepare shop drawings under seal of a structural engineer licensed in state of project. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Grade stamp lumber used in manufacture of trusses in conformance with NFPA. B. Design Criteria: 1. Live Load: a. Roof: As required by Code. b. Floor: As required by Code. WOOD TRUSSES 06190 - 1 r 2. Dead Load: As applicable. 3. Wind Load: As required by Code. 4. Use more stringent design criteria where required by Code. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store trusses in vertical position resting on bearing ends properly bundled to prevent racking and overturning. B. If constructtion progress does not allow prompt erection of trusse, cover ground of storage area completely with polyethylene sheets. Place wood skids at bearing ends and cover with waterproof sheeting. Do not completely enclose with polyethylene film. Allow for ventilation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLOOR TRUSSES A. Manufacturer: Trus Joist Corp., Boise, ID. Truss Way Inc., Houston, TX. Truss Way, Inc., Orlando, FL. Holmes Lumber, Orlando, FL. 1. Substitutions will be considered only under provisions of Section 01600. B. Type: TJL; 1 -1/2" x 3 -1/23" top and bottom chords; 1" and 1 -1/8" diameter tubular steel webs of 45 000 psi minimum yield. Trusses may be fabricated of all wood construction by supplier of roof trusse. 2.2 ROOF TRUSSES A. Materials as specifically selected by fabricator to accommodate design loads and requirements of this Section. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Assure members are accurately cut to length angle and true to line to provide tight joints. B. Shop apply primer to connectors and gussets. Allow to dry thoroughly before installation. C. Brush apply one coat of wood preservative on members in contact with cementitious materials. Assure sawn ends are protected. PART 3 - EXECUTION 06190 - 2 WOOD TRUSSES r r r i 3.1 ERECTION :A. Set and secure wood trusse with manufacturer's printed drawings. ,Provide temporary bracing permanently secured. . Assure truss ends have sufficient bearing area. . Cutting or altering of members is not permitted. END OF SECTION level, plumb and in correct locations. Comply installatin instructions and fabricator's shop and anchorage to hold trusse in place until Install permanent bracing and bridging prior application of loads Install bracing in diagonal.position her possible. SHCPIQJ 06200 FINISH O RPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Exterior standing and running trim. B. Plywood soffits. C. Exterior cornices. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01600 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and grounds. B. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork: Interior woodwork. C. Section 07920 - Caulking & Sealants. D. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Gypsum board soffits. E. Section 09900 - Painting: On -site finishing. F. Section 10900 - Wardrobe & Closet Specialties. 1.3 REFERENCES A. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. B. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. C. PS 51 - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. D. PS 58 - Basic Hardboard. E. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit detailed shop drawings of millwork items. indicating trim profiles joinery wood species and quality in accordance with Section 01300. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials in enclosed structure well ventilated with min. temperature of 55 deg, F and maximum relative humidity of 55 %. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOFTWOOD LUMBER A. PS 20, graded in accordance with requirements of AWI; maximum moisture content, 10 %. B. Exterior Standing & Running Trim: 1. Painted: Clear, Western Red Cedar, smooth. 2. Wood Handrails: Clear, Yellow Poplar; laminated to achieve sizes and profiles shown. FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 1 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS A. Plywood: 1. Soffits: APA A -C, Exterior (if any). 2. Interior, Exposed One Side: APA A -D, Interior (exterior glue). 2.3 FASTENERS & HARDWARE A. Nails: Size and type to suit application. B. Trim Screws: Type S or S -12, trim head. Length as appropriate. C. Bolts, Lags, Screws: Unless specifically shown, size and type to suit application. Use only hot dipped galvanized fasteners on exterior. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and openigs are complete enough to receive millwork and field measurements are as shown on shop drawings. B. Verify mechanicl, electrical and other items affecting millwork install- ation are in place and ready to receive millwork. C. Verify that affected spaces are closed in, weather -tight and that environmental requirements can be maintained. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF TRIM A. Install plumb, level, true and straight in line with no distortions. B. Stagger joints at adjacent and related members. Fit joints neatly and accurately with adjoining surfaces aligned in same place. C. Make joints to conceal shrinkage; miter outside corners to produce tight fitting joints with full surface contact throughout length of joint; cope inside corners; scarf end to end joints. D. Install door window, corner and cornice trim in single unjointed length for runs less than maximum length of lumber available. For longer runs use maximum lengths available to minimize number of joints; join only at supports. E. Blind nail where possible, use finishing nails where exposed, F. Predrill as required for fasteners to avoid splitting of wood. END OF SECTION 06200 - 2 FINISH CARPENTRY SBCTIa 06400 AICHITECTURAL Wl70Dh10RK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTIONS A. Interior standing and running trim. B. Stile and rail paneling. C. Shop fabricated architectural cabinetwork. D. Countertops E. Cabinet Hardware F. Finishing 1.2 RELATED SECTINS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Grounds and support framing. B. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Exterior carpentry work. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C503 - Marble Building Stone (Exterior) B. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program, fifth edition. C. FS MMM -A -130 - Adhesive Contact D. NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates E. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood F. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard G. PS 51 - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood H. PS 58 - Basic Hardboard 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology and definitions are bsed on AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Pro- gram", fifth edition, 1988. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit shop drawings indicating materials, hardware and fabricatin details. C. Submit 2 laminated plastic samples of each type specified. ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400 1 2.1 LUMBER 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to AWI recommendations. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. Deliver cabinetwork to job site, packaged and properly protected from damage. B. Store in enclosed structure, properly heated and ventilated. Provide minimum 55 deg. F and maximum 50% relative humidity. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Softwood Lumber: 1. Where exposed, APA A -B, Group 1, Exposure 1. 2. Where concealed APA A -D, Group 1, Exposure 1. B. Particle Board: 45 -1b. density, Type 1, 3/4" thick unless otherwise shown on Drawings. C. Hardboard: PS 58 tempered. D. Fiberboard: ANSI 208.2, medium density (MDF), 45 -1b. density. E. Decorative Laminate (HPDL): 1. Manufacturer: Formica Nevamar, Pioneer, or WilsonArt and conforming to NEMA LD3. 2. Tops: GP50 General Purpose (0.05 "). 3. Cladding: GP28 General Purpose (0 028 "). 4. Liners: CL20 Cabinet Liner (0.02 "). F. Display Paneling: 1. Type: "Omniwall" as manufactured by Spacewall Internation. 2. Plywood with plastic surface: T -lip construction silver finish. 2.3 STILE & RAIL PANELING A. Lumber: C & Btr select ponderosa pine 3/4" thick. B. Panels: Ponderosa pine veneer on particle board or veneer core 3/4" thick and solid lumber. C. Grade: Custom in accordance with AWI Section 500, Division C. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS A. Adhesive: Fed. Spec. MMM -A -130. type selected by fabricator to suit application. 06400 - 2 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK r r is I. L i i i I l i B. Marble: ASTM C503, Grade A; finish Negro Marquina• 2.5 CABINET HARDWARE A. Hinges: Stanley #1501 series . self closing type bright nickel finish. Provide 175 deg. wher shown. B. Pulls: 1. Hinged Doors: Porcelain and brass as shown. C. Drawer Glides: K & V #1300. D. Adjustable Shelf Hardware: 1. Supports: K & V #333, Steel with zinc plated finish. 2.6 FABRICATION GENERAL A. Fabricate cabinetwork in accordance with AWI standards and requirements Section 400 and Contract Drawings. 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Construction: Stile and rail with exposed face frame. B. Assemble cabinetwork in millwork shop to maximum extent practicable and to permit passage through building openings. C. Provide cut outs for fixtures, inserts appliances, outlet boxes and other fixtures and fittings where applicable. Verify locations of cut outs from on -site measurements. Seal cut edges. D. Fabricate decorative laminate counter tops with 1 -1/2" self -edge unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 2.7 FABRICATION OF WOOD CABINETS A. Frames, Stiles & Rails: 3/4" x 1 -1/2" solid hardwood lumber with glued blind mortise and stub tenon type joinery. Glued dowel joints may be used. B. Hinged Doors: 3/4" ponderosa pine veneer plywood or glued -up solid lumber. C. Drawers: 1. Fronts: 2. Sides & Back: back. Dado or 3. Bottoms: 1/4" front 1/4 ". 1/2" yellow poplar; dado sides to receive bottom and dovetail sides into drawer fronts. Glue and pin joints. 3/4" solid ponderosa pine lumber. tempered hardboard. "Let" bottom into sides back and D. Shelves: 3/4" solid ponderosa pine lumber. ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400 - 3 E. Backs: 1. Where not exposed, 1/4" on base cabinets and 1/2" on wall cabinets; hardwood veneer plywood. 2. Where exposed, 3/4" glued -up ponderosa pine panels. 2.8 FABRICATION OF OPEN SHELF UNITS A. Sides & Dividers: 3/4" ponderosa pine. Provide double 3/4" sides at sectional dividers with field applied face trim. B. Trim: 3/4" thick solid ponderosa pine. 2.9 FABRICATION OF COUNTER TOPS A. Decorative Laminate Clad (HDPL): 1. Particle Board: 3/4" minimum thickness, 45 -1b, density. 2. Decorative Laminate: GP50 General Purpose (0.05 "). Provide 0,02" backer sheets on counters where unsupported area exceeds 6 sq. ft. 3. Adhesive: Rigid setting type as specifically recommended by decora- tive laminate manufacturer. Do not use adhesives containing urea - formaldehyde. B. Wood Tops: 3/4" glued =up ponderosa pine panels; transparent finish. C. Marble Tops: 3/4" thick, 45 deg. chamfered edge; polished finish D. Cultured Marble Tops: Fabricate of cultured marble, 3/4" thick with 1/2" x 4" side and back splashes; 1/4" thick apron laminated to 3/4" plywood. 1. Adhesive: Epoxy, waterproof type. 2.10 FABRICATION OF STILE & RAIL PANELING A. Fabricate paneling to Custom grade in accordance with AWI Section 500, Division C. Where available, utilize panel products with solid wood trim where panels exceed 10" width; when not available, boards not exceeding 6" in width may be edge glued to form panels, B. Fabricate corners utilizing lock miter. C. Finish: Apply antiqued faux pickled pine finish at site after installa- tion. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION/PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, condition woodwork for reasonable time to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation area. 06400 - 4 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK B. Verify blocking and grounds have been properly located and installed. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF TRIM A. Install plumb, level, true and straight in line with no distortions. B. Stagger joints at adjacent and related members. Fit joints neatly and accurately with adjoining surfaces aligned in same plane. C. Make joints to conceal shrinkage; miter outside corners to produce tight fitting joints with full surface contact throughout length of joint; cope inside corners; scarf end to end joints. D. Install base, chair rail and cornice trim in single unjointed length for runs less than maximum lengths available to minimize number of joints; join only at supports. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABINETWORK A. Set cabinetwork and shelving units in place level, square and rigidly secured. Conceal cabinetwork anchorage devices. B. Wall supported shelving and cabinet units shall be capable of supporting not less than 50 -lbs. psf of shelf area, fully loaded. Attach wall cabinets: 1. To metal studs using USC #6 type screws and grommets at 24" o.c. horizontally and at 8" o.c. vertically, minimum. 2. To wood supports using #10 round head screws and grommets at 24" o.c. horizontally and at 8" o.c. vertically, minimum. C. Install counter tops level, square and securely anchored to cabinetwork. D. Set marble tops level and square with mechanical fasteners and Z- shaped clips; on plywood substrate, set with mechanicl fasteners only. E. Use threaded steel concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining units and counter tops. F. Carefully scribe cabinetwork which is against other building materials . leaving space of 1/32" maximum. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF STILE & RAIL PANELING A. Install stile and rail panel construction in sections as prefabricated in woodwork plant. Screw to blocking at concealed locations where possible. B. Install associated trim as specified above. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF DISPLAY PANELS ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400 - 5 r r I r f i i is i L L 1 i r 1 SECTION 07100 WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Balcony deck sheet membrane waterproofing system, 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Substrate for waterproofing. B. Section 03300 - Cast in Place Concrete: Topping slab over waterproofing. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM D142 - Rubber Properties in Tension B. ASTM D570 - Water Absorption of Plastics C. ASTM D746 - Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Electomers by Impact D. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials E. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Roofing & Waterproofing Manual 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's current product data. C. Submit manufacturer's recommended installation details for normal condi- tions projections through waterproofed surfaces, expansion joints and terminations. D. Provide samples of materials when specifically requested by Architect. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Waterproofing Applicator Qualifications: 1. Approved by manufacturer of waterproofing system. Provide written certification with submittal package. 2. At least 5 years experience and have successfully completed at least 5 projects of the size of this project or larger with system specified for this project. Provide list with submittal package. WATERPROOFING 07100 - 1 B. Conform to application recommendations of the National Roofing Contractors Association except where modified by manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Applicator shall be approved by Owner; any of the following reasons will be cause for rejecting applicator: 1. History of early waterproofing failures. 2. Warranty work not properly performed. 3. Proposal of an unacceptable waterproofing system on prior work and refusal to install the specified system. 4. Lack of financial responsibility. 5. A record of inferior or substandard practices. 6. Lack of proper facilities or equipment. 7. Lack of experienced, properly trained and qualified personnel. 8. Other causes indicating unsuitability for performing work specified. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened packaging with all labels intact. B. Store membrane on pallets, single stacked, protected from moisture and damage. Allow for ventilation. C. Store primer, liquid membrane, mastic and adhesives away from sparks or flames. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install Bituthrene 3000 only when surface and ambient temperature is 40 deg. F. or above. B. Install Bituthene 3100 only when surface and ambient temperature is not less than 25 deg. F. and not more than 75 deg. F. C. Comply with manufacturer's printed recommendations for application temperatures and conditions of primer and mastic products. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty Conditions: 1. Duration: 5 years. 07100 - 2 WATERPROOFING 2. Maintain watertightness during warranty period except where leakage is a result of structural failure. Hairline cracking of concrete due to temperature change or shrinkage is not considered as structural failure. 3. Remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Div.; Cambridge, MA. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Membrane Waterproofing: Self- adhering membrane of rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to cross laminated polyethylene sheeting. 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Bituthene 3000 or 3100; 60 mils. B. Membrane Characteristics: 1. Tensile Strength: 250 psi minimum in accordance with ASTM D412. 2. Ultimate Elongation: 300% minimum in accordance with ASTM D412. 3. Brittleness Temperature: Minus 25 deg. F. in accordance with ASTM D746. 4. Water Absorption: Not more than 0.5% weight gain after 48 hours of immersion at 70 deg. F. in accordance with ASTM D570. 5. Permeance- Perms: 0.1 maximum in accordance with ASTM E96 Method B. 6. Hydrostatic Head Resistance: 150 feet minimum. C. Primer: P - 3000 or P3100, rubber based. D. Mastic: EM -3000, rubberized asphalt- based. E. Liquid Membrane: 124 - 3000, two-component cold applied. 2 3 PROTECTION BOARD A. At balconies Bituthene Asphaltic Hardboard, 1/8" thick. B. At elevator pit: PB3000, expanded polystyrene and fast drying cement adhesive. PART 3 - EXECUTION WATERPROOFING 07100-- 3 • r r r 1 r r r i i 1 1 1 I. i 1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate to receive waterproofing and verify that surfaces are clean smooth and free of sharp projections and voids. B. Notify Architect if conditions exist that would adversely affect performance of waterproofing system and which cannot be corrected by preparatory work specified in this section. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove oil, grease, dirt and other subtances which might prevent bonding of waterproofing membrane. B. Fill cracks, joints, depressions, grooves, or other irregularities with latex cementitious patching compound. C. Provide fillet or cants at inside corners using cementitious materials. Ease outside corners to avoid sharp edges. D. Apply primer surfaces at rate recommended by manufacturer of waterproofing materials Prime only area which will be covered by membrane in same working day; reprime areas not covered by membrane within 24 hours. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommended details. END OF SECTION current printed B. Press membrane in plce with heavy hand pressure or application. C. Overlap edges and end seams at least 2 -1/2 ". Stagger end laps. D. Seal edges, terminations and around projections in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. rollers during E. At horizontal surfaces, lap sheets in direction of water flow. Begin installation at low edge. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Cover waterproofing membrane with protection board. Secure boards to membrane as recommended by manufacturer. B. Fit snug at joints and around penetrations; tape joints with Perm-A- Barrier wall seam tape. 07100 - 4 WATERPROOFING B. Primer: 2 . Coal Tar: ASTM D450, Type II or III. 3. Emulsified Asphalt: ASTM D1227, Type III (without fibrous reinforce- ment) 1. Asphalt: ASTM D41. 2. Coal Tar: Creosote; ASTM D43. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces to receive dampproofing are clean and dry. B. Do not apply dampproofing to surfaces with open joints, cracks or voids. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Apply uniform coating of primer in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Apply two uniform coats of dampproofing in strict accordance with manufacturere's printed instructions; mibnimum rate of 1.25 gallons per 100 square feet. 1. At masonry or concrete backup, apply with brush or roller. 2. At gypsum sheathing backup, apply with roler or spray. Apply to gypsum board only after masonry ties have been attached to wall. C. Allow a minimum of 24 hours to elapse between application of first and second coat. D. Apply dampproofing to exterior face of backup walls where masonry occurs and other locations indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION 1,, '1) SECPIGN 07150 IIMPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cleaning and preparation of surfaces to receive dampproofing. B. Bituminous dampproofing. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Surfaces to receive dampproofing. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM D41 - Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. B. ASTM D43 - Creosote Primer Used in Roofing Dampproofing, and Waterproofing. C. ASTM D449 - Asphalt Used in Dampproofing and Waterproofing. D. ASTM D450 - Coat -Tar Bitumen Used in Roofing, Dampproofing and Waterproofing. E. ASTM D1227 - Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating and Roofing. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data and printed application instructions in accordance with Section 01300. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply dampproofing when ice or moisture is present on substrate. B. Apply cut -back (solvent type) only when temperature is 32 deg. F. or higher,. C. Apply emulsion type when temperature is 40 deg. F. or higher and dry weather is forecast for 24 hours subsequent to application. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cut -back asphalt, emulsion type asphalt or coal tar; use one of the following: 1. Asphalt: ASTM D449, Type I or II. DAMPPROOFING 07150 - 1' Y' SECTION 07200 r r r I: L i l 1 THERMAL INSULATIO PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Perimeter slab insulation. B. Wall and ceiling insulation. C. Attachments and accessories. 1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Furnish perimeter insulation to Section 03300. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast - in-Place Concrete B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Gypsum wall sheathing C. Section 07240 - Exterior Plaster Wall System 1.4 REFERENCES A. Fed. Spec. HH- I- 1972/1 - Insulation Board Thermal Pplyurethane or Polyisocyanurate Faced with Aluminum Foil on Both Sides of the Foam B. ASTM C208 - Insulating Board (Cellulosic Fiber). Structural and Decorative. C. ASTM C578 - Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation D. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing E. ASTM C764 - Mineral Fiber Loose -Fill Thermal Insulation F. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 1 5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver insulation in manufacturer's packages. Do not remove from manufacturer's packaging until ready for use. B. Do not crush rigid insulation. C. Protect insulation from moisture. PART 2 - PRODUCTS THERMAL INSULATION 07200 - 2.1 MATERIALS A. Perimeter Insulation: Polystyrene ASTM C578, extruded rigid board, Type 4, minimum density of 1.6 pcf with an R -value of 5.0 at 75 Deg. F. for 1" thickness. B. Wall Insulation: Fiber glass, kraft paper faced blankets or batts conforming to ASTM C665 with flame spread /smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance with ASTM E84; and "R" value of 13. C. Ceiling Insulation (Loose): ASTM C764, fiber glass blowing insulation; installed density of 0.571 pcf; flame spread /smoke developed of 5/5 and "R" value of 30. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSULLATION, GENERAL A. Install insulation with tight joints. Completely encapsulate heated and /or cooled space of building. Fill all spaces. B. Install insulation of maximum unit sizes practicable. Stagger end joints. C. Where multiple layers of insulation are shown, stagger joint of successive layers. D. Apply insulation in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. E. Cut insulation to fit neatly and snug around obstructions, penetrations. bracing, mechanical and electrical devices, etc. Do not compress fiber insulation excessively. 3.2 PERIMETER INSULATION A. Install directly beneath slab edge with tight even joints and as shown. 3.4 WALL INSULATION. BLANKET OR BATT A. Install insulation with affixed vapor barrier positioned toward inside of building. B. Place insulation around and to exterior side of electrical devices. C. Place insulation to exterior side of all pipes. D. Install sound attenuation insulation with snug joints using steel clips and attachments to hold in position. 3.5 CEILING INSULATION, BATTS OR BLANKETS A. Place insulation below electrical wiring wher space permits. 07200 - 2 THERMAL INSULATION f. C Install insulation to exterior side of all pipes, C. Do not place insulation tight to or directly over recessed lights or heat generating devices. Provide adequate space to allow dissipation of heat of such fixtures or devices. 3.6 CEILING INSULATION LOOSE A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Install pneumatically at the rate of 20.8 - 25..1b. bags /1000 ft. to minimum depth of 11" but in no case less than required to achieve R -value of 30. C. Allow for ventilation where indicated. END OF SECTION =TWIN 07248 EXTERIOR PIASTER WALL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Expanded polystyrene insulation board adhered to a previously installed substrate. B. Woven glass fiber fabric embedded in plastic veneer base over insulation board. C. Finish plastic coating with integral color and texture. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood framing. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Gypsum sheathing. Sealants: Sealant system to be Tremco Dymeric with Primer #1. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: 1. Application of the wall system shall be by an applicator approved by the manufacturer. 2. Follow manufacturer's latest printed application instructions. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in original turer's identification. B. All wall system material must storage. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: unopened containers with legible manufac- be stored out of the weather in cool, dry 1. The base coat and finish coat must further be protected from freezing - store at 40 deg. F to 80 deg. F. 2. Reinforcing fabric must not be allowed to become saturated with water as it will become limp and difficult to handle. 3. Insulation board shall be stored flat and protected from the sun. 4. If stored properly and in sealed containers, the base coat and finish coat have a shelf life of two years EXTERIOR PLASTER WALL SYSTEM 07240 - 1 r 1. Application of the wall system shall be in ambient temperatures of above 40 deg. F. a. For installation in temperatures less than 40 deg. F, supple- mentary heat shall be provided. 2. A minimum ambient temperature of 40 deg. F shall be maintained for at least 24 hours after the wall system installation and until dry. B. Protection: 1. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces from damage during application of the wall system. C. Coordination: 1. The top of the wall, as well as open caulk joints, must be finished or otherwise protected from water penetration during and after installa- tion of the wall system. I .Y PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCDTS ` -• A. Base Coat as supplied by manufacturer. I L B. Portland Cement - ASTM C -150. Type I or II, fresh and free of lumps. C. Insulation Board - expanded polystyrene, less than 25 flame spread as per lb ASTM E84 or U1 -723, average density - 1.0 pounds per cubic foot; K =0 24 per inch; minimum - 3/4" - see plans. In addition, all insulation board used with the wall system shall be aged (air dried) for six weeks before use The following dimensional tolerances shall apply for insulation board in I L lieu of those contained in FS HH- I -524C: 1. Edges shall be square with 1/32 inch per foot. L 2. Thickness of the insulation board shall be within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch. I L 3, Size - 2' -0" x 4' -0 ". D. Reinforcing Fabric - baalanced open weave glass fiber fabric made from L twisted multi -end strands, specifically treated for compatibility with system materials. I L E. Finish - color as selected, texture as per approved sample, F. Impact Grid - a heavy duty glass fiber fabric to be used in areas subject to higher impact. Use 6 to 8 above finish grade. G. Water Shall be clean and potable. 07240 - 2 EXTERIOR PLASTER WALL SYSTEM r r i r i 2.2 MIXING A. Base Coat: 1. Use clean container, free of all foreign substances for mixing and preparing material. Do not use container which has been used for or cleaned with a petroleum product. 2. Use a mixer similar to Goldblatt Jiffler Mixer No. 15 311 H7 powered by 1/2" drill 400 - 500 rpms. a. After mixing, clean tools immediately with water. 3. Stir base coat before adding Portland Cement to assure homogeneous material. 4. Mix Portland Cement with base coat in a ratio of one part Portland Cement to one part base coat. a. Measure quantities of base coat and Portland Cement separtely before mix. b. Add Portland Cement to base coat in small increments while thoroughly mixing each increment. 5. Water may be added to adjust workability. 6. Pot life for mixed base coat is the same as ordinary mortar or plaster materials. 7. No additives such as rapid binders, anti - freeze accelerators etc. shall be added to any material under any circumstances. B. Finish 1. Thoroughly mix the factory prepared finish coat with a high speed mixer until a uniform workable consistency is attained. a. A small amount of clean potable water may be added to adjust workability. b. After mixing, thoroughly clean tools and equipment immediately with water. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTRATE A. An acceptable substrate for application of the wall system shall be: 1. Gypsum sheathing, new concrete, and concrete or clay masonry (consult manufacturer for approval all other substrates). 2. Sound and free of releasing agents (silicones . oils, etc.), paint or other residue or coatings. 3. The substrate shall have no planar irregularities greater than 1/4 ". EXTERIOR PLASTER WALL SYSTEM 07240 - 3 B. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Applying Insulation Board: 1. The application of insulation board to vertical surfaces shall begin at the base from firm, permanent or temporary support. 2. Board shall be applied horizontally in a running bond. 3. Precut insulation board as required to fit openings projectins, etc.; stagger vertical joints and corners. 4. By trowel apply a ribbon ofmixed base coat approximately 2" wide by 3/8" thick to the entire perimeter of each board. Apply dabs or ribbons of the same thickness to the interior area approximately 8" o.c. Do not allow base coat to dry out prior to installing board. 5. install board to wall by sliding into place and then apply pressure over entire surface of board to insure uniform contact and high initial grab. Abut all joints tightly and insure an overall flush level surface. Adhesion should be checked periodically by removing a board. If properly installed grab will be such that it will be difficult to remove the board and adhesive will be stuck to both surfaces. B. Base Coat and Reinforcing Fabric 1. Using a stainless steel trowel, apply mixed base coat to the entire surface of the insulation board to a uniform thickness of approximately 1/16 ". 2. Immediately place the reinforcing fabric against the wet base coat and by troweling from the center of the edges embed the fabric into the coating. 3. The base coat shall be dry and hard before proceeding to the finish coat application (normally 8 to 10 hours) C. Finish Any irregularity of the insulation board greater than 1/16" must be rasped flush. 1. Using a clean stainless steel trowel, apply the finish coat directly to the base coat. The thickness will vary with the finish specified a. It shall be applied and leveled during the same operation to the minimum attainable thickness consistent with uniform coverage. 1. Finish coat must be applied and textured continually over a wall surface in order to maintain a wet edge. 2. Work to corners or joints and do not allow the material to set up within a distinct wall area. 07240 4 EXTERIOR PLASTER WALL SYSTEM r r r r i IT • . The final texture is achieved by allowing the trowel to roll on the round aggregate using a variety of motions and trowels or floats to create the desired texture (or to match approved sample). • Impact Fabric 1. The same application instructions apply to iron grid as standard reinforcing fabric. PART 4 - WARRANTY PCTION 4.1 WARRANTIES A. The contractor shall provide the standard 5 year labor and material warranty upon completion of installation. Contractor shall follow manufacturer's inspection and notification procedures in order that the installation qualifies for warranty. B. The contract shall provide the standard five year manufacturer's warranty for materials replacement. Contractor shall follow manufacturer noti- fication procedure in order to assure that the installation qualifies for warranty. NOTE: In order for project to qualify for warranty protection working drawings (wall sections and details) MUST be reviewed and accepted by wall system manufacturer. END OF SECTION r r f r r i i 1 i t 1 t SECTION 07310 ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roofing shingles roll roofing, buildng paper, fasteners and miscellaneous metal trim. 1.2 PRODUCTS INSTAILLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Sheet metal flashing and trim furnished under Section 07620. B. Ridge vent furnished under Section 10230. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: roof sheathing. B. Section 07620 - Sheet mMetal Flashing and Trim C Section 10230 • Metal Vents lw 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM D226 - Asphalt - Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. B. ASTM D2882 - Asphalt Roof Cement C. ASTM D3018 - Class A Asphalt Shingles Surfaces with Mineral Granules D. ASTM D3462- Asphalt Shingles Made from Glass Felt and Surfaces with Mineral Granules. E. ASTM D3909 - Asphalt Roll Roofing (Glass Felt) Surfaces with Mineral Granules. F. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association. 1.5 SUBMITTAL A. Submit manufacturer's product data and printed application instructions in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit two each of standard colors. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Install shingles in accordance with ARMA's Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply roofing materials when substrate is wet or when ambient temperature is above 90 deg. F ASPHALT SHINGLES 07310 - 1 r I: r r 11 1 r L I i 1 i 1 B. Keep roll goods at 40 deg. F, and above. 1.8 WARRANTY A Provide Owner with five -year, non - prorated written warranty including materials, workmanship and flashing. Warranty shall state that leaks occurring within this period will be repaired at no additional cost to Owner. B. Provide manufacturer's 30 -year warranty on fiber glass. C. Submit warranty forms with submittal package. D. Warranty period shall begin upon date of Substantial Completion as defined in Conditions of the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS A. Horizon Shingle; Certain Teed Corp. B Royal Sovereign; GAF Corp. 2.2 MATERIALS A Felt Underlayment: ASTM D226, Type I, No. 15, unperforated. B. Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D3462, self - sealing, 12" x 36 ", 240 ibs A, conforming to ASTM D3018, Type 1. C. Fasteners: 11 or 12 gauge, galvanized roofing nails with Length appropriate to achieve 3/4" penetration into solid wood plywood decking. D. Roofing Cement: ASTM D2822, Type 1. E. Accessories: 1. Hip and Ridge Caps: Field or factory cut to match shingles. 2. Valleys: ASTM D3909, 90 lbs /square roll roofing; match shingles. 3. Metal Drip Edge: refer to Section 07620. 4. Metal Flashing: Refer to Section 07620. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point that this application may properly begin. 07310 - 2 ., UL Class 3/8" head. or through ASPHALT SHINGLES B. Verify that deck surfaces are clean and dry. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Apply shingles in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instruc- tions and AMA'S recommendations - B. Apply one layer of felt underlayment with 4" end laps and 2" to laps and without bubbles or wrinkles. C. Apply shingles straight properly aligned with 5" exposure and 2" head lap using 4 nails per shingle D. Provide double starter course of shingles at eaves. E. Extend shingles 3/4" over fascia or trim at eaves and 1/2" at gables or rakes. F, Trim shingles straight and even. G. Cap hips and ridges with individual cut shingles maintaining 5" weather exposure. Conceal all fasteners. H. Form valleys with two layers of roll roofing. Bottom layer to be 18" wide and top layer 36" wide. I. Alternate application of shingles from multiple bundles to provide even color distribution. H. End each day's work in a manner that will allow resumption of work without noticeable color or pattern variation. END OF SECTION ASPHALT SHINGLES SA:rICN 07320 crAY TILE ROOF PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof Clay Tiles Roll. Roofing Building Paper Miscellaneous Accessory Tiles and Metal Flashing 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry B. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim C. Section 10230 - Metal Vents 1.3 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's 50 -year limited warranty. B. Provide warranties under Provisions of Section 07100. PART 2 - PRODUCTDS 2.1 STYLES: 1. Straight barrel mission. 2. Color to be selected by Owner (provide selection samples). 2.2 DESCRIPTION: A. The roofing tiles shall be machine formed from natural clays, fired to various degrees to obtain the required strength. Tiles and tile accessories are to be fired to vitrification. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. M.C.A. Corowa, CA. 2. Ludowici Celadon, New Lexington, OH. 3. Gladding McBean, Lincoln, CA. 4. Croft Brick Company, Fresno, CA. C. The necessary accessory tiles as required for complete appearance and water tight installation. PART 3 - OTHER MATERIALS CLAY TILE ROOF 07320 -1 3.1 MEMBRANE A. General: 1. Provide in strict accordance with pertinent requirements of the government agencies having jurisdiction. 2. Double the membrane at hips, valleys and ridges. 3. Place parallel to ground level, lapping 2 -1/2" horizontally and 6" vertically. 4. Carry the felt 6" up all vertical surfaces and 4" over gutter and valley metal. 5. Fasten all edges with large headed galvanized nails on 6" centers. 6. In areas subject to ice build -up, comply with Section 3203 (d) 3 of UBC. B. At all areas where clay roof tiles will be installed provide a membrane consisting of not less than two layers of Type 15 asphalt - saturated felt or one layer of Type 30 asphalt- saturated felt. 3.2 WOOD STRIPS AND BATTENS: A. Eave Strip: 1. Provide 2" x 2" foundation grade Redwood strip full length at all eaves to raise the first course of roof tiles. 3.3 FLASHINGS: A. Flash at roof valleys in strict accordance with Chapter 32 of UBC. 1. For flashing and counterflashing, use not lighter than 28 gauge corrosion - resistant metal extending at least 11" from the centerline of the valley each way. 2. Provide a splash diverter rib not less than 1" high at the flow line formed as part of the flashing. 3. Provide flashing overlap of not less than 4 ". B. At sides of dormers chimneys and other walls extend flashing at least 6" up the vertical surface. 1. Thoroughly counterflash 2. Extend flashing under tile at least 4 ", and turn the edge up 1 -1/2 ". C At lower side of dormers . chimneys and other walls extend flashing at least 3" up the wall. 4" over the tile and thoroughly counterflash. D. At wood saddles and returns, line with 16 ounce copper extending up sloping roofs not less than 12" (more where necessary) and up vertical walls not less than 6" thoroughly counterflashed. 07320 - 2 CLAY TILE ROOF E. Make all counterflashing plugged, pointed and secured. F. Extend gutter metal up the roof to a point higher than the outer edge of the gutter. 3.4 MORTAR, PLASTIC CEMENT AND SEALANT: A. For filling the openings of cut valley tiles provide a mortar consisting of 1 part portland cement to 4 parts sand, coloring to the nearest possible match with color of the tile. B. For gable rakes, hip rolls, ridges, stringers and other conditions, provide a non- running• heavy body plastic cement composed of asphalt and other mineral ingredients complying with ASTM D2822 and Fed Spec SSC -153 Type 1. C. When using sealant in lieu of the plastic cement provide a silicone sealant complying with ASTM D1002 or ASTM E42. 3.5 FASTENERS A. For tiles and cleats, use copper or other approved non - corrosive nails, 11 gange, large headed, in length sufficient to give proper penetration. I B. At plywood decks, use ring shank nails in length sufficient for slight penetration through underside of the deck. L C. At board plank decks, use smooth shank nails at least 1 -1/2" long but penetrating the underside of the deck. D. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. IL PART 4 - INSTALLATION 1 . 4.1 GENERAL The deck surfaces are required to be clean and dry prior to instalation of underlayment. Foreign particles must be cleaned from all interlocking areas to ensure proper seating and to prevent water damming. Cracked or broken tile shall be replaced. Tiles shall be applied on solid sheathing over a complying roof covering and with the approval of the building 1 official having jurisdiction. 4.2 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS: 1 1. At least 5 years experience having completed 5 projects of comparable size and complexity as this Project. 2. Specialize in the installation of clay tile roofs. CLAY TILE ROOF 07320 - 3 4.3 SHEATHING: Sheathing must be structurally adequate to support the loads involved. Sheathing must be 1/2" or thicker, solid sheathing and must conform with the code. Fascia boards or cant strips must be installed to properly elevate the first tile course. 4.4 UNDERLAYMENT: A minimum of one Type 30 or two layers Type 15 asphalt- saturated organic felt must be used in all applications. In areas subject to ice build up installatin must comply with Section 3203 (d) 3 of the Uniform Building Code. 4.5 TILE FASTENING: Each tile is fastened with a No. 11 gauge corrosion- resistant nail of sufficient length to penetrate the sheathing at least 3/4" or through the sheathing thickness, whichever is less. 4.6 FLASHING: Valley flashing must be minimum No. 28 gauge corrison - resistant metal extending at least 11" from the valley center line each way. It must have a splash diverter rib not less than 1" high at the flow line,f ormed as part of the flashing. Flashing must have an overlap of not less than 4 ". 4.7 HIPS, RIDGES AND RAKES: Each hip and ridge tile is nailed to the supporting member with at least one No. 11 gauge corrision- resistant nail of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4" or through the thickness of the sheathing. whiever is less. Each rake tile shall be nailed to the supporting member with a minimum of two No. 11 corrosion - resistant nails. Cement mortar is placed at all ridges and hips to completely seal the area under the ridge and hip tiles. END OF SECTION 07320 - 4 CLAY TILE ROOF SECTION 07610 ME'ThL ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prefinished metal roofing, trim, related flashing and attachments, 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Plywood roof sheathing B. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim C. Section 07631 - Gutters & Downspouts D. Section 07920 - Caulking & Sealants 1.3 REFERENCES A . B . C . D . E . 1.4 A . B . 1.5 A . ASTM A526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc - coated (Galvanized) By the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality ASTM D226 - Asphalt- Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. FS O- F -506C - Flux, Soldering, Paste and Liquid FS QQ -S-571 - Solder, Tin Alloy SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual SUBMITTALS Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01300. Submit manufacturer's product data andprinted installation instructions. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricate and install sheet metal roofing and accessories in accordance with SMACNA. B. Installer Qualifications: 1. At least 5 years experience having completed 5 projects of comparable size and complexity as this Project. 2. Specialize in the fabrication and installation of metal roofing. 1.6 A . B. DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING Delivery metal roofing properly nested and packaged Store products in accordance with Section 01620. prefinishedmaterial to prevent twisting, bending, provide ventilation. METAL ROOFING to avoid damage. Stack preformed and or abrasion and to 07610 - 1 C. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discolora- tion or staining. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide warranties under provisions of Section 01700. B. Watertightness Warranty Conditions: 1. Duration: 5 years beginning on date of Substantial Completion. 2. Maintain watertightness of entire roofing system during warranty period. C. Provide 20 year manufacturer's finish warranty on prefinished metal roofing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Berridge Manufacturing Co., Houston, TX. B ASC Pacific Inc., Federal Way, WA. C. Vincent Brass & Aluminum Co. Bldg. Products Div., Minneapolis. MN. D. Substitutions will be considered only under provisionsof Section 01630. 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS A. Roofing: ASTM A526, galvanized steel with G90 (1.25 oz. psf) zinc. coating; 24 gage minimum. B. Finish: Kynar 500, color selected from manufacturer's standard stock colors. 2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers. B. Felt Underlayment: ASTM C266; No. 30 asphalt saturated roofing felt. C. Solder: FS QQ -S -571. D. Flux: FS 0- F-506. E. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper. F. Sealant: As specified in Section 07920, butyl type where concealed and silicone where exposed. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as metal roofing minimum 2" wide, interlockable with roofing. 07610 - 2 METAL ROOFING B. Form pieces full length from ridge to eave, No horizontal seams allowed, C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 "; miter and seam corners. D. Form material for standing seam 1" high minimum, double lock seam in accordance with SMACNA Plate #85, Detail 1. Form panels to achieve seams at nominal 18" o.c. 1. When factory formed pans are utilized, provide continuous sealant bead at standing seams and space at nominal 19 -1/2" o.c. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roof deck to verify deck is clean and smooth free of depressions waves or projections, properly sloped to valleys and eaves. B. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place, and nailing strips located. C. Verify deck is dry and free of snow or ice. Verify joints in wood deck are solidly supported and nailed. 3.2 A . INSTALLATION Install metal roofing and accessory materials in accordance recommendations and manufacturer's printed instructions. with SMACNA Weather lap B. Apply felt underlayment in single layer beginning at low edge. edges 2" and nail in place. C. Form valleys of sheets not exceeding 10 feet in length. Lap joints 6" in direction of drainage. Extend valley sheet minimum 6" under roofing sheets. At valley, double fold valley and roofing sheets and secure with cleats spaced 18" o.c. D. Form hip and ridges with sheets not exceeding 10 feet in length. Lap joints 4" and seal with butyl caulk. Pop rivet to Z or C- shaped cleat. E. Form seams double locked with automatic seamer; form joint with minimum 5' angle to allow for expansion. F. Immediately after installation remove protective plastic film. END OF SECTION METAL ROOFING 07610 - 3 1 Il SECTION 07620 r I r r i I SHEEP METAL FLASHING & TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Parapet and Cap Flashing. B. Miscellaneous metal flashings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Membrane wall flashings. B. Section 07310 - Asphalt Shingles C. Section 07610 - Metal Roofing D. Section 07631 - Gutters & Downspouts 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality B. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal C. ASTM D2822 - Asphalt Roof Cement D. ASTM D226 - Asphalt - Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing E. FDS O-F -506 - Flux, Soldering, Paste and Liquid F. ARMA - Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual G. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings of metal flashing and complete technical data on materials proposed to be used in accordance with Section 01300. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where flashing is integral with roofing materials conform to applicable recommendations of National Roofing Contractors Association. B. Conform to applicable recommendations of SMACNA's Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 3rd Edition. C. Installer Qualifications: 1. At least 5 years experience having completed 5 projects of comparable size and complexity as this Project. SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM 07620 - 1 r 2. Specialize in the fabrication and installation of sheet metal and trim. r I: r i i t i i L t i 1.6 WARRANTY A. Warranty required in Sections 07310 and 07610 shall include all roof flashing specified in this section which is incorporated into roofing system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A526- G90 (1.25 oz. psf). 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Solder: ASTM B32, 50/50 lead /tin composition for galvanized steel. B. Flux: Raw muriatic acid or type specifically suited to conditions used and conforming to Fed. Spec. 0-F -506. C. Roofing Cement: ASTM D2822 industrial type D. Nails, Screws, Rivets & Fasteners: Having rust - resistive coating, compatible and type designed for material being fastened. Where permitted, use soft neoprene washers when fastening through exposed metal. E. Underlayment: ASTM D226 No. 30 asphalt saturated roofing felt. F. Flashing Boots: Factory fabricated, neoprene or EPDM friction fit expansion collar with aluminum base; size as appropriate for pipe penetrations of asphalt shingle roofing. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate galvanized metal coping corners and end caps with full soldered joints with minimum 6" returns, Do not use rivets. B. Fabricate sheet metal with lines arises and angles sharp and true and plain surfaces free from waves and buckles. C. Hem exposed edges of metal on underside, minimum of 3/8 "; provide 15 degree break for drip. Miter and seam (solder) corners. Open corners are not permitted. D. Form pieces in longest practical lengths; utilizing scrap pieces is not permitted. E. Fabricate metal by machine only; hand forming of sheet metal is not permitted. 07620 - 2 SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete enough to allow this installation to properly begin. B. Verify that roof curbs are 8" above roof surface unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 3.2 CAP AND COUNTERFLASHING A. Install metal flashing in accordance with recommended details of NRCA and SMACNA's Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Assure watertight installa- tion. D. E. F. B. Install roofing felt underlayment directly under cap flashing. C. Cap flashing joints shall be butt or lap seam. 1. At butt seams, provide 6" backup plates, 3" lap joints. 2. At lapped seams, provide 2" minimum lap. 3. Provide bead of butyl sealant on each side of butt joint bead at lapped seams. Remove excess sealant. 4. Conform to SMACNA's Architectural Sheet Metal Manual Alternate 2 or 3. 5. Interlock hemmed edges. Lap flashing joints not less than 2" nor more than 4" and sealant. Interlock hemmed edges. Install No. 30 -1b. felt directly under caps and copings. position while installing metal. Form seams to finish as follows: 1. Standing seams, not less than 1 ". 2. Flat lock seams, not less than 1 ". 3. Soldered lap seams, not less than 1 ". 4. Unsoldered lap seams, not less than 2 ". 5. Form seams in directin of water flow. 3.3 SOIL VENT FLASHING INSTALLATION SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM and double Plate 68, seal with butyl Tack to hold in A. Install prefabricated boots directly over pipe with flexible collar in full contact with pipe; secure to roof deck with roofing nails. 07620 - 3 3.4 ROOF PENETRATIONS A. Flash at penetrations in accordance with ARMA recommended details. Details may be modified slightly providing modifications conform to manufacturer's printed instructions, In all cases installer shall be responsible for watrtightness of flashing system. 3.5 SCHEDULE LOCATION -Chimney Caps Galvanized Steel, 20 gauge Parapet Caps Galvanized Steel, 24 gauge Reglets . Galvanized steel, 22 gauge Counterflashing . Galvanized steel, 26 gauge Miscellaneous Trim Galvanized steel, 26 gauge Vent Stacks Prefabricated boots END OF SECTION MATERIAL AND GAUGE SECTION 07631 GUTIERS & DO*ISPUO15 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Galvanized steel eave gutters and downspouts, complete with required connecting pieces and anchorages. B. Precast concrete splash blocks. 1,2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07310 - Asphalt Shingles B. Section 07320 - Clay Tile Roof C. Section 07610 - metal Roofing D. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process Lock Forming Quality. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Gutters: 24 gauge thick steel with G90 (1.25 oz psf) galvanized coating- conforming to requirements of ASTM A527 with factory applied "Kynar 500" finish - Color selection by owner. B. Downspouts: 24 gauge, of same material and finish as gutters with factory applied Kynar 500 Finish - Color selection by Owner. C. Anchorage Devices: Type standard to industry, concealed or inconspicuous suitable for anticipated in -use load and compatible with gutter and downspout materials. D. Splash Blocks: Precast concrete type, 24" long by 12" wide, and 6" thick, with depressed flumes finished smooth; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days . with minimum 5 percent air entrainment. GUTTERS & DOWNSPOUTS 07631 - 1 2.2 FABRICATION Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and sizes shown and as required to properly collect and remove water. Fabricate complete with requiredddd connection pieces. B. Form sections accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths and free of distortions and defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Hem exposed edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that material to which gutters are to be attached has been finished as specified. B. Verify that attachments will accommodate anticipated in -use gutter weight. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install gutters and downspouts securely attached. Join lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and seal gutters to downspouts. B. Slope gutters to downspouts minimum 1/16" per foot or as shown. C. Set splash blocks under downspouts. Slope away from building. END OF SECTION 1 r i i t I. i SECTION 07920 CAULKING & SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Caulking and sealing of exterior joints and enclosure. B. Caulking and sealing of interior joints where 1.2 RELATED A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. A. B. C. D. Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section 1.3 REFERENCES SECTIONS 06200 - 07240 - 07310 - 07320 - 07610 - 07620 07631 - 08110 - 08520 - 08800 - ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants FS TT- S- 001543A - Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base FS TT-S- 0016567 - Sealing Compound, Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based, Solvent Release Type 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit complete technical data on materials propsoed to be used with manufacturer's printed application instructions. C. Submit product list indicating applicable ASTM and Fed. Spec. Designa- tions. D. Submit two color charts of each type of caulking & sealant. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply sealants when substrate is wet or frozen. CAULKING & SEALANTS Finish Carpentry Exterior Plaster Wall System Asphalt Shingles Clay Tile Roof Metal Roofing Sheet metal Flashing & Trim Gutters & Downspouts Steel Doors & Frames Aluminum Windows Glazing to provide shown and as a weathertight scheduled. 07920 - 1 B. Apply caulking and sealants at temperatures recommended by manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver caulking and sealing compounds to job site in unbroken, sealed containers bearing manufacturer's mixing directions. Store materials in sealed containers in a dry protected area above ground and /or floor. B. Protect caulking materials before, during and after installation. Protect installed work of other trades during application of caulking and sealant materials. C. Do not use caulking materials that have been stored for a period of time exceeding maximum recommended shelf life of materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CAULKING AND SEALANT MATERIALS A. Manufacturer: Bostik, "Chem - Calk ". B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Contech - Sonneborn 2. Dow Corning 3. Pecora Corp. 4. Tremco 2.2 SEALANT AND CAULK TYPES A. Polyurethanes: 1. Two -Part: a. Chem -Calk 550 Self-Leveling: ASTM C920, Type M. Grade P, Class 25. b. Chem -Calk 500 Non -Sag: ASTM C920• Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. 2. One -Part: a. Chem -Calk 900 Self - Leveling: FS TT- S- 00230C, Type 1, Class A. b. Non -Sag: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS Class 25. B. Silicones: Chem -Calk 1200 Non -Sag: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. C. Acrylic Latex: Chem -Calk 600; comply with ASTM C834, D. Butyl: Chem-Calk 300; comply with FS TT- S-001657. 2.3 PENETRATION SEALANTS A. Primer: Non - staining type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 07920 - 2 CAULKING & SEALANTS B. Joint Cleaner: Non - corrosive type recommended by selant manufacturer compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Filler: Round, closed cell neoprene, butyl, polyethylene or polyurethane foam rod; oversized 25 % -50 %, compatible with sealant used and as specificlly recommended by manufacturer of sealant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommen- dations. Remove loose materials and other foreign matter which might impair adhesion of caulking and sealants. B. Ensure that joint forming materials are compatible with sealants. C. Verify that joint width /depth ratios. 1. Minimum size of caulks are used. 2. 1/4" to 1/2" Width: dimensions comply with manufacturer's recommended joint, 1/4" x 1/4" except where acrylic and butyl Depth of sealant shall not exceed joint width. 3. 1/2" and Greater: Depth of sealant shall not exceed one -half of joint width. 4. Minimum sealant deth shall be 1/8 ". 3.2 APPLICATION A. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions. use handguns or pressure equipment with proper nozzle size, on clean, dry, properly prepared substrates. B. Cut backer rods to proper lengths and insert into joints at proper depth using blunt tool. Do not puncture rods. C. Apply bond breaker tape as needed to prevent bonding of sealant on three sides. D. Force sealant into joint and against sides of joint to make uniform. Avoid pulling of sealant from sides. Fill sealant space completely. E. Provide tooling as required to ensure firm full contract with interfaces of joint. Tool joints to form smooth, uniform beads with slightly concave surfaces. Finish joints straight, uniform and smooth. F. Form joints free of air pockets, embedded matter, ridges and sags. CAULKING & SEALANTS 07920 - 3 3.3 SEALING PENETRATIONS - RATED ASSEMBLIES A. Install fire barrier caulk around penetrations through firee -rated floors and partitions in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess caulking and sealant materials from surfaces adjacent r caulked joints. ■. 3.5 SCHEDULE TYPE LOCATIONS Polyurethanes Two -Part: Self - Leveling: Interior or exterior horizontal joints in concrete, brick pavers, ceramic tile and stone subject to pedestrian and vehicular traffic. Non -Sag: Vertical expansion joints, all types of construc- tion. One -Part: Self - Leveling: Interior or exterior horizontal joints in concrete. brick pavers and ceramic tile subject to pedestrian or vehicular traffic. Non -Sag: Vertical control joints in masonry, perimeter caulking of door and window frames. Silicones: Non -Sag: Non- porous surfaces at glass, aluminum, meatls. bathtubs and countertops. Acrylic Latex: Interior joints only; door frames and around penetrations where painting is scheduled, Butyl: Sealing of lap joints in metal guttering, copings and flashing. END OF SECTION 07920 - 4 CAULKING & SEALANTS f i r r i i i i i 1.. i i i SEECI'IW 08110 STEEL DOORS & FRAME'S PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -rated and fire -rated rolled frames. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. Section 07920 Section 08200 Section 08700 Section 09900 1.3 REFERENCES - Caulking & Sealants - Wood Doors & Frames - Finish Hardware - Painting steel doors, panels, sidelights and A. ASTM A525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process Commercial Quality B. ASTM A526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality. C. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows D. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings indicting gauges • sizes reinforcement, manufacturer and complete product specifictions in accordance with Section 01300. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -rated door, panel and frame constrtuction shall conform to NFPA 252, UL 10B or other Code approved agency. B. Installed frame and door assembly shall conform to NFPA 80 for fire -rated class shown. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle metal doors and frames in a manner to prevent rust and damage. B. Provide cardboard packaging, separators banding; spreaders and paper wrappings as required to completely protect metal doors during transpor- tation and storage. C. Store doors upright, under cover in a dry area. STEEL DOORS & FRAMES' 08110 - 1 1 C . PART 2 - PRODUCTS r r r r r i B. Type: Americana Series; substitutions will be considered only under provisions of Section 01630 IL 2.4 FABRICATIONS i l t i 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Fenestla Corp.. Erie PA. B. Substitutions will be considered only under provisions of Section 01630. 2.2 DOORS A. Face Sheets: ASTM A526 bonderized steel permanently bonded to core. 1. Interior: 24 gage, primed 2. Exterior: 24 gage ASTM A525 A60. galvanized bonderized and primed. B. Core: Rigid polystyrene conforming to ASTM C578 Type I or II C. Design: Americana Series 2 3 DOOR FRAMES A. ASTM A526, 22 gauge and 16 gauge cold - rolled steel in sizes and profiles shown. A. Fabricate frames as prehung unit with removable spacers for rigidity during transit and handling B. Provide metal Z- shaped astragal for double doors unless shown otherwise. C. Fabricate frames and doors with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. D. Reinforce frames wider than 48" with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head flush with top E. Provide frames with factory applied weatherstripping. F. Attach fire rated label to each frame and door scheduled for rated assembly. G. Apply shop coat of baked -on rush - inhibiting primer. PART 3 EXECUTION 08110 - 2 STEEL DOORS & FRAMES r 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that rough openings are of proper sizes, square, plumb and complete enough to allow frames and dors to be properly installed. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF FRAMES A. Install frames plumb, square and rigid with anchors securely fastened to wall construction. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed. instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF DOORS A. Install doors plumb, square and firmly anchored into position. B. Hang pairs of doors even at top and bottom. C. Provide uniform edge clearances: 1. Between doors and frames at jambs and heads, 1/8" maximum. 2. At meeting edges of doors in pairs, 1/8" maximum. 3. At Sills: a. Where no threshold is used, 3/8" maximum above finish floor. b. Where threshold is used, 1/4" maximum above threshold unless otherwise shown. 4., Fire -Rated Doors: Prefit for openings with clearances in accordance with NFPA 80. END OF SECTION saCria1 08200 wood DOORS & FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Standard flush wood doors and raised panel doors. B. Fire -rated flush wood doors and frames. C. Standard wood door frames and trim. D. Mirrored closet doors and hardware. E. Clad patio doors and frames. .2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry B. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork: Interior trim and millwork. C. Section 09900 - Painting 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's complete product data in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit two samples of each door type specified of sufficient size to show top and side rail. core construction and face veneers when requested by Architect. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to AWI's publication "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards. Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program" 5th Edition 1988. B. Fabricate fire -rated doors to comply with Underwriter Laboratories Inc. or other Code approved agency. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors to job site individually cartoned or packaged. Schedule delivery to allow immediate fitting and hanging of doors. B. Store flat on level surface, above floor level, in clean dry, well ventilated area protected from sunlight. C. Do not allow doors to be subjected to extremes of heat or humidity. Relative humidity shall be notless than 30% or more than 60%. WOOD DOORS & FRAMES 08200 - 1 D. Cover doors with sheet material, but allow for air circulation, E. Do not drag one door across another, 1.6 WARRANTY A. Wood doors for interior use shall be warranted for five years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STANDARD FLUSH WOOD DOORS A. Type: Flush, solid core, seven -ply construction Specification PC -7 in accordance with AWI 1300 -G -3 standards. Stiles and rails shall be bonded to core. B. Face Veneers: Opaque Finish (Paint): Natural Birch rotary cut, Grade 1 or 2 in accordance with applicable AWI standards. C. All wood doors shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 2,2 PANEL WOOD DOORS A. 7000 Series as manufactured by Morgan Div. of Combustion Engineering Inc.; Oshkosh- WN. 1. Substitutions will be considered only under provisions of Section 01630. B. Construction: 1. Rails, Stiles and Mullions: Veneered construction of edge glued core with min. 1/10" fir or hemlock veneer. 2. Panels: 1 -1/8 ", two -ply solid fir or multi -ply with fir or hemlock veneer. 3. Grade: Interior. 4. Contractor Option: Fiberboard doors of same design and as manufac- tured by Masonite may be used. C. Design: 1. Full Size: Six panel each leaf. 2. Bi -Fold Size: Three panel each leaf. 2.3 PATIO DOORS (FRENCH) A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Anderson 2. Caradco 3. Marvin 4. Pella 08200 - 2 WOOD DOORS & FRAMES r r r r is I: t i L 1 I 1:1 B. Type 1. Caradco "Hallmark" and "Georgetown" (true divided lites) clad hinged patio doors; 0.062" extruded aluminum cladding. 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard white or beige; if Owner's choice is not manufacturer's standard manufacturer may be disqualified, 2.4 FIRE -RATED WOOD DOORS A. UL rated, flush panel, mineral core with label as shown. Provide doors with 5" top and bottom rails and lock blocks for attachment of lock sets as scheduled. B. Face veneers and manufacturer same as for standard wood doors for appropriately scheduled finish. 2.5 MIRRORED DOORS A. Manufacturer: Acme General Corp. Building Products Div. (substitutions will be considered only under provisions of Section 01600). B. Type: 4700 Series frameless sliding mirror door system with top and bottom track system; color, white. 2.6 WOOD FRAMES A. Exterior: Manufacturer's standard size and profile as appropriate; clad to match doors. B. Interior: 3/4" with planted stop. C. Species: Fir, Hemlock, Spruce or white pine. 2.7 WOOD TRIM A. 8,000 Series profiles as shown. B. Species: Fir, Hemlock, Spruce or white pine. C. One piece for casings. Finger jointing is acceptable where paint is scheduled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that frames are of proper sizes, square, plumb and complete enough to allow this installation to properly begin, WOOD DOORS & FRAMES 08200 - 3 r 1 :1 r r r r 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Allow doors to become acclimated to finished building heat and humidity before hanging. B. Install doors plumb, square and firmly anchored into position. C. In fitting for width, trim equally from both sides. D. In fitting for height, trim top and bottom rails no more than 3/4 ". E. Immediately after doors have been fitted seal edges top and bottom and hardware recessed with two coats of alkyd oil paint on doors scheduled to be painted and twocoats of clear varnish on doors scheduled to be stained. F. Install grilles and hardware in a manner that will not void door manufacturer's warranty. G. Cut openings for grilles in millwork shop. 3.3 CLEARANCES A. Provide uniform edge clerarances: 1. Between dors and frames, at heads and jambs, 1/8 ". 2. At Door Sills: a. Where no threshold is used, 3/8" max. above finish floor. b. Where threshold is used, 1/4" max. above threshold unless otherwise shown. 3. Between meeting edges of pairs of doors, 1/8 ". B. Fire -Rated Doors: Prefit for openings with clearances in accordance with NFPA 80. END OF SECTION 08200 - 4 % OD DOORS &'FRAMES SECTICH 08305 ACCESS DOORDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION A. Ceiling 1.2 RELATED A. Section B. Section C. Section 1.3 SUBMITTALS INCLUDES and wall access doors to valves, chases and mechanical equipment. SEXCTIONS 04200 - Unit Masonry 06100 - Rough Carpentry 09250 - Gypsum Board A. Submit manufacturer's product data in accordance with Section 01300. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Fabricate accesss doors and panels for fire -rated assemblies in accordance with UL requirements or other Code approved agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Milcor Inc., Lima, OH. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Boico, MM Systems Corp.; Tucker, GA 2. J. L. Industries; Bloomington, MN. 3 Karp Associates, Inc.; Maspeth, NY. 2.2 DOOR TYPES A. Gypsum Board: Style DW. B. Masonry /Concrete: Style M. 2.3 CEILING PANEL TYPES A. At Gypsum Board Ceilings: Style ATR 2.4 FABRICATION ACCESS DOORS and printed installation instructions f r c r A . Door/Panel: Steel with flush screwdriver operated cam openers. 1. Walls: 14 gauge. 2. Ceilings: 18 gauge. B. Frame: 16 gauge steel. C. Weld all joints and grind smooth. D. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Provide access doors and panels with appropriate U.L. Labels. Adjust fabrication requirements to achieve necessary rating. 2.5 FINISH A. Factory primed and compatible with scheduled finish specified in Section 09900. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that rough openings are square and properly sized to allow installation of doors and panels without modification or forcing into position. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install access doors in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Install door and panel assembly rigidly secured into position with flanges in full, continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION sEc'rIm 08520 AUDIMTJM WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Scope: The aluminum windows for this project shall be of the single hung glazed type with thermally improved frame and sash. Unit types and sizes shall be as shown on the drawings. Window shall be the Series 327 as manufactured by Jordan Architectural Products Memphis, TN. Window shapes and accessories as specified and as detailed shall establish the type of unit and materials to be used in order to provide the functional and aesthetic requirements desired. Alternate proposals providing the same type window and method ofoperation will be considered when they are submitted with working samples and must be approved by addendum at least ten (10) days prior to bid proposal. B. Glass and glazing. C. Operable hardware and weatherstripping• D. Anchorages, attachments and shims. 1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Sealants furnished under Section 07920. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Framed openings. B. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Exterior trim, soffits, and cornice work. C. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork: Interior trim. D. Section 07920 - Caulking and Sealants E. Section 08800 - Glazing F. Section 09900 - Painting 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walis and Doors B. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walis and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference, C. ASTM E331 - Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 1 1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Structural: In accordance with ASTM E- 330 -70 with 60 psf exterior uniform load and 60 psf interior applied and maintained for 10 seconds there shall be no glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts. actuating mechanisms or any other damage which would cause the product to be inoperable. B. Water Resistance - With 6.00 psf pressure applied in accordance with ASTM E- 331 -70 there shall be no leakage when water is applied at 5 gallons per hour per sq. ft. of area. C. Air Infiltration - Measured air infiltration shall not exceed 0.260 CFM per foot of crack length of operating sash or vent when tested in accordance with ASTM E- 283 -73. D. Thermal - When tested in accordance with AAMA 1502.6 -1976 Section 3, the followng designations shall be certified with test reports. 1. Combined area at windows (glass and aluminum) shall have a still air coefficient of transmission (conduct U-factor) of not more than 0.50 BTU/hour. /sq. ft. /degree F. 2. A condensation resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 54 shall be required. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Window manufacturers shall have been regularly engaged in fabricatin of windows and accessories of the types required on this project for a period of not less than ten (10) years and shall submit detailed drawings together with certified copies of teset reports indicating DH -HC60 conformance as outlined in AAMA Specification 101 -85 for aluminum windows and doors 1.7 MOCKUP A. Install mockup window unit to determine acceptability for installation methods and field testing of units for performance requirements. B. Approved mockup will represent minimum quality for work of this section. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Include dimensions, relation to construction of adjacent work, air and vapor barrier seal to adjacent construction, component anchorage and locations, anchor methods and materials and hardware installation details. 08520 - 2 ALUMINUM WINDOWS i 1 r i i I . i C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Submit manufacturer's certificate indicating that window units meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide five -year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty shall include coverage of insulating glass. Provide warranty form with submittal package. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WINDOW MEMBERS A. All principal shapes shall be commercially extruded aluminum shapes of the sizes and profiles shown. The combined frame and thermal break shall form a composite frame depth of not less than 3.625 inches deep. B. The frames and sash members shall be quality 6063 -T5 alloy. C. The combined sash and thermal break shall form a composite depth of not less than 1.375 inches deep. The frame and sash members shall be not less than .062 inches thick. D. The frame sill shall be not less than .093 inches thick and shall contain a slope surface to assure rapid drainage of water exposure. E. The sash shall be removable to the interior. 2.2 ASSEMBLY A. The frame and sash members shall be accurately cut, positioned and mechanically fastened in such a manner as to develop the strength of the joined members. Water tight joints shall be provided at all connections utilizing narrow joint seam sealant. Frames shall be assembled in such a manner as to create a thermal break which will reduce through conductivity and condensation on interior aluminum surfaces. Two barriers of silicone treated wool pile shall be located at sash head, and jamb areas and triple wool pile with mylar fin positioned at the meeting rails. 2.3 HARDWARE A. Locks 1. Wedge Type Standard - Shall be bottom sash rail type automatic snap. 2 One (1) standard lock per vent except when unit width exceeds 30" inches. Two (2) standard locks are required. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 3 B. Counterbalances 1. Block and tackle balances four (4) per sash that sash without the use of tools. 2. Injection molded "Lexan" glide shoe with sash interior. 2.4 THERMAL BARRIER A. Frame 1 . 2. 3. 2.7 FINISH Thermal break pocket Polyurethane thermal Full .250 wide frame permit easy removal of removable capacity to size of .794 inches wide by .375 inches height. barrier mechanically debridged. separation. 4. Vertical stacking capacity with positive snap lock stack clip. B. Sash 1. Thermal break pocket size of .71 inches wide by .375 inches height. 2. Polyurethane thermal barriermechanically debridged. 3. Hollow head and sill rails. 4. Continuous lift rail. 2.5 GLASS AND GLAZING A. 1" insulated glass standard. B. Hermetically sealed air space shall be 5/8" or 3/4 ". C. Glazing system shall be with extruded polyvinylchloride gasket. 2.6 SCREENS A. Provide screens to cover the ventilating portion of the unit. Screens shall be installed on the main frame surface and shall be easily removable for cleaning or replacement. B. Screens shall consist of extruded aluminum tubular frame, mitered and keyed corners and shall contain 18x16 aluminum wire, fiberglass or solar mesh screen cloth with removable splines. 08520 - 4 ALUMINUM WINDOWS A Standard paint finish shall be equal to Glidden's Poly Lure 145 high solids baked on polyester coating Color choice by Owner from manufacturer's standard colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION /PREPARATION A. Verify rough openings are corectly sized and located. B Prepare opening to permit correct installation of window unit and air vapor retarder seal. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain alignment with adjacent work. Secure assembly to frame openings without distortion or stress. C. Assure air and vapor barrier is sealed to window frame. Coordinate placement of insulation in shim spaces around unit perimeter as specified in 07210. D Install sealant and related backing materials at exterior and interior of installed assembly as specified in Section 07920. E. Install perimeter trim and stools even and uniform with tight, hairline joints. use one piece members for stools, jamb and head trim. Units shall be secured in accordance with shop drawings. F. Install glass as specified in Section 08800 G. Installation shall be by others using only skilled mechanics with experience in this trade. H. Material and labor for caulking grouting and cleaning after installation shall be by others. I The window manufacturer shall, before proceeding with the manufacturing of the windows, submit complete instalation details for the Architects approval. The drawings of frames and vents, details of construction, anchorage of window to construction and all hardware. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/8" from true measurement B Longitudinal or Diagonal. Warp: Plus or minus 1/8" from 10 straight edge. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - l• 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean window frames and glass in accordance with Section 01700. B Remove labels and visible markings Wash glass clean END OF SECTION r I: r 1.I i L i i i SBCrIQB 08700 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. B. C. Finish hardware for wood and metal doors. Thresholds. Smoke gaskets and weatherstripping. 1 2 RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork: Section 08110 - Steel Doors & Frames Section 08200 - Wood Doors & Frames Section 12390 - Kitchen & Bath Cabinets: 1.3 REFERENCES A. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association B ANSI 156.2 - Standard Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1 -3/8" and 1 -3/4" Doors 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data, brochures and samples as requested by Architect Approved samples may be incorporated into Project C. Submit complete finish hardware schedule listing brands, manufacturer's numbers, features and special items proposed to be used. Submit cut sheets on each item listed in the schedule. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.6 WARRANTY Cabinet hardware. Cabinet hardware A. Protect finish hardware before during and after installation. B. Stock hardware items sufficiently in advance to assure availability, delivery and orderly progress. A. Provide five -year warranty on door closers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 1 r IT IT L 1 2.1 BUTT HINGES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hager 2. McKinney 3. Stanley B. Size: As scheduled. Minimum thickness, 0.130" (standard weight) for interior doors and exterior doors. C. Type: Full mortise, button tips, 5-knuckle flush barrel. Provide ball- bearing hinges on doors where closers are scheduled. D. Provide non-rising type pins inside and non-removable type on exterior doors. E. Provide stainless steel hinges outside unless scheduled otherwise. 2.2 CARD-OPERATED LOCK SYSTEMS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 08700 -'2 1. Vingcard Systems, Inc. PO Box 36048 6200 Denton Drive Dallas, TX 75235 (214) 358-4631 1. Corbin 2. Russwin 3. Sargent 4. Schlage 5. Yale B. Type: Series 1050 Keycard System Mortise Lock reoodable keycard lock for instant rekeying, utilizing horizontal card entry with four key levels and high security emergency override. Provide locksets of solid brass construction and wrought steel case with 3/4" deadlocking brass latch assembly and 1" solid steel inside-operated deadbolt. C. Provide 7-pin recodable key cylinder. D. Provide 15 keycards with each lockset. E. Trim finish shall be polished brass with Gothic lever and Gothic escutcheon. F. Provide Item No. V9864 keycard drawer rack. 2.3 LOCK AND LATCH SETS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: FINISH HARDWARE B. Type: ANSI 156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1 and 2, standard duty and heavy duty, cylindrical locks with 6 -pin tumblers as scheduled, Provide lock and latch sets with minimum 1/2" throw 2.4 CLOSERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dorma 2. LCN 3. Russwin 4. Sargent B. Provide size to accommodate installation as recommended by manufacturer unless heavier unit is scheduled. C. Provide closers with cast iron cylinder and housing only; full rack and pinion, adjustable closing speed, latch regulating valves, and adjustable back- check. D. Closers to have regular or parallel arms as scheduled or as necessary to accommodate locations, 2.5 FLUSH BOLTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Glynn - Johnson 2. Ives 3. Trimco B. Manual type unless automatic type is specifically required to accomplish exit requirements; furnish in pairs. Minimum length of 12" except where door height exceeds 7 ft. Provide top boltlong enough to locate bolt operator not more than 72" above floor. 2.6 THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIPPING A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. National Guard 2. Pemko 3. Southern 4. Zero B. Provide thresholds at exterior and fire -rated doors; extruded aluminum, mill finish unless scheduled otherwise. Height not to exceed 1/2 ". Size and type as detailed. 2 7 PUSH AND PULL PLATES FINISH HARDWARE 08700 3 A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Glynn- Johnson 2. Ives 3. Trimco B. Type: As scheduled 2.8 DOOR STOPS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Glynn- Johnson 2. Ives 3. Trimco B. Wall Type: Wrought disc type with concave rubber bumper and concealed anchor appropriate for wall construction C. Floor Type: Cast half dome design with inset rubber bumper and anchor appropriate for floor construction. D. Generally, provide type scheduled. Architect retains right to change types if necessary to accommodate field condition. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS A. Keying: 1. Provide Grand Master keyed system. 2. Provide construction keying using manufacturer's standard means and upon Owner occupancy remove construction keying feature. 3. Exact number of keys will be determined by Owner. Give final keys directly to Owner and obtain written receipt. B. Strikes: 1. provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set. 2. Provide dust -proof strikes for foot bolts except where threshold construction provides non-recessed strike for bolt. C. Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners wherever practicable. Type and design of fasteners subject to approval of Architect. D. Silencers: Provide three silencers on strike side of single doors and two on head of pair of doors of appropriate design to accommodate frame construction. Do not install silencers until finishing of doors and frames is complete. 08700 - 4 FINISH HARDWARE 1 2.10 FINISHES A. Finishes shall match when viewed at 24" apart and 36" away, and as indicated below unless scheduled otherwise: U.S. BHMA SYMBOL SYMBOL FINISH USP 600 Primed for Paint US3 605 Bright Brass Clear Coated US3 632 Bright Brass Plated Clear Coated US32 629 Stainless Steel US32D 630 Satin Stainless Steel 1. Hinges: As described. 2. Lock & Latch Sets: As described. 3. Closers: As described. 4. Other hardware finishes shall match lock and latch set finishes except. as described otherwise. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine related work and verify that doors and frames have been properly prepared to receive finish hardware. B. Refer to door schedule on drawings for locations of various hardware items. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install finish hardware in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. B. Provide cut -outs for hardware using appropriate templates and jigs and power hand tools. Use hand chisels only for minor adjustments. C. Adjust hardware as necessary to assure its optimum working condition. D. Install closers with concealed fasteners. E. Install closers inside (indoors) on exterior doors and on least conspicuous face on interior doors such as inside storage rooms small rooms adjacent to larger rooms, etc. Verify exact location with Architect. F. Install cylinders with tumblers up. 3.3 MOUNTING HEIGHTS FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 5 A. Lock Sets and Latch Sets: 28" to centerline of strike. B. Push & Pull Plates: 42" for pulls, 48" for push plates. C. Push Bars: 42 ". D. Deadlocks: 48" unless indicated otherwise. Verify that deadlocks do not conflict with mounting heights of other hardware. E. Exit Device: 38 ". F. Hinges: 1. Top Hinge: 5" from top of door to top of hinge. 2. Bottom Hinge: 10" from floor to bottom of hinge. 3. Intermediate Hinge /s: Equally spaced between top and bottom hinge. 3.4 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION RENTAL UNITS BRAND A. Mechanical Entry Lock Vingcard B. Hinge 1 -1/2 PR (by Dr. Supplier- Spring type) -- C. Viewer 700B 4 Ives D. Doorguard 192 Dark Bronze Ilco E. Wall Stop W1276 CC5 3 Trimco F. Threshold (by Door Supplier) -- G. Hinges 1 -1/2 Pr F179 4 "x4" 600 Stanley H. Lockset F40S Geo 11 - 020 10 - 025 605 Schlage I. Dummy Trim F170 Geo 605 Schlage J. Surface Bolt 40B3 6" Ives K. Latchset F10S (Geo) 11 - 020 10 - 025 605 Schlage L. Roller Catches 333 Ives M. Comm Latch F43D Geo 11 -096 10 - 025 600 Schlage N. Weatherstripping (by Dr. Supplier) -- 0. Lockset F 40S FLA 11 - 020 10 - 025 605 Schlage P. Dummy Trim DF170 FLA 605 Schlage Q. Latchset F10 FLA 11 - 020 10 - 025 605 Schlage R. Surface Bolt 40B10B 3" Ives RENTAL UNITS - HANDICAPPED A. Mechanical Entry Lock Vingcard B. Hinge 1 -1/2 PR (by Dr. Supplier- spring type) -- C. Viewer 700B 4 Ives D. Door Guard 192 Dark Bronze Ilco E. Wall Stop W1276 CC5 3 Trimco F. Threshold (by Dr. Supplier) -- G. Hinges 1 -1/2 PR F179 4 "x4" 600 Stanley H. Surface Bolts 40B3 6" Ives I. Weatherstripping (by Dr. Supplier) -- 08700 - 6 FINISH HARDWARE J. Lockset F40S FLA 11 -020 10 -025 605 K. Dummy Trim F170 FLA 605 L. Latchset F10S FLA 11 -020 10 -025 605 PUBLIC AREAS OF UNIT BUILDINGS A. Wall Stop W1276 CCS 3 Trimco B. Lockset.F40S GEO 11 -020 10 -025 605 Schlage C. Lockset F40S FLA 11 -020 10 -025 605 Schlage D. Hinges 1 -1/2 Pr. FBB179 4 "x4" 600 Stanley E. Closer 604- COV- PA -GL -SN Dorma F. Latchset D10S Ply 11 -096 11 -02S 605 Schlage G. Lockset D80PD Ply 11 -096 10 -02S 605 Schlage H. Flush Bolts W3917 12" 3 Ives MAIN HOUSE A. Wall Stop W1276 CCS 3 Trimco B. Hinges 1 -1/2 Pr. F179 4 "x4" 600 Stanley C. Roller Catches 333 Ives D. Dummy Trim F170 FLA 605 Schlage E. Hinge 1 -1/2 pr. FBB179 4 "x4" 600 Stanley F. Closer 604- COV- PA-GL -SN Dorma G. Latchset A10S FLA 11 -020 10 -025 605 Schlage H. Push Plate 1001 -3 3 Trimco I. Pull plate 1013 -3 32P Trimco J. Kick Plate 1024 6 "x34" US3 Trimco K. Dead Bolt B460 x 12 -076 605 Schlage L. Closer 603- COV -GS -5N Dorma M. Floor Stop W1213 ES 3 Trimco N. Latchset A10S Ply 11 -020 10 -02S 605 Schlage 0. Lockset D80PD PLY 11 -096 10 -02S 605 Schlage P. Flush Bolts W3917 12" 3 Ives The intent of the listed hardware description is to establish a type and standard of quality. Hardware supplier is to examine plans and specifications and furnish all hardware for all openings whether listed or not. If there are any omissions provide compatible quality to items listed. The supplier's submitted schedule is to be considered complete for all openings shown on plans. No extras will be allowed for omissions changes or corrections necessary to facilitate installation and the proper functioning of all doors shown on plans. END OF SECTION FINISH HARDWARE Schlage Schlage Schlage r: SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL A. B. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. Glass for doors, windows and metal framing. Unframed mirrors. Section 07920 - Section 08110 - Section 08200 - Section 08610 Section 10800 - Caulking and Sealants: Sealants and backup materials. Steel Doors & Frames Wood Doords & Frames - Wood Windows Toilet & Bath Accessories: Framed mirrors. 1.3 REFERENCES A. FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association Manual of Glazing B. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants C. ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass D. ASTM C1048 - Heat - Treated Flat Glass, Kind HS, King FT Coated and Uncoated E. SIGMA No. 64 -7 -2 - Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's complete product data on each type proposed to be used. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to FGMA Glazing Manual unless more stringent requirements are specified in this section. B. Glass fabricator and installer shall have completed at least five projects of the size of this project or larger using the same type glazing systems. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect glass from damage before, during and after installation. B. Remove glass with chipped edges from the site immediately. C. Deliver glass with manufacturer's labels attached to each pane. Remove labels immediately prior to final inspection. GLAZING' 08800 - 1 f r r c i i I i 1 .. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide five -year non - prorated labor and material warranty on insulated glazing units against failure of insulation seal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. B. C. D. E. Ford Glass Divdision, Detroit, MI. Guardian Industries, Carleton, MI. LOF Co. Toledo, OH. PPG Industries, Pittsburg, PA. Saint - Gobain, White Plans, NY. 2.2 GLASS TYPES A. Float or Plate Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, (cleare) quality. q4 glazing B. Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048 (clear) q4 glazing quality. C. Insulated Glass: SIGMA No. 64 -7 -2, double pane, clear space and clear inside pane. D. Rolled, Flat Glass: ASTM C1036, Type II, wired, form sides), square pattern, q8 glazing quality. 2.3 SETTING MATERIALS A. Sealant: ASTM C920, Class A, Single- Component Chemical Curing non- staining, cured Shore A hardness of 15-25. Color as selected by Architect. outside pane, air 1 (polished both B. Sealing Tape: Preformed, semisolid, polymeric -based material; size and type as specifically recommended by glass or sealant manufacturer. C. Setting and Edge Blocks: Neoprene, 70 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness chemically compatible with sealant used; size as recommended by glass manufacturer. 2.4 MIRRORS A. ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, q2 mirror quality, 1/4" thick. Sizes as shown; install with K -V 4318 fittings. Refer to Section 10800 for framed mirrors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 08800 - 2 GLA f r 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine work of other trades and verify that such work is complete enough to allow glazing to properly begin. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install glass in accordance with referenced standards, manufacturer's printed instruction, and in manner that will ensure watertight condition. B. Install mirrors as specified securely anchored with necessary number of clips. Mounting height, 6' -0" to top of mirror unless otherwise shown. C. Do not mark glass panesi with "X's ". 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean glass periodically after installation with clear water. Do not allow accumulation of alkali or other harmful substances on glass surfaces. B. Immediately prior to final inspection, clean and polish glass . with materials as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION SOCTICM 09250 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Gypsum Board ceiling and wall systems. B. Gypsum Board shaftwall systems. C. Attachments, accessories and finishing. D. Acoustical insulation and sealant. E. Vapor retarder. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry B. Section 07210 - Building Insulation C. Section 09900 - Painting 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Board B. ASTM C442 - Gypsum Backing Board and Coreboard C. ASTM C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction D. ASTM C630 - Water - Resistant Gypsum Backing Board E. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds F. ASTM C840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board G. ASTM C919 - Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications H. ASTM C931 - Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board I. ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board J. ASTM D4397 - Polyethylene Sheet for Construction, Industrial and Agricultural Applications K. GA216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's current product data and printed installation instructions in accordance with Section 01300. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature range of 55 deg. - 70 deg. F. with adequate ventilation during installation and finishing of gypsum board. PART 2 - PRODUCTDS GYPSUM BOARD 09250 1 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Gypsum Board & Accessories: U.S. Gypsum Co. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Celotex Corp. 2. Flintkote Gypsum Products Dept. 3. Georgia- Pacific Corp. 4. National Gypsum (Gold Bond) 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD TYPES A. Regular: ASTM C36, square cut ends, tapered edges. B. Fire - Rated: ASTM C36, Type X, UL listed, square cut ends, tapered edges C. Water - Resistant: ASTM C630, square cut ends, tapered edges. D. Exterior Soffit Board: ASTM C931, square cut ends, tapered edges, 5/8" thick Type X. E. Backing Board & Coreboard: ASTM C442, square cut ends, square edges. 2.3 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Tape: USG Perf -A -Tape, conforming to ASTM C475. B. Joint Compound: USG A11- Purpose, ready - mixed, conforming to ASTM C475. 2.4 FASTENERS A. Screws: ASTM 1002, for fastening gypsum board to: 1. Wood Supports: Type W. 2. Metal Supports: Type S; use S -12 screws on heavy gauge metal. 3. Gypsum Board: Type G. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Furring Channels: 7/8 ", hat - shaped, 22 gauge. B. Resilient Channels: USG RC -1. C. Corner Beads: USG #103, 1 - 1/4" x 1 - 1/4" galvanized steel. D. Edge Trim: USG #200 Series, 22 gauge galvanized steel, J- shape, square nose and L -shape as appropriate. E. Control Joints: USG #093. 09250 - 2 GYPSUM BOARD 2.6 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION AND SEALANT A. Acoustical Insulation: ASTM C665 with flame spread /smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance with ASTM E84, 1. Unfaced fiber glass batts or blankets; or 2. USG Thermafiber, unfaced mineral fiber batts, friction fit. 3. Thickness and type as indicated on Drawings or as required by specific test preference. B. Acoustical Sealant: Acrylic latex conforming to ASTM C834. 2.7 VAPOR RETARDER A. ASTM D4397, 4 mil. polyethylene sheet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Apply vapor retarder directly behind wall finish on interior side of exterior walls. Install directly above ceiling finish of top floor. B. Install vapor retarder in as large size sheets as practicable. Patch holes or tears in vapor retarder with duct tape. 3.3 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840 and GA216 except wher modified by this section. Where fire rating is required, comply specifically with reference indicated. B. Apply gypsum panels of maximum practical length with long dimension at right angles to supports. C. Fit ends and edges closely. Position end joints over supports and stagger adjacent rows. D. Place factory edge of water - resistant gypsum board down. Treat cut edges and holes with sealant. E. Control Joints: Install joints in ceilings exceeding 2500 sq. ft. in area and in partition, wall and wall furring runs exceeding 30' - ". 1. In ceilings, do not exceed distance of 50' - in either direction. install control joint where ceiling framing or furring changes direction. GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 3 2. In walls, do not exceed a distance of 30' -0 ". Install control joint where an expansion joint occurs in base exterior wall. 3. Wall or partition height door frames may be considered a control joint. F. For double -layer ceiling application, apply base layer panels perpen- dicular to frame members; apply face layer parallel to framing with joints offset. On walls, apply base layer parallel with long edges centered on framing; apply face layer perpendicular to framing with joints offset. 1 . G. For curved surfaces and arches, apply stop at one end of curve and gently and gradually push on other end of panels, forcing center against framing 1. until curve is complete. Panels may be moistened using procedure recommended by manufacturer or multiple layers of 1/4" board may be used. 1. Curved surfaces shall be true to radii without breaks or cracks. Install framing at closer spacing as needed to accomplish true and even �... radii. H. Install shaft wall system in accordance with manufacturer's current printed instructions. 3.4 TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install accessories as recommended by manufacturer. B. Install metal edge trim where gypsum panels abut different material and where shown. C. Install corner beads of longest practical lengths at outside corners and angles. D. Install metal joint control of longest practical lengths at inside angles I L greater than 90 degrees. E. Install accessories with screws, nails or crimping as appropriate, Do not use staples. 3.5 JOINT FINISHING A. Evenly apply joint compound over joints, dimples and provide an even surface. Feather successive coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber does not exceed 1/16 ". L B. Maintain surface flatness, with maximum variation of 1/8 ". 3.6 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION AND SEALANT A. Insulation: Install insulation with snug joints. Place insulation around cutouts and obstructions. Fit neatly around cutouts and wall penetra- tions. 09250 - 4 GYPSUM BOARD . Acoustical Sealant: Apply sealant to comply with recommendations of ASTM C919 and Gypsum Association for sound rated partitions. Do not apply under bottom track. 3.7 SCHEDULE TYPE Regular Fire Rated Water - Resistant Exterior Soffit Board Coreboard Backing Board Locations not otherwise scheduled below. Fire -rated partitions and as finish layer on shaftwalls and chutes. "Wet Walls ", all walls adjacent to bathtubs and as ceramic tile backup. use Type X where fire rating is required. Exterior soffits not directly exposed to weather. Shafts, chutes and other floor penetrations where rated partitions are shown. Backup layers for multi -layer .installations. Use Type X where fire rating is shown. Do not use'as finish layer. SECTION 09300 TILL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior ceramic, quarry and paver tile floors, walls and base. B. Setting and joint grouting. C. Marble threaholds. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking for accessories C. Section 10800 - Toilet & Bath Accessories 1.3 ALLOWANCE A. Provide an allowance for ceramic tile under provisions of Section 01020; include only tile not specifically identified in this section. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. B. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. C. ANSI A108.1 - Glazed Wall Tile, Ceramic Mosiac Tile Quarry Tile and Paver Tile Installed with portland Cement Mortar. D. ANSI A108.4 - Ceramic Tile Installed with organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive. E. ANSI A108.5 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Portland Cement Mortar or Latex- Portland Cement Mortar. F. ANSI A108.10 - Installation of Grout in Tilework. G. ANSI A118 1 - Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar. H. ANSI A118.4 - Latex - Portland Cement Mortar. I. ANSI A118.6 - Ceramic Tile Grouts. J. ANSI A137.1 - Ceramic Tile. K. 'ICA - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, latest edition, 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit two samples of each type of tile selected. B. Closeout Submittal: Provide Master Grade Certificate signed by manufac- turer and installer. 1,6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain minimum temperature of 50 deg. during installation and until ceramic tile is properly set. TILE 09300 - 1 1. American Olean Tile Co. 2. Florida Tile Co. 3, Monarch Tile Manufacturing Co. 4. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 5. U S. Tile Co. (Romany Spartan) B. Setting Materials and Grout: 09300 - 2 1, American Olean Tile Co. 2. H. B. Fuller Co. 3. L &M Surco Mfg. Co. 4. Latricrete International, Inc. 5. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 6. Upco Co. Div., Emhart Corp. 7. W. R. Bonsal Co. 2.2 CERAMIC FLOOR TILE 1. Main House: a. CRT-2: 8" x 8 ". b. CRT-4: 4 -1/4" x 4 -1/4 ". B. Use necessary means to avoid excessive temperature changes, PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2,1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Ceramic Tile: A. Standard grade, unglazed ceramic mosiacs . cushioned edges, conforming to ANSI A137.1. B. Provide stock patterns in master- set - back--mounted sheets. 2. Suites: (See Unit Finish Schedule on Drawings, for location, type, manufacturer/ color and base). a. CRT-1: 6" x 6 ". b. CRT-2: 2 "x2 ". c. CRT-4: 4 -1/4" x 4 - 1/4 ". 2.3 CERAMIC BASE A. Standard grade conforming to ANSI A137.1. 2.4 CERAMIC WALL TILE A. Standard grade conforming to ANSI A137.1. 1. Main House: (See Finish Schedule on Drawings for style manufacturer color and base). a. CRT-1: Logo tiles 4 -1/4" x 4 - 1/4 ". b. CRT-3: 4 - 1/4" x 4 -1/4 ". TILE B. Provide in back- mounted sheets. 2.5 QUARRY TILE (See Finish Schedule on Drawings, type, manufacturer, color & base). A. QRT-1: Floor Tile 8" x 8 ". 2.6 THRESHOLDS A. Georgia or other domestic type marble; white color with honed finish. 2.7 SETTING BED MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1. B. Sand: ASTM C144. C. Water: Potable. D. Mortar: 1 part Portland Cement, 6 parts damp sand by volume. 2 8 SETTING METHODS A. Floors: Thinset) 2. Plywood Substrate: Portland Cement mortar bed and Latex - Portland bond coat conforming to ANSI A118.4, Comply with requirements of TCA F142 (double wood floor) or F144 (glass mesh mortar unit). B. Walls: Latex-Portland Cement bond coat conforming to ANSI A118.4. Comply with requirements of TCA W243 for gypsum board substrate; W244 for glass mesh mortar units substrate. 2.9 GROUT 2. Suites: (See Unit Finish Schedule on Drawings for location, type, manufacturer and color). a. CRT-3 & 5: 4 -1/4" X 4 -1/4 ", 1. Concrete Substrate: Latex - Portland Cement bond coat conforming to ANSI A118.4 and TCA F113. A. ANSI A118.6: 1. Floors: Latex - Portland Cement, white. 2. Walls: Latex - Portland Cement, white. 2.10 MIXING A. Mix and proportion cementitious materials for site made mortar beds and bond coats as recommended by TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. B. Mix and proportion pre -mix bond boat and grout materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION TILE 09300 - 3 r r r r =TIM B9650 RESILIENT FWORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient composition tile. B. Resilient sheet flooring. C. Resilient wall base. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01010 - Products. B. Section 03300 - C. Section 09250 - Summary of Cast -in -Place Gypsum Board: 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics 1.4 SUBMITTALS Work: Owner Supplied Contractor Installed Concrete: Substrate to receive flooring. Substrate to receive wall base. of Building materials. A. Submit manufacturer's current product data and samples of stock colors and patterns in accordance with Section 01300. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature of 70 - 80 deg. F. for 48 hours subsequent to installation of resilient flooring and 55 deg, F minimum thereafter. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials in original containers in dry protected areas. B. Store materials at 70 - 85 Deg. F for a period of 48 hours immediately prior to installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING A. Manufacturer: Mannington. B. Type: "VGA" Series #3171 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 1 2.2 RESILIENT COMPOSITION TILE A. Manufacturer: Kentile B. Type: 12" x 12" x 1/8" criteriorn, Ridge Gray #1454 2.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Kentile Floors, Inc. 2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 3. Azrock Floor Products Div., Azrock Inc., Inc. 4. Flexco Div., Textile Rubber Co. 5. Johnson Rubber Co., Inc. 6. Mercer Plastics Co., Inc. 7. Vinyl Plastics, Inc. B. Type: Vinyl, standard top set cove type, 4" by 0.08" thick. C. Provide pre - molded outside corners. 2.4 ADHESIVES A. Type to suit application and as specifically recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer. 2.4 UNDERLAYMENT A. If manufacturer's printed installation instructions do not permit application directly to gypsum concrete, provide not less than 1/4" thck wafer board underlayment; provide necessary trim and edging. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to receive resilient flooring and verify that surfaces are clean, even, and complete enough to allow this installation to properly begin. B. Notify Architect if conditions exist that would adversely affect appearnce or performance of resilient flooring system and which cannot be corrected by preparatory work specified in this Section. C. Verify that overhead work is complete to maximum extent practicable. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove oil, grease, dirt, sealers, heardeners and other substances which might prevent bonding of resilient flooring. 09650 - 2 RESILIENT FLOORING B. Bill cracks, joints, depressions, grooves, or other irregularities with latex patching compound. 3.3 UNDERLAYMENT r i 1 i 1 I A. Where underlayment is required, install with tight, even joints and in accordance with sheet flooring manufacturer's recommendations. 3.4 SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet and tile flooring in accordance with manufacturer's current printed instructions using full- spread adhesive and solvent weld seaming method with the sheet flooring. B. Lay sheets to achieve as few seams as possible with economical use of materials. Avoid cross seams. Match edges for color shading and pattern at saeams. C. Install sheet flooring parallel to length of room. Provide minimum of 1/3 full roll width. 3.5 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Install base with tight even joints properly aligned. Provide full even contact with floor and wall surface. B. Install pre - molded outdside corners (270 deg.) evenly aligned with straight base sections. C. Where angle of outside corners are less than 270 deg., neatly trim back of base at breakline to achieve full, even contact with wall and floor surface. D. Cope base on inside corner angles of 90 deg. For inside corner angles greater than 90 deg., cope or back -trim at break line to achieve tight fit. E. Install base in maximum lengths practicable. 3.6 TILE FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Provide adhesive applied tapered resilient strips where flooring terminates at an unfloored area. When flooring abuts other tupes of flooring finish level with other flooring. B. Arrange in rooms or spaces so edge rows against walls are larger than 1/2 of the tile size. C. Grid layout; grain (if any) in one direction, as directed. D. Roll tile with 150 lb. roller after installation. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 3 3.7 CLEANING A. Immediately remove excessive adhesive from visible surfaces and clean as recommended by manufacturer. B. Allow flooring to set minimum of five days prior to cleaning. C. After cleaning, thoroughly buff resilient flooring with commercial type. buffer. END. OF SECTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate and verify that surfaces are suitable to receive tile work. Notify Architect if conditions exist that would adversely affect appearance or performance of tile installation and which cannot be corrected by preparatory work specified in this Section. B. Prior to installing tile, verify that surfaces are clean and within specified tolerances. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Concrete Substrate: Install floor tile and base in accordance with: 1. Thinset: TCA Method F113 and ANSI A108.5. B. Plywood Substrate: Install floor tile and base in accordance with: 1. Thinset: TCA Method F142 (double plywood) or F114 (glass mesh mortar units). C. Install wall tile in accordance with TCA Method W243 for gypsum board substrate; W244 for glass mesh mortar units substrate. D. Install thresholds full length thinset, and in accordance with TCA Installation Handbook. E. Carefully plan tile layouts to avoid excessive cutting. F. Provide uniform joints. Assure joints are watertight without voids, cracks and excess mortar or grout. G. Neatly cut tile around fixtures and drains. Accurately form corners, base, interrrsections and returns. H. Form intenal wall angles square, floor angles coved and external angles bullnosed. I. Sound tile after setting. Remove and replace hollow sounding units. J. Allow tile to set 48 hours minimum prior to grouting. K. Remove and neatly replace broken, damaged or faulty tile. L. Clean tile surfaces in accordance with Section 01700. 3.3 GROUTING A. Grout joints in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, ANSI A108.10, and applicable TCA recommendations. B. Remove grout haze with cleaning materials specifically recommended by tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09300 - 4 TILE SECTION 09560 W3CO STRIP FIUORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Laminated wood strip flooring adhered to substarte. B. Divider strip to adjacent floor finish. C. Transparent floor finish. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Concrete sub -floor finish. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. B. Provide two 12" lengths of strip flooring. C. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install wood flooring system until wet construction work is completed and surrounding air has maximum moisture content of 50 %. B. Provide permanent heat, light and ventilation prior to installation. C. Maintain room temperature of a minimum of 65 deg. F. for period of 7 days prior to delivery of materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLOORING A. Manufacturer: Perna Grain Products Inc.; Media PA. B. 2 -3/4" x 48" x 3/16" thick, Permagrain acrylic - impregnated, tupelo wood plank flooring, classic color - Barcelona. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesive: Water resistive type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. WOOD STRIP FLOORING 09560 - 1 B. Sub -Floor Filler: Premix latex requiring only enough water to produce cementitious paste. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Broom clean substrate surface and ensure floor surface is smooth and flat to plus or minus 1/8" in 10 feet; free of oil, grease, dust and foreign substance. B. Use latex filler to patch cracks, small holes and for minor levelling. C. Notify Architect if conditions exist that would adversely affect appearance or performance of wood flooring system and which cannot be corrected by preparatory work specified in this section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Apply adhesive to prepared subfloor in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Assure full adhesive contact for permanent bond to substrate. C. Lay flooring symmetrical about room center line in ashlar pattern. Fit neatly to vertical interruptions. D. Install splines at end joints except at walls and vertical obstructions. E. Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions. F. Within one hour oflaying, roll work thoroughly in both directions with 150 lb. roller. 3.3 FLOOR FINISH A. Remove excess adhesive from floor surface as work progresses. B. Clean and polish in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. END OFD SECTION 09560 - 2 WOOD STRIP FLOORING SBCTION 09680 CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTIONS A. B. C. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS Preparation of surfaces to receive carpeting. Carpet complete with required accessories. Edge strips where carpeting terminates at other A. Section 01010 products. Section 03300 - Section 03510 - SUBMITTALS - Summary floor finishes. of Work: Owner supplied contractor installed Cast -in -Place Concrete: Substrate. Gypsum Concrete: Substrate. Submit shop drawings, product date and samples in accordance with Section 01300. . Indicate location of all seams, method of joining seams, direction of carpet method of integrating edge strips with carpet and installation procedures. C. Submit one sampleof each type of carpet to be used of sufficient sizeto clearly indicate construction. In addition, submit one duplicate sample of each color of carpet. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain room temperature at minimum 60 deg. F for at least 24 hours prior to installation and relative humidity at approximately that at which the area is to be maintained. B Provide adequate lighting for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Carpet: Owner Supplied Contractor Installed (OSCI) B. Carpet Pad: Owner Supplied Contractor Installed (OSCI) CARPET .09680 - 1 C. Adhesive: Latex strippable type recommended by carpet manufacturer to suit application and expected service. Adhesive containing folmaldehyde is not acceptable. D. Accessories: As selected by Owner. E. Edge Strip: Type, stile, material, color and finish as selected by Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1.1 PREPARATION A. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster and other substances detrimental to proper performance of carpet, Allow floors to thoroughly dry. B. Assure floors are level, with maximum surface variation as specified. Notify Architect if conditions exist that would adversely affect appearance or performance of carpet system and which cannot be corrected by preparatory work specified in this Section. C. Assure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregularities and exhibit neutraality relative to acidity and alkalinity. D. Use an approved cemetitious filler to patch cracks, small holes and for leveling. E. Do not begin carpet installation until painting and finishing work is complete and ceilings and overhead work is completed. 3.2 PAD INSTALLATION A. Install pad using maximum sized pieces. Layout to avoid alignment of pad and carpet seams. B. Butt edges tightly together and to edge of carpet gripper. Tape all joints, CI Install pad taut, without air pockets and ridges. Secure around projections and contours 3.3 CARPET INSTALLATION A. Lay out rolls of carpet fully for Owner's approval. B. Check matching of carpet before cutting and assure there is no visible variation between dye lots. C. Cut carpet, where required, in manner to allow proper seam and pattern match. Assure cuts are straight and true and unfrayed. 09680 - 2 CARPET D. Vacuum clean substrate. Spread adhesive uniformly in quantity recommended by manufacturer's printed instructions to assure proper adhesion over full area of installation. E. Seal seams full length with seaming adhesive. F. Where possible and practical, locate seams in areas of least amount of traffic. G. Join seams in recommended manner so as not to detract from appearance of carpet installation and decrease its life expectancy. Assure seams are straight, not overlapped or peaked and free of gaps. H. Lay carpet on floors with run of pile in same direction of anticipated traffic. I. Lay carpet on stairs with run of pile in opposite direction of anticipated traffic to avoid peeking of backing at nosing. Adhere carepet tight to treads and risers of stairs. J. Do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to next where continuous through a wall opening. K. Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor and to wall and other vertical surfaces. L. Fit carpet snugly to walls and other vertical surfaces where no base is scheduled leaving no gaps. M Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpeted surfaces for a minimum of 24 hours or until adhesive is set. N. Lay carpet tight and flat to substrate, well fastened at edges to present uniform pleasing appearance. Assure monolithic color, pattern and texture match within any one area. END OF SECTION 0. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. Use full length pieces only. Butt tight to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided, butt ends tight and flush. P. Usable Waste Pieces: Present all usable waste pieces of carpet to the Owner at site. Leave pieces selected by Owner properly wrapped and stored at site. Remove all other waste pieces. • CARPET 09680 - 3 r r I SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation and painting of surfaces scheduled. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Applicable Sections - Shop Priming B. Section 07920 - Caulking and Sealants 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer and Related Products, B. ASTM D2016 - Test Methods for Moisture Content of Wood. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit schedule of materials proposed to be used for each specific surface with technical data for each coating material. C. Accompanying paint schedule, submit two copies of charts indicating full range of colors available in each of proposed products. D. When requested, prepare and deliver to Architect two identical sets of samples, 8" square, of selected colors; whenever possible, provide same materials for samples as that on which finish will be applied. 1,5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver paint materials to job site in original unopened containers with labels intact and legible at time of use, B. Store only approved materials at job site and store only in suitable and designated area restricted to storage of paint materials and related equipment. C. Protect paint materials from damage before, during and after application. Take necessary precautions to avoid creating fire hazards. PAINTING 09900 - 1 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Apply finishes only when air and surface temperatures are 50 deg. F. or above and relative humidity is less than 80 %. B. Do not apply finish to wet surfaces. C. Do not apply finishes during dusty or high wind conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Paints: Benjamin -Moore 1. Other acceptable manufacturers: a. Sherwin Williams b. Devoe c. Glidden d. Pittsburg e. Pratt & Lambert f. United B. Stains: Benjamin -Moore 1. Other acceptable manufacturers: a. Sherwin Williams b. Cabot c. Olympic d. Pratt & Lambert e. Rez 2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Painting schedule at end of this section is based on Sherwin - Williams products unless noted otherwise. Products of Benjamin Moore are also acceptable. Other manufacturers may be used provided they are an acceptable substitute and they are considered by Architect to be an acceptable substitute to those scheduled. B. Substitutes will not be allowed for special coating systems 2.3 MATERIALS A. Provide the product of a single manufacturer for each finish selected for each coating system for each type of surface. B. Spackling compound, fillers, thinners and additives shall be compatible in use as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 09900 - 2 PAINTING 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces prior to applying paint. Verify that surface prepartion is complete enough to allow finishes to be properly applied. B. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Board: 12% 2. Masonry, Concrete, and CMU: 12% 3. Wood, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016: a. Interior: 12% b. Exterior: 15% C. Application of finishes over rust, dirt and foreign substances will be cause for rejection. D. Notify Architect if conditions exist that would adversely affect application, appearance and performance of coating system and which cannot be corrected by preparatory work specified in this Section. 3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES, GENERAL A. Completely mask, remove, or otherwise adequately protect hardware, accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in contact with surfaces to be painted. B. Thoroughly clean surfaces before applying paint or other surface treatment. Comply specifically with coating manufacturer's recommen- dations for applicable surface. C. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other containments from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces, D. Patch nail holes and dimples with spackling compound. Flush spackling compound with adjoining areas and sand to achieve smooth even surface. Fill cracks and voids with caulk or spackling compound where paint is scheduled. 3.3 PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES A. Clean surfaces thoroughly with solvent until they are free of dirt . oil, grease and other foreign substances. Allow to dry thoroughly before applying paint. B. Clean ferrous metals following recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council using method recommended by coating manufacturer for specific exposure. C. Treat new galvanized metal surfaces with chemical etching compound as recommended by paint manufacturer. Remove excess etching solution and allow to dry completely before applying first coat of paint. PAINTING 09900 3 r I 1 r i s t i i i 3.4 PREPARATION OF WOOD SURFACES A. Clean wood surfaces until free of dirt, oil and other substances. B. Set nail heads approximately 1/16" and fill with wood putty. C. Sand wood surfaces scheduled to receive field applied finish with sand paper varying from coarse to fine, 150 grit, and as appropriate to achieve smooth, unmarred finish. D. Touch up factory applied finishes using exact material and method as recommended by manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.5 PAINT APPLICATION A. Apply finishes in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed direc- tions. B. Paint grilles, registers, diffusers and other prefinished items where factory - finish is not in accordance with painting schedule and Architect's color selection. C. Apply paint to grilles, registers and diffusers by spraying only. D. Paint access doors or panels, electric panelboard covers, exposed pipes exposed ducts and raceways to match adjacent surfaces except where color coding is specified. E. Apply paint and finish amterials to walls, doors and trim with brush or roller unless specified otherwise. F. Primer, where shown on painting schedule, may be omitted where shop coat primer has been applied. Touch -up metal surfaces with specified primer as required. Do not apply subsequent coats of paint to bare metal. 1. Where zinc -rich primer is specified or shown, or where zinc coating is damaged, use Sherwin - Williams Zinc-Clad 1. G. Apply paint finishes evenly to minimum dry film number of coats specified unless noted otherwise H. Apply two coats sealer to rebates and cut -outs for tops and bottoms of wood doors immediately after 3.6 FIELD INSPECTION thickness of 4 mils in in painting schedule. glass and grilles and to fitting. A. Do not apply additional coats until completed coat has been inspected and approved by Architect. Only inspected and approved coats of paint will be considered in determining number of coats applied. B. Provide and use dry film thickness gauge as approved by Architect to determine dry film thickness (DFT) of paint applied. 09900 - 4 PAINTING 3.7 SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES A. Steel - Primed (Doors, Frames, Railings): Gloss /Alkyd 1. Touch up with zinc rich primer. 2. Two coats Metalastic II Enamel, B53. B. Steel - Galvanized: Gloss /Alkyd (Chimney Caps Gutters and Downspouts) 1. One coat Gaivite B50W3. 2. Two coats Metalastic II Enamel, B53. C. Wood Trim, and Cornices: Gloss /Alkyd. 1. One coat brush applied A -100 Alkyd Exterior Wood Primer, Y24W20 (tinted); back -prime wood siding and trim. 2. Two coats SWP Gloss House and /trim; A2; brush apply primer and first coat; top coat may be spray applied. D. Gypsum Soffits: Flat /Latex 1. One coat A -100 Flat Latex House and Trim. 2. One coat A -100 Flat Latex House and Trim. 3.8 SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES A. Steel - Unprimed: Eggshell /Alkyd 1. One coat Kem- Kromik Metal Primer. B50N2/B50W1. 2. Two coasts ProMar Alkyd Eg -Shel Enamel, B33. B. Steel - Galvanized: Eggshell /Alkyd 1. One coat Gaivite, B50W3. 2. Two coats ProMar Alkyd Eg -Shel Enamel, B33. C. Wood - Painted: Eggshell /Alkyd Base 1. One coat ProMar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater, B49W200. 2. One coat ProMar Alkyd Eg -Shel Enamel B33. D. Wood - Stained: Transparent /Alkyd 1. Antiqued Faux Pickled Pine Finish; refer to drawings. E. Gypsum Board: Flat /Acrylic Latex 1. One coat Pro -Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200. 2. One coat ProMar 200 Latex Flat Wall Paint, B32W101, PAINTING 09900 5 . Gypsum Board: Eggshell /Latex 1. One coat ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200. 2. One coat Pro -Mar Latex Eg -Shel, B20W200. • Gypsum Board: (Food Service Area) Eggshell/Epoxy. 1. One coat ProMar Latex Wall Primer B28W200. 2. Two coats Tile -Clad II Epoxy, B62 /B60VA7 DFT per coat, 4.0 mils. Spray- Textured Ceilings: 1. One coat Pro -Mar 200 Latex Flat Wall Paint, B30. 2. One coat USG Imperial QT Spray Texture Finish coarse texture; uniform. coverage. END OF SECTION SECTION 09950 WALLCOVERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vinyl Wallcovering B. Substrate Sealing and Adhesives 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Owner Supplied Contractor Installed Products. B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Smooth wall surface for application of wallcovering. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Federal Specifications (FS): CCC -W -408 Wallcovering, Vinyl Coated. B. ASTM D1308 - Effect of Household Chemical on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes. C. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain material from one manufacturer• manufactured by one process and of uniform pattern, texture and color, for each type required for each continuous area and visually related areas. Do not change brands of materials during course of work without approval B. Certification: Provide manufacturer's certification that recommended strippable - type adhesive will permit removal of wallcovering from gypsum drywall surfaces without damage to paper facings. C. Samples: Submit three 12" x 12" samples of each type of wallcovering to illustrate range of color and pattern variation. D. Maintenance Instructions: Submit two copies of wallcovering manufac- turer's printed instructions for maintenance of installed work. Include name of manufacturer material brand name, color and texture designation and precautions for the use of cleaning materials and methods which could damage wallcovering. E. Replacement Materials: After completion of work deliver to project site not less than 5 linear yds. of each type, color and pattern of wallcovering installed. Furnish replacement materials from same manufactured sequence as materials installed. ? LLCOVERING 09950 - 1 r r. r r.; 1.5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and as specified. B. Deliver materials to project site in original packages or containers clearly labeled to identify manufacturer, brand name, quality of grade and fire hazard classification. C. Store materials in original undamaged packages or containers. Do not store wallcovering in an upright position. Maintain temperature in storage area above 40 deg. F. 1.6 EIVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Maintain constant minimum temperature of not less than 60 deg. F, at areas of installation for at least 72 hours before, and 48 hours after . application of materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL WALLCOVERING A. Main House: (See Finish Schedule on Drawings Location, Manufacturer & Color) 1. DWC -1: Maharani "Tek -Wall" 1000 Series; color, #08 mint; 54" wide. 2. VWC -1: Type II, 27" wide with 5" cornice border. B. Suites: (See Unit Finish Schedule for Location, Manufacturer and color) 1. VWC -1: Type I 27" wide. 2. VWC -3,4 & 5" Type II, 54" wide. 2.2 ADHESIVE A. Manufacturer's recommended adhesive, primer and sealer, manufactured expressly for use with selected walcovering. Provide materials which are mildew and alkali- resistant and non - staining to wallcovering. B. Provide manufacturer's strippable type adhesive for use with wallcovering applied over gypsum board. PART 3 - EXECUTION 09950 - 2 WALLCOVERING r 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate and adjoining construction and conditions under which work is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until satisfactory conditoins detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected. B. Notify Architect if conditions exist that will adversely affect application appearance and performance of wallcoverings system and which cannot be corrected by preparatory work specified in this section. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove wallcovering materials fdrom its packaging and allow to acclimate to area of installation 24 hours before application. B. Remove switch plates, wall plates, hardware and surface - mounted fixtures and accessories where wallcovering is to be applied. C. Prime and seal substrate in accordance with wallcovrering manufacturer's recommendations for type of substrate material to be covered. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Place wallcovering panels consecutively in sequence they are cut from rolls, including filling of spaces above or below openings Hang by reversing alternate strips except on match patterns. B. Apply adhesive to back of wallcovering and place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install seams vertically and plumb and at least 6" away from corners. Horizontal seams will not be permitted. Place wallcovering continuously over internal and external corners. Overlap seams and double -cut to assure tight closure. D. Roll brush, or use a broad knife to remove air bubbles, wrinkles blisters and other defects. Cut wallcovering evenly to edges of outlet boxes or supports. E. Trim selvages as required to assure color uniformity and pattern match at seams. F. Remove excess adhesive along finished seams using warm water and clean sponge and wipe dry. G. Install wallcovering in largest practical pieces, with an intimate substrate bond smooth, clean, without wrinkles, gaps and overlaps. WALLCOVERING 09950 - 3 r. r. Replace removed plates and'fixtures to. verify cut edges of wallcovering are completely. concealed. 1.4 'CLEANUP A. Upon completion of work, remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from wallcovering installation and leave areas of work in neat clean condition. END OF SECTION SECTION 10100 IACKBCARDS PART 1 - GENERAL. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tackboards B. Accessories and Attachments. C. Provide and install one tackboard in employee breakroom in Building 3. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and grounds. B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Attachment substrate. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data and color charts in accordance with Section 01300. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Use necessary means to protect materials specified in this section before, during and after installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Claridge 1. Other acceptable Manufacturers: Gotham. 2. Substitutions will be considered only under provisions of Section 01630. 2.2 TACKBOARDS A. 1/4" thick ground cork, burlap backed, mainated to 1/4" hardboard with 1- 1/4" aluminum trim and angle hangers. B. Cork: Claridge "1100 Series ". EXAMINATION TACKBQARDS 10100 1 verify that this EXAMINATION Examine existing surfaces work may properly begin. and work of other trades and Secure clip angles to wall at 24" o c. and properly anchor chalkboards and tackboards into positon plumb. square'and tight against wall'surfaces. Turn clip angles down at top and up at bottom. Conceal anchorage devices, to maximum extent practicable.. SECTION 10165 PLASTIC IAMINATE TOILET CCMPAIaMQT1S PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking for anchorage. B. Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories: Metal accessories. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat - Resisting Chromium- Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip B. NEMA LD3 - High pressure Decorative Laminates 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's product data in accordance with Section 01300. B. Clearly indicate partition layouts, swing of doors, elevations, anchorage and mounting details, panel constructions, components hardware finishes and all relevant dimensions. C. Submit two color charts of manufacturer's standard stock colors and patterns. 1,5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Accurate Partitions Div. United States Gypsum Co. 2. American Sanitary Partition Corp. 3. Global Steel Products Corp 4. Knickerbocker Partition Co 5. Sanymetal Products Co. 2.2 TYPE A. Overhead braced, 411042. 2.3 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD3, 0.050" thick general purpose . matte finish; color and pattern as scheduled or selected by Architect. PLASTIC LAMINATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10165 - 1. B. Particle Board Core: 45 ib. density, Type 2 (phenolic resin binder). C. headrails: 1" x 1 -1/2" x 16 gauge anodized aluminum. D. Pilaster Shoes: 2" high. ASTM A167; type 302/304, stainless steel with #4 polished finish. E. Attachments, Screws and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type; heavy duty extruded aluminum brackets. F. Hardware: Chrome - plated non - ferrous cast pivot hinge, gravity type adjustable for door close positioning; nylon bearings; thumb turn door latch; door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; cast alloy chrome - plated coat hook and bumper. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Doors and Panels: 1" nominal thickness of plastic laminate face and edge sheets pressure bonded to particle board core. B. Pilasters: 1 -1/4" nominal thickness, constructed same as doors and panels. C. Pressure - laminate one -piece face sheets to core material with no splices or joints and with edges straight and sealed. Seal exposed core material at cutouts to protect against moisture. D. Provide integral reinforcing for mounting grab bars at handicap accessible stalls. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine work of other trades and verify that such work is complete enough to allow this installation to properly begin. B. Assure correct spacing of plubmbing fixtures and correct locations of built -in framing, anchorage and bracing, where required. 2.2 INSTALLATION A. Install compartments secure, plumb, level and square. B Attach panel brackets securely to walls, square, using appropriate anchor devices. C. Attach panels and pilasters to bracket with thru - sleeve tamper proof bolts and nuts. Locate headrail joints at pilaster center lines. 10165 - 2 PLASTIC LAMINATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS . Provide for adjustments of floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. Conceal floor fastenings with stainless steel shoes. E. Equip each door with hinges, one door latch and one coat hook and bumper. F. Install door strike keeper and door bumper on each pilaster in alignment with door latch. G. Adjust and align hardware at vertical edges of doors to uniform clearance not exceeding 3/16 ". Adjust hinges to locate doors in partial open positions when unlatched, except that outswing doors shall return to closed. position. 3.3 CLEANING A. Replace damaged, scratched or marred defective materials. Field touch -up . of scratches or defaced finish will not be acceptable. B. Remove marks, labels.and foreign substances. fromcompartments. END OF SECTION SECTION 10230 METAL VENTS AND LOUVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS 1.3 REFERENCES 1.4 SUBMITTALS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.2 VENTS AND LOUVERS A. Prefinished ridge, gable and soffit vents. B. Fixed louvers. C. Fasteners and accessories. A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Rough openings B. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Wood siding C. Section 07310 - Asphalt Shingles A. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate B. FS RR -W -365 - Wire Fabric (Insect Screening) A. Provide manufacturer's product data and printed installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. A. Aluminum Sheet; ASTM B209, 3005 -H25; minimum tensile strength, 26.000 psi; minimum yield strength, 22,000 psi, A. Ridge Vents: Alcoa Vent -A- Ridge, roll- formed, 0.019" thick aluminum. Finish backed -on acrylic, brown. B. Gable Vents: Roll- formed 0.019" thick aluminum Z- shaped sections with aluminum insect screening. Finish, baked -on acrylic, color selected by owner. C. Soffit Vents: Alcoa "Vent -A- Strip" of roll- formed 0.019" thick aluminum. Finish, backed -on acrylic, color selected by Owner. METAL VENTS AND LOUVERS 10230 - 1 D. Fixed Louvers: Fixed blade, storm proof design 24 gauge galvanized steel or. 0.032" thick prefinished aluminum of color selected by Owner. E. Fasteners: High tensile aluminum box nails. Head color to match vent color. r PART 3 - EXECUTION instructions. Install level, square and aligned with adjacent work. r. I: l i 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install vents END OF SECTION in accordance with. Alcoa's "Vent -A- System". installation B. Do not place aluminum in contact with dissimilar metals. Where contact is . unavoidable, paint or protect dissimilar materials. C. Where drainage of dissimilar materials passes over aluminum surfaces paint dissimilar surfaces. METAL, " VENTS AND. ILXJVERS r r r. 1 .. SECTION 10305 PREFABRICAIED FIREPLACE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prefabricated fireplaces, premanufactured flues and accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Rough openings. B. Section 06190 - Wood Trusses: Openings through roof framing. C. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal Chimney Caps. D. Section 09300 - Tile: Quarry tile hearth. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01300. B. Provide manufacturer's product data and printed installation instructions. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery to site in manufacturer's cartons. Protect from damage. Store fireplace components in enclosed spaces. 1.5 PRCOECT /SITE CONDITIONS A. Make field measurements where necessary to assure proper fit of components. PART 2 - PROWCTDS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. The Majestic Company; Huntington, In. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Superior, Div. of Mobex, Co.; Fullerton. CA. 2.2 FIREPLACE (Main House) A. Gas fired with gas logs. B. See Details on Drawings. PREFABRICATED FIREPLACES 10305 1! Ii 1_ r IJ 2.3 FIREPLACE (Units) A. Model M36 open-front 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Glass Enclosure Kit: B. Flue Termination: Model #CFT8CL. C. Chimney Sections: Manufacturer's standard, size as recommended. D. Firestop: Manufacturer's standard. E. Basket Grate: Model #BG22, F. Trinm Kit: Model #STK36. G. Supplier to verify details on Drawings to parts numbers listedi 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate fireplace one piece with joints welded; fabricate components to manufacturer's standards, comply with UL requirements, PART 3 - EXAMINATION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that rough openings have been properly stops and blocking has been installed. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Install fire safing at combustibles. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fireplace and instructions. B. Install firestopping Code requirements. END OF SECTION ' 10305 - 2 type, UL listed. Model #GEK 36-0. sized and located; fire rough openings to separate flue components from components in accordance with manufacturer's printed at chimney sections in accordance with applicable PREFABRICATED FIREPLACES SECTION 10350 FLAGPOLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flagpoles, anchorage devices and accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work; Owner- furnished and installed items, flags. B. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concarete: Foundations. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, standard details and printed installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Include detailed description of installation anchoring devices, and other materials necessary for complete and proper installa- tion. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall have not less than five years experience and have successfully completed at least five projects the size of this project or larger using similar materials and methods. B. Design Criteria: Design flagpole to withstand not less than 90 mph wind velocity when unflagged. 1. Flagpole No. 4 - 50' - high measured from bottom of flash collar. C. Minimum Ultimate Tensile Strength: 30,000 psi. D. Minimum Ultimate Yield Strength: 25,000 psi. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Wrap each shaft in protective paper and ship in a hard fibre tube to protect finish. Apply heavy coat of asphaltum paint to unexposed portion of shaft which will be below grade FLAGPOLES 10350 - 1 B. Handle flagpoles in manner so as not to cause damage. Store flagpole bare in protected dry area on wood runners or skids, covered with vented tarpaulins or vented plastic sheets. Remove wrapping material before storage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Concord Industries: Addison, TX. B. American Flagpole, Div. Kearney - National, Inc.; Bohemia NY. C. Babcock - Davis Associates, Inc.; Boston, MA. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Flagpole Shaft: Manufacture from 6063 -T6 aluminum sleamless tubing having uniform conical taper of approximately 1" in every 5'-6" of length minimum and 1" every 7' -2" of length maximum. B. Provide pole with an internal halyard system including heavy duty winch with removable crank halyard of stainless steel braided aircraft cable and concealed revolving truck assembly. For service of mechanism, provide a flush hinged acces door with continuous reinforced periphery. Door shall pivot on heavy duty piano hinge and be secured with cylinder lock. C. Winch: Manual operated geared unit with control stop arrangement to permit positive locking of flag at any position on pole. D. Flag Attachmente: Nylon braided sling encircling pole and counterweight to assure descent of flag in all weather conditions, excluding hurricane force winds. FITTINGS Flash Collar: Spun aluminum base or flash collar. diameter of collar shall be at least 1" larger than diameter of foundation sleeve. Match shaft finish. B. Foundation Sleeve: 16 gauge galvanized steel larger than diameter of sleeve. C. Support Plate: Minimum 6" square steel plate spike at least 6" below base plate. 2.4 FINISH A. Anodized aluminum. B. Hood finish to match shaft. 10350 - 2 with square base plate 4" securely welded to ground FLAGPOLES Install flagpoles, anchorae devices and accessories in accordance with manufacturers' printed instructions. Install plumb to tolerance of one in 1000. Adjust operating components to optimum operation. Provide positive lightning ground for each flagpole installation. SECTION 10505 t4EML ROCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Locker units with hinged doors. B. Base, top and filler panels. C. Hooks, latches and hardware. D. Attachment hardware. E. Provide and install five (5) double locker units in Building 3. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit shop drawings and product manufacturer's data; include locker types, sizes, configurations, layout of groups of lockers, accessories and numbering plan. C. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 1.4 . PRC TECTION A. Store lockers in manufacturer's cartons in enclosed space. B. Protect locker finishes and adjacent surfaces from damage during installation. PART 2 - PRODUCDTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Interior Steel Equipment Co., Cleveland, OH. B. List Industries Inc.; Boca Ratan, FL. C, Lyon Metal Products, Inca D. Penco; Oaks, PA. E. Republic Storage Systems; Canton, OH. METAL DOCKERS 10505 - 1 I I I 1 1. L 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: Mild, cold - rolled, levelled steel; of the following minimum thicknesses: 1. Body and Shelf: 24 gauge. 2. Doors: 18 gauge. 3. Door Inner Faces: 24 gauge. 4. Door Frames: 16 gauge. 5. Hinges: 14 gauge. 6. Base, Top, Trim: 22 gauge. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Provide each locker with two single prong wall hooks and one double prong back hook. Hooks shall be steel with ball points. B. Provide polished aluminum number plate for each locker. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Locker Units: Double Tier - 12" wide x 18" deep x 36" high. B. Bodies: Formed channel shape, welded and ground flush, welded to body. C. Door Frame: Formed channel shape, welded and ground flush, welded to body. D. Doors: Welded inner and outer faces; channel reinforced top and bottom with intermediate stiffener ribs. Finish edges smooth. E. Hinges: Two for each double tier door. Weld securely to unit body and rivit to locker door. F. Provide locking handle for combination lock. G. Provide 4" continuous Z- shaped steel bases for formed returns. H. Provide 20 gauge steel end panels, filler panels and continuous sloped tops to close off all openings. I. Provide ventilation openings at top and bottom of each locker. J. Finish edge smooth without burrs. K. Provide number plates with 3/8" black filled numbesr in sequence as directed by Owner. 2.5 LOCKER FINISHES (Factory Prefinished) A. Clean degrease and neutralize metal; prime and finish with two coats of baked enamel. 10505 - 2 METAL LOCKERS . Color: As selected by Architect dfrom manufacturer's standard range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 .INSTALLATION A. Install lockers secure . plumb, square and in line. Conform to manufac- turer's printed installation instructions. . Anchor lockers with appropriate anchor devices to suit materials encountered. . Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation. D. Install end panels, filler panels sloped tops and bases to completely close off openings. END OF SECTION r I. i t i t SEC'rIw 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. B. Cabinets and mounting brackets. C. Provide and install fire extinguishers and cabinets to be located by local fire department and owner. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Rough openings for recessed mounting. B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Rough openings for recessed mounting. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data under provisions of Section 01300. Indicate locations and mounting details. B. Closeout Submittal: Submit written confirmation to Owner indicating that extinguisher types and locations are in compliance with local fire marshal requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requieements of NFPA 10 and local fire department. B. Quantity size and type shall conform to local fire department regulations where more stringent than specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. J. L. Industries; Bloomington, MN. B. Larsen's Manufacturing Co., Minneapolis, MN. C. Modern Metal Products: Owatonn MN. 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Style: Ambassador #1017 by J. L. Industries. : FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10522 - 1 B. Size: Cabinet 10 -1/2" wide x 24" high x 6" deep. Rough opening 11 -1/2" wide x 25" high x 4" deep. C. Cabinet Material: 20 gauge steel, white epoxy enameled finish. D. Mounting: Semi - Recessed. E. Trim: White enameled steel. F. Door: 1. Construction: Solid 20 gauge steel with continuous piano type hinge and adjustable roller catches; unlettered pull handle with satin finish. 2. Lettering: Black letters positioned vertically to read "FIRE EXTINGUISHER "; all lettering factory applied by silk screen process. 2.3 COMBINATION VALVE AND EXTINGUISHER CABINET A. Style: T-VC 4016 -SM by Larsen. B. Size: 19 -1/2" wide x 43 -1/2" high x 8 -1/2 " deep. C. Cabinet Material: 20 gauge . white epoxy enameled finish. D. Mounting: Surface Mount. E. Trim: White enameled steel 1 -1/2" wide. F. Door: 1. Construction: Solid, 20 gauge steel with continuous piano type hinge and adjustable roller catches; unlettered pull handle with satin finish. 2. Lettering: Black letters positioned vertically to read, "FIRE VALVE" on left side and "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" on right side; all lettering factory applied by silk screen process. G. Valve: 2 -11/2" with cap and chain. 2.4 EXTINGUISHERS AND ACCESSORIES A. Type and Size: UL rated for Class A B and C fires and as specifically required by local fire department. B. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets appropriate for wall construction and properly sized for extinguishers in areas where cabinets are not shown. 10522 - 2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 1,4 r PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets and brackets printed instructions. END OF SECTION in strict accordance with manufacturer's. B. Install cabinets vertical and level with trim in full contact with finished wall surface. C. Where extinguishers can be located in non-public. utility type spaces, mounting brackets only may be used, Secure brackets to wall with anchors . suitable to wall conditions. D. Install fully charged extinguishers with appropriate date tags attached. Units mounted on brackets shall hang vertical and level. f SE CTIaN 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal toilet accessories. B. Janitor room accessories. C. Bath accessories. D. Shower curtains and rods. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Built -In Blocking B. Section 08800 - Glazing: Unframed Mirrors C. Section 10165 - Plastic Laminate Toilet Compartments 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data. Clearly illustrate each accessory and show installation method. B. Submit shop drawings showing layout, dimensions and all components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Franklin Brass B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. American Dispenser Co. 2. Accessory Specialties Inc. 3. Bobrick 4. Bradley 5. Parker 2.2 PUBLIC TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Towel Dispenser: #1955, 22 gauge Type 304 stainless steel. Provide one for each toilet room. B. Toilet Paper Holers: #1973 chrome - plated steel double roll type. 1. #607C recessed single roll type at each private toilet. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 1 C. Soap Dispensers: 1.. Wall Hung Lavatories and Basins: #1925 302/304 stainless steel 16 oz. capacity, surface mounted. Provide one at each lavatory and wash basin. 2. Counter Mounted Lavatories: Bobrick #B -8295 chrome plated brass body with 16 oz. rigid translucent polyethylene container, countertop mounted with 6" spout. Provide one at each lavatory. D. Sanitary Napkin Dispenser: Bobrick #B-352 recessed mounted, Type 302/304 18 gauge stainless steel, satin finish, Provide one at Women s Toilet. E. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: #1925, 22 gauge, Type 302/304 stainless steel, satin finish. Provide one at each women's toilet stall. F. Grab Bars: #5652 18 gauge Type 304 stainless steel, satin finish concealed fasteners 1 1/2" diameter, 52" long with three support positions; 1 1/2" wall clearance. G. Mirrors: 18" x 36" x 1/4" thick float glass ql mirror quality with 1/2" stainless steel frames and concealed type fittings. Provide one at each wall hung lavatory. 2.3 JANITOR ROOM ACCESSORIES A, Mop and Broom Holder: Bobrick #B 223, 36" long, 302 /4 =304 stainless steel. Provide one at each service sink. 2,4 GUEST ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Towel Shelf: #2780 by 18 ". B. Robe Hook: #1402 chrome - plated; double. C. Towel Bar: #1424 chrome - plated by 24" long. D. Toilet Tissue Holder: #607C chrome plated brass shell and roller, recess type. E. Grab Bar: #524SS polished stainless steel by 24" long. 1 Handicap Grab Bars: a #5624 18 gauge Type 304 stainless steel, straight, 1 1/2" diameter by 24" long with concealed fasteners. b #5662, 18 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel, horizontal tub bar, 1 1/2" diameter with 40" and 20" sections; concealed fasteners. F. Shower Rod: #110 1" diamater chrome- plated brass by 0.025" wall thickness 10800 — 2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES ' G. Shower Curtain: Opaque, matte white, 0.008" thick vinyl with heat sealed grommets along top at 6" o.c. Bottom and sides hemmed. Provide stainless steel curtain hooks. 2.5 FASTENERS A. Concealed: Hot -dip galvanized or non- ferrous as appropriate for job conditions. B. Exposed: Stainless steel or chrome - plated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point that this installation may properly begin. B. Verify exact location of each accessory. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's printed instruc- tions. B. Install accessories plumb, level and securely anchored into position. C. Install handicap grab bars 13" above toilet set to center line of bar or as required by local codes. END OF SECTION SECTION 10900 VARDROBE AND CLOSET SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vinyl- coated steel rod closet shelving and storage system. B. Brackets, anchors and accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Site installed wood shelving. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submitatls under provisions of Section 01300, B. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions on all components. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver components to site in manufacturer's standard unopened cartons. Store in enclosed area and protect from damage, PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Clairson Int. Building Products Div.: Ocala, FL, B. Substitutions will be considered only under provisions of Section 01630, 2.2 COMPONENTS A. "Closet Maid" vinyl - coated, steel -rod, ventilated shelving and storag units. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Provide support brackets, anchors and accessories for installation to gypsum board without mounting to concealed blocking. WARDROBE AND CLOSET SPECIALITIES 10900 - r. r r r i 2.4 ..FABRICATION . Fabricate shelving and storage units.of Grade C -1008 bright basic cold drawn steel wire with average tensile strength of 100,000 psi. B. Resistant weld at intersection of cross deck wires. Space deck rods at 1" centers. Trim cross deck wires smooth to longitudinal wires. C. Finish: Vinyl- coating of non - exudating formula PVC, applied by fluidized . bed process to 7 -11 mils thickness. Clean and prime metal prior to coating to ensure proper bond. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces to which components are to be attached are complete . enough for this installation to begin. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install closet shelving and storage units level, square, plumb and securely anchored into position in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. END OF SECTION SECTION 11132 PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manually operated wall mounted projection screen assembly B Provide and install one projection screen in conference room in Main House where shown on plans, 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and grounds B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings showing installation details and manufacturer's product data under provisions of Section 01300. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A Da -Lite Screen, Inc. B Draper Screen Co. Inc. 2.2 PROJECTION SCREENS A "Luma" spring roller operated classroom size, 50" x 50" as manufactured by Draper. B. Case: 22 gauge steel, pentagonal shaped with flat back; 16 gauge chrome plated end caps with integral roller brackets, fully concealing roller ends. C Screen: Fiber glass matt white (glass beaded) flame and mildew resistant. Attach fabric to one-piece rigid steel roller. Attach bottom of viewing surface on tubular steel slat with vinyl end caps. Miscellaneous: Provide metal installation brackets and other items necessary for a complete installation, PART 3 EXECUTION PROJECTION SCREENS 11132 .: 1 f. c EXAMINATION Examine work of other trades and verify that such work is complete enough to allow this installation to properly begin. 3.2i INSTALLATION 'A.- Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. r r r i L SECTION 11480 ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Athletic equipment and accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02510 - Concrete Paving: Playing surface. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals under provisiond of Section 01300. I B. Submit manufacturer's technical product data, assembly and installation l instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Basketball System: 1. Pole: 6" diameter, galvanized steel with 36" extension arm. 2. Backboard: 1 -1/4" thick fiber glass, fan - shaped, with goal, net and necessary hardware. 3. 18" diameter by 5/8" thick regulation size with weatherproof nylon net. B. Sport Gear: Basektballs: Two synthetic leather regulation type as manufactured by Wilson or Spalding. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that concrete playing area is properly sized and is sloped for proper drainage. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Set pole plumb, and as shown on Drawings. Erect backboard and goal assembly level and plumb. END OF SECTION ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT 11480 - r r r r r r i I. I I T SECTION 12390 KITCHEN AND BATH CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prefabricated kitchen and bath cabinets. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Owner- Supplied Contractor Installed Items. B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Furring and blocking. C. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork: Main house cabinets and kitchen and bath cabinet tops. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A161.1 - Recommended Performance and Construction Standards for Kitchen and Vanity Cabinets. B. FS MMM -A -130 - Adhesive, Contact. C. NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. D. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. E. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. F. PS 51 - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. G. NKCA - National Kitchen Cabinet Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's product data completely describing materials and fabrication methods. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate cabinets in accordance with ANSI A161.1 and NKCA. B. Manufacturer shall be certified by NKCA. KITCHEN AND BATH CABINETS 12390 - 1 r i r r i i i i i t 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver cabinetwork to jobsite, packaged and properly protected from damage. B. Store in enclosed structure, properly heated and ventilated. Provide minimum 55 deg. F and maximum 50% relative humidity. 1.7 PROJECT /SITE CONDITIONS A. Make field measurements to assure proper fit. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Merillat Industries, Adrian, MI. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Aristokraft; Jasper, IN. 2. Crystal Cabinet Works, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Solid Hardwood: Plain sawn Red Oak. B. Particle Board: 45 -lb. density minimum. C. Softwood: Where concealed, selected by fabricator. 2.3 CABINETS A. Guest Room Cabinet Styles: 1. Kitchens: "Omni ". 2. Bathroom Vanities: "Meadow Oak ", 2.4 TOPS A. Refer to Section 06400 for tops. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cabinetwork in accordance with manufacturer's current standards and contract drawings. B. Assemble cabinetwork in millwork shop to maximum extent practicable and to permit passage through building openings. C. Provide cutouts for fixtures, inserts, appliances outlet boxes, and other fixtures and fittings where applicable. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site measurements. Seal cut edges. 12390 - 2 KITCHEN AND BATH CABINETS D. Frames, Stiles and Rails: 3/4" thick by width required for cabinet style, 1 -5/8" minimum, solid hardwood lumber with glued blind mortise and stub tenon type joinery or glued dowel joints. E. Doors (Omni): 5/8" particle board with melamine finish and hardwood edge trim. F. Drawers: 1. Fronts (Omni): 5/8" particle board with melamine finish and hardwood edge trim. 2. Sides and Back: Particle board manufacturer's standard thickness; dado sides into drawer fronts. Glue and pin joints. 3. Bottoms: 1/4" particle board with vinyl laminate finish; dado bottom into fdront. G. Shelves: 1/2" particle board with 2 mil. reverse printed vinyl laminate. H. Backs: 1/4" particle board with 2 mil. reverse printed vinyl laminate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that in -wall blocking has been properly installed 3.2 FABRICATION A. Secure individual units together, level, square and evenly aligned prior to setting in place. Do not install multi -unit cabinets as individual components. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Set cabinetwork in place level, square and rigidly secured. Conceal cabinetwork anchorage devices. B. Attach wall cabinets to wood supports using #10 round head screws and grommets at 24" o.c. horizontally and at 12" o.c. vertically, minimum. C. Refer to Section 06400 for installation of counter tops. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly B. Clean cabinetwork, counters, shelves, hardware fittings and fixtures. END OF SECTION KITCHEN AND BATH CABINETS 12390 - 3 SECTION 13160 •soLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. B. C. 1.2 A. B. C. D. 1.3 A. B. D. E. In- ground concrete (shotcrete) swimming pool and whirlpool (spa). Equipment, piping and accessories. Excavation, backfilling, compaction and grading. RELATED SECTIONS Section 02200 Section 03300 Division 15: and whirlpool Division 16: - Earthwork - Cast -in -Place Plumbing piping filter systems. Power supply to Concrete to pool equipment, suction headers of pool pool equipment. SUBMITTALS Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01300. Submit manufacturer's product data, specifications and printed lation instructions. instal- C. Submit shop drawings of pool layout, plumbing schematic for filtration system, reinforcing steel, markings, location of accessories and other pertinent details. When specifically requested, submit samples of colors of pool finish. samples of accessories. Submit Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01700. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Firm specializing in construction of swimming pools and whirlpools. 2. Shall have completed at least five installations of comparable size and complexity as shown for this project and have at least five years' experience doing business under same name in same city. B. Comply with local health department regulations and the National Sanitation Foundation. • POOLS 13160 - 1 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty in accordance with provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty Conditions: 1. Duration: One year. 2. Warrant that pool and spa structure will remain watertight and finish will not scale or chip. 1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Provide standard service contract for one year for swimming pool, spa and related equipment and components including related costs and in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 1. Winterization: Provide shut -down of systems, draining of watr lines and preparing equipment and components for winter season. 2. Start -Up: Provide spring start up of systems including necessary repairs and cycling of system to verify that equipment and components are in optimum condition. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Piping and Fittings: Pool and whirlpool header, same as main drain piping. Piping shall be PVC, Schedule 40. B. Gauges: Provide two standard dial pressure gauges with cocks 0 to 30 psi with each filter assembly. C. Provide rate -of -flow indicator. D. Provide 2" sight glass in filter waste lines straight through reading type with removable cover. E. Tile: 4" by 8" frostproof type; color as selected by Owner; provide depth markers fused into tile. F. Copings: 1. Swimming Pool: Tropictile nominal 12" bull nose coping; minimum, 5000 psi, white color; molded brick coping of same profile may be used. 2. Whirlpool: Tropictile nominal 6" bull nose coping; minimum, 5000 psi, white color; molded brick coping of same profile may be used. 13160 - 2 pomp 3. Provide radiused corners to conform to pool design. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Electric Control Panel: Provide wall- mounted type, UL listed, control motor, starters and control circuits. 2.3 SWIMMING POOL EQUIPMENT A. Sand Filter: Pac -Fab Trition Tr100 fiber glass 100 gpm capacity with media (four 10/40 silica sand and one 1/8" x 1/4" gravel/ with 2" multiport valve). B. Pump: 2 hp Hayward E -2 Flow pump, 230VAC and compatible with available service; where distance from pump to pool edge exceed 50 ft., size pump to achieve 25 gpm at each fitting. C. Chlorinator: Rainbow #300 -29 automatic type 2.4 SWIMMING POOL ACCESSORIES A. Extra hair and lint pump strainer basket B. Two American Products floating weir type surface skimmers. C. Six Hayard SP1419C 1" by 1 -1/2" eyeball type inlet fittings. D. Approved main drain housing with hydrostatic reliefd valve and anti - vortex grate. E. Light Fixtures: American Producdts 300 Watt, 12 volt, F. Light Nitdches: American #782104SS, stainless steel. G. Stainless steel handrails with anchors and escutcheons for steps. H. When required by Code, provide two rope anchors located at break point in accordance with Code and 3/4" nylon safety rope and rope hooks. I. Return line continuous loop, 3" PVC with 1 -1/2" through -wall. J. Skimmer lines separate with 2" PVC. K. Main drain separate with 3" PVC. L. Provide suction lines valves separately with bronze gate valves with packing glands. M. One three -tread stainless steel ladder, brass anchors with chrome- plated escutcheon covers. POOLS 13160 - 3 i N. Fill Spout: 1" chrome plated brass or stainless steel. 2.5 WHIRLPOOL EQUIPMENT A. Provide separate water treatment system of capacity to operate pool at a maximum 30 minute turnover; provide four hydro -air inlets and separate booster pump and piping for whirlpool action. B One Pac -Fab 24" Hirate sand filter with media and 1 -1/2" multiport valve. C. Recirculation Pump: One -hp Hayward E -Z Flow with integral hair and lint strainer; UL listed. D. One 2 -hp Hayward E -Z Flow pump with strainer for hydrotherapy jets. E. Flow meters. IM F. Chlorinator: Rainbow 300 -29 automatic type. G. Heater: Gas - fired, Teledyne Laars XE -250, 250,000 BTU complete with vent pack. Exhaust flue and fuel lines provided under Division 15. H. Four Jacuzzi 30 gpm hydrotherapy jets with two 1 -1/2" openings for air induction in pump room. 2 6 WHIRLPOOL ACCESSORIES A. Valves fittings and controls for operation. B. Skimmer: Hayward with SP -1075 low water shut -off valve. C. Main Drain: Same as swimming pool. D Light and niche, same as swimming pool. E. Transformer: Same as swimming pool. F. 12" by 12" main drain with grate for hydrotherapy pump suction. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. 8 ft. by 16 ft. telescopic anodized aluminum pole. B. Vacuum Head: Flex Vac, 1 -1/2" commercial head. C. Rainbow #92. 18" curved wall brush. D. Test kit for chlorine, pH, acid demand and total alkalinity. l E. 16 ft anodized aluminum pole with separate life saving shepherd hook. F. First aid kit. G. 24" life ring with rope. IL H. Skimmer net. 13160 - 4 'POOLS I. 100 -lbs. granular chlorine. J. 4 gallons of muriatic acid. K. 100 -lbs, soda ash briquettes. L. 25 -lbs. of 90% chlorine tablets. M. Stabilizer as necessary. N. Pool and Spa Cover: 1. Manufacturer: Loop -Loc Limited: Peerpark NY. 2. Cover Material: Grade A polypropylene mesh 3.8 oz. psy, capable of sustaining 551 psf loading at any point. 3. Springs: Stainless steel 2,500 lb. load capacity each. 4. Anchors: Brass, suitable for installation in drilled concrete. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXES A. Refer to Section 03300 for concret mix requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A, Verify that necessary pipe, fittings and valves to connect makeup water lines into suction headers of pool and whirlpool filter systems has been installed or necessary provisions been made. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Excavate to minimum depth and width to accommodate pools and equipment.. Backfill and compact in accordance with Section 02200. B. Install deck fittings, anchors and embedded items prior to placing concrete. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF POOLS A. Place concrete and reinforcement in accordance with ACI 506R and Section 03300. B. Dampen surfaces to receive shotcrete. Place wet -mix shotcret in layers or in single thickness depending upon position of the work; begin placement at bottom and continue upward. POOLS 13160 - 5 r I r i i r L L i i i C. Shotcrete shall flow from nozzle in a uniform uninterrupted manner; dense and nonsagging. When flow becomes inconsistent direct nozzle away from work until proper flow is reestablished, D. Hold nozzle 18" to 72" from receiving surface, approximately perpendicular but never more than 45 deg.; rotate steadily in a series of circular or oval patterns. E. Encase steel in shotcrete to assure proper bonding. 3 4 APPLYING POOL FINISH A. Apply 1/4" to 3/8" finish coat consisting of white cement and size 20 or finer marble dust (pool aggregate). Water float to uniform plane and trowel into truing coat to achieve a smooth dense, impervious surface. B. Do not stain finish coat. C. When application of the final plaster coat is delayed fill pool with water immediately and keep filled until conditions will permit application of the finish coat. D. Do not apply finish coat during rain or high wind. Protect newly placed finish during inclement weather. E. Install one row of ceramic tile directly below coping at water line. F. Install edge coping even and uniform with maximum 1/4" joints. 3.5 POOL FILLING A. After finish coat has sufficiently set, fill pool gradually with water, filling continuously to eliminate dirt rings. During hot weather, keep pool walls continuously wet while filling pool. 3.6 EQUIPMENT INSTLLATION A. Install equipment and components in accordance with manufacturter's printed instructions. B. Install horizontal drain lines with uniform fall in direction of flow of not less than 1" in 10'. Slope recirculating lines to pool fittings in opposite direction to flow to provide venting through fittings. C. Support underground piping on firm, even bearing, except lines surrounding pool basin which shall be installed in gang hangers suspended from J -bars driven into surrounding earth and J -end hooked around side wall reinforcement. 13160 - 6 POOLS 3.7 ADJUSTMENT A. Operate equipment through at least five complete cycles, verifying that each item is properly installed and properly operating. B. Make required adjustments to achieve optimum operation. 3.8 INITIAL WATER BALANCE A. Upon completion of installation, chlorinate, acidulate and properly balance pH content of water. 3..9 INSTRUCTIONS A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel regarding contents of operation and maintenance manual required in accorddance with Section 01700. • END OF SECTION 1.4 WARRANTY & SERVICE MAINTENANCE A. WARRANTY: The Elevator Contractor shall warrant the equipment installed by him under these specifications against defects in materials and workmanship and will correct any defects not due to ordinary wear or tear or improper use or care which may develop within one year from the date each elevator is completed and placed in operation. This warranty is not intended to supplant normal maintenance service and shall not be construed to mean that the Elevator Contractor will provide free service for periodic examination, lubrication, or adjustment due to normal use, beyond that included in the specifictions; nor will the Elevator Contractor correct, without charge, breakage, maladjustments or other trouble arising from abuse, misuse, improper or unbalanced power supply characteristics, improper or inadequate maintenance, or any other causes beyond his control. If there is more than one unit in this specification, this section shall apply separately to each unit as completed and placed in operation. B. MAINTENANCE SERVICE: The Elevator Contractor shall furnish maintenance and call -back service for a period of 12 months on each elevator after it is completed and place in operation. This service shall consist of examinations of the equipment, adjustments, lubrication, cleaning, supplies and parts to keep the equipment in proper operation, execute such adjustments, parts or repairs made necessary by abuse, misuse or any other causes beyond the control of the Elevator Contractor. All work will be done by trained employees of the Elevator Contractor during regular working hours of the trade. 1.5 PRODUCT A. ELEVATOR IS TO MEET THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA 1. TYPE: Passenger, with Class A loading capacity. 2. CAPACITY: 2500 pounds. 3 SPEED- 100 FPM. 4. OPERATION: DMC -IA Automatic Push Button. 5. CONTROL: "Oildraulic" controller. 6. MICROPROCESSOR: All major functions are to be microprocessor con- trolled. Call allocation, logic functions, door control, speed sensing and position are computer controlled. 7 NET TRAVEL: Floor to floor 17' -11 1/2 ". 8. STOPS AND OPENINGS: 3 stops 3 openings in line. 9 CLEAR CAR INSIDE: 6' -8" wide x 4' -3" deep 10. HOISTWAY DOORS & FRAMES: 3' -6" wide x 7' - high. Single speed, side opening baked enamel finish doors & frames with extruded aluminum single grooved sills. 11. DOOR OPERATOR: Automatic; D.C. Powered microprocessor controlled. 12. SIGNALS: Manufacturer's standard illuminated signal fixtures with stainless steel face #04 satin finish. Position indicator in car. 14240 - 2 HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 13. STANDARD FEATURES: Dover DLP -1 cab, baked enamel car door and "Disclight" ceiling and framing, telephone compartment (instrument by others), car position indicator, emergency light and alarm bell, Manufacturer's Standard carpet, "Oildraulic" silencer, oil line shutoff valve, NEMA 1 (fully enclosed) controller cabinet. Manufac- turer's Standard submerged power unit with oil viscosity control. Emergency Service in accordance with ANSI /ASME A17.1. 14. PROVISIONS FOR HANDICAPPED: Car to have operating stations telepone compartment and handrail as recommended by UFAS for use by the physically handicapped 15. AUTOMATIC GUIDE RAIL LUBRICATORS: Lubricators shall be provided and mounted on top of upper guide shoes. Wool felt wiper shall apply an even, uniform flow of oil which shall thoroughly lubricate faces of guide rail from a leakproof oil reservoir. 16. ELECTRIC SERVICE: Power supply: 208 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hertz, 17. NATIONAL CODE COMPLIANCE: Elevators shall include all features required by the Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS). 18. APPROVED SUPPLIER: Dover Elevator Model # Marquis 25. 2.1 HOLE -JACK UNIT - By Elevator Supplier If unusual drilling conditions are encountered (i.e. sand water bolders building members, etc. The jack hole drilling will go to a time and materials basis with a 15% mark -up on labor and material. 3.1 WORK NOT INCLUDED This proposal does not include the following work and is conditioned on the proper performance of such work bythe General Contractor or other Subcon- tractors. 1. A legal hoistway, properly framed and enclosed and including a pit of proper depth provided with ladder, sump pump, lights access doors and waterproofing, as required. Legal machine room, adequate for the elevator equpment, including floors, trap doors, gratings, foun- dations, lighting, ventilation and heat to maintain the room at an ambient temperature of 50 deg. F minimum to 100 deg. F maximum. 2. Adequate supports for guide rail brackets, divider beams at suitable points shall be provided for guide rail bracket supports. 3. Cutting of walls floors, etc. and removal of such obstructions as may be necessary for proper installation of the elevator. Setting of anchors and sleeves. Pockets or blockouts for signal fixtures. 4. All sill supports, including steel angles where required and sill recesses and the grouting of door sills. Finish walls after hoistway frames are installed. 5. Provide and maintain temporary enclosures or other protection from open hoistways during the time the elevator is being installed. 6. Proper trenching and backfilling for any underground piping or conduit. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 3 7. A means to automatically disconnect the main power line supply to the elevator prior to the application of water in the elevator machine room will be furnished by the electrical contractor, This means shall not be self- resetting. 8. Proper location of jack hole from building lines and adequate ingress and egress for mobile well drilling equipment, after final excavatin and previous to the pouring of footings or foundation. 9. Removal of all dirt and debris accumulated during excavation of the jack hole to be by the General Contractor. 10. Suitable connections from the power mains to each controller or motor generator set starter, signal equipment feeders as required, including necessary circuit breakers and fused mainline disconnect switches 11. Wiring to controller for car lighting and ventilation. Electric power without charge for construction testing and adjusting of the same characteristics as the permanent supply. 12. Heat and smoke sensing devices at elevator lobbies on each floor with electrical conductors terminating at a properly market panel in the elevator machine room. 13. Wiring from elevator hoistway to outside alarm bell as required by the Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators (ANSI /ASME A17 1). 14. Emergency power supply with automatic time delay transfer switch and auxiliary contacts with wiring to the elevator controller. 15. Any governmentally required safety provisions not directly involved in the elevator installation. 16. All painting, except as otherwise specified. 17. Temporary elevator service prior to completion and acceptance of complete installation. 18. Furnishing, installing and maintaining the required fire rating of elevator hoistway walls, including the penetration of fire wall by elevator fixture boxes, is not the responsibility of the elevator contractor. END OF SECTION 14240 - 4 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS SECTION 14240 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVAZORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Passenger cab including cab doors B. Hoistway guide rails and brackets cylinder and plunger C Drilled hole and casing for cylinder. including concrete fill D. Pit buffers. E. Motors, pumps, piping. controls and wiring up to main switch F. Cathodic protection of cylinder where soil conditions necessitate 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 0 - 3300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Shaft and pit construction B. Section 04200 - Unit masonry: Shaft wall construction C Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Pit ladders and sill angles. D. Division 15 - Pit drainage. E. Division 16 - Electrical power to machine room including main switch and breaker; telephone connections. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat - Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate Sheet and Strip B. ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process Structural Quality C. ASTM A526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process Commercial Quality D. ASTM B209 - Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate E ASTM B221 Aluminum•Alloy Extruded Bars Rods Shapes Tubes F. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code G NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates H. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood I UFAS Uniform Federal Accessories Standards HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14240